2316 South 24th Street

Omaha, NE 68108
800-550-1237, Watts
402-733-2800, Main
402-344-7469, Fax
www.associatedfire.net

CO2 Fire Suppression & Alarm System Operation

& Maintenance Manual

Project: 0812-132-M000J

Location: Argentina

Date: 12/03/09

Fire Protection Supplier: Associated Fire Protection

2316 South 24th Street
Omaha, NE, 68108

Table of Contents:
¾ FG8800 Fire & Gas Control System Manual (English and Russian Versions)

¾ Analog Fire Suppression System Device “Cut Sheets”

¾ LaMarche Power Supply System Manual

¾ Alarm & Detection Device “Cut Sheets”

¾ Alarm & Detection Device GOST Certifications

¾ Gas Sensor Equipment System Manual

¾ HPCO2 System Manual, MSDS, Safety Manual and Calculations

¾ HPCO2 GOST Certification

¾ Miscellaneous Equipment “Cut Sheets”

¾ Fire System Drawings

The information contained herein is privileged and confidential information and is intended only for the use of the addressee’s company. Any
dissemination, distribution, or copying of this material to others, in whole or in part, is strictly prohibited without the written permission of the
President of Associated Fire Protection.
Homepage Previous Document
 FG8800 GAS/FIRE PRODUCT MANUAL

! " !#
#"$ " %&
%& "$ "#
"
" '() "
*
! #

! " # # $ %&' ( ) *
+ , # &- . * . * /( ' - . * . *
" &0 - ( 11&) %&2 3 &4 ( 1- /# 5 ( 11&) %&2 2 # 4
Publication REV A

Homepage Previous Document

 ALLESTEC FG8800 INDUSTRIAL
GAS / FIRE CONTROL PANEL
AUTOMATIC SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
RELEASE UPDATE VERSION 7/1/06
OPERATIONS MANUAL PART NUMBER FG8800-5140A

® is a registered trade name and mark to Allestec Corporation

© 2006 ALLESTEC CORPORATION

The control panel as well as the In addition to the FM approval, each node
nodes carry the FM approval. carries the following ATEX approval.

THE CONTROL PANEL UTILITY MENU CODE VERSION

MUST MATCH THIS OPERATIONS MANUAL .
FOR CURRENT CODE UPDATES REFER TO ALLESTEC WEB SITE.

IMPORTANT: REFER TO SECTION 30 OF THIS MANUAL

FOR CODE INFORMATION.
CURRENT PRODUCTS FIRMWARE VERSION RELEASE DATE

THIS MANUAL VERSION A

ONGUARD APPLICATION PROGRAM 2.67 1/04/06

INPUT NODE FG8800-1060 2.00 3/15/05

4-20MA NODE FG8800-1700 2.01 8/04/05

SOM NODE FG8800-1705 2.00 3/15/05

RELAY NODE FG8800-1725 2.00 3/15/05

MASTER CONTROLLER (MC) 2.01 9/10/05

Department __________________________________________

Name ______________________________________________

Phone Number _______________________________________

Cell Number _________________________________________

Date _______________________________________________

Homepage Previous Document

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION …………………………………………………..………...…………………… 8
1.1 UNDERSTAND AND READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY..................................................... 8
1.2 CONTROL PANEL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................ 8
1.3 SYSTEM ARCHITICTURE ........................................................................................................ 8
1.4 REQUIRED PROGRAMMING TOOLS....................................................................................... 8
1.5 INFORMATION ACCESSIBILITY ............................................................................................... 8

2. SYSTEM HARDWARE and INSTALLATION ............................................................. 11

2.1 INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS .............................................................................................. 11
2.2 MOUNTING THE CONTROL PANEL......................................................................................... 11
2.3 PROPER WIRING TECHNIQUE ................................................................................................ 11
2.4 POWER SUPPLY AND CONNECTIONS .................................................................................. 12
2.5 UTILIZING MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY (PARALLEL CONNECTION) .................... 13
2.6 SOURCING EXTERNAL POWER TO THE SUPERVISORY OUTPUT MODULE (SOM) ....... 13
2.7 BUS STYLE RESTRICTIONS ................................................................................................... 13
2.8 BUS SPEED AND SYSTEM INTEGRITY................................................................................... 13
2.9 MOUNTING THE ADDRESSABLE NODES…... ........................................................................ 13
2.10 BUS POLLING TECHNIQUE.................................................................................................... 14
2.11 DETERMINE CLASS A OR B WIRING .................................................................................... 14
2.12 FIELD BUS WIRING ................................................................................................................. 14
2.13 BUS COMMUNICATIONS AND WIRE SPECIFICATION ........................................................ 14
2.14 ADDITIONAL WIRE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 14
2.15 END OF LINE (ELR) SUPERVISING RESISTORS (Supplied) ................................................ 15
2.16 CONNECTING NODES TO APPLIANCES .............................................................................. 15
2.17 EARTH GROUND and CHASSIS ............................................................................................. 15

3. NODE SELECTION ............................................................................................................. 28

3.1 DETERMINE WHICH NODE TO UTILIZE ................................................................................. 28
3.2 INPUT NODE .............................................................................................................................. 28
3.3 4-20mA NODE ............................................................................................................................ 28
3.4 SUPERVISED OUTPUT MODULE (SOM) ................................................................................. 28
3.5 RELAY NODE ............................................................................................................................ 28
3.6 STATUS LED’S........................................................................................................................... 29

4. HARDWARE INTERFACE AND PORTS ..................................................................... 30

4.1 UTILIZING THE TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY ............................................................................ 30
4.2 CONNECTING PERIPHEARLS TO THE CONTROL PANEL.................................................... 30
4.3 PRINTER ................................................................................................................................... 30
4.4 MODBUS PORT ......................................................................................................................... 30
4.5 TCP/IP INTERFACE PORT ........................................................................................................ 30
4.6 VGA MONITOR PORT................................................................................................................ 30
4.7 USB PORTS ............................................................................................................................... 30

5. SYSTEM STARTUP .............................................................................................................. 33

5.1 CHECKLIST PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 33
5.2 SYSTEM INITIALIZING or RESTARTING .................................................................................. 33
5.3 ENABLING PASSWORDS ......................................................................................................... 34
5.4 DISPLAY SCREEN BRIGHTNESS ............................................................................................ 34
5.5 SELECTING BUS LOOP CONFIGURATION............................................................................. 34
5.6 START OF LOOP Class B......................................................................................................... 34
5.7 LOOP BACK Class A ................................................................................................................. 34
5.8 UNDERSTANDING FIELD NODE ID ADDRESSES .................................................................. 35
5.9 NODE ADDRESS SEQUENCE .................................................................................................. 35
5.10 PROCURING FIELD NODE ID ADDRESSES ON A NEW INSTALLATION ........................... 35
5.11 ADDITIONAL INPUT NODE INFORMATION........................................................................... 36
5.12 NODE ID FORMAT ................................................................................................................... 37
5.13 NODE DEFAULT ADDRESS.................................................................................................... 37

Homepage Previous Document

 5.14 THE ADVANCED SECTION - REFER TO SECTION 25.1 ...................................................... 37
5.15 OTHER NODE COMMON FUNCTIONS .................................................................................. 37

6. CONFIGURATION ARCHITECTURE ............................................................................ 39

6.1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................... 39
6.2 THE SYSTEM DISK.................................................................................................................... 39
6.3 THE ONGUARDSETUP.DAT FILE............................................................................................. 39
6.4 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 39
6.5 THE CONFIGURATION FOLDER .............................................................................................. 40
6.6 MANAGING CONFIGURATIONS Refer to Section 24............................................................... 40
6.7 SAVE ALARM HISTORY REPORT Refer to Section 23.2 ......................................................... 40
6.8 IMPORTANT- WHAT ACTIONS DISABLES THE SYSTEM FROM ALARMING..................... 40

7. BACKUP SYSTEM FILES ................................................................................................ 41

7.1 IMPORTANT ............................................................................................................................... 41
7.2 WHEN TO SAVE THE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 41
7.3 HOW TO SAVE AND BACKUP SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 41

8. LOADING NODE DATA TO PREPARE CONFIGURATIONS ............................... 42

8.1 GENERAL TEXT FIELD EDITING NOTES ................................................................................ 42
8.2 NODE COMMON ATTRIBUTES ................................................................................................ 42
8.3 PLANNING NODE SELECTION FOR ALARM ACTIONS.......................................................... 42

9. INPUT NODE PREPARATION ....................................................................................... 43

9.1 ADD/EDIT DETAILS .................................................................................................................. 43
9.2 ICON SELECTION ..................................................................................................................... 44
9.3 MEMO FIELDS ........................................................................................................................... 44
9.4 SETTINGS SELECTION............................................................................................................. 45
9.5 RESETTING NODE LED’s ......................................................................................................... 45
9.6 SELECTING DE-BOUNCE ......................................................................................................... 45

10. 4-20mA NODE PREPARATION .................................................................................. 46

10.1 ADD/EDIT DETAILS ................................................................................................................ 46
10.2 SETTINGS SELECTION........................................................................................................... 46
10.3 DEBOUNCE TIME .................................................................................................................... 46
10.4 ENTER SET POINTS ............................................................................................................... 46
10.5 CALIBRATION .......................................................................................................................... 47
10.6 RESET ...................................................................................................................................... 47
10.7 ALTERNATE CALIBRATION METHOD ................................................................................... 48
10.8 GAS CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................... 48
10.9 PRINT NODE INFORMATION.................................................................................................. 48

11. SUPERVISED OUTPUT (SOM) PREPARATION ................................................... 49

11.1 ADD/EDIT DETAILS ................................................................................................................. 49
11.2 SETTINGS SELECTON ........................................................................................................... 49
11.3 ENABLED ................................................................................................................................. 49
11.4 SHORT MONITORING ............................................................................................................. 49
11.5 DEBOUNCE.............................................................................................................................. 49
11.6 RESETING NODE LED’s.......................................................................................................... 49
11.7 TESTINGTHE SOM FOR EXTINGUISHING ............................................................................ 49

12. RELAY NODE PREPARATION ....................................................................................... 50

12.1 ADD/EDIT DETAILS ................................................................................................................. 50
12.2 SETTINGS SELECTON............................................................................................................ 50
12.3 RESET NODE LED’s ................................................................................................................ 50
12.4 PRINT NODE INFORMATION ................................................................................................. 50

Homepage Previous Document

 13. DIRECT CONNECTION RELEASE Input node initializing .............................. 51
13.1 SELECTING AN INPUT NODE TO TRIP AN SOM OR RELAY NODE .................................... 51
13.2 SELECT INPUT NODE CHANNEL TO TRIP OUTPUT NODES ............................................. 51
13.3 RESULTANT............................................................................................................................. 52
13.4 VOTING CHANNELS WITHIN THE INPUT NODES................................................................ 52
13.5 SAVE THE CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................. 53
13.6 TESTING THE CONFIGURATION TO ALARM ON A DIRECT CONNECTION RELEASE ... 53
13.7 SYSTEM FIRE ALARM MENU ................................................................................................. 53
13.8 FIRE ALARM MENU ................................................................................................................. 53
13.9 DETAILS MENU........................................................................................................................ 54
13.10 VOTING SEQUENCING ......................................................................................................... 54
13.11 SYSTEM FAULT ALARM MENU............................................................................................ 55
13.12 FAULT ALARM MENU............................................................................................................ 55

14. DIRECT CONNECTION W/DELAY RELEASE Input node initializing .......... 56

14.1 SELECTING AN INPUT NODE TO TRIP AN SOM OR RELAY NODE ................................... 56
14.2 ENTER TIME DELAY ............................................................................................................... 56
14.3 VOTING .................................................................................................................................... 56
14.4 ABORT OPTION ....................................................................................................................... 56
14.5 RESULTANT............................................................................................................................. 56
14.6 VOTING SEQUENCING ........................................................................................................... 57
14.7 MORE CONFIGURATIONS...................................................................................................... 57

15. DIRECT CONFIGURATION RELEASE 4-20mA node initializing .................. 58

15.1 SELECTING A 4-20mA NODE FOR TRIPPING AN SOM OR RELAY NODE ....................... 58
15.2 SELECT A GAS CHANNEL...................................................................................................... 58
15.3 SELECT A SET POINT THRESHOLD ..................................................................................... 58
15.4 RESULTANT............................................................................................................................. 59
15.5 TESTING THE GAS NODE CONFIGURATION FOR AN ALARM........................................... 59
15.6 VIEW THE ALARM ................................................................................................................... 60
15.7 DETAILS DATA......................................................................................................................... 60
15.8 FAULT ANNUNCIATION .......................................................................................................... 60
15.9 VOTING BETWEEN GAS CHANNELS ON THE SAME NODE............................................... 60

16. DUAL MODE RELEASE Input node initializing .................................................... 61

16.1 SELECTING AN INPUT NODE TO TRIP AN SOM OR RELAY NODE ................................... 61
16.2 CAUSE AND EFFECT RESULTS ............................................................................................ 61
16.3 SELECT DEVICE INPUTS ....................................................................................................... 62
16.4 SELECT PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT .................................................................................... 62
16.5 SELECT TIME DELAY.............................................................................................................. 62
16.6 SELECT DEVICE OUTPUTS ................................................................................................... 62
16.7 SELECT 2nd SOLENOID ......................................................................................................... 63
16.8 EXCEPTION BOXES ................................................................................................................ 63
16.9 SAVE THE CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................. 63
16.10 TESTING THE DUAL MODE RELEASE CONFIGURATION FOR AN ALARM .................... 63
16.11 FIRE ALARM MENU ITEMS................................................................................................... 63
16.12 PRESSURE SWITCH ACTIVATION ..................................................................................... 64
16.13 VOTING SEQUENCING ......................................................................................................... 64
16.14 LOCATING OTHER NODE CHANNELS IN THE SELECTED OUTPUT SCREEN .............. 64

17. WATER MIST (CYCLE) RELEASE .............................................................................. 66

17.1 APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................................................ 66
17.2 OPERATION ............................................................................................................................. 66
17.3 PRE-DISCHARGE DELAY ....................................................................................................... 66
17.4 MIST ON TIME.......................................................................................................................... 66
17.5 MIST OFF TIME........................................................................................................................ 66
17.6 PAUSE INTERVAL and CYCLE COUNT ................................................................................. 66
17.7 SELECT DEVICE INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 67
17.8 SELECT MIST SOLENOID ...................................................................................................... 67

Homepage Previous Document

 17.9 SELECT OTHER NODE CHANNELS ...................................................................................... 68
17.10 RESET ALLOWED.................................................................................................................. 68
17.11 VOTING SEQUENCING ......................................................................................................... 68
17.12 SAVING THE CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................... 68
17.13 TESTING THE CYCLE MIST RELEASE CONFIGURATION FOR AN ALARM .................... 68
17.14 RESET THE ALARM............................................................................................................... 69

18. DEDICATED INPUT APPLIANCE RESET .................................................... 70

18.1 CREATE THE DEDICATED RESET ........................................................................................ 70
18.2 TEST THE DEDICATED RESET.............................................................................................. 71
18.3 RESETTING THE STROBE (EXAMPLE) ................................................................................. 71
18.4 CONNECTING A SWITCH TO THE INPUT NODE.................................................................. 72
18.5 FAULT ALARM ......................................................................................................................... 72

19. SILENCING AN AUDIBLE DEVICE AT THE CONTROL PANEL ..................... 73

19.1 RESULTANT - TESTING THE INPUT NODE CONFIGURATION FOR AN ALARM............... 73

20. CONFIGURING ALARMS FOR HISTORY RECORDING .................................... 75

20.1 CREATING A DIRECT CONFIGURATION WITH THE INPUT NODE .................................... 75
20.2 CREATING A DIRECT CONFIGURATION WITH THE 4-20mA NODE................................... 75

21. TESTING ALARM CONFIGURATIONS........................................................................ 76

21.1 PRIOR TO TESTING CONFIGURATIONS .............................................................................. 76
21.2 TESTING CONFIGURATIONS................................................................................................. 76
21.3 DISABLING THE SYSTEM FROM AGENT RELEASING ........................................................ 76
21.4 ROUTINE TESTING ................................................................................................................. 76
21.5 ALARMS WHILE THE SYSTEM IS DISABLED ....................................................................... 76

22. MULTIPLE ALARMS ............................................................................................. 77

22.1 SYSTEM ALARM MENU .......................................................................................................... 77
22.2 SELECTING A SPECIFIC ALARM ........................................................................................... 77
22.3 SELECTING THE DETAILS BUTTON WITH MULTIPLE ALARMS......................................... 77
22.4 HISTORY BUFFER .................................................................................................................. 77

23. ALARM SEQUENCING, HISTORY and REPORTS ................................................ 78

23.1 ALARM SEQUENCING ............................................................................................................ 78
23.2 SAVE TO PRINT OPTIONS ..................................................................................................... 78
23.3 ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER.......................................................................................... 78
23.4 REPORT FILE MANAGER SIZE .............................................................................................. 78
23.5 PRINTING HISTORY FILES..................................................................................................... 79
23.6 QUICK SELECT ALARM HISTORY ......................................................................................... 79
23.7 CLEAR ALL ALARM HISTORY DATA...................................................................................... 79

24. MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS ....................................................................................... 80

24.1 LOAD A CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................... 80
24.2 UNLOAD A CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................... 80
24.3 PROCEDURE TO ONLOAD A CONFIGURATION .................................................................. 80
24.4 EDIT A CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................... 82
24.5 REMOVE A CONFIGURATION................................................................................................ 82
24.6 ALARMS WHILE IN MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS................................................................ 82

25. ADDING, REMOVING, RESETTING and DETECTING NODES ........................ 83

25.1 ADVANCE MENU ..................................................................................................................... 83
25.2 NODE DETECTION DIAGNOSTIC .......................................................................................... 83
25.3 NODE SETTINGS .................................................................................................................... 83
25.4 ADDING ONE NODE AT A TIME ............................................................................................. 83
25.5 ADDING MORE THAN ONE NODE TO THE SYSTEM ........................................................... 84
25.6 CHANGE A NODE ADDRESS ................................................................................................. 84

Homepage Previous Document

 25.7 RESETTING ALL NODE ADDRESSES WHILE CONNECTED TO THE BUS ........................ 84
25.8 RESETTING SELECTIVE NODE ADDRESSES WHILE CONNECTED TO THE BUS........... 84
25.9 RESETTING A NODE ADDRESS THAT IS REMOVED FROM THE BUS.............................. 84
25.10 REMOVING A NODE.............................................................................................................. 85

26. REDEFINING A SYSTEM TO START OVER ............................................................ 86

26.1 PROPERLY SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM ................................................................................ 86

27. ACCESSING THE UTILITY MENU................................................................................ 87

27.1 MENU DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................. 87
1. SAVE NODE REPORT .................................................................................................................. 87
2. SAVE CONFIGURATION REPORT .............................................................................................. 87
3. SAVE FIRE ALARM ONLY REPORT ............................................................................................ 87
4. SAVE GAS ALARM ONLY REPORT ............................................................................................ 87
5. SAVE WARING ALARM ONLY REPORT ..................................................................................... 87
6. SAVE FAULT ONLY REPORT ..................................................................................................... 87
7. SAVE ALL ALARM HISTORY REPORTS ..................................................................................... 87
8. ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER............................................................................................... 87
9. CLEAR ALL ALARM HISTORY DATA........................................................................................... 88
10. SYNCHRONIZE ALL NODE LED’S............................................................................................. 88
11. NODE MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................ 88
12. SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS..................................................................................................... 88
13. MANAGEME CONFIGURATIONAS ............................................................................................ 88
14. MODBUS SETUP ........................................................................................................................ 88
15. DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................................................ 88
16. BACKUP THE SYSTEM DATABASE .......................................................................................... 88
17. USE ONGUARD AS THE SYSTEM SHELL ................................................................................ 88

28. MODBUS Provided by Allestec on a separate document register

29. SYSTEM FAULTS ............................................................................................................... 89

29.1 COMMUNICATION FAILURE................................................................................................... 89
29.2 COMMUNICATION FAULTS ON A TERMINATED BUS ......................................................... 89
29.3 COMMUNICATON FAULTS ON A RETURN BUS................................................................... 90
29.4 IMPROPER BUS SELECTION ................................................................................................. 90
29.5 INPUT NODE FAULTS ............................................................................................................. 90
29.6 SUPERVISORY MODULE FAULTS (SOM) ............................................................................. 90
29.7 4-20mA GAS NODE FAULTS................................................................................................... 91
29.8 RELAY NODE ........................................................................................................................... 91
29.9 EARTH GROUND FAULT ........................................................................................................ 91
29.10 ADMINISTER ASSERTED FAULTS....................................................................................... 91
29.11 CONFIGURATION FAULT ..................................................................................................... 91
29.12 NODE MANAGEMENT FAULT ............................................................................................. 91
29.13 MANAGE CONFIGURATION FAULT..................................................................................... 91
29.14 UNLOAD ALL CONFIGURATIONS ........................................................................................ 91

30. SOFTWARE and FIRMWARE UPDATES ................................................................. 92

30.1 SOFTWARE MIGRATION ........................................................................................................ 92
30.2 SYSTEM CONTROL VERSION (ONGUARD.EXE) ................................................................ 92
30.3 NODE FIRMWARE .................................................................................................................. 92

31. MAINTENANCE and TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ 93

32. PART NUMBERS and ACCESSORIES ..................................................................... 93
33. SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................ 95
34. WARRANTY and RETURN POLICY ........................................................................... 96

Homepage Previous Document

 1. INTRODUCTION
The Allestec ONGUARD FG8800 gas/fire panel provides continuous surveillance of system compon-
ents by interrogating intelligent devices connected to the panel through an addressable configuration.
The powerful configuration manager emulates cause and effect logic processes enabling simple
programming techniques of all system components. The system is designed to allow personnel familiar
with conventional control panels to fully develop and utilize the features of the FG8800 without extensive
training or special schooling. The system uses an “open concept” of simple I/O building scripts for each
action of mapping a node. After several small scripts have been built, they can be mapped to other
scripts or overlaid on open scripts allowing a multifunction logical connection.

1.1 UNDERSTAND AND READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY

The administrator as well as any person that corresponds with the operation of this control panel
must read and understand completely the entire operations manual. It is essential that this
manual is READ COMPLETELY prior to implementing the examples contained herein. The
chapter sections listed in the table of contents are in a methodical order. It is recommend the
responsible administrator installing and operating the control panel start with this section and
subsequently proceed through each and every chapter. It is imperative that each configuration is
tested as described in section 21 prior to commissioning the system.

1.2 CONTROL PANEL DESCRIPTION

The panel consists of a proprietary internal computer interfaced to a master control module. The master
control module is internal to the control panel and is responsible for communicating between the
computer and the field nodes as well as local system output relays. The system control panel consists of
an EIA 19” rack, 3U in height, that measures 5.22” (132.5mm) high. The control panel’s functions are
controlled through a high quality color TFT touch screen and require no panel switches. All alarm
controls are accomplished through the touch screen display. Remote alarm reset can be implemented
through the addressable input nodes. The design criteria consist of hardware, software and firmware at
all levels of integrity. Although primarily designed for industrial installations, the FG8800 can be utilized
in commercial applications as well. A system consists of the FG8800 panel with the addition of any of
the four field modules. Software is included with the panel and can be updated as necessary. Refer to
drawing 1 for a complete overview and 2 to view an isometric view of the control panel.

1.3 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

[] The ONGUARD FG8800 control panel serves as the central processor for the entire system. The
control panel connects to all field addressable nodes via a 4-wire bus (2 for power, and 2 for
communication) that is continuously monitoring the input detectors and output appliance devices.
[] The nodes are scanned from the control panel for alarms, faults, warnings and other types of activity.
A choice to monitor a class A or B bus configuration, is selectable.
[] All remote monitoring protocol devices such as Modbus and TCP/IP internet are connected directly to
the control panel as well as the configuration video monitor.
[] System 24VDC power is supplied directly to the control panel rear terminal strip. Output nodes that
power appliances can require their separate 24VDC input.
[] The control panel is very simple to setup. Just determine the amount of devices to connect to the input
and output nodes. Each node accommodates 4 inputs or outputs and can be utilized in many
configurations.

1.4 REQUIRED PROGRAMMING TOOLS

To program the control panel, a truly Windows compliant USB PC keyboard, USB mouse and a VGA
video monitor connect to the front control panel. The external VGA monitor is utilized only during the
configuration mapping of the nodes since this process requires a large screen. Once the control panel
has been configured and programmed, the data can be saved to a USB bus drive or local flash memory
and the connected peripherals can then be removed.

1.5 INFORMATION ACCESSIBILITY

All current events, configuration names, history information and other alarm events are easily accessible
from queuing the panel display. Most of this information may be viewed instantly on the screen or can be
printed on demand. Other protocol configurations are available through the standard Modbus output as
well as other methods such as the optional TCP/IP interface.

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 1
9

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 2

10

Homepage Previous Document

 2. SYSTEM HARDWARE INSTALLATION

2.1 INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS

Installation designers should design the location of all field devices as well as their input detectors and
output appliances prior to installing the system. A complete point-to-point wire diagram should be
available prior to programming to simplify procedurally how the system will come together. A node is the
addressable module that connects to the system bus to monitor inputs and activate appliances. The
word node is used interchangeably with module. Cause and effect charts can also assist in the ability to
convey proper configuration techniques. Understand how the field nodes are connected and how their
multi-channel inputs as well as outputs can be utilized to build the most efficient system.

This control panel is designed to indicate an alarm condition when the initiating devices connected to it
detect change in conditions. These conditions may or may not represent a life-threatening condition.
Also, evacuation of a building or area unnecessarily may subject individuals to an unnecessary hazard.
Therefore, it is most important that the building owner, manager or representative promulgate, distribute,
and/or post instructions describing steps to be taken when the gas/fire alarm control panel signals an
alarm condition. These instructions should be developed in cooperation and conformance with
representatives of the local authority having jurisdiction.

Along with the use of this instruction manual, the appropriate following standards and the manufacture’s
instructions for initiating and notification devices should be utilized to install and maintain a functioning
fire alarm signaling system:

• NFPA 70 Nations Electrical Code

• NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
• NFPA 101 Life Safety

For other standards that may apply contact the local authority having jurisdiction.

WIRING SHALL BE PER PLAN WITH RESPECT TO CONDUCTOR SIZE, TYPE AND QUANTITY.
CONDUCTORS SHAL BE PERMANENTLY MARKED FOR FUTURE IDENTIFICATION. PERMANENT
WIRE MARKERS SHALL BE USED TO IDENTIFY THE TERMINATIONS OF ALL CONDUCTORS
WITHIN THE FACP, PULL BOXES AND OTHER PANELS (REF. NEC 760.10).

INSTALL EQUIPMENT AND CABLING IN A ORGANIZED AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER WHILE

MAINTAINING PROPER SUPPORT. CABLES THAT ARE EXPOSED ON THE SURFACE OF
CEILINGS AND SIDEWALLS MUST BE SUPPORTED BY THE STRUCTURE COMPONENTS OF A
BUILDING IN A MANNER THAT PREVENTS DAMAGE FROM NORMAL USE. CABLES CAN BE
SECURED TO STRUCTAL COMPONENTS BY STRAPS, STAPLES, HANGERS OR SIMILAR
FITTINGS DESIGNED AND INSTALLED SO AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE CABLE (REF. NEC 760.6,
UN760-08 760-0601.CDR).

2.2 MOUNTING THE CONTROL PANEL

Refer to drawing 3 to identify and mount the control panel in a standard EIA 19” high rack. Panel
mounting is also an option for mounting on a flat surface. First, open the control panel door with the key
provided. Utilize the supplied mounting hardware to mount the control panel. Install the panel in an
environment that is free of airborne particles, rain and condensation. The panel is designed to be
located in the interior of a building within a NEMA 1 classification.

2.3 PROPER WIRING TECHNIQUE

The use of stranded conductors is recommended in the installation of all connections. Stranded wires
are less susceptible to breakage as well as vibrating out from a connection. Any terminal requiring a wire
connection must be completely opened prior to inserting the wire. Strip wires so there is ¼” (6.35 mm)
insulation removed. It is imperative there are no conductors that are nicked or cut within a wire when it is
stripped. All bare wire strands must be twisted prior to inserting into the terminal strip. The terminal
blocks are high quality strips that employ a “boxed elevator” style wire clamp. After the twisted wire is
inserted into the terminal, hold it against the back of the terminal opening while tightening down on the
setscrew.

11

Homepage Previous Document

 IMPORTANT: After stripping the outer insulator of a wire cable, make sure that the twisted pair of wires
from the cable remain twisted as much as possible to the terminal strip. This procedure retards reflected
waves in the cable assembly.

CAUTION: DO NOT USE DIFFERENT BUS WIRE SIZES IN THE INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM.
DOING SO WILL CAUSE IMPEDENANCE MISMATCH AND REFLECTIVE WAVES THEREBY RE-
DUCING THE ABILITY OF THE PANEL TO DISCRIMINATE BETWEEN DIGITAL SIGNALS. ALL
BUS CONDUCTORS MUST BE OF THE SAME SIZE. DO NOT SPLICE THE BUS ANYWHERE

2.4 POWER SUPPLY AND CONNECTIONS

The control panel must be connected to a dedicated primary electrical source that has a high degree of
reliability and adequate capacity for this system as well as all connecting field devices. The only method
of disconnecting this power source shall be available only to authorized personnel and clearly marked
“Fire Alarm Circuit Control”. The control panel must be connected to a redundant 24VDC power
source that has enough capacity to properly operate the system for 24 or 60 (depending on system type)
hours standby and 5 minutes alarm, per NFPA 72 (Chapter 1). Batteries normally loose capacity with
age, temperature and duty cycle. Batteries must be replaced when they fail to provide the control panel
with the required standby and alarm power for performance at least two (2) times a year or more often if
local requirements dictate. Always remove the power from the backup batteries first, then remove the
primary power source. Wait at least 10 seconds to allow the supply voltages to decay before installing or
removing any node, cable or wiring.

CAUTION: DO NOT DISCONNECT THE POWER TO THE CONTROL PANEL WHILE THE
ONGUARD PROGRAM IS RUNNING OR ANY FILE IS OPENED. DOING SO COULLD RESULT IN
THE CORRUPT OF MEMORY FLASH DATA. REFER TO SECTION 26.1 FOR MORE INFORMA-
TION.

Refer to drawing 4 to connect power to the panel and drawing 13 and 14 to power the field nodes. The
panel operates from 18 to 30 VDC and requires a redundant 24V power source to comply with NFPA.
To correctly size the power supply for the system, add the current of each node as well as the current
supplied to all initiating and appliance devices, then add the current of the control panel into the figure.
After adding all the devices, take 25% of the total current demand and add it back to the result for head-
room during appliance turn-on surges and other current requirements. If the ambient temperature of the
power supply is higher than 72 deg. F (22 deg. C), refer to the manufactures specifications to correctly
de-rate the power supply for a rise in ambient temperature. Allow enough headroom for power conduc-
tors to provide current under these adverse circumstances:

1. Long power wire runs have voltage drops thereby delivering less voltage to the intended nodes.
2. Higher temperatures lessen the efficiency of carrying current through power wires.
3. Improper wiring and termination (loose set screws) of conductors decrease the efficiency of the
power conductors, especially where vibration exists.
4. Aging conductors over time loose their ability to carry specified current.
5. Splicing wires is not recommended since it increases stray capacitance and inductance thereby im-
peding the performance of the data transfer.
6. Terminations with dissimilar connections will attribute to an electrolysis reaction thereby galvanizing
the connection and increasing contact resistance.

Do not apply power to the panel until there has been a through inspection of all field and local panel
wiring. The panel may be powered without connecting the bus to browse through the features.

CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CONNECT OR DISCONNECT ANY FIELD WIRING OR POWER

SOURCES WHILE THE SYSTEM IS ON LINE, DOING SO CAN CAUSE SYSTEM DAMAGE OR A
POSSIBLE AGENT RELEASE.

12

Homepage Previous Document

 2.5 UTILIZING MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY (PARALLEL CONNECTION)
On systems that utilize long enough lengths of cable to require a power supply at the middle or end of
the system, the following criteria must be met:

1. All power supplies must share a common negative.

2. Do not connect a switcher power supply to another switcher unless the manufacturer allows.
3. Some linear power supplies are capable of being connected in parallel.
4. All power supplies in the system connected in parallel MUST be turned on at the same time.

2.6 SOURCING EXTERNAL POWER TO THE SUPERVISORY OUTPUT MODULE (SOM)

Installations that accommodate appliances that exceed the current carrying capability of the bus power
load will require an external 24V source connection to the SOM. Most installations will require this
technique. Refer to drawing 11 and locate terminals TB4-1&2 on the SOM. Connect a 24V power and
negative wire here appropriately sized to accommodate the maximum current of all appliances when
they are turned on.
NOTE: The application of 24VDC at this connection will connect the control panel and external power
supply negative together.
Locate the shunt connected to J4 to the “SPARE” slot when utilizing the external 24V. This shunt
location isolates the bus positive 24V from the external 24V. The external 24V input is supervised for
power loss and will present a fault on loss of power. The SOM is capable of sourcing 24VDC @ 7.5
amps per channel. NOTE: The total maximum current the SOM can supply to all channels
simultaneously is 20 amps @ 72 deg. F. Locate the shunt at J4 across the #1,2 pins when powering the
SOM from the bus. The SOM utilizes a standard mini ATO series automotive fuse for each of the four
channels.

2.7 BUS STYLE RESTRICTIONS

NOTE: Node field wire configurations that consist of T-Tap (parallel wiring) or Star configurations are
prohibited. All addressable node circuits shall be continuous only.

2.8 BUS SPEED AND SYSTEM INTERGITY

A design criteria dictates the maximum data transfer speed at the safest operating conditions for a given
length of bus cable. However, another influence dictates the same criteria and that is the law of physics.
The nominal polling rate is 25ms per node. An example is a system with 40 nodes will take 1 second to
scan the entire bus.
System bus monitoring ensures the integrity of the alarm and continuously communicates with all nodes.
The control panel will detect and report failure due to:
1. Broken or shorted wires.
2. Loss of node supply voltage.
3. Loss of communications with any node and will then subsequently issue a fault alarm.

A fault alarm notifies the administrator that broken or shorted wires exists so that a repair can be
completed as soon as possible, and the integrity of the alarm system will be restored in a timely manner.
The alarm integrity is assured by continuously communicating with every node in the system. The panel
will report any bus failure so that the problem can be repaired to continue the integrity of the alarm
system.

2.9 MOUNTING THE ADDRESSABLE NODES

Locate nodes in locations that have easy access and are able to easily connect to other nodes for the
system bus. Input nodes are small enough to fit into some manual pull boxes directly. Other methods of
mounting the nodes can include double gang switch boxes or 4” diameter round explosion proof junction
boxes. Adapters are also available to connect the nodes to a DIN rail mount. Nodes that are not
connected to a DIN connector are supplied with a round standoff to raise the assembly clear of its
mounting panel. Since mounting panels supplied by customers range in different thicknesses, the
mounting screws are not supplied. It is highly recommended to use stainless hardware when assembling
the nodes to their panels. As indicated in the node field wiring drawings, connect the supplied ring
terminal to a wire that terminates to earth ground. This connection ensures maximum surge protection
from transients. Refer to the accessory list for part numbers. Many nodes can also be mounted in a
single enclosure to connect to field devices creating a distributed configuration. These locations are
determined by the area classification of atmospheric hazards and must be adhered to such regulations.
The nodes shall be readily accessible where installed. All nodes in the field as well as system
drawings shall be clearly marked with the node ID.

13

Homepage Previous Document

 Refer to drawing 7 to identify the spacing of the mounting holes for the input and 4-20ma node and
drawing 10 for the SOM and relay nodes. Each node accepts four 6-32 screws with a node mounting
depth of .25” (6.35MM).
The time delay between the activation of an initiating device and the automatic activation of a local fire
safety function shall not exceed 20 seconds. Effective January 1, 2002, the time delay between the acti-
vation of an initiating device and the automatic activation of a local fire safety function shall not exceed
10 seconds.

2.10 BUS POLLING TECHNIQUE

The system interrogates each node on the bus in numerical address sequence when polling. The nodes
responds to any alarm or fault conditions that may have occurred since the previous poll. If the node is
interrogated but does not respond, the system repeats the interrogation for a total of three attempts.
While in the Start of Loop bus mode (no return of the bus), if the node fails to respond for a total of three
interrogations, a communication fault is created for that node.
The bus polling can be configured to be either single ended as Start of Loop, or Loop Back mode, (class
A, refer to drawing 13, class B, refer to drawing 14). In the Loop Back mode, if the node fails to respond,
i.e., short, open, hardware failure, for a total of three consecutive interrogations on the Start of Loop bus,
a Loop Break fault is created and three interrogations are attempted on the End of Loop bus. If the node
responds on the End of Loop bus, monitoring alarms continues normally. If the node does not respond
to the End of Loop interrogation, a communication fault is created for that node. After issuing a commu-
nication fault, the system resets its configuration to interrogate the node on the Start of Loop bus on the
next scan. The process will be repeated on subsequent scans.

2.11 DETERMINE CLASS A OR B WIRING

Refer to drawing 13 to wire the control panel for class A and 14 for class B configuration. A 120 ohm
ELR (end of line resistor) will be required at the end of the last node as indicated on the drawing for a
class B configuration.

2.12 FIELD BUS WIRING

Drawing 13 is indicates a class A configuration for the system bus. The class A configuration allows re-
dundant passage of alarm signals. In this technique if one of the field bus lines is severed it does not
interfere with the alarm signals. To properly operate this method the bus cable returning to the panel
must be located in a separate raceway. Drawing 14 shows the more common class B wiring technique
where the bus is connected utilizing a single terminating ELR. This bus wiring is the most common and
economical since it is not require to return back to the control panel.

2.13 BUS COMMUNICATIONS and WIRE SPECIFICATION

The communication cable is critical in that it must not be crimped or folded more than a 90 degree angle
without a radius at least twice its diameter. One type of recommended bus to wire the nodes is Alpha P/
N 2466C or equivalent and can be utilized for small installations. This cable consists of two twisted pairs
of wires that are 22 gage and a drain shield. The red and black is one twisted pair and the green and
white is the other twisted pair. Each twisted pair contain their own shield. The drain conductor serves as
a shield and is connected to earth ground only at one location whether class A or B is utilized. Refer to
drawing 13 and 14 for more information. All wire conductors will be stranded.

CAUTION: DO NOT CHANGE GAGE SIZE OF BUS WIRING WITHIN THE SAME RUN.
DO NOT UTILIZE SPLICING DEVICES ANYWHERE ON THE BUS. BUS CUTS ARE
ALLOWED ONLY AT THE TB1 TERMINAL.

2.14 ADDITIONAL WIRE REQUIREMENTS

Installations requiring high current capacity for driving notification appliance circuits are not to be pow-
ered through the bus resident power conductors but must be separately connected. Refer to drawing 11
to provide a separate power conductor to the supervise output module.

14

Homepage Previous Document

 IMPORTANT: Systems requiring nodes demanding more current than the 4-wire bus can carry will be
required to utilize heavier power conductors separate from the signal bus. In this case, the bus will
contain two conductors with a shield wrapped in a PVC sheathe while the power conductor will contain
two conductors large enough to sustain the required current to satisfy the nodes as well as their
appliances.

2.15 CONNECTING NODES TO APPLIANCES

After a full system configuration has been designed, the nodes can be attached to their proper input and
outputs. Connect the node appliance as suggested in the typical field wiring as indicated drawings
8,9,11,and 12. Node appliances can be wired in now or added later, before or after all node ID’s have
been established. Adding node appliances later precludes any field wiring problems should they occur
and makes troubleshooting easier if a problem occurs.

2.16 EARTH GROUND and CHASSIS

Connect a wire (with 1 ohm or less) from the chassis ground terminal screw, located and indicated on
the rear of the control panel. Refer to article 760 of the National Electrical Code for more information.

2.17 END OF LINE (ELR) SUPERVISING RESISTORS (Supplied)

All end of line resistors are rated at least .25 watt for the input node and the supervised output module.
A carbon composition resistor is recommended because of its robust construction. All resistors must
have at least a 5% tolerance and be valued at 3.9K ohms. Refer to the figures relating to the nodes to
establish proper connection. The resistors serve as a purpose to pass a small supervisory current
through an open contact (relay or switch contact) to validate if an electrical connection has lost continuity
(exp. a severed wire). The communications loop resistor is different in only that its value is 120 ohms
and is only utilized once as indicated in drawing 14.

15

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 3

16

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 4
17

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 5

18

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 6

19

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 7

20

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 8
21
Homepage Previous Document
 DRAWING 9
22
Homepage Previous Document
 DRAWING 10

23

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 11
24
Homepage Previous Document
 DRAWING 12
25
Homepage Previous Document
 DRAWING 13

26

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 14
27

Homepage Previous Document

 3. NODE SELECTION

3.1 DETERMINE WHICH NODE TO UTILIZE

In the context of this manual the terms node and module will be used interchangeable. Select the
module or node below which best describes the proper use and function for the required configuration.
At the printing of this manual there are currently 4 nodes.

3.2 INPUT NODE:

Refer to drawing 8. The 4-channel input node is designed to monitor normally open relay or switch dry
contacts. Examples of the use of these contacts consist of but are not limited to: optical detectors, 4-wire
smoke detectors, thermal detectors, pressure switches, personnel door contacts, agent discharge
confirmed, etc. Inputs are supervised and in the event of an open conductor, a fault is issued. In the
event of an alarm (contact closure), the node issues the alarm message to the control panel where
appropriate action is taken based on the configuration.
Voting - Voting may be restricted to one node or acquired through several nodes. A single node is
capable of voting up to four inputs.
Supervisory Resistors - This node requires 3.9K ohm supervisory resistors at each monitored input that
is utilized. Unconnected inputs can omit an ELR by disabling their inputs and selecting this option in the
F5 SETTINGS menu. Supervisory resistors must be located at the device contact and not at the node
input. This node can be selected to activate the relay or supervised output module.
Other Uses - The node can also be configured to accept an input and display the action on the alarm
screen but not activate any devices. An example is the system can monitor the contact of a pressure
switch or a door contact for its change then display and record its action on the alarm menu.

3.3 4-20mA NODE:

Refer to drawing 9. This 4-channel node is currently designed to monitor industrial gas transmitters that
source 4-20mA outputs with a reference calibration of high span of 50% LFL. The system interrogates
each loop and identifies the signal level to determine the level of alarm based on the threshold levels.
Each input has a high resolution power of 12 bits which equates to 4096 increments across the scale.
Calibration and threshold levels are easily accomplished in the program menu. Three distinctive set
points can be set up for each of the four channels. This node can be selected to activate the relay or
supervised output module.
Voting - Voting may be restricted to one node or acquired through several nodes. A single node is
capable of voting up to four inputs.

3.4 SUPERVISED OUTPUT MODULE (SOM):

Notification Appliance Activating The supervised output module (drawing 11) utilizes the reverse polarity
switching technique for field appliances. The SOM sources a supervisory current through the current
loop and switches polarity to the appliances and sources 24VDC on an alarm. This node also requires a
3.9K ohm end of line resistor for each channel output at the appliance location.
Solenoid Activating This node is designed to also activate solenoids as configured in the program menu.
Solenoids and appliances can reside on the same node simply by dedicating these devices to their
proper output in the program menu. It is imperative that inductive kick-back diodes or MOV’s are
properly utilized to prevent high voltage discharge from being induced into nearby wires. Refer to
drawing 11 on how to connect solenoids to the module.

3.5 RELAY NODE:

Refer to drawing 12. Applications requiring auxiliary control or other relay functions can utilize this node.
The relay node contains four independent SPDT form C dry contacts rated at 10 Amps each, 30VDC, or
125VAC. Dampers, fans, auxiliary equipment can be connected to this node.

CAUTION: IF ANY DEVICE CONNECTED TO THE RELAY NODE IS INDUCTIVE, SUCH AS

ANOTHER RELAY OR SOLENOID, INDUCTIVE KICK-BACK DIODES OR MOV’S (METAL OXIDE
VARISTORS), MUST BE LOCATED DIRECTLY ACROSS THE COIL OF THE DEVICE OR DAMAGE
TO THE RELAY NODE CONTACTS CAN OCCUR.

28

Homepage Previous Document

3.6 STATUS LED’s
Nodes contain LED’s to provide indication on what their status is. The LED’s also indicate when inputs are closed on the
input node. It is imperative that the sections relating to disabling channels are read to fully understand their intent.

LED STATUS INPUT NODE 4-20mA GAS NODE SOM RELAY NODE

1 FPS CHANNEL ENABLED POWER OK CHANNEL FAULT RELAY OFF

ENABLED
1 FLASH EVERY 3S CHANNEL DISABLED CHANNEL FAULT
DISABLED
4 FPS INPUT OPEN * OUTPUT SHORTED
OR TURNED ON
STEADY ON INPUT CLOSED RELAY ON RELAY ON

STEADY OFF NO POWER NO POWER NO POWER NO POWER

* OUTPUT SHORTED IN QUIESCENT MODE

29

Homepage Previous Document

 4. HARDWARE INTERFACE AND PORTS
4.1 UTILIZING THE TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY
Alarm acknowledging, silencing, resetting and other commands are implemented through the touch
screen display. The display is designed to be used intuitively instead of analytically thereby reducing
decision-making time by the administrator. Lightly touch a button or command line on the touch screen
to invoke the command. If a finger is too large, a non-metallic object like a closed pen can be used as a
stylus to touch the screen. Do not use an instrument that is sharply pointed as it will scratch the surface
and do not drag any object across the surface. Use a household glass cleaner to clean the surface of
the screen when the system is not on line.

4.2 CONNECTING PERIPHEARLS TO THE CONTROL PANEL

Refer to drawing 15 on where to connect a VGA monitor, USB compliant keyboard and mouse to the
control panel. The external peripherals are not required during activity condition and can remain
disconnected until they are required for programming. During normal quiescent mode of the control
panel, alarm modes and utility issues can be fully operated utilizing only the touch screen of the control
panel. An external monitor is utilized only when a configuration is implemented, starting at selection #13.
This section requires a large viewing area to make it easier to map the nodes. When an external monitor
is utilized for other menu options, include a mouse to navigate easier. Both the external monitor and
touch screen will function simultaneously. The Windows platform will be visible during non-programming
modes on the attached monitor. The actual program is a 1/4 VGA format and will be displayed on the
additional large monitor until the configuration menu is entered.

4.3 PRINTER
Prior to bringing the system on line, print reports to verify the system is in compliance with the manner it
was programmed. The Onguard software supports different model Epson printers that are able to print
through the USB drive. For more details refer to section 23.

4.4 MODBUS PORT

The Modbus connection utilizes a standard EIA DB9 connector and supplies an ASCII format. There are
variations of this protocol since customers tend to utilize their own communication terminology. The
Modbus directive is covered under a separate manual provided by Allestec.

4.5 TCP/IP INTERFACE PORT

This optional connection allows Internet connection to the control panel. The use of this connection
requires custom software. The control panel cannot be remotely controlled utilizing this option but can
be remotely viewed as indicated in NFPA directive.

4.6 VGA MONITOR PORT

Refer to drawing 15 to identify the monitor connector. The monitor is required when utilizing menu
section #12, SYSTEM CONFIGURATION to allow efficient use of the programming menu. The monitor
is also required to manage files in the control panel.

4.7 USB PORTS

The USB port supports the USB compliant keyboard and mouse. These two devices are connected to
the ports when configuring a system. The USB port is also utilized for copying data for storage from the
panel as well as updating software versions.

CAUTION: LIKE ANY OTHER COMPUTER SYSTEM, DO NOT REMOVE USB DRIVE WHILE IT IS
BEING READ FROM OR WRITTEN TO, DOING SO WILL CORRUPT THE SYSTEM FILES! VERIFY
THAT THE DATA TRANSFER LED HAS STOPPED BLINKING BEFORE REMOVING THE BUS
DRIVE.

30

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 15

31

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 16

32

Homepage Previous Document

 5. SYSTEM STARTUP

5.1 CHECKLIST PROCEDURES

1. First completely read and fully understand this manual.
2. Install the panel as indicated in drawing 3.
3. Verify that the power supply is correctly connected as indicated in drawing 5.
3. Verify that the system bus is correctly wired as indicated in drawing 13 or 14.
4. Verify all node dipswitches are in the OFF position.
5. Verify all appliances and their ELR is correctly installed. This procedure will prevent any faults
when the node channels are enabled.
6. Attach a VGA monitor to prepare for configurations and a printer for reports.
7. Attach a USB compliant keyboard and mouse to the panel.
8. Apply 24VDC power to the control panel and allow it time to initialize. The menu below will
appear after preliminary initialization of the system which takes approximately 1 minute.

FIGURE 5. System main screen during node scanning.

5.2 SYSTEM INITIALIZING or RESTARTING

Anytime the system powers up or when the system initializes for whatever reason, it will execute the
following instructions in this order:
1. Look for the onguardsetup.dat file on the flash \DiskC Drive
2. Is the file located?
YES NO
1. Load the onguardsetup.dat file into RAM. 1. Indicates that the onguardsetup.dat file is not
2. Display nodes previously detected, if any. found.
3. Bus detects correct styles and current nodes, 0- 2. Continues to detect nodes on the bus.
….N or if one fails. 3. Creates the onguardsetup.dat file when the
SAVE and CLOSE button is selected on the
THEN F5 menu.
If the number of nodes detected on the bus equals
the number of nodes stored in the onguardsetup.dat
file, the system reloads active configurations and
starts polling and monitoring alarms.
If the number of nodes detected on the bus does not
equal the number of nodes stored in the onguard-
setup.dat file the system displays a warning mes-
sage, “SYSTEM NOT CONFIGURED” appears and
does not load any configurations or monitor alarms.

33

Homepage Previous Document

 5.3 ENABLING PASSWORDS
The control panel comes with the administrator password number 2222 installed. A keyboard must be
connected to change passwords. Enter the F10 key and enter a default password that will be utilized
within the program. Now enter and confirm the new password. A “backdoor” password 1793 overrides
any existing passwords in case the user password is lost or it can remain as the dominant password.
Other passwords than the two indicated here enables a more frequent beckon of the keypad.

5.4 DISPLAY SCREEN BRIGHTNESS

When the panel is powered up and initializes, the display is at a maximum brightness (maybe 10 sec-
onds). Once the polling of the nodes begins the panel dims approximately 15% to extend the life of the
CCFT. The display remains in this reduced power state until any alarms occur or the polling is sus-
pended by an administrator, then it will restore to maximum brightness. Once an alarm is cleared or poll-
ing resumes, the display will return to its low brightness state after 15 minutes.

5.5 SELECTING BUS LOOP CONFIGURATION

The panel is capable of monitoring the bus by scanning a terminated configuration or continuous loop.
Refer to section 2.11 for more details.

5.6 START OF LOOP Class B

Select the Start of Loop button for a class B configuration to control devices connected to TB2, A&B line
connection (most common). Select OK. This single ended bus line requires the ELR as indicated in
drawing 14.

5.7 LOOP BACK Class A

Select the LOOP BACK button for devices to
be controlled from TB2 A&B line and END
LOOP A&B connection. Select OK. This class
A configuration requires both ends of the bus
line to terminate at the control panel as indi-
cated in drawing 13.

FIGURE 5.1 Selecting bus loop options as described

in section 5.5.

34

Homepage Previous Document

 5.8 UNDERSTANDING FIELD NODE ID ADDRESSES
After completing the wiring of a system the second step is to acquire node address so the control panel
can communicate to unique addresses. If the nodes are installed, the administrator must physically go to
each node and set their ID switch as they are entered into the system. It is advantageous to establish
programming on a bench next to the control panel prior to installation. The node ID switch located on
each node enables the search program to identify the next node ID to increment. Refer to Drawing 17 to
properly select the node ID switch. The first node identified will be assigned the address 0, then 1,2 etc.
Select a node that is best suited for the starting number (0) and turn ON its acquire address switch,
SW1-1 ON, SW1-2 OFF, as identified in drawing 17. After the node is identified, return SW1-1 to the
OFF position and proceed to discover the next node and repeat. Nodes can have their ID number
change if desired as indicated in section 25.6. Once a node is identified, it cannot be removed from
the bus unless it is disabled in the menu. Refer to section 25 for more information. All nodes must
have an ID address of 255 prior to starting section 5.8. New nodes are shipped with the ID address of
255. To change a node address to 255 refer to section 25.

FIGURE 5.2 Enter a password. FIGURE 5.3 Ready to search nodes. NOTE:
Only buttons pertaining to the startup proce-
dure will appear until the first node is discov-
ered and located in the above menu.

5.9 NODE ADDRESS SEQUENCE

It makes no difference where the nodes are physically located on the bus when procuring their ID. In
special applications where alarm response time in milliseconds is critical, assign the input and gas
nodes with the lowest address by procuring their ID first. Assign the SOM and relay node their address
next. The system bus works by starting the scan with the lowest ID to the highest.
NOTE: The FIND NEXT NODE button in this menu searches nodes that are numerically in order and
does not locate address which skip a number.

5.10 PROCURING FIELD NODE ID ADDRESSES ON A NEW INSTALLATION

1. When the display is in the quiescent mode, (ONGUARD) displayed, double tap the touch
screen. No menu activity will return the ONGUARD display back.
2. In the utility menu select line #13, NODE MANAGEMENT, enter a password if it asks, then
select the SELECT MENU ITEM button.
3. In figure 5.3 the blank screen display indicates there are currently 0 nodes attached to the bus.
4. Now, based on how the node addresses are to be incremented, select the first node on the
system that is to be assigned ID #0 and locate the address ID switch (drawing17) to the ON
position.
5. Now click on the FIND NEXT NODE button utilizing the mouse.
6. The panel will search the bus for the ONE node that has its ID switch ON. The node with the ID
switch ON will appear in the menu screen with its 4 open channels “opened”, in this case, the
input node. Refer to figure 5.4.
7. Now, return the ID switch back to its OFF position.
8. To physically identify this node later, label its ID on the node.

35

Homepage Previous Document

 CAUTION: NO ALARMS CAN OCCUR UNTIL THE INDIVIDUAL CHANNELS ARE ENABLED IN THE
SETTINGS MENU AND A CONFIGURATION FILE IS CREATED, #14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION,
OR F8 IS UTILIZED.

NOTE: If two or more ID switches are ON, the next searched node WILL NOT BE FOUND and the mes-
sage “NO MORE NODES FOUND” will appear.

9. The node in figure 5.4 appears with its 4 channels “open”. Click on the COLLAPSE button to close
the node, if desired.
10. Repeat this search procedure for all other nodes, remembering to turn ON the ID switch for only
one node at a time to be addressed, then turn the switch back OFF.
11. Select the SAVE and CLOSE button to exit the node menu.
12. After identifying all nodes connected to the system, data can be entered into each node to identify
its characteristics.
13. Figure 5.5 shows 4 nodes that have been selected for illustration purposes.

5.11 ADDITIONAL INPUT NODE INFORMATION

All field devices that contain a dry switch or relay contacts can connect to the input node as described
below. All examples below can be completed in the system configuration.

1. Optical detectors connect to the input node and any time delays or voting will be addressed.
2. Manual pulls connect to the input node and the option to add or override time delays are addressed.
NOTE: Alarm verification or timers are not permitted on manual alarm activation devices.
3. Four wire smoke detectors connect to the input node.
4. An audible remote silence switch connects to the input node and is addressed.
5. Door or other contacts connect to the input node. The option for the contact closure to proceed to an
action alarm or remain as a message on the screen is addressed.
6. For systems employing a reserve extinguish tank to trip on a post fire or first tank fail condition, con-
nect the pressure switch to the input node.

36

Homepage Previous Document

 FIGURE 5.4 Input node open indicating its FIGURE 5.5 All four node channels collapsed.
four undefined channels.

5.12 NODE ID FORMAT

Node ID’s are identified with the first digit indicating the node number and the second the channel. A
node may have an address of 5-1 which indicates this node is number 5 and channel 1 is identified. All
nodes follow the same formation. Nodes that have one or more of the four channels unused still have a
node ID address.

5.13 NODE DEFAULT ADDRESS

All nodes are factory supplied with a factor default ID address of 255. When starting up a new system or
adding nodes, they must always contain the default address of 255 or the search node command will
produce no results as performed in this section. To reset a module to factory address of 255, refer to
section 25.9.

5.14 The ADVANCED section is described in section 25.1.

5.15 OTHER NODE COMMON FUNCTIONS

[] Select item #13, NODE MANAGEMENT, in the utility menu or select F5 on the keyboard.
[] Click on the + sign to open a specific node tree. The default node name as well as its ID is indicated.
Opening a node tree allows a complete view of all four channels.
[] The node(s) can also be “collapsed” by pushing the collapse button or clicking on the (-) icon
thereby indicating only the module name.
[] Select the sort button to numerically locate all nodes in numeric order.
[] Click on the scroll bar on the right side of the menu and scroll to any node desired.
[] All four channels of the different nodes are identical. It is up to the installer to decide which of the four
inputs to connect to input devices. Unused inputs do not require a supervisory resistor and are disabled
as desired.

37

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 17

38

Homepage Previous Document

 6. CONFIGURATION ARCHITECTURE

CAUTION: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, DO NOT ALLOW ANY ADMINISTRATOR, PROGRAM-

MER, TECHNICIAN OR ANYONE TO CIRCUMVENT, ADD OR MODIFY THE ARCHITUCTURE OR
PROGRAM OF THE SYSTEM UNLESS THIS ADMINISTRATOR HAS FULLY READ AND UNDER-
STANDS THIS MANUAL. DOING SO WILL RESULT IN THE INABILITY OF THE SYSTEM TO PER-
FORM PER THE MANUFACTURES SPECIFICATIONS.

CAUTION: IMPROPER CONFIGURATION(S) CAN RESULT IN UNDEFINED SYSTEM PERFORM-

ANCE

6.1 INTRODUCTION
Prior to creating configurations, it is imperative the administrator reads this section as well as the entire
manual. The administrator must understand the structure of files and folders that reside in memory to
alleviate any misunderstanding of process and techniques of operating the system. It is important that
the administrator can navigate through Windows menu structures, folders and files effectively without
impeding the system.

6.2 THE SYSTEM DISK

The control panel program, configurations and node information all reside in non-volatile flash memory
called disk C. After the panel is powered and initializes, the necessary data that resides on disk C is
then transferred to a RAM bank where it remains running the system.

6.3 THE ONGUARDSETUP.DAT FILE

The onguardsetup.dat is the node configuration file. This file contains all data the administrator inserts
into the node (F5 menu) fields such as, name, location and edit fields. This file relates directly to how
many nodes and their respective ID numbers are as they exist in the field. Changing this file with a
different version can invalidate the response of the panel. In other words, the onguardsetup.dat file
MUST match the quantity of nodes, their style and address.
When the system is powered and the external monitor is connected, click the mouse on the START but-
ton, go to Programs, then select EXPLORER. The folders currently visible are located in the flash mem-
ory. Double click on the Disk C and there are more files and folders. Towards the bottom of the file
names will reside the onguardsetup.dat. If the Onguardsetup.dat data has been removed or is not avail-
able, the system will create this file from detected nodes. Refer to section 5.2 for more details.

6.4 CONFIGURATON OVERVIEW

To create configurations, the intended input node channel(s) is selected and located in an input window
(SELECTED INPUT) and the connecting output node is located in the output window (SELECT OUT-
PUT). During a configuration all nodes attached to the system appear on the menu. The configuration is
then saved and LOADED with a unique file name that can later be UNLOADED. Try to name a configu-
ration consistent with its application or keep a separate note pad eluding to the configuration name. A
new configuration can then be created utilizing unused channels of the same or different nodes, or other
channels can be selected that already are configured. EXAMPLE: An input for an optical detector can be
mapped to an output horn. The identical input for the optical can be mapped to a strobe in another con-
figuration. The provision exists to UNLOAD a configuration utilizing one input of a node. Another con-
figuration totally different can then be loaded utilizing the identical node input but create a complete dif-
ferent action. Configurations can be very simple (manual pull tripping a single tank) to complex opera-
tions (a cycle release configuration running at the same time as a dual tank release). It is imperative that
the administrator establishing the configurations understands the consequences of cross zoning, voting,
and adding time delays to nodes. There are currently 5 selections of configurations to choose from
which incorporate specific tasks to perform common functions of the control panel. Go to the utility menu
and select item #12 then select the correct configuration that best represents a node connection. Each
configuration is described in detail starting with section 13.

NOTE: Configurations that are created and saved are not mapped together. They each reside independ-
ently in the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS menu; however, they may SHARE a common node channel
as just described above.

39

Homepage Previous Document

 6.5 THE CONFIGURATION FOLDER
The configuration folder contains all configurations that the administrator creates under utility menu #14,
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. When a configuration is created for the very first time, another file called
mainconfigfile.txt is also created simultaneously and located into the configuration folder. The maincon-
fig.txt file contains the names of the configurations that are loaded. When a configuration is unloaded, its
name is removed from the mainconfig.txt file then selectively located in the same folder. Configuration
files are automatically copied into this .txt file and as more configurations are created, they are also in-
cluded, increasing the file size. The unloaded .txt file can be copied to a USB bus drive and brought to a
computer with notepad and be observed. On system initialization, only LOADED .txt files are loaded into
memory ready for alarms. The purpose of viewing this information is so the administrator can have an
understanding how files are stored. To view these files while the external monitor is connected, click the
mouse on the START button, go to Programs, then select Explorer. The folders currently visible are lo-
cated in the flash memory. Double click on the Disk C and there are more files and folders. Click on the
configuration folder to view files created in the configuration section #13-18. If the system is new, no files
are in the folder. Under normal circumstances the administrator does not have to access this folder but it
is being pointed out for information purposes. Exit out of the configuration folder back to the \Disk C di-
rectory.

6.6 MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS - UTILITY MENU SELECTION #13

Refer to section 24.

6.7 SAVE ALL ALARM HISTORY REPORTS UTILITY MENU SELECTION #7

Refer to section 23.2.

6.8 IMPORTANT - WHAT ACTIONS DISABLES THE SYSTEM FROM ALARMING

It is important to understand the procedures that prevent the system from alarming. Anytime the system
stops polling there will be a FAULT relay action. Disabling a channel in the F5 SETTINGS section does
not cause a system fault because this feature is intended to disable an unused channel. The following
events below are basically set-up procedures and are intended to occur when an authorized personnel
starts up or services the system.

1. Entering the SETTINGS in any node and not ENABLING the check-off box for a valid channel.
2. UTILITY MENU #11, NODE MANAGEMENT (F5) MENU - Whenever this selection is entered into
the polling of the nodes suspends to allow modification.
3. UTILITY MENU #13, MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS: When this selection is selected the program
suspends the polling of the nodes to allow modification of the configurations and EDITING
capabilities.
4. UTILITY MENU #13, MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS: When a loaded configuration is UNLOADED it
is DISABLED and will not function.
5. UTILITY MENU #12, SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS or selecting F8.
6. The ONGUARD program is not loaded.
7. The system is not powered up.

40

Homepage Previous Document

 7. BACKUP SYSTEM FILES

7.1 IMPORTANT
It is imperative that the administrator has knowledge in copying files and navigating through
Windows Explorer to perform the following tasks properly.

Do not power down the system unless proper protocol has been established or the LOSS OF
DATA will result. Refer to section 26.1 to correctly power down the system.

7.2 WHEN TO SAVE THE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (Onguardsetup.dat)

1. After completing configuration(s) selected from the UTILITY MENU #14 SYSTEM CONFIGURA-
TIONS.
2. Anytime a node is physically removed or added to the system. Refer to section 25 for this informa-
tion.
3. To save changes made to the node configuration file select the SAVE and CLOSE button when exit-
ing the F5 menu.

7.3 HOW TO SAVE AND BACKUP THE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The control panel allows the administrator to make a backup of the onguardsetup.dat file on the DISK C
through the utility program. Whenever there is a change in the system, the backup file should be up-
dated to reflect the actual onguardsetup.dat file. Backing up the onguardsetup.dat file through the UTIL-
ITY MENU automatically overwrites the existing file with the new one. The backup file remains on the
DISK C flash drive. The system files should also be stored on two separate medias at two different
physical locations to be the safest.

FIRST - BACKUP THE ONGUARDSETUP.DAT FILE ON THE LOCAL C DRIVE:

1. After node setup, configuration commitments and testing have been established and the system is in
complete compliance, proceed with the following:
2. Make the backup file just prior to putting the system on line for monitoring use.
3. Navigate to the utility menu and select #16, BACKUP THE SYSTEM DATABASE, then select the
SELECT MENU ITEM button.
4. Enter a valid password if the system asks then select the OK button.
5. An exact duplicate file of the onguardsetup.dat has been created in the same directory and is named
onguardsetupbak.dat.
6. Copy the onguardsetupbak.dat to Disk C and rename it to onguardsetup.dat to restore the saved
configuration.

SECOND- BACKUP THE CONFIGURATION FOLDER TO AN EXTERNAL USB BUS DRIVE:

CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING BACKUP WILL TEMPORARILY DISRUPT SURVEILANCE.

DURING THIS TIME UNTIL THE PROGRAM IS BROUGHT BACK ON LINE.

Use the external monitor to backup this file. While the ONGUARD screen is displayed, with the mouse
RIGHT CLICK on the ONGUARD taskbar located at the bottom at the screen. Now left click on the
“close window sign”. The ONGUARD application will close. Now click on the START button, go to PRO-
GRAMS, click on windows explorer. Insert a USB Bus drive in the connector. Wait approximately 10
seconds and the “HARD DISK” icon will appear. DOUBLE CLICK ON the Disk C folder. Copy the CON-
FIGURATION folder to the BUS drive. Wait 5 seconds after the BUS drive LED stops blinking then re-
move it from the panel. Go back to DISK C and double click on the ONGUARD word to bring the system
back up. After the screen is visible with the time and date go to the far upper right side of the monitor
screen and click on the X to close Windows Explorer.

THIRD - BACKUP TO THE SAME USB BUS DRIVE THE CONFIGURATION FOLDER LOCATED IN
DISK C.

41

Homepage Previous Document

 8. LOADING NODE DATA TO PREPARE CONFIGURATIONS

NOTE: Nodes must be configured with text and control data prior to mapping to other
nodes to identify their personalities.

CAUTION: NODES MUST BE ENABLED OR THEY WILL NOT RESPOND TO AN ALARM. THE RE-
LAY NODE IS ALWAYS ENABLED.

8.1 GENERAL TEXT FIELD EDITING NOTES

All editable fields in this system adhere to the Windows standard of editing. The fields may be high-
lighted then deleted. In some cases, the fields can be cut and pasted into another section. These editing
procedures are not covered in this manual and it is imperative that administrators of this system are fa-
miliar with Windows techniques of editing.

Each node contains fields that allow data to be entered to identify the unique characteristics such as
location and other pertinent data. Figure 5.5 shows the four nodes we searched and their names ap-
pear. These names can be edited but the ID is fixed.

The HORN ICON is the only icon that affects the operation of the configuration on the F5 Node menu.
Refer to section 19 for more details. Solenoids are captured in the F8 configuration menu and do not
relate to the solenoid node icon.

NOTE: To simplify the following examples, the Input, Gas, Relay and SOM are the only nodes on the
bus for this demonstration and will appear in the configuration windows.

8.2 NODE COMMON ATTRIBUTES

The nodes store some information in their local memory and do not get saved to the system. The items
that are stored in each node’s nonvolatile memory are the node ID number, the de-bounce time and the
enable/disable flags. The 4-20ma node also stores its set-points locally. Based on this information, a
node cannot be removed from one system and installed into another system without resetting the ad-
dress and referring to section 25.

8.3 PLANNING NODE SELECTION FOR ALARM ACTIONS

Figure 9 indicates a typical menu to label nodes for alarm identifications. The objective in all configura-
tion selections is to locate any channel from any input node to the SELECTED INPUT menu then locate
any four channels from any output node to the SELECTED OUTPUT menu. With all configurations,
there are exceptions, voting, time delays, etc. that can be mapped to the configuration. When all se-
lected inputs and outputs are located in the bottom menu screens, any confirmed input will trip ALL
OUTPUTS based on the exceptions.

After a configuration is completed and assigned a file name, the same node channel(s) can be utilized to
trip other output devices under a different file name. After the nodes have been filled out with their perti-
nent information, they can now be mapped to activate other nodes through the configuration menus.
There are five different configurations to select from. Select #12, SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, in the
UTILITY MENU then choose the configuration.

42

Homepage Previous Document

 9. INPUT NODE PREPARATION

The four nodes that were scanned for ID addresses in

section 5.10 will now be loaded with data to identify
their functional characteristics. For demonstration pur-
poses node fields have been filled in as indicated in
figure 9 and will be utilize as examples throughout
this manual.

9.1 ADD/EDIT DETAILS

[] With the ONGUARD main menu displayed, select
the F5 on the keyboard to bring up the node screen.
[] Highlight the input node then click the ADD/EDIT
DETAILS button. The following menu appears as indi-
cated in figure 5.4. The ADD/EDIT DETAILS menu is
identical to all four nodes.
[] The NODE NAME text field in figure 9 is automati-
cally displayed when the search has identified it. The FIGURE 9. ADD/EDIT DETAILS
node name field can have text entered, but always
retain the original name (Input Module) in the text field
so the node can be identified.

[] Enter a name, location or other identification characteristic of each input in the ALARM LOCATION
box as indicated in figure 9. Applications where the input node has unused inputs do not require any
data in this field and can remain undefined.

CAUTION: BECAUSE OF THE FLEXIBILITY OF THE SYSTEM, IN THE NODE NAME FIELD, ANY
NAME CAN BE APPLIED TO ACCOMMODATE THE FUNCTION.

[] Figure 13.6 indicates how the ALARM LOCATION field reflects the data that entered in the Add/Edit
LOCATION. This ALARM LOCATION field appears to the right of the DEVICE NAME during an alarm.
Enter pertinent data in reference to the alarm location or device as necessary. There are several exam-
ples for illustration purposes in figure 9. The ALARM LOCATION, such as the example turbine optical,
can also be utilized as the device type as indicated in figure 9.

43

Homepage Previous Document

 9.2 ICON SELECTION
[] Referring back to figure 9 to the far left, are icons in boxes that represent the device name. Select an
icon that best represents the alarm style. When an alarm occurs, the name to the right of the icon in
figure 9.1 or 9.2 will appear in the DEVICE NAME column as indicated in figure 13.7.
[] Proceed to click on an icon for each channel as well as the master node icon (top box).
[] The APPLY TO REST button simply fills the same information in the remaining lower boxes.

FIGURE 9.1 Icon Upper Menu FIGURE 9.2 Icon Lower Menu

9.3 MEMO FIELDS

[] The EDIT button just below the COMMENT column allows a message for this node as indicated in
figure 9.3. During an alarm this EDIT box can be quickly viewed at the alarm screen. The remaining
four EDIT buttons to the right of the ALARM LOCATION allows messages (figure 9.4) for each of the
four channels or any other relative information; however, this data is for reference storage and can be
viewed by selecting the F5 key to enter the node screen. Each field can accommodate up to 256 charac-
ters. Unused channels do not require filling in the fields and can be left undefined.
[] For illustration purposes, the EDIT button was selected for channel 1 of the input node, indicating the
turbine optical detector is located at ID address 0-1 (node #0, channel #1).
[] After inserting the input node EDIT DETAILS information, select the OK then APPLY button to save
the information.
[] Now click on the SETTINGS button and refer to figure 9.5.

FIGURE 9.3 EDIT box for global node name. FIGURE 9.4 EDIT box for channel 1.

44

Homepage Previous Document

 9.4 SETTINGS SELECTON
[] With the input node still highlighted select the SET-
TINGS button.
[] Now check off a box to ENABLE the channel(s) that
will be utilized in a configuration.
CAUTION: A CHANNEL THAT IS NOT ENABLED
WILL NOT ALARM.
[] The disable can be used to temporarily turn off a
channel for a service routine.
[] Disable a channel if it is unused OR A FAULT WILL
OCCUR AFTER A CONFIGURATION IS MADE.
[] After node SETTING has been completed, it is
ready to be expanded to show all channels and in-
serted the configuration window later.
FIGURE 9.5 SETTINGS menu

CAUTION: IF THERE ARE INPUT NODES VOTING, THE DE-BOUNCE TIME MUST BE EXPIRIED
ON ANY VOTED NODES PRIOR FOR AN ALARM ACTION TO TAKE PLACE.

CAUTION: INCREMENTING THE DE-BOUNCE TIME ADDS TIME TO THE ALARM RESPONSE.

9.5 RESETTING NODE LED’s

[] Click on the RESET NODE LED’s to reset the input node blinking LED’s after an alarm or fault has
occurred. For resetting LED’s on all the nodes in a system simultaneously, select menu option #10 on
the UTILITY MENU.

9.6 SELECTING DE-BOUNCE

[] The DE-BOUNCE feature has been designed to prevent false alarms in electrically noisy installations.
De-bounce time utilizes a digital filter and allows the administrator to select the amount of time before
the node responds to an alarm signal to trip the control panel. Example: If the de-bounce time is set for
1024 milliseconds, the input signal (closure of a switch or sensor signal) has to remain steady for the
entire 1024 milliseconds before an alarm is considered valid. If there is a disruption of the signal anytime
during the 1024 milliseconds de-bounce period, the de-bounce starts over from zero. Example: An alarm
(could be noise) occurs and the signal is present for 875 milliseconds of the 1024 millisecond period. An
alarm will not occur. Once the De-bounce has expired, the alarm signal is then forwarded to the system
bus.

The de-bounce is based on a formula: de-bounce time/62.5ms = 5 timer periods required for the signal
to remain steady for a valid alarm. The default setting is 320 milliseconds. This time can be only set at
intervals of 62.5ms.

Another use for the de-bounce is to add time for UV only detectors to shunt out erroneous alarms from
lighting or other UV emissions. Another use serves as a deterrent for false alarms by allowing the ad-
ministrator to intelligently select a time delay appropriate for the task. The minimum de-bounce time is
64 milliseconds, the maximum is 16.32 seconds and applies to all four channels of the node.

[] After inserting the information in the settings menu, click on the APPLY button to proceed.
[] Click on the SAVE and CLOSE button to return to the main menu to proceed to continue with other
nodes.

45

Homepage Previous Document

 10. 4-20mA NODE PREPARATION

[] Referring to figure 5.5, highlight and click the gas

module name on the upper left menu.

10.1 ADD/EDIT DETAILS

[] This form is identical to the input node. Follow sec-
tions 9.1 through 9.6 for filling out field information
then click on the APPLY button. Notice that the
NODE NAME was edited to accept the %LFL text.
Figure 10 contains examples. After filling out the
fields, select the APPLY button to proceed.
[] Select the SETTINGS button.

FIGURE 10. ADD/EDIT DETAILS

10.2 SETTINGS SELECTON
[] Check off a box to ENABLE the channel(s) that will
be utilized in a configuration.
[] Notice in figure 10.1 channel 4 was not enabled
because in figure 10 example it was not used.
CAUTION- A CHANNEL THAT IS NOT ENABLED
WILL NOT ALARM.
[] The disable can be used to temporarily turn off a
channel for a service routine
[] Disable a channel if it is unused OR A FAULT
COULD OCCUR AFTER A CONFIGURATION IS
MADE.

10.3 DEBOUNCE TIME

Refer to section 9.6 for details.
FIGURE 10.1 SETTINGS

10.4 ENTER SET POINTS

[] Refer to figure 10.1 and select the SET PT button
to enter threshold settings.
[] The bar graph in figure 10.2 is out of alignment until
fully calibrated.
[] For each of the three alarm set points on this chan-
nel click on the arrow to increase or decrease
the alarm set point.
[] The factory defaults are 30-40-50.
[] The use of all three set points is not required.
[] The channel does not have to be calibrated to se-
lect set points.
NOTE: Set points are prevented from interfering with
adjoining values.
NOTE: Per Factory Mutual restrictions, the HIGH and
HIGH HIGH alarms are not allowed to increment FIGURE 10.2 Adjust Set Points
above 60% LFL.
[] The REAL TIME window displays the input current
in milliamps for this channel and is not influenced by
calibration.
[] The percent value is a correct representation of the
current AFTER calibration is completed.
[] Select the esc key on the keyboard anytime to can-
cel this procedure.

46

Homepage Previous Document

 10.5 CALIBRATION
[] Referring to the field wiring diagram of drawing 9, a 4-20mA constant current source is required to
connect to TB2 of the channel to calibrate.
[] As indicated in figure 10, channel #1 of node #1 was selected in the example and the name that was
inserted for demonstration purposes, METER VALVE appears for this menu. This entire menu is only for
channel one. The message NOT CALIBRATED appears until a successful calibration has been com-
pleted.
[] The tall blue bar to the far left in the graph on figure 10.4 and 10.3 represents the REAL TIME current
being measured by the control panel and is also displayed in the REAL TIME window. This current is not
affected by the calibration.
[] The green bar (shown at 5%) represents the low set point, yellow (15%) is for the HIGH and red (25%)
is for the HIGH HIGH.

FIGURE 10.3 SET ZERO menu before SET FIGURE 10.4 SET SPAN menu with 20.01 mA
0% button is pushed with 4mA applied to input. applied to same input.

[] Select the CALIBRATE button (figure 10.2) after the set point data has been entered.
[] Apply 4mA of current to this channel by reading the REAL TIME figures then click on the SET 0% but-
ton as indicated in figure 10.3.
[] Now apply 20mA to this channel as indicated in figured 10.4 and click on the SET 50% button for the
span.
[] NOTE: If the current applied to the gas node is not within the applicable range, the message “THE
50% SETTING MUST BETWEEN 8 AND 25 MILLIAMPS appears.
[] Reduce the input current back to at least below the LOW threshold then select the CAL. DONE button
to save the data. Now select the OK button.
[] After inserting the information, click on the APPLY button to proceed.
[] Click on the Cal. DONE button to save the data.
[] After channel one has been calibrated, use the same procedure to continue and calibrate the other
three channels, if utilized.

10.6 RESET
The RESET button returns the calibration settings back to the DEFAULT level. The default level is Low =
30, High = 40, HIGH HIGH = 50. Use the RESET if a new gas sensor has been installed and then re-
quires to be calibrated or if the calibration is restarted. Resetting the calibration requires that any active
sensor on line to be recalibrated.

47

Homepage Previous Document

 10.7 ALTERNATE CALIBRATION METHOD
Manufactures of gas sensors instruct different methods for obtaining local or remote calibration. In some
cases calibration gas is utilized to connect to a gas sensor and then the 4-20mA node can then be cali-
brated. This method is called remote calibration and requires a administrator applying the gas at the
sensor while someone else is setting the zero and span at the control panel. In a correctly installed 4-
20mA system the current will not change due to field wiring. If the resistance of the wire connecting a 4-
20mA sensor is so high that the sensor cannot deliver the voltage to drive the current through the loop,
then the sensor can only be considered defective or incorrectly installed.

The use of 2.5% calibration gas is recommended for calibration. In this instance when the channel is
properly calibrated the 2.5% gas flow will indicate 50% (blue bar) or half of the scale. The calibration
method utilized here is based on the fact that the 2.5% gas concentration represents 50% of the 4-20mA
scale, or 12mA sourced into the 4-20mA node.

10.8 GAS CONFIGURATION

While in the F5 menu there is no alarm monitoring. Gas configuration is allowed ONLY in the direct con-
nection mode as indicated in section 10. When a node is calibrated, the calibration data remains in the
onguardsetup.dat file. Changing the node’s ID does not affect the calibration or set points. All of the
threshold levels and calibration settings are stored in the onguardsetup.dat file for the node.

10.9 SAVE NODE INFORMATION

Item #1 in the UTILITY MENU, SAVE NODE REPORT, can be selected to summarize the information
related to this Gas Node.

48

Homepage Previous Document

 11. SUPERVISE OUTPUT (SOM) NODE PREPARATION

[] Referring back to figure 5.5, highlight the output

module name on the menu.

11.1 ADD/EDIT DETAILS

[] This menu is similar to the input node. Follow sec-
tions 9.1 thru 9.6 for filling out field information then
click on the APPLY button. Figure 11 contains exam-
ples of field devices.
[] After the data in figure 11 has been filled click on
the APPLY then the SETTINGS button.

11.2 SETTINGS SELECTON

Select the SETTINGS button to enter the menu of
figure 11.1.

11.3 ENABLED FIGURE 11. ADD/EDIT DETAILS

[] As indicated in figure 11.1, check the boxes to EN-
ABLE the channel(s) that will be utilized in a configu-
ration.
CAUTION - A CHANNEL THAT IS NOT ENABLED
WILL NOT ALARM.

11.4 SHORT MONITORING

If enabled the monitoring will create a fault if the field
wires that are connected to an appliance are shorted
together.
If a channel is being utilized for a solenoid (as in this
example) or other type of coil, disable the short moni-
toring to prevent the system from announcing a fault.
Under certain conditions, Allestec can assist in appli-
cations requiring a solenoid short supervision.

11.5 DEBOUNCE
FIGURE 11.1 SETTINGS
The de-bounce time here is utilized exclusively for
the output relays of this node and influences only the
fault detection. Refer to section 9.6 for more details. 11.8 PRINT NODE INFORMATION
Item #1 in the UTILITY MENU, SAVE NODE
11.6 RESETING NODE LED’s REPORT, can be selected to summarize the
[] Click on the RESET NODE LED’s to selectively information related to this node.
reset the SOM blinking LED’s after an alarm or fault
has occurred. For resetting LED’s on all the nodes
simultaneously, select menu option #10 on the UTIL-
ITY MENU.
[] Click on the APPLY button when finished.

11.7 TESTING THE SOM FOR EXTINGUISHING

When disconnecting the extinguishing system dis-
charge circuit for testing or maintenance, the extin-
guishing system must be isolated mechanically. Dis-
connecting the extinguishing system solely by soft-
ware or electrically is not in compliance with Factory
Mutual.

49

Homepage Previous Document

 12. RELAY NODE PREPARATION

[] While in the UTILITY MENU, select #11, NODE

MANAGEMENT, then highlight the relay node and
then select the ADD/EDIT button.
[] Collapse or leave open the node tree then click
once on the name to highlight it.

12.1 ADD/EDIT DETAILS

[] This form is identical to the input node. Follow
sections 9.1 through 9.6 for filling out field informa-
tion then click on the APPLY button. Figure 12 con-
tains examples of field devices.
[] After the data in figure 12 has been filled click on
the SETTINGS button.

12.2 SETTINGS SELECTION

[] The relay node remains always ENABLED. Figure 12. ADD/EDIT Details
[] The relay nodes do not affiliate with de-bounce
times as the other nodes.

12.3 RESET NODE LED’s

[] Click on the RESET NODE LED’s to reset the in-
put node blinking LED’s after an alarm has oc-
curred. For resetting LED’s on all the nodes in a
system simultaneously, select menu option #10 on
the UTILITY MENU.
[] Click on the APPLY button when finished.
[] Click on the SAVE and CLOSE button to return to
the main to print out the information or proceed to
continue with other nodes.

12.4 PRINT NODE INFORMATION

Item #1 in the UTILITY MENU, SAVE NODE RE-
PORT, can be selected to summarize the informa-
FIGURE 12.1 SETTINGS
tion related to this node.

50

Homepage Previous Document

 13. DIRECT CONNECTION RELEASE Input node initializing

CAUTION: ENTERING INTO ANY CONFIGURATION DISABLES THE SYSTEM FROM RESPOND-
ING TO ALARMS. THE FAULT RELAY WILL TRIP UNTIL THE CONFIGURATION IS EXITED.

13.1 SELECTING AN INPUT NODE TO TRIP AN SOM OR RELAY NODE

This selection allows configuring nodes without any time delays or logic exceptions. It is basically a
“straight through connection” from input nodes to output nodes. The nodes that were previously scanned
for an ID number in section 5.10 and loaded with data in sections 9 through 12 appear in two windows.
The input style of nodes are on located on the left and output are on the right side of the screen. The
nodes in either window can be expanded by clicking on the + to display each of the four channels or col-
lapsed by clicking on the - sign.

[] The first step in establish-

ing node mapping is to con-
nect the channels of all
nodes, one at a time, to an
icon that best represents the
intended action as indicated
back in section 9.2 . Refer to
figure 13 and highlight the
Input Node and click on the
+ to expand the node tree.
Notice the node name and
alarm location data fields are
visible from previous sec-
tions. The following example
will illustrate the technique
for mapping an Input node to
a Relay and SOM.
[] The SORT button locates
the nodes in numeric order.

FIGURE 13 . Direct connection release - node trees are collapsed.

13.2 SELECT INPUT NODE

CHANNEL TO TRIP OUT-
PUT NODES
[] Figure 13.1 shows the
menu prior to clicking on a
channel to locate it in the
SELECTED INPUT screen.
[] The channel(s) on the left
screen are prepared to map
to the channel(s) on the right
screen.
[] Now determine which input
node channel to map to an
output node on the right.
[] Double click on any input
node channel to locate it in
the lower box to prepare to
map it to another node.

FIGURE 13.1 Input and output node trees are expanded open.

51

Homepage Previous Document

 FIGURE 13.2

[] The channel that was se-

lected will now be copied to
the SELECTED INPUT box
below but can be unselected
by double clicking on it.
[] Now select the FIRE
ALARM box then ACCEPT.

FIGURE 13.3 Selecting input nodes to trip outputs.

NOTE: About figure 13.2 – The SELECT ALARM TYPE box appears to enforce the decision by the ad-
ministrator that the node channel chosen is indeed the correct one. The fire and gas alarm check boxes
have no logic control on the system. The reset function is described in later sections does have control
to how the system handles the input channel.

[] Now open the SOM tree on the right menu by clicking on the + sign.
Double click on the node channel(s) that will be activated by the SELECTED OUTPUT channel.
[] Figure 13.3 illustrates that relay node channel 3 was selected for this example. SOM channels 1 and 2
were also selected.

13.3 RESULTANT
[] Based on the example, when input node 0-1 is activated all three channels in the SELECTED OUT-
PUT menu will immediately activate. Refer to figure 13.6 for the alarm action.

13.4 VOTING CHANNELS WITHIN THE INPUT NODES

When 2 or more inputs are located into the SELECTED INPUT screen, the ENABLE VOTING box ap-
pears (not shown). Select the quantity of inputs required from the left menu to satisfy an output alarm on
the right menu. The number of input nodes to vote MUST be in alarm for their de-bounce time period
plus 300 milliseconds (simultaneously) for the alarm to be confirmed. Voting can be conducted between
channels as well as nodes.

CAUTION: THE PROCESS OF VOTING BETWEEN ALARM CHANNELS WILL SLOW THE ALARM
RESPONSE TIME DOWN.

52

Homepage Previous Document

 13.5 SAVE THE CONFIGURATION
[] After completing the re-
quired configuration, click on
the SAVE and CLOSE but-
ton to bring up the configura-
tion menu. Notice the rec-
tangle box is empty. As soon
as a configuration is created,
it will be inserted into this
box as well as future con-
figurations.
[] Type a file name that can
later be mapped to this con-
figuration. Notice in figure
13.6 this configuration name
appears during an alarm.

FIGURE 13.4 Creating and saving a configuration.

[] Now click on the OK button to save the configuration.

NOTE: When a configuration is created, it is automatically LOADED or “ready for an action”
[] Refer to section 24 to LOAD, UNLOAD and EDIT configurations.

13.6 TESTING THE CONFIGURATION TO ALARM ON A DIRECT CONNECTION RELEASE

13.7 SYSTEM FIRE ALARM MENU

Once a configuration has been created it is immediately loaded in the configuration file folder and is
ready for use. Based on the configuration that was just completed, when channel 1 of node 0 turns on
the output channels that were located into the SELECTED OUTPUT screen activate. Trip channel one
of the input node to put it into alarm. The following screen will appear in figure 13.5. Select the fire alarm
button on the touch screen, the local audible alarm will turn off and the menu appears as in figure 13.6.
The local fire alarm signal will silence. Notice the configuration name for the group of devices appears.

FIGURE 13.5 Fire alarm button FIGURE 13.6 Fire alarm menu
13.8 FIRE ALARM MENU
[] The SILENCE MENU allows audible appliances to be silenced. Reoccurring alarms on the same chan-
nel will activate the audible devices again. Refer to section 19.
[] The DETAILS brings up the menu in figure 13.8. It indicates and records when the highlighted alarm in
the menu has occurred, been reset or silenced for this #1 event. Select the OK button to go back to the
FIRE ALARM menu then select the SYSTEM MENU BUTTON.
[] Any subsequent fire alarm configurations will be located in this menu on the next line item.

53

Homepage Previous Document

 [] Select the VIEW INPUTS button as indicated in figure 13.7 to view the node details as well as any
other input alarms associated with this configuration. Selecting the VIEW INPUTS allows individual view-
ing of each input node contained in the configuration.

[] Select EXIT to return to the previous menu.

[] Select the RESET button to clear the alarm. If the
alarm has not been cleared, it will reappear.
[] To view the alarm history, go to figure 27 and se-
lect the FIRE DISPLAY button.
[] To erase the alarm history, refer to section 27, #9.
[] The DEVICE NAME and ALARM LOCATION is
the data that was placed in the ADD/EDIT DETAILS
field back in figure 9.1. Remember, the DEVICE
NAME was an icon selection.
[] The STATUS column indicates the real time activ-
ity of this channel and the ‘A” indicates the alarm is
active and “R” indicates the alarm has been cleared.
FIGURE 13.7 Node data and status.

13.9 DETAILS MENU

The data in figure 13.8 comes from the ADD/EDIT
details that was entered in figure 9.4.
[] The #0 Input Node is the editable field located in
the NODE NAME field . #0 indicates the node ID 0.
[] The #0-1 TURBINE OPTICAL is from the ALARM
LOCATION field. #0-1 indicates node ID #0, channel
1.

FIGURE 13.8 Details menu

13.10 VOTING SEQUENCING

As described in section 13.4, if the amount of initiat-
ing devices selected to vote is not attained, a
WARNING message will occur to indicate there is a
potential for an alarm that must be investigated.
Also, if initiating alarms enter the input node se-
quentially, the first alarm(s) will be a WARNING fol-
lowed by the FIRE menu when the voting is satis-
fied. Only when a voted alarm receives all its alarms
simultaneously will the WARNING be omitted and
the FIRE menu will appear. The warning alarm se-
quencing allows events to be recorded in the order
they are received. Voting menus must be reset as
well as the fire alarm menu to reset the panel. The
WARNING alarm on any configuration trips the
WARNING relay on the panel is indicated in drawing
FIGURE 13.9 Warning on a first alarm when
6.
voting.

54

Homepage Previous Document

 13.11 SYSTEM FAULT ALARM MENU
The input alarm circuit on the node ID 0, channel 1
is opened to demonstrate a fault. Select the FAULT
ALARM button in figure 13.10 to bring up the FAULT
ALARM in figure 13.11. Figure 13.11 shows the
FAULT ALARM menu.
[] To silence the panel audible alarm, select the si-
lence button. If the fault alarm remains unattended,
the audible alarm will resound within 30 minutes.
[] The DETAILS button brings up the fault menu. It
indicates and records when the fault occurred and
has been silenced or reset.

FIGURE 13.10 Fault alarm button

13.12 FAULT ALARM MENU

The FAULT ALARM menu identifies that node ID
#0, channel 1 has a SUPERVISION FAIL and the
STATUS indicates the fault is Active. A supervision
fail is when an ELR is not installed or a conductor on
that channel has become loose.

FIGURE 13.11 Fault menu

55

Homepage Previous Document

 14. DIRECT CONNECTION W/DELAY RELEASE Input node initializing

14.1 SELECTING AN INPUT NODE TO TRIP AN SOM OR RELAY NODE -

This configuration is identical to the DIRECT CONNECTION RELEASE except this menu expects a time
delay to be entered in the SECONDS window. Select input channels to map to output channels as dem-
onstrated in section 13. This configuration should be used only with devices that contain a solenoid.
When the configuration is complete, give it a unique file name.

14.2 ENTER TIME DELAY

[] Refer to figure 14 and type in the time in seconds or use the or arrow to adjust the time. Enter up
to 9999 seconds. When this time expires the solenoid will turn on.
[] Enter from 10 to 9999 seconds for a solenoid on time. After this time expires, the solenoid will turn off.

14.3 VOTING Refer to sec-

tion 13.4, Voting channels
within the input nodes.

14.4 ABORT OPTION

In section 9.1 channel 2 of
the input node was named
abort. Any of the 4 fields
could have been named
abort but once it is selected
as indicated in figure 14.1, it
then becomes associated
with that configuration. Now
when the Pre-Discharge De-
lay is counting down and the
abort switch is pushed, the
timer will stop counting as
long as the switch is held in
and the word ABORT AC-
TIVE will appear as indicated
in figure 14.4. Releasing the
abort switch will commence FIGURE 14. Direction connection with delay.
the timing. The abort does
not influence the solenoid on
time.
CAUTIION: UTILIZING THE
ABORT WILL AFFECT THE
TIME REQUIRED FOR EX-
TINGUISHING.

14.5 RESULTANT
Once any initiating device
from the SELECTED INPUT
window enters into alarm,
the Pre-Discharge time in
the SECONDS window will
commence and when t =
zero, the selected devices in
the SELECTED OUTPUT
window will initiate at the
same time and remain ON
for the duration of the Sole-
noid On Time. Follow the
example menus in figures
13.1 through 13.6 to config-
ure this menu. FIGURE 14.1. Loading the configuration with data.

56

Homepage Previous Document

[] Select the DELAY button to view the
counter as indicated in figure 14.4.
NOTE: If the time delay is short and the
menu is entered late, the time may have al-
ready expired.
[] During alarm time countdown, the FIRE
STATUS indicator will read ACTIVE as long
as this channel is in alarm, however the
alarm will continue in progress.

14.6 VOTING SEQUENCING Refer to sec-

tion 13.10.

14.7 MORE CONFIGURATIONS

[] Configurations can be made utilizing the
same nodes but in a different logic. An exam-
ple is a DIRECT CONNECTION with time FIGURE 14.2. Naming the configuration.
delay and unique file name has an optical
detector tripping a solenoid in 30 seconds.
Now, there is a manual pull from a different
node address connected to the same sole-
noid but through a DIRECT CONNECTION
W/O delay and has its unique file name. So
when the optical commences the time delay
starts, then if the manual pull is tripped, the
manual pull will instantly override the time
delay and trip the solenoid. It is “building
blocks” like these two configuration files that
can create more complex logic.

FIGURE 14.3 Creating the alarm.

FIGURE 14.4 Selecting Delay times button

and pushing the abort switch.

57

Homepage Previous Document

 15. DIRECT CONNECTION RELEASE 4-20mA node initializing

15.1 SELECTING A 4-20mA NODE FOR TRIPPING AN SOM OR RELAY NODE

This configuration is similar as selecting the input node in section 13 except the gas node is selected
here. NOTE: This is the only configuration allowed to utilize the gas node selection.

15.2 SELECT A GAS CHAN-

NEL
[] Refer to figure 15 and se-
lect the + on the gas node
tree to open the 4 channels to
prepare for configurations.
[] This example illustrates one
gas node but it is possible
there could be more.
[] Double click on one or more
of the four channels of the
gas node to locate it in the
SELECTED INPUT screen. In
this example two gas chan-
nels were selected. The SE-
LECT ALARM TYPE menu in
figure 15.1 appears.
[] If the selection of the gas
node channel was not correct,
simply double click on it to
locate it where it originated.
[] Check mark the GAS FIGURE 15. Direction connection from gas to relay node.
ALARM box then the AC-
CEPT box.
FIGURE 15.1 Select the gas
alarm box .
15.3 SELECT A SET POINT
THRESHOLD
[] The SELECT THRESHOLD
box appears as indicated in
figure 15.2 and it is at this
location to check off the alarm
set point box for this channel.
Then select the ACCEPT but-
ton.
[] For this example channel 1,
FIGURE 15.2 Select
METER VALVE LOW alarm
the threshold level.
was selected along with the
control valve. Note back in
figure 10.3 the low alarm of
this channel was set at 5%
LFL.
NOTE: To alarm on the other
two set points for this same
FIGURE 15.3
channel, a complete new con-
Error message when
figuration would have to be
trying to select an in-
made. If a new configuration
put node for gas.
is made, the same or different
appliances can be selected.
[] In this example, channel 3
was chosen to trip on the
HIGH alarm. This channel
was selected to trip at 15%
LFL.

58

Homepage Previous Document

 [] Now select output appliances to trip from the gas inputs. In this example the SOM ID node #2, channel
1 and the relay node ID #3 channels 1 & 3 were selected.
[] Upon completion of mapping the node channels, click on the SAVE and CLOSE button to bring up the
CONFIGURATION screen. In this example the configuration was named “TURBINE ROOM - GAS”.
[] At this point the configuration was loaded in the CONFIGURATION folder and can be viewed by going
to the UTILITY MENU and selecting #13 MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS. The configuration is ready for
use.

15.4 RESULTANT
When a LOW alarm on
channel1 or HIGH alarm on
channel 3 occurs in the SE-
LECTED INPUT screen, all
three devices will activate in
the SELECTED OUTPUT
screen. Notice in figure 15
that on the gas alarm SE-
LECTED INPUT both chan-
nels identify the THRESH-
OLD level.

FIGURE 15.4 Create a configuration.

FIGURE 15.5 Select gas alarm button. FIGURE 15.6 Gas alarm menu.

15.5 TESTING THE GAS NODE CONFIGURA-

TION FOR AN ALARM
Slowly increase the current entering into the input of
the gas node under observation. In this example,
channel 1 is what was named the meter valve.
When the current (gas concentration) level is equal
to or exceeds the SETPOINT level (LOW ALARM =
5%), the alarm will occur. Refer to figure 15.5 and
select on the “GAS ALARM PRESS HERE” button.
The menu in figure 15.6 appears and allows further
investigation of the alarm. If there is an audible ap-
pliance configured, select the silence menu
(described in detail in section 19). Notice the 2 in-
puts in figure 15.7 that were included in this configu-
ration. Also note that input 1-1 is in alarm. To fur- FIGURE 15.7 VIEW INPUTS selected.
ther investigate this alarm select the GAS LEVEL
button.

59

Homepage Previous Document

 15.6 VIEW THE ALARM
After selecting the GAS LEVEL button the graph in figure 15.8 appears. It is formatted as the original
menu where the SET POINTS are entered. The menu is color on the monitor so to identify the colors for
this manual the REAL TIME bar is the left side, then LO THRESHOLD and HIHI. Notice the REALTIME
DATA is 9% and the LOW THRESHOLD is at the setting of 5%. The REAL TIME DATA is the actual
current represented in % of the scale.
NOTE: It may take a few seconds after selecting the GAS CHART button before the bar graph can con-
struct the data and appear.

15.7 DETAILS DATA

After viewing the bar graph, return the input current below the alarm threshold, select the DONE button
then the DETAILS button to bring up the message screen as shown in figure 15.9. This menu indicates
the time of the alarm as well as the note field from the EDIT menu in the SETTINGS section. Notice the
GAS MODULE %LFL text in figure 15.9 which was inserted back in figure 10. The #1 is identifying node
ID #1. Select the OK button to return back to the GAS ALARM MENU then RESET the alarm.

FIGURE 15.8 Gas chart alarm screen FIGURE 15.9 Details screen

15.8 FAULT ANNUNCIATION

If the 4-20mA loop is opened or the current drops
below –9% of the scale, a fault message will occur.
Select the FAULT ALARM button and the FAULT
ALARM menu will appear. A fault was created for this
channel and under the STATUS name is the letter
“A” (active) indicating the fault input current is still
below the –9%. The STATUS letter will change to an
“R” (reset) if the fault input current is brought back to
normal operating limits. Next to the STATIUS is #1-1
which indicated node ID #1, channel 1. The FAULT
DESCRIPTION identifies that the loop current fell
below the –9% range. This description can also iden-
tify a short or open in the 4-20mA loop.
FIGURE 15.10 Fault alarm screen

15.9 VOTING BETWEEN GAS CHANNELS

If more than one channel of the gas node is located in the SELECTED INPUT box as indicated in figure
15, the VOTING box appears. Select the voting quantity to satisfy the alarm condition. When alarm(s)
appear but do not satisfy the voting condition, a WARNING alarm will occur as indicated in figure 13.9.
Select the WARNING button and then the DETAILS button to acquire the node channel address. As
other alarms appear which do not attain the voting requirement, use the scroll buttons (figure 15.6) to
view and select the specific alarm. Once the voting has been attained, the GAS ALARM button (figure
15.5) will appear. Select this button and proceed to any of the alarms appearing on the menu to view the
GAS CHART. Alarms must return below their set point to be reset and the WARNING alarms must be
reset.
NOTE: Gas warning menus after selecting figure 13.9 currently do not indicate gas concentration levels
but indicate which sensor is in alarm.

60

Homepage Previous Document

 16. DUAL MODE RELEASE Input node initializing

16.1 SELECTING AN INPUT NODE TO TRIP AN SOM OR RELAY NODE

The dual mode release is a configuration that requires two solenoids, two releasing agents and a line
pressure switch. This configuration utilizes a second tank as a backup mode in the event the pressure
switch does not function or if the fire is too large in magnitude for the first release to extinguish the fire.
The cause and effect for this configuration is described in detail below.

16.2 CAUSE AND EFFECT RESULTS

When receiving an alarm from the input node:
There are various sequence of operations that can be executed depending on the real time status of a
fire. The options that are listed below account for when this release configuration is utilized.

A. CAUSE
The SOM is activated, the MAIN solenoid timing starts, but the fire is manually extinguished prior to the
MAIN cycle time expiring.
B. EFFECT
The display will start counting down from its pre-selected time until the time expires. The display will
continue to count down unless the alarm is reset (providing the proper exception is checked off, figure
16) or the configuration is committed to the release of the first tank.
C. CAUSE
The SOM is activated, the MAIN solenoid timing starts, the fire remains until the countdown expires and
the MAIN solenoid trips thereby extinguishing the fire. The pressure switch changes state within 7 sec-
onds.
D. EFFECT
The MAIN agent release is sufficient enough to extinguish the fire and the RESERVE solenoid is
never activated.
E. CAUSE
The SOM is activated, the MAIN circuit timing starts and counts down to zero, the pressure switch
changes state within 7 seconds. The fire is of sufficient magnitude to continue after the MAIN solenoid
trips.
F. EFFECT
The display commences its second timing sequence on the RESERVE solenoid and upon the expiration
of the timing, the RESERVE solenoid trips.
G. CAUSE
The SOM is activated, the MAIN circuit timing starts, the pressure switch does not change state within 7
seconds.
H. EFFECT
The RESERVE solenoid will automatically turn on.

61

Homepage Previous Document

 Figure 16 displays the dual
release mode configuration
menu prior to mapping the
nodes or making exceptions.
Select the CANCEL button
to exit if this menu is not the
correct.

16.3
SELECT DEVICE INPUTS
[] The first step is to expand
the input node by clicking on
the + symbol and then dou-
ble click on the specific
channels required to trip the
release.
[] For the alarm device and
pressure switch check the
fire alarm box in the SE-
LECT ALARM TYPE menu
(figure 13.2).
[] Figure 16.1 indicates one FIGURE 16. Dual release menu - preparing to configure.
optical detector on channel 1
as well as a pressure switch
(required) on channel 3 were
selected for the two inputs.

16.4 SELECT PRESSURE

SWITCH INPUT
[] Now highlight the pressure
switch in the SELECTED
INPUT screen then click on
the SELECT PRESSURE
SWITCH button. Notice in
figure 16.1 the pressure
switch is displayed below the
SELECT PRESSURE
SWITCH button. The pres-
sure switch can also be se-
lected from another node.

16.5 SELECT TIME DELAY

[] Enter the time for the PRE-
DISCHARGE DELAY and
the RESERVE RELEASE
DEALY solenoids. This time FIGURE 16.1 Input / output node mapping and selecting exceptions.
can be up to 9999 seconds
as long as the second delay
is 7 seconds longer than the
PRE-DISCHARGE timer.

NOTE: The two time delays are independent of each other and both commence countdown simultane-
ously.

16.6 SELECT DEVICE OUTPUTS

[] Now expand the SOM on the other side and double click on two solenoids (required).
[] For this example, relay node ID #3, channel 2 was also selected.
NOTE: If other devices are located in the SELECTED OUTPUT box, they too will turn on as soon as the
PRE-DISCHARGE DELAY times down to 0 seconds.

62

Homepage Previous Document

 16.7 SELECT 2nd SOLENOID
[] Highlight the second solenoid channel then click on the SELECT SECOND SOLENOID button. Notice
that the solenoid is displayed below the SELECT SECOND SOLENOID button.

16.8 EXCEPTION BOXES

[] Check the exception boxes if required:
[] VOTING - Refer to section 13.4, Voting channels within the input nodes.
[] RESERVE RELEASE TIMER WILL CONTINUE
If left unchecked, the time sequence will continue even though the input node alarm has gone away. If
the box is checked and the alarm goes away during countdown, the RESERVE countdown will stop and
hold until reset, never tripping.
[] MAIN RELEASE TIMER CAN BE RESET
If checked, the main release cannot be reset prior to the 1st discharge if the input node alarm clears. If
voting, none of the inputs can be reset.
[] Click on the SAVE and CLOSE button after verifying the correct configuration map is established.
[] Just type a file name that is windows appropriate in the bottom configuration field then click the OK
button.

16.9 SAVE THE CONFIGURATION

[] SAVING CONFIGURATIONS A configuration file name can contain up to 128 characters and cannot
contain \ / : * ? “ | characters.
[] The configuration file has been located in the configuration folder and is armed.

16.10 TESTING THE DUAL

MODE RELEASE CON-
FIGURATION FOR AN
ALARM
Once a configuration has
been created it is immedi-
ately loaded in the configura-
tion file folder and is ready
for use. For this example,
node ID #0, channel 1 will be
set into alarm by shorting
across channel one of the
input node. The FIRE
ALARM menu appears as
indicated in figure 13.5. Se-
lect the FIRE ALARM button FIGURE 16.2 Saving the configuration. In this example the configura-
to bring up the FIRE ALARM tion file name is called “dual release”.
menu. This menu operates
similar to previous menus.

16.11 FIRE ALARM MENU ITEMS (FIGURE 16.4)

[] The DEVICE NAME and ALARM LOCATION is the data that was placed in the ADD/EDIT DETAILS
field back in figure 9.2.

63

Homepage Previous Document

 [] The STATUS column indicates the real time activity
of this channel and the “A” indicates the alarm is ac-
tive. The device in alarm is no longer active after the
RESET ALARM button is selected, then the letter “R”
will appear.
[] As other alarms appear, they will be located in time
occurrence order. Use the scroll arrows to the right of
the alarm window if to many alarms fill the screen and
the lower rows are out of view.
[] When the DETAILS button is selected, the menu in
figure 9.3 appears. Remember back in section 16.5,
20 seconds was entered in the PRE-DISCHARGE
DELAY window and 45 seconds in the RESERVE RE-
LEASE DELAY.
[] The fire status ACTIVE sign (figure 16.5) turns to FIGURE 16.3 Fire alarm menu
INACTIVE if the alarm device contacts open. The tim-
ers will continue to count based on the exceptions lo-
cated in the check boxes and the real-time device in
alarm.
[] Select the RETURN TO ALARM MENU to go back
to figure 16.5.

16.12 PRESSURE SWITCH ACTIVATION

[] Figure 16.4 indicates when the first timer expired. If
the pressure switch does not change state within 7
seconds, the second time is truncated and the reserve
tank trips. In this example, the pressure switch is con-
nected to node ID #0, channel 3, figure 9, and is acti-
vated shortly after the first timer expires. At this point
in time, this action is recorded as a second alarm in-
put. The reserve timer will continue to countdown until
T=0 and the second tank trips. FIGURE 16.4 Input status menu indicating two
alarm inputs from the configuration named
“Dual Release”.

16.13 VOTING SEQUENCING Refer to section 13.10

16.14 LOCATING OTHER NODE CHANNELS IN THE SELECTED OUTPUT SCREEN

[] As indicated in figure 16.1, this example loaded relay node ID #3, channel 2 in the SELECT OUTPUT
SCREEN. Any node channel(s) loaded into this screen will activate IMMEDIATELY upon expiration of the
FIRST timer and are precluded from any timing issues. If the administrator does not want to complicate a
configuration by adding another output device, a separate configuration can be made in the DIRECT
CONNECTION with delay, section #13.

64

Homepage Previous Document

 FIGURE 16.5 Dual time count down FIGURE 16.6 Pressure switch monitor

65

Homepage Previous Document

 17. WATER MIST (CYCLE) RELEASE

Selection #14 of the UTILITY MENU allows the use of mist systems that correspond to NFPA 750. This
configuration allows variable time delays for the mist on/off cycling as well as pause modes. Notice in
figure 17 the center of the menu designates this is a CYCLE MIST release.
NOTE: For the proper real-time function of this configuration to work properly, the device in alarm must
be NON-LATCHING.

17.1 APPLICATIONS
The water mist configuration can be programmed to cycle the mist delivery to obtain maximum effective-
ness in fire suppression while utilizing a minimal amount of water. Applications include industrial electri-
cal equipment, flammable liquid pumping and storage facilities, co-generation power plants, oil refiner-
ies, etc.

17.2 OPERATION
The water mist configuration is designed to operate in fire systems that utilize non-latching detectors.
The control panel monitors the detector(s) fire relay status and determines if a continued mist application
is necessary, should the fire continue.

Upon receiving a confirmed fire signal from the input node, the pre-discharge delay timing sequence will
commence until its time expires. During this time the program counts down to initiate its first discharge
cycle. The mist solenoid will cycle on and off in a timing sequence pre-programmed by the administrator.
There is a provision to stipulate the quantity of complete cycles. After the pre-programmed cycle counts
(mist on & mist off) have been satisfied, the program will enter into a pause mode, maintaining the count
down in seconds. After the expiration of the pause mode, the program will suspend its timing sequences
if the fire has been extinguished. If the fire persists, the node will enter into its second timing sequence.
The number of timing sequences is usually determined by the capacity of the water supply and selected
in the CYCLE COUNT window. Select a timing sequence that will deplete the water supply should the
fire persists.

17.3 PRE-DISCHARGE DELAY

Refer to figure #17.1 and enter a time of up to 999 seconds in the PRE-DISCHARGE DELAY window.
This initial timing allows for other functions and activity to take place such as audible alarms before the
actual release is committed. No release action occurs during this event until the MIST ON TIME initiates.
If other devices are also located into the SELECTED OUPUT box they will also not be activated and re-
main on continuously whether all the delays expire or if the alarm is reset.

17.4 MIST ON TIME

Enter a time of up to 999 seconds in the MIST ON TIME window that corresponds to a correct delay.
Upon expiration of the PRE-DISCHARGE DELAY, the MIST ON TIME initiates the solenoid while the
count down time progresses.

17.5 MIST OFF TIME

Enter a time of up to 999 seconds in the MIST OFF TIME window that corresponds to a correct delay.
Upon expiration of the MIST ON TIME the solenoid deactivates while the count down time progresses.

17.6 PAUSE INTERVAL and CYCLE COUNT

After the pre-programmed quantity of mist on/off cycles have completed, the following events will occur:
The program enters into a PAUSE INTERVAL mode based on the amount of time inserted into the win-
dow (up to 999 seconds). Subsequent actions are taken based on the two following scenarios:
A. During the PAUSE INTERVAL, if the fire input signal is no longer valid, (indicating the fire is extin-
guished) then at the end of the time delay, the program will terminate at the first cycle.
B. If the fire remains after the pause mode time expires, the program will continue to sequence starting
with the MIST ON TIME and MIST OFF TIME based on how many counts are inserted into the
CYCLE COUNT window.
Note that there are time selections in the example of figure 17.1. The maximum amount of CYCLE
COUNTS is 999.

66

Homepage Previous Document

 Figure 17 displays the cycle
mist configuration prior to
mapping the nodes or mak-
ing exceptions. Figure 17.1
displays exception boxes
that were filled.

17.7 SELECT DEVICE IN-

PUTS
[] The first step is to expand
the input node menu and
double click on any channel
required to trip the mist re-
lease.
[] Figure 17.1 shows that a
turbine optical for the SE-
LECTED INPUT was se-
lected. If a selection is mis-
takenly loaded, simply dou-
ble click on it to undo the
operation.
FIGURE 17. Preparing to configure the cycle mist release.
17.8 SELECT MIST SOLE-
NOID
Because other outputs can
be located in the same SE-
LECTOR OUTPUT screen,
the solenoid must be dis-
cretely selected as shown at
the bottom of the screen in
figure 17.1.
Highlight the solenoid then
select the SELECT MIST
SOLENOID button.

FIGURE 17.1 Selecting node channel inputs and outputs.

67

Homepage Previous Document

 17.9 SELECT OTHER
NODE CHANNELS
For this example, the SOM
ID #2, channel 1 and the
RELAY node ID #3, channel
2 was also entered into the
SELECTED OUTPUT
screen in lieu of creating an-
other configuration.

17.10 RESET ALLOWED

To prevent the CYCLE RE-
LEASE timing from being
reset once it has started,
click on this box.

FIGURE 17.2 Naming the mist configuration.

17.11 VOTING SEQUENCING Refer to section 13.8.

17.12 SAVING THE CONFIGURATION

Refer to figure 17.2 and in this example the file name “Mist Release” is given to the configuration. A con-
figuration file name can contain up to 128 characters and cannot contain \ / : * ? “ | characters.
[] The configuration file has been located in the configuration folder.
[] Refer to section 24 for details on configuration management.

17.13 TESTING THE CYCLE MIST RELEASE

CONFIGURATION FOR AN ALARM
Once a configuration has been created it is immedi-
ately loaded in the configuration file folder and is
ready for use. For this example, node ID #0, channel
1 will be set into alarm by shorting across the input.
The FIRE ALARM menu appears (figure 13.5). Select
the FIRE ALARM button to bring up the FIRE ALARM
menu. This menu operates like the previous menus.
[] Select the VIEW INPUTS to see all inputs associ-
ated with this configuration.
[] To view the dynamic time screen select the DELAY
button and the menu in figure 17.5 appears.
[] When the PRE-DISCHARGE time commences to
0, the SELECT MIST SOLENOID from section 17.8 FIGURE 17.3 Selecting the fire menu.
will start to cycle.
[] The other two devices selected in section 17.9 will
turn on but will not be included in the cycle.

FIGURE 17.4. Selecting the view inputs but-

ton.

68

Homepage Previous Document

 [] Based on the data entered in figure 17.1 the alarm
will commit to the delays and reset boxes until all
events have completed.
[] The FIRE STATUS indicator in figure 17.5 indi-
cates the real-time of the alarm input.

17.14 RESET THE ALARM

If manual intervention takes over the alarm in count-
down, it can be reset by pressing the RETURN TO
ALARM DISPLAY button then pressing the RESET
ALARM button. Reset the WARNING alarm if it has
occurred.

FIGURE 17.5 Time sequence menu.

FIGURE 17.6 Mist release details.

69

Homepage Previous Document

 18. DEDICATED APPLIANCE RESET

Select F8 to choose the

DEDICATED INPUT RESET
configuration. A dedicated
input from the input node
allows appliance(s) that are
loaded into the SELECTED
OUTPUT window of a con-
figuration to be remotely re-
set. First, there must be a
configuration utilizing an out-
put device in order to turn it
off. The SOM or relay node
can be utilized to trip appli-
ances but the SOM provides
line supervision. To demon-
strate this configuration, a
DIRECT CONFIGURATION
RELEASE is selected from
section 13.2 where the TUR-
BINE OPTICAL alarm trips
three appliances, including a
STROBE. A DEDICATED FIGURE 18. Dedicated Appliance Reset Configuration. Utilizing chan-
INPUT RESET configuration nel 4 of the input node to reset the strobe in the SELECTED OUTPUT.
(figure 18) will be created to Channel 4 was named reset strobe back in the ADD/EDIT DETAILS in
turn off the strobe after the section 9 knowing it would be used in this example.
alarm input initiates it.

Once the input node channel one is acti- FIGURE 18.1 Select the
vated, the alarm will occur to turn on the reset function box.
HORN, STROBE and VENT FAN as the
configuration of figure 13.3 indicates. In
order to implement the remote strobe re-
set, a second configuration is created as
indicated in figure 18. Channel four of the
input node will include a momentary
pushbutton switch to turn off the strobe.
NOTE: The initiating device connected to
the input node can be latching or non-
latching.

18.1 CREATE THE DEDICATED RESET

[] In this example, after selecting the
DEDICATED INPUT RESET configura-
tion, open the input node and double click
the channel named RESET STROBE to
copy it into the SELECTED INPUT box.
[] Select the RESET FUNCTION box.
[] Open the SOM node and double click
the SKID STROBE channel to copy it into
the SELECTED OUTPUT box.
NOTE: Any device located in the SE-
LECTED OUTPUT window will be RESET
utilizing this configuration and cannot be FIGURE 18.2 This message appears if the selected input
alarmed again until the input alarm condi- node channel has been utilized in another configuration.
tion has been reset. The configuration to reset the strobe is DEDICATED and
[] Assign an appropriate configuration therefore should be the only function assigned to this node
name similar to figure 18.3 and save it. input.

70

Homepage Previous Document

 [] Both configurations are armed and
ready for commands.

18.2 TEST THE DEDICATED RE-

SET
[] Tripping channel one of the input
node, TURBINE OPTICAL, will acti-
vate the SOM channel one (SKID
STROBE) and channel two (SKID
HORN). The relay node, VENT FAN
channel will also activate.
[] The FIRE ALARM button appears.
Select the button to review the FIRE
ALARM menu, figure 18.4.
[] The two SOM and one relay node
FIGURE 18.3 Creating a configuration and naming it remote
channels activate based on the con-
reset.
figuration in figure 13.3.
[] If there was data inserted in the
EDIT field, the DETAILS button can
be selected to review the data.
[] At this time the alarm can be reset
if the TURBINE OPTICAL input is
cleared.
[] But in this example the STROBE
on channel one of the SOM will be
reset.

18.3 RESETING THE STROBE (EXAMPLE)

[] Now trip channel four of the input node to turn off
the STROBE.
[] Both alarms are ACTIVE as indicated under the
STATUS column but the STROBE has been turned FIGURE 18.4 First, the turbine optical on node
off. 0-1 was tripped, then the remote reset button
[] Since this is a multiple alarm, to view data in the on node 0-4 was pushed to reset the strobe.
line #2 alarm, use the scroll button then select the
appropriate button to view the DETAILS or RESET.
[] Technically there are two alarms in the FIRE
ALARM menu. Each alarm will have to be RESET
individually by scrolling to the intended alarm and
resetting it.

NOTE: The original configuration that created the

alarm will be required to initiate again to turn the
strobe back on after the alarms have been reset.

FIGURE 18.5 Selecting the view inputs of the

turbine room configuration from figure 18.4.

71

Homepage Previous Document

18.4 CONNECTING A SWITCH TO THE INPUT NODE
Knowing which inputs are not utilized on an input node for other initiating devices, connect a momentary N.O. pushbut-
ton switch with a supervising resistor to an UNUSED channel. Wire the pushbutton into one of the four channels as indi-
cated in Drawing 8, utilizing a 3.9K ELR .

18.5 FAULT ALARM

If the connection to the input node REMOTE RESET channel is opened when the fire panel is in the quiescent mode, a
system fault will be created.

72

Homepage Previous Document

 19. SILENCING AN AUDIBLE DEVICE AT THE CONTROL PANEL

This section explains the procedure to silence an audible device locally at the control panel. There must
already be configuration(s) that trips an audible device. The configuration utilized in figure 13.3 will be
tripped into alarm to demonstrate this feature. This configuration required the HORN ICON to be se-
lected as indicated in figure 19.1. The TURBINE OPTICAL will trip the horn which can be silenced. In
this example a horn is utilized for the device to be silenced; however, any type of audible device can be
utilized but the HORN ICON must be selected (AT THE SOM). When an alarm occurs, the horn can be
silenced at the touch screen and will reactivate on any successive alarms mapped to this device.

FIGURE 19. Add/Edit details of the input node. FIGURE 19.1 Add/Edit details of the SOM.

19.1 RESULTANT - TESTING THE INPUT NODE

CONFIGURATION FOR AN ALARM
Upon activation of NODE ID#0-1, TURBINE OPTI-
CAL, channels one and two of the SOM immediately
alarm. Channel three of the relay node also acti-
vates because it was also included in the configura-
tion.
[] Select the fire alarm button and the menu 19.2
appears indicating the initiating alarm action.
[] Select the DETAILS button to view any data that
was entered in previous sections.
[] The alarm can be totally reset at this time by push-
ing the RESET ALARM button.
[] Select the VIEW INPUTS button to observe any
input devices associated with this configuration. FIGURE 19.2 Creating the alarm.
[] EXIT.
[] Select the SILENCE MENU button in figure 19.2
to enter the OUTPUT DEVICES screen as indicated
in figure 19.4.
[] The STATUS indicates that this device is: A = ON,
(default on alarm) or S = SILENCED.
[] The DEVICE NAME appears and indicates node
ID #2, channel 2 is the SKID HORN.
[] If more audible devices were selected in the Con-
figuration, they would appear in the same menu and
can be selectively highlighted using the scroll bars.
[] After selecting a device name with the scroll bars,
select the SILENCE SINGLE DEVICE button to si-
lence it.

FIGURE 19.3 Selecting the view inputs button.

73

Homepage Previous Document

 [] If the administrator wants to manually reinstate the
audible device, select the TURN ON SLENCED DE-
VICE button. These buttons toggle the highlighted
device on & off.
[] Notice in figure 19.5 the STATUS indicates the de-
vice is off.
[] If there are more than one audible devices in alarm
in this configuration, the SILENCE ALL DEVICES
can be selected.
NOTE: Any incoming alarm will re-initialize the appli-
ance based on the configuration created.
[] Select the DONE button to go back to the FIRE
ALARM menu.
[] An audible device can be reset first without silenc-
ing it if the initiating alarm has cleared.
[] Another configuration could be mapped to this FIGURE 19.4 Silence menu selected indicat-
same skid horn turning it on if it was already silenced. ing the horn is turned on.

NOTE: The horn icon must be select at

the SOM PRIOR to creating the configura-
tion or the device name will not display the
horn data.

FIGURE 19.5 Silence single device button is

selected thereby turning the horn off.

74

Homepage Previous Document

 20. CONFIGURING ALARMS WITH NO OUTPUT ACTION

NOTE: This section will be included in later software releases.

Configurations can be created for applications that utilize the GAS or DIRECT CONNECTION RE-
LEASE where the local panel is alarmed but there is no output node action taken. This style of configu-
ration is useful for recording input actions that will not result in activating an output node but the adminis-
trator can acknowledge the alarm. After an alarm has been activated it will follow the standard proce-
dures of bringing up the gas or fire alarm display and enabling the administrator to reset it. Once reset,
go to the appropriate alarm box at the bottom of the UTILITY menu and select the proper button to view
the recorded action.

20.1 CREATING A DIRECT CONFIGURATION WITH THE INPUT NODE

Go to the F8 menu and select the DIRECT CONNECTION RELEASE configuration menu. Open the
input node window and select the input(s) which will be necessary to trip the control panel. After select-
ing the desired input(s), select the SAVE AND CLOSE button then give the configuration a filename to
save it to the folder. Test the alarm sequence for integrity.

20.2 CREATING A DIRECT CONFIGURATION WITH THE 4-20mA NODE

Go to the F8 menu and select the DIRECT CONNECTION RELEASE configuration menu. Open the gas
node window and select input(s) which will be necessary to trip the control panel. Select the set point
level at which point to trip a local alarm. After selecting the desired input(s), select the SAVE AND
CLOSE button. Give the configuration a name to save it to the configuration folder. Test the alarm se-
quence for integrity.

75

Homepage Previous Document

 21. TESTING ALARM CONFIGURATIONS

21.1 PRIOR TO TESTING CONFIGURATIONS

At the end of each configuration section is an example on how to test it. Although there are examples
throughout, the administrator must follow procedures then go back to each configuration to test.

21.2 TESTING CONFIGURATIONS

To test configurations refer to section 24 and follow instructions for LOADING and UNLOADING configu-
rations. UNLOAD all configurations except the one(s) to test. It is recommended that each configuration
is tested by itself and not when other unrelated configurations are LOADED. This procedure allows the
administrator to focus on the specific task. More complex configurations that share common nodes can
then be tested as a group after selectively testing each one independently. When a configuration is
ready for testing, activate the associated node and verify proper operations of all devices. Proceed to
UNLOAD the tested configuration and LOAD the next one to be tested. The administrator has the option
to test all configurations after independently testing each one. REMEMBER to LOAD configurations that
are to be utilized when the system is in monitoring mode. It is OK to leave configurations UNLOADED
when the system is in monitoring mode as long as the administrator is aware of the situation. An UN-
LOADED configuration is the same as never creating it in the first place.

CAUTION: REMOVE SOLENOID(S) FROM THEIR TANKS PRIOR TO TESTING THE SYSTEM TO
PREVENT ACCIDENTAL AGENT DISCHARGE. Refer to section 21.3 if the administrator chooses
to disable a configuration with a solenoid.

21.3 DISABLING THE SYSTEM FROM AGENT RELEASING

There are several techniques to disable the system from tripping the suppression agent. Based on the
local authority having jurisdiction, select one or more of the procedures to disable the system.

1. MECHANICAL—The most secure method is to physically remove the solenoid from the release
tank. Make sure the solenoid pin is reset after testing prior to connecting back to
the release tank.
WARNING — THE SYSTEM DOES NOT KNOW IF A SOLENOID IS REMOVED FROM A RE-
LEASE TANK.
2. ELECTRICAL— Insert a block valve in series with the solenoid circuit as indicated in drawing 11.
When the block valve is opened, the current path to the solenoid is interrupted
and at the same time a fault is created for that channel.
3. ELECTRONIC— Entering UTILITY MENU #13, MANGE CONFIGURATONS, and UNLOAD a
configuration with a solenoid is another option as described in section 24.2.

21.4 ROUTINE TESTING

Establish a standard testing routine based on the authority having jurisdiction or more frequently if the
situation demands.

21.5 ALARMS WHILE THE SYSTEM IS DISABLED

As always, precautionary measures should be kept in place whenever a system is in a disable mode.
The local authority having jurisdiction will have procedures to follow.

As indicated in section 6.8, while in the MANAGE CONFIGURATION menu, #13, the polling is sus-
pends, a fault is created and therefore no alarms will result; however, due to the characteristics of the
nodes, the following events will occur when exiting the manage configuration menu.
1. If a gas configuration is LOADED, the following events will occur: If there is a gas alarm that oc-
curred then went away and then the menu is then exited, the alarm will not be detected.
2. If a fire configuration is LOADED (input, or SOM node is utilized), the following events will occur: If
there is an alarm that occurred then went away and then the MANAGE CONFIGURATION is then
exited, the alarm will be detected.

76

Homepage Previous Document

 22. MULTIPLE ALARMS
22.1 SYSTEM ALARM MENU
The SYSTEM ALARM menu is a template with corre-
sponding alarm buttons which do not change location
on the menu. Anytime there is an alarm the FIRE,
GAS, WARNING and FAULT button will remain in the
same location on the menu.

If multiple alarms occur from different style nodes

as indicated in figure 22, it is up to the administrator
attending the event to select the proper style of alarm
(gas, fire, warning, fault). If no action is taken, the
system will continue to execute the configura-
tions based on their timely occurrences.

After selecting an alarm button, the current menu will

indicate MORE ALARMS as indicated in the example
of figure 22.1 to remind the administrator to go back FIGURE 22. Two simultaneous alarms.
to the SYSTEM ALARM menu and select other active
alarm(s).

The MORE ALARMS button will appear whether the

new alarm is from an input or 4-20mA node. The RE-
TURN TO ALARM MENU button will appear if new
alarms occur within the same or different node.

22.2 SELECTING A SPECIFIC ALARM

In example 22.1, if more than one alarm appears in
the same window, use the scroll bars to the right of
the alarm window to highlight the desired alarm ac-
tion then select the proper submenu button to pro-
ceed with other detailed events.

22.3 SELECTING THE DETAILS BUTTON WITH

FIGURE 22.1 Viewing the fire alarm menu
MULTIPLE ALARMS
when another alarm arrives.
During an alarm, the DETAILS button can be se-
lected for the device initiating the alarm. On multiple
alarms be aware of the specific alarm to scroll to on
the FIRE ALARM menu prior to entering the DE-
TAILS menu. The menu indicates what the node
name is as well as its ID.

22.4 HISTORY BUFFER

The data available on the alarm screens can be re-
viewed at a later time because the events were re-
corded. Refer to section 23.2 for more information. It
is important to be aware that the information in these
fields remains there and subsequent alarms will ap-
pear below old entries. To erase the alarm buffer
navigate to the UTILITY MENU and select #9 CLEAR
ALL HISTORY DATA. The GAS, FIRE, WARNING or
FAULT menus allow subsequent alarms to be re-
corded in the alarm window as they occur. FIGURE 22.2 Selecting the more alarms but-
ton from figure 22.1.

NOTE: The control panel allows the ability to

toggle between the different current alarms.

77

Homepage Previous Document

 23. ALARM SEQUENCING, HISTORY and REPORTS

23.1 ALARM SEQUENCING

Every alarm is tagged with an accending number representing which order it occurred. When menu
number 9 is selected, CLEAR ALL ALARM HISTORY DATA, all the alarm tags in the color display but-
tons are reset to 0. Example: After resetting the alarm history data, and then if there is a fire alarm, it is
tagged number 1. If a fault alarm happens to occur next, it is tagged with number 2. The system tags
alarms in order based on their occurrences, not their style. This sequence of tagging is important to al-
low alarms to be tracked in the order they occur. This order establishes a telltale of events which can be
backtracked to the initiating alarm while not discriminating on its style. Style is referred to whether the
alarm is a fire, gas, warning or fault. To observe this action, refer to figure 13.6 where a fire alarm was
demonstrated. The FIRE ALARM is tagged as number 1. Referring to figure 13.9 and the FAULT
ALARM is tagged number 2 because it was the second event to occur.

23.2 SAVE TO PRINT OPTIONS #1 through 7

UTILITY MENU selections #1 through 7 saves the
indicated report files to the REPORTS folder in
DISK C and the file names can be viewed by se-
lecting #8, ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER. Fig-
ure 23.1 has some examples of reports that were
saved and can be distinguished by their similar
name in the UTILITY MENU, figure 23. Reports
that are selected again will retain the same name
but their time stamp will be later.
The history file was created by selecting #7, SAVE
ALL ALARM HISTORY REPORTS. This report pro-
vides an overview of all reports.
NOTE: Each additional file created in the REPORT
FILE MANAGER window contains only the latest FIGURE 23. Save report selections.
events since the previous save.
Select these options whenever a backup is to be
made or preparing to copy the files to a USB bus
drive. An example of one of the file structures is as
follows:
HISTORY_20051107145154
This number can be broken down as follows:
YEAR DATE MILITARY TIME
2005 1107 14:51:54

NOTE: When UTILITY MENU number 9 is se-

lected, CLEAR ALL ALARM HISTORY DATA, only
the history recorded in the DISPLAY buttons in fig-
ure 23 are erased.

23.3 ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER #8

The ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER assimi- FIGURE 23.1 Seven saved history reports.
lates the files from menu selections #1-7. These
files can be managed with the following selections.

Refer to section 23.6 on how to transfer the following reports to a USB bus drive and print them out.
SAVE ALL- this option prepares all files from #1 through 7 to be copied to the USB bus drive.
SAVE SELECTED - this option allows specific files to be saved.
DELETE ALL- prepares all files in the report file manager to be deleted.
DELETE SELECTED - deletes the selected files.
DONE - Return to the UTILITY MENU.

23.4 REPORT FILE MANAGER FILE SIZE

To the right of each file saved is their file size.

78

Homepage Previous Document

 23.5 PRINTING HISTORY FILES

CAUTION: IT IS RECOMMENDED TO TRANSFER FILES OR PRINT DOCUMENTS DURING SYS-

TEM SETUP TO AVOID ANY INTEFERENCE WITH THE CONTROL PANEL.

There are three methods to obtain the reports generated from the program and all reports end with a .txt
suffix for the availability of printing on text editors.

DIRECT VIEWING (CONNECT A VGA MONITOR TO THE CONTROL PANEL)

1. Bring up Microsoft WordPad which resides on the control panel Desktop and view the prints in the
word editor. Navigate up to the Disk C then to the REPORTS folder. Make sure the TYPE of file is a .txt
(text format) then select the report to open and view it.

2. PRINT THE REPORTS FROM A PERSONAL COMPUTER

Copy the reports from the REPORT folder, residing on DISK C to a USB drive then print it out on a text
editor from a computer. Refer to section 23.4 to navigate through the ALARM REPORT FILE MAN-
AGER then place a USB bus drive in one of the ports to transfer the reports.

3. PRINT THE REPORTS DIRECTLY FROM THE CONTROL PANEL

Connect an Epson® printer to the USB port to print directly from the panel. It is beyond the scope of this
manual to teach how to set up PC printers. Refer to the printer documentation for more information.
Bring up the information to print as indicated in paragraph 1. To print the file from paragraph #1 utilizing
WordPad, when the FILE is selected to print the selection of LPT1 must be utilized. Proceed to print the
document. The included Epson driver 1.2.5.2 supports the following Epson printers below and are sup-
ported by the FG8800 control panel:

4 Ink Cartridge Color Models:

Stylus Color 440, 640, 670, 740, 740i, 760, 777 and 777i
Stylus C20UX, C20SX, C40UX, C40S, C40SX, C41UX, C41SX, C41Plus, C42UX, C42SX, C42S,
C42Plus, C43UX, C43SX, C44UX, C44Plus, C45, C46, C60, C61, C62, C63, C64, C65, C66, C80, C82,
C83, C84, C85, C86
Stylus CX3100, CX3200, CX4500, CX4600, CX5100 CX5200, CX5300, CX5400, CX6300, CX6400,
CX6500, CX6600

6 Ink Cartridge Color Models:

Stylus Photo 780, 790, 820, 825, 890, 900, 915, 950, 960, 1280
Stylus Photo R200, R210, R300, R310, R320, RX500, RX510, RX600

23.6 QUICK SELECT ALARM HISTORY

The four styles of alarms, FIRE, GAS, WARNING or
FAULT can be viewed while in the UTILITY MENU.
During standard operations and procedures as event
data accumulates, the old data will be instantly avail-
able by navigation to the UTILITY MENU and select-
ing one of the four color display buttons, as indicate
in figure 23.2.

23.7 CLEAR ALL ALARM HISTORY DATA #9

This selection deletes the history in these four DIS-
PLAY buttons; however, the data file is also auto-
matically saved prior to deleting as indicated in sec-
tion 23.3.

FIGURE 23.2 Select the FIRE, GAS,

WARNING or FAULT button to view historical
alarm events that were available during an
79

Homepage Previous Document

 24. MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS
The selection #13 in the UTILITY MENU, MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS allows each unique configura-
tion that was created from the UTILITY MENU #12, SYSTEM CONFIGURATION to be enabled or dis-
abled. Figure 24 shows six configurations with four files UNLOADED. When a configuration file is
LOADED, it is considered enabled and ready for use. When a configuration is UNLOADED it is disabled.
If there are other LOADED configurations mapped to the same node, they will still operate. Each time a
configuration is created, given a file name and the DONE button is selected, the configuration is then
recorded to the CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT menu. When the configuration enters this
menu, it is automatically in the “LOADED” mode which is the term utilized to identify this configuration is
active and CAN ALARM. REMEMBER, the node channels which are utilized in a configuration must be
ENABLED (refer to the F5 SETTINGS section). The following items describe the function of each button.

CAUTION: UNLOADING A CONFIGURATION DISABLES THE FUNCTION FROM EXECUTING THE

INTENDED TASK.

24.1 LOAD A CONFIGURATION

When a configuration is completed and saved, it is
automatically LOADED in this menu and is currently
ready for use. To LOAD configurations which are
UNLOADED use the scroll arrows to the right of the
menu, highlight the desired configuration and select
the LOAD button. Loading a configuration activates
its properties.

24.2 UNLOAD A CONFIGURATION

When a configuration is UNLOADED it is taken out of
service through the software but can be LOADED
anytime when the panel is in the quiescent mode. If
there are other configurations mapped to the same FIGURE 24. Five configurations from previ-
node, they will not be affected. Use the scroll bar to ous examples, four unloaded.
highlight a configuration to UNLOAD then select the
UNLOAD button. Use the UNLOAD to temporarily
disable a configuration. UNLOADING any configura-
tion trips the DISABLE relay located at TB3 as long
as ANY configuration is unloaded.

NOTE: When all configurations are UNLOADED, the node polling is suspended and the fault relay trips.
NOTE: When LOADING or UNLOADING a configuration, the highlight bar descends to the next lower
configuration
NOTE: Configurations that are created and saved are not mapped together. They each reside independ-
ently in the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS menu. However, they may SHARE a common node channel
if they were mapped to it. An example is where a configuration is completed then another configuration
is created utilizing the same channel on the target node.

24.3 PROCEDURE TO UNLOAD A CONFIGURATION

Because UNLOADING a configuration disables an intended function, there is an automatic fault created
and a decision must be made. This process requires the administrator to select one of two items when
unloading a configuration:
1. Reset a beckoning FAULT disable warning and confirm the configuration will never be utilized again.
An example here is where a release zone is physically removed from operation.
2. Allow the beckon command to continue as a reminder that the configuration is DISABLED and some
time later the configuration will be LOADED again.

Refer to figure 24 and highlight a configuration to be UNLOADED.

80

Homepage Previous Document

 [] Select the UNLOAD button.
[] The message in figure 24.1 will appear.
NOTE: If this message is left unattended for more
than 30 seconds, the system will automatically com-
mit and UNLOAD the configuration. The UNLOAD
will occur even if the configuration is LOADED again
without exiting the menu.
[] Click on OK to UNLOAD the configuration to con-
tinue and select the EXIT button.
[] More configurations can also be unloaded.
[] The FAULT relay located at TB3 trips and THE
SYSTEM SUSPENDS NODE POLLING.
[] When the EXIT is selected from the MANAGE
CONFIGURATIONS menu the FAULT ALARM
menu automatically appears as shown in figure FIGURE 24.1 This message appears after se-
13.10. lecting unload.
[] The DISABLE relay located at TB3 trips.
[] When the FAULT ALARM button is selected
(figure 13.10), the FAULT ALARM menu appears as
shown in figure 24.2.
[] Select the SILENCE button and the “A” turns to a
“S”, the FAULT relay remains in the same condition,
the audible alarm silences, the FAULT and DIS-
ABLE RELAY remains ON.
[] If the FAULT ALARM screen was to be left unat-
tended, this menu would remain and accumulate
alarms every 30 minutes unless a field device alarm
comes in. Each time another unattended DISABLE
alarm is received, it is located onto the next lower
text line in the menu.
[] When the RESET button is selected the menu in
figure 24.3 appears with the DISABLE ALARM RE-
MINDER note. FIGURE 24.2 A fault alarm is created. Reoc-
curring alarms will appear every 30 minutes
The system requires the administrator to make unless further action is taken.
a decision at this point:

(A) Selecting the CONTINUE button will resume the

fault condition every 30 minutes. The configura-
tion remains UNLOADED. Select the STOP
ALARMS button to finish and commit to the dis-
able.
(B) To stop alarms:
Select STOP ALARMS button.

FIGURE 24.3 Select the reset function box.

81

Homepage Previous Document

 [] The reminder message in figure 24.4 appears and
selecting the OK button will remove the beckon mes-
sage screen of the selected configuration(s). The
configuration(s) will be UNLOADED. The fault will be
removed as well as the disable relay action. The
UTILITY menu will return.

NOTE: If the message in figure 24.4 is left unat-

tended for more than 30 seconds the system will
automatically commit to the disable configuration and
the UTILITY menu will return.
[] If the MANAGE CONFIGURTION menu is re-
viewed the selected configuration is DISABLED.

NOTE: Do not reload the configuration until the FIGURE 24.4 Select the reset function box.
STOP ALARMS button has been selected to com-
plete the DISABLE. It will take 30 minutes for the
menu in figure 24.4 to reappear to proceed with the
disable, then it is safe to go to the MANAGE CON-
FIGURATIONS menu and load the configuration
again.

24.4 EDIT A CONFIGURATION

Highlight the configuration with the scroll arrows that requires editing. Select the EDIT button. The con-
figuration is brought back to the point just prior to saving. Add or delete channels, change timing or other
related functions to the configuration menu as required. After completing the modifications select the
DONE button. The configuration file name will rename the same.

24.5 REMOVE A CONFIGURATION

Highlight a configuration to be removed. Then unload it if it is loaded. Proceed to remove it. If this con-
figuration is utilized in conjunction with another configuration a warning message will occur.

24.6 ALARMS WHILE IN MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS MENU

As always, precautionary measures should be kept in place whenever a system is in a disable mode.
While in MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS, the node polling is suspended, a fault is created and therefore
no alarms will result; however, due to the characteristics of the nodes, the following events will occur
when exiting the manage configuration menu.

1. While in the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS MENU and a gas configuration is LOADED, the follow-
ing events will occur: If there is a gas or fault alarm that occurred then went away and then the
MANAGE CONFIGURATION is then exited, the alarm will not be detected.
2. While in the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS MENU and a fire configuration (input, or SOM node is
utilized) is LOADED, the following events will occur: If there is an alarm or fault that occurred then
went away and then the MANAGE CONFIGURATION is then exited, the alarm will be detected.
3. When an input or SOM node configuration is UNLOADED, the nodes will still detect faults.

82

Homepage Previous Document

 25. ADDING, REMOVING, RESETTING and DETECTING
NODES

25.1 ADVANCE MENU

Select the F5 on the keyboard or UTILITY MENU #11 to enter into the node menu. Select the AD-
VANCE button. This menu allows diagnostics of the field nodes for their presence and gives the ability to
change node addresses.
25.2 NODE DETECTION DIAGNOSTIC
This menu allows the system to scan all the nodes
that are physically connected to the bus independ-
ent of their enable or loaded status. The results will
return their status as indicated in figure 25. Select
the NODE DETECTION DIAGONISTIC button and
the system will scan all nodes in the field and report
their status. After the initial node ID’s have been
located on the bus and are displayed, click the
STOP button and the system automatically checks
to verify nodes with address 255. Example 25 indi-
cates the four nodes attached to the bus. The node
diagnostic can be utilized in the class A or B con-
figuration, although the actual detection is executed
on the START LOOP scan. FIGURE 25 Advance menu
NOTE: If more than one node contains a duplicate
address (such as 255) the diagnostic will not cor-
rectly detect them.

25.3 NODE SETTINGS

The report displays a global status of the SET-
TINGS menu. The first column is the node ID then
the style of node. The next column indicates the En-
able status followed by a 0 or 1 for each channel, 0
indicating disable and 1, enabled. The last column is
the de-bounce time selected.

25.4 ADDING ONE NODE AT A TIME

Adding a node requires that the system be turned
off to electrically connect the node to the bus. The
node may be inserted anywhere in the bus during FIGURE 25.1 Detecting an added node.
system shutdown time. When utilizing the AD-
VANCE feature, both poles of SW1 on the node
must be off. If the node is added to the end of a sin-
gle ended terminated configuration, the ELR must
be moved to that new node.

After the node is securely in place and wired cor-

rectly, turn on the system power. The system will
initialize and will continue to discover only the origi-
nal nodes. When a new node is added to the bus,
the system will not detect a skip in a node address.
Remember, a new node must have an ID address of
255.
After the system initializes, select F5 button and en-
ter the ADVANCE menu.
[] Select the NODE DETECTION DIAGNOSTIC but-
ton and allow the count to reach 255. In the example
of Figure 25.1 an SOM was detected. FIGURE 25.2 Changing an SOM ID from

83

Homepage Previous Document

 NOTE: Unlike the FIND NEXT NODE button, this search does not look for the nodes to be in sequential
numerical order. This search indicated the actual node count in the field.
[] Now refer to CHANGE A NODE ADDRESS menu and type in the next node ID, in this case, number
4. Choose the correct style of node, in this case an SOM, then select the CHANGE button.
[] The newly installed SOM now has been reassigned from ID 255 to 4.
[] To synchronize the new node with the onguardsetup.dat file, the system must be closed and restarted
as described in section 26.1.
[] Return to the SETTINGS and ADD/EDIT details of this node and fill in the necessary information.
NOTE: If more than one node was added utilizing the ADVANCE feature, the NODE DETECTION would
indicate each of their address as 255. This identical address is OK as long as each node is a different
style. If the nodes are the same style (like two input nodes) then when the address is change for one the
other will also change. Again, refer to section 5.10 when more than one is added to the bus.

25.5 ADDING MORE THAN ONE NODE TO THE SYSTEM

Since the ADVANCE NODE DETECTION DIAGONISTIC cannot seek more than one node with an ad-
dress of 255, the administrator will need to add nodes with their default address 255 to the system. Af-
ter this task is complete refer to section 5.10 for initializing the newly installed nodes.

25.6 CHANGE A NODE ADDRESS

Refer to FIGURE 25.2 and select the TYPE of node to change the address and insert the new node ad-
dress in the FROM and TO window then select the CHANGE button. If a successful CHANGE was im-
plemented the message “THE OPERATION WAS SUCCESSFUL” will occur. If an incorrect entry is
made into the FROM box the message ”THERE IS NO NODE OF THAT TYPE WITH THAT FROM AD-
DRESS” will appear. If an incorrect entry is made into the TO box the message ”THERE IS ALREADY A
NODE WITH THAT TO ADDRESS” will appear. Now select the CLOSE button then select the SAVE
and CLOSE button to save this new field address to the onguardsetup.dat file.

25.7 RESETTING ALL NODE ADDRESSES TO DEFAULT ID 255 WHILE CONNECTED TO THE
BUS
The selection in the ADVANCE menu resets all nodes and data on the bus to their factory default 255.
This procedure may be selected if the administrator would like to start over to change all node ID ad-
dresses simultaneously. If this is the case, then the nodes must be rediscovered by returning to section
5.10 of this manual.

25.8 RESETTING SELECTIVE NODE ADDRESS TO DEFAULT ID 255 WHILE CONNECTED TO

THE BUS
All nodes are shipped with their default address of 255 so they can be assigned an ID address. If nodes
are connected on their bus, power down the system as described in section 26.1.
Resetting nodes to ID #255 through power up reset:
If nodes are currently connected to the control panel, the panel must be shutdown and power turned off
as indicated in section 26.1. Locate SW1-1 ON, SW1-2 to the ON position of the node(s) requiring ad-
dress reset. Turn on the control panel power for only 5 seconds then turn it off. The nodes reset the ad-
dress during the 5 second power-up stage. RETURN ALL NODE SW1 SWITCHES BACK TO OFF. Now
apply power back to the control panel. The control panel will now search for all nodes with their ID’s and
omit nodes with factory setting address of 255. Refer to section 5.10 to scan for the nodes with address
of 255. They will then be assigned the next ID number above the last active ID.

25.9 RESETTING A NODE ADDRESS TO DEFAULT ADDRESS 255 THAT IS REMOVED FROM
THE BUS
To selectively reset a node ID that is removed from the system, simply locate the SW1-1 and SW1– 1
on, apply 24VDC to the power input (observing polarity) for 5 seconds, then remove the power. Now
return both switch poles of SW1 to OFF.

84

Homepage Previous Document

 25.10 REMOVING A NODE
To remove a node from the system, first verify that there are not other configurations targeting this node.
Go to the UTILITY MENU and select #1, SAVE NODE REPORT and review any other configurations
that may be mapped to this node. To remove a node, any relating configurations must be first
UNLOADED in the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS menu. If there are other configurations mapped to
this node they must be re-mapped as the administrator requires.

CAUTION: NOT REMOVING ALL ASSOCIATED CONFIGURATIONS TO THIS NODE CAN RESULT
IN A SYSTEM MALFUNCTION.

1. Remove any configuration(s) that are mapped to this node in the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS
menu.
2. Go to the node to be removed and locate the SW1 switch. Carefully turn ON SW1-1 (Acquire ad-
dress setting).
3. While in the ONGUARD main screen, select F5 on the keyboard to bring up the node menu, high-
light the node to remove, then select the REMOVE NODE button to proceed.
5. Shutdown the system and bus power as described in section 26.1 then physically remove the node.
6. Restart the system then go into the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS menu and verify the configura-
tions that should be LOADED.
7. Test the system to ensure the integrity is correct.

NOTE: Removing a node leaves an ID address void. This void is OK. If installing a new node later on,
change its ID to the removed node ID.
NOTE: When the REMOVE NODE button is selected, the system automatically sets this node address
to 255.

85

Homepage Previous Document

 26. REDEFINING A SYSTEM TO START OVER
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES DISABLE THE CONTROL PANEL FROM DETECTING
ALARMS

Under special circumstances the administrator may want to revert back to where the system was prior to
implementing any activity. It is important to note that all data stored in the system will be eliminated and
should be backed up, if necessary. To proceed with this process, it is apparent that all necessary pre-
cautions have been made to protect any areas this control panel has supervised. Connect a VGA moni-
tor and mouse to its port located on behind the front panel. If the ONGUARD screen is active, right-click
on the mouse then click on the close icon. Click on the START then navigate to PROGRAMS, then click
on WINDOWS EXPLORER. Double click on the DISKC.

1. Highlight the Onguardsetup.dat file, right click the mouse, click on Delete, then YES. This is the file
that contains all node entry data.
2. Highlight the onguardsetupbak.dat file, right click the mouse, click on Delete, then YES. This is the
backup of the file above created in section 7.3.
3. Delete the CONFIGURATION folder and all files in this folder. This folder is the location of all the
configurations that are created.
4. Delete the REPORTS folder and delete all files in this folder.
5. Now, select the X box to exit out of the Explorer menu to go back to the Windows CE.net screen.
6. To also reset the nodes, refer to section 25. The nodes are not required to be reset if the same node
ID’s are utilized.
7. Proceed with section 26.1

CAUTION: THE PROCESS OF SIMPLY REMOVING POWER FROM AN ACTIVE PROGRAMMED

CONTROL PANEL WITHOUT PROPER PROCEDURES COULD RESULT IN THE LOSS OF ALL
STORED DATA AND, OR THE ACTIVATION OF OUTPUT APPLIANCES.

26.1 PROPERLY SHUT DOWN THE SYSTEM

1. Verify the system is in its quiescent mode as indicated on figure 5.
A: To continue the purge as in section 26, go to START, Suspend, then click OK to restart the system
for a reinitialize. All data in reference to the control panel has be reset.
B: Or to turn off the system, go to START, then click suspend, wait for the screen to go black, then turn
off power.

CAUTION: IF THE SYSTEM IS SHUT DOWN FOR ANY REASON, THEN OTHER CONFIGURATIONS
OR ANY OTHER TYPE OF FILE FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE IS LOADED, THE CORRECT OP-
ERATION OF THE SYSTEM IS NOT GUARANTEED TO FUNCTION PROPERLY.

86

Homepage Previous Document

 27. ACCESSING THE UTILITY MENU

While the ONGUARD screen Is displayed, tap twice

quickly and firmly anywhere on the touch screen to
recall the utility menu. Press the CLOSE MENU button
to return to the main display. Refer to figures 27
through 27.2 for the menu selections. Use the scroll
arrows or a mouse navigate to the desired selection.

27.1 MENU DESCRIPTION

Utility menu selections are described below. Other
menu selections which require more information are
referred to other areas of this manual. Scroll through
the menu to become familiar with its contents. All
other utility menu selections will be covered in follow-
ing sections.
FIGURE 27 Top view of menu.
NOTE: Refer to drawings 4 and 15 for USB printer
port connection.

Refer to section 23.2 on managing files #1-7.

1. SAVE NODE REPORT

Procures data from menu #11 and copies the data the
administrator wrote for node descriptions and loca-
tions to the ALARM REPORT MANAGER. This infor-
mation is stored in a file called onguardsetup.dat and
is described in detail in section 6.3.
2. SAVE CONFIGURATION REPORT
Procures data from configuration menu #12 and cop-
ies it to the ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER.
3. SAVE FIRE ALARM ONLY REPORT
Procures fire alarm reports and copies them to the FIGURE 27.1 Mid view of menu.
ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER.
4. SAVE GAS ALARM ONLY REPORT
Procures gas alarm reports and copies them to the
ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER.
5. SAVE WARNING ALARM ONLY REPORT
Procures warning alarm reports and copies them to
the ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER. These are
configurations that voted and did not meet the require-
ment of a voted alarm.
6. SAVE FAULT ONLY REPORT
Procures fault alarm reports and copies them to
ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER.
7. SAVEL ALL ALARM HISTORY REPORTS
Provides a complete overview of alarms in selections
#1-6 and copies them to the ALARM REPORT FILE
MANAGER. Refer to section 23.3.
8. ALARM REPORT FILE MANAGER FIGURE 27.2 Bottom view of menu.
Insert a USB bus drive in the connector of the alarm
panel prior to entering this selection. All alarms that
are created are saved to this menu with a .txt exten-
sion. These files can be copied to a USB bus drive
and read from a text editor such as a word processor
program. Refer to section 23.4 for more detail.

87

Homepage Previous Document

 9. CLEAR ALL ALARM HISTORY DATA
Deletes all data in the UTILITY MENU four DISPLAY buttons at the bottom of the screen and saves the
reports per section 23.7.
10. SYNCHRONIZE ALL NODE LED’S
Synchronizes out-of-order blinking LED’s on the nodes after change of activity.
11. NODE MANAGEMENT
Node data settings and parameters are entered in this menu.
12. SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
Maps input nodes to output nodes.
13. MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS
Allows editing of established configurations. Configurations can be activated (loaded) or unloaded. A
command allows unused configurations to be deleted.
14. MODBUS SETUP
Allows the baud rate and other port configurations. This option is described in detail in a separate docu-
ment.
15. DIAGNOSTIS
This section allows the administrator the ability to record events for evaluation. This selection is only util-
ized in conjunction with an Allestec representative.
16. BACKUP THE SYSTEM DATABASE
Allows the system configurations to backup the data in case the primary file gets corrupted. This com-
mand creates a file from the onguardsetup.dat file (see section 7) and calls the new file copyofonguard-
setup.dat. NOTE: Fully understand the operation of the system prior to utilizing this command.
17. USE ONGUARD AS THE SYSTEM SHELL
After a complete system has been tested and backed up, select this menu item. The complete system
will restart and initialize displaying only the ONGUARD menu. This process enables any items related to
the CE operating system to be omitted from the full-sized menu. When this function is complete, there
will be no user interface interaction between the control panel and the Windows CE operating system.
This procedure of disabling the CE user interface prevents unauthorized entry into the CE operating sys-
tem.
CAUTION: DURING THE RESETTING OF THE PANEL TO THE ONGUARD SHELL, THERE WILL
BE NO ALARM MONITORING (APPROXIMATELY 30 SECONDS).
18. USE WINDOWS AS A DEFAULT SHELL
Selecting this option restores the control panel to its level of operation prior to selecting #17.
CAUTION: DURING THE RESTORING OF THE PANEL TO THE WINDOWS SHELL, THERE WILL
BE NO ALARM MONITORING (APPROXIMATELY 30 SECONDS).

88

Homepage Previous Document

 29. SYSTEM FAULTS
Any fault occurring in the system will bring up the fault menu as indicated in figure 29 and identify the
style of fault. The failsafe fault relay located at the SYSTEM ALARM TB3 terminal will change state. Re-
fer to drawing 6. Select the fault alarm button to enter the FAULT ALARM menu. Select the SILENCE
button to silence the fault. The audible fault alarm will occur every 30 minutes until the problem has been
resolved. Locate and resolve the fault problem in a timely manner.
29.1 COMMUNICATION FAILURE
If there is a communication failure, the inability to
properly scan a node, the problem is recorded as
indicated in figure 29.1, the error message is as fol-
lows: The bus utilizes the first channel of a non com-
municating node to convey the address of the prob-
lem node. In example figure 29.1 the bus was sev-
ered just before the SOM and fault nodes. The
FAULT alarm records the fault as node 3-1 and 2-1
indicating nodes 3 & 2 are not responding. This indi-
cation does NOT indicate channel one of each node
because the COMMUNICATION FAILURE note is
visible.

If the bus interrogation function receives a failure it

does not immediately report a fault. The failure is
analyzed to assure the safest method to eliminate FIGURE 29. Select the fault button.
false alarms at the fastest speed allowed. An ID 255
communication error is a bus loop problem.

29.2 COMMUNICATION FAULTS ON A TERMIN-

ATED CLASS B BUS (Selecting the Start of Loop
when invoking Ctrl-F7).

BUS SHORT:
A direct short between the A and B bus lines will re-
sult in all nodes to report their ID and name to the
FAULT ALARM menu. The alarm menu will be simi-
lar to figure 29.1 except in our example the FAULT
ALARM will indicate all 4 nodes that are attached to
the bus.

A OR B LINE OPEN: FIGURE 29.1 Communication failure as de-

Since the nodes are scanned starting from the lowest scribed in sections 29.2.
ID address to the highest and regardless where they
are located physically on the bus, the following action
will take place: A bus open anywhere on the A or B
conductor will result in faults for all nodes located
after the open (between the open and the terminating
resistor. The FAULT DESCRIPTION field will indicate
a communication error for all nodes unable to report
their presence on the bus.

24VDC LOSS:
A loss of power to the bus will result in all nodes to
report their faults to the menu. If the power loss oc-
curs down line from the panel, then all nodes after
that power loss will report their fault status. The
FAULT DESCRIPTION field will indicate a communi-
cation error for all nodes unable to report their pres-
ence on the bus. FIGURE 29.2. Loop break failure as de-
scribed in sections 29.3.

89

Homepage Previous Document

 29.3 COMMUNICATION FAULTS ON A RETURN
CLASS A BUS (Selecting Loop back mode when
invoking Ctrl-F7).
If the system is unable to poll a node in loop back
mode, a fault is issued and below are examples that
may occur.

BUS SHORT:
A bus short creates unreasonable circumstances
that may omit some nodes to report their ID. It is ap-
parent that this problem be resolved in the utmost
timely manner. The system will attempt to display any
messages that get through and report their fault to
the menu.
FIGURE 29.3 Fault alarm menu indicating
A OR B LINE OPEN: channel 1 of the gas node is below 9%.
Upon detecting an open in the loop A or B conductor,
a fault will be issued and will indicate loop break fail-
ure(s), example figure 29.2. All nodes after the bus
break to the TB2 end loop will report their ID’s to the
FAULT ALARM menu. At this point the fault can be
cleared but the ONGUARD menu will now indicate:
Loop Break: Alarms active.

Once the fault is cleared it will not return unless another malfunction occurs. After resetting the fault, a
file is recorded to a memory array that indicates the current location of nodes in respect to the bus
break. The system now monitors part of the nodes on the START loop then returns to the END loop to
monitor at that location. The system is now capable of operating actions correctly but the bus is in need
of a immediate repair. Close the ONGUARD program and turn off the control panel as described in sec-
tion 26.1 then proceed to repair the bus condition. Upon initialization, the system will search all node
locations and eliminate the Loop Break message. Verify that the Ctrl-F7 menu is selecting the Loop
Back mode. NOTE: Anytime the ONGUARD menu indicates a Loop Break, the fault relay will change
state.

29.4 IMPROPER BUS SELECTION

If the bus (refer to figure 5.1) is selected that does not match a field wired loop as indicated in drawing
12, a fault alarm will occur.

29.5 INPUT NODE FAULTS

The input node will create a fault if an input field wire is open or the ELR is not installed. Line supervision
integrity is monitored by sending a small current through the input loop. While in MANAGE CONFIGU-
RATIONS and a configuration is LOADED utilizing this node: If there is a fault that occurred and went
away and then the menu is exited, the fault will be detected. The fault will not be created if the channel is
disabled whether a configuration is loaded or unloaded.

29.6 SUPERVISORY OUTPUT NODE (SOM) FAULTS

The SOM monitors for a field short (across the ELR) or open conductor in the appliance loop. Checking
the box that indicates SHORT MONITORING in the SETTINGS menu will ENABLE the channel to moni-
tor for shorts. Refer to section 11.4 for more details. If the external 24VDC is removed from the SOM
and J4 is located in the SPARE slot or absent, drawing 11, a fault will occur to indicate a loss of the ex-
ternal 24VDC.
When in MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS and a configuration is LOADED utilizing this node: If there is a
fault that occurred and went away and then the menu is exited, the fault will be detected. While the con-
trol panel is in quiescent mode and an SOM node configuration is UNLOADED, the node will still detect
faults. The fault will not be created if the channel is disabled whether a configuration is loaded or
unloaded.

90

Homepage Previous Document

 29.7 4-20mA GAS NODE FAULTS
If the 4-20mA loop is opened or the current drops below –9% of the scale, a fault message will occur.
While in the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS MENU and a gas configuration is LOADED; if there is a gas
fault alarm that occurred then went away and then the MANAGE CONFIGURATION is then exited, the
alarm will not be detected. The fault will not be created if the channel is disabled whether a configuration
is loaded or unloaded. Refer to section 15.8 for more details.

29.8 RELAY NODE

The relay node has dry relay contact outputs and are not monitored for supervision. However, the node
is monitored for integrity.

29.9 EARTH GROUND FAULT

The system, including the field nodes, will detect and report an Earth ground fault under these circum-
stances: If any devices 24V power comes in contact with Earth ground which includes a resistance of
100K ohms or less. Or: If any devices power supply negative comes in contact with Earth ground which
includes a resistance of 11K ohms or less. These ground faults can be caused by but not limited to wa-
ter condensing in junction boxes, insects building nests where the apparatus resides, debris such as
corrosion or particles coming in contact with the apparatus, improper wiring (connecting power supply
negative to Earth ground), etc.

29.10 ADMINISTRATOR ASSERTED FAULTS BELOW TRIP THE FAULT RELAY

29.11 CONFIGURATION FAULT - Selecting F8 or line #12 in the utility menu

The fault relay changes state when entering into the configuration menu. The FAULT returns to normal
when completing a configuration or exiting a configuration. On entering the configuration mode ALL
ALARMS ARE IGNORED AND THE PANEL STOPS MONITORING THE BUS so an alarm function will
not activate until leaving the configuration mode.

29.12 NODE MANAGEMENT FAULT- Selecting F5 or line #11 in the utility menu
When selecting the NODE MANAGEMENT menu, the node polling stops because dynamic changes are
expected from the administrator. The FAULT relay changes state as long as this menu is serviced. Upon
exiting the menu the polling will resume and the FAULT relay will resume normal condition.

29.13 MANAGE CONFIGURATION FAULT- Selecting line #13 in the utility menu or Ctrl F11
When selecting the MANAGE CONFIGURATION menu there is a FAULT issued and polling is sus-
pended. The node polling stops because dynamic changes are expected from the administrator.
Refer to section 24.6 for more information.

29.14 UNLOAD ALL CONFIGURATIONS

When in the MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS menu and if ALL configurations are UNLOADED, the
FAULT relay will remain changed even after exiting this menu. If one or more configurations are loaded,
the fault relay resumes normal mode.

91

Homepage Previous Document

 30. SOFTWARE AND FIRMWARE UPDATES
30.1 SOFTWARE MIGRATION
Software and operating systems have been improving towards a more refined and efficient method of
performing computing tasks. To keep in compliance with technology, codes, and improvements, there
will be periodic software and firmware updates available from Allestec. It is possible to upgrade firmware
versions and not software, or vice versa. A revision in the operations manual does not necessarily indi-
cate there will be a change in the code versions, or vice versa. Depending on the upgrade of software,
charges may be incurred to the customer. Instructions will be included with any upgrades as necessary.
Refer to the Allestec website and navigate to the FG8800 control panel for any information relating to
upgrades. Since this system is scaleable, there will be updates as necessary.

30.2 SYSTEM CONTROL VERSION (ONGUARD.EXE)

To identify the system main version code, select the UTILITY menu and the box at the lower part of the
screen (figure 23) to identify the version number, in this case OG 2.67. This code is the main operating
program that the administrator interfaces with and executes programs. The MC code version below this
number indicates the master controller code which resides on the mother board.

30.3 NODE FIRMWARE

Each node has a unique code version and is available by selecting #11, NODE MANAGEMENT, of the
UTILITY MENU or selecting F5 on the keyboard. When in the node screen highlight the node to view
and select the SETTINGS button for that node. Select the APPLY button when finished. The firmware
versions are stated at this location. NOTE: this code is upgradeable only by sending the node to All-
estec.

92

Homepage Previous Document

 31. MAINTENANCE and TROUBLESHOOTING
Although the FG8800 was designed to last, like any electronic instrument, there is always the possibility
that something can fail. Therefore a regular test program should be followed and documented to make
sure that each part of the system is tested as described in section 7 of the NFPA 72 or more often if dic-
tated by local code requirements. Malfunctioning units must be replaced or repaired immediately by fac-
tory authorized service personnel in order to insure continued safe and reliable operation of the control
alarm system. Periodic inspection and testing should be performed in accordance with local applicable
codes and standards.

If the system is connected to the fire department, etc., or actuates an internal system, disarm the appro-
priate outputs before servicing to prevent agent actuation. (Refer to Operation for procedures). Notify the
fire department and personnel at the facility that a system test is being performed so that any alarm
sounding can be ignored during the test. Notify the fire department before resetting the system. Inspect-
ing, testing and maintenance of the fire alarm panel should be performed in accordance with NFPA 72,
The Nation Fire Alarm Code and all applicable local codes.

THE FOLLOWING STATEMENTS ASSIST IN LOCATING PROBLEMS:

Alarms do not execute as configured.

• The configuration in question is UNLOADED.
• The initiating or notification devices are not correctly wired.
• The node channel is not ENABLED.
• There was no configuration made for the appropriate node.

When alarms occur, a bus fault is presented on the screen.

• Most likely this problem is due to the power supply not providing enough power to its intended field
devices. When the alarm occurs, the voltage is brought to a level that is unacceptable to the control
panel. Another problem associated with this fault is the wires carrying current to the field devices are too
small. Also, some low-cost notification appliances contain large capacitors that can instantaneously
lower the power supply voltage at the onset of an alarm. To test these problems, go to the last device on
the bus and measure the voltage at that device while it is in alarm. The voltage should not be below
18V.

Unexplainable faults or errors occur in the system intermittently.

• The power supply is inducing noise on the system power grid.
• There could be loose terminal screw connections.
• Incorrect styles of communications bus cables were used in the system or splices were installed
between nodes.
• The ELR for the bus is not there or improperly installed.

When searching for nodes the system cannot find them.

• The node has not had its ID reset to 255 or the ID switch is not on. Refer to section 25.

Any suspected problems or product manual discrepancies should be submitted to Allestec by email at
info@allestec.com. Please state your company name, your name and phone number. For the control
panel issues state the number of nodes attached to the system, terminated or continuous loop configu-
ration and any other information to help diagnose the system. It is important to list the version release as
stated in section 30.

93

Homepage Previous Document

 32. PART NUMBERS AND ACCESSORIES

SYSTEM COMPONENTS PART NUMBER

24VDC CONTROL PANEL WITH SOFTWARE [DISPLAY UPWARD VIEW- FG8800-1-24V
ABLE]
24VDC CONTROL PANEL WITH SOFTWARE [DISPLAY DOWNWARD VIEW- FG8800-2-24V
ABLE]

4 CHANNEL INPUT NODE 8800-1060

4 CHANNEL 4-20MA NODE 8800-1700
4 CHANNEL SUPERVISE OUTPUT MODULE 8800-1705
4 CHANNEL RELAY NODE 8800-1725

ACCESSORIES
OPERATIONS MANUAL 8800-5140-REV A
TERMINAL STRIP SCREWDRIVER 8800-2614
END OF LINE RESISTOR - BUS 120 OHMS, 5% 8800-1309
END OF LINE RESISTOR - FIELD DEVICES 3.9K OHMS, 5% 8800-1211
35MM DIN MOUNTING ADAPTER [INPUT AND 4-20MA NODE] 8800-5121
35MM DIN MOUNTING ADAPTER [SOM AND RELAY NODE] 8800-5139

STANDOFF SPACER TO RAISE NODE FROM MOUNTING SURFACE 8800-1398

USB COMPLIANT KEYBOARD 8800-2718
USB MOUSE 8800-2720
VARISTOR [FOR SOLENOID VALVE] 8800-1270
DIODE - POLARITY SENSITIVE [FOR SOLENOID VALVE] 8800-1236
FUSE - 4A CONTROL PANEL 8800-1721
FUSE - 15A SYSTEM POWER FOR FIELD BUS 8800-1722

NOTICE: When ordering additional components for the system,

provide the code versions as indicated in section 30.2 and 30.3.

94

Homepage Previous Document

 33. SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM OPERATING VOLTAGE, 18 30 VDC REDUNDANT POWER REQUIRED
CONTROL PANEL MAXIMUM CURRENT 1.0 AMP @ 24 VDC
NO ATTACHED DEVICES OR LOCAL RELAYS
8800 1060 INPUT NODE: 24 VDC 20 mA QUIESCENT, 35 mA ALARMED
8800 1700 4-20MA GAS NODE: 24 VDC 14 mA QUIESCENT, 14 mA ALARMED

8800 1705 SUPERVISED OUTPUT MODULE 24 VDC 23 mA QUIESCENT, 108 mA ALARMED

8800 1725 RELAY NODE 24 VDC 9 mA QUIESCENT, 94 mA ALARMED

FOUR DRY RELAY CONTACTS, ONE PER 10A @ 30 VDC RESISTIVE, 250 VAC RESISTIVE
CHANNEL

MECHANICAL

DIMENSIONS REFER TO DRAWINGS

CONTROL PANEL NET WEIGHT 13 lbs, 5.89 kg

ENVIRONMENT

FIELD NODE OPERATING TEMPERATURE 0 degrees F TO 150 degrees F

-17 degrees C TO 65 degrees C

CONTROL PANEL OPERATING TEMPERATURE 32 degrees F TO 130 degrees F

0 degrees C TO 55 degrees C
PACKAGING AND ENVIRONMENTAL EXPO- NEMA 1

95

Homepage Previous Document

 34. WARRANTY AND RETURN POLICY
TERMS AND AGREEMENT

Allestec Corporation warrants the components and labor for three years from control date stamped on
the system identification label. Allestec identifies each system by their unique serial number stamped on
the components as well as an electronic serial number. Allestec will repair any component found by us
to be defective in workmanship or materials. This warranty does not apply to any part or product that has
been subjected to misuse, improper installation, transfer of ownership, or any type of alterations.

Items under warranty sent to Allestec just to “check out” will be charge for diagnosing something there
may not be. This procedure prevents customers from sending units in on an as needed basis for us to
verify operation. If a product is in warranty it will be repaired at no charge.

There are no implied warranties of merchantability, fitness or other implied warranties or representations
for any of Allestec's products except the warranty specified herein. In no event shall Allestec be liable for
any consequential, special or other damages attributable to our product except as specified herein. The
foregoing obligations are in lieu of all other obligations and liabilities including negligence, and of all war-
ranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or otherwise, express, or implied, in fact or in
law, and state Allestec's entire and exclusive liability and buyer's exclusive remedy for any claim of dam-
ages in connection with the sale of furnishing of the products, their design, suitability for use, installation,
or operation. Buyer is solely responsible for the proper installation, maintenance and use of the compo-
nents and Allestec will in no event be liable for any special, incidental or consequential damages what-
soever.

It is agreed that when a customer, distributor, representative, end user purchases any of the FG8800
systems or components that it is their responsibility to send back the product under warranty. The prod-
uct under warranty is to be returned to Allestec or its distributor, pre-paid by the entity returning the prod-
uct. Under no circumstances Allestec will send a product to a customer then wait for the warranty item to
return. Allestec will return the warranty item by its selected carrier on a standard delivery time. If the cus-
tomer requires to accelerate the process, the customer agrees to pay any additional expediting costs
relating to the transaction.

96

Homepage Previous Document

 *

234 56 7
2,6+

8
) &

!"# $% *

!"#

& ' (
9

*%++,, % " * -. /01

. '

! " # # " # #
" $ $ " % $ $

Homepage Previous Document

&
9! . /01 '
2 6 :
93 :> (
<
- !"# '
) 3,32 3 ?1
* ) " *%++,,
& 234
2,6+

'
@ 6 *

6(2, @ 6 *

" 5"<87@
6
?3 26$
- @ 6 6 & ( ( (
/, " :

. ; 1
8 0 ; 1 )
:#0 &
&
-A63

!"#
)
$% :#0
%
!"# ' <

:
)

) '
=

Homepage Previous Document

 &' ()* +),--. +/0 12- 0 -. ( 30 /4-+

" 8 B. - > >% < < >" > 8 >% 6 > ! " <* ><:. . &= &<>* %!- >% % " > ! &<B<-
".B.& >% =. : " B C #! <>" <* =. 6 &= >>.B" = " > .: # -" >: & . -. B 8. 6(2,8
-.$ . -.$ <!" B -8 = " <-C #<D < - . 8."" %." *<- &!--.> " .-&.> %. ".
.$.> " " =.C <&&!-.: B .- -.*.--.>& >% < > " -. B"< >: & .:

> : $ : ! BBC &-. .: < .- <- = " =. &=< &. <* * -. B -8 8.>! BB< " ".$.- B
&<>*%!- <>" & > #. ".B.& $.BC = &= >&< 8 >% B -8 < < <>" < ".B.& :!- >% >
B< :.: <- !>B< :.: . &= <* =. 3 >$." % . * -" * !B >: B -8 *!- =.- <&&!- >% B -8"
&<>* %!- <>" -. -.".> -> >% B -8 " -. B"< BB *<BB< =. F/ B -8
!> E!. &<>* %!- <> = " >: & .: =.-. * = " 8.>! " >: & >% B -8 =. "&-<BB # -
&-. .: >< &. = >< .>:.: < =. "C" .8 BB BB< " ".B.& $. &=<<" >% <*
&<>* %!- <> &<> > >% ! <8 & BBC .D.&! . " >C B -8" > =. * -. B -8
!-# >. -< < 8 " B< :.: -<%- 88 >% " " ". ! < >:< :.B C 8." ".B.& <>
!>B< : >% &<>* %!- <> #- >%" ! =. 8 >% &<!> :< >
: " #B." *-<8 B -8 >%

" >%B. B -8 -.(: "&= -%. :! B -.B. ". B -8 = &C&B. -.B. ". B -8 *<- >*
>< &. =. * -. " !" >: & <- -.".-$. # &G! >< &. =. * -. ?3, >< &. =. * -. " !"
=. ;-. !-> < B -8 8.>!1 BB " !" >: & <- >: & <-
&= >%. < ;>. B -8" = $.
-- $.:1 ! <> =. :. .& <> <*
< =.- B -8"

Homepage Previous Document

 $

!" & ! B <!&= "&-..> : " B C " I.

"C" .8 < .- >% $<B %.@ /+ 9,$:& -.:!>: > < .- -.E! -.:
&<> -<B >.B8 D 8!8 &!--.> @ >< ,?+ 8 " H 26 $:&
&=.: :.$ &." <- B<& B-.B C"@
++,, /,4, > ! ><:.@ 26 $:& 2, E! ."&.> 93 B -8.:
++,, /?,,6(2,8 % " 8<:!B.@ 26 $:& /6 E! ."&.> /6 B -8.:
++,, /?,3"! .-$ ".: <! ! 8<:!B. 5"<87@ 26 $:& 29 E! ."&.> /,+ B -8.:
*<!- -.B C" <>. .- &= >>.B@ ?3 8 " 26 $:&

++,, /?23-.B C 8<:!B.@ 26 $:& 0 E! ."&.> 06 B -8.:

*<!- :-C -.B C &<> & " <>. &= >>.B@ /, H 9,$:& -." " $. 23,$ & -." " $.
: " B C "&-..> B!8 ><!" > .>" C@ 93,> "
.-8 > B" - &<>:!& <- BB< >&.@ 24 < /6 %

" I. -.*.- < :- >% > < .- <> 8 >! B

&<> -<B >.B>. . %= @ /9 3+0'

* .B: ><:. < .- >% .8 .- !-.@ ,:.%-.." * < /3,:.%-.." *

(/?:.%-.." & < 43 :.%-.." &
0,J =!8 : C ><>(&<>:.>" >%

&<> -<B >.B< .- >% .8 .- !-.@ 92:.%-.." * < /9,:.%-.." *

,:.%-.." & < 33:.%-.." &
&G % >% >: .D <"!-.@ >.8 /

-.*.- < BB." .& &<8 .#" . *<- : 8.>" <> B >: 8<-. >*<-8 <>
" .& * & <>" >: - & >% -. "!#A.& < &= >%. =<! >< &.
K2,,4 BB." .& &<- <- <> B =< > !" #-<&=!-. ,/26,4(# G >% <<: .D "

Homepage Previous Document

ALLESTEC START-UP PROCEDURE:
1) POWER SUPPLY - TOTAL POWER CAGE 24V-60A ( TPC-60-24V-U1 )
A. MAKE SURE BATTERY SWITCH IS IN ‘OFF’ POSITION.
B. MAKE SURE LOAD BREAKERS 1-7 ARE IN THE “OFF” POSITION.
C. TURN ‘ON’ RECTIFIER #1.
D. WAIT FOR TPCDB1-60-24V TO INITIALIZE AND VOLTAGE DISPLAY TO STABILIZE.

2) POWERING UP ALLESTEC PANEL ( FG8800 )

A. SWITCH ‘ON’ LDC #1.
B. WAIT FOR FG8800 TO POWER UP AND ONGUARD TO INITIALIZE.
C. SWITCH ‘ON’ REMAINING LDC’S.
I. LDC #2 THROUGH #7 FOR SWIFTPAC, TWINPAC.
II. LDC #2 THROUGH #5 FOR MOBILEPAC, POWERPAC, ½ SWIFTPAC
D. FINALLY, TURN BATTERY SWITCH TO ‘ON’ POSITION.
E. SYSTEM IS NOW FULLY POWERED AND RUNNING.

ALLESTEC SHUT-DOWN PROCEDURE

1) SHUTTING DOWN ALLESTEC PANEL ( FG8800 ) WITH AUXILIARY SCREEN.
A. CLOSE ONGUARD PROGRAM.
I. RIGHT CLICK ON ONGUARD TOOLBAR IN THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN
II. CLICK ‘CLOSE’ TO END THE ONGUARD PROGRAM.
III. WAIT FOR THE ONGUARD PROGRAM TO CLOSE.
B. TURN ‘OFF’ UNNECESSARY LDC’S
I. LDC #2 THROUGH #7 FOR SWIFTPAC, TWINPAC.
II. LDC #2 THROUGH #5 FOR MOBILEPAC, POWERPAC, ½ SWIFTPAC
III. MAKE SURE THAT LDC #1 REMAINS ‘ON’.
C. TURN ‘OFF’ BATTERY SWITCH.
D. CLICK ON ‘START’ MENU IN LOWER LEFT.
I. CLICK ON ‘SUSPEND’
II. WHEN ASKED TO RESTART, CLICK ‘OK’
III. NOTE - THERE IS NO ‘SHUT DOWN’ OR ‘TURN OFF’ COMMAND FOR THE
FG8800.
IV. AS FG8800 GOES THROUGH RESTART PROCEDURE, IT WILL SHUT DOWN
BRIEFLY BEFORE REBOOTING.
V. THIS OCCURS WHEN THE FG8800 SCREEN GOES TO GREY, COUNT TO
"5",THEN SHUTDOWN.
IF YOU HEAR A BEEP AND SCREEN IS BLACK, DO NOT SHUT IT OFF BECAUSE
THE SYSTEM IS REBOOOTING.
VI. WHEN THE FG8800 SCREEN GOES BLACK, SWITCH OFF LDC #1.
E. FINAL SHUT DOWN
I. TURN OFF RECTIFIER #1.
II. THE SYSTEM IS NOW FULLY POWERED DOWN.

- Continued –

Homepage Previous Document

 - Continued –

2) SHUTTING DOWN ALLESTEC PANEL ( FG8800 ) W/OUT AUXILIARY SCREEN.

A. CLOSE ONGUARD PROGRAM.
I. PRESS THE “CTRL” + “ALT” + “DELETE” KEYS AT THE SAME TIME.
II. THIS WILL OPEN THE “TASK MANAGER” WINDOW (YOU WILL ONLY SEE PART
OF THIS WINDOW).
III. DRAG THE “TASK MANAGER” WINDOW UP/OVER UNTIL YOU CAN SEE THE
“END TASK” BUTTON AND CLICK IT.
IV. WAIT FOR THE ONGUARD PROGRAM TO CLOSE.
B. TURN ‘OFF’ UNNECESSARY LDC’S
I. LDC #2 THROUGH #7 FOR SWIFTPAC, TWINPAC.
II. LDC #2 THROUGH #5 FOR MOBILEPAC, POWERPAC, ½ SWIFTPAC.
III. MAKE SURE THAT LDC #1 REMAINS ‘ON’.
C. TURN ‘OFF’ BATTERY SWITCH.
D. PRESS THE “WINDOWS” KEY THEN THE “U” KEY.
I. THIS WILL OPEN THE “RESTART” WINDOW.
II. DRAG THE “RESTART” WINDOW UP/OVER AND CLICK “OK”.
III. NOTE - THERE IS NO ‘SHUT DOWN’ OR ‘TURN OFF’ COMMAND FOR THE
FG8800.
IV. AS FG8800 GOES THROUGH RESTART PROCEDURE, IT WILL SHUT DOWN
BRIEFLY BEFORE REBOOTING.
V. THIS OCCURS WHEN THE FG8800 SCREEN GOES TO BLACK (NOT THE
GREY).
VI. WHEN THE FG8800 SCREEN GOES BLACK, SWITCH OFF LDC #1.
E. FINAL SHUT DOWN
I. TURN OFF RECTIFIER #1.
II. THE SYSTEM IS NOW FULLY POWERED DOWN.

PROCEDURE FOR CHARGING BATTERIES:

1. TURN ON ONLY RECTIFIER NUMBER 1
2. MAKE SURE THAT THE VOLTAGE DISPLAY IS SHOWING VOLTAGE
USING A PRECISION SCREWDRIVER TURN THE “VOLTAGE ADJUST” SCREW
UNTIL THE VOLTAGE DISPLAY IS READING 29.3 OR AS CLOSE TO IT AS IT WILL
GO. DO NOT TAKE VOLTAGE TO 29.4 OR HIGHER.
3. TURN ON THE BATTERIES AND LET CHARGE FOR 3.5 HOURS
4. AFTER CHARGING FOR 3.5 HOURS TURN THE VOLTAGE BACK DOWN TO 27.2
VOLTS AND LET THE BATTERIES CHARGE FOR ANOTHER 7 HOURS.
5. BATTERIES SHOULD NOW BE FULLY CHARGED.
6. THIS PROCEDURE WILL NEED TO BE DONE EVERY TIME THAT THE BATTERIES
ARE DISCHARGED.

Homepage Previous Document

Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
 FG8800

/
/
FG8800

{ }
! "
# $ !
{ # !} % &'
& " ()
)* + ) '
& ,$
{ ! - } 19” ) $
% &$ $

810 , kingwood,
77339
6092 KINGWOOD, 77325
: 281-359-1519 !: 281-359-2085
": ALLESTEC.com # $ % # & ' (# ) :
INFO@ALLESTEC.COM
REV A

Homepage Previous Document

 ALLESTEC FG8800
/

7/1/06
{ } FG8800-5140A

ONGUARD - Allestec
© 2006 ALLESTEC

, / 0 1 FM, 0 23
FM. / following / 0 ATEX.

.
{ } ALLESTEC.

: { } 30
.

! "" "# $ % FIRMWARE & '(

) ' " "'"
$
* $) + A

, ## #" " ONGUARD 2.67 1/04/06

$-"' FG8800-1060 . , , ' 2.00 3/15/05

4-20MA $-"' FG8800-1700 2.01 8/04/05

$-"' FG8800-1705 SOM 2.00 3/15/05

$-"' FG8800-1725 "'"", 2.00 3/15/05

# " + ",$' 2.01 9/10/05

(#" ") )

____________________________________________

______________________________________________

___________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________________

Homepage Previous Document

 1. ............................………………………………………………..………...……...……………… 8
1.1 +# " ) + "* $ ' " ................................................................ 8
1.2 " $'( $ '" ....................................................................................................... 8
1.3 "# ARCHITICTURE....................................................................................................................... 8
1.4 "4$"#% " " , ## ................................................................................ 8
1.5 $ ( & # ............................................................................................................. 8

2. ...................................................................... 11
2.1 " ' 5" $ ................................................................................................................. 11
2.2 $ ' ( $'( $ '" ............................................................................................... 11
2.3 '( % + #" ........................................................................................................ 11
2.4 ) " " ……………………………………………………………………… 12
2.5 '(-$6 ! 4 '(7 " )"# ) ............................................................. 13
2.6 "7 ' SOURCING SOM ...................................................................................................... 13
2.7 , )" 7 % ................................................................................................................. 13
2.8 ," #" ) ( "#% 7 % ............................................................................ 13
2.9 $ ' ( ADDRESSABLE $-'% ………..... ............................................................................... 13
2.10 #" ' , 7 % ...................................................................................................................... 14
2.11 4$ ' ( " A ' $ B ............................................................................................. 14
2.12 7 % ' ...................................................................................................................... 14
2.13 - 7 % " & .................................................................................... 14
2.14 ' "'( % " "4 ............................................................................... 14
2.15 " ( 28) "- ' (ELR) 4'6 ................................................... 15
2.16 " ( $-'% 4 # ..................................................................................................... 15
2.17 -"#' 7 + -"#' .................................................................................................................. 15

3. ...................................................................................................................................... 28
3.1 4$ ' ( " % + $-"', $5 '(- ( ................................................... 28
3.2 $-"' . , , ' .................................................................................................................... 28
3.3 $-"' 4-20mA ............................................................................................................................................. 28
3.4 4'6 ' # $'( % . (SOM)................................................................................................. 28
3.5 $-"' "'"", ......................................................................................................................................... 28
3.6 " LED' S ................................................................................................................................. 29

4. .................................................... 30
4.1 '(- ( 6 * ............................................................................. 30
4.2 " ( PERIPHEARLS $'( $ $ '" ..................................................................... 30
4.3 " ................................................................................................................................................... 30
4.4 MODBUS ......................................................................................................................................... 30
4.5 TCP/ " . % IP ................................................................................................... 30
4.6 # VGA............................................................................................................................ 30
4.7 % USB .............................................................................................................................................. 30

5. .......................................................................................................................... 33
5.1 " $ % " ") .................................................................................................................... 33
5.2 "# % $ 9 3 ........................................................... 33
5.3 '6 ) ( ' ................................................................................................................................ 34
5.4 (* '" ................................................................................................................. 34
5.5 % 4 ( & ,$ 6 " ' 7 % ....................................................................................... 34
5.6 b " ' ................................................................................................................................ 34
5.7 a " ' - + .............................................................................................................................. 34
5.8 # " % $ " " ' ) $-' ' ..................................................... 35
5.9 '" "'( ( " $-' .............................................................................................. 35
5.10 % .' % (/ 1 9 $-' +$ " ................................. 35
5.11 ' "'( % " %" $-' . , , ' ....................................................... 36
5.12 & # $ " " ' ) $-' .................................................................................... 37
5.13 " " % ' " 4 - "'( $-' ............................................................................ 37
5.14 " "'( % + - "' - REFER TO - "' 25.1.................................................................. 37
5.15 $, " &$ 4! ", $-' ....................................................................................................... 37

Homepage Previous Document

 6. .................................................................................................. 39
6.1 " " "................................................................................................................................................ 39
6.2 "#% ...................................................................................................................................... 39
6.3 ONGUARDSETUP. . DAT ................................................................................................................ 39
6.4 4- & ,$ ......................................................................................................................... 39
6.5 7 "'( & ,$ .................................................................................................. 40
6.6 $ ' & ,$ refer to 24.................................................................................... 40
6.7 - '6 )" "# )" , ' " , refer to 23.2 ....................... 40
6.8 ................................. 40

7. ....................................................................................... 41
7.1 5 ...................................................................................................................................................... 41
7.2 , . ( "4 "#% ................................................................................. 41
7.3 . ( "4 "-" + "#% ........................................................... 41

8. CONFIGS ................................................................... 42
8.1 4! " '" " " $ #") ....................................................................... 42
8.2 4$ % 4! ", $-' ..................................................................................................................... 42
8.3 %4 $-' - ' ' "+ + , ' " , ........................................ 42

9. ....................................................................... 43
9.1 4 ( " " $+ " " ' ..................................................................................................... 43
9.2 %4 % ........................................................................................................................................ 44
9.3 ' # ....................................................................................................................................... 44
9.4 %4 $ ............................................................................................................................... 45
9.5 " "$ ( $-"' LED ............................................................................................................... 45
9.6 %4 ( DE-BOUNCE ......................................................................................................................... 45

10. 4-20mA ....................................................................................................... 46

10.1 4 ( " " $+ " " ' ................................................................................................... 46
10.2 %4 $ ............................................................................................................................. 46
10.3 "# DEBOUNCE................................................................................................................................ 46
10.4 7 " ) )" ................................................................................................................. 46
10.5 ............................................................................................................................................ 47
10.6 - ................................................................................................................................................. 47
10.7 $, + #" ............................................................................................................... 48
10.8 & ,$ , - .......................................................................................................................... 48
10.9 %" $-' ") .................................................................................................................. 48

11. (SOM)................................................................... 49
11.1 4 ( " " $+ " " ' ................................................................................................... 49
11.2 $ SELECTON ....................................................................................................................... 49
11.3 '6 )" ............................................................................................................................................. 49
11.4 ' (.................................................................................................................. 49
11.5 & '( ................................................................................................................................................... 49
11.6 $-"' LED RESETING ............................................................................................................................. 49
11.7 % % ( SOM ' $7 (....................................................................................................... 49

12. .................................................................................................. 50
12.1 4 ( " " $+ " " ' ................................................................................................... 50
12.2 $ SELECTON ....................................................................................................................... 50
12.3 " "$ " $-"' LED ............................................................................................................. 50
12.4 %" $-' ") .................................................................................................................. 50

Homepage Previous Document

 13. ! "#$%&#' " ( ) &# *+,
$-.& */+0(+1+ " 1(&.&............................................................................................. 51
13.1 !* +%' , - ./ ! 0 1 %1 0 2 1 ) +* / 0 ( ! ! " SOM % %
# ' 0 " ./ ................................................................................................................................…. 51
13.2 % 4" " ' , ) 4% INPUT ' $-' ' , ) 4% - "+ ( $-'%
%. .................................................................................................................................................. 51
13.3 - 6 ! "........................................................................................................................................ 52
13.4 , ' $ '% " "' . $-' . , , ' ..................................................... 52
13.5 - '6 )" "# & ,$ ................................................................................................. 53
13.6 % % ( & ,$ 6 , '$ " , $ " " " " ,
7" .......................................................................................................................................... 53
13.7 #" 6 5 + " , "#% ........................................................................................... 53
13.8 #" 6 5 + " , ............................................................................................................... 53
13.9 #" 6 " '"+..................................................................................................................................... 54
13.10 , ' $ - - .................................................................................................................................. 54
13.11 #" 6 , ' " , " "#% ..................................................................... 55
13.12 #" 6 , ' " , " ........................................................................................ 55

14. " *! "#$%&#' "

( ) &# *+, $-.& */+0(+1+ " 1(&.& ............................................................ 56
14.1 !* +%' , - ./ ! 0 1 %1 0 2 1 ) +* / 0 ( ! ! " SOM % %
# ' 0 " ./ ………………………………………………………………………………………………... 56
14.2 7 " - " 5 .............................................................................................................................. 56
14.3 , ' ( ......................................................................................................................................... 56
14.4 " !" " !" .......................................................................................... 56
14.5 - 6 ! "........................................................................................................................................ 56
14.6 , ' $ SEQUENCING........................................................................................................................ 57
14.7 4 '(7 " & ,$ +.................................................................................................................... 57

15. *! "#$%&#' " ( ) &# *+, $-.& 4-20mA . 58

15.1 % 4 6 ! $-"' 4-20mA ' - "+ ( $-"' SOM ' "'"", .............................. 58
15.2 % 4" " ' , - ....................................................................................................................... 58
15.3 % 4" " , ) )" .................................................................................................. 58
15.4 - 6 ! "........................................................................................................................................ 59
15.5 % % ( & ,$ 6 $-' , - ' , ' " , ......................................... 59
15.6 # " , ' " , .......................................................................................................... 60
15.7 %" " '"+ .......................................................................................................................... 60
15.8 $ " ............................................................................................................. 60
15.9 , ' ( #"5 $ ' # , - + 5 " $-"'......................................................... 60

16. *! "#$%&#' " ( ) &# *+, $-.& */+0(+1+ " 1(&.&

...................................................................................................................... 61
16.1 !* +%' , - ./ ! 0 1 %1 0 2 1 ) +* / 0 ( ! ! " SOM % %
# ' 0 " ./ ...................................................................................................................................... 61
16.2 ! "! # ............................................................................................... 61
16.3 % 4" " . %" , '% 4'" .................................................................... 62
16.4 % 4" " " " '6 ) "'( '" ' , ) 4% INPUT ............................................ 62
16.5 % 4 " "#" - " 5 " ............................................................................................ 62
16.6 % 4" " %. % 4'" ........................................................................................ 62
16.7 % 4" " 2- 3 '" ................................................................................................................. 63
16.8 4 '6 )" ...................................................................................................................... 63
16.9 - '6 )" "# & ,$ ................................................................................................. 63
16.10 % % ( + $6 & ,$ 6 $ "5 # ' , ' " , ..... 63
16.11 " ' #" 6 5 + " , ............................................................................................. 63
16.12 " " '6 ) "' '" ..................................................................................... 64
16.13 , ' $ '" "'( ( ................................................................................................. 64
16.14 $ 6! $, " '% $-' %4 " ' , ) 4% % " $5 $
* ........................................................................................................................................................ 64

17. ( ) .......................................................................................... 66
17.1 #" " ........................................................................................................................................ 66
17.2 " "'( (..................................................................................................................................... 66
17.3 PRE - " 5 " ............................................................................................................................... 66
17.4 $# "#" ............................................................................................................................. 66
17.5 " 4 )"" "# $# .............................................................................................................. 66
17.6 " ' " " % )" ' .......................................................................................... 66
5

Homepage Previous Document

 17.7 % 4" " . %" , '% 4'" .................................................................... 67
17.8 % 4" " '" $# ......................................................................................................... 67
17.9 % 4" " $, " '% $-' ..................................................................................................... 68
17.10 - '" % + - .................................................................................................................. 68
17.11 , ' $ '" "'( ( ................................................................................................. 68
17.12 . ( & ,$ 6 .......................................................................................................... 68
17.13 % % ( & ,$ 6 $ $# ' ' , ' " , ............. 68
17.14 " "$ " , ' " , ............................................................................................. 69

18. ....................................... 70
18.1 - + " " %+ - ..................................................................................................... 70
18.2 % + " " %+ - .................................................................................................. 71
18.3 4( #" ) ................................................................................................................................... 71
18.4 '6 )" " " " '6 ) "' $-'$ . , , ' ................................................. 72
18.5 , ' " , " ......................................................................................................... 72

19.
................................................................................................................................... 73
19.1 - 6 !"- % % ( & ,$ 6 $-' . , , ' ' , '
" , ................................................................................................................................................. 73

20. ........................ 75
20.1 - ( -$ & ,$ 6 $-' # . , , ' ........................................ 75
20.2 - ( -$ & ,$ 6 $-' # 4-20mA ................................................................. 75

21. ................................................... 76
21.1 ."# % + ......................................................................................................................... 76
21.2 ."#% % + ............................................................................................................................ 76
21.3 % ( "#$ - % $ ( "! " ...................................................... 76
21.4 $ % + " ...................................................................................................................................... 76
21.5 , '% " , "# " 4 6! ................................................................. 76

22. .......................................................................... 77
22.1 #" 6 , ' " , "#% ................................................................................................ 77
22.2 % 4 ( " & )" , ' " , .............................................................................. 77
22.3 % 4 ( $ " '"+ # 5" " %# , ' # " , .......................... 77
22.4 4$&" ................................................................................................................................... 77

23. , ........... 78
23.1 , ' " , SQUENCE ............................................................................................................... 78
23.2 - '6 )" "# ") ( % .................................................................................. 78
23.3 . #" " 5 " )" " , ' " , ....................................................................... 78
23.4 4! " -#" . #" " 5 " ...................................................................................... 78
23.5 ") ( )" " . % ................................................................................................ 79
23.6 4% % 4" " 6 , ' " , ....................................................................... 79
23.7 4 " " %" , ' " , .................................................... 79

24. ........................................................................................ 80
24.1 , $- " & ,$ 6 .............................................................................................................. 80
24.2 , $- " & ,$ 6 ........................................................................................................... 80
24.3 " $ ' , ) 4% , $- & ,$ 6 ................................................... 80
24.4 " $+ " & ,$ 6 ...................................................................................................... 82
24.5 - '" + " & ,$ 6 ........................................................................................................... 82
24.6 , '% " , $ $ ' + " & ,$ # ........................................ 82

25. , , ............................................ 83
25.1 " "'( " #" 6 ................................................................................................................. 83
25.2 % % ( 4 $5 " $-' ................................................................................................. 83
25.3 $ $-' .................................................................................................................................. 83
25.4 4 ' 6! $-"' "#" .................................................................................... 83
25.5 4 ' ( 4 '(7 " )"# $-"' "#"........................................................................ 84
25.6 -#" " " $-' ....................................................................................................................... 84

Homepage Previous Document

 25.7 " "$ ( " " % $-' " " 7 " ........................................... 84
25.8 " "$ ( "'" %" " % $-' " " 7 "........................ 84
25.9 " $-' - '" " 7 % .............................................................................................. 84
25.10 - '" ( $-"'................................................................................................................................. 85

26. ................. 86
26.1 '( % '6 )" " "# ................................................................................................. 86

27. ................................................................... 87
27.1 " #" 6 ................................................................................................................................. 87
1. - '6 )" "# )" $-' ........................................................................................................ 87
2. - '6 )" "# )" & ,$ ................................................................................... 87
3. - '6 )" "# )" 5 + " , '( ........................................................... 87
4. - '6 )" "# )" , ' " , , - '( ..................................................... 87
5. - '6 )" "# WARNING )" , ' " , '( ............................................. 87
6. - '6 )" "# )" " '( ......................................................................... 87
7. - '6 )" "# ". )" , ' " , .............................................. 87
8. . #" " 5 " )" " , ' " , ............................................................................ 87
9. 4 " " %" , ' " , ......................................................... 88
10. . - $+ " " ( $-"' LED' S ............................................................................................... 88
11. $ '" " $-' .................................................................................................................................. 88
12. & ,$ "#% .................................................................................................................... 88
13. MANAGEME CONFIGURATIONAS ............................................................................................................ 88
14. $ MODBUS............................................................................................................................... 88
15. , .......................................................................................................................................... 88
16. 4 - %. "#% ................................................................................................... 88
17. '(-$+ " ONGUARD "#% ....................................................................... 88

28. MODBUS 23"%3)3(+ Allestec (& +#03.'(+ 431 "#43 0+5$63(#&

29. ............................................................................................................ 89
29.1 - - ......................................................................................................................................... 89
29.2 " - " !" +7 " ........................................................................... 89
29.3 " COMMUNICATON - !" +7 " ......................................................... 90
29.4 " '( % + % 4 7 % ......................................................................................................... 90
29.5 " $-' . , , ' ......................................................................................... 90
29.6 $ " - %+ # $'( 7 4 " (SOM) ............................................................................. 90
29.7 " $-' , - 4-20mA ........................................................................................................ 91
29.8 $-"' "'"", ....................................................................................................................................... 91
29.9 " -"#' -"# +............................................................................................................ 91
29.10 # $% # & "'! ( ................................................................................... 91
29.11 "'! '( (' ) * + ......................................................................................................... 91
29.12 "'! '( # $ .................................................................................................... 91
29.13 $ ' + " " # & ,$ ............................................................................. 91
29.14 , $- " " & ,$ .................................................................................................. 91

30. FIRMWARE ................ 92

30.1 ! ! "! # '* , , '# $ ............................................................................ 92
30.2 # (' ' $ ! ! , (ONGUARD.EXE) ............................................................................ 92
30.3 FIRMWARE .................................................................................................................................... 92

31. ................................................... 93
32. ................................. 93
33. ............................................................................................................................. 95
34. ............................................ 96

Homepage Previous Document

 1.
Allestec ONGUARD FG8800 : gas/fire ; 9 2 ;1 28 ,
< / :2 / 3 , 2 :1 9 /1 /
/ 1. # = 23
0 / 0 9 , >
/ 1= 2
2 8 28 . , 9 ;2 < : ,
23 ;29 2 / :1 : : : ; FG8800 ;
;< ;/9 : ;/9 . :/ “ 2 { 1}”
- 2 , = 0 3 ; 0 / . ,
: : 8 ;2 2, / ;2 : ; 0 2 /
2 28 8, 1= 8 / : 9 19 .

1.1
06 ( "#4&#+4 #&5 73 5&5 .8 2+, )3.+*35, 5+#+4! , "++#*3#"#*$3#+%34&9 :#+, %&(3. $%4&*.3( ;,
0+.7(! ) #&#' %+( 6&#' %+.(+"#'8 *"3 4$5+*+0"#*+ +%34&9 ,. "(+*(+3{(3+2/+0 6+3}, )#+2!
:#+ 4$5+*+0"#*+ 0+ +"$< 3"#*.3( ; %4 634+*, "+0347&*= /"; -03"'.
&-03.! 1.&*! , %343) ".3((! 3 * +1.&*.3( (&/+0;#"; * 63#+0 )3"5+6 -&5&-3{%+4;053}. #+ -
435+63(0$8 #, )#+2! +#*3#"#*3((&; $"#&(+*5& &06 ( "#4&#+4& 03,"#* 3 %&(3.'8 $%4&*.3( ;
(&)&. "' " :#+1+ 4&-03.& *%+".30"#* %343=. )343- 5&70$8 1.&*$. 2;-&#3.'(+, )#+2! 5&70&;
5+(> 1$4&9 ; 2! .& %4+*343(& 5&5 +% "&(+ * 4&-03.3 21 0+ **+0& * 03,"#* 3{$5+6%.35#+*&( ;
%34"+(&.+6} " "#36! .

1.2
: 1= ; : /
:1 , =:1
3 / / 1 / . , / :/ 23 /
/ , 9 ;=0 / :1 2 / 0
2 2 2 . :/ EIA 19” , 3U 2 ,
2 5.22” (132.5mm) 2 . &/ / / 1 9
2 9 23 3 > TFT ;/ 8 2 19 3 .
:2 / / 29 23 3> . 23 : 23 ; 0
;2 : /= 9 / 2 8 2 / 2. 3 28 ,
; 9 / ; / 8/ 8 {9 }.
. 0 / : 28 3, FG8800 0 : :
9 8 0 8 0 . FG8800 1; 9 2 8
28 / 3. ; 9 19 :1 0 ;2 : ;
;8 . ; :{ :} / / 1 ; 2, 9 ;2 :
9 3 { } / .

1.3
[] ONGUARD FG8800 :/ /0 :2 3 2. :
/ 2 / 2 / 9 ;/ 4 (2
{ = }, 2 / ), 23 2 / 8 2 9 / 3
; 2 .
[] / 2 2 / , < ; , / 0 3 / 8
: . 2; , 9 ;2 : A ;/ /1 / 1 B,
2; 2 .
[] 2 :2 / 3 , Modbus TCP/IP 2
:1 / 0 { } / .
[] 24VDC :{ =:} 2 3 : 3
/ .$ 2 2 ,9 ; 2 { = } / ; : 8 : 24VDC .
[] : / 9 : / . : 9 / 3 , 9 ;2
: / 2 . 0 23 / ; { = } 4 2 2
0 : : 8 / 8.

1.4
:/ , 3 : Windows /< / PC USB, 2<: USB
{ } VGA 1 3 :1 / . < 3 { }
VGA :/ : 9 ; 0 / / , > ;/
; :< > . : :/ ;2 / , 2
/ ;2 : 8 2 ;/ 23 USB /1 : 2< , 2 <
/ 3 / ;2 : / 2.

1.5
/= ;2 , { } / , / :2 ;2
/ 2 9 . 4 :< > 3 0
: > 0 ;2 : 9 ; 1. / /
/ 2 9 23 2 Modbus 0 / 2, :
3 TCP/IP.

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 1
9

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 2

10

Homepage Previous Document

 2.

2.1
2 = 0 2 : 0 8 28 / 3 0
8 8 28 9 2 ; 2 / 2. /
{ 9 }- - / / 0 ;2 : / 3 , 9 ;2 / : / ,
;? . $ - / 23 / :, 23 2 ;/ , 9 ;2
: 2 : ; 2. $ :/ / .
9 2 > / 0 9: ; : 0 =
/ . 3 , 2 / 2 2 8 :2 2 0 2 2 /
: : , 9 ;2 : /1 > /1 /.

* :/ , 9 ;2 / : : / { }, / 3
19 > { 9/} / 8{ 8}. * / { }
/ , 0 , : 0 / { }. , > /
: { } ; < 0 / : 1 3 /0 3 .
> /, 0 ,9 , 0 : < 1 , 1 ,
/ ' 9 2 2, 2 1= < , 2 ;/ / 2{ 2}, :/
/ 0 3 ;= : / { }. * 2 0 2 ;2 : 2
/ 9 28 3, 1= 81 1.

/ : > 3 / , /1= /1= 2 2

/ 3 / 0 2 : : , 9 ;2 / :
0 :{ ; /0 :} / /1=/1 0 /1 / ;= 1= :

• NFPA 70 3* 9 3
• NFPA 72 : 28 0 3
• NFPA 101 4 :5

/ 8 , 2 / : 2 , 1= 1 1.

"'", & " '5 4% ( ' "'( -#" , ") (

' )" . SHAL, #") ( ' 4$ $! "+ " & .
%" %" # " % '5 % '(- ( , ) 4% " & (
{ - (} - " 7 " ". " "' . FACP, " "#" ( 4
$, " "' ( "'( NEC 760.10).

$ " 4 $ " "'", & $6 ! + , - + 4 + 4 )"#$

# " ", " 5 { 4 '$5 } '"5 ! $6 " 5 $. 4"' , %"
% '" % { " , $ %} " . ' 4 %. " , '5 % 4% (
" 5 % # " # $ $ % "'( {& # } # " ",
" ! " "5 " "{$! " 4} # '( , '(- . 4"'
# ,$ 4% ( 4" ")" % {- ! ! " % } # " # STRUCTAL ' # , %#
*'"#" # , "7 ' # ' 4 %# 4'" # , " %#
$ '" % # ) 4% , ) 4% " " ( 4"'( ( "'( NEC 760.6, UN760-08 760-
0601. # ).

2.2
; :{ :} / / 3, 9 ;2 :{ :} / : :/
EIA 19” 2 3 .$ - 0 , 9 ;2 2 : 3
8 . 9 , 3 : / 3 < 3{ 19 }.
: /3 2 2 / , 9 ;2 / : : / .
$ : /0 1=/1 /, ; 3 ; 28 9 , 0
/ . : , 9 ;2 ;2 : 0 3 : : { }
8NEMA 1 .

2.3
: 28 / 8 19 3.
2 9 2 0 ; /1= 3 19 . '1; 3
, ;/1= 3 19 0 ;2 : :1 2 .
2 ; : ¼” / ( 6.35 ). * ; : , 9 ;2
8 , 2 1 / 2 2 8 , > / .
/ 2 2 ; 0 2 ;2 : 2 : /1 /. :2 ;
- 2 9 2 2, 2 : /1 “ = 23 ;/ ” 0 .
, 23 , 0 :{ :} > 3 9
2 , : ; .
11

Homepage Previous Document

 5 % +: < < ; , / : :, 9
; 3 : 0 3 : 3 . *
/ 0 0 2 2{ } ; : 3 {; }.

: { }
. IMPEDENANCE,
{ }, { }
.
. -

2.4
:/ 0 ;2 : < ; 92 > 9 9 ,
23 2 /1 :{ / } 0 3 ; { } > 3
2 0 8/ 3 { ; } . " 23 ? >
9 { = } ;/ / : < 9
“ %4&*.3( 3 /36! +7&4(+, #43*+1 ”. :/ 0 ;2 : ;2 92 24VDC
9 { = }, 23 9 /1 ; :{ :} 0 2 ; / :
3 24 60 ( ) 9 5 / ,
NFPA 72 (, 1). 4 ;29 ; ; :{ :} , / 3
0 ; 2. 4 0 2 ;2 : 2, :
/ ;8 : /1 :{ =:} ; 2{ 2 } 3 3
(2) 9= 2 ; /1 . / :{ =:}
28 ; 3 9 , / 9 23 9 { = }. 5 3 3 10
/ , 9 ;2 : 0 : { 8 : / } / 3
/ 1; / , ; .

: ? { } ,
ONGUARD , .
COULLD { } .
{ } 26.1 .

; :{:} / / 4, 9 ;2 19 : :{ =:} :1 / 13 14, 9 ;2

2 / 2 3 . : ; 18 30 VDC ;/ , 9 ;2 ;2 9 24V
9 { = } 2 NFPA. ) ;2 : : > 2,
; : { } 0 / 0 { } 23 / 1 / 3
; , ; : { } / 9 { / }. ; 8/ 3 ,
: 25 % { }, ;/1 ; 1 ,9 > / : / 2 2 9
; 19 2 / /= ; . " /0 1= / >
2< 9 72 / . F (22 / . C), ; :{ :} , 9 ;2
: / :< : > 2< /0 1= 3 / 2. :
9 2 2 { = } ; 9 : { } > 8 ; 28
; : 8:

1. 2 2 { = } 1 0 { } 0 , ;
:< 0 9 2 / .
2. 4 2 / 2 / :< 1 > : , 9 ;2 { } 9
{ = }.
3. 8 = < ( ; 2 2 ; ) / :< 1
> : { = }, ; ; /= / .
4. 1= , 9 ; 2 8 ; : 23
{ }.
5. / , > / 9 ; /1 :
/ :, ; /1=/1 ; { 2 1} 9 28.
6. - < 8 2 19 </ > , ;
: < 3 19 / 9 1= 3 .

:{ =:} , ;2 9
. : 0 ;2 : 19 , 19 ;/ , 9 ;2 :9
; .

: ?
{ },
, { }
.

12

Homepage Previous Document

 2.5 ( ),
8, 2 : /1 9 2 ; , 9 ;2 ; :> /
2, 0 2 ;2 : 9 2{ 2 2} /1= :

1. "3 "#+)( 5 % #&( ; 0+.7(! "+*63"#(+ "%+.'-+*&#' +2<33{+2! )(+3} +#4 9&( 3{(31&# *}.
2. 3 %+05.8 )&,#3 :.35#4+% #&( 3 %3435.8)&#3.; " 04$1 6 %3435.8 )&#3.36, 3". -1+#+* #3.' (3
%+-*+.;3#.
3. 35+#+4! 3 . (3,(! 3 "#+)( 5 % #&( ; "%+"+2(! 5 #+6$, )#+2! 2! #' "*;-&((! 6 %&4&..3.'(+.
4. "3 "#+)( 5 % #&( ; * " "#363, "*;-&((+, %&4&..3.'(+ 2! #' *5.8 )3(! * #+ 73 "&6+3
*436;.

2.6 SOURCING {} (SOM)

, 2 1 {
; = 1 } ; 2, 2 2< 1 /=/1 /=/1
; : ;/ 3 / { = }, ;/ / ; : < 24V 8 19 SOM.
4 :< 3 ;/ ; :> 3 . ; :{ :} / / 11
80 TB4-1&2 SOM. : 24V :{ =:} : 23 , :
/ 23 /, 9 ;2 ; :{ :} : 23 { } 8
; , 19 2.
#" ( ": 0 24VDC > 19 19 :/ < > ,
: .
80 </ J4 "- #$" /, :/ < 24V.
* </ / 0 , / ;/ , / 23 24V < 24V. < 24V
/ : = < ;/ { = }. SOM ; sourcing
24VDC 7.5 > { } . #" ( ": 23 : 23 { }, 23 SOM 0
: , - 20 > { } 72 / . F.
80 </ J4 #1,2 < 2 : , 19 SOM ;/ . SOM :/
/1 * # ATO ; : 23 3 8 : 0 > 89 2 8 .

2.7
#" ( ": { ; :} Node / { 2 } / , 2 T-
( ), - 2 / = 2. / 2 8 2 / ;/ /
2 2 : .

2.8 INTERGITY
3 /1 : /1 : 9 28 28 ; 28 > / 28
0 8 3 2 ;/ ; . , / / 0 2 , > -
. : 23 /1= 3 { ; } - 25ms / . - 40 / ,
3 1 / /, 9 ;2 : : ;/ .
23 ;/ , /1= 3 / :{9 :} 2 ;=
/ .
:/ ; /0 ;= ; { / 9} - :
1. 23 shorted.
2. / 0 .
3. 1;2 / 2 / / < ; .

< ; / ,9 23 shorted /= / , 9 ;2
;2 : 9 0 , :{9 :} : 3 2 ;/
3 . : :{9 :} / , 2 ;= : 0 2 /
. : ;= 1; ;/ { / 9} , 9 ;2 ; ;2 : ,
9 ;2 0 : :{9 :} : 3 2.

2.9
80 / 8, 2 1 0 ; 23 8
: / / . 8 2 / 2 1 ;/ 9 : , 9 ;2
: / , = 1 ; . / 2 / /
/ 19 : 3 2 :2 ; ; 2{; 2} 4” / 2 2
{ :2 / 2} : 2 . 2 0 / 2, 9 ;2 19 : / 2
: 7 $# . $ 2, 2 2 7 $# , ;0 2 / 3 9 3
, 9 ;2 : 1{; }, ; /1 / . 9 2< 1= 8
3, 28 9 28{ / 8} = 8, 1 2< 1=
2. 2 {9 29 3 } /1 : :; / 92 2 , ; / 2 8
. ; 9 { ; }/ /1= / , 19 23 : 3
, 23 9 3 { }. * 19 /
: /1 = / 2 28 0 . ; 9 / 9 { }
9 . # / / 0 ;2 : / 2 : { } / , 9 ;2 :
2 / 3 , 1= /1 / 1. * 0 2
3 ; 28 3 0 2 0 :
/ . $ 2 ;/ / :1 / 2 / . "3 $-.! * %+.3*! / #&5 73 5&5 " "#36(!/
4 "$(5&/ 0+.7(! 2! #' ;"(+ +#63)3(! " .+1 (+6 $-.&.
13

Homepage Previous Document

 ; :{ :} / / 7, 9 ;2 :{ :} 2< 1= 8
3 8 4-20ma / / 10 / SOM. 0 23 / 9 2
6-32 / ,/ 1= /; / .25” (6.35MM).
- 0 0 / 3 / 3 9 3 3 /
; { 0 } 0 2< : 20 / . * 23 1 2002, 0
0 / 3 / 3 9 3 3 /
; { 0 } 0 2< : 10 / .

2.10 ,
< 0 23 / ;/ 9 3 : , / . $ 2
91 1;/1 / / { } < ; , 2 , 0 , < { :}
9 2 /= ." / < , 9 , ;= 3
0 8 2 . 9 ;/ 0 ( =
;/ ), / : ;= 3 0 8 , < ; /
/ .
;/ 23 0 ;2 : / , 9 ;2 ;2 : : 23{ 23} 9 23
9 , ; 23 0 , ( A, ; = 1 { } / / 13, B,
; = 1 { } / / 14). ; 23 0 , / :,
:, 3, 2 23, { / 9} 28 , ;= 3 0 8
: 28 9 ;/ , < ; 2 , 2
;/ . " / 9 ;/ , : 0
;29 . " / 9 , < ; / / .
< ; / , ; 2 / 1, 9 ;2 :/ 9
;/ /1= . ;/ /1= 8 8.

2.11 A B
; :{ :} / / 13, 9 ;2 :{ :} :/ A
14 B / . ELR 120 ( ) ;/ /
; 9 / B / .

2.12
/ 13 - / 2 / ;/ . /
;2 9 23 8 : 28 . > 3 , 28 ;/ 28 3
? , > :2 . ) ;2 0 2 ; / :>
, ;/ 23 ; :, = 1= 3 0 ;2 : 0 : .
/ 14 ; ;= 3{; ;29 23} B /1= , ;/ ,
:/ : { } < ELR. * ;/ 2
;29 2 > 92 , > , ;/1 , 9 ;2 : / .

2.13
; : / 9 > , > 0 ;2 : ; 9
; :< 9 90 /
{ / }; / 3 3 0 2{ } .
;/ , 9 ;2 :{ :} / 2 - / 2466C > 23
0 : : : 8 3. * ; : /8 28 ,
2 1 22 9 > / 9 . - ,
23 ; 23 - / . 0 0 8 ; 23 > .
/ 9 /0 > 3 3{ 3} : 0 , :/
A B. ; :{ :} / / 13 14 /9 : 3 .
2 ;/ / 2.

: { } ,
.
- .

TB1.

2.14
, ;/1= 2 3 /= 3 ; { } , 9 ;2 / : 8
; / 0 2 ;2 : 19 2 9 ;/ 28 { = }0 ,
0 2 ;2 : : 2. ; :{ :} / / 11, 9 ;2 ; 9 : : /
/ { = } /1= / / 1 2 .

14

Homepage Previous Document

 : 2,
;/1= / , ;/1= 8 ; / : 23 9 ;/ 4 /
, ;/ ; : : ; 0 28 { = }, : 28 ;/
. > /9 , ;/ ;/ 0 : /8 > , ; / 2
8 , 2 1 0 2, { = } ;/ 0 : /8
, 9 ; :< 8, 9 ;2 2 0 : ;8 23 { }, 9 ;2 / :/ 2
0 8 ; 2.

2.15
, / ;2 ,/ 2 / ;2 : 2 8
0 = / / 2 . 19 ; / : 0 0 23 9
{ ; }, /1= { 2 1= } ; 9 2 / 8,9,11, 12. ; 2 / /
;2 : 2{ 2} : ; 2 0 , 0 / ;2
/ 2. ; ; / 0 / 1; / 1{ ; }, /1= /
{ 2 1= /} ; 2, 0 8 :{ 9 : } 3
{/ 0 } 9, ; 8 { 9 }.

2.16
19 ( 1 , :< ) ; 2 1 : 23 , 0 23
; 9 23 2 / . ; :{ :} :{ 1} 760 :
* 9 /9 : 3 .

2.17 (ELR) ( (&273((! /)

: 3 3 .25 8 / / /
2 . : 3 ;/ / - 3 / .
2 0 2 : 3 3 5%-/1 : 2 3.9K 2. ; :
{ :} 9 { / }, 1= / , 9 ;2 / : 0 = 19 .
2 /0 :1 : : 3 /1= 3 { }9 2 23 (
2 19 ), 9 ;2 / :, 19 > 2 : (>
? 23 ). 9 : , 9 9 - 120 :
:/ 0 2 ; 9 / 14.

15

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 3

16

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 4
17

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 5

18

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 6

19

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 7

20

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 8
21
Homepage Previous Document
 DRAWING 9
22
Homepage Previous Document
 DRAWING 10

23

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 11
24
Homepage Previous Document
 DRAWING 12
25
Homepage Previous Document
 DRAWING 13

26

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 14
27

Homepage Previous Document

 3.

3.1
> / / { ; / 3} / : ;/ / : :
2 . 2; / : / , 0 /9< 2 0 =
: / 1 ;8 3 / . 9 > / : =
4/ .

3.2 :
; :{ :} / / 8. 8 3 / 4 , 9 ;2 :
;29 2 2 19 : /8 2. 2 : > 8 ,
9 2: 9 9 , 2 2 2 4 , 2 9 , 2 19
, 2 , 0 / , . . 2 /1
/9 2 , < ; 2 /= . /9 ( 2 ), / 2 /
: ;= / , /1= 3
/ .
, {$ 0 } - , {$ 0 } 0 ;2 : 9 / / /
; 9 : / . : 23{ 23} / ; 1{/ 0 1}
9 2 8 .
/1= 2 - * / ;/ 3.9K /1= 2 0
, 23 :/ . 2 2 / / : ELR, 19 8 2
2; > 1 SETTINGS F5. /1= 2 0 2 ;2 : 0 2
/ 3 / . * / 0 ;2 : ; , 9 ;2 :
/ 23 / : 2 .
/ : -/ 0 0 ;2 : / , 9 ;2 : ; : 3
: > , : 1;2 / 3 . - , 0 :
2 19 , { 9} ; 0 1 1
: 3 : 1.

3.3 4-20mA :
; :{ :} / / 9. * / 4 = / , 9 ;2
: / :2 2 9 9 8 2 4-20mA 2 2 ; 3
9 3 2 0/ 50%- LFL. < 0 /1 1
/ { }/ : , 9 ;2 :/ : , 3 28
/ 8. 0 23 :{ =:} 2 < 12 ; , 4096
= < ;. ; 2 / / 2 1 2.
9 : 28 / { 9 } ; / ;2 : / 2 0 > 89 2 8 . *
/ 0 ;2 : ; , 9 ;2 : / 23 / : 2 .
, {$ 0 } - , {$ 0 } 0 ;2 : 9 / / /
; 9 : / . : 23{ 23} / ; 1{/ 0 1}
9 2 8 .

3.4 (SOM):
; $ , /1= 3 / 23 / : 2 ( /= 3{ /1= 3} 11)
:/ ; /1 :, 19 1=/1 / 28 ; . 9 SOM
/1= 3 } 9 { : 2 19 /=/1 1 3 ; 9
24VDC / 0.* ;/ 3.9K 0 2
0 . ;
, /1= 3 * / , 9 ;2 0 : 2
/ 1 2. 2 ; 2 / 8 : 0
/ , = > / 3 8 0 = / 2 / 1 2. ; : , 9 ;2
/ 2 2 0 MOV’s 0 2 ; : :, 9 ;2 :
2 3 / 0 ;2 : 2 3 . ; :{ :} 1
11, 19 : 2 / .

3.5 :
; :{ :} / / 12. 0 , ;/1= : / / 8
/ 3 / : :> / .$ 0 9 2 28 2 SPDT C /8
2, 2 10 * 8{ 8} 0 23, 30VDC, 125VAC. $ 0 ,
; := { 2}, : ; / 0 ;2 : > / .

: - ,
, , ,
MOV’S ( ),
, { }
{ }.

28

Homepage Previous Document

3.6 LED’s
$ 2 0 LED’s, 9 ;2 ; 9 : , 8 . LED’s 0 / 2 , 2 2 2
8 / . ; : , 9 ;2 2, 1= 19 9 :, 9 ;2 :1 : 8
.

LED 4-20mA SOM

1 {& 3 2} '6 )" %+ ' ' "+ '% " ' "'" +
/ / '6 ) '
1 4'" " ' % "' - % " " %+ -
5 " 3S "
'
4 {& 3 2} . + , ' *- # $ %+
/ / % %+ %.
' " $
'(7 "
$ +) %+ - %' "'" "'"

$ +) %+ )( ' ( ' ( ' ( ' (

{# ! (} {# ! (} {# ! (} {# ! (}

* % , + " 5 # "5 #"

29

Homepage Previous Document

 4.

4.1
: 0 , /< , ; 2 / 2 /= 9 23
3> . 3 , 9 ;2 : : / , 9 ;2 9
; / :< :{ :} < . :
3 > , 9 ;2 2 : /. " <
; :< , 9 3 ;? { :} 2 0 : : , 9 ;2
/ : > . : /3 ; , 23 / , :/ > 8 :
: ;? { } 8 . : /3 < /; = ,
9 ;2 9 :{/; :} 8 :> , 3.

4.2 PERIPHEARLS
; :{ :} 1 15, 19 : { } VGA, USB /<
/ 2<: / . < < / 3 ;/1 9 /
{ } : / : ? 2 , ;/1 .
9 : 0 0 / , :2 0 2
; { 2 / } 0 :1 / :, :/ : 23 >
/ . < 3 { } :/ : , / /= ,
9 1= 3 2; / #13. * ;/ , 9 ;2 ; :< ; : ; 9
; 0 :/ 2. < 3 { } :/ / 8 3 1, 19 2<:,
9 ;2 : ; . ; < 3 { } 23 > ;/ /
/ : . Windows ;/ 9
0 0 { }. & 9 - 1/4 VGA ;/
; 0 : ; :< { }, 1 / .

4.3
; 9 2 3 , 9 3 ;= :{ :}, 9 8
3, > ;2 . ; 9 Onguard 0
92 { / } ; 2 2 Epson, 2 1 9 :9 USB.
: / ; :< 3 ; = { } / 23.

4.4 MODBUS
19 Modbus :/ EIA DB9 : ASCII. " :
{ }> , 2 1 1 : : 8 ; /1
1 / . Modbus 2 { 8 9 } :2 / ,
; 9 2 Allestec.

4.5 TCP/IP
* : 19 - 19 / . :
> 19 ;/ ; 9 . :1 / :
/ :, :/ >/ 1, 0 : ; 9 NFPA.

4.6 { } VGA
; :{ :} / / 15, 9 ;2 :{ :} :
{ }. # { } ;/ , :/ 1 #12, "# & ,$ ,
9 ;2 : > : 1. # { } 0 ;
/ : 3 / .

4.7 USB
USB 0 /< /1 / / USB 2<:. * / 3 2 ,
/ / /. USB 0 :/ , 9 ;2 : 2
{8 } 0 ; : 2 .

: , USB,
IT , !
{ },
.

30

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 15

31

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 16

32

Homepage Previous Document

 5.

5.1
1. 9 :1 9 3 :1 3 > / .
2. $ : ; 9 / 3.
3. { }, 9 > : ; 9 / 5.
3. { }, 9 23 ;/ : { }
; 9 / 13 14.
4. { }, 9 :/ dipswitches 8 .
5. { } ; 2, 8 ELR : / . * /
1;2 < ; , 2/ / 1 .
6. { } VGA, 9 ;2 : / /
;= 3.
7. /< /1 / / USB 2<: .
8. 24VDC :{ =:} / : > / , 9 ;2
:. # 1 0 0
: : 3 2, ; : 1
/ /.

$ 5. * 2 GLAVN23
/ .

5.2 .
1; 19 / 1; 3 9 { / /}, >
2 /1= 2 > { }:
1. : onguardsetup.dat 3 2< \DiskC
2. & 3 0 ?

1. / onguardsetup. 8 dat 7 "'(. 1. 2 9 onguardsetup. 8 dat

2. ; /0 2 / 2 , 1; 3. 3 .
3. 7 ; /0 : 2 = 2. 0 ; /0 : / 2 < .
/ 2, 0-….N / 9/. 3. onguardsetup. 8 dat
" " - % " / 2;
1 F5.
" 9 / ; /0 28 <
9 / , 8 onguardsetup. 8 dat,
0 /
9 2 :.

" 9 / ; /0 28 <
9 / , 8 onguard-
setup. 8 dat 2
/ : ;= , «$ '"
"# » /0 NIKAK
/ 2 .

33

Homepage Previous Document

 5.3
:/ / 2 2222 . / 0 ;2 :
, 9 ;2 :{ :} . 19} F10
</{ : 9
/ 9 1, 23 :/ 8 2. : 23 :.
"- / 23" : 1793 1;2 /= /1= /9 , : : 3 :
, > 0 : /1= 3 :. / 9 > , ; 9 2
: / 1 ; 9 / / : 3 / 2.

5.4
: 19 / , 3 - : 3 ( 0 10 / ).
: / 9 : dims ; : 15 %, 9 ;2 < :{ :} 0 : CCFT.
3 > / :< { = } / { } { = }, 1;2
8 { 91 }, , >
: 3 . : 9= /1= 1 , 3
/ / /{ 1} 15 / .

5.5
: ; 1 ;/ , 9 /1 / 1 2 /1 1.
; :{ :} / 2.11 ; :< 9 3.

5.6 .&""& B
2; 9 Loop B / , 9 ;2 / :/ 3 , 2
TB2, A&B 19 ( 23 ;= 3{ ;29 23}). 2; OK. * : { }
9 ;/ ;/ ELR ; 9 / 14.

5.7 .&"" A
2; / LOOP BACK / 3 ,
2 / 1 TB2 A&B
" ' A&B 19 . 2;
OK. * / ;/ , 9 ;2
; ;/ 3 9 :
/ ; 9 /
13.

;/ 2 2; ) ' { $ } 5.1
5.5.

34

Homepage Previous Document

 5.8
< 2 3< 0 ; / , ;
:/ 0 ;= : / :2 ." / 2/ 2, 0
9 3 0 23 / / : 8 2 19 : , :/ 2 /.
2 / : = > :1 /
. 2 19 : / , 0 23 0 / 0 :
:{ :} /1= 3 / , 9 ;2 / 9 : . ; :{ :}
/ / 17, 9 ;2 0 2 ; 2; : 2 19 : / . 23 23
{ 23} / ;/ 9 0, 1,2 . . 2; / , / /9<
/ 1 9 (0) 19 : ; 2 19 : , SW1-1 , SW1-2
)(, { } / 17. , / { },
= : SW1-1 0 : 2 :{ ; /0 :} /1= 3 / .
$ 2 / : 8 { 9/} 9 { } 0 : ; 9
25.6. &5 #+.'5+ $-3. 03(# > 9 4+*&({+%+-(&(}, :#+ (3 6+73# 2! #' $0&.3(+ - &*#+2$"&, 3". :#+
(3 -&2.+5 4+*&(+ * 63(8 . ; :{ :} / 25 /9 : 3
. / 2 0 2 : 255 5.8. 2 / 2 2
255. :{ :} / ; = 1 255, ; = 1 { } / 25.

$ 5.2 2 :. $ 5.3 23 9 ;2 :
/ 2. #") ": : pertaining to
startup / 8
23 / 2 : ;/ 0
2< / 1.

5.9
* 9 , / 2 9 0 2 ;/ , ; 9 8 .
: 28 0 8, : / 8 9 , 9:
8 2 2 / 2 2 , ; 9 8 9 . 9: SOM /
8 . 23 ;/ ; , / /
2 /.
#" ( ": FIND NEXT NODE > 1 = / 8, 2 1 3 ,
9 ;2 80 , 2 / 1 9 { }.

5.10 { }
1. 3 8 0 0 , (ONGUARD) ; 0 23, 3 3
23 > . : : 1 3 ONGUARD .
2. 3 2; 1 #13, $ '" $-' , :, > < ,
2; / SELECT MENU ITEM.
3. 9 { / } 5.3 3 / > / 2 , 9 : = 0 / ,
0 28 ;/ .
4. :, 23 , / 0 2 ;2 : / 9 2, 2; 23 /
, 0 ;2 : 9 2 #0 : 80
2 19 (drawing17) .
5. : 0 / FIND NEXT NODE, : /1=/1 2<:.
6. : ;/ : ;/ / , 23 2 19 : . $
19 , > 1 4 2 2 " 2 2 " , >
/9 , 8 2 / . ; :{ :} 9 /{ / /} 5.4.
7. :, 2 19 : .
8. #+2! > - )3"5 03(# > 9 4+*&#'{+%+-(&*&#'} :#+# $-3. %+-73, 6&45 4$,#3 31+ .+1 ( (&
$-.3.

35

Homepage Previous Document

 : { },
,
, #14 , F8 .

#" ( ": " ; :< 2 19 2$0$# 0# {1+43#'}, /1= 3 ;2 23

/ ;= “ " , 4 '(7 " $-' , + " % .” .

9. $ 9 { / } 5.4 4 " 2 2 " . 0 / COLLAPSE,

9 ;2 2 :
/ , 0 : .
10. :> / / / 8 / 8/ , ;2 19 : 2 19 :
:
/ , 9 ;2 ;2 : ; = , :, 2 19 : / 1 .
11. 2; : / SAVE CLOSE, 9 ;2 23 1/ .
12. 8/ 3, 2 / ;2 : 2 0 23 / ,
9 ;2 :{ :} 8 .
13. 1 {& / ; ) } 5.5 2 4/ , 2 ;2 ; 2 8 1 .

5.11
2 / 3 , 2 0 /8 3 2 19 : 2 , / :
8 2 / 0 . 2 0 / ;2 : 9 2 3 / .

1. 9 9 1 8 2 / 1;2 0 , 1
{/ 0 1} ;/ / ; = : .
2. / = , 1 8 2 / 3, 9 ;2 ; :, :
0 ; = 1 . #" ( ": : 3 2 < 1
/9 28 : 28/ 3 8 .
3. ) 2 28 2 28 1 8 2 / .
4. 2< 23 23 2 19 : < 2 8 2 / ; = .
5. : / 2 1 8 2 / . 2 , 9 ;2
3 3 1 0 , :/ ;= 1 > ; = 1 .
6. :/ 2, : /1= / { / } 9 { 0 },
23 / { / } / { }, 19 1 2 19 :
8 2 / .

36

Homepage Previous Document

 $ 5.4 Input 2 :/ 2 23 $ 5.5 4 / ; /< .
3

5.12
' / { } 3 3, / 2 1= 3 9 { }/ .
$ 0 : 5-1, 23 / 2 , 9 > / 5, 1
{ }. / 2 /1 0 2 . $ 2, 2 1 ; :< > 8
9 2 8 , : 28 = , 1 / .

5.13
/2 - ; , ;0 9 / 9 1 255. - / (+*$8
/ 0+2&*.;; / 2, 0+.7(! 0 : 9 / 9 1 255,
/ 8 / : 2 > . ) ;2 ; :
/ : ; 9 / / 255, ; :{ :} / 25.9.

5.14 7 " %+ 25.1.

5.15 { }
[] > { / } 2; #13, $ '" " $-' , 1 2; F5 / .
[] 0 1 + { :} 2 : / . { } / 9
/ 9 1 0 ; 9 2. 2 / 23 { }
89 2 8 .
[] / ( 2) 0 0 ;2 : " = ", = / 8 0 (-) 9
; / 2 : { } / .
[] 2; 1 / , 9 ;2 3 : 80 8/ 9
{ }.
[] 0 1 / / : 3 1 / 1; /0 : / / /.
[] 9 2 9 28{ / 8} / 9 2. , 9 ;2 < : 9 2 8
, 9 ;2 : / 3 28. : 2 2 ;/1
/1= ; 2 0 : .

37

Homepage Previous Document

 DRAWING 17

38

Homepage Previous Document

 6.

: , ,
, , ARCHITUCTURE
,
.
.

: (S)
{ }

6.1
/ 3, > ; : , 9 ;2 9 > 0
/ . 0 : / / / 3 , 2 8
, 9 ;2 ; 9 : 1; / 3 3. 0 , 9
0 : 9 / / 2 1 Windows, 3 2 >
{ 9 }, / .

6.2
/ , / / 8
> 3 2< , 3 C. , : 19
/ , ;8 2 2 , 2 8 C,
23{ = 23} ; / 3 , > 2 : /.

6.3 ONGUARDSETUP.DAT
onguardsetup.dat - 3 / / . * 3 0 2
/ ( 1 F5) { ; }, , { }, 0 { ; } .*
3 < , : -/ 2 8 /1= 9 { }
, :/ /= /1 { ; }. -63(3( 3{-&63(&} :#+1+ > &,.& " 4&-. )(+,{04$1+,}
*34" 3, 6+73# . = #' +#*3# -&5+((+, " .! %&(3. . / , onguardsetup.dat 3 '5 "
: 9 // , 8 .
19 , < 3 { } ,= : 2<:1 START, 3
2, 2; * ' " . = 2 0 2
2< . 0 2 = C : ; :< 3 . 1 3 ;/
8 : onguardsetup.dat. " 2 Onguardsetup.dat ;2 / 2 / 2,
> 3 ; /0 28 / . ; :{ :} / 5.2 ; :<
9 3.

6.4 CONFIGURATON
) ;2 : / , 9 23 8 3 (2) / ; 0 8
( 4 %+ ), / 2 0 2 ( % %4 ). 9
/ / 2, 0 2 1 1. / 8
- , $5 " / :2 3 , 0 0 ;2 : -, $5 " . ;/3 :
/ 1 3 0 8 : : / / 2 9
1{ } / . / 0 ;2 : , :/
: 2 2 80 28 9 28{ / 8} / , / 2 / ;2 :
; 2, 9 /0 / . #" : 9 9 0 ;2 : ; 0 0/
2 . 9 23 9 0 ;2 : ; 0 ;/ / 3 / .$
/= / , 9 ;2 -, $- ( / 1, : /1=/1 / . / :1 9
/ 0 ;2 : /0 , :/ 9 23 / , , 1
9 { / } 3 . / / ;2 : 9 : 2 ( / = 1 /1
8 / : { } / { / }) 0 2 ( / 2 /
, 2 1= 0 3 3 2 / / { / }). ; : , 9 ;2
, / 1= 3 / ,
{/ 0 }, ; 0 / . " : = 5 2;
/ 3, 9 ;2 2; : 23 19 2 2 9 2 : ;= { ;29 2 }
/ / . : / 1 > /{ / /} 2; #12 2; 1
: /1 / 1, /9< 19 / . 0 /
, ; 9 : 13.

#" ( ": / 2 , 2 8 2, ; 0 2 . 0 23 8
8 1 MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS; , / #"
'(- ( ;= 3{ ;29 23} / : 2< .

39

Homepage Previous Document

 6.5
/ 0 / , 2 2 1 #14,
"# + & ,$ "+. / 9 , / 3
3 mainconfigfile.txt 0 0 / / .
mainconfig.txt 3 0 { } / 3, 2 /0 2. /
/0 , { } / mainconfig.txt 3 , 2; 9 0 23 3 0
3 . & 3 2 / 9 2 > .txt 3 : / ; :<
/ 3 , 0 19 2, / 9 3 . /0 23 .txt 3 0 ;2 :
;/ 23 USB :1 3 0 3 ; 1 .
3 , : - , $5 " + .txt 3 2 /0 2 :, /1 . :
:> / 1- , 0 : , 3 2 8 2. ) ;2
:> 3 2, < 3 { } ,= 2<:1
START, 3 2, 2; * . = 2 0 2
2< . 0 2 = C : ; :< 3 . 0 /
/ , 9 ;2 : 3 2, 2 / #13-18. " ,
3 2 8 . : 28 ; : 8 0
; : > 3 , / 2 28 8. 23 /
\Disk / C.

6.6 - #13
; :{ :} / 24.

6.7 , #7
; :{ :} / 23.2.

6.8 -
0 : / 2, 2 = 1 / . 1;
= : ;/ 3 7 4 . 19 #"
+ F5 2 2 /1 < ; /, /9 > ; : 9 , 9 ;2
19 : : 23 . /1= ;2 0 - / 2/
9 2, 9 ;2 3 { : }, < 23 / ; /0
/.

1. #" + 1; / " '" - ;

: { / } .
2. " " #" 6 #11, $ '" " $-' (F5) #" 6 - 3 , > 2; / 1
/ , 9 ;2 : 1.
3. " " #" 6 #13, $ ' + " & ,$ # : > 2; ;
/ , 9 ;2 : 1 / 3 "
; .
4. " " #" 6 #13, $ ' + " & ,$ # : /0 /
-, $5 " >
- 4' ;/ / :.
5. " " #" 6 #12, "# % " & ,$ 2; F8.
6. ONGUARD /0 .
7. 19 .

40

Homepage Previous Document

 7.

7.1
2;-&#3.'(+, )#+2! &06 ( "#4&#+4 63. -(&( 3 * 5+% 4+*&( > &,.+* (&* 1&9 )343-
5"%.+434 Windows, )#+2! *! %+.( #' ".30$8 < 3 -&0&) 0+.7(! 6 +24&-+6.

3 %4 *30 #3 * 03,"#* 3 *( - " "#36$, 3". (&0.37&< , %4+#+5+. (3 2! . $"#&(+*.3(, .

-&5+() #";. 24&# #3"'{+#(3" #3"'} 5 4&-03.$ 26.1 5 %4&* .'(+ *.&"# {6+< } *( -
" "#36&.

7.2 (Onguardsetup.dat)
1. / (3) < , ; 3 " , #" 6 #14 "# % "
& ,$ .
2. 1; / 9 / ; . ; :{ :} / 25
> 3 .
3. 8 : { 9/}, 2 3 / / / 2; 1 / SAVE CLOSE,
28 1 F5.

7.3
:/ / : { 1} onguardsetup.dat 3
"C 9 / /. : 3 { 9} , , 23 3 0 ;2 :
; , 9 ;2 : 9 3 onguardsetup.dat 3 . 0 onguardsetup.dat 3 9
" " #" 6 9 2 8 /= /1= 3 2 . 23 3
2< C. "#36(! 3 > &,.! 0+.7(! #&573 2! #' "+/4&(3(! (& 0*$/
+#03.'(! / medias * 0*$/ 4&-. )(! /{04$1 /} > - )3"5 / 63"#+%+.+73( ;/, )#+2! 2! #' "&6! 6
23-+%&"(! 6.

) ' - "-" $6 & +' ONGUARDSETUP.DAT #" # " C:

1. / / , ;2 / 2 ; : / 2 ,
8 , 0 : /1= :
2. 3 23 3 : = 2 3 , 9 ;2 :
: .
3. 3 : / 1 2; / #16, "-" $+ " "# $6 4 -$ % .,
2; / SELECT MENU ITEM.
4. : 23{ / 23} :, 2; : / OK.
5. 9 23 3 3 3 onguardsetup.dat ;2 0 2 onguardset-
upbak.dat.
6. /3 onguardsetupbak.dat C /3 > onguardsetup.dat, 9 ;2 :
8 /1 / 1.

" $ - "-" $" $ & ,$ "7 + 4$ %+ USB:

: { }
{ } SURVEILANCE.
, .

: /3 < 3 { }, 9 ;2 : > 3 . >

ONGUARD ; 0 , 2<:1, 5 # " : 9 ONGUARD, 0 /1
> . : 23 0 1 “; 3 { :} ”. 0
ONGUARD . : 0 / START, 3 , ##% , 0 >
. : ;/ 23 USB :. 5 ; : 10 / 9 “HARD
DISK” . 5 % ! "' " ON C. /3 / & ,$
4$ % + .5 / 5 / , 4$ % + "', 2, 1=
/ 1 > . : C 3 3 = 9 ONGUARD, 9 ;2
/ 0 1 . , > , / /1 8 11
: /1 /> { } 0 1 X, 9 ;2 2 :* Windows.

" ( - "-" $" 5" #% + 4$ %+ USB $ & ,$ ,

' 5 " $6
C.

41

Homepage Previous Document

 8.

#" ( ": $ 2 0 2 ;2 : / 2 2 / ; 0
/ / / 2, 9 ;2 :{ :} 8 .

: , .
.

8.1 { },
/ 2 { ; } > 3 0 1 Windows
. { ; } / ;2 : 9 2 / 2 . 28 /9 8,
{ ; } / ;2 : 2 2 2 / 3 .* /1= / 2 2 2{
8 9 2} > / , ; : , 9 ;2 2 > 3 2 ;2 2
Windows .

0 23 / 0 { ; }, 2 1 2 ;2 : 2 , 9 ;2
:{ :} / :2 8 , 0 / 8 8 = 8
28. 1 { / ; 9 } 5.5 2 > 9 2 / , 28 2 , 8
{ } 1 .* { } / ;2 : 2, / .

- 23 9 , 23 1 / 1 F5 Node.
; :{ :} / 19 ; :< 9 3. 2 2 1
/ F8 1 : 9 / .

#" ( ": ) ;2 / : /1= 2, ,, , SOM - 2 / 2 ;/

> 3 8 / .

8.2 { }
$ 28 8 3 8 2 .* 2
{ / 2}, 2 8 2 > 3 0 / ,-9 { } / ,
- 2 /1= / 19 1= 0 . 4-20ma / 0 8 / 2{ 9 } ;
< ;. 23 > 3 , / 0 ;2 : / 3 2
/ / /1 /, ; 2 ; = :{ :} / 25.

8.3
1 {& / ; ) } 9 / 2 9 1, 9 ;2 : / 2 : 28
3. : 8 2; 8 / , 9 ;2 : 80
1; 1; 8 / 1 SELECTED INPUT, 1 80
1;28 9 2 8 1; / 2 1 SELECTED OUTPUT. / ,
: 19 , {/ 0 }, 0 , . . 23 0 ;2 : ; 0
/ . ; 2 2 2 2 0 2 > 8 1 , 1; 3
0 23 " % %, 2 19 8.

, / 9 9 3 , 0 23 (2) / 0
: : , 9 ;2 / : / / 3 2 92 { / } 3 .
, / 2 ;2 2 8 8 = 3 3, / : ;2 : ; 0 2, 9 ;2
: / / 29 1 / ." : : 9 28{ / 8} / 3, 9 ;2
2; : . 2; #12, "# & ,$ , " # #" 6 2; 1
/ 1.

42

Homepage Previous Document

 9.

) 2 / , 2 ;2 2
5.10, ;/ / : /0 2
2 , 9 ;2 :{ :} 8
/ :2 8 .
{ ; } / 3 ;2 2 :0
; 9 9 { / } 9 ;/ / , : /1
2 1 / > / / /.

9.1 /
[] ; 0 2 2 1 ONGUARD, 2;
F5 / ,9 ;2 :> / .
[] 9 1 8 3 / , = 1 3
ADD/EDIT DETAILS. /1= 1
; 9 9 { / } 5.4. # 1 ADD/EDIT
DETAILS 9 9 2 / .
[] { ; :} NODE NAME 9 { / }9
9 ; 0 , $ 9. 4 ( " " $+ "
{ } > . { ; :}
{ } / ,
8 : : { 9 : }
{ } ( 8 3 # / :) { ; },
; / 0 ;2 :
{ }.

[] { }, 0 / /1 8 / 0
, '( + ; #" ' 5" ; 9 9 { / } 9. 0 , 8 3
/ : 2 2, ;/1 8 28 > { ; } / :
2 .

: - , { } { } ,
{ }, { }
.

[] 1 { / ; 9 } 13.6 / 2 , { ; :} ALARM LOCATION 0 2 ,

2 ; 1= / /1= #" ' 5 " ". * { ; :} ALARM
LOCATION - { #" } $ + 9 .
8 = 2 9 /1 1 : 0 / 3
;8 . " : : 8 1 9 { / } 9. , '( "
#" ' 5 " ", 9 3 / ; 2 , 0 0 : : / 3
; 9 9 { / } 9.

43

Homepage Previous Document

 9.2
[] = 3 9
/{ / /} 9 3 /, 1 9 ; 8, 2
1 { }/ 3 . 2; 9 , 23 /9< : 23
:. 8 { 9 }, (&-*&( 3{ 6;} (&%4&*+ +# -(&)5& * ) ".3{4 "$(53} 9.1
. 9.2 ; DEVICE NAME ; 9 9 { / } 13.7.
[] 0 1 0 : 9 0 0 9 / ( { 2 < }
; ).
[] APPLY TO REST /0 /1 1 1= 8 ; 8 ; 8.

$ 9.1 1 8/< 2 2 $ 9.2 0 1

9.3 { }
[] EDIT: 0 ; COMMENT ;= > / ; 9 9
{ / } 9.3.#3)3( 3 #43*+1 > ; " 0 ;2 :
: > . 8 9 2 8 EDIT , '( , #" ' 5"
;= (9 { / } 9.4) 0 > 8 9 2 8 1; 3 / 3
: 3 ; , > 2 - {8 } 9 3 /
: 2; < { 19} F5, 9 ;2 > / . 0 { ; :} 0
; :{ :} 256 . : 2 2 ;/1 { ;2}
8{ ; 8} 0 : 2 .
[] 8 1 , EDIT ;2 ; 1 8 / , / 2 / ; /,
9 3 9 0 0-1 (/ #0, #1).
[] , 8 " / " ' - $" 1, 2; :
OK APPLY, 9 ;2 8 : 1.
[] : 0 1 / SETTINGS ; = 1 { } 9 /{ / /} 9.5.

$ 9.3 /1= 1 $ 9.4 /1= 1 1.

; : / .

44

Homepage Previous Document

 9.4 SELECTON
[] 8 2 / = 9 2;
SETTINGS.
[] : 91 ; /, 9 ;2 $ ( /
( ), 23 :/ / .
: ,
, .
[] 19 0 : : , 9 ;2
2 19 : 3 / 2.
[] 19 1 , > : ,
{ } ,
.
[] , $ / ;2 9 ,
;2 : < 2 , 9 ;2 :
/ 0 .
$ 9.5 1$

: { } , -
EXPIRIED ,
, .

: -
.

9.5 LED’s
[] 0 1 LED’s $-' 4 , 9 ;2 ; : 8 3 / , 1= 3, LED'S
< ; < { }. , 9 ;2 ; 2 : LED’s 8/ 8 ,
2; 1 #10 1 " # #" 6 .

9.6 -
[] ; : "- % ;2 , 9 ;2 : 0 2 > 9
</ 28 8. - 2 :/ 3 : /
2; : 3 , / 9 : 23 / : :/ . :
" - 2 / 1024 / , 8 3 ( 2 2 19
9 ) 0 : / 39 2 8 1024 / 3 , / 9 1
: 3{ / 3}. " : /< 1; 9 > 8 1024 -
2 / , 9 - 2 . : ( ;2 : </ ) 8 { 9 },
/ / 875 / 1024 / 2. ;/ 8 :
{ 9 : }. : - 2 , : 23 {/ } / ;/ /.

- 2 / : - time/62.5ms = 5 3 , ;/ 28
: / 39 2 : 3{ / 3} . 3 / 9 1 - 320 / .
* 0 ;2 : : / 0/ 62.5ms.

/ : - 2 0 ; : $'( & '" , : 9 ,

9 ;2 </ : < ;92 = / 3 $'( & '" +> . /
: /0 / < 0 28 , < / /
2; : 0/ , /1=/1 9. # : - 2 - 64
/ 2, / - 16.32 / ; = 9 2 / .

[] 1 3 , 0 / APPLY, 9 ;2 3 .
[] 0 1 / SAVE CLOSE, 9 ;2 : / 1, 9 ;2 0 :
0 : / / .

45

Homepage Previous Document

 10. 4-20mA

[] 9 9 { / } 5.5,
= 2 { } /
8 / / 1.

10.1 /
[] * 9 8 / / /. /3
2 9.1 9.6 , 9 ;2 : /1
1 0 1 / APPLY.
- : , 9 - "{ # } $-' ;2
, 9 ;2 : %LFL .
1 { / ; 9 } 10 0 2.
3{ ; 3}, 2; /
APPLY, 9 ;2 3 .
[] 2; 1 / SETTINGS.

$ 10. 4 ( " " $+ "

10.2 SELECTON
[] 91 ; /, 9 ;2 $ ( / ( ),
23 :/ / .
[] $ { } 9 { / }
10.1 4 / :, / 9 9
{ / } 10 > : :.
- ,
, .
[] 19 0 : : , 9 ;2
2 19 : 3 / 2
[] 19 1 , > : ,
{ }
, .

10.3 DEBOUNCE
; :{ :} / 9.6 . $ 10.1 $

10.4 { }
[] ; = 1 { } 9 /{ / /} 10.1
2; 1 / SET PT, 9 ;2 2
2 3 .
[] 9 { / } 10.2
:1 ; .
[] 0 8 : 28 / { 9 }
; > 0 1 /{ /}
@, 9 ;2 / 9 : , A / :< 1 : 23
/ { 9 /} ; .
[] ; 92 9 / 9 1 - 30-40-50.
[] : 8 8 / { 9 } ;
;/ .
[] 0 ;2 : ; , 9 ;2 2; :
/ 2{ 9 } ; .
#" ( ": / { 9 } ; /1
{/ 0 1 } / : 0 2 9 .
$ 10.2 / / 9 9
#" ( ": 3 & ; 9 28 28
9 3, % # % # % #
1 / 9 : 2< 60%- LFL.
[] REAL TIME ; 0 8 3 { }
milliamps >
; .
[] 9 - :
{ } '" , , ; 9 .
[] 2; 1 esc, 19 1 / / 1; ,
9 ;2 :> / / /.
46

Homepage Previous Document

 10.5
[] 9 3 0 3 8 2 / 9, 4-20mA 23 /= 3 9 ;
: TB2 , 9 ;2 ; :.
[] ; 9 9 { / } 10, #1 / #1 ;2 ; { },
;2 8 , ' #" > 1. * 1- :
. ;= , " ' 4 " , / < ; ;2
9 .
[] 2 3 / 9 { / } 10.4 10.3
" %+ { }, 23 :1 / 0 ; 0 REAL TIME. *
{ } / ; 3.
[] ( 23 5 %) 3 / { 9 /} ; , 0 23 (15 %) -
% , , 23 (25 %) - % , % .

$ 10.3 1 # '" ZERO 0 $ 10.4 $ '" " 1

9 # '" 0% ;/ 0 4mA 20.01 mA /0 8 /
0 8 / /. /.

[] 2; 1 / CALIBRATE (9 { / } 10.2) , 2 / { 9 } ; ;2
2.
[] 1 { ; = 1 } 4mA { } > ,9 " %" 9 { / },
0 1 / 4 0% ; 9 9 { / } 10.3.
[] : 1 20mA > ; 9 ; 0 10.4 0 1 / 50 %
4
0/ .
[] #") ": " { } ; = / / / 8 ,
;= “$ 50 % '5 #"5 $ 8 25 MILLIAMPS : .
[] $ :< 1 { = 1 } 8 3 { } 3 3 0 - , ,
2; 1 ' . "' , 9 ;2 8 : 2 . : 2; / OK.
[] , 0 / APPLY, 9 ;2 3 .
[] 0 1 . "' , 9 ;2 8 : 2 .
[] 1 , 0 23 ;2 ; , : /3 / 0 /1 / /, 9 ;2 0 :
; : / 3
, :/ .

10.6
4 = 0 ; / 1 - )" $# ') 6.$ :
9 / 9 1 = 30, 2 = 40, % % = 50. : /3 4 , 23
23 9 ;2 / ;/ , 9 ;2 ;2 : ; 2 ;
/= . ; ; ;/ 9 1; 3 23 9 3 ;2 :
; 2 .

47

Homepage Previous Document

 10.7
28 9 / / 92 { / } 2 , 9 ;2 /9 : /1
/1 ; /. 28 /9 8 ; :/ , 9 ;2 :
2 9 , 4-20mA / 0 ;2 : ; . * 2 1 3
; 3 ;/ , 1= 9 , - =
/ : 0/ / . : / 3 4-20mA
{ } ;/ : - ." , 19 1=
4-20mA 9 : 2 , 9 9 0 : 0 , 9 ;2 / :
{ }9 1, 9 0 : 9 : 2 : / 2 .

: ; 2.5 % / ; . > /9 ,
0 2 ; ; 23 , 2.5 % / 0 50 % ( ) < ;.
# ; , : / 23 : ,9 2.5 %
50 % 4-20mA < ;, 12mA sourced 4-20mA / .

10.8
1 F5 : ., / '(
0 19 ; 9 10. / ; , 2 ;
1 onguardsetup.dat 3 . { } / ; /
/ / 2{ 9 }. 2 / 3 ; 8 2
onguardsetup.dat 3 / .

10.9
* { / } #1 " # #" 6 , . " 4! " " 4 $-'", 0 ;2 : ; ,
9 ;2 / : 1, /1 > , 2 $ .

48

Homepage Previous Document

 11. (SOM)

[] = 3 9 /{ / /} 5.5,
{ } / 2 1.

11.1 /
[] 1 This ; 8 / / /. /3 2
9.1 9.6 , 9 ;2 : /1
1 0 1 / APPLY.
1 { / ; 9 } 11 0 2
28/ 3 .
[] , 2 9 { / } 11 ;2
2, 0 1 #" " "
SETTINGS.

11.2 SELECTON
2; / SETTINGS, 9 ;2 19
{ / } 11.1.

11.3 $ 11. 4 ( " " $+ "

[] ; 9 9 { / } 11.1, : " '
{ : } ; , 9 ;2 $ ( / ( ),
23 :/ / .
- ,
, .

11.4
" / : < ; /,
2 , 2 2 ; , ;/ /
shorted .
" :/ ( >
) / /< , 19 3
:, 9 ;2 : ;? :
< ; /. 28 / 8{ 8}, All-
estec 0 9: 0 8, ;/1= 8
: ; 1 .

11.5 DEBOUNCE
- 2 : :/ 19 : $ 11.1 $
2 > / :
; /0 < ; . ; :{ :}
/ 9.6 ; :< 9 3. 11.8
* { / } #1 " # #" 6 ,
11.6 LED’s RESETING . " 4! " " 4 $-'", 0
[] 0 1 LED’s $-' 4 , 9 ;2 2; 9 ;2 : ; , 9 ;2 / : 1,
; : SOM, : : 3 LED’s /1 > / .
< ; < { }. , 9 ;2
; 2 : LED’s 8 / 8 ,
2; 1 #10 1 " # #" 6 .
[] 0 1 / APPLY 9 .

11.7 SOM
? 8 / / 2 <
2 ; /0 , < 0
;2 : 8 9 . ?
2 < 19 : 2
; 9 > 9 8
3& ; 3.

49

Homepage Previous Document

 12.

[], " # #" 6 , 2;

#11, $ '" " $-' , /
2; / ADD/EDIT.
[] 8 / 2 1 , /
0 1 0 2 1{ }, 9 ;2
:> .

12.1 /
[] * 9 8 / / /. /3
2 9.1 9.6 , 9 ;2 : /1
1 0 1 / APPLY.
1 { / ; 9 } 12 0 2
28/ 3 .
[] , 2 9 { / } 12 ;2
2, 0 1 / SETTINGS.

12.2
[] / $! " % #. / 12. 4 ( " " $+ "
[] / 2 1 - 2
/ / 2.

12.3 LED’s
[] 0 1 LED’s $-' 4 , 9 ;2 ; :
8 3/ , 1= 3 LED’s ,
< { :}. , 9 ;2 ; 2 :
LED’s 8 / 8 ,
2; 1 #10 1 " # #" 6 .
[] 0 1 / APPLY 9 .
[] 0 1 / SAVE CLOSE, 9 ;2
: /, 9 ;2 9 :
1 0 : 0 : /
/ .

12.4
* { / } #1 " # #" 6 ,
. " 4! " " 4 $-'", 0 ;2 :
; , 9 ;2 / : 1, /1 #" % + ) '
> / .

50

Homepage Previous Document

 13. ( 9 &. -&9 ; $-.& *+0&

:
. , .

13.1 , SOM
* 2; / :/ 2; 1;28 0 9 8 19 3. *
- “ 9 19 ” 8 28 / , 9 ;2 2 / 2. $ 2, 2 ;2
: 2 9 { } 5.10 /0 2 2 89 -
12, 1 /8 8. 8 3 :/ { } 0 23 , 2 8
: 3 > .$ 2 / ;2 : < 2, 0 +, 9 ;2 ; : 0 23
> 89 2 8 = 2, 0 - { :}.

[] 23 < /
; 0 / 0
19 : 2 8
/ , /, 9 /,
23 / 9<
9
3 ; 9
9.2.
; :{ :}
9 /{ / /} 13
8 3 $
0 +, 9 ;2 < :
/ . - :
{ } /
0: { ; }
28 0 ,
2 2 /= 8
. /1= 3
1 / / 9 ;2
; : 8 3 /
SOM.
[] SORT
80 /
9 { }.
$ 13. / < - 2/
; /< 2.

13.2
,

[] 1 { /;9 }
13.1 2 1
0 , 9 ;2
: 80
> 4 #
. #> .
[] (2) >
2 ; :
(2) : > .
[] : 1 ,
2 / ,
9 ;2 ; : / /
2 .
[] 3 3 = 9 1;
8 / , 9 ;2
: 80
> ; 3 ; ,
9 ;2 :
; 0 : > / /
/ /.
$ 13.1 Input 2/ 28 < 2 2 2 .

51

Homepage Previous Document

 $ 13.2

[] , 23 ;2
; , ;/ :
4 %+
4' ' , 0 ,
0 ;2 : ; ,
0 2= > .
[] : 2; 1 ;/
5 + " , ,
# 6 .
$ 13.3 2; / 2 8 9 ;2
3 : 28 2.

#" ( ": 9 { / } 13.2 - ; " , %4 , 0 , 2 <

, 9 2; 23 / - 3 : : 23. :{ 0 } 2
:2 0 1 9 / . &/ ;
; 8 8, 3 : / /, ; ; 2 8 3
.

[] : 2 1 SOM : 1, 0 + { :}.
0 2= ( 8) / , 23 ;/ 4 %# % .
[] 1 { / ; 9 } 13.3 1 / / 3, ;2 ; > .
2 SOM 1 2 ;2 0 ; 2.

13.3
[] 23 , 8 3 / 0-1 , 1 SELECTED
OUTPUT /1 . ; :{ :} 9 /{ / /} 13.6 :
3 .

13.4 { }
2 ; :< 0 2 4 %+ . + > , $ 6!
-4 "'( ; 0 ( 3). 2; 9 , ;/ 28
1/ : / 2 : 1. ) { } 8 28 / , 9 ;2 :
'5 ;2 : 8 - 2 1 300 / ( )
, ;/ 0 ., {/ 0 } 0 : 0 / 0
/ .

: { }
.

52

Homepage Previous Document

 13.5

[] <
;8 / ,
0 / SAVE
CLOSE, 9 ;2 : 1
/ . - : , 9
; / :
/ . :
/ , >
;/ >/ ;/
0 ;/ / =
/ .
[] 9 1 3 ,
0 0 ;2 :
; 0 > 3
/ . - :
9 { / } 13.6, >
{ } /
9 .
$ 13.4 8 / 1.

[] : 0 1 / OK, 9 ;2 8 : / 1.
#" ( ": / ,> 9 - , $5 " “ 3 1”
[] ; = 1 { } / 24, 9 ;2 - , $- (, -, $- ( " (
/ .

13.6 ,

13.7
: / ;2 ,> /0 3 /
/ ; 1. 23 / , ;2 : 9 , 1 / 0
19 2 2 , 2 ;2 0 2 4 %+ > % , /1 .
8 / , 9 ;2 :> /. /1= 3 >
9 { / } 13.5. 2; / 0 3 > , 23 / 9 3
3 23 2 19 , 1 9 { / } 13.6. # 23 0 3
9 :. - : ,9 { } / / 2/ 3 .

$ 13.5 0 3 # 1 Fire alarm ) ' { $ } 13.6

13.8
[] #" 6 7 % 2< 2 ; ;2 : 2 9 :.
8 = { 9 1= } 0 /1 2< 2 / 3 .
; :{ :} / 19.
[] " ' 1 9 { / } 13.8. * / 2 :, 9
1 < { :}, ; < 9 : > #1 /9 3
{ ;2 }. 2; / OK, 9 ;2 : 1 FIRE ALARM, 2; 1 "# $6
$ #" 6 .
[] '1;2 /1= / 0 3 ;/ / 0 2 > 1 /1=
> { / } .

53

Homepage Previous Document

 [] 2; 1 / VIEW INPUTS ; 9 9 { / } 13.7, 9 ;2 : /
0 1;2 / 8 2 , 2 > 3 / 3. 2; %
{ " '" } / : 0 8 / , 0 <
/ .

[] %. 2; , 9 ;2 :
2 /= / 1.
[] 2; 1 $ 4 , 9 ;2 9 :
/. " ;2 9= , > :
.
[], ) ;2 : : /1 1, 3
/ /{9 } 27 2; / FIRE DISPLAY.
[], ) ;2 : : /1 1, ; :
{ :} 27, #9.
[] - "{ # } $ + , '( "
#" ' 5" " - 2 , 2 ;2
= 2 ; :{ } ADD/EDIT DETAILS
/ {9 } 9.1. , - "{ # }
$ + ;2 2; ; 0 .
[] $ / 2 , 9
: :> ‘” / 2 ,9
, “R” / 2 ,9 ;2 9= . $ 2 13.7 / .

13.9
2 / {9 } 13.8 ;2 1
4 ' 6! . / " $6 ! . 3,
23 ;2 / /{9 } 9.4.
[] #0 $ 8 { } - editable ; :{ },
0 ; { } NODE NAME. #0
/ 2 / 9 0/ .
[] #0-1 )" $ 4 - ; { }
ALARM LOCATION. #0-1 / 2 /
9 / #0, 1.

$ 13.8 1 3

13.10 { } SEQUENC-
ING
13.4, 9
/ 3 , ; 28, 9 ;2 :
/ , ;= " $ "5 "
3 { }, 9 ;2 / :, 9 :
, 0 ;2 :
. , 9 { }
8 / 8 { } : ,
( ) ;/ " $ "5 " "# ,
0 2 / 1,
{/ 0 } / . : ,
/ 0 /9 ,
;/ , " $ "5 " ", ;2 :
/= 1 , { 5 } .
/ 0 sequencing ;2 ;2 :
2 { },
/9 2{ 2}. , {/ 0 } 1 $ 13.9 / 0
0 ;2 : /0 0 1 / .
0 3 , 9 ;2 / : / /.
" $ "5 " 1;28 8
/ " $ "5 " /
; 9 / 6.

54

Homepage Previous Document

 13.11
/ ; { } 8
{ } / 9 0 / , 1
2 , 9 ;2 : < ; /. 2;
/ FAULT ALARM / {9 } 13.10, 9 ;2
: " ,$ 7 4 / {9 } 13.11.
1 { / ; 9 } 13.11 2 1
" , 7 4 .
[], ) ;2 : / 3 / 9 3 3 23
9 :, 2; / < 2. "
< ; 3 ;
, / 9 3 3 23
9 30 / .
[] DETAILS 1 < ; . *
/ 2 :, < ; <
{ 9 :} ;2 9 :
/0 .
$ 13.10

13.12
# 1 " , 7 4 / { }
/ 9 / #0, 1
4'6 " ", " "$ )$, $
/ 2 , 9 < ; . ; 1
/ 9/ - , ELR / ,
; 2 .

$ 13.11 1

55

Homepage Previous Document

 14. 5&. 24$8 < ,{ ( 9 &. - 4$8 < ,} $-3. /+0&{ 5.&0&}
W/DELAY
14.1 { }, SOM -
* / 9 # #$ % $ $ - > 1, 0 , 9 0
;/ SECONDS. 2; 2 8 { }, 9 ;2 /
2 / { 2 / } / 13. * / 0 : :
: / 3 , 2 0 . / , 3 > / / :
{ } 3 .

14.2
[] ; = 1 { } / {9 /} 14 9 1 / 8 : /1 @ A
/, 9 ;2 ; :{ / :} . 3 9999 / . 3 ,
19 .
[] / 1 10 9999 / . , > ,
2 19 .
14.3
{ } ; =
{ } 13.4,
$ 0 2 8
/ 8 { }.

14.4 { }

9.1 2 /
8 { } 2
3 2 =
; 2. '1;/1 > 8 4
; 3{ 3}, 0 ,
3 2 =
; 2, : >
; ; 9
/ {9 } 14.1, >
2 3
/ 3. :,
- 0 / 9
; ,
2 19 : 3
= ; 2 2 / ,
3 9 2 :,
2 19 : 0 ,
" % 6
% +,
$ 14. 0 .
; 9 / {9 } 14.4.
2 / 2 19 3
= ; 2 9
2; . 3
= ; 2
.
CAUTIION:

,
.

14.5
: 1; / 3
SELECTED
INPUT / /,
/ SECONDS
9 t = :,
; 2 / 3
SELECTED OUTPUT 9 /
{ / } 0
/
0 :
. /3 1
/ 8{9 8} 13.1
13.6, 9 ;2 :>
1.

$ 14.1. /0 : / 1 2 .

56

Homepage Previous Document

[] 2; 1 / DELAY, 9 ;2 :
9 9 ; 9 9 { / } 14.4.
#" ( ": " 0 ,
1 , , 0 , /0
.
[] 9 : ; 9
, FIRE STATUS ;/
9 : % +, > 8
, 0
0 { }.

14.6 { } SE-
QUENCING ; = { } /
13.10.

14.7
[] / / ;2 : 2,
:/ 0 2 / 2, 9 3
{ / 3} . - # " $ 14.2. 2 : / 1.
'6 )" " 0 3 ,
/ : 3 9 3
9 , 2 1= 3 9 30
/ . :, : / , = 1
9 { / } / ,
0 2 ,
9 # " '6 )" "
0 1 W/O, / :
3 . ; ,
9 9 9 0
, / = ,
/ , / = 1 ,
0/
. * - " 2
; " > 3 / ,
2 / :; 0 /1 /.

$ 14.3 .

$ 14.4 2; 0 /
0 : 19 : =
= .

57

Homepage Previous Document

 15. 4-20mA 5&. 24$8 < ,{ ( 9 &. - 4$8 < ,} $-3.

15.1 4-20mA SOM

* / ; ; / 8 { } 13 / , ; :.
#" ( ": * - / , : : 23 2; / .

15.2

[] ; = 1 { }
/ {9 /} 15 2; 1 +
/ , 9 ;2
2 : > 4 , 9 ;2
: / .
[] * 1 /
23 / , 0 ,
9 ;2 : ; :< .
[] 3 3 = 9
; :< 9 2 8
/ , 9 ;2 :
80 > >
SELECTED INPUT. >
;2 ; 2
28 . # 1
" , %4 /
{9 } 15.1 .
[], " 2;
/ ;2 ,
0 2= > , 9 ;2
: 80
> , > < .
[] : , -
, '( ; $ 15. / / .
# 6! ; .
$ 15.1 ; 23
15.3
{ }
[] ; , %4
; 9
/ {9 } 15.2, > - >
0 , 9 ;2
: : /1 ;/
/ { 9 } ; >
. 2; /
ACCEPT.
[] > 1,
' #" -
;2 ; / 2; & ,$ %
{/ }. {) ' } 15.2
: / {9 } 23
10.3, > / :.
;2 / 5%- LFL.
#" ( ": ) ;2 0 :
/ 8 /8 / 8{ 9 8}
; > 0
,
& ,$ {) ' }
/ 0 ;2 ;2
15.3
;2 : . "
< ;9
/ , 0
;= , ;/
2 92 { / }
2; :/ 8
; 2 / ;2 : ; 2.[]
{ } .
> , 3 ;2
2; % +
.* ;2 ;
15%- LFL.

58

Homepage Previous Document

 [] : 2; 1 ; 2 / { 2 / } 28 8 { }. >
/ / 9 SOM #2, 1 / 9 / #3 ;2 ; 2
2 1 3.
[] < / , 0 / SAVE CLOSE, 9 ;2 :>
CONFIGURATION. > / 1 2 “ $ 4 + # +{#" #} - , -”.
[] > / { 9 } / ;2 /0 & ,$ 0 : ,
" " #" 6 , 2; #13 $ ' 6 & ,$ # . /
/ ; 1.
15.4
, -
c ha nn el 1 %
0 3,
8 { 9 }
> SELECTED INPUT,
/ 3 /1
> SELECTED OUTPUT.
- : / {9 } 15,
9 3
% 4 ' . { ' }, ;
/1
{ 1 } , %+
/ :.

$ 15.4 / 1.

$ 15.5 ; $ 15.6 1 .

15.5

# / 9: { }, / 1= 3 8
{ } / ; 1 . >
1- ,9, 2 .
} ( { ) / :
2< / : SETPOINT ( -
" , = 5 %), 3 { }.
; :{ :} / {9 /} 15.5
2; “, - + , '( + " "
- " (” /. # 1 / {9 } 15.6
: 3<
{ } . " : 2< 23
/ 23 ; , 2; 1 < 2
( 23 ; 19). - : 2 8
{ } / {9 } 15.7, 2 ;2
19 2 >/ / 1. 0 : , 9 $ 15.7 2; 2 . %" , '%
8 { } 1-1 8 . -,' .
:> / / 2; 1 / GAS LEVEL.

59

Homepage Previous Document

 15.6
; GAS LEVEL / {9 } 15.8. *
: { 9 : } 1, $ %{ ) } 4 2. # 1 -
{ } :{ :} > / , " %+ ; / {; }
3 3, ' "7 ' HIHI. - : ,9 %" " '( # "#" -9
%, - + ,- / / {/ } 5 %. " %" %" - 9 3
{ }, 23 % < ;.
#" ( ": 0 ; : / : / ; GAS CHART 0 , 9
0 : 2 : .

15.7
2, { } 8 { } 0 : , 2;
/ DONE DETAILS, 9 ;2 :> ;= / {9 } 15.9. *
1 / 2 0 ; { } 9 " $6 ! ", 1
#" + { $5 " }. - : , - %+ # $'( %LFL /
{9 } 15.9, ;2 / {9 } 10. #1 / { }
/ 9 / #1. 2; / OK, 9 ;2 : , - #$
, '( #$ #" 6 , " "- , $5 6 /.

$ 15.8 > $ 15.9 > 3

15.8
" 4-20mA ;/ 2 /=
0 { } 0 -9 % < ;, ;=
< ; 3 { }. 2; /
FAULT ALARM, 1 " , 7 4 .
< ; ;2 > ,
$ # { } - : “A” ( )
/ { } 8 { } < ; - =
0 -9 %. : $ “R” ( ; ),
< ; 23 { }
:2 2 2. STATIUS
- #1-1, 23 / / 9 / #1,
1. " 7 4 /
{ } > , { } / 0
-9 %. * 0 0 :
{ :} 2 : 4-20mA .
$ 15.10 >

15.9 { }
" ; :< 9 / 0 4 + ; . { ' }
; 9 / {9 } 15, , ' $6 ! ; . 2; /1= 9 ,
9 ;2 / : : / { }. ( ) , /
/1= / { }, " $ "5 " 3 { } ; 9
/ {9 } 13.9. 2; / WARNING DETAILS, 9 ;2 ;
/ . :/ / 1 , 2 1 /1= ; , : /1
( / {9 } 15.6), 9 ;2 : 2; : /1 /. :
{/ 0 } ;2 / , GAS ALARM ( / {9 } 15.5) . 2;
>/ / 3 1; 3 , 0/= 8 1 : , - $6 , ##$.
0 2 : 0 8 / { 9 } ; , 23 ;/ /0 ,
" $ "5 " 0 2 ;2 : /0 2.
#" ( ": , , / 0 1= 3 1 ; / 2{9 } 13.9 =
/ 2 2 / , / 2 , 3 9 8 .
60

Homepage Previous Document

 16. 5&. 24$8 < ,{ ( 9 &. - 4$8 < ,} $-3. /+0&{ 5.&0&}

16.1 { }, SOM
3 3 2 / ; - / , ;/ /8 , /8 2 /
2 19 .* / :/ 3 / { } 23 ;
/9 , 2 19 : / / :{ 0 } < ; :<
9 2 / , 9 ;2 : :{ 0 }. 9 > > 3 /
2 ; 0 .

16.2
/9 / / 8 { }:
" : 9 : : 3{ 3 3}, 2 / ;2 : 2 2
/ { 0 }. 2, 2 / / 2 0 9 , > /
2 / :/ .

A. )
SOM , ,' %+ , 9 2 1= 3 / , :{ 0 } /9 /1 <
,' , , .
B. *&&"
9 9 : ; ; , .
0 9 : ; , /0 ( ; 9 0 =
19 9 , / {9 } 16), / = ; 2 / / /
{ }.
C. )
SOM , ,' %+ , 9 2 1= 3 / , :{ 0 } , ; 23
9 ,' %" :2 , ; = :{ 0 }.
2 19 : / { } 9 7 / .
D. *&&"
,' %+ 2 / 9 9 , 9 ;2 : :{ 0 }, - +
/ .
E. )
SOM , ,' %+ / ; { }, 9 2 1= 3 / 9
; 1, / { } 3{ } 2 19 9 7
/ . :{ 0 } 9 /1 9 /, 9 ;2 0 : ,' %. : 28
.
F. *&&"
9 /1 : : 2; - #
9 2; ,- %. : 28 .
G. )
SOM , ,' %+ / ; { }, 9 2 1= 3 / , 2 19 :
/ { } 9 7 / .
H. *&&"
- + 9 19 .

61

Homepage Previous Document

 1 {& / ; ) }
16 2 3 1
/ ;
2 /
/
19 3. 2; /
CANCEL, 9 ;2 23 ,
> 1 : .

16.3

{ }
[] 23 < 0
< : / 8
{ }, 0 +
0 2 = / :
28 8,
;/ 28 / :
2 / .
[] : / 3
2 19
1 , 9 0
/0 1
" , %4 ( /
$ 16. $ 1 / - 1= / :.
{9 } 13.2).
[] 1 { / ;9 }
16.1 / 2 , 9
9 3 9
1 0 2 19
( ;/ )
3 ;2 ;
/8 8 { }.

16.4
{ }

[] : 1 2
23 2 19 :
> SELECTED
INPUT, 0 1
/ SELECT PRESSURE
SWITCH. - : /
{9 } 16.1, 2 19 :
0
SELECT PRESSURE
SW ITCH. 2 19 :
0 0 ;2 :
; / / .

Input $ 16.1/ / 28 / 2; 19 .

16.5
[] 8 - " 5 " -, $- - , % $ 2 DEALY. *
0 ;2 : 9999 / , 0 -7 / :< 9 3 " -, $- .

#" ( ": 0 1 , 2 / / , ; 9 1 ; 23 9
.

16.6
[] : < 1 SOM / 3 2 0 2= 1 /8( ;/ 28) 8.
[] > , / #3, 2 ;2 0 ; .
#" ( ": " / / 3 ;/ / 0 2 4 + ; % , 0
19 : - " 5 " -, $- 0 / .

62

Homepage Previous Document

 16.7 2-+,
[] 2 1 23 3 : 23 , 0 1 / SELECT SECOND
SOLENOID. - : ,9 0 SELECT SECOND SOLENOID.

16.8
[] 1 ; 19 ;/ :
[] $ " 5 6! + - ; = 1 { } 13.4, $ 0 2 8/ 8
{ }.
[] +#" % $ - '5
" ; , : : 0 0 , 9
/ 8 { } /< . " ; ;/ , /8 9 ; 9 ,
- + ; 23 9 ;/ 0 : /0 ,
2 .
[] ,' %+ +#" % $ # 5 " 4% ( " "- , $5 "
" , 23 2 / 0 ;2 : /0 1- 3 / , / 8
{ } 9= .$ 0 , 8 { } 0 ;2 : /0 .
[] 0 1 / SAVE CLOSE 0 { } : 3 2 / ,
/ .
[] Just { } 3 , , /1= ; { }
/ ,= 3 OK.

16.9 { }
[] * # & ,$ + { } 3 / 0 0 : 128 8
{ } 0 0 : \/: *? “| 8 2{ }.
[] 3 / ;2 0 / /0 .

16.10

: /
;2 , >
/0
3 /
/ ; 1.
> ,/
9 / #0, 1
;/ / /
shorting
/ 8 { }. # 1
5 + " ,
; 9
/ {9 } 13.5. 2;
$ 16.2 8 / 1. > 8
/ FIRE ALARM, 9 ;2
/ - 2 «/ / ».
: 1 5 +
" , .* 1 ;
; 23 2 /= 1.

16.11 ( { } 16.4 )
[] - "{ # } $ + , '( " #" ' 5" " - 2 , 2 ;2
= 2 4 ' 6! " / " $6 ! " " '
; :{ } / {9 } 9.2.

63

Homepage Previous Document

 [] $ / 2 /1
: : > ,"" / 2
.$ 3 ; :<
, RESET ALARM ; , : ,
"R" .
[], :/ / 1 , ;/ /
0 2 { } .
: /3 :
, 1 > , ;
2 .
[], DETAILS ; , 1 /
{9 } 9.3 . 16.5, 20
/ ;2 PRE-DISCHARGE DELAY 45
/ - +- " 5 " % $ .
[] / { 0 } %+ { :}
( / {9 } 16.5) 9 $ 1 16.3 0 3
4"- "+ $6 ! "#$, : / 3
2 2 23. 3 2 0 9 :
2 19 8 0 23 ; 8
9 { } / 3 :
.
[] 2; 1 - ! " ", ) 4% " 5 (
#" 6 , 9 ;2 : / {9 /} 16.5.

16.12
[] 1 { / ; 9 } 16.4 / 2 ,
23 3 . " 2 19 :
/ { } 9 7 / ,
3 ; 2 /
{ }. > , 2 19 :
/ 9 / #0, 3, /
{9 } 9, , 23
3 . > / { 9 } , >
3 3 : 23 8
{ }. - 3 3 0 ; /
$ 16.4 Input 1 2
9 / T=0 28 / { }.
2 8 3
/ «/ 1 / ».

16.13 { } SEQUENCING ; = 1 { } 13.10

16.14 { }
[] ; 9 / {9 } 16.1, > / / 9 / #3, 2
* " $ { % $ } %4 . '1; 3 (2) / , /0 23 > > /
'" 9 " , 3 / 1;28 ; { 2 / } 2; . "
89 / 0 : / 1, ; / / 3 / { 2 / },
: / 0 ;2 : # + - 0 3, #13.

64

Homepage Previous Document

 $ 16.5 3 3 9 $ 16.6 19

65

Homepage Previous Document

 17. ( )
2; #14 " , #" 6 : / , 2 /1 NFPA
750. * / 2 0 / , \ 2 9
1= 0 0 / 2. - : 9 { / } 17, 1 ,
> - 2 / $# ' .
#" ( ": 0 = 3 / : > 3 / , 9 ;2 ; : 0 2
; , 0 "- ( / 3 .

17.1
/ / 0 ;2 : , 9 ;2 9 : /
{ /} / , 9 ;2 /9 : : /1 > : { 0 }, :/
: 9 2. 0 19 1 / : > 9 ; / ,
2 0 { 2 } 9 {8 }, > ,
2 9 , . .

17.2
/ / , 9 ;2 ; : 8 { 0 }, 2 : /1
1= 9 . :/ / { 0 } 9 ( )
, ;8 : 0 / , 0 :{ 0 } 0 :.

/9 0 { 0 } 8 / , 9 0
/ , 9 2 1= : :, . >
9 ; , 9 ;2 9 :{ } 23 / . / 9
9: : 8 , 3 . " :
/ , 9 ;2 / : 9 28 . , 23 9
( / / 9:) ;2 / , / 0 / 2, { ; /0 0 }
9 / 8. 9 0 / 2, :
8 , :{ 0 } ;2 < . " :{ 0 } 8 , / /
/ /, 9 2 : :. ) { } 8 : 3 ;29
; :1{ :1} ;0 ; CYCLE COUNT. 2;
: : 8 , 9 ;0 , 0 :{ 0 } 8 : .

17.3
; :{ :} 9 /{ / /} #17.1 999 / PRE-DISCHARGE
DELAY. * 9 : 8 /9 2 / / : :, 9 ;2 : ,
/ 9 8 3 28 0 , 9 9 3 2 / { < }. 3
2 / 8 { 9 } 9 > /9 { ;2 }, $# "#
9 { }. " / / 3 ;/ / 0 0 2 4 $6 ; / OUPUT,
;/ / 0 2 : 2 , 1 0
; < .

17.4
999 / MIST ON TIME, / : 3 0 .
9 - " 5 " -, $- , $# "# 9 { } , 9
/ .

17.5
999 / MIST OFF TIME, / : 3 0 .
9 $# "# / , 9 / .

17.6
, 9 / \ 2 9 , 9 ,
/1= ;2 3 / { }: / 0 PAUSE INTERVAL, 23
, ( 999 / ). /1= 3 2 2 /8
:
A. 9 " ' $-% , { 0 } ; :< 3 , (/
{ 0 } < ) 0 , 9 .
B. " :{ 0 } , 0 / 2 , 0
/ : $# # "# $# # "#" , ,
: 9 COUNT ' .

: ,9 : 2; 2 9 { / } 17.1. # : 9 )"
' - 999.
.

66

Homepage Previous Document

 1 {& / ; ) }
17 ; 0 / 1
/ ; 0
/
19 3. 1
{ / ; 9 } 17.1
; 0 ;
19 , 2 ;2
2.

17.7

[] 23< 0
< :8 1
/ 3 3 = 9
1; , ;/
/ : 2 / / .
[] 2 1
{ / 2; 9 } 17.1, 9
/ ; , 9
4 , ;2
; . " 2;
< ; /0 ,
0 2 = > ,
$ 17. :/ : / / .
9 ;2 : 1.

17.8

:/ / 2 2
/ ;2 : 0 2
0 >
% 4 ! ,
0 ;2 :
;
/> 9
{ / } 17.1.
,
2; 1 / SELECT
MIST SOLENOID.

$ 17.1 2; 8 2 2 28 2 / .

67

Homepage Previous Document

 17.9

> ,
SOM #2, 1 /
"'" #3, 2 ;2 0
4 %+
> %
/ 3
/ .

17.10

) ;2 :
% $ $ '
9 2 : ;2 :
; < 2 , : >
9 :, 0 >/
; /.
$ 17.2 2 / 1 / .
17.11 { } SEQUENCING ; = 1 { } / 13.8.

17.12
; :{ :} 9 /{ / /} 17.2, > "Mist Release" 3
/ . 3 / 0 0 : 128 0 0 : \/: *? “|
2.
[] 3 / ;2 0 / .
[] ; = 1 { } / 24 : / / .

17.13

: / ;2 , >
/0 3 /
/ ; 1. > , /
#0, 1 ;/ / / shorting
. # 1 FIRE ALARM (9 { / }
13.5). 2; / FIRE ALARM, 9 ;2 :
1 FIRE ALARM. * 1 ;
2 /= 1.
[] 2; 1 % { " '" }, 9 ;2
: 2, 2 > 3 / 3.
[], ) ;2 : 9 3 >
2; 1 / DELAY, 1 9 { / } 17.5
.
[], " -, $- 9 0, $ 17.3 2; 1 0 .
'" $# %4 17.8 9
9 : .
[] / / 3 , ; 2 17.9
19 , ;/ / 19 2 .

$ 17.4. 2; : inputs .

68

Homepage Previous Document

 [] 23 28, 28 9 { / }
17.1 { } 0 ;
; , ;2 9 .
[] FIRE STATUS 9 { / } 17.5
/ 2 : : .

17.14
" /9 < : /
; 9 ,> 0 ;2 : ; < , 0
/ RETURN TO ALARM DISPLAY,
0 1=/1 / RESET ALARM. ; : /
" $ "5 " , > <
{ :}.

$ 1 : 17.5 .

$ 17.6 / / .

69

Homepage Previous Document

 18.

2; F8, 9 ;2 2; :
! " $6 . $6
/ 1 4 .
= 23
8 /
; (2), 2
/0 2 SELECTED
OUTPUT / ,
;/
; < . 9 , 0
;2 : / ,
: /1= / 3
2 , 9 ;2 2 19 : > .
SOM / /
: : , 9 ;2
/ : ; 2, SOM
; 9 ; 1
. ) ; 2
: > /
/ 1, # +
% $ & ,$
; 13.2
$ 4 )" "
: 2
$ 18. / ; . : :
; , 19 4.
4 / 8 9 ;2 / : ;
!" .
%4 # %. ". 4 ;2 9 ;2
/ 4
/ : ; 4 ' ( " $+ " " '
(9 { / } 18) ;/
9 ;2 : > .
, 9 ;2 2 19 :
; ,
: 23 9 $ 18.1 ; 23
; /
{ }> .
.

0 2 8 3 / 1 , 0 23
, 3 { },
9 ;2 19 : 5 , 4
4 '"'(! { " ' } " ' ,
:/ / 9 { / } 13.3
/ 2 . ) ;2 /= : 23
; ;, /
; 9 9 { / } 18. 9 2
8 / ;/ 19 : 23
2 19 : ,9 ;2 2 19 : ;.
#" ( ": / 3 ,
8 2 / 0 :
: .

18.1
[] > , 2;
!" . /
4 , 2 1 8 3 / 0 2
= 1 4 4 ,
9 ;2 :> 4 % + 4'
' , .
[] 2; 1 ; / &$ 4 .
[] 2 1 / SOM 0 2 = 1
4 - , 9 ;2 :
> 4 $6 ;/ % .
#" ( ": '1; / 3 , 0
SELECTED OUTPUT ;/ 4 7" , $ 18.2 > ;= 2;
:/ >/ / 1 0 ;2 :
0 , 8 :
9 ;2 input / ;2 : / 3
/ { } ;2 ; < . / . / 3 9 ;2
[] 91 /1= { } / : ; " > / 0 ;2 :
/ , ; 9 /{ / /} 18.3 / > / 8 / /
8 1 > . / .

70

Homepage Previous Document

 [] ; / /0 2
2 .

18.2

[] ' 8
8 / , )"
$ 4 , / SOM
( 4 - )
( 5 - ). $ ,
4 '"'(! { " ' }
" ' 0 / .
[] FIRE ALARM .
2; /, 9 ;2 :
1 FIRE ALARM, 9 { / }
18.4.
[] SOM 2 / $ 18.3 / 1 2
/1 23 2 .
/ 9 { / } 13.3.
[], " ;2 2 , 2
{ ; :} EDIT, DETAILS
0 ;2 : ; , 9 ;2
: 2 .
[] > 0 ;2 :
; < , $ 4
)" + 9= .
[], > 4
SOM ;/ ; < .

18.3 RESETING ( )
[] : 9 2 8 / , 9 ;2
2 19 : 4.
[] ; % ; 9 ;
STATUS, 4 ;2 2 19 .
[], > - , : $ 18.4 , / ; 9
2 #2, , 9 ;2 : : / / 0-1 ;2 3 , >
/ 2; 1 /1=/1 /, / 0-4 ;2
9 ;2 : " ' 4 (. 0 9 ;2 / : ;.
[] 8 9 1 FIRE ALARM : .
0 0 ;/ ;2 : 4 7"
/ : , /9 : 9 3
; 2 > .

# " ( ": : { 9 : }
/ , /, ;/ ;
9 :{ :} , 9 ;2 : ;
, , ;2 ; < 2.

$ 18.5 2; 8 2 2
/ 2 / ; 2
/ 18.4.

71

Homepage Previous Document

18.4
- , 2 : /1 8 / / 8/ 3 , 19 23 2 19 :
N.O. ; 1 " '(- %+ . /3 { 0 } / > 8
9 2 8 ; 9 / 8, : / 3.9K ELR.

18.5
" 19 8 / / /, '" %+ 4 2 , : { 0 } 8
0 0 , < ; , ;/ .

72

Homepage Previous Document

 19.

This section explains the procedure to silence an audible device locally at the control panel. There must already be
configuration(s) that trips an audible device. The configuration utilized in figure 13.3 will be tripped into alarm to
demonstrate this feature. This configuration required the HORN ICON to be selected as indicated in figure 19.1. The
TURBINE OPTICAL will trip the horn which can be silenced. In this example a horn is utilized for the device to be
silenced; however, any type of audible device can be utilized but the HORN ICON must be selected (AT THE SOM).
When an alarm occurs, the horn can be silenced at the touch screen and will reactivate on any successive alarms
mapped to this device.

$ 19. ; : /3 $ 19.1 ; /3
/ 8 . SOM.

19.1 -

$-' ID#0-1,
0 )" $ 4 , 2
SOM. / 0
/1 , /9 > ;2 0 19
/ 1.
[] 2; 1 / 0 3 , 1 19.2
0 / 2 1= 3 .
[] 2; 1 / DETAILS, 9 ;2 :
1;2 2 , 2 ;2 2 2 /=
2.
[] 0 ;2 : :1 ; < >
, = / RESET ALARM.
[] 2; 1 / VIEW INPUTS, 9 ;2 ; 1 :
{ ; 1 :} 1;2 / 3 28,
2 > 3 / 3. $ 19.2 .
[] % . .
[] 2; 1 / SILENCE MENU 9 { / }
19.2, 9 ;2 > $ + %
; 9 9 { / } 19.4.
[] "/ 2 ,9 > / 3 := ,
( 9 / 9 1 ) S =
- '" % + - # ') (.
[] - "{ # } $ +
/ 2 /
' #2, 2- 5 - .
[], " ;2 ; 2< 2 / 3 ;2
; 2 / , : ;2 0
1 / ;2 : 2; 9 9 2,
:/ 2 / .
[] 2; { }/ 3
/ , 2; / SILENCE SINGLE DEVICE,
9 ;2 :> 9 :.
$ 19.3 2; inputs .

73

Homepage Previous Document

 [], " 89 /9 /1 :
2< / 3 , 2; / '6 ) 6
$ + SLENCED. * 19 1
9 / 3 9:.
[] $ { } 9 { / } 19.5
"/ 2 ,9 / 3 2 19 .
[], " : ; :< 9 2< / 3
> 3 / , 7 , "
$ + / ;2 : ; 2.
#" ( ": '1; / 1= { / 1= }
/ ; , 23
3 / .
[] 2; 1 / "' % +, 9 ;2 :
1 5 " , .
[] 2< / 3 0 ;2 : ; < 9 ,
> 9 :,
9 :.
$ 19.4 2; 1;
[] / / ;2 ;2 : ; 0
2 1= 0 9 / :< .
> / /0 / 19 1 0 > ,
;2 > ;2 /0 9 :.

#" ( ": 3 9 0 ;2 : 2;
SOM / { }
/ 3 ;/ ; 0 : 2 2 .

$ 19.5 ;
; 9 .

74

Homepage Previous Document

 20.

#" ( ": * ;/ 19 ; 2 2 / .

/ / ;2 : 2 0 3, 2 : /1 , - %+ # + % $
'6 )" , : 0 , 3 / 2 .
* : / , 9 ;2 : : 8 28 3 3, 2 ;/ /
: / 2 , 0 : /. ,
;2 , > ;/ : 2 /
0 3 , 9 ;2 : , 9 ;2 0 : ; :> . ,
; : , 3 /1=/1 : /1 ;/ / 1 UTILITY, 2;
0 =/1 /, 9 ;2 : 3 .

20.1
: 1 F8 2; / # " 1 / % $ '6 )" . 3 8
/ 2; (2), 23 ;/ ;8 / : :/ . 2;
0 : 23 (2), 2; / SAVE CLOSE, 1 / 3 , 9 ;2
8 :> . : : /1 : : :{9 :}.

20.2 4-20mA
: 1 F8 2; / # " 1 / % $ '6 )" . 3
/ 2; (2), 23 ;/ ;8 / : :/ . 2; / :
/ { 9 } ; 23 / { 9 } / : /1 /. 2; 0 : 23
(2), 2; / SAVE CLOSE. 3 / { }, 9 ;2 8 :>
/ . : : /1 : : :{9 :}.

75

Homepage Previous Document

 21.

21.1
0 3 / - , :> . . : 2 1 /,
0 :, / 2 = 1 0 3 / , 9 ;2
:.

21.2
: / ; = 1 { } / 24 /1 / 3
- , $- -, $- . -, $- " / (s), 9 ;2 :.
/ , 9 ;2 0 / ;2 : , / 2
/ - , $5 " % . * / / 9 :
3 9.4 0 2 / , 2 : /1 ;= { ;29 2 } / 2,
/ ;2 : 2 / ; 2 0 .
/ 2 1, /3 23 / , { } 0 =
8 / 3 . 0 -, $5 ( /1 / 1 - , $5 (
/1= 3, 23 ;/ . 1, 9 ;2 : /
2 0 . " - 4$ ( " - , $5 ( / , 2 0 2
: : , 8 0 . , 9 ;2 : /
-, $5 " % # , 8 0 , / .
-, $5 " / - 0 > - 28.

: (S) { }
, . 24&# #3"'{+#(3" #3"'} 5
4&-03.$ 21.3, 3". &06 ( "#4&#+4 /+)3#+#5.8 )&#' 5+(> 1$4&9 8 " "+.3(+ 0+6.

21.3
" : : , 9 ;2 19 : / 3 8 . 23
28 8, 1= 81 1, 2; ; :< / , 9 ;2 19 : /.

1. #". )" +- 23 ; 23 0 9 / : 2 /
/ { / }. $ : :, 9 : 23 < 2 ; <
2
/ { / } 2 / .
- , &(+*+
{ } .
2. *'" )" + - 1 /1 0/ : : 3 8 3
; 9 / 11.
0 2 , /= 3 / : /
0 < ; .
3. *'" %+ - " , #" 6 #13, )" CONFIGURATONS, -, $5 6 a
/ - / 24.2.

21.4
$ /1 / / 2 , /1 { 9 }, 1= 3 1 1
; 9 / ;/ .

21.5 ,
, / :2 2 0 2 ;2 : 8 2 3 , 8
19 1= 0 . # 2 , 1= 1 1 ;/ / : / 2, 9 ;2
:.

; 9 6.8, 1 MANAGE CONFIGURATION, #13, -

, < ; , > / 9 ; , - 8
/ , /1= ;2 3 / { }, 28 / 1= 1 / .
1. " / ;/ - , $5 " , /1= ;2 3 / { }: "
: , < { 9 :}, /< , 1 28 ,
;/ ; /0 .
2. " / { 0 } ;/ - , $5 " ( , / SOM :/ ), /1=
;2 3 / { }: " : , < { 9 :}, /< ,
$ ' 6 ! "+ & ,$ 28 , ;/ ; /0 .

76

Homepage Previous Document

 22.

22.1
# 1 SYSTEM ALARM - < ; /1=
:2 , 2
0 1. 1; :
, ({ 5 }, , -, WARNING FAULT
0 0 1.

" 2 8 { 91 }
4&-. )(! /{04$1 /} / "# .; ; 9
9 { / } 22, > - ,
= 1= /9 3{ ;2 }, 9 ;2 2; :
0 = 3 : ( , :{ 0 },
/ 0 , < ; ). ". ( 5&5+3 03,"#* 3 (3
2$03# %430%4 (;#+, #+ " "#36& %4+0+.7 #
*! %+.(;#' 5+(> 1$4&9 , +"(+*&((! 3 (& /
"*+3*4363((! / *+-( 5(+*3( ;/.

2; : , /= 1/ 0 $ 22. 2 28
4 '(7 " " , ; 9 9 .
{ / } 22.1, 9 ;2 : /
= : 1 SYSTEM ALARM 2; :
/ /1 /1 / ( ).

MORE ALARMS ,
8 4-20mA / . RETURN
TO ALARM MENU , 91
8 0 9
{ / }/ .

22.2
22.1, ; :< 9
0 , : /1 2
/ : , 9 ;2
: 0 : : 3 ,
2; 1 0 =/1 / 1, 9 ;2
0 : / 2 ;2 .
$ 22.1 1 0 3
22.3 / 3 .

9 , DETAILS 0 ;2 :
; / 3 , 9 1= { = }
/. 28 8, : ;
3 , 9 ;2 / : 1
FIRE ALARM 1 DETAILS. # 1 / 2
, 9 { } / 0
.

22.4
2 , / 2 : 28 > 8 / ;2 :
2 ; , / 9
;2 ;2 2. ; :
{ :} / 23.2 /9
: 3 . 0 :, 9
> 8 8{ ; 8} ,
/1= 0 28 8 .
: : 23 ;/ 1
" #$ #" 6 , 2; #9 ) ! 6 "
2; ) ' { $ } 22.2 ; :<
%" . , -, , ({ 5 }, 1
9 { / } 22.1.
WARNING ' FAULT 1 /1=
;2 : 2 :
#" ( ": :/
, 8 { 91 }.
; 19 : 0 / 92
{ / } /= .

77

Homepage Previous Document

 23.
,
23.1 SEQUENCING
0 9 accending 9 { }, 2 2 1 > , <
{ 9 }. 1, 9 ; , " , '( %" %" ,
:2 28 8 /0 2 0. : ; : 28
28 , : 0 , > 9 1. " < ; ,
/9 , 8 { 9 } , > 9 2. 9 9 ;2
23 8 8, 8 . * : : 0 :
;2 : 0 2 { 0 2 } { }, 8 { 91 }. *
{ }/ : ;2 3, 2 / ;2 : = 2 ,
9 . :/ / , { 0 }, , / 0
< ; 3. ) ;2 ; 1 :{ ; 1 :} > 3 , ; :{ :} / {9 /} 13.6,
0 :. 5 " , 9 1. ) / 2
{9 } 13.9 7 4 " , 9 2, / 9 > ;2 3 /9 3{ ;2 }, 9 ;2
3 { : }.
23.2 { },
#1 0+ 7
" % " 2; 2 #" 6 #1 7 > { 1 }
; 9 2 3 2 ;= 4! " +
" C, { } 3 / : ,
2; #8, " , 4! 6 #" " 5 " "
& +' . 1 { / ;9 } 23.1 2
2 ;= 3, 2 ;2 2{ > 2}
0 9 : 8 ;2 { }
" # #" 6 , / {9 } 23. ;= ,
2 ; 2 , 8 0
{ }, 8 9 ;/ 0 .
& 3 ;2 , 2; #7, * # (
{ (} " , '( % " 4! " 4
. * ;= ; 9 3 ;
8 ;= 3.
#" ( ": 0 23 : 23 3 , 23
REPORT FILE MANAGER 0 :
;2 , 2 /= > { 1 }. $ 23. - 19 2; .
2; > 2 3 ,
0 ;2 : : 3 2
;/ 23 : USB. 3 / /
3 /1= :
HISTORY_20051107145154
* 9 { } 0 ;2 : /1=
; :
"# $5 " % . '{ " % .} % ,
2005 1107 14:51:54

#" ( ": " " #" 6 , 9 ; ,

" , '( % " %" , :
, 8 DISPLAY /
{9 } 23 .

23.3 #8
, '( % + # " " 5 " & +' 4! "
/ 3 2 2; 1 #1-7. * 3 2
/ / : /1= 2; .

$ 23.1 7 8 9 2 .

; :{ :} 23.6 , 3 , /1= ;= ;/ USB 1

9 2 1 8.
"{ * # "} "-, > 2; { } 3 2 #1 7, 9 ;2 ;2 : 2
;/ 23 : USB.
"{ * # "} 4 %+ - > 2; { } 2 3 ;2 : 2
{ > 2 }.
$ ' " "-, 3 2 0 3 ;= , 9 ;2 ;2 : / 2 .
$ ' " 4 %+ - / ; 2 3 2.
"' %+ - = 1 " #$ #" 6 .

23.4
0 3 - 8 3 .

78

Homepage Previous Document

 23.5

: IT { }
, INTEFERENCE
.

" : , 9 ;2 /9 : ;= , 2 2 ;= 3 .txt
/ { 9 } 9 8 .

# " # " " ( " 6 { '6 ) 6 } # { } VGA $'( #

$ '" ),
1. : Microsoft WordPad, 23 0 ;9 / : /
{ } 9 2 . C 4! " +.
$ : :, 9 3 - .txt ( ) 2; 1 ;= 2 : :
> .

2. ") ( 4! " " '( , # (6 "

/3 ;= 4! " , 0 " C : USB
9 2 1 > :1 . ; :{ :} 23.4, 9 ;2
9 , '( , #" " 5 " & +' 4! " , = 1 ;/ 23
: USB , 9 ;2 :{ :} ;= .

3. ") ( 4! " " " " $'( $ '"

{ 19 } Epson® USB, 9 ;2 9 : / 2. * -
0 3 > / , 9 ;2 /9 :, :{/ :} 2 PC.
; :
{ :} / : 3 3. 1, 9 ;2
9 : ; 9 1. 9 : 3 #1 : /1= 3 WordPad,
& +' ; , 9 ;2 9 : 2; LPT1, 0 : : . 0 9 : / .
19 23 : Epson 1.2.5.2 0 /1= 2 Epson 0 0 / :
/ FG8800:

4# ) :

440, 640, 670, 740, 740i, 760, 777 777i

C20UX, C20SX, C40UX, C40S, C40SX, C41UX, C41SX, C41Plus, C42UX, C42SX, C42S, C42Plus, C43UX,
C43SX, C44UX, C44Plus, C45, C46, C60, C61, C62, C63, C64, C65, C66, C80, C82, C83, C84, C85, C86
CX3100, CX3200, CX4500, CX4600, CX5100 CX5200, CX5300, CX5400, CX6300, CX6400, CX6500,
CX6600

6# 3 ) :

Photo780, 790, 820, 825, 890, 900, 915, 950, 960, 1280
& R200, R210, R300, R310, R320, RX500, RX510, RX600

23.6
) 2 , , { 5 }, , - ,
" $ "5 7 4 / :
" # #" 6 . 9
28 3 / , :/
1 2 /9 { ;2 }, 2
2 ;/ / / 2 3
" , #" 6 2; 9 2 8
, 9 / 0 9
{ / } 23.2.

23.7
#9
* 2; / 1 > 89 2 8 8
DISPLAY; , 28 0
9 8 / ; 9
23.3. @ @ @ @
$ 23.2 ; 23 5 , , -,
" $ "5 " " "
1 9 ;2 :
9 /9 ;2
1= .

79

Homepage Previous Document

 24.
2; #13 # #" 6 ,
" ( " (, & ,$ 0 /1 / : /1
/ 1, ;2 " , #" 6 #12, "# & ,$ ,
;/ /= ; . 1 { / ; 9 } 24 2 <
/ 9 2 : -, $5 " % # 3 . 3 / - , $5 " , >
9 /= 2 2 / ; 1. / -, $5 " , > ; .
" ;/ / / - , $5 " % " / , ; 0 2 /0 / / /, ;/ /
= ; :. 0 23 / , 3 , DONE ; , /
1 CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT. / >
1, 9 0 “LOADED” - { }, : / 23, 9 ;2 :, > /
# 5" " 5 (. # ", 2/ , 2 : /1 / , /0
$ ( ( ; :{ :} / #" + F5). /1= > 2
{ / 2} 2 1 / 1 0 3 .

:
.
24.1
/ 9 8 , >
9 - , $5 " > 1
= / ; 1. ) ;2
- , $5 ( / , 2 -, $5 " %
: / 1,
0 : /1 / 1 2;
/ LOAD. - / / /
3 .

24.2
/-, $5 " , > 2 / { ? }
; /0 / 0;2 } {
9
; 9 , 0 ;2 : - , $5 " 1;
, : 8 0 0 .
" ;/ / / / , ; 0 2 / $ 24. 5 / 3
0 / / /, ;/ / / 2. ,4 0 .
: /3 / / , 9 ;2 :
/ 1, 9 ;2 -, $- ( 2;
UNLOAD. : /3 -, $5 " ", 9 ;2
19 : / 1. -, $- 1; 3
/ 2 '6 ) 6 ! "" ,
0 TB3, '6 4 /
/0 .

#" ( ": / -, $5 " % , /

< ; .
#" ( ": - , $5 -, $5 / 1, /;2 /1= 3 ;
3 /
#" ( ": / , 2 2 8 2, ; 0 2 . 0 23 8
8 1 MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS. , / !4
% # "/ ! " ;= 3{ ;29 23} / , ;2 ; 0 2 > /. - ,
/ 9 , / / , :/ 0 23
/ .

24.3 ,
:/ -, $- / 19 9 /1 / 1, : 9
< ; , < 0 ;2 : .* ;/ , 9 ;2 2; /8
> { / }, /0 / 1:
1. ; : 7 4 $ , 19 1 / 0 0 1 , 9 /
;/ : : . :- , 2 / 9 / .
2. : 0 : , 9 / - 4' ,
/ / ;/ - , $5 " .

; :{ :} 9 /{ / /} 24 / 1, ;/ -, $5 " .

80

Homepage Previous Document

 [] 2; 1 / UNLOAD.
[] ;= 9 { / } 24.1 .
#" ( ": " > ;= ;/ / :
9 9 ; :< 9 30 / ,
9 { < }
-, $- / 1. -, $5 " "
3 { }, 0 /
;/ - , $5 " , 28 1.
[] 0 1 OK, 9 ;2 -, $- (
/ 1, 9 ;2 0 : 2; : /
EXIT.
[] 4 :< / 3 0 0 ;2 :
/0 .
[] 7 4 , 0 8 TB3
"#" ' " $-' .
[] %. ; 1 MANAGE
C O N F I G U R A TI O N S , 1 FAULT ALARM $ 24.1 > ;=
9 9 2; : 0 .
{ / } 13.10.
[] '6 ) 6 ! "" , 0
8TB3.
[] FAULT ALARM ; (9
{ / } 13.10), 1 FAULT ALARM
9 { / } 24.2.
[] 2; 1 / SILENCE 2 “S”,
7 4 0 /
{ }, / 9 3 3 23
9 :, 7 4 '6 ) ( "'",
.
[] " ;2 > " , 7 4 /0 :
9 ,> 1 : ;2 ;2
0 2 30 / ,
/ 3 8 . 0 23 / 3
9 3 '6 ) " /, /9 , >
0 /1=/1 ; /1 /1
1 1.
[] 4 ; , 1 9 $ 24.2 a
{ / } 24.3 '6 ) 6 ! # . Reoccurring 2
, '( % # 9 # . 0 2 30 / ; : <
3 :.
"#36& #432$3#, )#+2! &06 ( "#4&#+4 %4 (;.
43=3( 3 * :#+6 %$(5#3{#+)53}:

(A) 2; CONTINUE ; { 0 }
/ { } < ; 0 2 30 / .
/ -, $5 " +.
2; / STOP ALARMS, 9 ;2 9 :
:{ :} 19 .
(B) : :
2; / STOP ALARMS.

$ 24.3 ; 23 ; /
.

81

Homepage Previous Document

 [] ;= 9 { } 24.4
/
2; , OK / >
;= ; 3 / (3).
/ ( ) ;/ -, $5 " . < ; ;/
/ 0 19 1= 3 .
# 1 UTILITY .

#" ( ": " ;= 9 { / } 24.4

;/ / : 9 9 ; :< 9
30 / , 9
{ } 19 1=/1 / 1, 1
UTILITY .
[], " 1 MANAGE CONFIGURTION ,
; / - 4' .

#" ( ": /0 3 / 1,
STOP ALARMS ;2 ; , 9 ;2
9 : '6 )" ". * 3 30 / $ 24.4 ; 23 ; /
1 9 { / } 24.4, 9 ;2 : : ,
9 ;2 0 : 19 , ; 3
1 MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS / :
/ 1 .

24.4
/ 1 / , ;/ . 2; / EDIT.
/ / : / : 8 . ; : / 2, 8 1
{ 9} / 2 / 1 / ;/ . <
2; 1 / DONE. 3 / / 0 .

24.5
/ 1, ;/ / . / > , > /0 . 0
/ :> . " > / :/ / 3 / 3, / 0 1=
;= 3 { }.

24.6 ,
, / :2 2 0 2 ;2 : 8 2 3 , 8
19 1= 0 . $ ' 6 & ,$ # , / ,
< ; , > / 9 ; , - 8 / , /1=
;2 3 / { }, 28 / 1= 1 / .

1. $ ' 6 ! "# #" 6 & ,$ + 3 / - , $5 " ,

/1= ;2 3 / { }: " : < ; , <
{ 9 :}, /< , $ ' 6 ! "+ & ,$ 28 ,
;/ ; /0 .
2. $ ' 6 ! "# #" 6 & ,$ + / { 0 }( ,
/ SOM : /1 ) - , $5 " , /1= ;2 3 / { }: " :
< ; , < { 9 :}, /< , $ ' 6 ! "+
& ,$ 28 , ;/ ; /0 .
3. / / SOM -, $5 " % , / 2 ;/ / = ; /0 : < ; .

82

Homepage Previous Document

 25. , ,
25.1
2; F5 / " # #" 6 #11, 9 ;2 / : 1/ . 2; /
ADVANCE. * 1 / 28 / 8 / ; :
:{ :} / .
25.2
* 1 : / 2,
2 9 2 ;/ ,
2 8 / : /0 /
1. / : 2 8
; 9 9 { / } 25. 2; /
NODE DETECTION DIAGONISTIC,
/ 2 { ; } ;= ; 8
. 9 : / ;2
0 2 ;/ ; 0 2, = 1
3 STOP, 9
{ 9 }, 9 ;2 :{ :} / 2
255. 25 / 2 9 2 / ,
0 2 ;/ . 9 3/ 0
: : A / B, 8
9 ; /0 2
" ' ) ' . $ 25 : 1.
#" ( ": " ; :< 9 / ;/
0 : 3 3 (, 255),
9 ;/ : ; /0 :
8.

25.3
;= ; 0 ; : 1
SETTINGS. 23 ; - / :
/ . /1= 3 ; / 2 / 1=
, 0 0 1 0
, 0 / 3 19 1 1, /= 23.
3 ; - ; - 2 .

25.4

; / ;/ , 9 ;2 ;2
2 19 , 9 ;2 > 9 19 : /
;/ . $ 0 ;2 : - ;/ : $ 25.1 ; /0 ; 23 / .
;/ 9 < .
:/ ; : $ " 7" ,
; 1 { } SW1 / 0 2 ;2 :
2 19 2 . " / ;
: 3{ 3} 9 3 9 3
/ , ELR 0 ;2 : =
23 / .

, / 8 0
23{ 23} : , 19 :
/1 :{ =:}. /
0 2 :{ ; /0 :} :
:2 { 9 : 2 } / 2. 23
/ ; ;/ /, ;/
; /0 : / / . , 23
/ 0 : 255.
, / , 2; :
/ F5 : 1 ADVANCE.
$ 25.2 /
[] 2; 1 / NODE DETECTION DIAGNOSTIC
9 SOM 255 4.
1 9 / : 255.
1 { / 2; 9 } 25.1 ;2 ; /0
SOM.

83

Homepage Previous Document

 #" ( ": 9 FIND NEXT NODE, > = / 2, 9 ;2 8 :
: 9 { }. * / 9 3 9 / { ; }.
[] : 6{ -#" " )"} 1 NODE ADDRESS / , 9 1 /1=
> /9 , 4. 2; : 23 :/ , > / /9 SOM, 2;
CHANGE.
[] / 23 SOM : ;2 9 255 4.
[] ) ;2 8 : 23 / onguardsetup.dat 3 , 0 ;2 : 2
/= 26.1.
[] = 1 #" # + 4 ' 6 / " $6 > /
1 ;8 3 .
#" ( ": " ;2 ; :< 9 / ;2 ; , :/ ; :
$ " 7" , 4 $5 " " $-' / ;2 0 23 8 255. * 9 23
, 0 23 / - 9 23{ / 3} :. " / 2 ;/ / 0 2 (
8 28 / ) , - { 9} / / 3, 0 . ,
; :{ :} / 5.10, ; :< 9 ; ;/ /.

25.5
9 4 $5 " $-' $ " 7" DIAGONISTIC 0 : ; :< 9
/ 255, ;/ 0 ; :, 9 / 2 8 9 / 9 1
; = 1 255 . , > 9 , ; = 1 { } / 5.10 9 ;2
: / 2 / 2.

25.6 { }
; :{ :}
$ $} 25.2 ) '${ 2; /, 9 ;2 : ,
: 23 / FROM TO 2; 1 / CHANGE. " / <
-#" " "{ ) } ;2 /= , ;= “ " 4% ' $ "7 ”, 3
{ }. " : 23 8 ;/ ; ;= ” " , $-' ,
* # " ”, ." : 23 8 ;/ ; : ;=
”" ( $5 " $-"' * #, ) 4% 4 ( ”, . : 2; / CLOSE,
2; 1 / SAVE CLOSE, 9 ;2 8 :> 23 3 onguardsetup.dat 3 /.

25.7 255

2; 1 ADVANCE ; 2 / 2 2 : ;/ 8 ; 9 / 9 1
/ 9 1 255. * / 0 ;2 : ; , 8 ;2 9 : :
{ :} / . " ; , / 2 0 2 ;2 : 2 2
:, = : / 5.10 > / .

25.8 255

/ 2 2 8 9 / 9 1 255, ; / ;2 : 9 2
/ 2 ." 2 8 ;/ , :{ =:} 26.1.
; / / #255 9 19 ; :
" / 2 = 2 1 :1 / , : 0 ;2 : <
:1{ =:1}, 2 19 3 ; 9 26.1. 80 SW1-1 ,
SW1-2 / ( ), ;/1= ; . 19 :{ =:} /
9 : 5 / , 2 19 1 > . $ 2 ; 2 1 9 5 28 3
19 . - " " ( $-"' % '6 ) "' SW1 - )(. :
:{ =:} / . :/ ;/ : : / 2 8
/ :/ 2 ; 3, / 1= 3 255. ; :{ :} / 5.10, 9 ;2
: / 255. ;/ / 9 2 /1= 9 { } 2<
.

25.9 255,

) ;2 2; 9 ; : / , 23 / 2, 80
SW1-1 SW1-1 , :{ ; :} 24VDC 3 = ( ; 1 1= 3{ ; 1 1= 3}
:) 9 5 / , / :{ =:}. : ; 1 { }
2 19 SW1 )(.

84

Homepage Previous Document

 25.10
) ;2 / : / 2, 9 { }, 9 / 8 / 3,
/1= 8 > / . : " #$ #" 6 2; / #1, . " 4! " " 4 $-'"
1;2 / / , 2 / ;2 : ; 0 2 > / / /. ) ;2 / :
/ , 1;2 / 0 2 ;2 : 9 -, $5 " % 1 MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS.
" : / / , ; 0 2 > / / /, 0 2 ;2 : ; 0 2,
:/ ;/ .

:
.

1. $ 1;/1 / 1 ( ), 2 ; 0 2 > / / / 1 MANAGE

CONFIGURATIONS.
2. : / /, 23 ;/ / 1 80 2 19 SW1. = :
19 SW1-1 ( ; / / ).
3. > ONGUARD, 2; F5 / , 9 ;2 : 1 / ,
:/ , 9 ;2 / :, 2; : / REMOVE NODE, 9 ;2 3 .
5. - < ;/ :{ =:} 26.1 9 /
/ .
6. / 8 1 MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS 1 { 0 1 }
/ , 2 0 2 ;2 : - , $5 " % .
7. : /, 9 ;2 :, 9 :{9 :} : .

#" ( ": $ / / .* / .$ 23 /
0 , { } / 23 / .
#" ( ": REMOVE NODE ; , 9 / > /
255.

85

Homepage Previous Document

 26.

: 28 ; : 8 0 8 : / : / , ;2
/= 1; 3 : . 0 :, 9 2 , 8 2 ;/ /
/ 2 0 2 ;2 : 0 2, /9 ;8 . ) ;2 0 : > ,
9 , 9 ;8 2 0 ;2 2 = : 1;2 ; , 2 >
: / . 19 { } VGA 2<: /,
0 / ." > ONGUARD ,= : 3 3 2<
2< , 0 1 ; 3 9 . 0 ) ' , 1 , ## #,
0 1 * ' " WINDOWS. 0 2= DISKC.

1. 3 Onguardsetup.dat, = 1 2<:1, 0 1 ,$ 1 , .* - 3 ,
23 0 2 8 / .
2. onguardsetupbak.dat 3 , = 1 2<:1, 0 1 , $ 1 , . * -
{ } 3 2< 23 7.3.
3. $ / 3 2 > 3 . * - 0 8
/ 3, 2 2.
4. $ / / 3 2 > 3 .
5. :, 2; ; / X, 9 ;2 23 1 Explorer, 9 ;2 : Windows CE.net > .
6. ) ;2 0 ; : / 2, ; :{ :} / 25. $ 2 ; 2 ;2 : ; < 2 ,
0 23 / :/ .
7. 0 26.1

: %4+"#+1+ { }

, .

26.1
1. { }, 9 8 0 0 ; 9 9
{ / } 5.
A: ) ;2 0 :9 / 26, 3 , 9 ;2 - $ (, :,
0 : OK, 9 ;2 / : /
. 2 9 3 :/ 1
;2 : ; < 2 .
B: 2 19 : /, 3 , 9 ;2 - $ (, 0 : 1 ,0 / > ,
9 ;2 3 9 2 , / : { = }.

: - { },
,
, ,
.

86

Homepage Previous Document

 27.
> ONGUARD ; 0 , 0 2
{ } ;2 - ;/ : > ,
9 ;2 2; : 1. 0 / CLOSE
MENU, 9 ;2 : / 1. ; :
{ :} 9 { / } 27 27.2 2;
1. : /3 / , 2<: 1
0 : / 2; /.

27.1
2
2; 2 1 2 0 . / 2; 2
1, 2 ;/1 ; :< 9 ,
2{ 2} / ; > / .
1, 9 ;2 : 2 0 .
/ 2 2; 2 1 ;/ / 2 2
{ 8 9 2} /1= 8 8.

#" ( ": ; :{ :} / 4 15
19 USB.

; :{ :} / 23.2 / = 8 $ 27 8/ 1.
3 8#1-7.

1. . ( 4! " " 4 $-'"

; 9 2 1 #11 / 2 , 2
3 / 0 3
, '( #$ #" " 5 " $ 4! " .*
8 3 , { 2 } onguardsetup.dat
; 6.3.
2. . ( 4! " " & ,$
; 9 2 1 #12 / /
> , '( #$ " )" $ & +' 4! " .
3. . ( 5 $6 " ,$, '( 4! 6
; 9 ;= 0 3 / 8
, '( #$ " )" $ & +' 4! " .
4. . ( " ,$ , - '( 4! " "
; 9 2 :2 ;= / 8
, '( #$ " )" $ & +' 4! " .
5. . ( " $ "5 " " " , , '(
4! 6
; 9 /
0 : 28 ;= 3 $ 27.1 2 1.
/ 8 ,
'( #$ " )" $ & +'
4! " . - / , 2
/ ; / 0 3 .
6. . ( 7 4 $, '( 4! 6
; 9 ;= < ; / 8,
9 ;2 " 5 ( " )" & +' 4! " .
7. SAVEL " , '( % " 4! " 4
; 9 23 3 ; 2; 8 #1-6
/ 8 , '( #$ " )" $ & +'
4! " . ; :{ :} / 23.3.
8. "5 ( 4! 6 " )" & +'
: ;/ 23 USB : : 3
> 2; . , 2 2,
8 2 > / 1 .txt < { }. *
3 2 / ;2 : 2 ;/ 23 USB
9 : , 2
. ; :{ :} / 23.4 ;
; .

$ 27.2 0 3 1.

87

Homepage Previous Document

 9. ) ( " , '( % " %"
$ 2 " # #" 6 9 2 DISPLAY /> 8 ;=
23.7.
10. . - ( " ( LED’S $-'
8 / 0 23 : : 3 LED’s / 8 { 9} : .
11. $ '" " $-'
2 3 28/ 2 2 > 1.
12. "# % " & ,$
2 / 2, 9 ;2 2 / 2.
13. $ ' ( & ,$ #
: / 28 / 3. / / ;2 : 2
( /0 2 ) /0 2 . : 2 / ;2 : / 2 .
14. $ MODBUS
1 : ; 8 / / . * ; :
/ .
15. DIAGNOSTIS
* / ; : : : ;2 3 .* 2; :
:/ Allestec.
16. "-" ( "# $6 4 -$ %.
1 2 / : 2 /9 , 9 23 3 /< . *
3 onguardsetup.dat 3 ( . 7), 2 { 2 2 } 23 3 copyo-
fonguardsetup.dat. #" ( ": :1 3 1 2 : > 3 2.
17. '(- ( ONGUARD "# 4 ' )
, ;2 0 , 2; > / 1.
/ / { } : 1 ONGUARD. *
0 : 1;2 > { / }, 2 3 3 " 2 ;2 :
/= 2 1. > / , ;/ 3
: : 3 0 / :1 / 3 3 " 2
Windows. * / 19 : : 3 " 2 =
9 23 8 /1 / " 2.
: ONGUARD,
, ( 30 ).
18. WINDOWS '(- 4 ' ) - )" $# ') 6
2; > :/ / 1 2; #17.
: WINDOWS,
, ( 30 ).

88

Homepage Previous Document

 29.
'1; < ; , = {
8 9 1= } 1 < ; ; 9 9
{ / } 29 / { } : < ; . 8 : < ; , 0
"# # , '( # TB3 { } / { }. ; :
{ :} / / 6. 2; / < ; , 9 ;2 1 FAULT ALARM. 2;
/ SILENCE, 9 ;2 : < ;/ 9 :. 2< < ; 3 { }
0 2 30 / , ; ;2 < . 80 < ; /
< ; 3 .
29.1 { }
" : { / 9} / , ; :
0 2 ; : / , ;
; 9 9 } { /
29.1, ;= ; < ; 8 /1= : ;/
:/ 23 ;= 1= / , 9 ;2
: / ; 2. 9 { / } 29.1
;/ ;2 ? /
< ; SOM. 7 4 :
< ; / , / 3-1 2-1 / / 3 2
9 .* / 2
0 / , / 9 9 -
{ "$ ) } ##$ .

" ;/ / /9
{ / 9/}, > ;= ; < ; .
{ / 9} , 9 ;2 / : 23
; 23 , 9 ;2 / : 0 2
3 ;2 3 < 3 . < ; $ 29. 2; / .
/ 255 - ;/ ;
.

29.2 TERMIN-ATED
B ( ! 2+4 &)&.+ 3#. , *! -! *&;
Ctrl-F7).

+ 4$ :
0 / A ;/ 2 B
/ , 9 ;2 ;= : ; 8
{ } 1 FAULT ALARM. :
1 ;/ ; 9 /{ / /} 29.1
< , " , 7 4 / 0 4/ ,
2 2 ;/ /.

A ' % ' B:
/ 2 2, 9 :
:2 , 2 { / 9} / ) '
2 9 0 ;/ , { $ } 29.1 829.2.
/1= 3 ;/ : : ;/ ,
2 23 - ;/ : A B
< ; 8 / , 0 28
2 ( 0 / 2 2 9 <
. { ; :} FAULT DESCRIPTION
/ 0 < ;/ / 8 / ,
; 28 ;= : ; 8 / :
;/ .

24VDC " :
= } { ;/
/ , 9 ;2 ;= : ; 8 < ; 8 1. "
= 8 { 91 }
, / 2 8 : =
;= ; 8 < ; . { ; :}
FAULT DESCRIPTION / 0 < ;/ /
8 / , ; 28 ;= : ; 8
/ : ;/ . ) ' { $ } 29.2. { / 9}
2 829.3.

89

Homepage Previous Document

 29.3
( 3#.; ! 2+4&
+24&#(! , 437 6, *! -! *&; Ctrl-F7).
" ; : /
; 23 0 , < ; 2 /= , 0 - 2,
2 / 3 { : }.

+ 4$ :
3 ;/ ; / 2
; : , 2 / / : 2
/ 2, 9 ;2 ;= : ; 8 . 9 ,9 >
; < : 3 3
. 2 ; : 1;2
;= , 2 8 ;= 1 ; 8
< ; 1.

A ' ' B:% $ 29.3 2 : 1

/0 ; 2 A 1
B, < ; ;/ 2 /= / 0 / 9%.
(2) 2 , 9 { / } 29.2 .
/ 2 ;/ 2 TB2
;= ; 8 1 FAULT ALARM. >
/ { 9 } 0 ;2 : 9 = < ; , 1
ONGUARD :/ 0 : 2 : 2
.

: < ; 9= ,> ;/ = : , / 3 ;3 8 { 9 }.
; < ; , 3 / , 23 / 2 /=
0 / : ;/ 2 : . :/ / ,9
) ' = 1, 9 ;2 : . 0
: ; 2 3 : , ;/ 8 ;
{ } . - 3 / ONGUARD 2 19 :
/ 26.1, 0 1 : ;/ / { }.
, ;/ : 8 0 8/ / : ;=
2 . { }, 9 1 Ctrl-F7 - 2; ; 23 0 . #" ( ":
1; 1 ONGUARD / 2 2 , < ; { } /
{ }.

29.4
" ;/ ( ; = 1 { } 9 /{ / /} 5.1) ; , 9 / , { ; :}
{ 2 } 1 ; 9 / 12, < ; 3 { }.

29.5
8 3 / < ; /, 8 3 3 ;/ 2 , ELR / .
:{9 :} ; 1 , 2 : 3 { }9 8 /1 1.
$ ' 6 & ,$ # , / - , $5 " , :/ > / :
" ;/ < ; , < { 9 :} /< , 1 28 , < ; ;/
; /0 . < ; ;/ , ;/ ; , /0 /
/0 .

29.6 (SOM)
SOM / { ; }( ELR) 2 ; .
{ 9 } ; /, / 2 , + '( 1 SETTINGS
-# 5 ( / : < . ; :{ :} / 11.4 ; :<
9 3. " < 24VDC ;/ / SOM, J4 0 - #
/ , /= 3{ / } 11, < ; 3 { }, 9 ;2 / : 1 <
24VDC.
$ ' 6 & ,$ # , / - , $5 " , :/ > / :" ;/
< ; , < { 9 :} /< , 1 28 , < ; ;/ ; /0 .
: / 8 0 0 , / / SOM
-, $5 " , / ;/ = ; /0 : < ; . < ; ;/ , ;/
; , /0 / /0 .

90

Homepage Previous Document

 29.7 4-20mA
" 4-20mA ;/ 2 /= 0 { } 0 -9 % < ;, ;= < ;
3 { }. $ ' 6 ! "# #" 6 & ,$ + 3
/ - , $5 " ; : < ; , < { 9 :}, /< ,
$ ' 6 ! "+ & ,$ 28 , ;/ ; /0 . < ;
;/ , ;/ ; , /0 / /0 . ; :
{ :} / 15.8 ; :< 9 3.

29.8
$ /8 2 2 ; 1 . ,/
{9 }.

29.9
, 19 2 / 2, ; /0 ;= - 3 3 < ; > 8
; : 8: " - ;/ : / 3 24V :{ =:} 8 - 3
3{ 3}, 19 100 4 :< . : " - ;/ :
: > / 3 8 - 3 3{ 3},
19 11 4 :< . * 2 < ; / ;2 : 2 2,
9 2 0 2 8{ : 28 / 8}, 2 , = 0 2
0 , 8 , 2, 9 , 8 = 8
, 8 = ( 1= 3 > ,
: - 3 3{ 3}), . .

29.10

29.11 - ! 2+4 F8 . . ( ; #12 * "34* "(+6 63(8

< ; { } / { }, / 1 / . 7 4
= : / < / 28 / .
" , 0 ALL / , $6 , "'( " ! " ' (
4$ , ; : / ;/ : ? { } 0
/ .

29.12 - ! 2+4 F5 . . ( ; #11 * "34* "(+6 63(8

2; 1 NODE MANAGEMENT, / , /1= 3 2, /9 9
{ 9} 0 1 . , / { } 3{ 9} 7 4 >
1 ; /0 . 28 1 ; { 0 } , 7 4 ;
{ 0 } : / { }.

29.13 - . ( ; ! 2+4& #13 * "34* "(+6 63(8 . Ctrl F11

2; , 1 MANAGE CONFIGURATION 2 /= 3 7 4 + ,
. $ , /1= 3 2, / 9 9 { 9} 0 1
.
; :{ :} / 24.6 /9 : 3 .

29.14
1 MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS " / -, $5 " % , 7 4
2 { 2 } 0 28 > 1. " ; / 3
/0 2, < ; ; { 0 } : 23 0 .

91

Homepage Previous Document

 30. FIRMWARE

30.1
; 9 2 2 / /9< : ; 9= / > /
/ 2 29 : 28 9. 8 : 8 3, ,
/ < , ;/ / 9 2 2 ; , / 2
Allestec. 0 : 2 ; 9 ,
; . { } / 3 ; : / 2 , 9 ;/
{ 9} 8 , ; . ; ; 9 , ;
{ / } / ;2 : 2 /. 2 ;/ / 19 2 1;2 ;
;8 . ; :{ :} ; 3 / Allestec 3 : / FG8800
1; 3 , 1= 3 ; 3. > - scaleable, ;8
;/ / ; .

30.2 (ONGUARD.EXE)
) ;2 :{ :} 23 23 , 2; 1 UTILITY ;/
; 3 9 > (9 { / } 23), 9 ;2 :{ :} , >
/9 / / 2.67. * - , 3
2 =:1 3 2 2. #", ," 0 > 9
{ }/ 2 23 , 23 8 - .

30.3
0 23 / / : /1 1 / 2; #11, $ '" "# $-' ,
" , #" 6 2; F5 / . / > 9 1 / , 9 ;2
: 2; : / SETTINGS / . 2; / APPLY 9 .
# 2 2 > 0 . #" ( ": > / : ,
2 / Allestec.

92

Homepage Previous Document

 31.
. FG8800 ;2 , 9 ;2 : , 1; 3 > 23 ; , : 0 :,
9 -9 0 : / 9/. > / / { : } 2 : 0
0 : , 9 ;2 / : , 9 0 9 : 2
7 NFPA 72 9= 2 ; .
; 1= ; / 0 2 ;2 : 2 2 < 2
; /0 1= ; , 9 ;2 ; 9 :, 9 ;2 0 ; 0
/ 0 /. 9 3 2 0 2 ;2 : 2 2
2 2 .

" 0 3 8 2, . ., 3 / 11 /,
/0 /1= 2 2 ; /0 , 9 ;2 : 3
.( ; :{ :} / ). $ : 0 3 8 2
,9 23 { 2 } 2 , 9 ;2 1; :
: 9 { 2 }. $ : 0 3 8 2 ; 2.
, ; /0 0 3 0 ;2 : 2 NFPA
72, 0 3 2 2 .

'" $6 ! " $ " 5 " {- '" } # , 6 ' 5" 4'"#:

43*+1 (3 *! %+.(;8 #5&5 5+(> 1$4 4+*&(+.

/ -, $5 " .
/ 3 / : 2{ 2}.
/ " $ " .
;2 3 / , 3 /1= / .

+10& #43*+1 %4+ "/+0;#{*"#43)&8 #";}, &*#+2$"(&; += 25& %430"#&*.3(& (& :54&(3.
; > ; 8 - > , ; 9 1= 9 /1
:{ =:} 9 / 1{ ; }
/ 3 . 8 { 9 }, 0 / 1, 23
/ 2 / . / ; , > 3 < ; 3 - , /=
{ } 2 / 3 , 1 < : . , 2 < 2 ; 2
/ 0 ; :< 2, 2 / : 0
> 9 . ) ;2 :> ; 2, 3 / 3
;/ : 0 / 3 , > 8 . 0
0 ;2 : 0 18V.

3+2@;"( 6! 3 += 25 . += 25 %4+ "/+0;#{*"#43)&8 #";} * " "#363 %34 +0 )3"5 .

> 2 2 </ 3 { = }.
;2 : ; 2 :2 19 .
:2 ;/ 28 ; 3 : : , , ;2
/ 2 0 // .
ELR ;/ 0 = ; / .

<& $-.! " "#36& (3 6+73#(&,# /.

/ ; , 255 2 19 : 19 . ; :{ :} /
25.

'1;2 2 ; 2 / / 0 2 ;2 : 2
Allestec > 3 9 info@allestec.com. 0 /3 < , <
{ } 23 . / ; 2{ 2 / } 1 9 { }
/ , 0 28 , 9 3 2 3 / 1; 3 / 3
, 9 ;2 9: : /. 0 9 : 2 /
30.

93

Homepage Previous Document

 32.

$'( $ '" 24VDC " # , ## FG8800-1-24V

[ "+ " . " VIEWABLE]

24VDC "'( $ '" , ## % # 4" ")" "# FG8800-2-24V

[ 4 5 6 - # "#% +]

$-"' . , , ' 4 ' 8800-1060

4 $-"' ' 4-20MA 8800-1700

'4 4'6 " # $'( % . 8800-1705

$-"' "'"", 4 ' 8800-1725

" "'( $) % " 8800-5140-REV A

" " # '( + ' 8800-2614

" "- ' -7 % 120 # , 5% 8800-1309

" "- ' - 4'" + ' #% 3.9K, 5% 8800-1211

" ". $ 35MM DIN [ . + , ' $-"' 4-20MA] 8800-5121

" ". $ 35MM DIN [SOM $-"' "'"", ] 8800-5139

' STANDOFF ' , ) 4% ( $-"' " . 8800-1398

$
' $ USB $ $ ) 8800-2718
#% 7 ( USB 8800-2720
[ ' ' '" ] 8800-1270
- ' ( )$ "'( [ ' ' '" ] 8800-1236
- % "'( - $'( $ '" 4A 8800-1721
- % "'( - ' "#% 15A ' 7 % ' 8800-1722

: $%+4;0+) *&;{-&5&-!*&;} 0+%+.( #3.'(! 3 5+6%+(3(#! 0.; " "#36!,

+23"%3)'#3 *34" 5+0& 5&5 +2+-(&)3(+ * 4&-03.3 30.2 30.3.

94

Homepage Previous Document

 33.

a
4 ) + " ' "#% , B 18 30 VDC "-" + '% "4 '
")" " $'( $ '" # # '( " 1.0 # " @ 24 VDC
$ " " '" %"
8800 $-"' B 1060 INPUT: 24 VDC B 20 mA QUIESCENT, 35 mA " 5 '
8800 $-"' , - B 1700 4-20MA: 24 VDC B 14 mA QUIESCENT, 14 mA " 5 '

8800 # $'( % . B 1705, 4'6 ' 24 VDC B 23 mA QUIESCENT, 108 mA " 5 '

8800 $-"' "'"", B 1725 24 VDC B 9 mA QUIESCENT, 94 mA " 5 '

4 $. . "'"", , ' 10A @ 30 VDC ' 6 ! ", 250
' 6 !"

B -#" %' " )" "5 #

" $'( $ '" " ) %+ 13 / , 5.89

$5 6 ! "

4 ) "# " $ $-' ' 0 / F 150 / f

-17 / C 65 / c
' 5 ( 90% NON-CONDENSING

4 ) "# " $ $-' ' 32 / F 130 / f

0 / C 55 / c

$ % ( ! $5 6 ! "+ NEMA 1

95

Homepage Previous Document

 34.
, !'* !'#

Allestec / 2 ; 9/1 / 9 8 2 / ,
9 3 3 . Allestec / { } 0 /1 / 8
/ :2 3 2 , 9 2 8 0 > 3 .
Allestec 1; 3 , 3 23 ;2 : 2 8. *
; = 3 9 / /, 23 ;2 / , 9 ;2 :
: :, 8 = , 9{ = } ; , 1;
3.

* 2{ / 2} , 3 Allestec : , 9 ;2 " : ;2 3
2" ;/ / ; { / 3} , 9 ;2 : -9 , 9 , 0 , ;2 :. *
/ / : / ;8 , 9 ;2
:{ :} 1. " / ;/ , > ;/ ; .

8 / 28 3 2 , :{ } / 8
/ 28 3 3 1; / ,
3 :. /9 ;/ ;2 : 2 1;
: 2 { 0 2 }, :2 / /;2 , = < / / /
:. < /1= ; : - 8 / 8 ; : , 19
; 0 :, 8 3 2 :{ } 9 3
9, , 9 , 1 1 19 : /1 :
{ :} 19 : / 1; ; { } /;2
19 0 3{ 0 3} ; / / , 8 3 , :
: , , . / : 19 : 0 =/1
1, ; /0 : , /9 ;/
1;2 :2 , 2 : 2 { 0 2 } /;2 ;= .

< 9 , , ;:1 , :, 9 23 : : / 1;/1

FG8800 , 9 > - 8 : : / . /
0 ;2 : = / ;:1 /, :
9 / ;? , = / . /9 < / /,
0 / 3 23 > { / }, 9 ;2 : . 3 23 > { / }
; 3 3{ / : } . " ;/ , 9 ;2
/ : , < : 1;2 :2 2 / , 1=
.

96

Homepage Previous Document

 FG8800 GAS/FIRE CONTROL PANEL

The FG8800-1060 microprocessor based input node REPRESENTED BY:

accommodates and monitors four independent
contact inputs from various field devices. There is an
LED for each channel that indicates the real time
status of each monitored contact. For local
observation, the node LED channel will latch if a
contact closure temporarily occurred. Each channel
has its own unique address and can be treated as an
individual input for the system. Disabled or unused
channels do not require an ELR. The choice to
disable any channel is implemented through the
program. The node and its field wiring are con-
tinuously supervised and interrogated through the
control panel.

! " # $%&'( !!" # ) * ++,,-

.!. /!* -0 1 2 # 3 ++,04
50 ,4- 4 - 35 0 ,4- 0 4
2 5 .6! 5 7 .

Homepage Previous Document

NODE NOTES: ADAPTER NOTES:
1. 4 MOUNTING HOLE DIAMETERS, .170” [4.32]. 1. NODE CAN BE ROTATED ON THE ADAPTER
2. * FOR CONSTRAINT AREAS, ALLESTEC CAN 180 DEGREES TO ACCOMMODATE TERMINAL
REMOVE END TABS ALLOWING NODE TO STRIP POSITION.
ACCOMMODATE A STANDARD 1 GANG
ELECTRICAL SWITCH BOX.
3. NODE MAXIMUM DEPTH = .9” [22.86].
4. TOLERANCES ARE +/- .005 [.127].

SPECIFICATONS
ELECTRICAL
NODE OPERATING VOLTAGE: ………………….……….. 18 30 VDC provided to the control panel
INPUT NODE CURRENT RATING @ 24VDC: …..….…... 20mA quiescent, 35mA maximum
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD: …………………....……...…. FR4 fiberglass UL rated 94V-0, 2 oz copper, SMOBC,
MIL-PRF-55110F
RF SHEILDING / EMISSIONS:…….………..……………... Meets Factory Mutual Class A/S 3260
MECHANICAL
DIMENSIONS: …...………………………………………….. Refer to above drawing
WEIGHT: ……………………………………………………... 2.8 oz, 80g
ENVIRONMENT
NODE OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: …….... 0 degrees F to 150 degrees F, -17 degrees C to 65
degrees C, 90% humidity non-condensing
PACKAGING AND EXPOSURE: ………………………….. NEMA 1
NODE ORDERING PART NUMBER FG8800-1060
APPROVALS

REFER TO ALLESTEC.COM WEBSITE FOR PDF INFORMATION.

SPECIFICATIONS AND PRICING ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
©2006 ALLESTEC CORPORATION LITHO IN USA BROCHURE IM-012406-B KINGWOOD, TEXAS
ONGUARD IS A REGISTERED TRADE NAME TO ALLESTEC CORPORATION.

Homepage Previous Document

 FG8800 GAS/FIRE CONTROL PANEL
+
8 0

The FG8800-1700 4-20MA microprocessor based REPRESENTED BY:

node accommodates four independent gas sensors.
The node contains an LED that blinks for power on
status. Each channel has its own unique address and
can be treated as an individual input for the system.
Color bar graphs indicate the gas concentration
levels at the control panel. Real time %LFL and loop
current measurement are also displayed on the
screen. Each channel accommodates three set point
thresholds. The choice to disable any channel is
implemented through the program. The node and its
associated field wiring are continuously supervised
and interrogated through the control panel.

! " # $%&'( !!" # ) * ++,,-

.!. /!* -0 1 2 # 3 ++,04
50 ,4- 4 - 35 0 ,4- 0 4
2 5 .6! 5 7 .

Homepage Previous Document

NODE NOTES: ADAPTER NOTES:
1. 4 MOUNTING HOLE DIAMETERS, .170” [4.32]. 1. NODE CAN BE ROTATED ON THE ADAPTER
2. * FOR CONSTRAINT AREAS, ALLESTEC CAN 180 DEGREES TO ACCOMMODATE THE
REMOVE END TABS ALLOWING NODE TO TERMINAL STRIP POSITION.
ACCOMMODATE A STANDARD 1 GANG
ELECTRICAL SWITCH BOX.
3. NODE MAXIMUM DEPTH = .9” [22.86].
4. TOLERANCES ARE +/- .005 [.127].

SPECIFICATONS
ELECTRICAL
NODE OPERATING VOLTAGE: …………………………….. 18 30 VDC provided to the control panel
4-20MA NODE CURRENT RATING @ 24VDC: ………….... 14mA
DISPLAY & REGISTER RESOLUTION @ FULL SCALE: ... 1024 bits
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD: ……………………...…………. FR4 fiberglass UL RATED 94V-0, 2 oz copper, SMOBC,
MIL-PRF-55110F
RF SHEILDING / EMISSIONS: ……………....…………….... Meets Factory Mutual Class A/S 3260
MECHANICAL
DIMENSIONS: ……...……………………………………...….. Refer to above drawing
WEIGHT: ………………………………………………...……... 2.8 oz, 80g
ENVIRONMENT
NODE OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: ……….... 0 degrees F to 150 degrees F, -17 degrees C to 65
degrees C, 90% humidity non-condensing
PACKAGING AND EXPOSURE: …………………………….. NEMA 1
NODE ORDERING PART NUMBER FG8800-1700

APPROVALS

REFER TO ALLESTEC.COM WEBSITE FOR PDF INFORMATION.

SPECIFICATIONS AND PRICING ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
©2006 ALLESTEC CORPORATION LITHO IN USA BROCHURE GM-012406-B KINGWOOD, TEXAS
ONGUARD IS A REGISTERED TRADE NAME TO ALLESTEC CORPORATION.

Homepage Previous Document

 FG8800 GAS/FIRE CONTROL PANEL
+ 4
9

The FG8800-1705 is a heavy duty, 7.5 amps per REPRESENTED BY:

channel, microprocessor based supervised output
module (SOM). The node provides four independent
appliance outputs to various devices. LED’s on each
channel indicate the real time status of the relay
output. Each channel has its own unique address
and can be treated as an individual output for the
system. Disabled or unused channels do not require
an ELR. The choice to disable any channel is
implemented through the program. The node and its
field wiring are continuously supervised and inter-
rogated through the control panel.

! " # $%&'( !!" # ) * ++,,-

.!. /!* -0 1 2 # 3 ++,04
50 ,4- 4 - 35 0 ,4- 0 4
2 5 .6! 5 7 .

Homepage Previous Document

NODE NOTES: ADAPTER NOTES:
1. 4 MOUNTING HOLE DIAMETERS, .170” [4.32]. 1. NODE CAN BE ROTATED ON THE ADAPTER 180
2. * FOR CONSTRAINT AREAS, ALLESTEC CAN DEGREES TO ACCOMMODATE THE TERMINAL
REMOVE END TABS ALLOWING NODE TO STRIP POSITION.
ACCOMMODATE A 4-0 ELECTRICAL JUNCTION
BOX.
3. NODE MAXIMUM DEPTH = 1.3” [33.02].
4. TOLERANCES ARE +/- .005 [.127].

SPECIFICATONS
ELECTRICAL
NODE OPERATING VOLTAGE: …………………………….. 18 30 VDC provided to the control panel
SOM CURRENT RATING @ 24VDC: …………………...….. 23mA quiescent, 108mA maximum
RELAY OUTPUT CURRENT SOURCING: ……………….... 7.5 amps per channel @ 24VDC
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD: …………………………………. FR4 fiberglass UL rated 94V-0, 2 oz copper, SMOBC
MIL-PRF-55110F
RF SHEILDING / EMISSIONS: …..…………..…………….... Meets Factory Mutual Class A/S 3260
MECHANICAL
DIMENSIONS: ……...………………………………………….. Refer to above drawing
WEIGHT: ………………………………………………………... 6.5 oz, 185g
ENVIRONMENT
NODE OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: ……….... 0 degrees F to 150 degrees F, -17 degrees C to 65
degrees C, 90% humidity nod-condensing
PACKAGING AND EXPOSURE: …………………………….. NEMA 1
NODE ORDERING PART NUMBER FG8800-1705
APPROVALS

REFER TO ALLESTEC.COM WEBSITE FOR PDF INFORMATION.

SPECIFICATIONS AND PRICING ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
©2006 ALLESTEC CORPORATION LITHO IN USA BROCHURE SOM-012406-B KINGWOOD, TEXAS
ONGUARD IS A REGISTERED TRADE NAME TO ALLESTEC CORPORATION.

Homepage Previous Document

 FG8800 GAS/FIRE CONTROL PANEL
+04
9: :
APPLICATIONS:
CONTROL VALVES
AIR DAMPERS
AIR VENTILATORS
ELECTRIC GATES
AREA LIGHTING
ELECTRIC MOTORS
PLC SIGNALING
ELECTRIC VALVES
ELECTRIC PUMPS
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
REMOTE ANNUNCIATION
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

The FG8800-1725 heavy duty, 10 amps per channel, REPRESENTED BY:

microprocessor based relay node provides four
independent form C dry contacts to various field
devices. The node contains an LED for each channel
that indicates the real time status of each relay
output. For local observation, the node LED channel
will turn on steady when a relay changes state. Each
channel has its own unique address and can be
treated as an individual output for the system. The
node is continuously supervised and interrogated
through the control panel for supervision.

! " # $%&'( !!" # ) * ++,,-

.!. /!* -0 1 2 # 3 ++,04
50 ,4- 4 - 35 0 ,4- 0 4
2 5 .6! 5 7 .

Homepage Previous Document

NODE NOTES: ADAPTER NOTES:
1. 4 MOUNTING HOLE DIAMETERS, .170” [4.32]. 1. NODE CAN BE ROTATED ON THE ADAPTER
2. * FOR CONSTRAINT AREAS, ALLESTEC CAN 180 DEGREES TO ACCOMMODATE TERMINAL
REMOVE END TABS ALLOWING NODE TO STRIP POSITION.
ACCOMMODATE A 4-0 ELECTRICAL JUNCTION
BOX.
3. NODE MAXIMUM DEPTH = 1.3” [33.02]
4. TOLERANCES ARE +/- .005 [.127]

SPECIFICATONS
ELECTRICAL
NODE OPERATING VOLTAGE: ……………………....…….. 18 30 VDC provided to the control panel
RELAY NODE MAXIMUM CURRENT: ………………...….... 9mA quiescent, 94mA maximum
RELAY OUTPUT MAXIMUM RATINGS: ……….…...……… 10 amps @ 30VDC or 250VAC or 8 amps @ 277VAC
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD: …………………...……………. FR4 fiberglass UL rated 94V-0, 2 oz copper, SMOBC
MIL-PRF-55110F
RF SHEILDING / EMISSIONS: ……………..…...….…….... Meets Factory Mutual Class A/S 3260
MECHANICAL
DIMENSIONS: ...……………………………...……………….. Refer to above drawing
WEIGHT: …………………………………...…………………... 6.8 oz, 193 g
ENVIRONMENT
NODE OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: …..….... 0 degrees F to 150 degrees F, -17 degrees C to 65
degrees C, 90% humidity non-condensing
PACKAGING AND EXPOSURE: ……………...…………….. NEMA 1
NODE ORDERING PART NUMBER FG8800-1725

APPROVALS

REFER TO ALLESTEC.COM WEBSITE FOR PDF INFORMATION.

SPECIFICATIONS AND PRICING ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
©2006 ALLESTEC CORPORATION LITHO IN USA BROCHURE RM-012406-B KINGWOOD, TEXAS
ONGUARD IS A REGISTERED TRADE NAME TO ALLESTEC CORPORATION.

Homepage Previous Document

 TPM SYSTEMS
SWITCHMODE RECTIFIER SYSTEMS

ISO 9001 CERTIFIED

Standard Features
• High Frequency Switchmode Circuitry provides High
Power Density

• Hot Plug-In feature provides easy replacement without

disturbing System operation

• 24 and 48VDC Versions –750 Watts Output Power

19” and/or 23” TPM Cage shown above with (4) TPM Rectifiers
• 12VDC Version–375 Watts Output Power

TOTAL POWER MODULE • 19” and 23” Rack Mounting (using TPC cages)
SWITCHMODE RECTIFIER SYSTEMS • Wall Mounting Configurations (using TPW cages)
The LaMarche TPM (Total Power Module) Switchmode Rectifier • Universal Input Voltage Range from 102-264VAC and
Systems are compact self contained Power Systems that provide Frequency Range of 47-63Hz
the Modular Power that today’s Telecommunications, Process
Control and Utility Substation applications require. The TPM • AC Input Breaker Mounted on Cage for each TPM
Switchmode Rectifer is the building block of these reliable sys-
tems utilizing advanced switching technology. Its filtered output • Output Voltage Adjustment Potentiometer
provides the clean power required for sensitive loads.
The TPM is rated at 750 watts and available in 24V (30 amps)
• Test Points for Measuring Output Current and Voltage
and 48V (15 amps) versions. A 12V TPM module is also offered using a Precision Multi-Meter
and rated at 375 watts (30 amps). The Rectifier modules are hot-
swappable plug-in type. Replacement is swift and simple, and
• Current Limiting Circuitry of 105% maximum
(factory adjusted)
achieved without affecting the integrity of the system.
The universal input voltage range of 102-264VAC and frequency • Power Factor Correction better than 0.95 within
of 47-63Hz is ideal for power demands throughout the world. The 20-100% of rated load
AC input and DC output wiring of the Rectifiers can be done
either in pairs from the same side of the cage or as a complete • Filtered/Battery Eliminator Design–less than150mVp-p,
system. A convenient AC input cord (6 ft long, 20A rated) is sup- 32dBRN “C” message weighted with or without Batteries
plied to power each pair of TPMsRectifiers per cage. The DC out-
put wiring is done by hardwiring to the provided busbar. • 82% Efficiency within 50 to 100% of rated load

Flexibility is given to hardwire a single connection for all Rectifiers • Forced Load Sharing Circuitry (10% of rated load)
or for each pair of Rectifiers per cage. This allows for custom field
installations and gives greater system flexibility to suit the cus- • Soft Walk-in Circuit
tomer needs and preferences.
• Over Temperature and Voltage Protection
TPM Systems are factory configured with one to four Modules in
a single Cage. Distribution Modules consisting of either GMT • Rectifier Failure Alarm with (1) set of Form “C” contacts
Fuses or Breakers can share a Cage with the Rectifiers to form with Light (Alarm will initiate for either Low Voltage,
a complete Power System. High Voltage Shutdown, Low DC Current, Rectifier
A wall mounting configuration is offered for smaller load require- Failure or AC Power Failure/AC Breaker Tripped)
ments or when rack mounting is not available. One or two TPM’s
can be fitted in our TPW cage. A separate Distribution Module • 6ft (1.83m) 20Amp Power Cord supplied with
can also be provided. Cage for every (2) TPM modules

Rely on LaMarche quality, reliability and performance to power • 2-year Warranty

your present and future system needs.

LaMarche Manufacturing Company

106 Bradrock Drive, Des Plaines, IL 60018-1967
Tel: 847-299-1188 Toll Free Fax: 888-232-9562
sales@lamarchemfg.com www.lamarchemfg.com
Homepage Previous Document
 T O TA L P O W E R
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
ELECTRICAL TPM Modules
AC INPUT Typical AC Input
AC Input
Voltage Range Model DC DC
Voltage
Current Draw
102-264VAC, single phase Number Amps Volts
Range
@100% Load*
Frequency Range (Amps)
47-63Hz
Power Factor Correction TPM-30-12V-U1 30 12 102-264 5
Better than 0.95 within 20 to 100% of rated load TPM-30-24V-U1 30 24 102-264 9
Protection TPM-15-48V-U1 15 48 102-264 8.5
AC Breaker provided on Cage for each unit
DC OUTPUT TPC Cages
Adjustable Output Voltage Range
12 to 14.5VDC on 12V models Model
No of
DC DC
No of
Rack
24 to 29VDC on 24V models Number
Description Available
Amps Volts
Input
Mounting
48 to 58VDC on 48V models Bays Cords
Power
375W per 12VDC module, 1500 Watts per Cage TPC-120-12V-U1 120 12 2 19”/23”
750W per 24 & 48VDC module, 3000 Watts per 1-4 modules
Cage
TPC-120-24V-U1 4 120 24 2 19”/23”
Voltage Regulation TPC-60-48V-U1 60 48 2 19”/23”
± 0.6% Total DC Voltage Regulation (Measured TPC-60-12V-U1 1-2 modules 60 12 1 19”/23”
at Rectifier side of blocking diode) TPC-60-24V-U1 with TPCD or 2+1 60 24 1 19”/23”
Current Limit TPCDB1
105% of rated output maximum (factory adjusted) TPC-30-48V-U1 30 48 1 19”/23”
Load Sharing 1-4 modules
Forced Load Sharing Circuitry with TPCD or 4+1 60 48 2 23”
(10% of rated load)
TPC23-60-48V-U1
TPCDB1
Protection
Over Voltage, Over Temperature Units can be mounted flush with the rack or moved forward 5 inches (127mm).
Efficiency Allow an additional .75 inches (19mm) for handles.
82% within 50-100% of rated load
Ripple and Noise
Less than 150mV peak to peak, 32dBRNC “C”
message weighted, with or without batteries
Test Points
For output current and output voltage using a
precision digital voltmeter
ENVIRONMENTAL
FCC Approved Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
IEC-555-2 Compliant
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50O C (32 to 122O F)
Storage Temperature: -40 to 85O C (-40 to 185O F)
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% (non-condensing)
Altitude: 0 to 3,000 meters (10,000 ft) TPC cage 19.0” or 23.0” mounting
reversible flange provided
ENCLOSURES
TPM Rectifiers TPC Rectifier Cage with (2) TPM Rectifiers and TPCD Fuse Distribution Module
Dimensions
3.25”W x 11.0”D x 5.25”H (83 x 279 x 133 mm)
Weight
4 lbs each (1.8 kgs)
Mounting
19”/23” Rack Mount TPC Cages or TPW Wall
Mount Cages

TPC Cages
Dimensions for 19” Rack
18.25”W x 15.29”D x 7”H (464 x 388 x 178 mm)
Dimensions for 23” Rack
18.25”W x 15.00”D x 5.25”H (464 x 381 x 133 mm)
Weight TPC23 cage 23.0” mounting only
23lbs to 26 lbs (10.5kgs to 11.8 kgs)
TPC23: 36 lbs (16.4kgs) TPC23 Rectifier Cage with (4) TPM Rectifiers and TPCDB1 Breaker Distribution Module
Mounting
TPC = 3 RU’s
TPC23 = 4 RU’s

AGENCY APPROVALS
U.L. Recognized
Homepage Component Previous Document
MODULE SYSTEMS
TPCD (GMT Fuses) / TPCDB1 (Breakers) Distribution Modules
GMT 1-Pole LVLD Digital Shipping
DC Battery Fuses Breakers Low
Model DC Meter Weight
Amps Disconnect Qty Qty Voltage & (Approximate)
Number Volts Breaker (12) (7) Load
Rating Alarm lbs
0-10A 10A Disconnect kgs
TPCD-30-12V 12 30 40A ✔ --- ✔ --- 7 3.2
TPCD-30-24VN 24 30 40A ✔ --- ✔ --- 7 3.2
TPCD-30-48V 48 30 40A ✔ --- ✔ --- 7 3.2
TPCDB1-60-12V 12 60 70A --- ✔ ✔ ✔ 9 4.1
TPCDB1-60-24VN 24 60 70A --- ✔ ✔ ✔ 9 4.1
TPCDB1-60-48V 48 60 70A --- ✔ ✔ ✔ 9 4.1
Above 12V & 48V Distribution Modules are configured for Positive Ground System as standard. For Negative Ground System order part
number with “N” following voltage. Above 24V Distribution Modules are configured for Negative Ground System - delete “N” in part number
to order Positive Ground. Please consult factory for other available Distribution Module configurations should above not meet your requirement.

TPCD Distribution Module - GMT Fuses TPCDB1 Distribution Module - Breakers

Features Features
• 12, 24 & 48VDC versions • 12, 24 & 48VDC
• Maximum system current rating of 30A • Maximum system current rating of 60Amp
• Low Voltage Disconnect w/field adjustable calibration • Switch selectable 1% Load Digital Ammeter/Voltmeter
mode and Alarm with (1) set of Form “C” contacts • Low Voltage Disconnect w/field adjustable calibration mode
• 40 Amp battery Disconnect Breaker • 70 Amp Battery Disconnect Breaker
• (12) 0-10 GMT type Fuses • (7) 10 Amp single pole Breakers
• Fuse open Alarm with (1) set of Form “C” contacts • Summary Alarm with (2) sets of Form “C” contacts
& LED indicator indicating Low DC Current, Low DC Voltage, Low Voltage
• Low Voltage Alarm with (1) set of Form “C” contacts Disconnect, High Voltage, Rectifier Failure, Breaker Tripped
• Front panel adjustments for all Alarm set points • Low DC Current, Low DC Voltage, Critical (2nd) Low DC
Voltage, High DC Voltage and Summary Alarm LED’s

The TPCD GMT Fuse Distribution Modules are rated at 30A of The TPCDB1 Breaker Distribution Modules are rated at 60A of
maximum capacity and occupy (2) bay positions within our TPC maximum capacity. Like the TPCD Fuse version, (2) bay positions
cages. The TPCD Modules incorporate the most common fea- are required within our TPC Cages. The TPCDB1’s feature a dig-
tures required to distribute your loads without having to resort to ital switch selectable 1% accuracy Ammeter/Voltmeter. The
a larger chassis. The TPCD’s are equipped with (12) GMT type TPCDB1’s are equipped with (7) single pole 10 Amp Breakers for
Fuses for distribution of supervisory equipment. A 40 Amp distribution of loads. A 70 Amp Battery Disconnect allows the
Battery Disconnect allows the user to manually disconnect the user to manually disconnect the Battery Bank for servicing or for
battery bank for servicing or for replacement purposes. A Fuse replacement purposes. A Breaker Tripped Alarm consisting of a
Open Alarm consisting of a set of Form “C” contacts is provided set of Form “C” contacts is provided to remotely report this Alarm
to remotely report this Alarm condition along with an LED on the condition along with an LED on the front panel for local supervi-
front panel for local supervision. An LVLD (Low Voltage Load sion. An LVLD (Low Voltage Load Disconnect) is included to auto-
Disconnect) is included to automatically disconnect the load from matically disconnect the load from the system to prevent the
the system to prevent the battery from being overly discharged. A Battery from being overly discharged. A Bus return and terminal
Bus return and terminal strip connector for the load side connec- strip connector for the load side connection (#12AWG wire) and
tion (#12 AWG wire) and a 70A Battery terminal strip to accom- a 70A Battery terminal strip to accommodate #6 AWG wire is pro-
modate #6 AWG wire is provided for the battery connection. vided for the battery connection.

Homepage Previous Document

 TPM SYSTEMS
SWITCHMODE RECTIFIER SYSTEMS
TPW Wall Mounted Systems
No Overall Dimensions Shipping Weight
Model DC
Mounting of DC Width x Depth x Height (Approximate)
Number Amps
Type Available Volts
Rating
Bays in mm lbs kgs

TPWH1-30-12V-U1 Hinge 1 12 30 16 7.3

TPWH1-30-24V-U1 Hinge 1 24 30 15.08x6.38x7.00 383x162x133 16 7.3
TPWH1-15-48V-U1 Hinge 1 48 15 16 7.3
TPWH2-60-12V-U1 Hinge 2 12 60 17 7.7
TPWH2-60-24V-U1 Hinge 2 24 60 15.08x9.30x5.22 383x236x133 17 7.7
TPWH2-30-48V-U1 Hinge 2 48 30 17 7.7
TPW2-60-12V-U1 Standard 2 12 60 10 4.5
TPW2-60-24V-U1 Standard 2 24 60 17.78x9.30x7.72 451x236x196 10 4.5
TPW2-30-48V-U1 Standard 2 48 30 10 4.5
TPWD-60-12V Standard Distribution 12 60 12 5.5
TPWD-60-24VN Standard Distribution 24 60 13.70x6.50x7.00 348x165x178 12 5.5
TPWD-60-48V Standard Distribution 48 60 12 5.5
Above TPWD 12V & 48V Distribution Modules are configured for Positive Ground System as standard. For Negative Ground System order part number with “N” following voltage.
Above TPWD 24V Distribution Module is configured for Negative Ground System–delete “N” in part number to order Positive Ground.

The LaMarche TPW (Wall Mounted Systems) offers an TPW Enclosures

alternative solution to relay rack mounting for applications
requiring a small and highly compact DC Power System.
Designed to contain LaMarche TPM Rectifiers, the TPW
enclosure’s versatility can be used in a wide variety of
applications, including Process Control, Utility Substation,
and Telecommunications.

The TPWH1 (single TPM) and TPWH2 (dual TPM capabil-

ity) features a hinged wall mounted bracket for either right
or left swing out. This allows for front accessibility and sim- TPWH1 Hinged Single Recttifer Bay shown above with hinge on left hand side
plifies the installation and removal of TPM units in tight
quarters.

The TPW2 version is a fixed wall mounted enclosure for

use where space is not restrictive. With dual Rectifier
capability–(2) TPM Rectifiers can be installed to provide
redundancy or to simply increase the system’s capacity.

The TPWD is a wall mounted Distribution system offered in

conjunction with a TPW enclosure to form a complete DC
Power System. Standard features include (9) 10A GMT TPW2 Standard (non-hinged) Dual Recttifer Bay shown above
Load Fuses, Battery and Rectifier Terminal Connections,
Single Form “C” Blown Load Fuse Alarm Contacts and TPWD Distribution Module
LED, and Load and Common Return Terminal Strip
Connections. The front panel of the TPWD enclosure has
a hinged front door which allows easy access for wiring
connections in the field.

A Low Voltage Load Disconnect Relay with factory settings

and LED’s indicating Connect/Disconnect and Single Form
“C” Low Voltage Alarm Contacts is offered as an option.
The maximum rating of the TPWD Distribution system is
60 Amps.

Specifications subject to change without notice

ISO 9001 CERTIFIED

P25-DSTPM-1 106 Bradrock Drive, Des Plaines, IL 60018-1967

ECN 15551 Tel: 847-299-1188 Toll Free Fax: 888-232-9562
09-02 sales@lamarchemfg.com www.lamarchemfg.com

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FOR

TOTAL POWER CAGE

(TPC)

The TPC cage has a universal input of 102-265Vac with an output of 12Vdc, 24Vdc and/or
48Vdc. It can have up to four (4) Total Power Modules or two (2) Total Power Modules
and a Total Power Cage.

Used in

TELECOMMUNICATIONS POWER SYSTEMS

ECN/DATE
CPN40433
14575 – 02/01
15349-04 – 06/02 13608 / 1-00
106 BRADROCK DRIVE
DES PLAINES, IL. 60018
(847) 299-1188
FAX: (847) 299-3061
ISSUE DATE: 11957 – 5/98
INSTRUCTION DRAWING NUMBER:
P25-LTPC-1

Page 1 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

FOR THE
LA MARCHE POWER CONVERSION EQUIPMENT
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for the La Marche Power Conversion Equipment.

Before using this equipment, read all instructions and cautionary markings on (1) unit, (2) battery, and (3) product using
the battery.

CAUTION: To reduce risk of injury and/or damage to the batteries, use only the type of batteries specified
on the charger.

Do not expose equipment to rain or snow.

Do not operate equipment if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way;
take it to a qualified serviceman.
Do not disassemble this unit; take it to a qualified serviceman when service or repair is required. Incorrect
re-assembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire.

To reduce risk of electric shock, disconnect this unit from the a.c. supply, or batteries and loads before
attempting any maintenance or cleaning. Turning off controls will not reduce this risk.

WARNING – THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSIVE GASSES AND WORKING IN THE VICINITY OF A

BATTERY IS DANGEROUS. SOME BATTERIES GENERATE EXPLOSIVE GASES DURING
NORMAL BATTERY OPERATION. FOR THIS REASON, IT IS OF UTMOST IMPORTANCE THAT
EACH TIME BEFORE USING THIS UNIT, YOU READ THIS MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY.

To reduce risk of battery explosion, follow these instructions and those published by the battery manufacturer and
manufacturer of any equipment you intend to use in the vicinity of the battery.

Review cautionary marking on all products.

PERSONAL PRECAUTIONS:
 Someone should be within range of your voice or close enough to come to your aid when you work near a battery.
 Have plenty of fresh water and soap nearby in case the battery electrolyte contacts skin, clothing, or eyes.
 Wear complete eye protection and clothing protection. Avoid touching eyes while working near a battery.
 If the battery electrolyte contacts skin or clothing, wash immediately with soap and water. If the electrolyte enters the
eye, immediately flood the eye with running cold water for at least ten (10) minutes and get medical attention
immediately.
 Never smoke or allow a spark or flame in vicinity of a battery.
 Be extra cautious to reduce risk of dropping a metal tool onto a battery. It might spark or short-circuit the battery or
other electric part that may cause an explosion.
 Remove personal metal items such as rings, bracelets, necklaces, and watches when working with a battery. A battery
can produce a short-circuit current high enough to weld a ring or the like to metal, causing a severe burn.
 NEVER charge a frozen battery.
Page 2 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

PREPARING TO CHARGE
 If necessary to remove the battery connections, always remove grounded terminal from the battery first. Make sure
all loads are disconnected and unit is off, so as not to cause an arc.
 Be sure the area around the battery is well ventilated while the battery is being charged.
 When cleaning battery terminals, be careful to keep corrosion from coming in contact with eyes.
 Study all the battery manufacturer’s specific precautions such as removing or not removing cell caps while charging,
recommended rates of charge, and maintenance procedures.

UNIT LOCATION
 Never place this unit directly above the battery. Gases from the battery will corrode and damage equipment. A sealed
maintenance free or valve regulated lead acid (VRLA) may be placed below this equipment.
 Never allow the battery electrolyte to drip on this unit when reading the specific gravity or filling the battery.
 Do not operate this unit in a closed-in area or restrict ventilation in any way.
 Do not set a battery on top of this unit.

D.C. CONNECTION PRECAUTIONS

Connect and disconnect D.C. output cables only after setting all of this unit's switches to off position and removing a.c.
input supply.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This battery charger should be connected to a grounded, metal, permanent wiring system; or an equipment grounding
conductor should be run with circuit conductors and connected to equipment-grounding terminal or lead on battery
charger. Connections to battery should comply with all local codes and ordinances.

CAUTION: DO NOT PULL ON OUTPUT CABLES WHEN DISCONNECTION CHARGER FROM BATTERY

Page 3 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS
AND
GENERAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION

CAUTION: To ensure safe installation and operation, the information given in the instruction manual
should be read and understood before installing or using the equipment.

RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS
Unpacking and Inspection: Examine the shipping crate upon arrival. If there is obvious damage, describe on the receiving
documents. Within a few days after delivery, the equipment should be uncrated and carefully inspected for hidden
damages. When removing packaging material, be careful not to discard any equipment, parts, or manuals. If any damage
is detected you should:
1. File a claim with the carrier within five (5) days.
2. Send a copy of the claim to La Marche Mfg. Co.
3. Call La Marche Mfg. For a RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION NUMBER.

Failure to properly file a claim for shipping damages, or provide a copy of the claim to La Marche Mfg., may void warranty
service for any physical damages reported for repair.

HANDLING

WARNING: Equipment can be very heavy, and top-heavy. Use adequate manpower or equipment for handling. Until the
equipment is securely mounted, care must be used to prevent the equipment from being accidentally tipped over.

NOMENCLATURE PLATES
Each piece of La Marche Mfg. Equipment shipped is identified by part number on the nomenclature plate.

ADJUSTMENTS

All equipment is shipped from the factory fully checked and adjusted. Do not make any adjustments unless the equipment
has been powered-up and the settings have been determined to be incorrect.

SPARE PARTS

To minimize downtime during installation or normal service, it is advisable to purchase spare fuses, circuit boards and
other recommended components. Please refer to the list of recommended spare parts and their La Marche Mfg. Part
numbers included with the instruction manual. It is recommended that spare fuses be ordered for all systems.

To order spare parts, please contact La Marche Mfg. (847)-299-1188 during business hours and ask for the Parts
Department.

Page 4 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

Description:

The Total Power Cage is intended to be installed in a protected environment. The cage can have
several different combinations dependant as to what has been ordered. Either four TPMs or two TPMs
and a TPCD, See Figure A, can be inserted in a TPC cage. The TPCD distribution panel is always
inserted in the third and fourth slot. The slots are numbered from 1 to 4 from left to right, See Figure
B.

Typical Model # Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4

TPC-60-12V-U1 12V TPM 12V TPM TPCD Distribution Center
TPC-60-24V-U1 24V TPM 24V TPM TPCD Distribution Center
TPC-60-48V-U1 48V TPM 48V TPM 48V TPM 48V TPM
TPC-120-12V-U1 12V TPM 12V TPM 12V TPM 12V TPM
TPC-120-24V-U1 24V TPM 24V TPM 24V TPM 24V TPM
TPC-30/60-48/24V-U1 48V TPM 48V TPM 24V TPM 24V TPM
TPC-30-48V-U1 48V TPM 48V TPM TPCD Distribution Center

Although a TPC cage can accept more than one TPM module, it does not need more than one to
power the load, See Figure C.

When using a TPC-120-24V-U1, mount a termination buss bar, GCB19-200 for a 19” relay rack, or
mount a termination buss bar, GCB23-200 for a 23” relay rack. Several quantities and sizes of
solderless lugs are available, see Model GCB/GB/CB Series brochure for further details.

All TPM rectifiers must be plugged into the proper voltage cage. (i.e. 24V TPM into 24V TPC)

At least 6 inches of room should be provided in front and the rear of the TPC cage for ventilation.

The TPC cage can be mounted either in a 19” or 23”. It can be mounted flush to the rack or mid way,
See Figure D.

The TPC cage can operate with or without batteries.

Minimum Wire Size:

Input AC:
The input line cord is rated for 20A and 240Vac, See Figure C. The TPM module has a universal input
voltage range from 102Vac to 265Vac. No taps, jumpers, straps or circuit breakers need to be
changed. The line cord does not have a plug, install the proper plug according to the National Electric
Code and all local building and electrical codes.

Output DC:
All TPM outputs are paralleled and brought to the TPC cabinet d.c. output terminals. See Figure E.
When connecting the TPC-120-24V-U1 to the termination split bus, use both terminals located on the
back of the TPC cage. Each terminal block will provide 60A of current each for a total of 120A.

Page 5 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

The rear panel of the TPC does not have to be removed to connect to the d.c. output terminals.
Remove the d.c. terminal cover to gain excess to the d.c. terminals. The d.c. cables can be passed
thru the d.c. field thru holes on the TPC cage or ½” conduit can be attached to the TPC cage at the
Feed Thru holes. Once the conduit is attached, full access to the cage is still available. Remove the
rear panel to access the rectifier failure alarm (RFA) terminals. The d.c. terminal cover nor the
conduit needs to be removed to gain access to the RFA terminals.

MODEL DC OUTPUT OF TPC CAGE Wire Gauge guide for runs less then
10FT
TPC-60-48V-U1 60A #8 from one Terminal Block
TPC-120-12V-U1 120A #8 from both Terminal Blocks to a
Termination Buss Bar
TPC-120-24V-U1 120A #8 from both Terminal Blocks to a
Termination Buss Bar
TPC-30/60-48/24V-U1 30A for the 48V Bus side and #10 from the 48V Terminal Block and
60A for the 24V Bus side #8 from the 24V Terminal Block
TPC-30-48V-U1 30A Wiring is depend on Fuse or Circuit Breaker
(TPC with a TPCD) size in TPCD
TPC-60-48V-U1 60A Wiring is depend on Fuse or Circuit Breaker
(TPC with a TPCD) size in TPCD

For wire distances exceeding 10 feet between the battery and unit or load and the unit refer to the
Power Cabling Formulas in the back of manual to determine the wire size.

Observe Proper Battery Polarity

The negative wire from the battery must be connected to the terminal marked negative, (-) and the
positive wire from the battery must be connected to the terminal marked positive (+) on the rear of
the TPC cage. See Figure E.

If you have a TPC-120-24V-U1, connect the battery to the termination buss bar mounted on the relay
rack.

If the cage is set up to accept a TPCD, connect the negative wire from the battery must be connected
to the terminal marked negative, (-) and the positive wire from the battery must be connected to the
terminal marked positive (+) on the rear of the TPCD. See Figure F.

Rectifier Failure Alarm Terminal:

The rectifier failure alarm terminals TB1 and TB2 are located on the rear of the TPC cage. Each TPM
has a separate rectifier failure dry form “C” contact labeled A, B, and C. A to B is the normally open
contact and B to C is the normally closed contact. The maximum wire size for the alarm terminal
blocks is 12 gauge. The contacts are rated at 0.4 amps @ 120Vac or 1.25 amps @ 24 Vdc. See
Figure G & H.

The rectifier failure is alarmed, with a loss of a.c. voltage, low d.c. voltage, high d.c. voltage, high
temperature or improperly inserted TPM module.

Page 6 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

INSTALLERS INFORMATION

The table below lists the a.c. and the d.c. minimum wire size requirements. At distances exceeding 10
feet, the d.c. wire size should be chosen to keep the voltage difference between the unit's terminals
and the battery at less than 1/2 volt when the unit is fully loaded. If the distance between the unit
and the battery exceeds 10 feet, use the Power Cabling Formulas to determine wire size.

WIRE SIZE TABLE

(Based upon unit fuse size)
FUSE WIRE SIZE
REQUIREMENT
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING
FUSE
SIZE
WIRE SIZE
REQUIREMENT
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING
SIZE CUSTOMER CONDUCTOR CUSTOMER CONDUCTOR
CONNECTION MINIMUM CONNECTION MINIMUM
1 #14 #14 150 #1 #6
3 #14 #14 175 #1/0 #6
4 #14 #14 200 #2/0 #6
5 #14 #14 225 #2/0 #4
6 #14 #14 250 #4/0 #4
10 #14 #14 300 250-MCM #4
15 #12 #12 350 350-MCM #2
20 #12 #12 400 400-MCM #2
25 #10 #12 450 500-MCM #2
30 #10 #10 500 600-MCM #2
35 #8 #10 600 900-MCM #1
40 #8 #10 700 1500-MCM 1/0
45 #8 #10 800 2/500-MCM 1/0
50 #8 #10 1000 2/800-MCM 4/0
60 #6 #10 1200 2/1000-MCM 4/0
70 #6 #8 1600 2/2000-MCM 4/0
80 #4 #8 2000 250-MCM
90 #4 #8 2500 350-MCM
100 #4 #8 3000 400-MCM
110 #2 #6 4000 500-MCM
125 #2 #6 5000 700-MCM
130 #2 #6 6000 800-MCM

NOTE: These are recommended wire sizes. All National and Local Wiring Codes must be followed.

Page 7 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

POWER CABLING FORMULAS

WIRE GAUGE TABLE

AREA AREA
SIZE CIR. SIZE CIR.
AWG MILS MCM* MILS
18 1620 250 250000
16 2580 300 300000
14 4110 350 350000
12 6530 400 400000
10 10380 500 500000
8 16510 600 600000
6 26240 700 700000
4 41740 750 750000
3 52620 800 800000
2 66360 900 900000
1 83690 1000 1000000
0 105600 1250 1250000
00 133100 1500 1500000
000 167800 1750 1750000
0000 211600 2000 2000000

*Denotes all sizes larger than #0000 are expressed in MCM.

TABLE OF CONVENTIONS:
CMA = Cross-section of wire in circular MIL area.
A = Ultimate drain in amperes.
LF = Conductor loop feet.
MAX AMP = Maximum allowable amperes for given voltage drop.
CMA = Cross section of wire in circulate MIL area.
AVD = Allowable voltage drop.
LF = Conductor loop feet.
K = 11.1 Constant factor for commercial (TW Type) copper wire (KS5482-01).
= 17.4 for aluminum (KS20189)

1. Calculating Wire Size Requirements..................................................CMA= A x LF x K

AVD

2. Calculating Current Carrying Capacity of Wire..........................Max Amp = CMA x AVD

LF x K

SOURCE: HANDBOOK 100-NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS

NOTE: ALL WIRE #6 AND LARGER IS STRANDED.

Page 8 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TOTAL POWER CAGE (TPC)

MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY
All La Marche Manufacturing Co. equipment has been thoroughly tested and found to be in proper operating condition
upon shipment from the factory and is warranted to be free from any defect in workmanship and material that may
develop within two (2) years from date of purchase under normal use.

If the equipment proves defective within a two year period, it shall be replaced without charge after examination at our
factory, providing such defect in our opinion, is due to faulty material or workmanship and not caused by tampering,
abuse, misapplication or improper installation.

Should the equipment require major replacement or repair, the equipment must be returned to the La Marche factory to
have the inspections, parts, replacements and testing performed by factory personnel. Should it be necessary to return a
piece of equipment to the factory, the customer or Sales representative must first obtain a RMA (Return Material
Authorization) from the factory. If upon inspection at the factory, the defect was due to faulty material or workmanship,
all repairs will be made at no cost to the customer during the warranty period.

All internal maintenance to be performed by La Marche. Warranty is void if seal is damaged.

La Marche reserves the right to honor the warranty with a replacement unit.

In accepting delivery of the equipment, the purchaser assumes full responsibility for proper installation, installation
adjustments and service arrangements. Should minor adjustments be required, the local La Marche Sales Representative
should be contacted to provide this service.

All sales are final. Only standard LaMarche units will be considered for return. A 25% restocking fee is charged when
return is factory authorized. Special units are not returnable.

In no event shall La Marche Manufacturing Co. have any liability for consequential damages, or loss, damage or expense
directly or indirectly arising from the use of the products, or any inability to use them either separately or in combination
with other equipment or materials, or from any other cause. In addition, any alterations of equipment made by anyone
other than La Marche Manufacturing Co. renders this warranty null and void.

La Marche Manufacturing Co. reserves the right to make revisions in current production of equipment, and assumes no
obligation to incorporate these revisions in earlier models.

The failure of La Marche Manufacturing Co. to object to provisions contained in customers' purchase orders or other
communications shall not be deemed a waiver of the terms or conditions hereof, nor acceptance of such provisions.

The above warranty is exclusive, supersedes and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including any
implied warranty of merchantability or fitness. No person, agent or dealer is authorized to give any warranties on behalf of
the Manufacturer, nor to assume for the Manufacturer any other liability in connection with any of its products unless
made in writing and signed by an official of the manufacturer.

Page 9 of 9

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

TOTAL POWER MODULE

(TPM)

HIGH FREQUENCY
FLOAT CHARGER / BATTERY ELIMINATOR

WITH UNIVERSAL INPUT

USED WITH A

TOTAL POWER CAGE

(TPC)

FOR
TELECOMMUNICATIONS POWER SYSTEMS

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ECN/DATE
CPN100389

15349-04 – 05/02 13521 - 11/99

15411 – 6/02 14575 – 02/01 11362 – 12/97
106 BRADROCK DRIVE
DES PLAINES, IL. 60018-1967
(847) 299-1188
FAX: (847) 299-3061
ISSUE DATE: 10866 – 4/97

INSTRUCTION DRAWING NUMBER:

Page 1 of 11 P25- LTPM-2

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

FOR THE
LA MARCHE POWER CONVERSION EQUIPMENT
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for the La Marche Power Conversion Equipment.
Before using this equipment, read all instructions and cautionary markings on (1) unit, (2) battery, and (3) product using
the battery.
CAUTION: To reduce risk of injury and/or damage to the batteries, use only the type of
batteries specified on the charger.
Do not expose equipment to rain or snow.
Do not operate equipment if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a
qualified serviceman.
Do not disassemble this unit; take it to a qualified serviceman when service or repair is required. Incorrect re-assembly
may result in a risk of electric shock or fire.

To reduce risk of electric shock, disconnect this unit from the a.c. supply, or batteries and loads before attempting any
maintenance or cleaning. Turning off controls will not reduce this risk.
WARNING – THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSIVE GASSES AND WORKING IN THE VICINITY OF A BATTERY IS
DANGEROUS. SOME BATTERIES GENERATE EXPLOSIVE GASES DURING NORMAL BATTERY OPERATION.
FOR THIS REASON, IT IS OF UTMOST IMPORTANCE THAT EACH TIME BEFORE USING THIS UNIT, YOU READ
THIS MANUAL AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY.
To reduce risk of battery explosion, follow these instructions and those published by the battery manufacturer and
manufacturer of any equipment you intend to use in the vicinity of the battery.
Review cautionary marking on all products .

PERSONAL PRECAUTIONS:
1. Someone should be within range of your voice or close enough to come to your aid when you work near a battery.
2. Have plenty of fresh water and soap nearby in case the battery electrolyte contacts skin, clothing, or eyes.
3. Wear complete eye protection and clothing protection. Avoid touching eyes while working near a battery.
4. If the battery electrolyte contacts skin or clothing, wash immediately with soap and water. If the electrolyte enters
the eye, immediately flood the eye with running cold water for at least ten (10) minutes and get medical attention
immediately.
5. Never smoke or allow a spark or flame in vicinity of a battery.
6. Be extra cautious to reduce risk of dropping a metal tool onto a battery. It might spark or short-circuit the battery
or other electric part that may cause an explosion.
7. Remove personal metal items such as rings, bracelets, necklaces, and watches when working with a battery. A
battery can produce a short-circuit current high enough to weld a ring or the like to metal, causing a severe burn.
8. NEVER charge a frozen battery.

Page 2 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

PREPARING TO CHARGE
1. If necessary to remove the battery connections, always remove grounded terminal from the battery first. Make
sure all loads are disconnected and unit is off, so as not to cause an arc.
2. Be sure the area around the battery is well ventilated while the battery is being charged.
3. When cleaning battery terminals, be careful to keep corrosion from coming in contact with eyes.
4. Study all the battery manufacturer’s specific precautions such as removing or not removing cell caps while charging,
recommended rates of charge, and maintenance procedures.

UNIT LOCATION

 Never place this unit directly above the battery. Gases from the battery will corrode and damage equipment. A
sealed maintenance free or valve regulated lead acid (VRLA) may be placed below this equipment.

 Never allow the battery electrolyte to drip on this unit when reading the specific gravity or filling the battery.

 Do not operate this unit in a closed-in area or restrict ventilation in any way.

 Do not set a battery on top of this unit.

D.C. CONNECTION PRECAUTIONS

Connect and disconnect d.c. output cables only after setting all of this unit's switches to off position and removing a.c.
input supply.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This battery charger should be connected to a grounded, metal, permanent wiring system; or an equipment grounding
conductor should be run with circuit conductors and connected to equipment-grounding terminal or lead on battery
charger. Connections to battery should comply with all local codes and ordinances.

CAUTION: DO NOT PULL ON OUTPUT CABLES WHEN DISCONNECTING CHARGER FROM BATTERY.

Page 3 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS
AND
GENERAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION

CAUTION: To ensure safe installation and operation, the information given in the instruction manual should be read and
understood before installing or using the equipment.

RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS
Unpacking and Inspection: Examine the shipping crate upon arrival. If there is obvious damage, describe on the receiving
documents. Within a few days after delivery, the equipment should be uncrated and carefully inspected for hidden
damages. When removing packaging material, be careful not to discard any equipment, parts, or manuals. If any damage
is detected you should:
1. File a claim with the carrier within five (5) days.
2. Send a copy of the claim to La Marche Mfg. Co.
3. Call La Marche Mfg. For a RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION NUMBER.

Failure to properly file a claim for shipping damages, or provide a copy of the claim to La Marche Mfg., may
void warranty service for any physical damages reported for repair.

HANDLING

WARNING: Equipment can be very heavy, and top-heavy. Use adequate manpower or equipment for
handling. Until the equipment is securely mounted, care must be used to prevent the equipment from being
accidentally tipped over.

NOMENCLATURE PLATES
Each piece of La Marche Mfg. Equipment shipped is identified by part number on the nomenclature plate.

ADJUSTMENTS
All equipment is shipped from the factory fully checked and adjusted. Do not make any adjustments unless the equipment
has been powered-up and the settings have been determined to be incorrect.

SPARE PARTS
To minimize downtime during installation or normal service, it is advisable to purchase spare fuses, circuit boards and other
recommended components. Please refer to the list of recommended spare parts and their La Marche Mfg. Part numbers
included with the instruction manual. It is recommended that spare fuses be ordered for all systems.
To order spare parts, please contact La Marche Mfg. (847)-299-1188 during business hours and ask for the Parts
Department.

Page 4 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

Table of Contents

1.0 GENERAL 5.6 Altitude

5.7 Ventilation
1.1 Circuit Description
5.8 Audible Noise
2.0 INPUT / OUTPUT RATINGS
2.1 A.C. Voltage
6.0 INSTALLATION INFORMATION
6.1 Minimum Wire Sizes
2.2 Input Frequency Range
6.2 National Codes
2.3 Input Current
2.4 Power Factor 7.0 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS &
2.5 Output Ratings FIELD WIRING
7.1 A.C. Input
3.0 TYPICAL ELECTRICAL
7.2 D.C. Output
SPECIFICATIONS 7.3 Rectifier Failure Alarm Terminal
4.0 STANDARD FEATURES 8.0 OPERATION - START UP
4.1 Input Protection
9.0 ADJUSTMENTS
4.2 Output Protection
4.2.1 Current Limit 10.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.2.2 Thermo - Protection
4.2.3 High Voltage Shutdown MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY
4.3 Status / Alarm Indicators
4.3.1 Rectifier Failure Alarm
and Indicator
4.4 Paralleling
4.5 Test Terminals
4.6 Load Sharing
4.7 Current Walk In
4.8 Emergency Restoration
4.9 Mounting
4.10 “Hot” Plug - In

5.0 ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

5.1 Operation Ambient Temperature
5.2 Storage Temperature
5.3 Humidity
5.4 Shock
5.5 Vibration
Page 5 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

1.0 General
LaMarche’s Total Power Module TPM Series utilizes the latest state of the art switching technology to provide filtered,
modular power to fit the needs of today’s telecommunications applications.
Designed to operate with or without battery backup, TPM systems provide hot plug-in and disconnect from the front of the
Total Power Cage (TPC), mounting shelf. With its micro-compact size, the TPM offers unmatched flexibility in portability
and ease of use and installation. TPM Systems are factory configured with a minimum of one modules, maximum of four
modules or a four module split buss (2+2) which allows simultaneous use of both 24 and 48 volt units from a single TPC
mounting shelf.
TPM Series rectifiers have built-in Power Factor Correction Circuitry, N+1 Growth and a Stand-Alone Design Hierarchy.
Note: There are no serviceable parts within the TPM unit. Should the TPM stop operating correctly, contact the La Marche
Service Department for a Return Authorization Number (RMA).

1.1 Circuit Description

The TPM is a high frequency off line switchmode battery charger/eliminator designed with a Power Factor Correction Circuit
and with a Double-Ended (Two Transistor) Forward Converter topology.
The TPM provides an active power factor correction (PFC), circuit. The circuit optimally corrects the input power-line
current to a sinusoidal shape while minimizing line current distortion. The circuit uses average current-mode control to
accomplish fixed-frequency current control with stability and minimal response to noise transients.
The TPM is controlled by a current mode controller which is constantly monitoring the current into the switching MOSFETs,
this provides instantaneous current limit protection and improved transient response to large load changes.
All wiring internal to the TPM is very critical and because of this most of the internal wiring is done via circuit boards. It is
not recommended that the charger case be opened for any reason.

2.0 Input/Output Ratings

2.1 A.C. Voltage

The TPM is designed for 102 - 264 v a.c.

2.2 Input Frequency Range

Range - 47 to 63 HZ

2.3 Input Current

Refer to Table 1

2.4 Power Factor

The TPM is provided with Power Factor correction circuitry which corrects the a.c. input power factor greater than 0.95.
(20% to 100% rated load)

2.5 Output Ratings

The d.c. current and voltage is specified on the units’ nameplate located on the side of the unit.

Page 6 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

3.0 Typical Electrical Specifications

MODEL AC INPUT PROTECTION

(AMPS) (AMPS)
TPM-15-48V-U1 9.5 12
TPM-30-12V-U1 5 12
TPM-30-24V-U1 9.5 12
TABLE 1

4.0 Standard Features

4.1 Input Protection

A two pole circuit breaker opens both sides of the a.c. service. Refer to Table 1 for values.

4.2 Output Protection

4.2.1 Current limiting

The current limit is factory set at 105%.

4.2.2 Thermo - Protection

Should the internal heatsink temperature exceed a preset value the TPM will current limit to a 50% output.

4.2.3 High Voltage Shutdown

The unit shuts down if the output voltage exceeds a preset d.c. value. The unit can be reset by turning the a.c.
breaker on the TPC to the “off” position and then to the “on” position. Blocking diodes provided in each unit prevents
parallel units from being affected. 12V units shut down at 15 volts d.c.; 24V units shut down at 30 volts d.c.; 48V units
shut down at 60 volts d.c..
THESE SETTINGS ARE NOT ADJUSTABLE.

4.3 Status/Alarm Indicators

4.3.1 Rectifier Failure Alarm and Indicator

A red LED illuminates to indicate that a failure has occurred which may disable the rectifier. The conditions which will
produce a rectifier failure include:
 Low Voltage
 High Voltage Shutdown
A set of form “C” contacts rectifier failure are provided for customer connection, on the backplane board, S2A-216L0-
XXXX and S2A-216R-XXXX. These contacts are labeled A-B-C and are rated at .4 amps @120Vac or 1.25A @ 24 Vdc..

4.4 Paralleling
This rectifier will parallel with any other LaMarche TPM charger with the same output voltage. Up to four TPM’s are
paralleled in the LaMarche TPC Cabinet and multiple cabinets may be paralleled for additional output current.

Page 7 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

4.5 Test Terminals

Voltage and Current test terminals are located on the front panel of each rectifier to allow connection of a portable
voltmeter. These test terminals measure the output voltage of the charger before the blocking diodes, not the buss
voltage. To check the output current connect a voltmeter into current terminals, 1.0 d.c. volt equals full rated output
current.

4.6 Load Sharing

Forced load sharing is not provided on the model TPM charger.
Balanced output current operation may be obtained by the following procedure:
1. Turn off all but the first unit.
2. Connect a voltmeter to the front panel voltage test jacks of the first unit.
3. Using the voltage adjustment potentiometer adjust the voltage to the required output. DO NOT re-adjust output
voltage of the first unit.
4. Turn on rest of the units, and apply the full load.
5. Move both voltmeter probes to the test jacks marked “current” on front panel of each TPM. Select mV scale on the
voltmeter.
6. Measure the output current of each unit. Adjust the output voltage of second, third and fourth unit using voltage
adjustment potentiometer until all four currents are in balance (equal).

4.7 Current Walk In

Output current will gradually increase after the charger is initially turned on.

4.8 Emergency Restoration

This charger may be connected to a battery which has been heavily discharged and recharge it without clearing any
protective devices while powering d.c. loads.

4.9 Mounting
The TPM is designed to be mounted in the True Power Cabinet (TPC). Up to four (4) TPM chargers may be mounted in
the cabinet. The captive screw on the front panel should be tightened, finger tight with a maximum torque of 10 inch
pounds. Cover plates are provided for any unused bay. The TPC mounting shelf is designed to be mounted in a 19 or
23-inch wide relay rack with EIA standard mounting centers spaced 1-3/4 inches apart. Any number of TPC mounting
shelves may be paralleled provided they are all the same output voltage. The TPC mounting shelf can be mid or flush
mounted.
(Refer to TPC design illustration included in manual.)

4.10 “Hot” Plug-In

The “hot” plug-in feature allows addition or removal of units without requiring a system shutdown.
Note: The units should be plugged in with the a.c. breaker in the “off “position.
To remove the unit, switch the a.c. breaker to the off position, unlock the charger and remove from the system.

Page 8 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

5.0 Environmental Ratings

5.1 Operation Ambient Temperature

0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F)

5.2 Storage Temperature

-55 to +85 degrees C (-40 to +185 degrees F)

5.3 Humidity
0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.

5.4 Shock
The charger in its shipping container, withstands shock developed when one edge of the container is dropped from six (6)
inches while the opposite edge is resting on the ground, or its dropped two (2) inches on any surface without any physical
damage or degradation of the electrical performance.

5.5 Vibration
The charger in its shipping container, withstands vibration encountered in shipping without physical damage or degradation
of the electrical performance.

5.6 Altitude
This rectifier is capable of operation at altitudes to 10,000 feet at an ambient temperature of up to +40 degrees C.

5.7 Ventilation
The chargers are fan cooled, the relay rack should be mounted so that the ventilating openings are not blocked and air
entering the cabinet does not exceed +50 degrees C.

5.8 Audible Noise

Less than 55 dBA at any point 3 feet from any vertical surface of the charger.

6.0 Installation Information

The TPM was designed to be mounted in a TPC, provided by LaMarche. Up to four (4) units are mounted in the cabinet.

6.1 Minimum Wire Sizes

All wire sizes and cabling should be sized for four (4) chargers.

6.2 National Codes

All wiring should be done following the National Electric Code and all local building and electrical codes.

Page 9 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

7.0 Electrical Connections & Field Wiring

7.1 A.C. Input

Line cords are provided in the back of the cabinet for all a.c. connections. Customer provides line cord plug. Each power
cord provides power for two TPM units.

7.2 D.C. Output

All charger outputs are paralleled and brought to the TPC cabinet terminal block, located on the back of the TPC cabinet.

OBSERVE PROPER D.C. POLARITY

The negative wire from the battery must be connected to the terminal marked “NEGATIVE” or “NEG” and the positive wire
from the battery must be connected to the terminals marked “POSITIVE” or “POS” on the backplane boards in the TPC
cabinet. (See details included in manual)

For proper wire sizing, refer to Wire Size Table, included in manual.

7.3 Rectifier Failure Alarm Terminal

TB1, located on the backplane, is a dry contact. This is the rectifier failure alarm terminal. A to B is normally closed. B to
C is normally open. Use control wire to connect to the terminal block. Terminal blocks on each backplane must be used.
The terminals on each backplane are not summed together. The contacts are rated at .4 amps @ 120Vac or 1.25A @
24Vdc. The maximum wire size for the terminal block is 12 gauge.

8.0 Operation - Start up

When all connections have been made to the cabinet, plug all chargers into the cabinet and turn the locking screws. Place
all a.c. breakers to the “on” positions.

9.0 Adjustments
A d.c. voltage adjustment is provided on the front of each unit. Adjusting the potentiometer in the clockwise direction
will increase the voltage setting and counter clockwise will decrease the setting. There are no other user adjustments that
can be made. 12V units are adjustable from 12 to 14Vdc. 24V units are adjustable from 24 to 28Vdc. 48V units are
adjustable from 48Vdc to 56Vdc.

10.0 Troubleshooting
Be sure all a.c. and d.c. connections to the cabinet are correct. Check d.c. polarities. Check for loose connections. Be sure
all units are locked into place. Check for correct a.c. input and d.c. output voltages.
If the a.c. breaker trips and the rectifier failure LED is on, unplug the charger, plug the unit back into the cabinet
(unplugging and then plugging the charger back into the cabinet resets the charger), Lock the screws, and switch the a.c.
breaker on. If the a.c. breaker trips again, return the unit to the factory after receiving a RMA.
If the fan fails or if the unit overheats, the unit will operate at a reduced output of approximately 375 watts, reset the
charger, as above, check to see if the fan is on. If not the unit output will again reduce to 375 watts output when the
internal temperature increases. The unit can run at this output without a fan indefinitely.
There are no user serviceable parts internal to the TPM. Should the TPM stop operating correctly, contact the LaMarche
service department for a Returned Material Authorization (RMA) number and return the charger for repair.
To avoid damage caused by shipping the units must be returned in their original shipping container with the original
packing material if available. LaMarche will not be responsible for damage when returned to factory.

Page 10 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR TPM W/UNIVERSAL INPUT

MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY

All La Marche Manufacturing Co. equipment has been thoroughly tested and found to be in proper operating condition
upon shipment from the factory and is warranted to be free from any defect in workmanship and material that may
develop within two (2) years from date of purchase under normal use.

If the equipment proves defective within a two year period, it shall be replaced without charge after examination at our
factory, providing such defect in our opinion, is due to faulty material or workmanship and not caused by tampering,
abuse, misapplication or improper installation.

Should the equipment require major replacement or repair, the equipment must be returned to the La Marche factory to
have the inspections, parts, replacements and testing performed by factory personnel. Should it be necessary to return a
piece of equipment to the factory, the customer or Sales representative must first obtain a RMA (Return Material
Authorization) from the factory. If upon inspection at the factory, the defect was due to faulty material or workmanship,
all repairs will be made at no cost to the customer during the warranty period.

All internal maintenance to be performed by La Marche. Warranty is void if seal is damaged.

La Marche reserves the right to honor the warranty with a replacement unit.

In accepting delivery of the equipment, the purchaser assumes full responsibility for proper installation, installation
adjustments and service arrangements. Should minor adjustments be required, the local La Marche Sales Representative
should be contacted to provide this service.

All sales are final. Only standard LaMarche units will be considered for return. A 25% restocking fee is charged when
return is factory authorized. Special units are not returnable.

In no event shall La Marche Manufacturing Co. have any liability for consequential damages, or loss, damage or expense
directly or indirectly arising from the use of the products, or any inability to use them either separately or in combination
with other equipment or materials, or from any other cause. In addition, any alterations of equipment made by anyone
other than La Marche Manufacturing Co. renders this warranty null and void.

La Marche Manufacturing Co. reserves the right to make revisions in current production of equipment, and assumes no
obligation to incorporate these revisions in earlier models.

The failure of La Marche Manufacturing Co. to object to provisions contained in customers' purchase orders or other
communications shall not be deemed a waiver of the terms or conditions hereof, nor acceptance of such provisions.

The above warranty is exclusive, supersedes and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including any
implied warranty of merchantability or fitness. No person, agent or dealer is authorized to give any warranties on behalf of
the Manufacturer, nor to assume for the Manufacturer any other liability in connection with any of its products unless made
in writing and signed by an official of the manufacturer.

Page 11 of 11

Homepage Previous Document

Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
C o n v e n t i o n a l D e t e c t i o n

400 Series
Plug-in Smoke Detector
Models Available
1451 Ionization Detector SSV120-6

1451A Ionization Detector,

ULC Listed
5451 Thermal Rate-of-Rise

Product Overview
Low standby current System Sensor’s 400 Series plug-in smoke detectors are designed to meet the
performance criteria designated by UL/ULC. The ion units have a sensing chamber
Two visible LEDs “blink” in standby and
sealed from back pressure air flow, dirt, and insects. This chamber is protected
provide a 360° field viewing angle
by a fine mesh screen which can be cleaned or replaced. Additional key features
Wide variety of mounting bases with include a recessed mounting option, interchangeable ion, thermal detectors, a vari-
built-in shorting spring ety of mounting bases, and a full line of optional accessories.
Detector head plugs easily into base Ionization. All 400 Series ionization smoke detectors include a specially designed dual
source, dual unipolar detector chamber design which will sense the presence of smoke
Built-in test switch
particles produced by fast combustion as well as slow smoldering fires. This chamber
Field sensitivity metering of detector to exhibits increased stability, significantly reduces nuisance alarms, and provides better
meet the requirements of NFPA 72 performance at higher air velocities.
Built-in tamper-resistant feature
Thermal. The 400 Series thermal rate-of-rise with fixed heat detector contains a
SEMS screws for easy wiring unique dual thermistor heat sensing circuit to provide maximum performance and
solid state reliability. The Model 5451 is designed to initiate an alarm at 135°F and
Optional recessed mounting
to respond to a temperature increase in excess of 15° per minute. This enables the
Removable cover and insect screen for heat detector to communicate an alarm to the central control panel prior to reaching
field cleaning the static set point for these high rates of rise, providing a timely response to both
rapid and slow temperature increases. This model should be used in applications
where rapid response is desired and where rapid temperature increases would only be
caused by a fire emergency.

Homepage Previous Document

Mounting Base Selection Guide
Base Model Loop Current Alarm Nominal Current Draw
Number Version Type Limit Resistor Contact Type Voltage on Alarm (mA)

B401B UL/ULC 2-wire* No — 12/24VDC†† 10–100**

B401BR UL/ULC 2-wire* Yes — 24VDC 10–62

B402B UL/ULC 4-wire Yes Form A&C 24VDC 14–39

B404B UL/ULC 4-wire Yes Form A&C+A 120VAC 75 mA AC Max

Supervisory

B406B UL/ULC/EN-54 2-wire* No Form C 24VDC 12–100**

B401† UL/EN-54 2-wire* No — 12/24VDC†† 10–100**

B401R† EN-54 2-wire* Yes — 24VDC 10–62

*Functionality contingent on panel compatibility. Relay Contact Ratings: †Flangeless base

**Must be limited by control panel. Resistive or Inductive †† Although B401B and B401 bases are capable
(60% power factor) load. of operating at 12 and 24 VDC, they cannot be
Form A: 2.0A at 30 VAC/DC used with the 5451 in 12 V applications.
Form C: 0.6A at 110VDC, 2.0A at 30VDC
1.0A at 125VAC, 2.0A at 30VAC

Junction Box Selection Guide*

Single
Gang 3.5” Octagon 4” Octagon 4” Square 50 mm 60 mm 75 mm

B401/B401R No No No No Yes Yes No

B401B/BR Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

B402B/B406B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

B404B No No Yes Yes No No No

* Box depth contingent on base and wire size.

Refer to National Electrical Code of local applicable codes for appropriate recommendations.

Specifications
Operating Voltage/Alarm Current: Size: Humidity Range:
Mounting base dependent (see char t 3.2”/8.1 cm height 10 – 93% RH non-condensing
on page 2) 4.0”/10.2 cm diameter,
Air Velocity Rating:
unflanged base
Standby Current: Ionization: 1200 fpm maximum
6.2”/15.7 cm diameter,
Ion:
flanged base Smoke Detector Spacing:
120 µA maximum
For ion detectors on smooth ceilings
Thermal: Construction:
(as defined in NFPA 72), spacing of
100 µA maximum Flame retardant Nor yl plastic
30 feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used
Sensitivity: Operating Temperature: as a guide. For thermal detectors on
1.9% + ±6%/ft. Ion 1451: smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA
32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) 72), spacing of 50 feet (2500 sq. ft.)
Weight:
5451: may be used. Other spacing may be
1451:
32°F to 100°F (0°C to 38°C) used depending on ceiling height, high
0.5 lb. (227 gm)
air movements, and other conditions
5451: Alarm Point, Thermal:
or response requirements.
0.3 lb. (136 gm) 135°F (57.2°C) or 15°F/min.
rate of rise

Homepage Previous Document

 (–)

(–) (–)
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL

RA400Z (–) (–) RA400Z (–) (–)

2 2
3 3 EOL
RESISTOR
(+) (+)
1 1

4 4
(+) (+)

(+) (+)

OPTIONAL FAULT TOLERANT WIRING

B401 Series

(+) RED (+)

PURPLE

RELAY, A77-716B
SUPERVISION
EOL POWER
(–) (–)

RA400Z RA400Z
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL)
4 4 (–)
3 3

RESISTOR
2 2 BLK

PURPLE
5 5
14 COM 14 COM

EOL
(+) 1 13 (+) 1 13
N.C. N.C.
(–) 12 N.O. 12 N.O.
11 11
10 AUXILIARY 10 AUXILIARY
8 9 CONTACTS 8 9 CONTACTS

B402B ALARM CIRCUIT

120 VAC 120 VAC

BL

BL
BL

BL
AC

AC
AC

AC
K

K
K

(–) (–)

3 3
RA400Z RA400Z
(OPTIONAL) 2 4 (OPTIONAL) 2 4
1 1
5 14 COM 5 14 COM
13 N.C. 13 N.C.
(+) 12 N.O. (+) 12 N.O.
6 11 6 11
7 10 AUXILIARY 7 10 AUXILIARY
8 9 FORM C 8 9 FORM C
CONTACTS CONTACTS

SUPERVISION CIRCUIT
EOL
RESISTOR

ALARM
CONTROL
PANEL
ALARM CIRCUIT
B404B

(+)

EOL
RESISTOR

4 4
2 3 2 3
5 5
1 1
14 COM 14 COM
13 N.C. 13 N.C.
12 N.O. 12 N.O.
AUXILIARY AUXILIARY
CONTACTS CONTACTS

(–)

OPTIONAL NFPA CLASS “A” WIRING

B406B

Homepage Previous Document

Ordering Information
Part No. Description
1451 Ionization detector. Must be mounted to one of the B40X series bases listed in Mounting Base Guide.
1451A Same as above, Canadian model
5451 Fixed heat detector with rate-of-rise. Alarm point at 57.2°C (135°F). Must be mounted to one of the 400
Series Bases listed in Mounting Base Guide.

Accessories Description
RA400Z Remote annunciator for 2- or 4-wire systems, 3–32V. Use with ion and photo plug-in detectors.
Fits standard U.S. single gang electrical box.

B401BH Sounder base with B401. Requires an external 24 VDC power supply.
Mounts to 4” square electrical box (11/2” minimum depth).

MOD400R Detector sensitivity test tool. (See below.) Use with most analog or digital multimeters.
Satisfies requirement of NFPA 72 for sensitivity testing. (See below.)

RMK400 Recessed mounting kit for use with B401 or B401R mounting bases only. (See below.)
SMK400 Sur face mounting kit provides for entr y of sur face wiring conduit.
For use with B401 or B401R mounting bases only.

EOLR-1 End of line relay for power super vision, 12/24 VDC, 4-wire only.
RS14 Replacement insect screen for 1451.
DUST45 Replacement protective dust cover for plug-in 400 Series.
CRT400 Cover removal tool for 1451.
M02-04-01 Test magnet.
M02-09-00 Test magnet with 32 inch telescoping handle.
XR5 Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or removal of ion, photo,
and thermal detector heads from base in high ceiling installations.

XP-4 Extension pole for XR5. Comes in three 5 ft. sections.

The MOD400R Field Sensitivity Test Module can be used with System Sensor’s Recessed Mounting Kit, RMK400, provides
any standard DC voltmeter or multimeter to check the sensitivity a simple installation solution where applications demand a
range of System Sensor’s detectors (satisfies NFPA 72 require- lower profile smoke detector and reduces the depth of any
ment for sensitivity testing). 400 Series plug-in detector by almost an inch. A special
metal mounting bracket secures the kit and the base to
the junction box and ceiling panel. (For use with B401 and
B401R bases only.)

System Sensor Sales and Service

System Sensor Headquarters System Sensor Canada System Sensor in China System Sensor – Far East System Sensor – India
3825 Ohio Avenue Ph: 905.812.0767 Ph: 86.29.8832.0119 Ph: 85.22.191.9003 Ph: 91.124.237.1770 x.2700
St. Charles, IL 60174 Fx: 905.812.0771 Fx: 86.29.8832.5119 Fx: 85.22.736.6580 Fx: 91.124.237.3118
Ph: 800/SENSOR2 System Sensor Europe System Sensor in Singapore System Sensor – Australia System Sensor – Russia
Fx: 630/377-6495 Ph: 44.1403.891920 Ph: 65.6273.2230 Ph: 613.54.281.142 Ph: 70.95.937.7982
www.systemsensor.com Fx: 44.1403.891921 Fx: 65.6273.2610 Fx: 613.54.281.172 Fx: 70.95.937.7983
­© 2005 System Sensor. The company reserves the right to change product specifications without notice. A05-0205-005•3/05•#1427

Homepage Previous Document

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

1451 Plug-in Ionization 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174
1-800-SENSOR2, FAX: 630-377-6495
Smoke Detector www.systemsensor.com

Specifications
Size
Height: 2.4 inches (6.1 cm)
Diameter: 4.0 inches (10.1 cm)
Weight: 0.6 lb. (277 g)
Operating Temperature Range: 0°C to +49°C (32°F to 120°F)
Operating Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing
Latching Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption.

Before installing Spacing

Please thoroughly read the System Sensor manual A05- Spacing of 30 ft. on a smooth ceiling as per NFPA 72E.
1003, Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors, which Where conditions or response requirements vary, other
provides detailed information on detector spacing, place- spacing may apply.
ment, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of Base Selection And Wiring Guide
this manual are available at no charge from System Sensor.
Refer to the installation instructions for the plug-in detector
(For installation in Canada refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Stan-
bases for wiring instructions. System Sensor has available a
dard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, and CEC
variety of detector bases for this smoke detector, including
Part 1, Sec. 32.)
2-wire applications with and without relays and/or current
NOTICE: This manual should be left with the owner/user limiting resistors, 4-wire and 120VAC applications. (Note:
of this equipment. the 120VAC detector base is not available in Canada.)
NOTICE: Model 1451 is a direct replacement for Honeywell All bases are provided with screw terminals for power,
model TC805C1000 ground, remote annunciator connections, and relay contact
IMPORTANT: This sensor must be tested and maintained connections, if applicable. The electrical ratings for each
regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. This sensor detector-base combination are also included in the base in-
should be cleaned at least once a year. stallation instructions.
General Description Installation
Model 1451 dual chamber ionization detectors utilize state- NOTE: All wiring must conform to applicable local codes,
of-the-art, unipolar sensing chambers. These detectors are ordinances, and regulations.
designed to provide open area protection, and to be used
NOTE: Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the
with compatible UL-listed control panels only. The capa-
initiating-device circuits have been tested, and that the wir-
bility of plugging these detectors into a variety of special
ing is correct.
bases makes them more versatile than equivalent direct-
wired models.
WARNING
Two LEDs on each detector light to provide a local 360°
Remove power from initiating-device circuits before install-
visible alarm indication. Remote LED annunciator capabil-
ing detectors.
ity is available as an optional accessory. These detectors
also have the latching alarm feature. The alarm can be
reset only by a momentary power interruption. For test-
ing, these detectors have an internal magnetically activated
reed switch.
Model 1451 has been approved for marine use in dry loca-
tions by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. The detector is to be
used in dry interior locations only.

D400-01-01 1 I56-0278-008R

Homepage Previous Document

1. Install Detectors: Before testing the detector, look for the presence of the
a. Place the detector into the detector base. flashing LEDs. If they do not flash, either power has been
b. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops lost to the detector (check the wiring), or it is defective
into place. (return for repair).
c. Continue turning detector clockwise to lock it in place. A. Test Magnet (System Sensor Model No. M02-04-00)
2. Tamper-proof Feature 1. Place the magnet against the cover opposite the test
The detector bases include a feature that, when acti- module socket. (See Figure 1.)
vated, prevents removal of the detector without the use 2. The LEDs on the detector should latch on within
of a tool. See the installation instruction manual of the 30 seconds.
detector base for details in using this feature. 3. Reset the detector at the system control panel.
3. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to B. Test Module (System Sensor Model No. MOD400R)
the control unit. The MOD400 or MOD400R is used with a digital or an-
4. Test the detector as described under TESTING. alog voltmeter to check the detector sensitivity as de-
5. Reset the detector at the system control panel. scribed in the test module’s manual.
6. Notify the proper authorities that the system is in operation. C. Aerosol Generator (Gemini 501)
Set the generator to represent 4%/ft. to 5%/ft. obscura-
CAUTION tion as described in the Gemini 501 manual. Using the
Dust covers can be used to help limit dust entry to the de- bowl shaped applicator, apply aerosol until unit alarms.
tector, but they are not a substitute for removing the detec-
Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on line.
tor during building construction. Remove any dust covers
before placing system in service. Detectors that fail these tests should be cleaned as described
under MAINTENANCE and retested. If the detectors still
CAUTION fail these tests they should be returned for repair.
Smoke detectors are not to be used with detector guards
unless the combination has been evaluated and found
suitable for that purpose.

Testing
Before testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke
detector system is undergoing maintenance and will tem-
porarily be out of service. Disable the zone or system un-
dergoing maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms.
Detectors must be tested after installation and periodic
maintenance. The 1451 may be tested as follows:

Figure 1. Bottom and side views showing test magnet position:

LED

TEST MODULE TEST

MAGNET
SOCKET PAINTED
SURFACE

TEST
MAGNET

S0137-00

LED

D400-01-01 2 I56-0278-008R

Homepage Previous Document

Maintenance Figure 2:
It is recommended that the detector be removed from its
mounting base to facilitate easier cleaning. The detector is
cleaned as follows:
NOTE: Before removing the detector, notify the proper
authorities that the smoke detector system is undergoing
maintenance, and will temporarily be out of service. Dis- REMOVABLE
COVER
able the zone or system undergoing maintenance to pre- FOR
CLEANING
vent unwanted alarms.
1. Remove the detector screen and cover assembly by de-
pressing the three lock prongs on the top of the cover,
rotating the cover counterclockwise, and pulling the
screen and cover assembly away from the detector. (See REMOVABLE SCREEN
Figure 2.) Usage of a System Sensor CRT400 cover re- (P/N RS14)
moval tool is recommended.
2. Remove the screen from the cover.
3. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust from the screen,
LOCK PRONG
the cover, and the sensing chamber.
4. After cleaning, snap the screen into the cover, then place SENSING CHAMBER
the cover and screen assembly on the detector, turning
clockwise until it is locked in place.
5. Reinstall the detector.
6. Test the detector as described under TESTING. S0138-00

7. Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on line.

D400-01-01 3 I56-0278-008R

Homepage Previous Document

 Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems
Three-Year Limited Warranty
System Sensor warrants its enclosed product to be free from defects in Department, RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174.
materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period Please include a note describing the malfunction and suspected cause
of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no other of failure. The Company shall not be obligated to replace units which
express warranty for the enclosed product. No agent, representative, are found to be defective because of damage, unreasonable use, modi-
dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or alter fications, or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture. In no
the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company’s obliga- case shall the Company be liable for any consequential or incidental
tion of this Warranty shall be limited to the replacement of any part of damages for breach of this or any other Warranty, expressed or implied
the product which is found to be defective in materials or workman- whatsoever, even if the loss or damage is caused by the Company’s
ship under normal use and service during the three year period com- negligence or fault. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limita-
mencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System Sensor’s tion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or
toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authorization exclusion may not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal
number, send defective units postage prepaid to: System Sensor, Returns rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

D400-01-01 4 I56-0278-008R
©2006 System Sensor
Homepage Previous Document
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

B402B Plug-in Detector Base

For use with the following smoke detectors: 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174
1451, 2451, and 2451TH 1-800-SENSOR2, FAX: 630-377-6495

Specifications
Base Diameter: 6.2 inches (15.7 cm)
Base Height: 1.1 inches (2.8 cm)
Weight: 0.3 lb. (130 g)
Mounting: 4 inch square box with or without plaster ring. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches
4 inch octagon box. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches
3-1/2 inch octagon box. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches
Operating Temperature Range: 0° to +49°C (32° to 120°F)
Operating Humidity Range: 10% to 93 % Relative Humidity, Non-condensing
Electrical Ratings — includes base and detector
System Voltage: 24 VDC
Maximum Ripple Voltage: 4 Volts peak to peak
Start-up Capacitance: 0.02 µF Maximum
Standby Ratings: 20 VDC Minimum
29 VDC Maximum
120 µA Maximum
Alarm Ratings: 17 mA Minimum
36 mA Maximum
Reset Voltage: 1.4 VDC Minimum
Reset Time: 0.3 Seconds Maximum
(If used, the RA400 remote lamp operates within the specified
detector alarm currents.)
Start-up Time: 34.0 Seconds Maximum
Relay Contact Ratings
Resistive or Inductive (60% Power Factor):
Form A: 2.0A @ 30 VAC/DC
Form C: 2.0A @ 30 VAC/DC
0.6A @ 110 VDC
1.0A @ 125 VAC

Before Installing General Description

Please read the System Sensor manual I56-407, Guide for The plug-in detector base B402B is used with System
Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which provides Sensor model 2451 and 2451TH photoelectronic detector
detailed information on detector spacing, placement, zon- heads, and model 1451 ionization detector head. The capa-
ing, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this manual bility of plugging these detectors into a variety of special
are available at no charge from System Sensor. (For instal- bases makes them more versatile than equivalent direct-
lations in Canada, refer to CAN4-S524, Standard for the wired models. Refer to the System Sensor catalog for other
Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) available plug-in detector bases.

NOTICE: This manual should be left with the owner/user This B402B base is intended for use in 4-wire systems, with
of this equipment. screw terminals provided for power, remote annunciator,
and relay contact connections. These bases also contain a
IMPORTANT: The detector used with this base must be resistor to provide current limiting in the alarm state.
tested and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require-
ments. The detector used with this base should be cleaned
at least once a year.

D450-03-00 1 I56-374-05R

Homepage Previous Document

Mounting Figure 1. Mounting base to box:
This detector base mounts directly to 31⁄2-inch and 4-inch
octagon boxes, and 4-inch square boxes (with or without
plaster). To mount the base, remove the decorative ring by
rotating it in either direction to unhook the snaps before
separating the ring from the base. Use the screws supplied
with the junction box to attach the base to the box through SNAP ON
the appropriate slots in the base (see Figure 1). Position the DECORATIVE
RING
decorative ring around the base and rotate it in either direc-
tion until the ring snaps into place.
SCREWS (NOT
SUPPLIED)
Installation Guidelines SHORTING
All wiring must be installed in compliance with the SPRING

National Electrical Code, all applicable local codes, and

any special requirements of the authority having jurisdic-
tion, using the proper wire size. The conductors used to
connect smoke detectors to control panels and accessory
devices should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood of DETECTOR
wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system BASE

from responding properly in the event of a fire.

For signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected

detectors), it is recommended that the wire be no smaller BOX (NOT
SUPPLIED)
than 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). The screws and clamping
plate in the base can accommodate wire sizes up to 12
gauge (2.5 square mm). For best system performance, the
power (+ and –) loop wire should be twisted pair and
installed in separate grounded conduit to minimize the A78-1175-01

effects of electrical interference.

Smoke detectors and alarm system control panels have

specifications for allowable loop resistance. Read the man-
ual for the control to determine the total loop resistance
allowed before wiring the detector loops.

Locate installations where normal ambient temperature

does not exceed 100°F.

Wiring Instructions
Wire connections are made by stripping approximately shorts the positive-in and positive-out leads and permits
3/8" (1 cm) insulation from the end of each wire, sliding the wiring of the loop to be checked for continuity.
the bare end of the wire under the clamp plate, and tight-
ening the clamping plate screw. Use the strip gauges mold- Once all the detector bases have been wired and mounted,
ed into the inside and underside of the base for ease of and the loop wiring has been checked, the detector heads
wiring to terminals 1 through 5 and to terminals 12 through may be installed in the bases. The shorting spring in the
14, respectively. base will disengage automatically when the detector head
is removed from the base. DO NOT remove the shorting
The zone wiring of the detector base should be checked spring since it reengages as the detector head is turned into
before installing the smoke detector head. To make this the base, completing the circuit.
possible, this base contains a special-type shorting jumper.
After the detector base is wired and attached to the electri-
cal box, make sure that the shorting spring is in contact
with the base of terminal 3. This temporary connection

D450-03-00 2 I56-374-05R

Homepage Previous Document

NOTE: For wiring or releasing device, refer to manufac-
turer's installation instructions.

CAUTION

For system supervision–DO NOT use looped wire under ter-

minals 2, 3, and 5. Break wire run to provide supervision
of system.

Figure 2. Typical wiring diagram:

D450-03-00 3 I56-374-05R

Homepage Previous Document

Tamperproof Feature the small hole on the side of the base and push the plastic
lever away from the detector head (see Figure 3B). This
CAUTION will allow the detector to be rotated counterclockwise for
Do not use the tamperproof feature if the XR5 removal tool removal.
is to be used.
NOTE: Head removal after the tamperproof feature has
This detector base can be made tamperproof to prevent the been activated first requires removal of the decora-
removal of the detector head without the use of a tool. To tive ring.
activate this feature, break off the tab on the detector base
as shown in Figure 3A, then install the detector. To remove The tamperproof feature may be defeated by breaking and
the detector from the base once the tamperproof feature removing the plastic lever from the base; however, this pre-
has been activated, place a small-bladed screwdriver into vents ever using the feature again.

Figure 3A. Activating tamperproof feature: Figure 3B. Removing detector head from base:

BREAK TAB AT USE SMALL-BLADED

DOTTED LINE BY SCREWDRIVER TO
PLASTIC LEVER TWISTING TOWARD PUSH PLASTIC LEVER
CENTER OF BASE. IN DIRECTION OF
ARROW.

A78-1175-03A A78-1175-03B

Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems

Three-Year Limited Warranty

System Sensor warrants its enclosed smoke detector base to be free from Sensor, Repair Department, RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St.
defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a Charles, IL 60174. Please include a note describing the malfunction and
period of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no suspected cause of failure. The Company shall not be obligated to repair or
other express warranty for this smoke detector base. No agent, representa- replace units which are found to be defective because of damage, unrea-
tive, dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or sonable use, modifications, or alterations occurring after the date of man-
alter the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company’s obli- ufacture. In no case shall the Company be liable for any consequential or
gation of this Warranty shall be limited to the repair or replacement of any incidental damages for breach of this or any other Warranty, expressed or
part of the smoke detector base which is found to be defective in materi- implied whatsoever, even if the loss or damage is caused by the Company’s
als or workmanship under normal use and service during the three year negligence or fault. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
period commencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion
Sensor’s toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return may not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and
Authorization number, send defective units postage prepaid to: System you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

D450-03-00 4 I56-374-05R
© System Sensor 2001
Homepage Previous Document
 крышка
светодиод 2 извещателя

лапки для
крепления крышки экран
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО УСТАНОВКЕ И ТЕХНИЧЕСКОМУ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ разъем для извещателя
ДЫМОВОГО РАДИОИЗОТОПНОГО ПОЖАРНОГО ИЗВЕЩАТЕЛЯ 1151Е подключения
MOD400R
Перед установкой извещателей, пожалуйста, внимательно прочитайте Руководство System Sensor I56-407-XX «Эксплуатация дымовых пожарных контакты экрана
извещателей System Sensor», в котором содержится подробная информация о размещении, монтаже и особенностях использования данных цветная контакт чувствительная
цветная магнит
извещателей. Это руководство можно получить в компании «Систем Сенсор Фаир Детекторс». метка метка печатной платы камера
магнита магнита

ОБЩЕЕ ОПИСАНИЕ светодиод 1

магнит
Радиоизотопные извещатели 1151Е предназначены для обнаружения возгораний в помещениях различных зданий и сооружений по увеличению
оптической плотности среды при её задымлённости. В извещателе 1151Е использована горизонтально вентилируемая дымовая камера,
обеспечивающая одинаково высокую чувствительность при поступлении дыма с любого направления. Два светодиода красного цвета индицируют Рис. 1. Положение магнита М02-24 при тестировании извещателя Рис.2. Извещатель со снятой крышкой
режим извещателя 1151Е с углом обзора 360°. Предусмотрена возможность подключения выносного светодиодного оптического сигнализатора
(ВОС). Положительный вывод светодиода ВОС подключается к первому контакту базы, через резистор 100 Ом. Печатная плата защищена от
коррозии слоем воска. Извещатель имеет функцию запоминания активизированного состояния. Сброс режима “Пожар” производится ТЕСТИРОВАНИЕ
кратковременным отключением питания извещателя. Проверка работоспособности извещателя проводится при воздействии магнитного поля на Тестирование извещателей должно производиться непосредственно после установки, а также при проведении технического обслуживания. Перед
встроенный геркон. Извещатели 1151Е могут применяться в системах пожарной сигнализации и пожаротушения. Большой набор баз обеспечивает проведением тестирования уведомите соответствующие службы о том, что будет производиться техническое обслуживание системы дымовых
их совместимость с большинством пожарных и охранно-пожарных приемно-контрольных приборов (ПКП), включая ПКП со знакопеременным пожарных извещателей, и в связи с этим данная система должна быть временно отключена. Во избежание нежелательного срабатывания
напряжением в шлейфе (список совместимых панелей можно получить в компании “Систем Сенсор Фаир Детекторс”). Устройства согласования отключите участок или систему, подлежащие техобслуживанию.
М412NL, M412RL и M424RL компании System Sensor обеспечивают подключение 2-х проводных шлейфов с извещателями 1151Е к ПКП охранно- A. Проверка чувствительности извещателя
пожарной сигнализации по 4-х проводной схеме. Все базы имееют специальную функцию, которая, будучи активизированной, предотвращает 1. Произведите активизацию извещателя путем позиционирования магнита М02-24 (в комплект поставки не входит) на корпусе извещателя
возможность снятия извещателя без использования специального инструмента и обеспечивает надежное крепление в условиях транспортной 1151Е на расстоянии 2 - 2,5 см от светодиода 1 в направлении разъема (Рис. 1). В этом месте на верхней стороне крышки извещателя имеется
тряски при их установке на подвижных объектах. 2 -х миллиметровая риска.
2. Оба светодиода должны включиться и на ПКП должен поступить сигнал «Пожар» в течение 30 секунд. Для тестирования извещателей 1151Е
ТЕХНИЧЕСКИЕ ХАРАКТЕРИСТИКИ также рекомендуется использовать устройства фирмы “No Climb Products Ltd” с аэрозольными имитаторами дыма “Solo 330 Smoke
Средняя площадь, контролируемая одним извещателем до 110 м2 Dispenser” и “Trutest” или аналогичные.
Напряжение питания 8,5... 35 В постоянного тока
Ток потребления в дежурном режиме, не более 30 мкА B. Проверка чувствительности с использованеием тестового модуля MOD400R
Максимально допустимый ток в режиме «Пожар» 100 мА При помощи тестового модуля MOD400R производства System Sensor с цифровым или аналоговым вольтметром произведите калибровку
О О
Диапазон рабочих температур от -10 C до +60 C чувствительности извещателя 1151Е в соответствии с руководством по эксплуатации тестового модуля.
Примечание: Не производите установку в местах, где температура воздуха на длительное время выходит за пределы
О О
диапазона от 0 C до 49 C После завершения всех испытаний уведомите соответствующие службы о том, что система приведена в рабочее состояние.
Допустимая относительная влажность до 93%, без конденсации Извещатели, испытания которых дали отрицательные результаты, должны пройти техническое обслуживание. После этого необходимо провести
Максимально допустимая скорость воздуха 7,5 м/с повторное тестирование. Извещатели, не прошедшие повторных испытаний, подлежат ремонту.
Степень защиты оболочки извещателя IP43
Габариты: высота с базой В401 43 мм ТЕХНИЧЕСКОЕ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕ
диаметр 102 мм Перед проведением технического обслуживания уведомите соответствующие службы о том, что система будет временно отключена. Во избежание
Вес 102 гр. ложного срабатывания сигнализации, отключите напряжение питания извещателей.
1. Извлеките из базы извещатель, подлежащий техническому обслуживанию.
Извещатель 1151Е прошел сертификацию и испытания на соответствие требованиям пожарной безопасности, установленным в НПБ 81-99, НПБ 2. Снимите крышку извещателя, для чего при помощи маленькой отвертки с плоским шлицем осторожно ослабьте каждую из четырех лапок,
76-98, НПБ 57-97, ГОСТ 12.2.006-87 (раздел 3, п.4.3.) которые удерживают крышку на своем месте (Рис. 2).
ЗОНА ДЕЙСТВИЯ 3. Осторожно очистите пылесосом наружную поверхность экрана, не снимая его.
Один дымовой пожарный извещатель 1151Е обеспечивает контроль помещения в радиусе до 7,5 м , при условии ровного горизонтального потолка, 4. Снимите экран извещателя с дымовой камеры.
т.е. защищает помещение площадью до 110 м2. Установка извещателей 1151Е должна отвечать требованиям действующих нормативных 5. При помощи пылесоса или струи чистого сжатого воздуха удалите пыль и грязь из дымовой камеры.
документов. 6. Установите на место экран извещателя, соблюдая ориентацию его контактов относительно контактов печатной платы (Рис. 2). Убедитесь
в том, что экран вошел до упора в соответствующие контакты печатной платы.
ВЫБОР ТИПА БАЗЫ И РЕКОМЕНДАЦИИ ПО МОНТАЖУ 7. Установите крышку извещателя, ориентируясь на разъем для подключения модуля MOD400R и индикационные светодиоды. Закрепите
Для получения подробной информации о монтаже обратитесь к инструкциям по установке, входящим в комплект поставки баз для извещателей крышку при помощи лапок.
и к инструкциям, прилагаемым к используемому ПКП. Все базы имеют удобные винтовые электрические контакты для подключения к шлейфу 8. После того, как чистка всех извещателей будет завершена, установите их в базы, восстановите подачу питания в систему и произведите
и к ВОС. Расчетные электрические характеристики для каждой комбинации извещатель-база также приводятся в инструкциях по установке испытание извещателей в соответствии с тем, как это описано в разделе «ТЕСТИРОВАНИЕ» данного руководства.
базы. Монтаж шлейфов должен осуществляться в соответствии с действующими нормативными докуметами (ГОСТ, СНиП и т.д.).
МЕРЫ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ:
УСТАНОВКА ИЗВЕЩАТЕЛЕЙ Извещатель 1151Е содержит изотоп америция-241, помещенный в герметичный контейнер, установленный внутри чувствительной камеры.
ВНИМАНИЕ! Перед установкой извещателей снимите напряжение питания с баз. Запрещается разбирать чувствительную камеру (см. рис. 2) или производить механическое воздействие на нее, не допускается
1. Убедитесь в том, что все базы для извещателей установлены и подключены к шлейфам и к ВОС надлежащим образом. (Для получения разгерметизация контейнера с изотопом америция-241.
информации о процедуре проверки обратитесь к инструкциям, прилагаемым к базе для извещателя).
2. Поместите извещатель в базу. С легким усилием поворачивайте извещатель по часовой стрелке, пока он не встанет на свое место. Продолжайте ГАРАНТИИ
поворачивать извещатель по часовой стрелке с тем, чтобы зафиксировать его. Фирма System Sensor гарантирует работоспособность извещателя 1151Е в течение 3-х лет со дня изготовления, при соблюдении указанных в
3. После того, как все извещатели будут установлены, подайте питание на извещатели и снимите пылезащитные крышки. настоящем документе условий эксплуатации, при регулярном техническом обслуживании, при защите от механических ударов и повреждений.
4. Произведите проверку извещателей в соответствии с тем, как это описано в разделе «ТЕСТИРОВАНИЕ». Если дефекты все-таки обнаружились, обратитесь в компанию «Систем Сенсор Фаир Детекторс», или к дистрибьютору компании «Систем
5. Возвратите извещатель в дежурный режим при помощи ПКП. Сенсор Фаир Детекторс», у которого был приобретен извещатель. Компания не гарантирует работоспособность и отсутствие появления ложных
6. Уведомите соответствующие службы о том, что система запущена в эксплуатацию. сигналов «Пожар» в случае эксплуатации извещателя при условиях окружающей среды, отличающихся от приведенных в разделе «ТЕХНИЧЕСКИЕ
ХАРАКТЕРИСТИКИ». Компания не обязана ремонтировать или заменять устройства, которые стали неисправными вследствие механического
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: в целях предохранения устройств в процессе доставки и при первой установке на извещатели надеты пылезащитные повреждения, использования не по назначению, или не в соответствии с требованиями предыдущих разделов настоящего документа, модификаций
крышки. Данные крышки не обеспечивают полную защиту от загрязнения, поэтому перед началом строительных, или изменений, имеющих место после изготовления. Компания несет ответственность только за те нарушения оговоренных гарантий, которые
ремонтных или иных видов работ, способствующих образованию большого количества пыли, извещатели необходимо были допущены по вине самой компании.
снять. Пылезащитные крышки должны быть удалены перед запуском системы в эксплуатацию.

D100 - 51 - 00 Российская Федерация, 111033, Москва, ул. Волочаевская 40, стр. 2 © System Sensor 2000
Систем Сенсор Фаир Детекторс, тел. 937-79-82 I56 - 546 - 03
http://www.systemsensor.ru E-mail:info@systemsensor.ru
Homepage Previous Document
 ÈÍÑÒÐÓÊÖÈß ÏÎ ÌÎÍÒÀÆÓ ÝËÅÊÒÐÎÏÐÎÂÎÄÊÈ

Íà ðèñ.2 ïîêàçàíà òèïè÷íàÿ ñõåìà ñîåäèíåíèé äëÿ 2õ

ïðîâîäíîé ñèñòåìû ïîæàðíûõ èçâåùàòåëåé

Äëÿ ìîíòàæà ýëåêòðè÷åñêèõ ñîåäèíåíèå ñíèìèòå èçîëÿöèþ

ïðèìåðíî 1 ñì. ñ êîíöà ïðîâîäà (äëÿ ýòîãî ìîæíî
âîñïîëüçîâàòüñÿ êàëèáðîì (strip gage), èìåþùèìñÿ â êîðïóñå
ÈÍÑÒÐÓÊÖÈß ÏÎ ÌÎÍÒÀÆÓ ÑÚÅÌÍÎÉ ÁÀÇÛ ÌÎÄÅËÈ B401RM áàçû), ïîìåñòèòå çà÷èùåííûé êîíåö ïîä çàæèìíóþ ïëàíêó è
çàòÿíèòå åå âèíòîì.
Ïåðåä ìîíòàæîì èçâåùàòåëåé, ïîæàëóéñòà, âíèìàòåëüíî ïðî÷òèòå ðóêîâîäñòâî êîìïàíèè Ñèñòåì Ñåíñîð 156-407-ÕÕ “Ýêñïëóàòàöèÿ äûìîâûõ Ïåðåä óñòàíîâêîé èçâåùàòåëåé ñëåäóåò ïðîâåðèòü
ïîæàðíûõ èçâåùàòåëåé Ñèñòåì Ñåíñîð”, â êîòîðîé ñîäåðæèòñÿ ïîäðîáíàÿ èíôîðìàöèÿ î äèñòàíöèîíèðîâàíèè, ðàçìåùåíèè, ïîçèöèîíèðîâàíèè, ýëåêòðè÷åñêîå ñîåäèíåíèå áàç. Äëÿ ýòîãî â áàçå èìååòñÿ
ýëåêòðîìîíòàæå è îñîáåííîñòÿõ èñïîëüçîâàíèÿ äàííûõ èçâåùàòåëåé. Êîïèþ ýòîãî ðóêîâîäñòâà ìîæíî ïîëó÷èòü â ÎÎÎ “ Ñèñòåì Ñåíñîð Ôàèð ñïåöèàëüíàÿ ïðóæèííàÿ çàêîðà÷èâàþùàÿ ïåðåìû÷êà (ïîêàçàíà Ðèñ. 2 Ýëåêòðè÷åñêàÿ ñõåìà ïîäêëþ÷åíèÿ áàç B401RM
Äåòåêòîðñ”. íà ðèñ. 1). Ïîñëå òîãî, êàê áóäåò çàâåðøåí ìîíòàæ
ýëåêòðîïðîâîäêè, è áàçà èçâåùàòåëÿ áóäåò çàêðåïëåíà íà ðàñïðåäåëèòåëüíîé êîðîáêå, óáåäèòåñü â òîì, ÷òî çàêîðà÷èâàþùàÿ ïðóæèíà êîíòàêòèðóåò
ÎÁÙÅÅ ÎÏÈÑÀÍÈÅ ñ êëåììîé 3. Ýòî âðåìåííîå ñîåäèíåíèå ïîçâîëÿåò îñóùåñòâèòü ïðîâåðêó ìîíòàæà äî òîãî, êàê áóäóò óñòàíîâëåíû èçâåùàòåëè. Çàêîðà÷èâàþùàÿ
Äàííûé òèï áàçû èñïîëüçóåòñÿ ñ äûìîâûìè è òåïëîâûìè ïîæàðíûìè èçâåùàòåëÿìè “System Sensor”. Âîçìîæíîñòü óñòàíîâêè ýòèõ èçâåùàòåëåé â ïðóæèíà àâòîìàòè÷åñêè ðàçúåäèíÿåò êëåììû 2 è 3 ïðè èçâëå÷åíèè èçâåùàòåëÿ èç áàçû.
ñïåöèàëüíûå áàçû ñàìîé ðàçíîîáðàçíîé êîíñòðóêöèè äåëàåò èõ áîëåå óíèâåðñàëüíûìè, ÷åì ñîîòâåòñòâóþùèå ìîäåëè ñ ïðÿìûì ýëåêòðè÷åñêèì Íå óäàëÿéòå çàêîðà÷èâàþùóþ ïðóæèíó, ïîñêîëüêó ïðè óñòàíîâêå èçâåùàòåëÿ â áàçó îíà ñíîâà âõîäèò â êîíòàêò, çàìûêàÿ öåïü.
ñîåäèíåíèåì. Ïîñëå ýëåêòðè÷åñêîãî ìîíòàæà áàç âñåõ èçâåùàòåëåé è ïðîâåðêè êîíòóðà ýëåêòðîïðîâîäêè ìîæíî óñòàíàâëèâàòü èçâåùàòåëè â áàçû.
Áàçà B401RM ïðåäíàçíà÷åíà äëÿ èñïîëüçîâàíèÿ â 2-õ ïðîâîäíûõ ñèñòåìàõ è îñíàùåíà óäîáíûìè âèíòîâûìè êîíòàêòàìè äëÿ ïîäà÷è ýëåêòðîïèòàíèÿ Ôóíêöèÿ çàùèòû îò íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ èçâåùàòåëÿ
è ïîäêëþ÷åíèÿ âûíîñíîãî îïòè÷åñêîãî ñèãíàëèçàòîðà (ÂÎÑ). Íàëè÷èå â áàçå B401RM ðåçèñòîðà 1 Êîì îáåñïå÷èâàåò îãðàíè÷åíèå òîêà èçâåùàòåëÿ â
ðåæèìå “Òðåâîãà” (ïî æåëàíèþ çàêàç÷èêà ðåçèñòîð â áàçå ìîæåò îòñóòñòâîâàòü). Áàçà B401RM èìååò òàêîé æå ïëàñòèêîâûé êîðïóñ, êàê è áàçà Áàçà èìååò äîïîëíèòåëüíóþ ôóíêöèþ çàùèòû îò íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ èçâåùàòåëÿ, êîòîðàÿ ïðåäîòâðàùàåò âîçìîæíîñòü åãî ñíÿòèÿ ñ
B401RU. áàçû áåç èñïîëüçîâàíèÿ èíñòðóìåíòà.
ÏÐÈÌÅ×ÀÍÈÅ: ÍÅ àêòèâèðóéòå ôóíêöèþ çàùèòû îò íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ èçâåùàòåëÿ, åñëè ïðåäïîëàãàåòå èñïîëüçîâàòü èíñòðóìåíò
XR-5 (ïîçâîëÿåò ñíèìàòü èçâåùàòåëü áåç èñïîëüçîâàíèÿ ëåñòíèöû).

Íàçíà÷åíèå êîíòàêòîâ áàçû (ñì. ðèñ. 1)

Äëÿ òîãî ÷òîáû çàùèòèòü èçâåùàòåëü îò íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ, ïåðåä åãî óñòàíîâêîé óäàëèòå ìåíüøèé èç ÿçû÷êîâ áàçû, îòëîìèâ åãî ïî
ïóíêòèðíîé ëèíèè, ðàçìå÷åííîé íà ÿçû÷êå çàùèòû îò íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ (ñì. ðèñ.3). Åñëè âû õîòèòå èçâëå÷ü çàùèùåííûé èçâåùàòåëü
¹ ÍÀÇÍÀ×ÅÍÈÅ èç áàçû, ïðè ïîìîùè ìàëåíüêîé îòâåðòêè èëè èíîãî ïîäîáíîãî èíñòðóìåíòà îòîæìèòå ÿçû÷îê çàùèòû îò íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ, à çàòåì
ïîâåðíèòå èçâåùàòåëü ïðîòèâ ÷àñîâîé ñòðåëêè. Äîñòóï ê äàííîìó ÿçû÷êó âîçìîæåí ÷åðåç ïàç â áàçå (ñì. ðèñ.4).
1 ÂÎÑ (+) Âû ìîæåòå îòêàçàòüñÿ îò èñïîëüçîâàíèÿ ôóíêöèè çàùèòû îò íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ, îòëîìèâ è óäàëèâ ïëàñòìàññîâûé ðû÷àã ñ áàçû. Îäíàêî
ïðè ýòîì ôóíêöèÿ çàùèòû îò íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ íå áóäåò ïîäëåæàòü âîññòàíîâëåíèþ.
2 ÂÎÑ (-) È ÂÕÎÄÍÎÅ ÍÀÏÐßÆÅÍÈÅ (-)
3 ÂÛÕÎÄÍÎÅ ÍÀÏÐßÆÅÍÈÅ (-) ÎÒÎÐÂÈÒÅ ËÅÏÅÑÒÎÊ ÏÎ Ñ ÏÎÌÎÙÜÞ ÎÒÂÅÐÒÊÈ Ñ ÓÇÊÈÌ
4 ÍÅ ÈÑÏÎËÜÇÓÅÒÑß ÏÓÍÊÒÈÐÍÎÉ ËÈÍÈÈ, ÏÎÂÅÐÍÓÂ ÆÀËÎÌ ÍÀÆÌÈÒÅ ÍÀ ÏËÀÑÒÈÊÎÂÛÉ
5 ÂÕÎÄÍÎÅ È ÂÛÕÎÄÍÎÅ ÍÀÏÐßÆÅÍÈß (+) ÅÃÎ Ê ÖÅÍÒÐÓ ÁÀÇÛ ÐÛ×Àà  ÍÀÏÐÀÂËÅÍÈÈ ÑÒÐÅËÊÈ
ÏËÀÑÒÈÊÎÂÛÉ ÐÛ×ÀÃ

ÒÅÕÍÈ×ÅÑÊÈÅ ÄÀÍÍÛÅ
Äèàìåòð: 102 ìì
Âûñîòà: 18,5 ìì
Âåñ: 55 ã
Äèàïàçîí ðàáî÷èõ òåìïåðàòóð: ñì. ñïåöèôèêàöèþ èçâåùàòåëÿ
Äèàïàçîí äîïóñòèìîé âëàæíîñòè: îòíîñèòåëüíàÿ âëàæíîñòü îò 10 äî 95 %
Ðèñóíîê 3. Àêòèâàöèÿ ôóíêöèè çàùèòû îò Ðèñóíîê 4. Èçâëå÷åíèå èçâåùàòåëÿ èç áàçû
íåñàíêöèîíèðîâàííîãî èçâëå÷åíèÿ èçâåùàòåëÿ

Âûíîñíûå îïòè÷åñêèå ñèãíàëèçàòîðû (â êîìïëåêò ïîñòàâêè íå âõîäÿò)

ÝËÅÊÒÐÈ×ÅÑÊÈÅ ÕÀÐÀÊÒÅÐÈÑÒÈÊÈ – èçâåùàòåëÿ è áàçû
 êà÷åñòâå äîïîëíèòåëüíîãî óñòðîéñòâà ìîæåò èñïîëüçîâàòüñÿ âûíîñíîé îïòè÷åñêèé ñèãíàëèçàòîð ìîäåëè RA400Z. Äàííîå óñòðîéñòâî èìååò
Íàïðÿæåíèå: 24  ïîñòîÿííîãî òîêà Ðèñóíîê 1. Ðàñïîëîæåíèå êîíòàêòîâ ïðÿìîóãîëüíóþ ïëàñòèíó, êîòîðàÿ ïîäõîäèò ê àìåðèêàíñêèì ïåðåêëþ÷àþùèì êîðîáêàì âêëþ÷åíèÿ/âûêëþ÷åíèÿ îñâåùåíèÿ ñ îäíèì ïåðåêëþ÷àòåëåì.
Ìàêñèìàëüíîå íàïðÿæåíèå ïóëüñàöèé: 4  (àìïëèòóäà)  òîì ñëó÷àå, åñëè èñïîëüçóåòñÿ èíîé òèï äèñòàíöèîííîãî èíäèêàòîðà, åãî ýëåêòðè÷åñêèå ñïåöèôèêàöèè äîëæíû ñîîòâåòñòâîâàòü èñïîëüçóåìîìó
Ïóñêîâàÿ åìêîñòü: ìàêñèìóì 0,02 ìêÔ íàïðÿæåíèþ îò 2,75 äî 3,0 Â.
“Äåæóðíûé ðåæèì”: 100 ìêÀ è 32  ïîñòîÿííîãî òîêà -ìàêñèìóì
Ðåæèì “Òðåâîãà”: B401RM(470 îì) B401RM(1000 îì)
10 ìÀ 4,5 ìÀ(min) ïðè 10,5  ïîñò. òîêà ÏÐÅÄÅËÛ ÂÎÇÌÎÆÍÎÑÒÅÉ ÄÛÌÎÂÛÕ ÏÎÆÀÐÍÛÕ ÈÇÂÅÙÀÒÅËÅÉ
62 ìÀ 30 ìÀ (max) ïðè 32  ïîñò. òîêà Äûìîâîé ïîæàðíûé èçâåùàòåëü, èñïîëüçóåìûé â êîìáèíàöèè ñ äàííîé áàçîé, ïðåäíàçíà÷åí äëÿ òîãî, ÷òîáû àêòèâèðîâàòü è èíèöèèðîâàòü
Íàïðÿæåíèå ñáðîñà: 2,5  ïîñòîÿííîãî òîêà (ìàêñèìóì) òðåâîæíîå îïîâåùåíèå, îäíàêî îñóùåñòâëåíèå ýòèõ ôóíêöèé âîçìîæíî òîëüêî ïðè èñïîëüçîâàíèè èçâåùàòåëÿ â ñî÷åòàíèè ñ äðóãèìè âèäàìè
Âðåìÿ ñáðîñà: 0,3 ñ (ìèíèìóì) îáîðóäîâàíèÿ. Äûìîâûå ïîæàðíûå èçâåùàòåëè íå ðàáîòàþò áåç ýëåêòðîïèòàíèÿ. Äûìîâûå ïîæàðíûå èçâåùàòåëè íå îïîâåñòÿò î íà÷àâøåìñÿ
Âðåìÿ ïóñêà: 36 ñ (ìàêñèìóì) ïîæàðå, åñëè äûì îò ýòîãî ïîæàðà íå ïîïàäåò íà èçâåùàòåëü. Äûì îò ïîæàðîâ â òðóáàõ, ñòåíàõ, íà êðûøàõ èëè çà çàêðûòûìè äâåðÿìè ìîæåò íå
äîñòèãíóòü èçâåùàòåëÿ, è, êàê ñëåäñòâèå, óñòðîéñòâî ìîæåò íå ñðàáîòàòü. Èçâåùàòåëü ìîæåò íå îáíàðóæèòü âîçãîðàíèå, åñëè îíî ïðîèçîøëî
íà äðóãîì ýòàæå çäàíèÿ. Ïîýòîìó èçâåùàòåëè íåîáõîäèìî óñòàíàâëèâàòü íà êàæäîì ýòàæå çäàíèÿ. Äûìîâûå ïîæàðíûå èçâåùàòåëè òàêæå èìåþò
ïðåäåëû ÷óâñòâèòåëüíîñòè. Èîíèçàöèîííûå èçâåùàòåëè èìåþò øèðîêèé äèàïàçîí ïîæàðíîé ÷óâñòâèòåëüíîñòè, íî îíè ëó÷øå ïîäõîäÿò äëÿ
ÎÑÍÎÂÍÛÅ ÒÐÅÁÎÂÀÍÈß Ê ÌÎÍÒÀÆÓ ÝËÅÊÒÐÎÏÐÎÂÎÄÊÈ îáíàðóæåíèÿ áûñòðî ðàçãîðàþùèõñÿ ïîæàðîâ ñ îòêðûòûì ïëàìåíåì, ÷åì äëÿ îáíàðóæåíèÿ ìåäëåííîãî, áåçäûìíîãî âîçãîðàíèÿ. Ôîòîýëåêòðîííûå
èçâåùàòåëè ëó÷øå óëàâëèâàþò òëåþùèå ïîæàðû, ÷åì îòêðûòîå âîçãîðàíèå. Ïîñêîëüêó ïîæàðû êàæäûé ðàç ïðîèñõîäÿò ïî-ðàçíîìó, è çà÷àñòóþ
Âñÿ ýëåêòðîïðîâîäêà äîëæíà áûòü ñìîíòèðîâàíà â ñîîòâåòñòâèè ñ ÑÍèÏ. Ïðîâîäà, èñïîëüçóåìûå äëÿ ñîåäèíåíèÿ ïîæàðíûõ èçâåùàòåëåé ñ ïðèåìíî- èõ ðàçâèòèå íåïðåäñêàçóåìî, íè îäèí èç íàçâàííûõ òèïîâ èçâåùàòåëåé íåëüçÿ íàçâàòü áåçóñëîâíî ëó÷øèì, òàê æå, êàê íèêòî íå ìîæåò
êîíòðîëüíûì ïðèáîðîì (ÏÊÏ) è âñïîìîãàòåëüíûìè óñòðîéñòâàìè, äîëæíû èìåòü öâåòíóþ ìàðêèðîâêó äëÿ òîãî, ÷òîáû óìåíüøèòü âåðîÿòíîñòü ãàðàíòèðîâàòü, ÷òî äàííûé êîíêðåòíûé èçâåùàòåëü âñåãäà ñìîæåò îáåñïå÷èòü ïîæàðíîå îïîâåùåíèå.  öåëîì, èçâåùàòåëè íå ïðåäíàçíà÷åíû
îøèáîê â ìîíòàæå ýëåêòðè÷åñêèõ ñîåäèíåíèé. Íåïðàâèëüíîå ïîäñîåäèíåíèå ìîæåò íå ïîçâîëèòü ñèñòåìå äîëæíûì îáðàçîì ðåàãèðîâàòü â ñëó÷àå äëÿ òîãî, ÷òîáû îñóùåñòâëÿòü òðåâîæíîå îïîâåùåíèå â ñëó÷àå ïîæàðîâ, âîçíèêøèõ â ðåçóëüòàòå íåñîáëþäåíèÿ ïðàâèë ïðîòèâîïîæàðíîé
ïîæàðà. áåçîïàñíîñòè, ñèëüíûõ âçðûâîâ, óòå÷êè ãàçà, íåïðàâèëüíîãî õðàíåíèÿ îãíåîïàñíûõ æèäêîñòåé (êàê, íàïðèìåð, ðàñòâîðèòåëåé), äðóãèõ óãðîç
áåçîïàñíîñòè èëè ïîäæîãà. Äûìîâûå ïîæàðíûå èçâåùàòåëè, èñïîëüçóåìûå â óñëîâèÿõ áîëüøîé ñêîðîñòè ïåðåìåùåíèÿ âîçäóøíûõ ïîòîêîâ,
Äëÿ ìîíòàæà ñèãíàëüíîé ïðîâîäêè (ïðîâîäêè ìåæäó ñîåäèíåííûìè ìåæäó ñîáîé èçâåùàòåëÿìè èëè ìåæäó èçâåùàòåëÿìè è âñïîìîãàòåëüíûìè ìîãóò íå ñðàáîòàòü ïî ïðè÷èíå óìåíüøåíèÿ ïëîòíîñòè äûìà âñëåäñòâèå ñèëüíîãî âîçäóõîîáìåíà. Êðîìå òîãî, âûñîêàÿ ñêîðîñòü ïåðåìåùåíèÿ
óñòðîéñòâàìè) ðåêîìåíäóþò èñïîëüçîâàòü îäíîæèëüíûé ïðîâîä ñ ñå÷åíèåì íå ìåíåå 1,5 ìì2, äâóõ- èëè òðåõæèëüíûé ïðîâîä ñ ñå÷åíèåì íå ìåíåå 1,0 âîçäóøíûõ ïîòîêîâ ìîæåò âûçâàòü ïîâûøåííîå ïûëåîáðàçîâàíèå, ÷òî ïîòðåáóåò áîëåå ÷àñòîãî ïðîâåäåíèÿ òåõíè÷åñêîãî îáñëóæèâàíèÿ.
ìì2.  öåëÿõ óëó÷øåíèÿ ðàáîòû ñèñòåìû ïðîâîäíèêè êîíòóðà ñèãíàëà òðåâîãè íàäî óñòàíàâëèâàòü â îòäåëüíîì çàçåìëåííîì êîðîáå èëè èñïîëüçîâàòü Äûìîâûå ïîæàðíûå èçâåùàòåëè íå ìîãóò ñëóæèòü âå÷íî.  äûìîâûõ ïîæàðíûõ èçâåùàòåëÿõ èñïîëüçóþòñÿ ýëåêòðîííûå êîìïîíåíòû. Íåñìîòðÿ
êàáåëü ñ ýêðàíèðîâàííîé îïëåòêîé. Ýòî ïîçâîëèò çàùèòèòü øëåéô ïîæàðíîé ñèãíàëèçàöèè îò âíåøíèõ ýëåêòðè÷åñêèõ ïîìåõ. íà òî, ÷òî ïðåäïîëàãàåìûé ñðîê ñëóæáû èçâåùàòåëåé ñîñòàâëÿåò áîëåå 10 ëåò, êàæäûé èç òàêèõ êîìïîíåíòîâ ìîæåò âûéòè èç ñòðîÿ â ëþáîå
âðåìÿ. Ïîýòîìó ïðîèçâîäèòå ïðîâåðêó âàøåé ñèñòåìû äûìîâûõ ïîæàðíûõ èçâåùàòåëåé, ïî ìåíüøåé ìåðå, ðàç â ïîëãîäà. Ðåãóëÿðíî âûïîëíÿéòå
Ïîæàðíûå èçâåùàòåëè è ÏÊÏ ñèñòåì ñèãíàëèçàöèè èìåþò ñïåöèôèêàöèè íà äîïóñòèìîå ñîïðîòèâëåíèå êîíòóðà. Ïåðåä ìîíòàæîì
÷èñòêó è îáñëóæèâàíèå âàøèõ äûìîâûõ ïîæàðíûõ èçâåùàòåëåé. Îáñëóæèâàíèå ñèñòåìû ïîæàðíîãî îáíàðóæåíèÿ, êîòîðóþ âû óñòàíîâèëè,
ñóùåñòâåííî ïîâûñèò óðîâåíü âàøåé áåçîïàñíîñòè.

Ðîññèéñêàÿ Ôåäåðàöèÿ, 109033, Ìîñêâà, óë. Âîëî÷àåâñêàÿ 40, ñòð. 2

D450-19-105 Ñèñòåì Ñåíñîð Ôàèð Äåòåêòîðñ, òåë. 937-79-82 © System Sensor 2000
http://www.systemsensor.ru E-mail:info@systemsensor.ru I56-0832-100

Homepage Previous Document

 MANUAL CALL POINTS ATEX
EExed, Intrinsically Safe (EExia),
Weatherproof BG Range & PB Range GOST

O
II P d
N
V ove
r
ow pp
N A

MEDC Ltd, Colliery Road, MEDC International, 5829 West Sam Houston Parkway, MEDC Norway, Auglaendsmyraa 6,
Pinxton, Nottingham NG16 6JF, UK. North, Suite 1005, Houston, Texas 77041, USA. 4016, Stavanger, Norge.
Tel: +44 (0)1773 864100 Tel: +1 (713) 937 9772 Tel: +47 913 92 289
Fax: +44 (0)1773 582800 Fax: +1 (713) 937 9773 Fax: +47 914 46 030

Sales Enq. Fax: +44 (0)1773 582830 Sales Orders Fax: +44 (0)1773 582832
E-Mail: sales@medc.com  Web: www.medc.com
6DS067/R

Homepage Previous Document

 Features
H Polyester enclosure – light, strong and not subject to corrosion.
H 2 models:
Breakglass.
Pushbutton.
H 4 basic versions available:
(1) Explosion protected EExe (ATEX or Chinese [CQST],
Or Brazilian [Inmetro]),
(2) Explosion protected EExi (ATEX, GOST ‘R’, GOST ‘K’,
Chinese (CQST), Brazilian [Inmetro] or CSA),
(3) Explosion protected: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A-D
Class II, Div. 2, Groups F & G (PB only)
Class I, Zone 2
(4) Weatherproof & Dust-tight/UL ordinary locations.
H In line and end of line resistors and/or zener diodes can be fitted.
H Variety of colours available.
H Up to 9 terminals available.
H Lift flap available for extra protection against inadvertent operation.
H Optional LED – this indicates that the unit has been operated –
useful for testing purposes.
H Earth continuity option for metal glands.
H 1 or 2 changeover switches.
H Captive cover screws.

Breakglass Model
H No hammer required – the glass is covered by a membrane
thus protecting the operator from glass fragments.
H A plastic ‘Break glass’ or deformable operating element is
available to replace the break glass*.
Once the flexible element is pressed it bends but will not
break. The unit is reset by repositioning the element. All other
functions remain the same.
H Complies with the British Standard for call points.
H Key operated test facility – simple but secure.
H Breakglass hammer available.

Pushbutton Model
H Stayput as standard or self reset available.
H Lift Flap as standard. (Not turn and push model).
*Note: Deformable operating element does not comply with BS5839 Part 2.

In addition to the BG & PB range of call points MEDC offer a range of stainless steel units. Details are
available on request.

Homepage Previous Document

 Technical Specification
MODEL BGW & PBW *BGUL & PBUL BGE & PBE BGI & PBI
Weatherproof/ Explosion Protected Explosion Protected Explosion Protected
PROTECTION dust proof Class I, Div 2 EExed EExia
Class II, Div 2 (Increased Safety) (Intrinsically Safe)
CERTIFICATION Weatherproof/ UL Listed to Class I, ATEX approved Ex II 2GD ATEX approved Ex II 1GD
dust proof Div 2, Groups A-D BAS02ATEX2105X (BG & PB) Baseefa 03ATEX0084X (BG & PB)
BGUL & PBUL
IP66/IP67 Class II, Div 2, EExedIICT6 (switch only) EExia IIC T4
Groups F & G EExedmIICT4 (other versions) CENELEC EN50014
(PBUL only) CENELEC EN50014       EN50020
EN50019 Suitable for use in Zones
Listing No. E186629
EN50018 0, 1 & 2
   UL listed for   EN50028 CSA Certification to C22.2 (PBI only):
ordinary locations Suitable for use in Nos.0-M, 0.4-M, 14-M, 25,
Listing No. S8117 Zones 1 & 2 30-M, 94, 142-M1987,
157-M1987, 157-92,
*Refer to UL data Chinese Certification (PBE & BGE): Enclosure Type 4. T4A
sheet at rear of CQST – Exed IIC T6 (switch only) Class I Groups A, B, C & D
catalogue for Exedm IIC T4 (other versions) Cert. No. 79120
complete information GOST ‘R’ Certification (PBI & BGI):
GOST ‘R’ Certification (PBE & BGE): Exia IIC T4 Russian Fire Approved (VNIIPO)
Exedm IIC T6 GOST ‘K’ Certification (PBI only):
Exedm IIC T4 (other versions) Exia IIC T4
Russian Fire (VNIIPO) Approved Chinese Certification (PBI & BGI):
Brazilian (Inmetro) Certification: CQST – Exia IIC T4
BR-Ex emd IIC T4 or Brazilian (Inmetro) Certification:
BR-Ex ed IIC T6 BR-Ex ia IIC T4
VOLTAGE Up to 254V Up to 240V Up to 250V Up to 28V (IS)
CERTIFIED –40°C to +55°C –25°C to +55°C (PBUL) ATEX/CENELEC –40°C to +70°C (PBI)
TEMPERATURE Weatherproof –25°C to +55°C (BGUL) –20°C to +50°C ATEX/CENELEC –40°C to +50°C (BGI)
UL Version CSA –50°C to +40°C (PBI only)
INGRESS PROTECTION IP66 & 67.
BRITISH STANDARD BS 5839 : Part 2 : 1983 (BG).
FOR CALL POINTS
TERMINALS 6 x 2.5mm2 – standard (BGUL only).
7 x 2.5mm2 – standard.
9 x 2.5mm2 optional – up to 60V only.
SWITCH RATINGS DC - 0-30v 5A (resistive) or 3A (inductive)
(1 or 2 changeover    30-50 1A resistive or inductive NOT APPLICABLE
switches fitted) AC - 0-254V 5A resistive or inductive
Note: UL versions Max Rating 240VAC, 3A
CABLE ENTRIES Up to 4 entries, M16 or M20 top and bottom (1/2" NPT available on UL version).
WEIGHT 1.2 kg. (Varies with model & entries).
MATERIAL Anti static U.V. resistant glass reinforced polyester.
FINISH Red epoxy painted finish as standard or to Customer's specification.
RESISTORS & DIODES Various configurations available on versions up to 24V and all "IS" versions.
(Minimum Resistor value 100ΩPBE/BGE, 470ΩPBI/BGI).
EARTH CONTINUITY Internal & external earth continuity is provided via an optional earth plate.
LED INDICATION A high intensity red LED can be fitted as an optional extra to indicate operation
on versions up to 24V and all "IS" versions.
LABELLING BG Glass label - reads either (1)  Fire Break glass – press here
(2)  Break glass – press here
(3)  Worded to Client's requirements.
PB & BG Duty label - worded to Client's requirements.  Rivetted on.
PB & BG Tag label - worded to Client's requirements.  Screwed on.

SW1
SW1  SW2
WIRING DIAGRAM
SINGLE SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM For versions containing inline and
DOUBLE SWITCH end of line resistors or diodes, please
Note: additional
terminal as standard Note: additional specify your requirements.
for ATEX/CENELEC terminal as standard
units. for ATEX/CENELEC
TERMINALS units.

Basic single changeover switch wiring diagram Basic double changeover switch wiring diagram

Homepage Previous Document

Ordering Requirements
The following code is designed to help in the selection of the correct unit. Build up the reference number by inserting the code
for each component into the appropriate box.
Standard products available ex-stock as follows:
Product Description
BGIB4B6B1DSN6R Intrinsically safe, ATEX approved Ex II 1GD, certified EExia, T4, Zones 0, 1 & 2, glass label ‘Fire
Break Glass Press Here’, single switch, no features, 2 x 20mm bottom entry, red finish.
BGEB4B6B1DSN6R Explosion protected, ATEX approved Ex II 2GD, certified EExed, IIC T6, Zones 1 & 2, glass label
‘Fire Break Glass Press Here’, single switch, no features, 2 x 20mm bottom entry, red finish.
BGWN4B6B1ASN6R Weatherproof, uncertified, glass label ‘Fire Break Glass Press Here’, single switch, no features,
2 x 20mm bottom entry only, red finish.
   Model Certification Entries Labels Switches Features Terminals Finish

Model Entries Code Labels Code Features Code Finish Code

BG 16mm *A None 0 None N Red (Standard) R
PB 20mm *B Glass label (1) reqd. 1 LED A Natural Black N
1
/2" NPT *C Glass label (2) reqd. 2 Lift Flap (BG only) B Blue B
*Prefix entry size (see Glass label (3) reqd. 3 Resistor Series *C Yellow Y
diagram above) with Duty label reqd. 4 Resistor EOL *D Grey G
entry position code Tag label reqd. 5 Diode† E Yellow/Black
e.g. 1A, 2A. Specify wording on 3, 4 or Earth Continuity** F Stripes X
UL & CSA versions only 5 as required. Turn & Push (PB only)† T Other – specify S
available with 1/2" NPT Self reset (PB only) M
entries. Resistor Series & EOL‡ *S
Switches Code Plastic element replaces
Certification Code Single changeover *S Break glass P
ATEX/CENELEC – EExe EB Double changeover *D *Specify values
†Not available for UL/CSA  
ATEX/CENELEC – EExi IB *Prefix with voltage   versions.
CSA – Exi (PBI only) IC A for A.C. – D for D.C. ‡Choose for BGE or PBE only – on
UL – Listed UL except for BGI. BGI/W or PBI/W choose C & D
UL - Ordinary locations UW **Must be selected when selecting
GOST ‘R’* – Exi IG CSA certification
GOST ‘R’* – Exe EG
GOST ‘K’ – Exi (PBI only) IK
Chinese – Exe EQ Terminals Code
Chinese – Exi IQ
Inmetro – Exe EM *6 x 2.5mm2 (standard) 6
Inmetro – Exi IM 7 x 2.5mm2 (standard) 7 *BGUL only available with
Uncertified WN *VNIIPO approved as standard 9 x 2.5mm2 (optional) 9 six terminals
All the above specifications, dimensions, weights and tolerances are nominal (typical) and MEDC reserve
the right to vary all data without prior notice. No liability is accepted for any consequence of use.

04/08

Homepage Previous Document

 HEAT DETECTOR ATEX
EExd, EExem & Intrinsically Safe (EExia)
HD1 Range GOST

N
o
Li w
st U
ed L

N
o
A wV
EExd version (optional guard) pp N
ro II
ve PO
d

Introduction EExia/EExem/UL versions (optional guard)

The MEDC-Hawco heat detector has been de- H Zone 0, Zone 1 and Zone 2 use.
signed for use in hazardous environments. These H EExia IIC T4/T6, EExd IIB T3/T6 or
units are suitable for fire alarm and/or suppres- EExem II T6.
sion systems in offshore and onshore applications H ATEX approved – Ex II 1G (EExia)
including paint spray booths, flammable material – Ex II 2G (EExd/EExem).
stores, turbine rooms, extract ductwork and other H BASEEFA certified.
hazardous areas throughout the oil & gas, petro- H UL listed for USA and Canada
  – Class I, Div 2, Groups A-D.
chemical and process industries.
H GOST ‘R’ & ‘K’ certified.
Comprising a Fenwal rate-compensated detector H Chinese (CQST) certified.
with all-stainless steel external construction, mount- H Brazilian (Inmetro) certified.
ed to either a type SM87 marine grade alloy en- H IP66 & IP67.
closure (EExd version) or JB10 corrosion-free GRP H Certified temperature:
enclosure (EExia, EExem/UL versions). The contact   –20°C to +125°C (EExd)*.
in the detector CLOSES at alarm temperature.   –20°C to +55°C (EExem/UL).
  –55°C to +55°C (EExia).
To select appropriate temperature setting see
H Stainless steel probe.
specification on reverse.
H Detector temperature settings:
  60°C to 385°C, (140°F to 725°F).
H Marine grade alloy or GRP enclosure.
H Optional guard.
*Model dependent.
MEDC Ltd, Colliery Road, MEDC International, 5829 West Sam Houston Parkway, MEDC Norway, Auglaendsmyraa 6,
Pinxton, Nottingham NG16 6JF, UK. North, Suite 1005, Houston, Texas 77041, USA. 4016, Stavanger, Norge.
Tel: +44 (0)1773 864100 Tel: +1 (713) 937 9772 Tel: +47 913 92 289
Fax: +44 (0)1773 582800 Fax: +1 (713) 937 9773 Fax: +47 914 46 030

Sales Enq. Fax: +44 (0)1773 582830 Sales Orders Fax: +44 (0)1773 582832
E-Mail: sales@medc.com  Web: www.medc.com
6DS116/I

Homepage Previous Document

 Specification
Certification: CENELEC EN50014, 19 & 28.
EExd IIB T6 (T3 at +125°C), Cert.No. Baseefa 03ATEX0447.
EExia IIC T6 (T4 with diodes/resistors), Cert. No. Baseefa 03ATEX0427.
EExem II T6, Cert. No. Baseefa 03ATEX0428.
UL listed for USA and Canada
   – Class I, Div 2, Groups A, B, C & D.
    UL Listing no. E252920 - versions up to 450˚F
UL Listing no. E254077- versions 600˚F to +725˚F
GOST ‘R’ & ‘K’ Certification: Exd, Exi & Exem versions.
Russian Fire Alarm (VNIIPO) approved.
Chinese Certification: CQST – Exd, Exi & Exem versions.
EExd version Brazilian (Inmetro) Certification: BR-Ex d IIB T6 or T3
BR-Ex d IIB T6 or T3
BR-Ex ia IIC T6
Material: Detector: 316 stainless steel
Enclosures: EExd – LM25 marine grade alloy.
EExia/EExem/UL – GRP (anti-static).
Stainless steel cover screws.
Optional Guard: 316 stainless steel.
Finish: Detector: Sand blasted.
Enclosures: EExd – Epoxy painted grey as standard or to customer’s
specification.
EExia/EExem/UL – Self coloured black or epoxy painted to
customer’s specification.
Weight: EExd, 2kg.
EExia/EExem/UL, 1.1kg.
Certified: –20°C to +125°C EExd (T3) ATEX & GOST ‘R’ only.
Temperature: –20°C to +55°C EExd (T6)/EExem/UL, –55°C to +55°C EExia.
Ingress Protection: IP66 & IP67.
Operation: The detector contact is normally open and CLOSES at alarm temperature.
Listed Temperature To select appropriate temperature settings, choose detector at 38°C
EExia/EExem/UL versions Settings: (100°F) above maximum ambient temperature.
Temperature Setting Tolerance Colour Code
(°F) (°C) (°F) (°C) Detector Tip
140 60 +7/-8 ±4 Black
160 71 +7/-8 ±4 Black
190 88 +7/-8 ±4 White
225 107 +7/-8 ±4 White
275 135 ±10 ±6 Blue
325 163 ±10 ±6 Red
360 182 ±10 ±6 Red
450 232 ±15 ±8 Green
600 316 ±20 ±11 Orange
725 385 ±25 ±14 Orange
Contact Rating: EExd/EExem/UL: 125V a.c – 5A, 125V d.c. – 0.5A, 48V d.c. – 1A. EExia: 30V – 300mA.
Terminals: 6 x 4mm2 (BK6).
Labels: Optional stainless steel tag and duty labels.
Cable Entries: 2 x M20 ISO (ATEX/Exd/Exe/Exi versions) 2 x ½" NPT via adaptors (UL version).
Resistor: Series & EOL ressistor (maximum total 2) minimum value (each) 470Ω
– only available Exd, Exi & UL versions.
Diodes: Up to 2 off available in Exd & Exi versions – contact sales office.
Ordering Requirements The following code is designed to help in the selection of the correct unit. Build up the reference number
by inserting the code for each component into the appropriate box.
Product Description
HD1BDXXXNG ATEX approved Ex II 2G, certified EExd IIB T6, specify temperature setting, 2 x M20 entries, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted grey.
HD1BIXXXNN ATEX approved Ex II 1G, certified EExia IIC T6, specify temperature setting, 2 x M20 entries, GRP enclosure, natural black.
HD1BEXXXNN ATEX approved Ex II 2G, certified EExem II T6, specify temperature setting, 2 x M20 entries, GRP enclosure, natural black.
Model Certification Type Temp. Settings Options Enclosure Finish
HD1

Certification Code Type Code Temp °F Code Option Code Finish Code
ATEX B Exd D* 140 140 Duty Label D Natural Black (EExe/EExi/UL only) N
UL listed UL Exe E† 160 160 Tag Label T Grey G
ATEX/UL dual listed AU Exi I Guard G Red R
190 190
GOST ‘R’ * G UL U‡ Resistor EOL E
225 225 Blue B
GOST ‘K’ K *Not available UL or
275 275 Resistor series S Yellow Y
Chinese (CQST) Q ATEX/UL dual listed.
325 325 Diode(s)* I Special Finish S
Inmetro M †ATEX/UL dual listed Blanking Plug P
Note: ATEX Exd version dual E version available only 360 360
None N
marked for T3 at +125°C ‡Select this option for UL 450 450
and T6 at +55C. listed. *Only available in ATEX /Exd/
600 600
*VNIIPO approved as Exia versions (specify No.)
725 725
standard.
All the above specifications, dimensions, weights and tolerances are nominal (typical) and MEDC reserve
the right to vary all data without prior notice. No liability is accepted for any consequence of use.

10/08

Homepage Previous Document

Protectowire
Linear Heat Detector

Features

• Line coverage…continuous sensitivity.

• Five temperature ratings.
• Withstands severe environmental conditions.
• Approved for hazardous locations.
• Easy to install, test, and splice.
• Compatible with other initiation devices on same circuit.
• Separate pre-alarm and alarm actuations (Type TRI).

Description
Protectowire Linear Heat Detector is a proprietary cable that
detects heat anywhere along its length. The sensor cable is com-
prised of two steel conductors individually insulated with a heat
sensitive polymer. The insulated conductors are twisted together to
impose a spring pressure between them, then wrapped with a pro-
tective tape and finished with an outer jacket suitable for the envi-
ronment in which the Detector will be installed.
Protectowire is a fixed temperature digital sensor and is therefore
capable of initiating an alarm once its rated activation temperature
is reached. At the rated temperature, the heat sensitive polymer
insulation yields to the pressure upon it, permitting the inner con-
ductors to move into contact with each other thereby initiating
an alarm signal. This action takes place at the first heated point
anywhere along the Detector’s length. It does not require that a
specific length be heated in order to initiate an alarm nor is system
calibration necessary to compensate for changes in the installed
ambient temperature. Protectowire Linear Heat Detector provides
the advantages of line coverage with point sensitivity.

UL
® FM UL
C R

An ISO 9001 Registered Company

LISTED APPROVED

Homepage Previous Document

 also meets intrinsically safe standards and is FM Approved for
Protectowire Class I, II, or III, Div. 1, Applicable Groups A, B, C, D, E, F &
G hazardous areas, when the appropriate control panel option is
the first line of fire defense. ordered.

Protectowire Features & Benefits

• Identifies and displays, at the control panel, the alarm location
Conductors anywhere along its length when used with the exclusive
Protectowire Alarm Point Location Meter.
• Sensitivity not effected by changes in ambient temperature or
Heat sensitive polymer
length of cable used on the detection circuit. Compensating
adjustments are not required.
Protective tape
• Steel inner conductors and select outer jackets, provide resis-
tance to mechanical damage.
Outer covering
• Simple to install and splice with common tools. Junctions can
be made without effecting the integrity of the system.
• Compatible with other types of alarm initiating devices on the
same circuit such as manual pull stations, thermal heat detec-
tors and smoke detectors.
Approximately • Can be installed in hazardous areas when used with suitably
5/32" (4mm) diameter approved Protectowire FireSystem Control Panels.
• Full range of temperatures and models available to accommo-
date the most demanding applications.
• Different temperature detectors may be utilized in the same
initiating circuit.
• Available on stainless steel messenger wire for installations
where mounting is difficult such as large open areas.
• Portable test equipment available for easy field service.
• Ideally suited for activation of extinguishment equipment,
such as deluge or pre-action sprinkler systems.

Applications Specifications
• Cable trays The Detector is made in multiple temperature ratings to allow
• Conveyors for differences in normal or ambient temperature. Guidelines for
selecting the proper detector temperature rating are the same as for
• Power distribution apparatus: switchgear, transformers, automatic sprinklers and other heat actuated devices. Refer to the
motor control centers Temperature Rating Chart for proper model selection based upon
• Dust collectors/baghouses installation temperature limits.
• Cooling towers The Detector’s product range consists of four distinct types of
• Warehouses/rack storage cable. Each designation identifies a specific outer jacket material
which has unique characteristics that have been selected to accom-
• Mines modate the widest range of installation environments. All specifica-
• Pipelines tions are subject to change without notice.
• Bridges, piers, marine vessels EPC – Type EPC Protectowire consists of a durable flame retar-
• Refrigerated storage dant vinyl outer jacket. This series is best described as multi-pur-
pose and is well suited to a wide range of both commercial and
• Tank farms industrial applications. The outer jacket provides good all-around
• Aircraft hangars performance for most installations. It features low moisture
absorption, resistance to many common chemicals, and excellent
• Computer rooms
flexibility at low temperatures.
Ideally suited to industrial high risk hazards as well as many EPN – Type EPN utilizes a dual jacket consisting of an inner layer
types of commercial applications, Protectowire Linear Heat of vinyl with an outer film of black weather resistant 612 nylon.
Detector has unique advantages over other types of detectors, This cable is specifically designed for industrial applications such
especially when difficult installation factors or severe environ- as conveyors, where abrasion resistance is of major importance.
mental conditions are present. In general, the outer nylon sheath substantially improves the
cable’s resistance to abrasion, some acids, aggressive salts, oils and
When used with a Protectowire FireSystem Control Panel, the
petroleum products while maintaining good electrical and
Detector will activate a display, showing the location of an over
mechanical properties.
heat or fire condition anywhere along its length. The Detector

Homepage Previous Document

EPR – The EPR series contains an extruded flame retardant jacket On smooth ceilings, the distance between detector runs shall not
of polypropylene elastomer with a special UV stabilizer added to exceed the listed spacing. There shall be a detector run within
enhance weathering performance. It is intended for a wide range of a distance of one-half the listed spacing, measured at a right angle,
industrial applications and is characterized by high resiliency, good from all walls, or partitions extending to within 18 inches (460
abrasion resistance, excellent weathering properties and exceptional mm) of the ceiling as shown in the illustration.
high temperature performance. EPR provides better overall perfor- The listed spacing shall be used as a guide or starting point in
mance at higher ambient temperatures than either EPC or EPN. detector installation layout. Reduced spacing is required based
TRI – Type TRI Protectowire is a unique dual temperature detector upon factors such as ceiling height and construction, physical
which is capable of initiating separate pre-alarm and alarm signals
once each of its rated activation temperatures is reached. The S
Detector consists of a durable vinyl outer jacket which features low 2
moisture absorption, resistance to many common chemicals, excel-
lent flexibility and flame retardant. For complete information on
this product, please refer to Data Sheet 9114.
S
S
2
Electrical
All cables are rated for 30 VAC, 42 VDC. Resistance is approxi-
S
mately one ohm per five feet (1.5m) of twisted pair (two conduc- 2
tors). Type TRI is .3 ohms per foot (.3m) of twisted cable (3 con-
ductors). Ceiling of protected area
S=Listed spacing. See chart below.

Installation obstructions, air movement, or the authority having jurisdiction.

Protectowire Linear Heat Detector is approved as a heat actuated When Protectowire is used to activate sprinkler systems, special
automatic fire detector and is intended to be used on a supervised Factory Mutual (FM) spacing guidelines may also be applicable to
initiating circuit of an approved fire protective signaling control the specific hazard protected. It is mandatory that engineering judg-
unit. The Detector must be installed in continuous runs without ment be applied in determining final detector location and spacing.
taps or branches in accordance with applicable sections of NFPA 70 In general, the use of Protectowire in any initiating device circuit, is
National Electrical Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, or limited to coverage of a specific hazard or area. Copper wire, of an
as determined by the local “authority having jurisdiction.” approved type, with a minimum conductor size of 18 AWG, shall
Protectowire may be installed at the ceiling level or on the side walls be installed from the control panel out to the hazard area where it is
within 20 inches of the ceiling, to protect areas within buildings then connected to the beginning of the Protectowire portion of the
(area protection). The Detector has the additional benefit of being circuit. The Protectowire portion of each initiating circuit shall
suitable for installation close to the hazard in order to provide a begin and terminate at each end in an approved zone box or end-
rapid response (proximity or special application protection). of-line zone box. Strain relief connectors, Model SR-502, shall be
installed in all zone boxes where Protectowire enters or exits the
enclosure, in order to hold the cable securely.

Temperature Ratings and Model Numbers (Use Linear Detector of Proper Temperature Rating)
Regular Intermediate High Extra High
Alarm Temperature 155°F (68°C) 190°F (88°C)/220°F (105°C) 280°F (138°C) 356°F (180°C)
Max. Installed 190 Up to 150°F (66°C) Up to 221°F (105°C)
Ambient Temp. Up to 100°F(38°C) 220 Up to 175°F (79°C) Up to 200°F (93°C) EPR Up to 250°F (121°C)
Multi-purpose/ PHSC-190-EPC
PHSC-155-EPC PHSC-280-EPC PHSC-356-EPC*
Industrial PHSC-220-EPC1
Abrasion/Limited PHSC-190-EPR
PHSC-155-EPR PHSC-280-EPR PHSC-356-EPR*
Chemical Resistance PHSC-190-EPN
MODEL NO. PHSC-6893-TRI Dual Temperature Detector (TRI-Wire™)
Max. Installed Ambient Temp. = 100°F (38°C); Low Temp. Pre-alarm = 155°F (68°C); High Temp. Alarm = 200°F (93°C)
All Protectowire models can be supplied on Messenger Wire. Add suffix “-M” to above model numbers. *FM Approved for special application use only. 1FM Approved Only.

Approvals/Maximum Listed Spacing

Type EPC Type EPN Type EPR Type TRI
UL (25 ft./7.6m) UL (25 ft./7.6m) UL (25 ft./7.6m)
FM (25 ft./7.6m) FM (25 ft./7.6m) FM (25 ft./7.6m) FM (15 ft./4.6m)

Homepage Previous Document

Installation Accessories additional challenges due to environmental factors such as snow
A comprehensive range of mounting and installation accessories are loads, ice build-up or wind. Increased detector support must be
available for the installation of Protectowire Linear Heat Detector. provided by using additional intermediate fasteners with closer
These include several types of clips, straps, drive rings, beam spacing in all outdoor installations. When ordering messenger wire
clamps, cable standoffs, connectors and zone boxes. Their proper configurations, add suffix “-M” to the Protectowire model number.
use assures a neat and reliable installation. Only installation hard- All models of Protectowire Linear Heat Detector have the same
ware supplied or approved by The Protectowire Company should size conductors and are readily spliced together with common
be used. tools, by means of PWS Splicing Sleeves or PWSC Splicing
Messenger wire (a Protectowire exclusive), is also available for Connectors. These devices are designed for this specific purpose
any model Detector on special order. It consists of high tensile and are the only approved methods of splicing the Detector.
strength stainless steel wire, which is wound around the Detector
at the rate of approximately one turn per foot. It is a carrier or System Capabilities
support wire which is designed to simplify the installation of the
Detector in areas where mounting is difficult due to the lack of Protectowire Linear Heat Detector is a component of a complete
appropriate support structures or mounting surfaces. When using family of systems manufactured by The Protectowire Company —
messenger wire to support the Detector, turnbuckles and eyebolts a leader in fire detection for over sixty years.
must be employed at each end of a run to place tension on the Capabilities include meeting any fire defense need from hazardous
support wire. The maximum Detector run length between turn- area detection to auxiliary equipment shutdown and automatic
buckles should not exceed 250 feet (76m) and the wire must also extinguishing. Modular in design, Protectowire detection systems
be supported with approved intermediate fasteners at intervals are designed to meet individual customer requirements and allow
ranging from 15 feet (4.5m) to 50 feet (15m) depending upon the for system expansion at any time, providing long range economy.
application. Outdoor messenger wire installations present

Accessories
The Protectowire Company offers an assortment of fasteners and splicing devices to facilitate installation for both standard and special
applications. Full details are available upon request.

PFL PM-3
Flexible lead Pipe strap

HPC-2
Cable tray clip
OHS-SS
Stainless steel line clip

WAW clip
CC-2
Cable tray clip BC-2
Beam clamp
PWSC
Splicing connector

The Protectowire Company, Inc.
Post Office Box 200, Hanover, MA 02339-0200 U.S.A.
p:781-826-3878
f:781-826-2045
web: www.protectowire.com
email: pwire@protectowire.com
SPECIAL H A Z A R D FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS DS 6592S-0204 (2M)
© 1996 The Protectowire Co., Inc.
Homepage Previous Document
 Linear
thermal
alarm -
thermo- cable Of

protectowire (USA)
Linear thermal alarm (thermo-cable) of the production of firm Protectowire (USA) is
the cable, which makes it possible to reveal the source of overheating in any place for entire
its elongation. Thermo-cable is the united sensor of continuous action and adapts when
operating condition does not allow installation and use of usual sensors, but under the
conditions of the increased explosiveness the application of a thermo-cable is optimal
solution.

The linear thermal alarm Of protectowire consists of two steel conductors, each of which has
the insulating coating from the thermal polymer. Conductors with the insulating coating are
twisted for creating between them mechanical stress, then they are armored and are placed
into the braiding for the isolation from the action of unfavorable environmental conditions.

Operating principle of the thermo-cable: with reaching of the threshold value of temperature,
under the effect of pressure of conductors, the destruction of insulating coating from the heat-
sensitive polymer occurs, making possible for conductors to enter into the contact with each
other. This occurs at the first point of overheating on the route of thermo-cable. For the wear
and tear of signal it does not be necessary to await heating the section, which has the specific
length. The thermo-cable Of protectowire is maximum thermal alarm and therefore it makes
it possible to generate alarm signal with reaching of temperature threshold at any point
throughout the entire length of cable.

Technical characteristics:

Homepage Previous Document

 - High sensitivity for entire elongation
- Four temperature ranges
- High stability to the humidity, the dust, low temperatures and chemical reagents
- It is irreplaceable in the dangerously explosive zones
- It is simple in the installation and the adjustment
- It is economical, any running costs
- If necessary expansion simply it is added to the system
- It does not require maintenance. Life expectancy is more than 25 years

At present there are several types of thermo-cable, that differ from each other in terms of
model type and material, from which is made external shielding braiding, for the use in the
most varied environmental conditions.

Criteria of the selection of the model of thermo-cable for

different temperature ranges:

Temperature range:

Basic Intermediate High Superhigh

Wear and tear

68,3°[S] 87,8°[S] 137,8°[S] 180°[S]
temperature:

Minimum ambient
-44°[S]
temperature:

Maximum ambient to To to
to 65,6°[S]
temperature: 37,8°[S] 93,3°[S] 105,0°[S]

Standard, PHSC- PHSC-190- PHSC-280- PHSC-356-

multipurpose: 155-EPC EPC EPC EPC

It is abrasive and the PHSC- PHSC-190- PHSC-280- PHSC-356-

chemically steadfast: 155-EPR EPR EPR EPR

PHSC-68/93-TRI:
Combined,
Maximum established ambient temperature to 37.8°C;
to two temperatures of
Low temperature of [predtrevogi] 68.3°C;
the wear and tear:
the high temperature of [predtrevogi] 93.3°C

Homepage Previous Document

 Basic fields of application:
• cable routes;
• tunnels;
• storages;
• power station;
• escalators;
• elevators;
• the open shelves for the storage;
• conveyor conveyers;
• elevator mines;
• rubbish chutes;
• dust collectors;
• stairs;
• bridges and piers;
• hangars for the aircraft;
• other objects in the oil, gas, and chemical, coal-mining, steel foundry, transport and
dangerously explosive branches.

Thermo-cable easily is added to any system [APS]. For this it is necessary to have a control
device with the entrances of the type “dry contact”. Thermo-cable has the Russian certificates
of correspondence and of fire safety and its application in the territory of the Russian
Federation it regulates BY [NPB] 88-01.

Rule of the products Of protectowire

Homepage Previous Document

 Линейный
тепловой
извещатель
-

термокабель Protectowire (США)

Линейный тепловой извещатель (термокабель) производства фирмы Protectowire
(США) представляет собой кабель, который позволяет обнаружить источник перегрева
в любом месте на всем его протяжении. Термокабель представляет собой единый датчик
непрерывного действия и применяется в тех случаях, когда условия эксплуатации не
позволяют установку и использование обычных датчиков, а в условиях повышенной
взрывоопасности применение термокабеля является оптимальным решением.

Линейный тепловой извещатель Protectowire состоит из двух стальных проводников,

каждый из которых имеет изолирующее покрытие из термочувствительного полимера.
Проводники с изолирующим покрытием скручиваются для создания между ними
механического напряжения, затем покрываются защитной оболочкой и помещаются в
оплетку для изоляции от воздействия неблагоприятных условий окружающей среды.

Принцип действия термокабеля: при достижении порогового значения температуры,

под действием давления проводников, происходит разрушение изоляционного
покрытия из теплочувствительного полимера, позволяя проводникам войти в контакт
друг с другом. Это происходит в первой точке перегрева на трассе термокабеля. Для
срабатывания сигнала не требуется ждать нагрева участка, имеющего определенную
длину. Термокабель Protectowire является максимальным тепловым извещателем и
поэтому позволяет генерировать сигнал тревоги при достижении температурного
порога в любой точке по всей длине кабеля.

Технические характеристики:

Homepage Previous Document

 - Высокая чувствительность на всем протяжении
- Четыре температурных диапазона
- Высокая устойчивость к влажности, пыли, низким температурам и химическим
реагентам
- Незаменим во взрывоопасных зонах
- Прост в монтаже и наладке
- Экономичен, никаких расходов по эксплуатации
- При необходимости расширения просто добавляется к системе
- Не требует обслуживания. Ожидаемый срок службы более 25 лет

В настоящее время имеются несколько типов термокабеля, отличающиеся друг от друга

модельным типом и материалом, из которого сделана внешняя защитная оплетка, для
использования в самых различных условиях окружающей среды.

Критерии выбора модели термокабеля для различных

температурных диапазонов:

Диапазон температур:

Основной Промежуточный Высокий Сверхвысокий

Температура
68,3°С 87,8°С 137,8°С 180°С
срабатывания:

Минимальная
температура
-44°С
окружающей
среды:

Максимальная
температура До
до 37,8°С до 65,6°С до 105,0°С
окружающей 93,3°С
среды:

Стандартный, PHSC- PHSC- PHSC-356-

PHSC-190-EPC
многоцелевой: 155-EPC 280-EPC EPC

Абразивно и
PHSC- PHSC- PHSC-356-
химически PHSC-190-EPR
155-EPR 280-EPR EPR
стойкий:

Homepage Previous Document

 PHSC-68/93-TRI:
Комбинированный,
Максимальная установленная температура окружающей
на две
среды до 37.8°C;
температуры
Низкая температура предтревоги 68.3°C;
срабатывания:
высокая температура предтревоги 93.3°C

Основные области применения:

• кабельные трассы;
• тоннели;
• склады;
• электростанции;
• эскалаторы;
• элеваторы;
• открытые стеллажи для хранения;
• конвейерные транспортеры;
• лифтовые шахты;
• мусоропроводы;
• пылесборники;
• лестничные пролеты;
• мосты и пирсы;
• ангары для самолетов;
• другие объекты в нефтегазохимических, угледобывающих, сталелитейных,
транспортных и взрывоопасных отраслях.

Термокабель легко добавляется к любой системе АПС. Для этого необходимо иметь
устройство контроля с входами типа «сухой контакт». Термокабель имеет российские
сертификаты соответствия и пожарной безопасности и его применение на территории
Российской Федерации регламентируется НПБ 88-01.

Homepage Previous Document

 5 JOULE XENON BEACONS ATEX
EExd, Weatherproof
XB11 Range GOST

N
o
‘R w
Ce ’ & GO
rt ‘K ST
ifi
ed ’

Beacon/Sounder
Combination Unit

Introduction H Zone 1 and Zone 2 use.

These certified beacons have been designed for use H EExd IIB T4, T5 & T6.
in potentially explosive gas and dust atmospheres H ATEX approved, Ex II 2GD.
H BASEEFA certified.
and harsh environmental conditions. The H UL Listed for USA and Canada
glass reinforced polyester enclosures are – Hazardous locations:
suitable for use offshore or onshore, where light Class I, Div 2, Groups C & D.
weight combined with corrosion resistance is Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIB T4/T5.
required. – Ordinary locations: Visual-Signal Device.
H GOST 'R' & 'K' Certified.
The beacon housing is manufactured completely from H Australian (SAA) certified.
a U.V. stable, glass reinforced polyester. Stainless H Chinese (CQST) certified.
H Brazilian (Inmetro) certified.
steel screws and mounting bracket are incorporated H IP66 and IP67.
ensuring a totally corrosion free product. H Certified temperature –55°C to +70°C.
H Corrosion resistant GRP.
Units can be painted to customer specification and
H Optional stainless steel backstrap.
supplied with identification labels. H Various lens colours.
H Optional lens guard.
H Optional telephone initiation.
H 2 x M20 cable entries or 2 x 1/2" NPT*.
H Earth continuity option (model dependent).
H Filament version (20W) available†.
H Fluorescent version (10W) available†.
H Beacon/Sounder Combination Unit avail-
able.
*Model dependent.
†See FL11, FB11, FL12, FB12 data sheet.
MEDC Ltd, Colliery Road, MEDC International, 5829 West Sam Houston Parkway, MEDC Norway, Auglaendsmyraa 6,
Pinxton, Nottingham NG16 6JF, UK. North, Suite 1005, Houston, Texas 77041, USA. 4016, Stavanger, Norge.
Tel: +44 (0)1773 864100 Tel: +1 (713) 937 9772 Tel: +47 913 92 289
Fax: +44 (0)1773 582800 Fax: +1 (713) 937 9773 Fax: +47 914 46 030

Sales Enq. Fax: +44 (0)1773 582830 Sales Orders Fax: +44 (0)1773 582832
Homepage Previous Document
E-Mail: sales@medc.com  Web: www.medc.com
6DS096/L
 ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES

Specification
Certification: CENELEC EN50014 and EN50018.
Cert. No. BAS99 ATEX 2195X. FOR COLOURED LENSES
EExd IIB 135°C (-55 t.amb +70°C) T4.
100°C (-55 t.amb +55°C) T5. Colour Red Blue Amber Green Yellow
  85°C (-55 t.amb +40°C) T6.
UL Listed for USA and Canada to: Multiplying
– Hazardous locations: Factor 0.15 0.12 0.51 0.49 0.86
Class I, Div 2 Groups C & D.
Class I, Zones 1 & 2 AExd IIB T4/T5. The photometric data has been verified by BSI.
UL Listing No: E187894. A report is available if required.
– Ordinary locations: Visual-Signal Device. Weight: 2.5Kg.
UL listing No. S8128.
Refer to UL Datasheet at rear of catalogue for complete information. Certified Temperature: EExd –55°C to +70°C (T4).
GOST ‘R’ Certification: 1Exd IIB T4/T5/T6. –55°C to +55°C (T5).
GOST ‘K’ Certification: Exd IIB T4/T5/T6. –55°C to +40°C (T6).
Chinese (CSQT) Certification: Exd IIB T5/T6. UL –55°C to +70°C (hazardous locations).
Brazilian (Inmetro) Certification: BR-Ex d IIB T4/T5/T6.
–55°C to +55°C (ordinary locations).
Material: Body: – Glass reinforced polyester (GRP).
Lens: – Glass. Ingress Protection: IP66 & IP67.
Cover Screws + Backstrap: – Stainless steel 316.
Fire Retardancy: GRP is fire retardant to ISO 1210.
Finish: Natural black or painted to customer specification.
Earth Continuity: Optional for metal glands provided via a brass
DC AC50/60 Hz plate. (Not available for UL version).
Voltage 24 110 240 Terminals: 6 x 2.5mm2.
XB11
Tube Energy Telephone initiation: Initiation by telephone ringing tone.
(Joules) 5 5 5
Labels: Duty/Tag Label optional.
Peak Current
Consumption (mA) 320 100 60 Entries: 2 x 20mm ISO EExd.
Effective 2 x ½" NPT UL.
Intensity (Cd) 29 29 29 Note: ATEX/UL Dual Listed unit has up to 2 x ½"
Peak Intensity (Cd) 22213 22213 22213 NPT entries only.
Power Consumption Beacon/Sounder Unit: The beacon may be combined with an MEDC sounder
(Watts) 8 11 14.4
to create a visual/audible alarm.
NOTE: The Cd figures are for a clear lens @ 1Hz flash rate.
Contact MEDC for price and specification.
Ordering Requirements
The following code is designed to help in the selection of the correct unit. Build up the reference number by inserting the code for each
component into the appropriate box. For standard products, available ex-stock, contact sales office for details.
Flash Lens Lens Unit Earth Tag/Duty Unit
Certification Voltage Rate Colour Guard Fixing Continuity Label Options Finish
XB11
Certification Code Colour Code Guard Code Label Code Option Code
Uncertified W Red R None N None N *Telephone initiate T
BASEEFA B Blue B Yes Y Yes Y   Blanking Plug P
UL UL Green G (Please specify)   None N
UL (Ordinary location) UW Unit Fixing Code
Amber A *Telephone option not  
ATEX/UL Dual Listed AU
GOST ‘R’ G Yellow Y Direct Mounting D   available in UL version.
GOST ‘K’ K Clear C Backstrap B
Finish Code
Chinese (CQST) Q
Inmetro DM Continuity* Code Natural Black N
Flash Rate Code Red R
Voltage Code 60/min 06 None N Blue B
Yes Y Yellow Y
24V d.c. 024 Other flash rates Grey G
48V d.c. 048 available, please specify. *Earth continuity not White W
110V a.c. 110 available in UL or Dual Special Finish S
230V a.c. 230 Listed versions.
240V a.c.   240
Other voltages available,
please specify.

All the above specifications, dimensions, weights and tolerances are nominal (typical) and MEDC reserve
the right to vary all data without prior notice. No liability is accepted for any consequence of use.
Homepage Previous Document
11/08
 SOUNDERS – Up to 118 dB(A) ATEX
EExd(e), Weatherproof
DB3 Range GOST

Now
VNI
IPO
App
rove
d

Sounder/Beacon
Combination Unit

Introduction H Zone 1, Zone 2 and non-Ex use.

This range of light weight all GRP, flameproof sounders is H EExde IIC T5.
H ATEX approved, Ex II 2GD.
intended for use in potentially explosive gas and dust H Optional Exe terminal chamber.
atmospheres and has been designed with high ingress H BASEEFA certified.
protection to cope with the harsh environmental conditions H UL Listed for USA and Canada
found offshore and onshore in the oil, gas and – Hazardous locations:
petrochemical industries. Class I, Div 2, Groups A-D.
Class II, Div 2, Groups F & G
The flamepaths, flare and the body, are manufactured Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIC T4.
completely from a UV stable glass reinforced polyester. – Ordinary locations: Audible-Signal Device.
Stainless steel screws and sinter are incorporated thus H GOST ‘R’ & ‘K’ certified.
H Chinese (CQST) certified.
ensuring a corrosion free product. A tapered flamepath is H Australian (SAA) certified.
used to overcome the problems of assembly of parallel H Brazilian (Inmetro) certified.
spigot flamepaths. H IP66 and IP67.
H *Certified temperature –55°C to +70°C.
An optional Exe terminal chamber is available. H All GRP corrosion free flamepaths.
An uncertified version is available for use in non-explosive H Up to 118dBA output.
H Integral volume control.
atmospheres.
H 27 tones, user selectable.
H Tones comply with UK00A/PFEER guidelines.
H Two tones may be switched via the external voltage
supply – now available in AC and DC versions.
H Tones may be programmed to customer specification.
H d.c. version accepts any voltage between12V d.c. and
48V d.c.
H End of line resistor option.
H Sounder/Beacon Combination Unit available.
*Depending on version.
MEDC Ltd, Colliery Road, MEDC International, 5829 West Sam Houston Parkway, MEDC Norway, Auglaendsmyraa 6,
Pinxton, Nottingham NG16 6JF, UK. North, Suite 1005, Houston, Texas 77041, USA. 4016, Stavanger, Norge.
Tel: +44 (0)1773 864100 Tel: +1 (713) 937 9772 Tel: +47 913 92 289
Fax: +44 (0)1773 582800 Fax: +1 (713) 937 9773 Fax: +47 914 46 030

Sales Enq. Fax: +44 (0)1773 582830 Sales Orders Fax: +44 (0)1773 582832
E-Mail: sales@medc.com  Web: www.medc.com
6DS094/Q

Homepage Previous Document

 Specification
Certification: CENELEC EN50014, 18, 19.
BASEEFA Cert. No. BAS00ATEX2097X, EExd IIC.
BASEEFA Cert. No. BAS00ATEX2098X, EExde IIC.
Zones 1 and 2.
UL Listed for USA and Canada
– Hazardous locations:
Class I, Div 2, Groups A-D.
Class II, Div 2, Groups F & G.
Class I Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIC T4.
Listing No: E203310.
– Ordinary locations: Audible-Signal Device.
Listing No. S8116.
Refer to UL data sheet at rear of catalogue for complete information.
GOST ‘R’ Certification: 1Exd IIC T4 & 1Exde IIC T4.
Russian Fire Alarm (VNIIPO) Approved.
GOST ‘K’ Certification: Exd IIC T4.
Chinese (CQST) Certification: Exd IIC T4.
Brazilian (Inmetro) Certification: BR-Ex d IIC T5/T4/T135°C.
BR-Ex de IIC T5/T4/T135°C.
Material: Body & horn in anti-static, UV stable, glass reinforced polyester.
Swivel bracket & captive cover screws in stainless steel.
Finish: Body and horn, natural black or epoxy paint coated to client’s
colour requirements.
Sound Output: Long Flare: 115dB(A) ± 3dB(A) (tone dependent).
Short Flare: 108dB(A) ± 3dB(A) (tone dependent).
Volume Control: *Nominal Output (dBA) Input Current (mA)
93 50
105 100
Terminals: 4 x 2.5mm2 (a.c.), 6 x 2.5mm2 (d.c.). 108 150
111 200
Earth Continuity: Included on EExde version. 112 250
Mounting: Stainless steel bracket with ratchet facility. 114 300
115 350
Labels: Duty and tag labels optional.
*Output measured with 24V input voltage. Tone set to 970Hz continuous.
Cable Entries: Up to 2 x 20mm EExd 2 x 20mm EExe. Weight: 6.0kg approx. dependent on model (+0.5kg for EExe).
Up to 2 x 1/2" NPT UL. Certified EExd EExde UL GOST ‘R’&‘K’ Exd GOST ‘R’ Exde Chinese Exd
Note: ATEX/UL Dual Listed version up to 2x /2" Temperature:
1

NPT or 2xM20 via adapter (fitted). DB3 & DB3P -20°C to -20°C to -55°C to -20°C to -20°C to -20C to
+70°C +45°C +70°C +50°C +40°C +55°C
Tone Selection: 27 user selectable tones. DB3L & DB3LP -55°C to -55°C to n/a -55°C to -55°C to n/a
Sounder/Beacon Unit: The DB3 may be combined with an MEDC beacon +55°C +70°C +55°C +55°C
to create a combined audio/visual alarm. Ingress Protection: IP66 and IP67.
Contact MEDC for price and specification Fire Retardancy: GRP is fire retardant to ISO 1210.
Two Stage Unit DB3P: Switchable between two tones: Voltage: Up to 48V d.c. Up to 254V a.c.
D.C. (i) Reversing the polarity of the supply, or Current V I
(ii) by a 3 wire common +ve system, switching Consumption: 12V d.c. 760mA
between the two –ve lines. 24V d.c. 380mA
A.C. (iii) Closing/opening connection between 2 terminals 48V d.c. 190mA
e.g. by using a volt free relay contact at the panel. 110V a.c 135mA
2 tones must be specified at time of order. 120V a.c.   124mA
3/4 Tone Unit: Remote 3 or 4 tone available – contact sales office 220V a.c.   68mA
for details. 230V a.c. 65mA
240V a.c.   62mA
Ordering Requirements 254V a.c.   59mA

The following code is designed to help in selection of the correct unit. Build up the reference number by inserting the code for each
component into the appropriate box. For standard products, available ex-stock, contact sales office for details.
Unit Type Certification Voltage Labels Entries Options Colour

Type Details Type Code Voltage Code Label Code Features Code
DB3 Standard unit Uncertified W 12V - 48V d.c. 048 Duty D* None N
DB3P Two stage EExd D 110V a.c. 110 Tag T* End of line resistor E*
*DB3L Low temp. standard unit EExde E 120V a.c. 120 None N Special tone S
*DB3LP Low temp. two stage UL Listed *UL 220V a.c. 220 *Please specify *State value.
UL (Ordinary Locations) UW 230V a.c. 230 wording
*Available unpainted only. ATEX/UL Dual Listed AU 240V a.c. 240
GOST ‘R’ Exd DG 254V a.c. 254
GOST ‘R’ Exde EG Entries Code Colour Code
GOST ‘K’ Exd DK 1 x 20mm (EExd) 1B Natural Black N 
Chinese (CQST) Q 2 x 20mm (EExd/EExde) 2B Red R 
Inmetro Exd DM 1 x 1
/2" NPT (UL only) 1C Special S*
Inmetro Exde EM 2 x 1
/2" NPT (UL only) 2C *Please specify
*Not all options are available UL listed.
All the above specifications, dimensions, weights and tolerances are nominal (typical) and MEDC reserve the right to vary
all data without prior notice. No liability is accepted for any consequence of use, consult sales office for clarification.

10/08

Homepage Previous Document

Pilot and Signaling Devices Section 9
Heavy-Duty 22.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight Pilot Lights
C-2000
Push to Test
600 VAC Max., 300 VDC Max.
10 Amps Continuous AC, 2.5 Amps Continuous DC

Selection Process
Select Select power Select contact Select nameplate,
assembled + supply from pages + block from + if required, from = Complete unit
device below 9-100 & 9-101 page 9-101 pages 9-103 to 9-105

Push to Test Operators

List Price
Push-to-Test Pilot Lights
Terminal type Power Supply Type Operator Style Product Number
0GO-10GC
Screw Terminal Full Voltage Round Polished Chrome P9CPL*SDN12NC† $48.50
Screw Terminal Full Voltage Round Satin Chrome P9MPL*SDN12NC† $48.50
Screw Terminal Full Voltage Round Engineered Plastic P9XPL*SDN12NC† $48.50
Screw Terminal Full Voltage Square Engineered Plastic P9SPL*SDN12NC† $48.50
Quick-Connect Terminal Full Voltage Round Polished Chrome P9CPL*SDN45ND† $48.50
Quick-Connect Terminal Full Voltage Round Satin Chrome P9MPL*SDN45ND† $48.50
Quick-Connect Terminal Full Voltage Round Engineered Plastic P9XPL*SDN45ND† $48.50
Quick-Connect Terminal Full Voltage Square Engineered Plastic P9SPL*SDN45ND† $48.50
Screw Terminal Transformer Round Polished Chrome P9CPL*SDN30NH† $70.00
Screw Terminal Transformer Round Satin Chrome P9MPL*SDN30NH† $70.00
Screw Terminal Transformer Round Engineered Plastic P9XPL*SDN30NH† $70.00 Signal Voltage
Screw Terminal Transformer Square Engineered Plastic P9SPL*SDN30NH† $70.00
Line Voltage
Screw Terminal Resistor Round Polished Chrome P9CPL*SDN30NK† $60.00
Screw Terminal Resistor Round Satin Chrome P9MPL*SDN30NK† $60.00 4 2 Contact Block
Screw Terminal Resistor Round Engineered Plastic P9XPL*SDN30NK† $60.00 NO
NC
Screw Terminal Resistor Square Engineered Plastic P9SPL*SDN30NK† $60.00 3 1
Transformer

Replace asterisk (*) in product number with color code digit from Colors table below. Common
*Colors (Omit transformer for full voltage)
Color Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange Clear No Lens1
*Color Code R V G L B A I 0
Schematic Diagram
1When ordering Push-to-Test pilot light with no lens, also change eighth digit in product number from D to O and
deduct $1.00 from List Price. Color lenses and diffusers are listed separately on page 9-112.

Replace dagger (†) in product number with power supply code from corresponding
section of power supplies table below.
†Power Supplies
Incandescent Bulb LED Bulb
†Power Supply Type Lamp †Power Supply Code †Power Supply Code2
6V AI AL
12 V BI BL
24 V DI DL
Full Voltage (ac/dc) 48 V GI GL
60 V HI —
120 V (ac only) — JL
130 V LI —
48 V GI GL
60 V HI HL
110-120 V JI JL
220-250 V NI NL
Transformer (ac only) 277 V RI RL
380 V UI UL
415-440 V WI WL
480-500 V YI YL
550-600 V ZI ZL
Standard Resistor (ac/dc) 110-120 V JI —
220-240 V NI —
2When ordering operator with LED and $15.00 to List Price, GO-10GC. Available for red, green, yellow, white and
orange lenses only.

Outlines and Dimensions: See page 9-95

Accessories: See page 9-110 to 9-119
Technical Data: See page 9-127 to 9-133

9-94 Control Catalog www.geelectrical.com Rev. 1/08

Prices and data subject
Homepage Previous Document
to change without notice
 Pilot and Signaling Devices Section 9
Heavy-Duty 22.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight Pilot Lights
C-2000
Standard
in.
Outlines and Dimensions (mm) (For Estimating Only)
600 VAC Max., 300 VDC Max.
10 Amps Continuous AC, 2.5 Amps Continuous DC

Round Indicating Light Square Indicating Light

Round Indicating Light—Glass Lens Typical Back Side View

Round Indicating Light—Unibloc

Publications and Reference: See Section 17 for a

complete list of additional product-related publications

Rev. 1/08 www.geelectrical.com Control Catalog 9-95

Prices and data subject
Homepage
to change without notice
Previous Document
Pilot and Signaling Devices Section 9
Heavy-Duty 22.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight Selector Switches
C-2000
2-Position Key Operated Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated
600 VAC Max., 300 VDC Max.
10 Amps Continuous AC, 2.5 Amps Continuous DC

Selection Process
Select
operator + Select contact block(s) from + Select nameplate, if required, = Complete Unit
below page 9-101 from pages 9-103 to 9-105

2-Position Key Selector Switches

Key 2-Position
List Price
Position Type Release Type Cam Code Key Removal Product Number GO-10GC
2-Position Maintained D Left P9#SCD0A† $43.50
2-Position Maintained D Right P9#SCD0E† $43.50
2-Position Maintained D Left and Right P9#SCD0K† $43.50
2-Position Maintained I Center P9#SCI0C† $43.50
2-Position Maintained I Right P9#SCI0E† $43.50
2-Position Maintained I Center and Right P9#SCI0N† $43.50
2-Position Maintained H Left P9#SCH0A† $43.50
2-Position Maintained H Center P9#SCH0C† $43.50
2-Position Maintained H Left and Center P9#SCH0H† $43.50
2-Position Spring Return L  C H Center P9#SCH1C† $56.50
2-Position Spring Return C  R D Left P9#SCD5A† $56.50
2-Position Spring Return C  R I Center P9#SCI5C† $56.50

Replace pound sign (#) in product number with style code from Styles table.
#Styles
Style Polished Chrome Satin Chrome Round Engineered Plastic Square Engineered Plastic
#Style Code C M X S

Cams
Note position of contact block for cam selection.
Quick-Connect
Screw Terminal Contact Block Terminal Contact Block Operator Positions
Cam Code Position 1 Position 2 Position 1 Position 2
0 — X — P9B10VN — P9B10FN
D X — 0 P9B01VN — P9B01FN —
0 — X
P9B11VN — — —
X — 0
— 0 X — P9B10VN — P9B10FN
I — X 0 P9B01VN — P9B01FN —
— 0 X
P9B11VN — — —
— X 0
X 0 — — P9B10VN — P9B10FN
H 0 X — P9B01VN — P9B01FN —
X 0 —
P9B11VN — — —
0 X — Contact Block Positions
(viewed from rear)

Replace dagger (†) in product number with key code from Keys table.
†Keys
Key Std. Special1
Number 3095 9901 9902 9903 9904 9905 9910 9916 9919 3353 R455 (Ronis)
†Key Code 95 01 02 03 04 05 10 16 19 53 55
Key Colored1
Number 73033 (Yellow) 73034 (Black) 73037 (Red) 73038 (Blue) 73040 (Orange)
†Key Code 33 34 37 38 40
1To order with other than standard key code (95), add $4.00 to List Price, GO-10GC.
Minimum quantity order on Key Codes 95, 55 and 33 is one; for all others minimum quantity order is ten.

Outlines and Dimensions: See page 9-90

Accessories: See page 9-110 to 9-119
Technical Data: See page 9-127 to 9-133

9-86 Control Catalog www.geelectrical.com Rev. 1/08

Prices and data subject
Homepage Previous Document
to change without notice
 Pilot and Signaling Devices Section 9
Heavy-Duty 22.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight Accessories
C-2000
Power Supplies and Contact Blocks
600 VAC Max., 300 VDC Max.
10 Amps Continuous AC, 2.5 Amps Continuous DC

Resistor Power Supplies AC/DC Contact Blocks

Lamp List Terminal Contact Block Contact Product List Price
Bulb Terminal Operational Product Price type Type Configuration Number GO-10GC
Type type Mode Voltage Number GO-10GC
Screw Terminal Standard 1NO P9B10VN $7.50
Incandescent Screw Terminal Steady 110-120V P9PRNVJ $35.00 Screw Terminal Standard 1NC P9B01VN $7.50
Incandescent Screw Terminal Steady 220-240V P9PRNVN $35.00 Screw Terminal Standard 1NO-1NC P9B11VN $15.00
Incandescent Screw Terminal Steady with Diode 220-240V P9PRDVN $35.00 Screw Terminal Standard 2NO P9B20VN $15.00
Incandescent Screw Terminal Steady Long Life 110-120V P9PRLVJ $35.00 Screw Terminal Standard 2NC P9B02VN $15.00
Incandescent Screw Terminal Panel Test 220-240V P9PRTVN $50.00 Screw Terminal Early Make 1NO P9B10VA $7.50
Screw Terminal Late Opening 1NC P9B01VR $7.50
Screw Terminal Base Mount 1NO P9B10BN $7.50
Screw Terminal Base Mount 1NC P9B01BN $7.50
Full-Voltage Power Supplies Low-Level Energy (Reed) Screw Terminal 0.1-30 sec. Time-Delay 1NO-1NC P9B11T3 $75.00
Lamp List Screw Terminal 10-180 sec. Time-Delay 1NO-1NC P9B11T8 $75.00
Bulb Terminal Operational Product Price Quick-Connect Terminal Standard 1NO P9B10FN $7.50
Type type Mode Voltage Number GO-10GC Quick-Connect Terminal Standard 1NC P9B01FN $7.50
Quick-Connect Terminal Reed 1NO P9B10FH2 $18.00
Incandescent Quick-Connect Terminal Steady – P9PDHF1 $17.50
Quick-Connect Terminal Reed 1NC P9B01FH2 $18.00
1For use with Reed Logic flange only.
2Requires special flange (P9ACFSM).
Order on page 9-118.

Publications and Reference: See Section 17 for a Outlines and Dimensions: See page 9-102
complete list of additional product-related publications

Rev. 1/08 www.geelectrical.com Control Catalog 9-101

Prices and data subject
Homepage
to change without notice
Previous Document
 RELAYS & CONTACTORS
MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAYS
MR SERIES

DESCRIPTION
The MR Series Multi-voltage Control Relays offer
SPDT or DPDT contacts, which may be operated by
multiple input control voltages.

Each relay section contains a red LED, which indicates

the relay coil is energized. Relay sections may be
snapped apart from standard four- or eight-section
assemblies and used independently.
MR-101/T
These relays are ideal for applications where local or MR-601/T MR-801/S
remote contacts are required for control of electrical
loads and general-purpose switching. They are suitable
for use with HVAC, temperature control, fire alarm,
security, building automation, and lighting control sys-
tems.

RELAYS & CONTACTORS

FEATURES
• Multi-voltage input, SPDT or DPDT control relays
MR-101/C MR-104/T
• LED indication when relay is energized
• Snap-apart relay sections for standard four- or • Dust-proof housing with LED viewing holes on
eight-section assemblies enclosed models
• Track, spacer, or enclosed mounting options • Relays rated for 10 million mechanical operations

SPECIFICATIONS*
SERIES
MR-100 MR-200 MR-600 MR-800
Relay sections (snap-apart) 1 or 4 1, 4, or 8
Voltage input 24 VDC @ 18 mA 24 VDC @ 40 mA 24 VAC, 24 VDC 24 VDC @ 22 mA
24 VAC @ 18 mA 24 VAC @ 40 mA @15 mA 24 VAC @ 60 mA
120 VAC @ 18 mA 120 VAC @ 40 mA 120 VAC @ 20 mA
230 VAC @ 18 mA 230 VAC @ 40 mA
Contact type SPDT DPDT SPDT
Contact rating 10A Res. @ 120 VAC 10A @ 120 VAC 10A @ 120 VAC
7A Res. @ 230 VAC/28 VDC 7A @ 24 VDC 7A @ 30 VDC/277 VAC
N.O.: 1/6 hp @ 120 VAC 1/4 hp @ 120 VAC
N.C.: 1/8 hp @ 120 VAC 1/3 hp @ 230 VAC
Temp 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)

Indication LED
Mounting Track or enclosed Track Track or spacer
Wiring Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG terminals
Enclosure option 18-gauge metal back, ABS-94VO plastic cover
–
1/2" knockouts
Manual override – On/Auto/Off Switch –
Dimensions 3.25"H x 2.13"W x 1.5"D (8.25 x 5.39 x 3.81 cm) 3.5"H x 2.13"W x 1.38"D (8.9 x 5.4 x 3.5 cm)
Enclosure dimensions 5.13"H x 3.13"W x 2.5"D (13 .46 x 7.95 x 6.35 cm) or
5.13"H x 9.5"W x 2.5"D (13.46 x 24.13 x 6.35 cm) –
Agency approvals UL-recognized component, File #S3403 UL-recognized component,
Enclosed model UL listed, File #S3403 File #S3403
* Specifications are for each relay section.

Homepage
2008 KELE CATALOG • www.kele.com • USA 888-397-5353 • International 901-382-6084
Previous Document
709
 RELAYS & CONTACTORS
MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAYS
MR SERIES

WIRING

SPDT Contacts DPDT Contacts SPDT Contacts SPDT Contacts

10A @ 10A @ 10A @ 10A @
120 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC

NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO
Relay Relay
Relay Relay Energized Energized
Energized Energized Indicator Indicator
Indicator Indicator

AUTO
OFF
ON
SUP CTL COM
Input Input Supply Ø 24 115
24 VAC Input
Control Control
Ø 18/24 115 230 Ø 18/24 115 230 24 VDC Control
Voltage Voltage
Voltage
24 VAC/VDC
24 VDC (–) (+) 24 VDC (–) (+) Control
24 VDC
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

Input (–) (+)

24 VAC A.C. A.C. 24 VAC A.C. A.C. 24 VAC
Common AC AC
120 VAC N H 120 VAC N H 120 VAC
Note: Multisection relays MR-604 N H
230 VAC L2 L1 230 VAC L2 L1 and MR-608 have all supply Terminal strip connections
Terminal strip connections Terminal strip connections and all common terminals
factory jumpered together.

MR-101, -104 MR-201, -204 MR-601, -604, -608 MR-801, -804, -808

ORDERING INFORMATION

COIL VOLTAGE SECTIONS MOUNTING SWITCH AGENCY APPROVALS

On/Auto/Off
DPDT (10A)
SPDT (10A)

Enclosure
(included)

(included)

(included)

Override
Spacers
120 VAC

230 VAC

Manual
24 VDC

24 VAC

CSFM
Track

MEA
UL

MODEL
MR-101/T X X X X 1 X Recognized X
MR-101/C X X X X 1 X X Listed X X
MR-104/T X X X X 4 X Recognized X
MR-104/C X X X X 4 X X Listed X X
MR-201/T X X X X 1 X Recognized X
MR-201/C X X X X 1 X X Listed X X
MR-204/T X X X X 4 X Recognized X
MR-204/C X X X X 4 X X Listed X X
MR-601/T X X 1 X X Recognized
MR-604/T X X 4 X X Recognized
MR-608/T X X 8 X X Recognized
MR-801/T X X X 1 X Recognized
MR-801/S X X X 1 X Recognized
MR-804/T X X X 4 X Recognized
MR-804/S X X X 4 X Recognized
MR-808/T X X X 8 X Recognized
MR-808/S X X X 8 X Recognized

710
Homepage
2008 KELE CATALOG • www.kele.com • USA 888-397-5353 • International 901-382-6084
Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
 Instructions 95-8444
Infiniti ® Gas Transmitter
U9500

7.1 4/09 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table Of Contents

APPLICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

important safety notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Typical System Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Controller/Signal Receiver Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sensor Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

DISPLAY AND CONTROLS, OPTIONS, DEFAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Display and Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Programming Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Infinity Sensor Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infinity Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

MODES OF OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

STARTUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

SETPOINT DISPLAY MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

SETUP PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

CALIBRATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Calibration Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Auto Calibration Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Manual Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Calibration Procedure for Infiniti with C7065E O2 Sensor. . . . . . . 26
CGS Sensor Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Sensor and Hydrophobic Filter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

SPARE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

APPENDIX A — FM APPROVAL DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

APPENDIX B — CSA CERTIFICATION DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

APPENDIX C — CE MARK / ATEX CERTIFICATION-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Note: For information regarding MOS H2S please refer to form: 95-8532

Homepage Previous Document

 INSTRUCTIONS

Infiniti® Gas Transmitter

U9500

APPLICATION
The model U9500 Infiniti® Transmitter family is designed
for use with Det-Tronics gas sensors for detection of
hazardous gases.

Gas concentrations are displayed on an alphanumeric

display in %LFL or ppm, depending on the type of gas
being detected. The transmitter provides a user selectable
isolated/non-isolated 4 to 20 milliampere output signal
that corresponds to the detected gas concentration. An
optional relay package is available to provide contact
outputs for alarm and fault conditions.

The electronics of the Infiniti transmitter is contained in

an explosion-proof housing. The transmitter is used with
a single sensor, which may be either coupled directly
with the Infiniti housing, or remotely located using a
sensor termination box. The Infiniti offers non-intrusive
calibration by actuating a magnetic reed switch with a
hand-held magnet. It is not necessary to remove the
housing cover to actuate the magnetic reed switch.

Typical Infiniti applications include: SPECIFICATIONS

–– Confined spaces where gas/vapor leaks can
INPUT VOLTAGE—
concentrate to explosive or toxic levels or where
24 vdc. Operating range is 16 to 32 vdc including
oxygen levels need to be monitored (enclosed
ripple.
processing areas).
–– Known high risk leak locations (points within
processing areas, compressor buildings). POWER CONSUMPTION WITH SENSOR—
–– General open area coverage (storage areas). See Table 1.

CURRENT OUTPUT—
FEATURES
Linear 4 to 20 mA output.
–– Non-intrusive calibration using the internal magnetic Maximum loop resistance is 600 ohms at 20 to 32 vdc.
reed switch, or an externally located pushbutton (not Selectable isolated or non-isolated operation.
included). Factory set 2.0 mA output indicates unit is in Calibration
–– Automatic fault diagnostics and graphic message mode (field adjustable).
annunciation. Less than 1.0 mA output indicates fault condition.
–– Optional relay package provides three alarm relays
(high, low, and auxiliary) and one fault relay. DISPLAY—
–– Models available for use with catalytic combustible Eight character alphanumeric display indicates power
sensor, point infrared combustible, electrochemical on, gas concentration, alarm and fault conditions. It also
(EC) H2S, and CO, CL2, SO2, and O2 electrochemical enables field adjustment of alarm setpoints, calibration
sensors. gas concentration, full scale measurement range and
–– Variety of multi-port enclosures available. gas type to be detected.

7.1 ©Detector Electronics Corporation 2009 4/09 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 1—Power Consumption with Sensor

Type Infiniti with alarm relays Infiniti without alarm relays

(sensor connected, 24 VDC+ input) (sensor connected, 24 VDC+ input)
Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Toxic and Oxygen 3 Watts 5 Watts 2.1 Watts 2.4 Watts
Combustible 4.6 Watts 6.5 Watts 3.5 Watts 4 Watts
PIR 9400 PointWatch 8.1 Watts 10.0 Watts 7.0 Watts 7.5 Watts
PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse 7.6 Watts 12.4 Watts 6.5 Watts 9.9 Watts

DETECTION RANGE— Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):

Hydrocarbon: 0 to 100% LFL for PointWatch IR The Infiniti Transmitter types U9500A and U9500H have
detector. (FM/CSA verified) an ambient temperature rating for performance of –40°C
Catalytic: 0 to 100% LFL. to +75°C.
Hydrogen Sulfide 0 to 100 ppm, 0 to 50 ppm, 0 to 20 ppm
(electrochemical) (FM/CSA verified) The performance of the Infiniti Transmitter types U9500B,
U9500C, U9500D, U9500E, U9500F and U9500G
Chlorine: 0 to 10 ppm. as a safety device in accordance with harmonized
Oxygen: 0 to 25% by volume. gas performance standards is not covered by this
Carbon Monoxide: 0 to 100 ppm, 0 to 500 ppm, 0 to certificate.
1000 ppm.
Sulfur Dioxide: 0 to 100 ppm. Russian: 1Ex d IIC T6 (Tamb = –60°C to +50°C),
T5 (Tamb = –60°C to +65°C),
RELAY CONTACTS (OPTIONAL)— T4 (Tamb = –60°C to +75°C)
Three Alarm relays: Form C, 5 amperes at 30 vdc.
Selectable normally energized or de-energized as a WIRING—
group. Low, auxiliary and high alarm relay contacts are Power: 18 AWG minimum is recommended for power
selectable as a group for latching or non-latching. wiring to the transmitter. Larger diameter wire may
be required to maintain a minimum of 16 vdc at the
Warning transmitter for all operating conditions for all sensors
When in non-latching mode, the control device except PointWatch. A minimum of 18 vdc is required at the
must latch the alarm output. transmitter for all operating conditions for the PointWatch
sensor. Maximum wire size for terminals is 12 AWG.
One Fault relay: Form C, 5 amperes at 30 vdc. Normally
energized for no fault condition with power applied to SHIPPING WEIGHT (Transmitter and Junction Box)—
device. Aluminum: 4.15 pounds (1.88 kilograms).
Stainless steel: 10.5 pounds (4.76 kilograms).
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C). ENCLOSURE MATERIAL—
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). Epoxy coated 356 alloy aluminum or 316 stainless steel.

CERTIFICATIONS— DIMENSIONS—
FM: Refer to Appendix A for details. See Figure 1.

CSA: Refer to Appendix B for details.

CENELEC/CE: Refer to Appendix C for additional details.

0539 II 2 GD
FM ®

EEx d IIC T5–T6

DEMKO 02 ATEX 131327 X
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +60°C).
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C).
IP66.

7.1 2 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 5.86
(14.9)
5.2
(13.2)
2.7
(6.9)

6.57
(16.7)
4.7
(11.9)

3.46
(8.8)

1.28
(3.3)
A2307

Figure 1—Infiniti Transmitter Dimensions in Inches (Centimeters)

DESCRIPTION In addition, Detector Electronics offers a special optional

enclosure with a pushbutton pre-installed within a multi-
The U9500 is a single channel gas detection device. In port electrical enclosure for customers who do not prefer
addition to the standard 4-20 mA analog signal output, magnetic switches.
the U9500 offers 4 optional relay outputs for fault and
alarm indications. The 4 outputs are: fault, high alarm, The U9500 is compatible with the entire Detector
low alarm, and auxiliary alarm. The relays have form C Electronics sensor family. In some cases, special
(SPDT) contacts. Low, auxiliary and high alarm relay personality cards are required to ensure proper
contacts are selectable as a group for latching or non- operation with a specific sensor, including the Det-
latching operation. During normal operation, the fault Tronics Combustible Gas sensors. The proper U9500
relay is non-latching, but for initialization faults, the fault model must be ordered by the customer to ensure
relay latches. The alarm relays are also selectable, as a proper operation and markings for the desired sensor
group, for normally energized or de-energized with no type. Refer to Appendix C for combustible gas sensor
alarms. The fault relay is always normally energized for CE/ATEX ratings and installation details. Refer to form
no fault. 90-1041 for specification details.

NOTE Modes of operation

Since the relays can be programmed to be either The U9500 has three main operating modes:
energized or de-energized on alarms, the term –– Normal
“actuate” is used to indicate that the output is in an –– Calibrate
alarm condition. –– Setup (also called Configuration).
Normal mode is the default mode, no buttons pushed.
The U9500 provides an eight character, single line, alpha-
numeric LCD display. The U9500 has four switches Three minor modes also exist:
located on the display. The visible three switches are –– Setpoint display
single pole, normally open push buttons, and are –– Reset
designated as: Setup\accept, increase, and decrease. –– Power up.
The fourth switch is a magnetic reed switch, designated
cal/reset, which is used by the customer for non-intrusive
calibrations and for resetting of the U9500.

Two additional options are available for resetting the

transmitter. A user supplied switch can be wired to the
transmitter terminal block and used to reset the device
from a remote location.

7.1 3 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

important safety notes INSTALLATION
WARNING WIRING REQUIREMENTS
Do not apply power to the system with the • Install per local installation practices and in
enclosure cover removed unless the area has accordance with local authority having jurisdiction.
been de-classified. Do not open the enclosure in a
hazardous area when power is applied. • See Figures 2 and 3 for wiring size and maximum
distance from the power supply to the transmitter.
CAUTION
The wiring procedures in this manual are intended IMPORTANT
to ensure proper functioning of the device under Proper installation practices must be followed
normal conditions. However, because of the to ensure that condensation does not enter the
many variations in wiring codes and regulations, junction box and interfere with the electronic
total compliance to these ordinances cannot be circuitry. Refer to local installation codes.
guaranteed. Be certain that all wiring complies
with applicable regulations that relate to the WIRING PROCEDURE
installation of electrical equipment in a hazardous
area. If in doubt, consult a qualified official before The following procedure should be used for installing
wiring the system. and wiring the Infiniti Transmitter.

The Infiniti contains semiconductor devices Refer to these figures and table when installing and
that are susceptible to damage by electrostatic wiring the Infiniti:
discharge. An electrostatic charge can build up on
the skin and discharge when an object is touched. Figure 1 — Infiniti Mounting Dimensions
Therefore, use caution when handling the device,
taking care not to touch the terminals or electronic Figure 2 — Transmitter Wiring Requirements for
components. Observe the normal precautions for Toxic and Oxygen Models with Relays
handling electrostatic sensitive devices. Figure 3 — Transmitter Wiring Requirements for
Combustible Models with Relays
To minimize the risk of damage, handle the Figure 4 — Infiniti Field Wiring Terminal with Relay
transmitter module by the edges only. Do not Option
touch the circuit board, or electronic components. Figure 5 — Infiniti Field Wiring Terminal without
The fault detection circuitry does not monitor the Relay Option
operation of external response equipment or the Figure 6 — Transient Suppression for Inductive
external wiring to these devices. It is important that Loads
these devices be checked periodically to ensure Table 2 — Wiring Size and Maximum Distance from
that they are operational. Transmitter to Sensor (for applications
where a sensor termination box is used)
Exercise caution if an over-range reading is
indicated, since a dangerous condition could exist.
TYPICAL SYSTEM WIRING
Refer to these typical system wiring diagrams for
guidance when installing and wiring the Infiniti:

Figure 7 -— A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter with

a Combustible Gas Sensor, Isolated
Current Output and Relay Outputs
Figure 8 — A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter
with a Toxic Gas/Oxygen Sensor, Non-
Isolated Current Output and Relay
Outputs
Figure 9 — A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter with
a PointWatch Detector and Non-Isolated
Current Output
Figure 10 — A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter with
a PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse Detector
and Non-Isolated Current Output

7.1 4 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

32 32

30 30

28 28

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

26 26

24 24

22 22

20 20

18 18

16 16

14 14
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
A1672
DISTANCE (FEET) A1673 DISTANCE (FEET)

Figure 2—Transmitter Wiring Requirements Figure 3—Transmitter Wiring Requirements

for Toxic and Oxygen Models with Relays for Combustible Gas Model with Relays

1. Install the unit in a location that is best suited to cover 4. Connect the transmitter enclosure to the field wiring
the area to be protected. Whenever practical, the conduit. The enclosure should be electrically
Infiniti should be placed where it is easily accessible connected to earth ground.
for calibration. For proper operation, sensors should 5. Attach the sensor to the proper entry on the transmitter
be pointing down, except for PointWatch, which must enclosure. It is recommended that a layer of teflon
be mounted horizontally. See Figure 1 for mounting tape be applied to the sensor threading. Route the
dimensions. wires through the entry, and tighten the sensor to the
NOTE enclosure to ensure an explosion-proof installation.
When used with the PointWatch infrared Do not overtighten.
hydrocarbon gas detector, a 1/4 inch spacer is
required between the enclosure and the mounting IMPORTANT
surface to allow adequate room for the detector To ease maintenance, periodically apply
and calibration windshield, if required. a generous amount of Lubriplate grease (part
number 102868-001) to the internal threads on the
2. Remove the transmitter from its packing material and junction box cover using an application tool. Do
note the location of the field wiring terminals and (on not use any silicon based products, since some
the catalytic sensor transmitters only) the location of materials can cause irreversible damage to the
a small sensor connection plug on the side opposite sensing element in the gas sensor.
the field wiring terminals.
3. Remove the cover from the enclosure. The transmitter 6. Slide the transmitter module into the bracket,
module slides into the mounting bracket within the being careful to route field and sensor wires to the
enclosure and all field and sensor wiring connects appropriate location within the enclosure for easy
to this module. connection to the transmitter module. Ensure that
the transmitter display and pushbuttons (at the top)
–– For catalytic combustible gas transmitters, the are oriented correctly.
sensor connects to a small plug on one side of the
transmitter and all field wiring connects to terminals
on the other side. CAUTION
Wires can become pinched between the cover
–– For all other gas transmitters, the sensor and field and base if they are not properly tucked down
wiring all connect to the terminal block on one side inside the enclosure.
of the transmitter module.

7.1 5 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

7. Fasten the transmitter module to the mounting External relays, solenoids, motors, or other devices
bracket with the two captive screws located inside that can cause inductive transients should be transient
the notch on either side of the top of the transmitter. suppressed. Place a diode across the coil for dc devices.
Remove the wire clip and set it aside. See Figure 6.
8. See Figures 4 and 5 for field wiring terminal
11. An external reset switch can be wired as shown in
designation.
Figures 7, 8, 9 and 10. The use of shielded wire is
9. Connect the power and current output leadwires to recommended for wiring the switch.
the screw terminals on the plug that is provided. See
12. Check all field wiring to ensure that the proper
Figures 7, 8, 9 and 10 for examples of transmitter
connections have been made. Refer to local codes
wiring. Connect the shield to earth ground at the
to be sure wiring and conduit seals are installed
power supply. The panel or field end of the shield
properly.
should not be grounded at the transmitter. Contact
the factory for further assistance.
Warning
10. For Relay models, refer to Figures 7 and 8 when
When in non-latching mode, the control device
connecting external loads to the relay outputs. For
must latch the alarm output.
models without relays, proceed to step 11.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT Wires can become pinched between the cover
Direct connection of 120/240 vac to the relay and base if they are not properly tucked down
terminals inside the transmitter enclosure is inside the enclosure. The wire clip will prevent this
not permitted, since switching relay contacts problem when installed correctly.
can induce electrical noise into the electronic
circuitry, possibly resulting in a false alarm or other 13. Replace the wire clip and place the cover back on
system malfunction. If the application requires the transmitter enclosure.
that ac powered equipment be controlled by the
transmitter, the use of externally located relays is
required.
HIGH RELAY

FAULT RELAY HIGH ALARM RELAY

NC COM NO
NO COM NC
FLT RELAY

NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT

FAULT RELAY HIGH ALARM RELAY
COMMON CONTACT COMMON CONTACT
FAULT RELAY HIGH ALARM RELAY
NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT

*SPARE LOW ALARM RELAY

LOW RELAY
NC COM NO

NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT

S

*SPARE ** POWER LOW ALARM RELAY

POWER
–

COMMON COMMON CONTACT

S

POWER ** POWER LOW ALARM RELAY

POWER
–

COMMON
+

24 VDC + NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT

RESET

POWER EXTERNAL AUXILIARY ALARM RELAY

24 VDC +
+

NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT

NC COM NO

RESET
AUX RELAY

+ 4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERE POINTWATCH AUXILIARY ALARM RELAY

CAL

OUTPUT SIGNAL
PW
+

CALIBRATE COMMON CONTACT

OUT

– 4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERE 4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERE AUXILIARY ALARM RELAY

IN

OUTPUT SIGNAL
–

INPUT SIGNAL NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT

* THE SPARE TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED TOGETHER INTERNALLY

AND ARE NOT CONNECTED TO ANY OTHER TERMINALS INTERNALLY
** THESE TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED INTERNALLY B1904
NO COM NC
FLT RELAY

Figure 4—Field Wiring Terminals, Transmitter with Relays

*SPARE
S

*SPARE ** POWER
POWER
–
S

COMMON
POWER ** POWER
+
POWER
–

COMMON HOT POSITIVE

+

24 VDC +
RESET

POWER

{ }
24 VDC + RELAY EXTERNAL 120 VOLT – V13OLA10A
+

SOLENOIDS RESET GE 1N4004

MOV DCV LOADS
+ 4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERE MOTORS TYPICAL TYPICAL
POINTWATCH 220/240 VOLT – V275LA20A
CAL

OUTPUT SIGNAL
PW
+

INDUCTION DEVICES CALIBRATE

OUT

– 4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERE 4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERE
IN

OUTPUT SIGNAL NEUTRAL NEGATIVE

–

INPUT SIGNAL A0179 – B0179

* THE SPARE TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED TOGETHER INTERNALLY

AND ARE NOT CONNECTED TO ANY OTHER TERMINALS INTERNALLY
** THESE TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED INTERNALLY A1905
Figure 6—Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads

Figure 5—Field Wiring Terminals, Transmitter without Relays

7.1 6 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 FAULT RELAY CONTACTS
SEE NOTES 2, 3

NC COM NO
NO COM NC
FLT RELAY

HIGH RELAY
HIGH ALARM RELAY CONTACTS
EXTERNAL SEE NOTES 2, 4
RESET

NC COM NO
LOW RELAY
S
POWER
LOW ALARM RELAY CONTACTS

–
S
SEE NOTES 2, 4, 5

POWER
–

+
24 VDC +

RESET
SEE NOTE 6
+

NC COM NO
AUX RELAY
AUXILIARY ALARM RELAY CONTACTS

CAL
PW
+
+
OUT
24 VDC + SEE NOTES 2, 4, 5
–

IN
–
– +

SEE NOTE 1 NOTE 1 THE COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR CONNECTS TO A PLUG

4 TO 20 MA
ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE TRANSMITTER FROM THE ELECTRICAL TERMINALS.

NOTE 2 ALL RELAY CONTACT DESIGNATIONS INDICATE RELAY STATE

WITH NO POWER APPLIED — RELAYS DE-ENERGIZED.

NOTE 3 WITH POWER APPLIED AND NO FAULTS DETECTED,

THE FAULT RELAY IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED.

NOTE 4 ALARM RELAYS ARE PROGRAMMABLE AS A GROUP

TO BE EITHER NORMALLY ENERGIZED OR NORMALLY DE-ENERGIZED
COMBUSTIBLE GAS WITH NO ALARMS DETECTED. REFER TO THE "SET-UP"SECTION OF THIS MANUAL.
SENSOR
C1668 NOTE 5 LOW, AUXILIARY AND HIGH ALARM RELAYS ARE PROGRAMMABLE
AS A GROUP FOR LATCHING OR NON-LATCHING OPERATION.

NOTE 6 THESE TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED INTERNALLY.

WARNING: WHEN IN NON-LATCHING MODE, THE CONTROL DEVICE MUST LATCH THE ALARM OUTPUT.

Figure 7—A Typical System - Infiniti Transmitter with Combustible Gas Sensor, Isolated Current Output and Relay Outputs

FAULT RELAY CONTACTS

SEE NOTES 2, 3
HIGH RELAY
NC COM NO
NO COM NC
FLT RELAY

HIGH ALARM RELAY CONTACTS

EXTERNAL SEE NOTES 2, 4
RESET
LOW RELAY
NC COM NO
S

SEE NOTE 6
POWER

LOW ALARM RELAY CONTACTS

–
S

SEE NOTES 2, 4, 5
POWER

–
–

24 VDC +
RESET

+
+

NC COM NO
AUX RELAY

AUXILIARY ALARM RELAY CONTACTS

CAL
PW
+

RED
OUT

SEE NOTES 2, 4, 5
– + BLACK
IN
–

GREEN
4 TO 20 MA SEE NOTE 1
NOTE 1 CONNECT THE GREEN SENSOR LEAD TO THE CHASSIS GROUND LUG
ON THE INSIDE BOTTOM OF THE INFINITI ENCLOSURE.

NOTE 2 ALL RELAY CONTACT DESIGNATIONS INDICATE RELAY STATE

WITH NO POWER APPLIED — RELAYS DE-ENERGIZED.
SENSOR
NOTE 3 WITH POWER APPLIED AND NO FAULTS DETECTED,
THE FAULT RELAY IS NORMALLY ENERGIZED.

NOTE 4 ALARM RELAYS ARE PROGRAMMABLE AS A GROUP

TO BE EITHER NORMALLY ENERGIZED OR NORMALLY DE-ENERGIZED
WITH NO ALARMS DETECTED. REFER TO THE "SET-UP"SECTION OF THIS MANUAL.

B1669 NOTE 5 LOW, AUXILIARY AND HIGH ALARM RELAYS ARE PROGRAMMABLE
AS A GROUP FOR LATCHING OR NON-LATCHING OPERATION.

NOTE 6 THESE TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED INTERNALLY.

WARNING: WHEN IN NON-LATCHING MODE, THE CONTROL DEVICE MUST LATCH THE ALARM OUTPUT.

Figure 8—A Typical System - Infiniti Transmitter with a Toxic Gas / Oxygen Sensor, Non-Isolated Current Output and Relay Outputs

7.1 7 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 HIGH RELAY
NC COM NO
NO COM NC
FLT RELAY
EXTERNAL
RESET

LOW RELAY
NC COM NO
S
POWER
–
S
POWER
–

+
24 VDC +

RESET
+

NC COM NO
AUX RELAY
CAL
PW
+
OUT
– +

IN
–
4 TO 20 MA

BLACK
RED
YELLOW
WHITE
GREEN
CONNECT THE GREEN SENSOR LEAD TO THE CHASSIS GROUND LUG
B1670 POINTWATCH DETECTOR ON THE INSIDE BOTTOM OF THE INFINITI ENCLOSURE

Figure 9—A Typical System - Infiniti Transmitter with a PointWatch Detector and Non-Isolated Current Output

NC COM NO
NO COM NC
FLT RELAY

HIGH RELAY
EXTERNAL
RESET

NC COM NO
LOW RELAY
S
POWER
–
S
POWER
–

+
RESET
+

NC COM NO
AUX RELAY
CAL
PW
+
OUT

– +

IN
–

4 TO 20 MA

+
24 VDC +
–

24 VDC– 1

24 VDC+ 2

CALIBRATE 3

24 VDC– 4

24 VDC+ 5 1
+ 4-20 MA 6

– 4-20 MA 7

RS-485 B 8

RS-485 A 9

RELAY POWER (RED) 10

WIRING TO OPTIONAL FAULT (ORANGE) 11
RELAY BOARD
NO USER CONNECTION LOW ALARM (WHITE) 12

HIGH ALARM (YELLOW) 13 A2168

NOTES: 1 250 OHM RESISTOR REQUIRED IF USING HART PORT COMMUNICATIONS.

Figure 10—A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter with a PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse Detector and Non-Isolated Current Output

7.1 8 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

CONTROLLER/SIGNAL RECEIVER OPTIONS SENSOR SEPARATION
All Model U9500 Series transmitters offer an analog 4 Det-Tronics sensor termination boxes (STBs) enable
to 20 mA output, which is configurable for electrically the installation of the sensor separately from the Infiniti
isolated or non-isolated operation. The analog signal is transmitter module. Three conductor shielded cable must
capable of driving a maximum 600 ohm resistance load. be used to prevent possible nuisance EMI/RFI. Contact
Typical controllers used with the U9500 Series include the factory for ordering information. (See Appendix C for
the family of R8471 Controllers, or the Model 8000 eight CE/ATEX rating details.) Refer to these typical system
channel controller for % LFL flammable gas monitoring. wiring diagrams for guidance:
It is also acceptable to use the U9500 with other devices
or systems capable of accepting 4 to 20 mA signal Table 2 — Wiring Size and Maximum Distance from
inputs. The following illustrations provide examples Transmitter to Sensor
of recommended interconnecting wiring between the Figure 14 — Sensor Separation with Combustible Gas
U9500 and analog signal receivers: Sensor and Infiniti Transmitter
Figure 15 — Sensor Separation with PointWatch and
Figure 11 — A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter with
Infiniti Transmitter
PointWatch Wired to R8471 Controller,
Non-Isolated Current Output Figure 16 — Sensor Separation with Toxic and
Oxygen Gas Sensors and Infiniti
Figure 12 — A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter
Transmitter
with PointWatch Wired to a Model 8000
Controller, Isolated Current Output Figure 17 — Sensor Separation with Chlorine Gas
Sensor, Intrinsically Safe barrier and
Figure 13 — A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter
Infiniti Transmitter
used with PLC Analog Input Module,
Isolated/Non-Isolated Current Output

R8471 CONTROLLER

24 VDC
– 1
ISOLATED OUTPUT
CURRENT LOOP + –
+ 2 * 4-20 MA

CHASSIS GROUND 3

18 TO 32VDC + 4
POWER

HIGH RELAY
NC COM NO
NO COM NC
FLT RELAY
GROUND – 5

POWER + 6 *
SENSOR
SIGNAL – 7
LOW RELAY
NC COM NO
S
POWER
– +

EXTERNAL RESET 8
S

RESET
POWER
–

HIGH ALARM 9
RESET
+

NC COM NO
AUX RELAY

HIGH ALARM / OC 10 HIGH

CAL

ALARM
PW
+
OUT

AUX. ALARM 11
IN
–

AUX. ALARM / OC 12 AUXILIARY

ALARM
A2034
LOW ALARM 13 BLACK
RED
LOW YELLOW
LOW ALARM / OC 14 WHITE
ALARM
GREEN
FAULT 15 POINTWATCH DETECTOR

FAULT / OC 16 FAULT

*NO CONNECTION

Figure 11—A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter with PointWatch Wired to R8471 Controller, Non-Isolated Current Output

7.1 9 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 MODEL 8000 CONTROLLER

TB 1 TB 2
1
CONNECTION 2
NOT RECOMMENDED U9500 TRANSMITTER NO. 1
3
4 HIGH ALARM

HIGH RELAY
NO COM NC
FLT RELAY

NC COM NO
LOW ALARM

–
TROUBLE
24 VDC

LOW RELAY
TB 3 TB 4 TB 5

NC COM NO
BATTERY

S
+

POWER
– +
S
–

POWER
–
24 VDC +

RESET
– ** +

NC COM NO
AUX RELAY
FLOAT
TYPE

CAL
3 CTR 6 3– 6 3+ 6

PW
+
CHARGER

OUT
+
2 CTR 7 2– 7 2+ 7

IN
–
1 CTR 8 1– 8 1+ 8

BLACK
RED
YELLOW
WHITE
GREEN
POINTWATCH DETECTOR

NO. 2* NO. 3*

B2035
* IDENTICAL TO TRANSMITTER NO. 1 WIRING.
** INSTALL 250 OHM, 12 WATT RESISTOR ACROSS (+) AND (–) TERMINALS FOR ALL CHANNELS SELECTED FOR SERVICE.
THIS RESISTOR WILL SATISFY POWER MONITORING REQUIREMENTS (ONLY CHANNEL 3 SHOWN FOR CLARITY).

Figure 12—A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter with PointWatch Wired to a Model 8000 Controller, Isolated Current Output
NC COM NO
AUX RELAY

IN

OUT
–
PW
CAL

24 VDC
+
RESET

OUTPUT
POWER
+
POWER
LOW RELAY
NC COM NO

–
+

S
–

INPUT
S

INPUT ISOLATED CURRENT OUTPUT

NO COM NC
HIGH RELAY
NC COM NO

+
FLT RELAY

24 VDC
RETURN
POWER
–
NC COM NO
AUX RELAY

IN

OUT
–
PW
CAL

24 VDC
+
RESET

OUTPUT
POWER
+
POWER
LOW RELAY
NC COM NO

–
+

S
–

INPUT
S

INPUT NON-ISOLATED CURRENT OUTPUT

NO COM NC
HIGH RELAY
NC COM NO

FLT RELAY

+ – RETURN
24 VDC
A2036 POWER

Figure 13—A Typical System, Infiniti Transmitter used with PLC Analog Input Module, Isolated/Non-Isolated Current Output

7.1 10 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 2—Maximum Sensor Separation Distance

Maximum Transmitter to Sensor Distance

Combustible Toxic and Oxygen Point Infrared
Wire Size Wire Size Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
(mm2) (AWG)
1.0 18 100 30 12,000 3,600 700 210
1.5 16 150 45 20,000 6,100 1100 335
2.5 14 250 75 32,000 9,700 1800 545
4.0 12 400 120 50,000 15,000 2800 850

INFINITI TRANSMITTER ATTACH CABLE SHIELD

TO GND LUG

GND

CONNECT TO TRANSMITTER

SENSOR TERMINATION BOX

PIGTAIL CONNECTOR
(PROVIDED IN SENSOR
TERMINATION BOX)
BLK

WHT
RED
BLK
WHT
RED
NOTES
• SHIELDED CABLE REQUIRED.
• GROUND CABLE SHIELD AT TRANSMITTER END ONLY.

2309A
CONNECT CABLE LEADWIRES
FROM SENSOR TERMINATION BOX

CONNECT KEYED SENSOR

PLUG TO PIN CONNECTOR

Figure 14—Sensor Separation with Combustible Gas Sensor and Infiniti Transmitter

INFINITI TRANSMITTER JUNCTION BOX

FAULT RELAY
NO COM NC

NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC

LOW RELAY HIGH RELAY

INTERNAL GROUND SCREW

S

POWER
– +
S

–
POWER

24 VDC +
– + + –

RESET

POWER SUPPLY
+
AUX RELAY
CAL IN
PW
OUT

– +

4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERES INTERNAL
GROUND SCREW
DET-TRONICS JUNCTION BOX

SPARE
CAL CAL GREEN
4 – 20 4 – 20 YELLOW
WHITE
RET RET BLACK
RED
+24 +24
POINTWATCH
DETECTOR
B1907

Figure 15—Sensor Separation with PointWatch and Infiniti Transmitter

7.1 11 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 INFINITI TRANSMITTER JUNCTION BOX

FAULT RELAY
NO COM NC

NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC

LOW RELAY HIGH RELAY

LOW RELAY
S
GROUND SCREW

POWER
– +
S
INFINITI TRANSMITTER OR

POWER OUT
24 VDC + – R8471 CONTROLLER

– + + –
SEE NOTE 1

RESET
POWER SUPPLY
+

AUX RELAY
CAL IN
POWER

PW
– +
S
–

POWER
24 VDC +

– + + –

RESET
POWER SUPPLY
+

AUX RELAY
CAL IN
PW
OUT
– + 4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERES IN SENSOR POWER (+)

4 TO 20 MILLIAMPERES
2 1
SENSOR TERMINATION BOX TWO CONDUCTOR MTL 787S
SHIELDED CABLE I.S. BARRIER
(CONNECT AT THE
TRANSMITTER 4 3
JUNCTION BOX ONLY)
+ SAFE AREA
–
G
D HAZARDOUS AREA
RE SENSOR TERMINATION BOX
+ BL
K * CONNECT THE GREEN
– SENSOR LEAD TO THE
G CHASSIS GROUND LUG
IN THE INSIDE BOTTOM
OF THE JUNCTION BOX. +
–
G
NO CONNECTION RED * CONNECT THE GREEN
+ LK SENSOR LEAD TO THE
GROUND LUG* B CHASSIS GROUND LUG
–
IN THE INSIDE BOTTOM
B2310 TOXIC SENSOR G OF THE JUNCTION BOX.

GROUND LUG*
Figure 16—Sensor Separation with Toxic* and Oxygen Gas Sensors NO CONNECTION
and Infiniti Transmitter C7067E
CHLORINE
* Excluding Chlorine sensor, see Figure 17. SENSOR

NOTES:
1. NEVER EXCEED 25.5 VOLTS DC POWER SUPPLY INPUT VOLTAGE OR
BARRIER DAMAGE WILL RESULT.
2. MAXIMUM TOTAL FIELD WIRING SIGNAL LOOP IMPEDANCE IS
130 OHMS (EXCLUDING BARRIER).
3. INTRINSICALLY SAFE WIRING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES MUST BE FOLLOWED.
DISPLAY AND CONTROLS, OPTIONS, 4. INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH “GROUND-FAULT”
MONITORED POWER SUPPLIES.
DEFAULTS 5. INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER MAY BE FIELD INSTALLED WITHIN AN
APPROVED JUNCTION BOX. B2311

DISPLAY AND CONTROLS Figure 17—Sensor Separation with Chlorine Gas Sensor, Intrinsically
The Infiniti display contains an eight character display Safe Barrier and Infiniti Transmitter
for identifying system status conditions and sensor
input, a magnetic reed switch for resetting the unit and
entering different operating modes, and pushbuttons for PROGRAMMING OPTIONS
programming and calibrating the system. See Figure 18 Operating Range
for the location of indicators and pushbuttons and Tables
The available operating range settings and the
3 and 4 for descriptions.
corresponding default setpoints and calibration gases
are shown in Table 5. Note that not all U9500s support
External Reset
selectable operating range.
The external reset input terminal, when grounded
momentarily, normally initiates a relay/display reset only. IMPORTANT
See Figure 9. However, if the “EXT” “CAL” option is The range setting of the transmitter must match
programmed “YES” during the Infiniti setup procedure, the output range of the sensor being used or the
the external reset duplicates the magnetic reed switch system will fail to operate correctly. For example,
(Cal Magnet) and can be used to perform calibration. if a carbon monoxide (CO) sensor with a range of
0 to 500 ppm is being used, the range setting for
the transmitter must be 0 to 500 ppm. Refer to the
“Specifications” section for a listing of available
sensors and ranges.

7.1 12 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 3—Display And Controls

Display/Indicator Description
Ex %LFL / ppm This display is always on and functions as a power indicator.
The display provides a continuous reading of the sensor input in both the Normal and
Calibrate modes.
In the event of a fault, it identifies the nature of the fault with a fault message.
In other operating modes it shows the alarm setpoints and programmed calibration
gas concentration.
A negative zero drift condition is indicated by a minus (–) sign in the left hand digit.
In the event of an over-range condition, the display will continue to track the sensor
output as long as the over-range condition exists. Combustible gas transmitters will
latch the display at the highest detected gas concentration.

* Alarm History Indicator Asterisk indicates an alarm (any one) has activated since last reset.
Blank indicates no alarm has energized since last reset.
n High Alarm Status Indicator Solid black square indicates that the high alarm threshold has been exceeded.
For relay models, this means that the relay output has activated.
Blank indicates no alarm.
n Auxiliary Alarm Status Indicator Solid black square indicates that the auxiliary alarm threshold has been exceeded.
For relay models, this means that the relay output has activated.
Blank indicates no alarm.
n Low Alarm Solid black square indicates that the low alarm threshold has been exceeded.
For relay models, this means that the relay output has activated.
Blank indicates no alarm.

INCREASE Used to move to next higher setting during system programming.

ms
SETUP Used to initiate Setup routine, to accept reading displayed, and cycle to the next
m programming step during Setup (system programming).
ACCEPT
DECREASE Used to move to next lower setting during system programming.
tm
CAL/RESET Used for non-intrusive calibration and transmitter reset.
Activated by Cal Magnet from outside the Infiniti enclosure.

Table 4—CAL/RESET Switch and Calibration Magnet Function

Duration of Function
CAL/RESET
Switch Activation
1 Second Resets the Infiniti transmitter
2 - 3 Seconds Enters the Setpoint Display Mode
7 Seconds Enters the Calibration Mode

7.1 13 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 SENSOR INPUT READING ALARM HISTORY INDICATOR

ALARM STATUS INDICATORS

ALARM

}
HI AUX LO

INCREASE SETUP DECREASE

ACCEPT
INCREASE PUSHBUTTON CAL/RESET DECREASE PUSHBUTTON

SETUP/ACCEPT PUSHBUTTON
A2374

CAL/RESET MAGNETIC REED SWITCH

(ACTIVATED BY HOLDING CAL MAGNET TO THIS SIDE OF TRANSMITTER
APPROXIMATELY TWO INCHES DOWN FROM THE WINDOW)

Figure 18—Infiniti Transmitter Controls and Indicators

Table 5—Range Select Settings And Corresponding Default Settings

Default Settings *** Range Limits

Sensor Measurement High Low Aux Cal High Low Aux Cal
Type Range Gas Gas
0-10 ppm 2 1 2 5 1-9 0.5-5 0.5-9 3-9
0-20 ppm 4 2 4 10 1-18 0.5-10 0.5-18 6-18
0-50 ppm 10 5 10 25 2-45 1-25 1-45 15-45
Electrochemical
0-100 ppm 20 10 20 50 10-90 5-50 5-90 30-90
Toxic *
0-200 ppm 40 20 40 100 20-190 5-100 5-190 60-180
0-500 ppm 100 50 100 250 50-450 25-250 25-450 150-450
0-1000 ppm 200 100 200 500 100-900 50-500 50-900 300-900
Catalytic 0-100 % LFL (Fixed) 50 20 50 50 10-60 5-50 5-90 30-99
Combustible
PointWatch 0-100 % LFL (Fixed) 50 20 50 50 10-60 5-50 5-90 50
(HC)
Oxygen ** 0-25% (Fixed) 23 18 18 20.9 22-25 16-20.5 5-25 8-23.5

* Changing the Toxic Measurement Range will reset all alarms and the Cal Gas to the default setting for the selected range.
** For oxygen deficient applications, use the LOW and/or AUX alarms.
For oxygen enrichment applications, use the HIGH and/or AUX alarms.
*** Default settings for all Infiniti relay operation is normally de-energized with non-latching contacts (except fault alarm, which is normally
energized with no faults). Default settings for optional External Reset Pushbutton is “No External Cal” enabled.
Default settings for calibration mode (automatic or manual) is automatic mode. Manual calibration mode is recommended when using the
U9500D chlorine or U9500F Sulfur Dioxide Transmitters.

7.1 14 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

Setpoints External Calibration
The Infiniti Transmitter has three independent alarm Calibration procedures are normally initiated and
outputs (low, high and auxiliary), with field selectable executed using the Cal Magnet to activate the CAL/
setpoints. For both relay and non-relay models, these RESET switch. Choose “YES EXT CAL” during the setup
setpoints correspond to the HI, AUX, and LO ALARM procedure to allow the additional use of the external reset
indicators on the display. input terminal for initiating and executing a calibration
procedure. See Figure 9 for switch wiring.
Calibration Gas Concentration
The programmed calibration gas concentration is also 4-20 Milliampere Calibration
displayed and adjustable. This known concentration The 4 to 20 mA current loop is factory calibrated. Perform
(typically one half of the instrument’s full scale detection the “YES 4-20 CAL” function in the Setup procedure if a
range) of the actual gas or vapor that is expected to be recalibration is required. A current meter must be placed
detected should be used to calibrate the system. in the loop to perform this function.
Det-Tronics calibration gas should be used to ensure
proper system calibration performance and accuracy. Calibration Current
The current output during Calibration and while in the
IMPORTANT Setup mode is factory set for 2 mA. Perform the “SET
The calibration gas concentration setting typically CAL CURRENT” function in the Setup procedure if an
matches the concentration of the gas used to output current other than 2 mA is required.
perform the calibration (printed on label of
calibration gas cylinder). Refer to the “Calibration” Refer to the “Setup Procedure” section for complete
section of this manual for details. instructions.
Latching or Non-latching Relays INFINITI SENSOR COMPATIBILITY
The Low, Auxiliary and High alarm relays are programmable Refer to Table 6 for a list of acceptable sensor inputs to
as a group for either latching or non-latching operation. the Infiniti by model.
“LATCH” indicates that they will latch upon alarm and the
unit must be reset to clear. “nonLATCH” indicates that INFINITI OUTPUTS
they will automatically clear when the alarm clears.
Refer to Table 7 for a description of Infiniti standard 4 to
20 mA outputs and relay output programming options.
Alarm Relays Normally Energized or Normally
De-Energized
The three alarm relays (High, Low and Auxiliary) are MODES OF OPERATION
programmed as a group. “DE-ENERG” indicates that
the three alarm relays will be normally de-energized and Refer to Table 8 for a description of Infiniti modes of
will energize upon alarm. “ENERG” indicates that the operation.
three alarm relays will be normally energized and will de-
energize upon alarm.

Automatic or Manual Calibration

Manual calibration requires that the operator use the Cal
magnet to activate the CAL/RESET switch, signaling an
acceptance of the present calibration reading. Auto Cal
is described in the “Calibration” section of this manual.

7.1 15 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 6—Infiniti Sensor Compatibility

Infiniti Model Accepts

Combustible Accepts inputs from Det-Tronics Catalytic
• U9500A
Toxic and Oxygen Models Accepts 4 to 20 mA inputs only.
• U9500B Hydrogen Sulfide • C7064E Hydrogen Sulfide Sensor
• U9500C Oxygen • C7065E Oxygen Sensor
• U9500D Chlorine • C7067E Chlorine Sensor *
• U9500E Carbon Monoxide • C7066E Carbon Monoxide Sensor
• U9500F Sulfur Dioxide • C7068E Sulfur Dioxide Sensor
Hydrocarbon (HC) Accepts inputs from the Det-Tronics PointWatch
• U9500H infrared hydrocarbon gas detector.
* External intrinsically-safe barrier required for hazardous area approval (I.S. barrier not
available from Det-Tronics).

Table 7—Infiniti Outputs

Output Description
4 to 20 Milliamperes (Standard) • The linear 4 to 20 mA output:
– corresponds to the field-programmed gas range.
– can be calibrated in the field for maximum accuracy.
– is user selectable for isolated or non-isolated use.
Refer to the “Setup ” section for programming information.
4 to 20 mA with Relays (Optional) • The High, Low and Auxiliary Alarm relays are programmable
• Option includes a set of four relays: as a group for either normally energized or normally de-energized
–High Alarm operation.
–Low Alarm • Low Alarm, Auxiliary Alarm, and High Alarm relays are programmable as
–Auxiliary Alarm a group for either latching or non-latching operation.
–Fault
• Fault relay is normally energized with no faults. Faults are generally
non-latching, but faults that occur during calibration and warmup must be
reset.
• Latching relays are reset using either the Cal magnet or an external reset
switch (field installed, user supplied).

7.1 16 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 8—Infiniti Modes of Operation

Operating Mode Description

Warmup • When power is applied to the transmitter, it enters a Warmup mode to allow the sensor output to stabilize
before beginning normal operation. During this time the:
–Fault relay is de-energized.
– Alarm relays go to non-alarm state (either energized or non-energized, as programmed)
– Display alternates between “WARM-UP” and “Ex” or “Toxic” or “PTIR” or “Oxygen” depending on specific
model.
– Current output indicates a fault condition (less than 1.0 mA).
• The transmitter will stay in the Warmup mode for at least six seconds.
– If the detected gas at the end of the six second warmup period is higher than the lowest alarm setting or if
faults are present, the transmitter will remain in the Warmup mode until the detected gas falls below the
lowest alarm setting and no faults are present, or five minutes, whichever is shortest.
– If an alarm condition exists at the end of the five minute warmup, the transmitter will enter the Normal
operating mode and the alarm(s) will be annunciated.
– If a fault is present after the five minute warmup, the transmitter will indicate the fault, the fault relay will
remain de-energized, and the current output will be less than 1.0 mA.
• At the end of the warmup period with no faults or alarms present, the transmitter automatically enters the
Normal operating mode (fault relay energizes, alarm relays remain in non-alarm state), and the current output
will rise to 4.0 mA.
Normal • In Normal operating mode with no alarm condition:
– Display is on and indicates the detected gas concentration.
– Alarm relays (on relay models) are in their normal state (energized or de-energized as programmed).
– 4 to 20 mA output signal level corresponds to the detected gas concentration.
– Fault relay (on relay models) is energized.
• In the Normal operating mode with an alarm condition occurring:
– Display indicates the detected gas concentration.
– Low, Auxiliary or High display shows a black square, indicating alarm condition.
– Affected relay changes state (on relay models).
– 4 to 20 mA output signal level corresponds to the detected gas concentration.
– Fault relay output energized (on relay models).
– Relay History Indicator display shows an asterisk to indicate an alarm was activated.
• When the signal decreases below setpoint:
– Display and 4 to 20 mA output continues to track the detected gas concentration.
– With latching operation programmed, numeric display shows detected gas concentration and low auxilary,
or high display shows a black square indicating latched alarm output.
– With non-latching operation programmed, low, auxiliary and/or high display goes blank and Alarm relay
outputs return to their normal state.
– Asterisk in Alarm History Indicator display stays on to indicate an alarm since last reset.
• In the event of a system fault:
– The normally energized Fault output is de-energized and the corresponding fault message is displayed.
– 4 to 20 mA output drops to less than 1.0 mA.
• In the event of an alarm condition and a system fault both occurring:
– In most cases, the first condition that occurs will be indicated by the current and relay outputs and on the
display.
– The exceptions are “CAL ABORTED” and “SENSOR E.O.L.” faults which both may occur during the
calibration procedure. If an alarm occurs with these faults, the alarm will over-ride the fault and will be
indicated.

7.1 17 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 8—Infiniti Modes of Operation (Continued)

Operating Mode Description

Reset The Reset mode is entered by holding the Cal magnet to the side of the transmitter enclosure next to CAL/RESET
on the display face of the unit.
• Standard – When the Cal magnet is held there for less than one second, the alarm indicators turn off and all
relay outputs return to their normal condition if no alarms or faults are occurring.
• Forced – When the Cal magnet is held there for 1 to 2 seconds, the alarm indicators turn off and the relay
outputs return to their normal condition even if an alarm or fault condition still exists.
• Remote – Activating the remote reset switch for less than 2 seconds initiates a forced reset. If “YES
EXT CAL” was selected during the setup procedure, the external reset input initiates the setpoint
display cycle when activated for over two seconds.
Setpoint Display When the Cal magnet is held to the side of the transmitter enclosure next to CAL/RESET for more than two
seconds, the transmitter enters the Setpoint Display mode. Once in this mode, the Cal magnet can be removed.
The Setpoint Display sequence will complete automatically. (The external reset input terminal can also be used
to initiate the setpoint display and calibration mode if “YES EXT CAL” was selected during the setup procedure.)
In this mode:
• The display sequentially shows the programmed alarm setpoints and calibration gas concentration.
• Each value is displayed for approximately 1.5 seconds.
• After completing the sequence, the transmitter automatically returns to the Normal operating mode if the Cal
magnet is no longer being held to the unit (or the external reset input is not activated).

NOTE
If the CAL/RESET switch (or external reset input) is still activated at the end of this cycle, the transmitter
automatically enters the Calibrate mode. If a calibration is not performed, a CAL ABORTED fault will occur. To
exit the Calibrate mode without performing the calibration, cycle power or wait for the calibration fault message,
then reset the unit.

The Setpoint Display mode is used only for displaying the setpoints. Use the “Setup” mode for changing setpoint
and calibration gas values.
Auto Calibration Auto calibration is the default setting and the recommended calibration method for all sensors except for Chlorine
(Cl2) and Sulfur Dioxide (SO2). Auto calibration is required for use with PointWatch.
• Auto Cal is an automatic calibration procedure that requires no adjustments by the operator. The Calibrate
mode is entered by holding the Cal magnet to the CAL/RESET magnetic switch until completion of the “Setpoint
Display” sequence described above (approximately 7 seconds). (The external reset input terminal can also be
used to enter the calibrate mode if “YES EXT CAL” was selected during the Setup procedure. Activate the input
until completion of the “Setpoint Display” sequence.)
• For calibration of the Infiniti with the C7065E O2 sensor, there are two modes of Auto Calibration available:
1. Initial / Sensor Replacement Calibration
2. Routine Calibration
Use Option #1 for new sensor start-up or after replacing a sensor. Use Option #2 for all subsequent calibrations
after Option #1 has been completed.
• The transmitter performs the Zero adjustments, then signals the operator when to apply and also when to
remove the calibration gas. Upon completion of a successful calibration, the transmitter automatically returns
to the Normal operating mode.
• If the operator fails to complete the calibration procedure, if an error in calibrating occurs, or if a successful
calibration cannot be completed, the transmitter will automatically return to the Normal mode and continue to
use the previous calibration data (after 10 minutes or when the gas level drops below the lowest alarm setpoint).
A fault indication will be displayed until a reset occurs.
• If the microprocessor determines that the sensor cell is approaching the end of its useful life, the message “SEN
AT EOL” will be indicated on the display. A fault indication will be displayed until a reset occurs.
• While in the Calibrate mode, all transmitter outputs are inhibited and the dc current output goes to a preset
level (adjustable from 0 to 20 mA, with a default value of 2.0 mA). See “Setup” section for complete calibration
procedure.

7.1 18 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 8—Infiniti Modes of Operation (Continued)

Operating Mode Description

Manual Calibration Use the manual calibration mode when calibrating the Chlorine (Cl2) and Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) sensors.
• Manual Calibration must be selected during the initial set up of Infiniti.
• Manual calibration is similar to Auto Calibration, except that when the Zero and Span (calibration gas
concentration) readings are displayed and judged stable by the operator, they must be manually accepted as
calibration points by holding the Cal magnet to the CAL/RESET magnetic switch (or activate the external reset
input if “YES EXT CAL” was selected during the Setup procedure.)
Setup In the setup mode, the range (for some gases), alarm setpoints, calibration gas level, current loop levels, relay
operation (latching/non-latching, energized/de-energized), and calibration mode (auto/manual) are programmed
into the transmitter.

NOTE
When used with PointWatch only 50% LFL gas may be used for span concentration. PointWatch will not read
accurately if other concentrations are used.

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST STARTUP PROCEDURE

The following checklist is provided as a means of checking 1. Remove power from all output devices to prevent
the system to be sure that all phases of system installation actuation.
are complete and have been performed correctly. 2. Apply power to the system. If the proper “type of
sensor” indication does not appear in the display
1. Enclosure is securely mounted and sensor is pointing during warmup, consult the factory.
down. (PointWatch models must be mounted
horizontally. Refer to the PointWatch manual for 3. When the Warmup period is completed, perform the
details.) Setup procedure.
2. Ensure that local wiring and installation codes are 4. Perform the Calibration procedure.
met. 5. Restore power to the output devices.
3. Power wiring is installed and power source is
operational. SETPOINT DISPLAY MODE
4. Wiring to external loads and/or monitoring devices is
properly connected. In this mode, the display sequentially shows the
programmed alarm setpoints and calibration gas
5. If a sensor termination box is used, shielded concentration, then returns to the Normal operating mode
interconnecting wiring is correctly installed. (see Table 9). Remove power from all output devices to
6. All cable shields are properly connected. prevent actuation.
7. Optional sensor accessories (dust/splash guards,
sample draw devices, etc.) are installed, clean, and
in good condition.
8. O-ring is in good condition and the junction box
cover is tightly installed.
9. Monitoring devices and/or response equipment is
operational.

7.1 19 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 9—Setpoint Display Cycle

Display Indicates Duration and Description

Normal Mode To enter the Setpoint Display mode, activate the CAL/RESET magnetic switch for 2 to 3 seconds
(hold the Cal magnet to the side of the transmitter enclosure next to CAL/RESET). If “YES
EXT CAL” was selected during the “Setup Procedure,” the external reset input can also be used to
initiate the Setpoint Display Cycle when activated for 2 to 3 seconds.
Low Alarm Setpoint 1.5 seconds
High Alarm Setpoint 1.5 seconds
Auxiliary Alarm Setpoint 1.5 seconds
Calibration Gas Concentration 1.5 seconds
IMPORTANT
For catalytic sensors only, whenever the type of calibration gas that is used differs from
the gases to be detected, a Conversion K - Factor must be applied to ensure proper
operation. Refer to “Catalytic Sensor Calibration” section in this manual for details.
Normal Mode Remains in Normal mode until another mode is activated.

SETUP PROCEDURE CALIBRATION

1. Determine the required alarm setpoint levels, CALIBRATION RECOMMENDATIONS
calibration gas concentration, and other settings The Infiniti can accommodate automatic or manual
such as range (Table 5), auto/man calibration, calibration and for many sensors either of these methods
normally energized/de-energized relays, latching/ are effective. Certain sensors, however, require either
non-latching relays. automatic or manual calibration only. The sensors and
method of calibration required and/or recommended are
CAUTION listed in Table 11. Refer to this table before proceeding
Changing the range selection will cause the with calibration.
alarm setpoints and the calibration gas settings
to default to the setting shown in Table 5. Catalytic Perform Calibration
combustible, PointWatch infrared, and oxygen • When a new system is initially put into service.
sensors have preset ranges that are automatically
selected by the Infiniti and cannot be changed. • When the sensor is replaced.
• Periodically to verify proper performance for
2. Remove the enclosure cover to access the transmitter combustible, toxic and oxygen detectors - typically
display and controls. at 90 day intervals, however, this frequency
is dependent upon the requirements of each
CAUTION application. Refer to the PointWatch manual for
While in the Setup Mode, the current loop output calibration recommendations specific to that device.
will drop to less than 1 mA. For models without Refer to Table 12 for the recommended calibration
relays, this is the only remote indication that the unit frequency for sensors manufactured by Det-Tronics.
is not in the Normal operating mode. For models
with relays, the fault relay indicates a fault. In either
case, the transmitter will remain in the Setup mode
until Setup is complete. The transmitter must be
manually stepped through the sequence below in
order to return to the Normal operating mode.

3. Press and hold the SETUP/ACCEPT button for 1

second using a small screwdriver, then release. This
initiates the Infiniti Setup Mode. Refer to Table 10
to perform setup. Once a programming option has
been accepted, the transmitter will automatically
cycle to the next option.
7.1 20 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 10—Infiniti Setup

Display Function Description/Action

Left portion displays the Select the Range (see Table 5). • Range must match that of the sensor being used
present range setting.
• Press the INCREASE button to increase the range
Right portion displays Note: Not all U9500 models support
setting or the DECREASE button to decrease the
alternating: selectable full scale range.
setting (see Table 4 for available ranges).
“RNG”
“SET” • When the desired setting is displayed, press the
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
Note: Not present for the transmitter.
Hydrocarbon (PointWatch).
Left portion displays the Select the Low Alarm Setpoint • Press the INCREASE button to increase the setpoint
low alarm setpoint. or the DECREASE button to decrease the setpoint.
Right portion displays
• When the desired setting is displayed, press the
alternating:
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setpoint into
“LO”
the transmitter.
“SET”
Left portion displays the Select the High Alarm Setpoint • Press the INCREASE button to increase the setpoint
high alarm setpoint. or the DECREASE button to decrease the setpoint.
Right portion displays
• When the desired setting is displayed, press the
alternating:
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setpoint into
“HI”
the transmitter.
“SET”
Left portion displays the Select the Auxiliary Alarm Setpoint • Press the INCREASE button to increase the setpoint
auxiliary alarm setpoint. or the DECREASE button to decrease the setpoint.
Right portion displays
• When the desired setting is displayed, press the
alternating:
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setpoint into
“AX”
the transmitter.
“SET”
Left portion displays Select the Calibration Gas • The calibration gas concentration must match that
the calibration gas Concentration of the gas being used to calibrate (unless K factors
concentration setting . for combustible sensors are being applied - refer to
Right portion displays “Catalytic Sensor Calibration” section.
alternating:
• Press the INCREASE button to increase the setting
“CAL”
or the DECREASE button to decrease the setting.
“SET”
• When the desired setting is displayed, press the
Note: Not present for SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
Hydrocarbon (PointWatch). the transmitter.
“LATCH” Select Non-Latching or Latching • Press INCREASE or DECREASE to change the
or Relays setting.
“NonLATCH”
• When the desired setting is displayed, press the
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
the transmitter.
“DE-ENERG” Select De-Energized or Energized • Press INCREASE or DECREASE to change the
or relays. setting.
“ENERG”
• When the desired setting is displayed, press the
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
the transmitter. Factory default setting is for de-
energized operation.

7.1 21 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 10—Infiniti Setup (Continued)

Display Function Description/Action

“YES AUTO” Select Automatic or Manual • Press INCREASE or DECREASE to change the
“YES CAL” Calibration setting.
or
• When the desired setting is displayed, press the
“NO AUTO”
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
“NO CAL”
the transmitter. Factory default setting is for auto
Note: Not present for calibration.
Hydrocarbon (PointWatch)
“YES EXT” Option to allow external reset button • Press INCREASE or DECREASE to change the
“YES CAL” to be used for calibration in addition setting.
or to or instead of Cal Magnet. When
• When the desired setting is displayed, press the
“NO EXT” “Yes” is selected, the external reset
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
“NO CAL” input functions exactly like the Cal
the transmitter. Factory default setting is for no -
Magnet.
external reset button is not used for calibration.
“NO 4-20” Option to select a Current Loop • Press the SETUP/ ACCEPT button to bypass the 4
“NO CAL” Output other than factory calibrated to 20 mA calibration procedure and exit the SETUP
4 to 20 mA. mode.
• Press DECREASE or INCREASE to change the
display to read “YES 4-20 CAL.”
• Press the SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the
current loop.
IMPORTANT
A dc current meter capable of measuring 4 to 20 mA must be connected to the current loop output for the following
three current loop adjustments. This can be accomplished by connecting a dc ammeter in series with the load
or by connecting a digital dc voltmeter across a known load resistance and calculating the current flow using the
formula: current (I) = voltage/load resistance. Do not press INCREASE or DECREASE pushbuttons during Current
Loop Cal without a current meter or voltmeter connected to the current loop output as described above. Doing so
will result in a non-calibrated current loop. Before performing any current loop adjustment sequences, be aware
that a PLC connected to a 4-20mA output could be activated, causing an alarm.
“SET 4mA” Set the current output zero level. • Press the INCREASE or DECREASE button to
“CURRENT” change the zero level current output (indicated on
the dc current meter).
• When the desired output is indicated, press the
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
the transmitter.
“SET 20mA” Set the current output full scale • Press the INCREASE or DECREASE button to change
“CURRENT” level. the full scale current level output (indicated on the
dc current meter).
• When the desired output is indicated, press the
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
the transmitter.
“SET CAL” Set the current output during • Press the INCREASE or DECREASE button to change
“CURRENT” calibration and setup modes. the calibration current level output (indicated on the
dc current meter).
• When the desired output is indicated, press the
SETUP/ACCEPT button to program the setting into
the transmitter.

7.1 22 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 11—Recommended Sensor Calibration Methods type must match the sensor cell type. The calibration
gas concentration should be one half of the full scale
Sensor Calibration measurement range of the sensor in use.
Method
Auto Manual For oxygen sensor calibration, normal ambient air may
Combustible Catalytic (Ex) X be used for span calibration if it is known to be clean and
H2S X not depleted of O2 (21% vol.). Compressed clean air is
available from Det-Tronics if required. It is not necessary
CO X
to utilize an O2 free gas such as compressed nitrogen
PointWatch (HC) X only to calibrate the O2 sensor zero level. An electronic zero
O2 X only switch is provided within the C7065E sensor housing for
Cl2 X only this function. Refer to the O2 sensor instruction manual
SO2 X only
for details.

Important Calibration Notes

• Ensure that the transmitter is properly programmed
Calibration Gas Sources
for the gas concentration being used for calibration.
For optimum performance, only use Det-Tronics (See the “Setup” section.)
calibration gases.
• Ensure that only clean air is present at the sensor prior
to entering the calibration mode. If the possibility
IMPORTANT
of background gases exists, purge the sensor with
The calibration gas concentration setting must
clean air to ensure accurate calibration.
match the concentration of the gas used to perform
the calibration (printed on label of calibration gas • Ensure that the concentration of the calibration
cylinder). gas matches the calibration gas setting. Typically,
calibration gas concentration equal to 50% full scale
For PointWatch calibration, use only 50% LFL is used.
concentration calibration gas of the same type as
• If the calibration procedure is not completed or
selected by the PointWatch gas selection switch. Refer
if the sensitivity of the sensor has deteriorated to
to the PointWatch instruction manual for details.
the extent that calibration cannot be successfully
completed, a fault will be generated and the system
For catalytic sensor calibration, most applications
will automatically revert back to the former calibration
require the use of 50% LFL calibration gas matching the
settings (after 10 minutes or when the gas level drops
type of gas to be detected. If a matching calibration gas
below the lowest setpoint). If a successful calibration
type is not available, a conversion K-factor must be used.
cannot be accomplished, replace the sensor and the
Refer to the “Catalytic Sensor Calibration” section in this
hydrophobic filter (if used) and re-calibrate.
manual for details.

Table 12—Recommended Frequency of Calibration for Det-Tronics Sensors

Sensor Type After 1 Hour Warm-up After 24 Hours After 1 Week Thereafter*
H2S Req Opt Opt 30 days
Chlorine Req Req Req 30 days
Oxygen Req Opt Opt 90 days
Carbon Monoxide Req Opt Opt 30 days
Sulfur Dioxide Req Opt Opt 30 days

For toxic gas sensor calibration, the calibration gas

* or as determined by the needs of the specific application
Req = Required
Opt = Optional
NR = Not Recommended

7.1 23 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

• Inspect the sensor. Loss of sensitivity can be the current list of Det-Tronics K-factors. The K-factor
caused by various factors. One common cause is represents the relative sensor response ratio of the
by clogging of the hydrophobic or sintered filters by calibration gas to the detected gas. The K-factor is used
dirt, oil, paint, etc. Problems of this nature will not within the “K-factor equation” to determine the proper
be detected by the transmitter’s diagnostic circuitry transmitter output level (span setpoint) when the sensor
when used with catalytic or electrochemical sensors. is exposed to the calibration gas. The K-factor equation
If the filter or the sensor are dirty or plugged, they is as follows:
should be replaced. When the transmitter is used CxK=S
with the PointWatch Infrared detector, contamination
of its optical surfaces will be annunciated. C = Concentration of the calibration gas in % LFL
• When calibrating a C7065E O2 Sensor, the initial K = Conversion K-factor for the gas to be monitored
“zero” calibration requires activation of a switch with the given calibration gas
located inside the sensor housing. Subsequent S = Corrected combustible gas transmitter
calibrations of the sensor do not require switch calibration span output level (span setpoint)
activation. Always calibrate the sensor using 20.9%
O2 if ambient air is less than 20.9% O2. Example: Gas to be detected: Propane
Calibration gas: 50% LFL Methane in air
AUTO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE K-factor: 1.39
In the Auto Cal mode, all adjustments are made
Equation: C x K = S
automatically by the transmitter once calibration has
50 x 1.39 = 69.5
been initiated. Auto Cal mode is recommended for all
sensors except Cl2 and SO2. Refer to Table 13 for the
For proper system sensitivity to propane, the Infiniti
Automatic Calibration Procedure.
transmitter calibration gas concentration setpoint should
be adjusted to read 69% LFL. When the sensor is
O2 Sensor Calibration
calibrated with 50% LFL methane in air calibration gas
Initial calibration of the U9500C/C7065E O2 detector mixture, the sensor will provide an accurate measurement
requires removal of the C7065E sensor housing for access of propane.
to the zero selection switch. Subsequent calibrations of
the sensor will not require removal of the sensor housing, If more than one calibration gas type and K-factor is
nor nitrogen purging. The U9500C will automatically set listed for a gas that will be detected, generally the
the zero cal level even with normal levels of O2 displayed best calibration gas to use is that which provides a
during the zero calibration process. Refer to “Calibration K-factor closest to the value of 1.0 (one). Note that the
Procedure for Infiniti with C7065E Oxygen Sensor” for presence of Methane gas as a potential detectable gas
details. is an exception. Always use Methane calibration gas if
Methane is expected to be present within the protected
Catalytic Sensor Calibration area.
Catalytic sensors respond to many combustible gases.
While it is highly recommended that a sensor be calibrated If a specific gas/vapor and K-factor is not listed within
to detect a single gas, the fact remains that only a few the “Det-Tronics K-factor Tech Note”, a K-factor can
calibration gas types are available. In addition, multiple be determined by Det-Tronics Sensor Engineering
gas hazards may exist. department. Contact the factory for details.

A known concentration (typically one half of the full scale If more than one calibration gas type and K-factor is
detection range of the instrument) of the actual gas or listed for a gas that will be detected, generally the
vapor type that is expected to be detected should be best calibration gas to use is that which provides a
used to calibrate the system. Det-Tronics calibration K-factor closest to the value of 1.0 (one). Note that the
gas should always be used to ensure proper system presence of Methane gas as a potential detectable gas
calibration performance and accuracy. Calibration gas is an exception. Always use Methane calibration gas if
should not be used if the Oxygen concentration within Methane is expected to be present within the protected
the gas is listed at less than 20% by volume. area.

A conversion K-factor must be used in the calibration of If a specific gas/vapor and K-factor is not listed within
the system whenever detection of gases/vapors other the “Det-Tronics K-factor Tech Note”, a K-factor can
than the gas used in the actual calibration process will be determined by Det-Tronics Sensor Engineering
occur. Refer to the “Det-Tronics K-factor Tech Note” for department. Contact the factory for details.

7.1 24 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 13—Automatic Calibration Procedure

Description Display Operator Action

Normal operation/no gas present Indicates the detected gas • If the possibility of background gases exists, purge the
concentration sensor with clean air to ensure accurate calibration.
Initiate calibration – Catalytic, Sequences through the Setup • Hold the Cal magnet to the CAL/RESET magnetic
PIR9400 & all toxic sensors settings switch for 7 seconds. See Figure 18 for CAL/RESET
switch location. (The external reset input can also be
Enters the Calibration mode used to enter the calibration mode if “YES EXT CAL”
- Display shows detected gas was selected during Setup procedure).
New sensor cal – O2 concentration and alternating New O2 sensor cal – First remove C7065E cover and
message:
select “Zero”.
“ZERO” “CAL”
Existing sensor cal – O2 No zero gas action necessary.
Zero calibration complete Display shows detected gas • Apply the calibration gas to the sensor by placing
concentration and alternating the calibration cup over the sensor (or installing
message: the direct inject fitting and hose on the PointWatch
detector) and opening the valve on the calibration
“APLY”
gas cylinder.
“GAS”
New sensor cal – O2 Select switch to “ON”. Replace C7065E cover.
Span calibration Display shows rising gas concentration • None.
and alternating message:
“GAS”
“ON”
Span calibration complete Display shows decreasing gas • Remove the calibration gas. When the gas level
concentration when gas is removed falls below the lowest alarm setpoint, and if no faults
and alternating message: are present, the transmitter automatically exits the
Calibrate mode.
“CAL” “OK”
then • A sensitivity reading that can be used to track
“RMV” sensor life (except PointWatch) is displayed for
“GAS” seven seconds with the “SPAN” reading and prior
then, if the calibration is successful: to the transmitter returning to normal operation. Any
“XXXX SPAN” reading over 100 indicates that the sensor is good.

• At the successful completion of the calibration, all

outputs and indicators return to normal operation.
• If faults are present, the unit will exit after the remainder
of 10 minutes.
Calibration fault indication Display shows alternating messages • If a fault occurs, remove the gas and correct the fault.
indicating the fault, then After the fault has been cleared, begin calibration
again. See Table 15 - Fault Messages, Explanations
“RMV”
and Corrective Action.
“GAS”

7.1 25 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

MANUAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE 5. For best results, allow the U9500/C7065E to warm
In the Manual Cal mode, the CAL/RESET switch must be up for one hour before performing the calibration
activated using the Cal magnet to accept a reading as a procedure.
calibration point. (The external reset input can also be
used to accept a reading if “YES EXT CAL” was selected Initial/Replacement Sensor Calibration Procedure
during the Setup procedure.)
1. Remove the C7065E aluminum sensor cover. Leave
the sensor cell plugged in.
The Infiniti must be programmed for manual calibration
prior to initiating the manual calibration procedure (refer 2. Apply the calibration magnet to the U9500 calibration
to the Setup section). Refer to Table 14 for the Manual target location for nine seconds, or until the U9500
Calibration Procedure. display shows “zero-cal”.
3. Move the toggle switch on the electrochemical
IMPORTANT sensor cell to the “zero” position. See Figure 21 for
The Manual Calibration Procedure must be used switch location. This will simulate the “zero” or “no-
for chlorine (Cl2) and sulfur dioxide (SO2) sensors. oxygen” condition necessary to establish a baseline
Use the Auto Calibration Procedure for all other output calibration level. When the U9500 display
sensors. reads “00”, move the toggle switch back to the “on”
position. Place the aluminum sensor cover over the
cell and reinstall.
Calibration Procedure for Infiniti with
C7065E Oxygen Sensor
There are two calibration procedures for the U9500/
C7065E:

1. Initial/Replacement Sensor Calibration. This

procedure should be used on new product initial
calibration, or any time an existing sensor has
been replaced with a new or different sensor. This
procedure requires removal of the sensor housing.
Live DC circuits will be exposed to the surrounding
environment during this procedure.
2. Routine Calibration. This procedure should be
used for subsequent calibrations after the initial/
replacement sensor calibration procedure has been
performed. This procedure does not require removal ZERO SWITCH

of the sensor housing, and no live circuits will be A1472

exposed.
Figure 19—Electrochemical O2 Sensor Cell
Before performing either procedure:
4. When the U9500 display shows “aply-gas”, the
1. Ensure that the device is properly installed and
transmitter will begin to record the sensor output level
wired.
in response to the ambient oxygen concentration.
2. Ensure that the electrochemical cell is installed If this is known to be 20.9%, an accurate span
properly. calculation will result. If the ambient O2 level is
3. Ensure that the U9500/C7065E is powered-up less than 20.9%, it is recommended to apply 20.9%
and displays normal operating mode without fault oxygen using a Det-Tronics O2 calibration kit.
indication. In not, clear all faults before attempting 5. When span calculations are complete, the U9500
to enter calibration mode. display will indicate “cal-OK”, and then “rmv-gas”.
4. Ensure that the U9500/C7065E has been programmed If using a Det-Tronics O2 calibration kit, remove the
for “auto calibration” mode. Manual calibration mode calibration cup and close the regulator valve. No
is not compatible with the C7065E sensor. actions are necessary if ambient air O2 is used.

7.1 26 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

6. The U9500 will automatically exit calibration mode Alternate method:
when calibration is complete. The displayed O2 level
should be 20.9% (17.4 mA current level) if ambient This method can be used in a classified/hazardous area.
conditions are normal. 1. Disable any alarming devices triggered by the
U9500A Infiniti transmitter alarm outputs.
cgs sensor replacement 2. Power up the U9500A with a new or different CGS
sensor installed.
Under certain circumstances, an existing U9500A
Infiniti gas transmitter fitted with a new or different CGS 3. Wait for the U9500A Infiniti transmitter to display
sensor may not exit “warm up” mode after four minutes “Zero Drift” indication (approximately 4 minutes
from power up, causing a “Zero Drift” indication to be from power up).
displayed on the U9500A. This uncommon situation can 4. Apply calibration gas to the sensor. After
occur when a CGS pellistor resistance is slightly offset approximately 30 seconds, the U9500A will reset,
from the previous CGS pellistor resistance. It does not go through the startup cycle, and display some
mean that the sensor or the Infiniti transmitter are bad or incorrect gas level.
out of tolerance.
5. Apply a calibration magnet and hold it in place until
the Infiniti transmitter enters the calibration mode.
There are two simple methods to solve this problem.
The Infiniti display will read a gas indication number
Preferred method: alternating with “Zero Cal”.
6. Remove the calibration gas from the sensor.
This method requires a Hot Work Permit and
declassification of the work area. 7. Allow the Infiniti to zero calibrate to the new or
different sensor.
1. Disable any alarming devices triggered by the
U9500A Infiniti transmitter alarm outputs. 8. When prompted by the Infiniti, apply the calibration
gas to set the 50% LFL span setting.
2. Power up the U9500A with a new or different CGS
sensor installed. 9. Once the Infiniti accepts the new span setting, follow
the prompts to exit the calibration mode.
3. Wait for the U9500A Infiniti transmitter to display
“Zero Drift” indication (approximately 4 minutes 10. From this point, allow the sensor to fully warm up for
from power up). one hour minimum, and then calibrate the U9500A
following the normal calibration procedure in the
4. Remove the cover from the Infiniti transmitter. instruction manual.
5. While the Infiniti transmitter display is indicating “Zero 11. Re-enable any alarming devices triggered by the
Drift,” simultaneously press and release the Increase U9500A Infiniti alarm outputs.
and Decrease switches on the Infiniti faceplate. The
Infiniti will exit the warm up mode and display an Contact the factory if you have any questions or
incorrect gas level reading. comments.
6. Calibrate the U9500A following the normal calibration
procedure in the instruction manual.
7. Replace the Infiniti J-box cover.
8. Re-enable any alarming devices triggered by the
U9500A Infiniti alarm outputs.

7.1 27 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 14—Manual Calibration Procedure

Description Display Operator Action

Normal operation/no gas present Indicates the detected gas • Ensure that the unit is set for Manual Calibration.
concentration Refer to the “Setup Procedure.”
• If the possibility of background gases exists, purge the
sensor with clean air to ensure accurate calibration.
Initiate calibration Sequences through the Setup • Hold the Cal magnet to the CAL/RESET magnetic
settings switch for 7 seconds to enter the calibration mode.
(The external reset input can also be used to enter
Enters the Calibration mode the calibration mode if “EXT CAL YES” was selected
- Display shows detected gas during the Setup procedure).
concentration and alternating
message:
“ZERO”
“CAL”
Zero calibration Display continues showing detected • When the zero reading has stabilized, hold the Cal
gas concentration and alternating magnet to the CAL/RESET magnetic switch for 2
message: seconds to accept the displayed reading as the zero
“ZERO” point.
“CAL”
Apply calibration gas Display shows detected gas • Apply the calibration gas to the sensor by placing
concentration and alternating the calibration cup over the sensor and opening the
message: valve on the calibration gas cylinder.
“APLY”
“GAS”
Span calibration Display shows rising gas • When the reading has stabilized, hold the Cal magnet
concentration and alternating to the CAL/RESET magnetic switch for 2 seconds
message: to accept the displayed reading as the span point.
The display will indicate the selected calibration gas
“GAS”
concentration as span.
“ON”
Remove calibration gas Display shows decreasing gas • Remove the calibration gas. When the gas level
concentration when gas is removed falls below the lowest alarm setpoint, the transmitter
and alternating message: automatically exits the Calibrate mode.
“CAL” “OK” • A sensitivity reading that can be used to track sensor
then life (except PointWatch) is displayed for 7 seconds
“RMV” with the “SPAN” display and prior to the transmitter
“GAS” returning to normal operation. Any reading over 100
then indicates that the sensor is good.
“XXXX SPAN”
• At the successful completion of the calibration, all
outputs and indicators return to normal operation.
• If faults are present, the unit will exit after the
remainder of 10 minutes. To force an exit from
calibration, make sure that the gas concentration is
below alarm setpoints and dropping, then activate
the CAL/RESET switch for 1 second.
Calibration fault indication Display shows alternating messages • If a fault occurs, remove the gas and correct the fault.
indicating the fault, then After the fault has been cleared, begin calibration
again. See Table 15 - Fault Messages, Explanations
“RMV”
and Corrective Action.
“GAS”

7.1 28 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

Routine Calibration Procedure NOTE
1. Do not remove the C7065E sensor cover. The fault message will be shown for about
1.5 seconds out of every 3 seconds. The gas
2. Apply the calibration magnet to the U9500 calibration concentration at the sensor will be displayed
target location for nine seconds, or until the U9500 during the remaining time. If more than one fault
display shows “zero-cal”. The initial zero baseline should occur, the highest priority fault will be
output level reading will be referenced. Wait until the displayed. (Table 15 lists the faults in order of
U9500 display shows “aply-gas”. priority.)
3. The transmitter will now begin to record the sensor
output level in response to the ambient oxygen In the event of an alarm condition and a system
concentration. If this is known to be 20.9%, an fault both occurring:
accurate span calculation will result. If the ambient O2
level is less than 20.9%, it is recommended to apply • In most cases, the first condition that occurs will be
20.9% oxygen using a Det-Tronics O2 calibration kit. indicated by the current and relay outputs and on
the display.
4. When span calculations are complete, the U9500
display will indicate “cal-OK”, and then “rmv-gas”. • The exceptions are “CAL ABORTED” and “SENSOR
If using a Det-Tronics O2 calibration kit, remove the E.O.L.” faults, which both can occur during the
calibration cup and close the regulator valve. No calibration procedure. If an alarm occurs with these
actions are necessary if ambient air O2 is used. faults, the alarm will over-ride the fault and will be
indicated.
5. The U9500 will automatically exit calibration mode
when calibration is complete. The displayed O2 level
should be 20.9% (17.4 mA current level) if ambient Prioritized Faults
conditions are normal. The faults are prioritized, with the highest fault being the
only one displayed (see Table 15 for a prioritized listing).
If an additional fault exists, it will be displayed after the
TROUBLESHOOTING higher priority fault has been cleared.
Automatic Diagnostics and Fault Messages
Clearing Faults
The transmitter features self-testing circuitry that
Generally, faults that occur while in the normal mode are
continuously checks for problems that could prevent
self-clearing once the fault condition has been corrected.
proper system response. When power is applied, the
Faults that occur while in the warmup and calibration
microprocessor automatically tests the unit. If a fault is
modes require a manual reset to clear (using either an
detected during this warmup mode, it will be indicated
externally connected reset switch or the Cal magnet).
on the display and must be reset to clear. In the Normal
After the fault condition has been corrected, the fault
operating mode, it continuously monitors the input signal
relay automatically switches to the normal (energized)
from the sensor to ensure proper functioning.
state, the dc current output returns to normal, and the
fault message turns off.
In the event of a system fault:
CAUTION
• The display identifies the nature of the fault using a
The fault detection circuitry does not monitor the
fault message. Refer to Table 15 for an expanded
operation of external response equipment or the
explanation of the messages.
wiring to these devices. It is important that these
• The normally energized Fault relay (on relay models) devices be checked periodically to ensure that
is de-energized. they are operational.
• The dc current output drops to less than 1.0 mA.

7.1 29 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 Table 15—Fault Messages, Explanations And Corrective Action

Fault Message Display Explanation and Corrective Action

Blank Display EEPROM sumcheck failure. Cycle power to clear fault. If fault persists, return the unit to the
factory for repair.

“COMPUTER” RAM or processor failure. Cycle power to clear fault. If fault persists, return the unit to the factory
“FAILURE” for repair.

“WDT” Watchdog timer failure. Cycle power to clear fault. If fault persists, return the unit to the factory
“FAILURE” for repair.

“EEPROM” Activate the Cal/Reset switch using the Cal Magnet, then perform Setup and Calibration
“FAILURE” procedures. If fault persists, return the unit to the factory for repair.

“EXT RSET” External reset button has been activated for 15 seconds or longer. Self-clearing when button is
“PROBLEM” released.

“24V P.S.” External 24 volt power supply is not in the 15 to 32 volt range. Check and correct input voltage.
“FAILURE” During normal operating mode, this fault is self clearing when the fault is corrected. If fault occurs
during warmup or calibration modes, activate the Cal/Reset switch using the Cal Magnet.

“5V P.S” Internal 5 volt analog power supply is not in the 4.75 to 5.35 volt range. During normal operating
“FAILURE” mode, this fault is self clearing when the fault is corrected. If fault occurs during warmup or
calibration modes, activate the Cal/Reset switch using the Cal Magnet. If fault persists, return
the unit to the factory for repair.

“SENSOR” Sensor input fault. With 4 to 20 mA output sensors, the current output is below 2 mA or above
“PROBLEM” 35 mA. In normal operating mode, the unit automatically goes through warmup when this fault
clears. If this fault occurs at the end of the warmup period or calibration procedure, recalibrate
the sensor. If fault persists, check sensor condition and wiring.

“PTIR CAL” (PointWatch sensor only). The PointWatch has detected that the calibration line is low (active)
“LINE LOW” during power-up.

“PTIR” (PointWatch sensor only). The PointWatch has detected that its input voltage is below specified
“VOLT LOW” level.

“DIRTY” (PointWatch sensor only). The PointWatch has detected that its optics are dirty. Refer to the
“OPTICS” PointWatch manual for cleaning procedure.

“REPLACE” (In calibration mode) sensor is defective. Replace sensor and perform calibration procedure.
“SENSOR”

“CAL” (Cal Message) Time ran out while waiting for the gas reading to stabilize. Activate the Cal/Reset
“ABORTED” switch using the Cal Magnet.

“SENSOR” (Cal Message) Sensor reaching End Of Life. Consider replacement of the sensor in the next 1
“E.O.L.” or 2 calibrations.

“ZERO” Negative zero drift. Sensor input is –9% full scale or lower. Perform sensor calibration.
“DRIFT”

7.1 30 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

Contaminating Gases And Vapors for Catalytic • Fault detection circuitry continuously monitors for
Sensors problems that could prevent proper system response.
Gases and/or vapors that can cause permanent loss of It does not monitor external response equipment or
sensor sensitivity: the wiring to these devices. It is important that these
devices be checked initially when the system is
–– Silicone compounds often found in oils, greases installed, as well as periodically during the ongoing
and resins. maintenance program.

–– Antiknock compounds such as tetra ethyl lead, • The system must be checked periodically in the
tetra methyl lead and phosphate esters. Normal mode to ensure that those items not checked
by the transmitter diagnostic circuitry (such as output
relays) are functioning properly.
Gases and/or vapors that can cause inhibition (temporary
loss of sensitivity) of the sensing element:
SENSOR AND HYDROPHOBIC FILTER
–– Volatile halogenated compounds. REPLACEMENT

–– Tetrachloroethylene.
CAUTION
–– Fluorinated hydrocarbon. Be sure to secure all output devices that are
–– Vapors that result from hot P.V.C. actuated by the system to prevent unwanted
activation of this equipment, and remember to
–– Acids and various solvents may cause a shift in the
place these same output devices back into service
zero of electrochemical sensor.
when the checkout is complete.
–– Chlorine and Chlorinated HC.
Catalytic Sensor Replacement
NOTE For catalytic combustible gas sensors, it is necessary to
The sensor must be periodically inspected and replace the entire sensor assembly when it is defective.
calibrated following prolonged exposure to Follow the procedure below to replace the sensor.
contaminating gases and vapors.
1. Remove power to the transmitter prior to replacing
the sensor.
MAINTENANCE
2. Remove the transmitter cover and the wire shield
CAUTION within the transmitter. If a sensor termination box
Be sure to secure all output devices that are was used, remove the sensor junction box cover.
actuated by the system to prevent unwanted 3. Unplug the sensor from the transmitter module (if a
activation of this equipment, and remember to sensor termination box was used, unplug it from the
place these same output devices back into service plug inside the termination box) and unscrew it from
when the checkout is complete. the conduit entry.
4. Thread the wires for the replacement sensor through
• Periodically apply a generous amount of Lubriplate
the conduit entry, then screw the sensor into the
grease (part number 102868-001) to the internal
conduit entry and plug it in. Replace the wire
threads on the junction box cover using an
shield.
application tool. DO NOT use other lubricants, since
some materials can cause irreversible damage to the 5. Replace the junction box cover.
sensing element in the gas sensor. 6. Re-apply power. Allow time for the unit to warm
• To ensure reliable protection, it is important to check up and stabilize (approximately 24 hours for best
and calibrate the detection system on a regularly results), then calibrate.
scheduled basis. The frequency of these checks
is determined by the requirements of the particular
installation - 90 days is typical.

7.1 31 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

Electrochemical Sensor Cell Replacement NOTE
For sensors with replaceable sensor cells (toxic and Handle the sensor cell carefully. To avoid
oxygen sensors), it may not be necessary to replace possible damage, observe the normally accepted
the entire sensor housing assembly when the sensor is procedures for handling electrostatic sensitive
defective. Follow the procedure below to replace the devices. See form 75-1005 for additional
sensor cell. information.

1. Remove power to the transmitter prior to replacing 5. Be sure that the O-ring on the sensor housing is
the sensor cell. in good condition, then place the cap back on the
2. Remove the cap from the sensor base. See Figure sensor base. Tighten only until snug. Do not over
22. (There is no need to remove the sensor housing tighten.
from the junction box for this operation). 6. Re-apply power. Allow time for the unit to warm
up and stabilize (approximately one hour for best
NOTE results), then calibrate.
Compare part numbers to be sure that the correct
replacement cell is being used. An adequate supply of spare electrochemical cell
assemblies should be kept on hand for field replacement.
3. Remove the old sensor cell. The sensor cell contains For maximum protection against contamination and
a small amount of lead – dispose of properly. Check deterioration, they should not be removed from the
for corrosion or contamination on the terminals of the original protective packaging until the time of installation.
sensor base, and clean if necessary. To ensure maximum storage life, electrochemical cells
4. Determine proper orientation for the new cell, then should be stored in the unopened bag that the sensor
carefully plug it in. is shipped in, at a temperature between 32°F and 68°F
(0 to 20°C) and a relative humidity between 15 and 90
percent.

SENSOR HOUSING

SENSING ELEMENT ASSEMBLY

CAP

HYDROPHOBIC FILTER

NOTE: SENSOR APPEARANCE MAY VARY B1203

SLIGHTLY DEPENDING UPON MODEL.

Figure 22—Electrochemical Sensor Parts Identification

7.1 32 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

Hydrophobic Filter Replacement SPARE PARTS
The hydrophobic filter on the front of some of the
• Electronic Module - Specify gas sensor type and with
electrochemical sensor housings protects the sensor cell
or without optional relay package when ordering.
from contaminants in the environment, and also enables
the operation of the cell in “wet” environments without Catalytic Combustible Gas
plugging its screen. The operator should frequently PointWatch Hydrocarbon Gas
inspect the hydrophobic filter for cleanliness. A dirty filter Hydrogen Sulfide – Electrochemical
can significantly reduce the amount of gas that is able to Carbon Monoxide (specify range)
reach the sensor cell, thereby impairing the ability of the Oxygen
system to respond to a hazardous condition. If the filter Chlorine
becomes dirty or if it is damaged, it must be replaced. Sulfur Dioxide
• Calibration Gas Kits and spare cylinders - Specify
To replace the hydrophobic filter, simply unscrew the
gas and concentration when ordering.
existing filter from the housing, then replace it with a new
filter. Use care not to over tighten. • H2S Ampoule Calibration Kits.
• Spare 40 ppm H2S Ampoules
NOTE
A dirty hydrophobic filter can adversely affect the • Sensor Termination Box
response of the sensor by blocking the flow of • Lubriplate grease for threads
gas to the sensor cell. If the detector cannot be • There are many other accessories available for
calibrated or responds slowly to the calibration use with various sensors. Contact your local
gas, check the condition of the hydrophobic filter representative or the factory for information.
before replacing the sensor cell. The hydrophobic
filter should be clean and squarely seated in the
housing. DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN

PointWatch Detector Replacement Prior to returning devices, contact the nearest local
Detector Electronics office so that a Service Order
Refer to Figure 9 in this manual for wiring diagram and number can be assigned. A written statement describing
the PointWatch manual for installation and replacement the malfunction must accompany the returned device to
instructions. expedite finding the cause of the failure.

Pack the unit properly. Use sufficient packing material

in addition to an antistatic bag or aluminum-backed
cardboard as protection from electrostatic discharge.

Return all equipment transportation prepaid to the factory

in Minneapolis.

7.1 33 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 APPENDIX A

Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Description

Refer to drawing 006722-001 (Figure A-1) for applicable area classification and installation details.

Combustible
Transmitters: U9500A1001, U9500A1004, with Junction Box P/N 006264-XXX.
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3611.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per ANSI/NEMA 250. (For use with Sensor Termination box.)
• Performance verified up to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per FM 6320.

Hydrocarbon Gas Transmitters: U9500H6002 or U9500H6004, with Junction Box P/N 006264-XXX.
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3611.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per ANSI/NEMA 250. (For use with Sensor Termination box.)
• Performance verified up to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per FM 6320.

Sensor Termination Box: Model STB Series, used with Combustible units above:
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3611.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per ANSI/NEMA 250.

Combustible Gas Sensors: Model CGS:

• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.

Hydrocarbon Sensors:
Model PIR9400:
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D (T5) Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
• Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T3C) Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Tamb = –40°C to +75°C, conduit
seal not required.

Model PIRECL:
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D (T4) Ta = 75°C with intrinsically safe output for HART
Communications in accordance with control drawing 0072783-001, conduit seal not required.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4) Ta = 75°C Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

Stand-alone 4-20 mA FM Approved Gas Sensor/Transmitter:

• See specific detector rating.

7.1 A-1
5.1 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

Electrochemical
Transmitters: U9500B2002 and U9500B2004 (Hydrogen Sulfide), U9500C (Oxygen), U9500D (Chlorine),
U9500E (Carbon Monoxide) and U9500F (Sulfur Dioxide) with junction boxes P/N 006264-XXX and direct mounted
electrochemical sensor:
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3611.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per ANSI/NEMA 250. (For use with Sensor Termination box.)
• Performance verified up to 100 ppm H2S-in-air atmospheres per FM 6341 (Draft).

Sensor Termination Box: STB Series, used with Electrochemical units above:
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3611.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per ANSI/NEMA 250.

Sensors:
C7064E5014 (H2S):
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.

Sensors C7064E4012 or C7064E5012 (H2S):

• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615.

Stand-alone 4-20 mA FM Approved Gas Detector:

• See specific detector rating.

7.1 A-2
5.1 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

U9500A Series Sensor Configurations

• Model CGS Series Combustible Gas Sensors

NOTE
Sensor cross sensitivity has not been verified by FM.

NOTE
The high temperature characteristic has not been FM verified above +75°C.

NOTE
Detector Electronics combustible gas detection K-Factors are not FM verified.

U9500B THROUGH U9500H INFINITI SERIES SENSOR CONFIGURATIONS

• Models C7064E4012 and C7064E5012 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Sensors (U9500B)
• Model C7065E Oxygen (U9500C)
• Model C7067E Chlorine (U9500D)
• Model C7066E Carbon Monoxide (U9500E)
• Model C7068E Sulfur Dioxide (U9500F)
• Model PIR9400 or PIRECL Hydrocarbon (U9500H)

NOTE
FM Approval of the 4 to 20 mA input does not include or imply Approval of the gas detection apparatus such as
sensors, transmitters, or devices connected to the system. In order to maintain FM Approval of the system, all 4
to 20 mA gas detection instruments connected to the input must also be FM Approved.

NOTE
Metric straight thread types are for use in non-North American applications.

Calibration
• Calibration of the above listed sensors has been FM verified using the respective U9500 Transmitter with the Det-
Tronics 225130-001 (50% Methane) and 227115-001 H2S Calibration Kits.
• The U9500B through U9500H Series Transmitters can be used with any FM Approved 4 to 20 mA device.

7.1 A-3
5.1 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 7.1
DWG NO SH REV

8 7 6 5 4 3 1

CLASS I, DIVISION 1, GROUPS B,C & D CLASS I, DIVISION 1, GROUPS B,C & D CLASS I, DIVISION 1, GROUPS C & D
CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A,B,C & D (T4A) CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A,B,C & D (T4A) CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A,B,C & D (T4A)

Homepage
CLASS II, DIVISION 1 GROUPS E,F & G HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
CLASS II, DIVISION 2, GROUPS F & G (T4A)
D CLASS III, DIVISIONS 1 & 2 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS D
NEMA/TYPE 4X

FROM FMA APPROVED MODEL C7064E SERIES

CONTROL DEVICE
DET HYDROGEN SULFIDE SENSOR
TRONICS
MODEL U9500 XXXXX
(006705-001)
EX ALARM
%LFL HI AUX LO

OR FMA APPROVED 4-20mA DEVICE 2

INCREASE SETUP DECREASE

ACCEPT
CAL/RESET

MODEL C7064E5014
HYDROGEN SULFIDE SENSOR
(006705-001)
C MODEL U9500 SERIES C
INFINITI GAS TRANSMITTER
W/ 006264-XXX MODEL CGS SERIES
JUNCTION BOX COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR
(006630-001) (006888-001)

MODEL PIR9400 SERIES

HYDROCARBON
INFRARED GAS SENSOR

OR FMA APPROVED 4-20mA DEVICE 2

5.1
A-4
FROM FMA APPROVED MODEL C7064E SERIES
CONTROL DEVICE
DET HYDROGEN SULFIDE SENSOR
TRONICS
MODEL U9500 XXXXX
(006705-001)
EX ALARM
%LFL HI AUX LO

B OR FMA APPROVED 4-20mA DEVICE 2 B

INCREASE SETUP DECREASE

ACCEPT
CAL/RESET
MODEL C7064E5014
HYDROGEN SULFIDE SENSOR
(006705-001)

MODEL U9500 SERIES MODEL STB SERIES (OPTIONAL)

INFINITI GAS TRANSMITTER SENSOR TERMINATION BOX
W/ 006264-XXX (006723-001) MODEL CGS SERIES
JUNCTION BOX COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR
(006888-001)
(006630-001)

MODEL PIR9400 SERIES

HYDROCARBON
INFRARED GAS SENSOR

OR FMA APPROVED 4-20mA DEVICE 2

3.12.99 CDS
REV ECO NO. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

DRAWN DATE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

A TOLERANCES ARE : A
CDS 3.11.99 DIMENSION TOLERANCE
CHECKED DATE INCH (MM) INCH (MM)
0.0 (0) ±.02 ±(0.5)
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORP.
0.00 (0.0) ±.01 ±(0.25)
APP'D DATE MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55438
0.000 (0.00) ±.005 ±(0.13)
ANGLE ±1'
APP'D DATE REMOVE ALL BURRS BREAK ALL
EDGES AND SHARP CORNERS

FIRST USED ON THIS DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION CONTAIN PROPRIETARY

INFORMATION AND ANY REPRODUCTION DISCLOSURE OR USE
2. WARNING: ENSURE SENSOR HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RATING IS APPLICABLE FOR THE INTENDED USE. BILL OF MAT'L REQ. THEREOF IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
PERMISSION OF DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.
SHEET SCALE
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SIZE DRAWING NO. REV
1 OF 1 NTS
1. FMA APPROVED PRODUCT - NO MODIFICATIONS PERMITTED WITHOUT REFERENCE TO FMA. TITLE
DWG, DESIGN REFERENCE
D 006722-001 D
U9500 SYSTEM "FM"
CADDS NAME: 6722-01 d

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure A1—Device Configuration for FM Approval

95-8444

Previous Document
 APPENDIX B

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Certification Description

Refer to drawing 006880-001 (Figure B-1) for applicable area classification and installation details.

Combustible
Transmitters: U9500A1001, U9500A1004, with Junction Box P/N 006264-XXX.
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #30,
and Ex d IIC T4 per CSA E60079-0, -1.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #25.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #213.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per CSA C22.2 #94. (For use with Sensor Termination box.)
• Performance verified up to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per CSA C22.2 #152.

Hydrocarbon Gas Transmitters: U9500H6002 or U9500H6004, with Junction Box P/N 006264-XXX.
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #30,
and Ex d IIC T4 per CSA E60079-0, -1.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #25.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #213.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per CSA C22.2 #94. (For use with Sensor Termination box.)
• Performance verified up to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per CSA C22.2 #152.

Sensor Termination Box: Model STB Series, used with Electrochemical units above.
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #30.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #25.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #213.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per CSA C22.2 #94.

Combustible Gas Sensors: Model CGS:

• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #30.

Hydrocarbon Sensors:
Model PIR9400:
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D (T5) Hazardous (Classified) Locations
• Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T3C) Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Tamb = –40°C to +75°C, conduit
seal not required.

Model PIRECL:
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D (T4) Ta = 75°C with intrinsically safe output for HART
Communications in accordance with control drawing 007283-001, conduit seal not required.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4) Ta = 75°C Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

Stand-alone 4-20 mA CSA Approved Gas Sensor/Transmitter:

• See specific detector rating.

7.1 B-1
5.1 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

Electrochemical
Transmitters: U9500B2002 and U9500B2004 (Hydrogen Sulfide), U9500C (Oxygen), U9500D (Chlorine),
U9500E (Carbon Monoxide) and U9500F (Sulfur Dioxide) with junction boxes P/N 006264-XXX and direct mounted
electrochemical sensor:
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #30,
and Ex d IIC T4 per CSA E60079-0, -1.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #25.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #213.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per CSA C22.2 #94. (For use with Sensor Termination box.)

Sensor Termination Box: Model STB Series, used with Electrochemical units above.
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #30.
• Dust ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #25.
• Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T4A); Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G (T4A)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #213.
• Enclosure Rating NEMA/Type 4X (Indoor/Outdoor) per CSA C22.2 #94.

Sensors:
C7064E5014 (H2S):
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #30.

C7064E4012 or C7064E5012 (H2S):

• Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per CSA C22.2 #30.

Stand-alone 4-20 mA CSA Approved Gas Detector:

• See specific detector rating.

7.1 B-2
5.1 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

U9500A Series Sensor Configurations

• Model CGS Series Combustible Gas Sensors

NOTE
The high temperature characteristic has NOT been CSA verified above +75°C.

NOTE
Detector Electronics combustible gas detection K-factors are not CSA verified.

U9500B THROUGH U9500H INFINITI SERIES SENSOR CONFIGURATIONS

• Models C7064E4012 and C7064E5012 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Sensors (U9500B)
• Model C7065E Oxygen (U9500C)
• Model C7067E Chlorine (U9500D)
• Model C7066E Carbon Monoxide (U9500E)
• Model C7068E Sulfur Dioxide (U9500F)
• Model PIR9400 or PIRECL Hydrocarbon (U9500H)

NOTE
CSA Approval of the 4 to 20 mA input does not include or imply Approval of the gas detection apparatus such
as sensors, transmitters, or devices connected to the system. In order to maintain CSA Approval of the system,
all 4 to 20 mA gas detection instruments connected to the input must also be CSA Approved.

NOTE
Metric straight thread types are for use in non-North American applications.

Calibration
• Calibration of the above listed sensors has been CSA verified using the respective U9500 Transmitter with the Det-
Tronics 225130-001 (50% Methane) and 227115-001 H2S Calibration Kits.
• The U9500B through U9500H Series Transmitters can be used with any CSA Approved 4 to 20 mA device.

7.1 B-3
5.1 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 7.1

Homepage
5.1
B-4
Figure B1—Device Configuration for CSA certification

95-8444

Previous Document
 APPENDIX C

CE MARK
Directive Conformity

Low Voltage – 73/23/EEC.

Electromagnetic compatibility – 89/336/EEC.
ATEX – 94/9/EC.

The U9500 Gas Transmitter was tested and found to be compliant with EN50270 when wired in conduit or with shielded
cable. All screen drains shall be terminated to the chassis.
The U9500 Gas Transmitter was tested to EN50270 and are compliant for Type 1 equipment. To meet Type 2
requirements, additional transient suppression is provided for installation.

ATEX Certification
Infiniti U9500 Gas Transmitter

CE 0539 II 2 G
FM ®

EExd IIC T5-T6

DEMKO 02 ATEX 131327 X
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +60°C)
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
IP66.

Combustible gas performance certified per EN 61779-4: 2000 when used with Model CGS or any 4-20 mA stand alone
combustible gas detector.
Read and understand instruction manual before operating.
To obviate the risk of hot spots and capacitor energy storage, the enclosure must not be opened, even when isolated,
when an explosive gas atmosphere is present.
All cable entry devices and blanking elements shall be certified in type of explosion protection flameproof enclosure
“d”, suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed. Unused apertures shall be closed with suitable certified
blanking elements.
For ambient temperatures above 60°C, use field wiring suitable for maximum ambient temperature.

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):

The Infiniti Transmitter types U9500A and U9500H have an ambient temperature rating for performance of –40°C to
+75°C.
The performance of the Infiniti Transmitter types U9500B, U9500C, U9500D, U9500E, U9500F and U9500G as a safety
device in accordance with harmonized gas performance standards is not covered by this certificate.

7.1 C-1
5.1 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

Catalytic Combustible Gas Sensor (CGS)

CE 0539 II 2 G
FM ®

EEx d IIC T3, T5

DEMKO 02 ATEX 131323 X
T5 (Tamb = –40°C to +75°C)
T3 (Tamb = –55°C to +125°C).

Special Conditions for Safe Use of CGS —

The performance ambient temperature rating is limited to –40°C to +75°C.
The CGS Combustible Gas Sensor can withstand repeated exposures to 125°C for periods up to 12 hours. Sensor
replacement is recommended after a maximum of 500 hours of exposure to the 125°C temperature condition.
The CGS Combustible Gas Sensor must be used in conjunction with a CENELEC certified Detector Electronics Corp.
combustible gas detector control unit for compliance with EN 61779 series standards.
Performance verified up to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per EN61779-4.

Sensor Termination Box (STB)

CE 0539 II 2 G
FM ®

EEx d IIC T4–T6

DEMKO 02 ATEX 131324
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +60°C).
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C).
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +125°C).
IP66.

7.1 C-2
5.1 95-8444

Homepage Previous Document

 7.1
DWG NO SH REV

8 7 6 5 4 3 1

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

EEx d IIC T5-T6 EEx d IIC T4-T6 EEx d IIC T5-T6 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131327X DEMKO 02 ATEX 131324 DEMKO 02 ATEX 131326 EEx d IIC T3, T5 HAZARDOUS LOCATION
T6(Tamb = -55°C TO +60°C) T6(Tamb = -55°C TO +60°C) T6(Tamb = -55°C TO +60°C) DEMKO 02 ATEX 131323X BASED ON SENSOR RATING
T5(Tamb = -55°C TO +75°C) T5(Tamb = -55°C TO +75°C) T5(Tamb = -55°C TO +75°C) T5(Tamb = -40°C TO +75°C)

Homepage
T4(Tamb = -55°C TO +125°C) T3(Tamb = -55°C TO +125°C)

D D

HC
CGS SERIES
COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR 3 4
U9500A
(006881-001)
INFINITI GAS TRANSMITTER 3 4 2
W/ 006264-XXX
JUNCTION BOX

HC
CGS SERIES
COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR 3 4
U9500A (006881-001)
INFINITI GAS TRANSMITTER 3 4 2
W/ 006264-XXX
JUNCTION BOX SENSOR TERMINATION BOX, MODEL STB SERIES, OPTIONAL
(007006-001)

HC ATEX CERTIFIED 4-20mA

STAND ALONE DEVICE 5
C OR C
U9500B/C/D/E/F/G/H ATEX SYSTEM CERTIFIED DEVICE
INFINITI GAS
TRANSMITTER 3 4 2
(NOT PERFORMANCE VERIFIED)
W/ 006264-XXX
HC JUNCTION BOX ATEX CERTIFIED 4-20mA
STAND ALONE DEVICE 5
OR
U9500B/C/D/E/F/G ATEX SYSTEM CERTIFIED DEVICE
INFINITI GAS 3 4 2
TRANSMITTER
SENSOR TERMINATION BOX, MODEL STB SERIES, OPTIONAL
(NOT PERFORMANCE VERIFIED) (007006-001)
W/ 006264-XXX
JUNCTION BOX

HC
ATEX CERTIFIED 4-20mA
STAND ALONE DEVICE 5

5.1
OR

C-3
U9500H ATEX SYSTEM CERTIFIED DEVICE
INFINITI GAS 3 4 2
TRANSMITTER
PIRTB TERMINATION BOX, OPTIONAL 3 4
W/ 006264-XXX (007007-001)
JUNCTION BOX OR
SENSOR TERMINATION BOX, MODEL STB SERIES, OPTIONAL
(007006-001)

B B

5 WARNING: ENSURE HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RATING IS

APPLICABLE FOR THE INTENDED USE.

4 CONFORMS TO EN 61779-4
(COMBUSTIBLE GAS PERFORMANCE CERTIFIED)

3 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE ('X'):

REV ECO NO. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
THE INFINITY TRANSMITTER TYPES U9500A AND U9500H HAVE AN AMBIENT
DRAWN DATE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
A TEMPERATURE RATING FOR PERFORMANCE OF -40°C TO +75°C. TOLERANCES ARE : A
CDS 4.22.02 DIMENSION TOLERANCE
CHECKED DATE INCH (MM) INCH (MM)
0.0 (0) ±.02 ±(0.5)
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORP.
0.00 (0.0) ±.01 ±(0.25)
THE PERFORMANCE OF THE INFINITY TRANSMITTER TYPES U9500B, U9500C, APP'D DATE MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55438
0.000 (0.00) ±.005 ±(0.13)
ANGLE ±1'
U9500D, U9500E, U9500F AND U9500G AS A SAFETY DEVICE IN APP'D DATE REMOVE ALL BURRS BREAK ALL
EDGES AND SHARP CORNERS
ACCORDANCE WITH HARMONIZED GAS PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, IS NOT FIRST USED ON THIS DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION CONTAIN PROPRIETARY
COVERED BY THIS CERTIFICATE. U9500 INFORMATION AND ANY REPRODUCTION DISCLOSURE OR USE
BILL OF MAT'L REQ. THEREOF IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
2 DESIGN REFERENCE DRAWING 006956-001. NO PERMISSION OF DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.
SHEET SCALE
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SIZE DRAWING NO. REV
1 OF 1 NA
1. DEMKO APPROVED DRAWING - NO MODIFICATIONS PERMITTED TITLE
DWG, DESIGN REFERENCE
WITHOUT REFERENCE TO DEMKO. D 007387-001 C
U9500 SYSTEM "DEMKO"
CADDS NAME: 7387-01 c

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure C1—Device Configuration for ATEX Approval

95-8444

Previous Document
 ­Detector Electronics Corporation
6901 West 110th Street
Minneapolis, MN 55438 USA

T: 952.941.5665 or 800.765.3473
F: 952.829.8750
W: http://www.det-tronics.com
X3301 Multispectrum PointWatch Eclipse® Eagle Quantum Premier® Eagle Logic Solver
IR Flame Detector IR Combustible Gas Detector Safety System Safety System E: det-tronics@det-tronics.com

Det-Tronics, the DET-TRONICS logo, Infinity, and Eclipse are registered trademarks or trademarks of Detector Electronics Corporation
in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

© Copyright Detector Electronics Corporation 2009. All rights reserved.

Homepage Previous Document

 TECHNICAL BULLETIN

Catalytic Gas Sensor Conversion K-Factors

Catalytic combustible gas detection systems are best used for detection of a specific gas
or vapor type, although they will respond to a variety of flammable vapor species. The
Instrument Society of America (ISA) recommends always calibrating your catalytic sensor
with the specific vapor type that is expected to be detected at the jobsite whenever
possible. This recommendation means that every project requires some investigation as
to the gas hazard(s) expected to be detected before specifying the calibration gas.

While Det-Tronics catalytic gas detection systems are capable of accurately measuring
literally hundreds of different flammable gases, only a handful of pre-mixed, compressed
calibration gas types are offered. This means that whenever a gas or vapor must be
detected for which there is not a matching calibration gas mixture offered, a conversion “K”
factor must be used by the technician performing the calibration procedure to ensure
proper sensitivity to the vapor is provided by the system.

In a typical calibration, a known concentration (typically one-half of the sensor’s full scale
detection range) of the actual gas or vapor that is expected to be detected should be used
to calibrate the system. Det-Tronics calibration gas should be always be used to ensure
proper system calibration performance and accuracy. Calibration gas should not be used
if the oxygen concentration within the gas is listed at less than 20% by volume.

A conversion "K" factor must be used in the calibration of the system whenever detection
of gases/vapors other than the gas used in the actual calibration process will occur. See
Table #1 following for the current list of Det-Tronics "K" factors. The "K" factor represents
the relative sensor response ratio of the calibration gas to the detected gas. The "K" factor
is used within the "K" factor Equation to determine the proper transmitter output level
(span setpoint) when the sensor is exposed to the calibration gas.
The "K" factor Equation is as follows:

CxK=S

where, C= Concentration of the calibration gas, in % L.F.L.

K= Conversion "K" factor for the gas to be monitored with the given
calibration gas
S= Corrected combustible gas transmitter calibration span output level
(span setpoint)

04/24/00 Page 1 of 5

th
6901 West 110 Street n Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Tel: 612.941.5665 or 800.765.FIRE n Fax: 612.829.8750

Homepage Previous Document

 TECHNICAL BULLETIN

Catalytic Gas Sensor Conversion K-Factors

Example: Gas/vapor to be detected: Gasoline vapors

Calibration Gas: 50% L.F.L Propane in air
"K" factor: 1.04

Equation: C x K = S
50 x 1.04 = 52

For proper system sensitivity to Gasoline vapors, the transmitter span setpoint should be
adjusted to read 52% L.F.L when the sensor is exposed to 50% L.F.L Propane in air
mixture calibration gas.

If more than one calibration gas type and "K" factor is listed for a gas to be detected,
generally the best calibration gas to use is that which provides a "K" factor closest to value
1.0 (one). Note that the presence of Methane gas as a potential detectable gas is an
exception. Always use Methane calibration gas if Methane is expected to be present
within the protected area.

If a specific gas/vapor and "K" factor is not listed within Table #1, then "K" factor testing by
Det-Tronics Sensor Engineering dept. is required. There is a $100.00 fee per sample for
this service. Det-Tronics may not accept some items for testing, such as hazardous, toxic,
carcinogenic, pyrophoric, or hypergolic materials. In this case, an estimated "K" factor
may be provided based upon the Material Safety Data Sheet (M.S.D.S.), previous test
data and engineering judgement. All requests for testing must be accompanied with a
M.S.D.S for that material before any shipment of the material is made. Recent Minnesota
State law also may preclude Det-Tronics from accepting or handling certain hazardous
materials. Following is the recommended procedure for requests for "K" factor testing:

1. The request for "K" factor testing, complete with appropriate M.S.D.S., should be
issued to Det-Tronics Customer Service Dept. A purchase order issued to Det-
Tronics for testing services will be required upon request approval.
2. A one ounce sample of liquids or 7.5 liters of gaseous materials shall be packaged
and shipped in the appropriate container to attn: Gas Sensor K-Factor Test Lab.
3. A Material Safety Data Sheet must accompany each sample to be tested.
4. Technical information typically required for each compound includes: specific
gravity, molecular weight, vapor density, flashpoint, lower and upper flammability
limit.
5. All sample materials will be returned to the customer after test completion for proper
disposal.

04/24/00 Page 2 of 5

th
6901 West 110 Street n Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Tel: 612.941.5665 or 800.765.FIRE n Fax: 612.829.8750

Homepage Previous Document

 TECHNICAL BULLETIN

Catalytic Gas Sensor Conversion K-Factors

Conversion "K" Factors

Table #1 is applicable to all current Det-Tronics Combustible Gas Sensors including all
CGSS-series sensor part numbers, as well as all 225006-XXX, 226530-XXX, 226531-
XXX, 225957-XXX, 226999-XXX, and 226931-XXX series sensor part numbers.

Table #1 is not applicable to Det-Tronics C7061C series sensors (part numbers 003699-
XXX), used with R8460/8466 and U8700A - D gas detection systems.

Table #1
Gas to be detected Type of Calibration Gas

Methane Hydrogen Propane

Acetaldehyde 0.96 0.97 0.79

Acetic Anhydride 1.46 0.97 1.00

Acetone 1.44 1.65 1.04

Acetonitrile - - 1.10

Acetylene 1.12 1.56 0.95

Ammonia 1.06 1.40 0.83

Benzene 1.56 1.79 1.13

Butadiene 1.35 1.80 1.08

Butane 1.47 1.75 1.10

Calsol Thinner 325 - - 1.70

Cyclohexane 1.49 1.70 1.07

Cumene - - 1.70

Dichloroethane - - 1.12

Dicyclopentadiene 2.06 1.63 1.51

04/24/00 Page 3 of 5

th
6901 West 110 Street n Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Tel: 612.941.5665 or 800.765.FIRE n Fax: 612.829.8750

Homepage Previous Document

 TECHNICAL BULLETIN

Catalytic Gas Sensor Conversion K-Factors

Gas to be detected Type of Calibration Gas

Methane Hydrogen Propane

Diethyl Ether 1.20 1.11 0.97

Diesel fuel oil #2 - - 2.30

Dimethylformamide 1.68 1.20 1.24

Ethane 1.24 1.41 0.89

Ethanol 1.26 1.43 0.91

Ethyl Acetate - - 1.12

Ethylbenzene 1.80 - 1.40

Ethylene 1.03 1.17 0.74

Ethylene Dichloride - - 1.12

Formaldehyde 0.69 0.65 0.54

Freon 142B 2.77 2.47 2.03

Gasoline 1.45 1.65 1.04

Heptane - - 1.42

Hexane 1.87 2.14 1.35

1-Hexene 1.27 1.36 1.04

Hydrogen 0.88 1.00 0.63

Isobutane 1.47 1.75 1.10

Isobutylene 1.11 1.46 0.89

Isopentane 1.50 1.71 1.08

Isoprene 0.97 0.86 0.82

Isopropyl Alcohol 1.31 1.22 1.09

Jet Fuel A - - 1.70

Jet Fuel JP-5 - - 1.90

04/24/00 Page 4 of 5

th
6901 West 110 Street n Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Tel: 612.941.5665 or 800.765.FIRE n Fax: 612.829.8750

Homepage Previous Document

 TECHNICAL BULLETIN

Catalytic Gas Sensor Conversion K-Factors

Gas to be detected Type of Calibration Gas

Methane Hydrogen Propane

Methane 1.00 1.14 0.72

Methanol 0.96 1.09 0.69

Methyl Acrylate 1.62 1.47 1.40

Methyl Ethyl Ketone 1.66 1.90 1.20

MethylIsobutyl Ketone - - 1.25

Naptha (VM & P) 1.69 1.82 1.47

Pentane 1.50 1.72 1.08

Propane 1.39 1.59 1.00

Propylene 1.20 1.37 0.86

Stoddard Solvent 1.47 1.33 1.22

Styrene - - 1.90

Tetrahydrofuran 1.21 1.07 1.02

Toluene 1.69 1.94 1.22

Trimethyl amine 1.19 1.08 1.03

Xylene 1.75 2.20 1.33

04/24/00 Page 5 of 5

th
6901 West 110 Street n Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Tel: 612.941.5665 or 800.765.FIRE n Fax: 612.829.8750

Homepage Previous Document

 SPECIFICATION DATA
DET-TRONICS
®

Catalytic
Combustible Gas Sensor

DESCRIPTION F E AT U R E S A N D B E N E F I T S

The new family of Det-Tronics catalytic combustible gas sensors • New one piece design with integral thermal barrier
provides unmatched flammable gas detection performance in • New sinter bonded flame arrestor provides superior EMI
harsh environments and challenging conditions. protection
• 316 stainless steel housing
The heart of the catalytic sensor consists of a pair of computer
matched pellistors (beads) that provide identical electrical • Excellent impact and vibration resistance
resistance in clean air. When flammable gas is present, the • Standard poison-resistant performance rating
active bead catalyzes the combustible gas molecules, while the • Chemically etched identification and approvals label on sensor
inactive (reference) bead balances the reaction and compensates • FMR/CSA/CENELEC Approvals
for normal changes in the ambient environment. The
sophisticated design and construction of Det-Tronics catalytic • Extended operating temperature range
sensors provides excellent sensitivity, response time, and • Complete electrical and mechanical compatibility with existing
resistance to physical shock and vibration. gas products
• Comprehensive list of conversion K factors for proper
All Det-Tronics catalytic gas sensors are now poison-resistant, calibration available
and are constructed with a new, one-piece 316 stainless steel • Full two year warranty
housing. Other new features include an integral thermal barrier
• 3/4 inch NPT or 20 mm thread types
to prevent bead interaction, and a new sinter bonding technique
to ensure superior protection against electromagnetic • Six inch or optional 30 inch wire lead lengths
interference. All sensors are provided with a chemically etched • Constant voltage or constant current sensor types available.
identification and approvals label that will withstand exposure to
harsh outdoor industrial environments.

Det-Tronics catalytic sensors can be used for detection of

virtually all combustible and flammable gases, including
hydrogen, and are compatible with the entire line of Det-tronics
combustible gas transmitters and controllers.

5.1 © Detector Electronics Corporation 2002 Printed in USA (6/02) 90-1041

Homepage Previous Document

 S P E C I F I C AT I O N S S P E C I F I C AT I O N S (continued)

Temperature Range* –67°F to +302°F (–55°C to + 150°C). Certification FMR /CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C & D.
Explosion-proof verified:
–40°F to +257°F (–40°C to +125°C).
Humidity Range 0 to 99% RH, non-condensing.
Performance verified:
–40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C).
Response Time 50% full scale in < 10 seconds with 100% LFL CENELEC: CE 0539 II 2 G
applied. EEx d IIC T3, T5
90% full scale in < 30 seconds with 100% LFL DEMKO 02 ATEX 131323 X
applied. T5 (Tamb = –40°C To +75°C)
T3 (Tamb = –55°C to +125°C).
60% full scale in < 10 seconds with 100% methane
Special conditions for safe use (“X”):
by volume in air (CSA flooding test).
Performance Tamb rating =
–40°C to +75°C.
Recovery Time < 30 seconds after exposure to pure methane. Must be used in conjunction with
CENELEC certified Det-Tronics
combustible gas detector control unit
Linearity 0 to 50% LFL: ±3% LFL. for compliance with EN61779 Series
51 to 99% LFL: ±5% LFL. Standards.
CGS must be mounted to EEx ‘d’
Repeatability ±1% LFL. (Pref ≤ 20 bar) or EEx ‘e’ enclosure.
Intermittent exposure to 125°C
Long Term Stability Zero: < 1% LFL per month. (500 hours).
Span: < 1% LFL per month in clean air.
NOTE: Ensure sensor hazardous
(classified) location rating is
Temperature Stability < ±5% LFL: –13°F to +167°F (–25°C to +75°C).
applicable for the intended use.
< ±10% LFL: –40°F to –13°F (–40°C to –25°C).

O R D E R I N G I N F O R M AT I O N
Sensor Life 3 to 5 years, when environment is free of
substances and conditions known to be
detrimental to catalytic sensing elements. When ordering, please specify:
Model Description
Storage Life Indefinite, when stored in unopened original CGSS1A6V2R1XX 3/4 inch, 6 inch leads, constant voltage
packaging. CGSS1A6C2R1XX 3/4 inch, 6 inch leads, constant current
CGSS1A3V2R1X 3/4 inch, 30 inch leads, constant voltage
CGSS1A3C2R1X 3/4 inch, 30 inch leads, constant current
Calibration Cycle 90 days typical.
CGSS1C6V2R1X M20, 6 inch leads, constant voltage
CGSS1C6C2R1X M20, 6 inch leads, constant current
RFI/EMI Immunity Refer to selected transmitter specification. CGSS1C3V2R1X M20, 30 inch leads, constant voltage
CGSS1C3C2R1X M20, 30 inch leads, constant current

Dimensions L = 2.0 inches (5.1 cm)

W = 1.7 inches (4.3 cm).

* Materials suitable for installation in this range

FM ®
APPROVED

GI
STE
RED BY UL AN
D
B
Detector Electronics Corporation
RE

SI

ISO 9001 6901 West 110th Street • Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
(612) 941-5665 or (800) 765-FIRE • Fax (612) 829-8750
REG

RM
R EG

IR M

FI

ST S
E RE D F
I

T E ED
I

R
N
O
82
6

.A
25
http://www.detronics.com • E-mail: detronics@detronics.com Specifications subject to change without notice.
230
5 • N O.

Homepage Previous Document

 SPECIFICATION DATA

Infiniti ® Gas Transmitter

U9500

Available gas sensors include:

Catalytic Combustible
PointWatch Hydrocarbon
Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
NTMOS H2S
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)
Chlorine (Cl)
Oxygen (O2)

A PPL I CAT I O N S B E N E F I T S A N D F E AT U R E S

The Model U9500 Infiniti® Transmitter is designed to be used Features

with Det-Tronics gas detectors for continuous monitoring of • User-friendly setup
dangerous gases.
• Non-intrusive calibration using the internal magnetic reed
Gas concentrations are displayed on an alphanumeric display in switch, or an externally located pushbutton (not included)
%LFL, ppm, or %Vol, depending on the sensor. The transmitter • Automatic fault diagnostics and annunciation
provides a 4 to 20 milliampere output signal that corresponds to
the detected gas concentration. An optional relay package is • Sensor sensitivity and end of sensor life indication
available. • Optional relay package provides three alarm relays (high, low,
and auxiliary) and one fault relay.
Each Infiniti transmitter is used with one sensor. The sensor may
be mounted directly to the explosion-proof Infiniti housing, or it Application Flexibility
may be located remotely using a sensor separation kit. • Compatible with a wide range of Det-Tronics sensors

Typical applications include: • Field adjustable programming options include:

Operating range (toxic sensors only)
— Confined spaces where gas/vapor leaks can concentrate to Alarm setpoints
explosive or toxic levels or where oxygen levels need to be Calibration gas concentration
monitored (enclosed processing areas). Relay operation latching or non-latching, energized or
— Known high risk leak locations (points within processing de‑energized coils (relay package optional)
areas, compressor buildings). Automatic or manual calibration
— General open area coverage (storage areas). Current loop adjustment.

4.1 © Detector Electronics Corporation 2009 5/09 90-1099

Homepage Previous Document

 S P E C IFICATION S

Input Voltage 24 Vdc. Operating range is 16 to 32 One Fault relay: Form C, 5 amperes at 30
Vdc including ripple. Vdc. Normally energized for
Power Consumption with Sensor no fault condition with power
(Infiniti with alarm relays and sensor connected, 24 Vdc input voltage.) applied to device.
Toxic and Oxygen Models: 3 watts nominal, Certifications FM/CSA: Explosion-proof for
5 watts maximum. Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, and D,
Combustible Gas Model: 4.6 watts nominal, and Ex d IIC T4 (CSA only).
6.5 watts maximum. Dust ignition-proof for
PIR9400 PointWatch Model: 8.1 watts nominal, Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, and G.
10.1 watts maximum. Non-incendive for
PIRECL Eclipse Model: 7.6 watts nominal, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C,
12.4 watts maximum. and D (T4).
Current Output Linear 4 to 20 mA output. Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F and
G (T4A).
Maximum loop resistance: 600 ohms. NEMA/Type 4X.
Selectable isolated or non-isolated operation.
Performance verified per
Factory-set 2.0 mA output indicates unit is FM 6320 and FM 6341;
calibration mode (field adjustable). CSA C22.2 #152.
Less than 1.0 mA output indicates fault condition.
CENELEC: 0539 II 2 G
Display Eight character alphanumeric display indicates
EEx d IIC T5-T6
power on, gas concentration, alarm and fault
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131327 X
conditions. It also enables field adjustment of alarm
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +60°C),
setpoints, calibration gas concentration, full scale
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +70°C),
measurement range and gas type to be detected.
IP66.
Detection Range Hydrocarbon: 0 to 100% LFL for PointWatch
IR detector. (FM/CSA verified) RUSSIAN: 1Ex d IIC T6
Calalytic: 0 to 100% LFL. (Tamb = –60°C to +50°C),
T5 (Tamb = –60°C to +65°C),
H2S (EC sensor): 0 to 100 ppm, 0 to 20 ppm,
T4 (Tamb = –60°C to +75°C).
0 to 50 ppm. (FM/CSA verified)
H2S (NTMOS sensor): 0 to 100 ppm Shipping Weight Aluminum: 4.15 pounds (1.88 kilograms).
Chlorine: 0 to 10 ppm. Stainless Steel: 10.5 pounds (4.76 kilograms).
Oxygen: 0 to 25% by volume. Enclosure Epoxy coated 356 aluminum or 316 stainless steel
Carbon Monoxide: 0 to 100 ppm, 0 to 500 ppm, NEMA Type 4X and IP66.
0 to 1000 ppm.
Nitrogen Dioxide: 0 to 20 ppm. Dimensions Height: 6.57 inches (16.7 cm)
Sulfur Dioxide: 0 to 100 ppm. Base: 5.86 inches (14.9 cm) by 4.7 inches (11.9 cm)

Temperature Range Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C). Aluminum models: 3/4" NPT or M20/M25 threads.
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). Stainless steel models: 3/4" NPT or M20 threads.
5.86
Wiring 18 AWG minimum is recommended for power (14.9)
5.2
wiring to the transmitter. Larger diameter wire may (13.2)
2.7
be required to maintain a minimum of 16 Vdc at the (6.9)
transmitter for all operating conditions. Maximum
wire size for terminals is 12 AWG. 6.57
(16.7)
Relays (Optional) Three Alarm relays: Form C, 5 amperes at 30 Vdc. 4.7
(11.9)
Selectable normally energized or de-energized 3.46
as a group. Low, auxiliary and high alarm relays (8.8)

selectable as a group for latching or non-latching 1.28

(3.3)
contacts. A2307

Specifications subject to change without notice.

ER
ED BY UL
AN
Detector Electronics Corporation
T D
IS
Det-Tronics the DET-TRONICS logo, and Infinity are registered trademarks 6901 West 110th Street • Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
G

BS
RE

or trademarks of Detector Electronics Corporation in the United States, other ISO 9001
countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks Operator: (952) 941-5665 or (800) 765-FIRE
REGIS
REGI

Customer Service: (952) 946-6491 • Fax (952) 829-8750

RM

TER TE
ED FIR RED FI
M

or service marks of others.

S

NO
. 6
A 23 82
05 • NO. 25

©Copyright Detector Electronics Corporation 2009. All rights reserved. http://www.det-tronics.com • E-mail: det-tronics@det-tronics.com

Homepage Previous Document

 Series 70
High Pressure Carbon Dioxide
Fire Protection System

OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUAL

Issued October 1, 1981

Revised January, 28, 2004
S/N 70000178

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

Contents

1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2.1 Cylinder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2.2 Discharge Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.3 Flexible Discharge Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.4 Solenoid Pilot Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.5 Flexible Connectors - Piloting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.6 Discharge Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.7 Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.8 Bleeder Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.9 Cylinder Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.10 Selector Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.11 Pilot Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.12 Hex Nipple - Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.13 Shuttle Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.14 Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.15 Pressure Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.16 Discharge Delay Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.17 Electrical Remote Manual Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.18 Relief Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.19 Electric Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.20 Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.21 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.22 Fire Detection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.23 Fire Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.24 Description of Automatic System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3 Equipment Assembly Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3 Cylinder Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4 Pilot Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.5 Discharge Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.6 Cylinder Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.7 Flexible Discharge Connector Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.8 Solenoid Pilot Valve and Pilot Connector Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.9 Discharge head Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page i

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

4 Mechanical and Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3 Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

5 Testing, Inspection, and Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2 Functional Test Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.3 Electric Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.4 Discharge Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.5 Selector Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.6 Shuttle Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.7 Pressure Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.8 Electric Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.9 Bleeder Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.10 Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.11 Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.12 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.13 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.14 Detection and Actuation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.15 Piping and Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.16 Auxiliary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.17 Storage Rack and Cylinder Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.18 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.19 Cylinder Content (Weight) Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.20 Solenoid Pilot Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page ii

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

Foreword

Chemetron Fire Systems reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it deems necessary without
notification. This publication is intended to describe the state of this product at the time of its publication, and
may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

This technical manual provides information regarding the Operation and Service of a Chemetron Series 70 High
Pressure Carbon Dioxide Fire Protection System. This is a single volume technical manual arranged in 5
chapters.

This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose, without
the express written consent of Chemetron Fire Systems.

Any questions concerning the information presented in this manual should be addressed to the Matteson Office.

IMPORTANT
CHEMETRON HPCO2 SYSTEMS, MANUFACTURED BY CHEMETRON FIRE SYSTEMS, ARE TO BE DESIGNED,
INSTALLED, MAINTAINED, AND TESTED BY QUALIFIED, TRAINED PERSONNEL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOL-
LOWING STANDARDS OR REGULATIONS.

• Instructions and Limitations of this manual.

• NFPA 12, Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems.
• NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
• NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code.
• Storage, handling, transportation, service, and maintenance of cylinder assemblies shall only be
by personnel trained in the proper procedures in accordance with Compressed Gas Association
(CGA) Pamphlets.

CGA pamphlets are published by the Compressed Gas Association,

1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.

Copyright ©2004 Chemetron Fire Systems. All Rights Reserved.

Chemetron Fire Systems and Cardox are registered trademarks of Chemetron Fire Systems.

4801 Southwick Drive • Matteson, IL 60443

708/748-1503 • FAX 708/748-2847
www.chemetron.com info@chemetron.com

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page iii

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

WARRANTY

Seller warrants that this product will, under normal use and service, be free from
defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
original sale. Seller agrees, upon written notice from Buyer given no later than thirty
(30) days after the defect is discovered, to repair or replace, at the Seller's option, any
part which, after examination by Seller is disclosed to have been defective, provided
that such product is returned to Seller, transportation charges prepaid, during the
warranty period. This warranty does not apply to any damage resulting from accident,
improper installation, alteration, misuse or abuse. The full extent of Seller's warranty
obligations are to repair or replace any defective part.

THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS OF SELLER, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY

OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED. The warranty for items not manufactured by Seller is limited to the warranty
obligations of Seller's suppliers and shall be subject to performance of such warranty
obligations by the suppliers.

SELLER IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY OTHER COSTS, DELAYS, LABOR CHARGES, OR CLAIMS,
NOR FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, CONTINGENT OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO THE
PRODUCT FOR ITS USE.

Seller neither assumes nor authorizes any person to assume for it any other
obligation or liability in connection with this product.

WARRANTY PERIOD LIMITATIONS: While the warranty period begins as of the

date the equipment is shipped from our facility (and extends for one year from this date),
the warranty terms do not become effective until payment in full has been received by
Chemetron Fire Systems. Therefore, a delay in payment will result in a diminished
warranty period.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page iv

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

1 General Description

Each Chemetron Fire Systems high pressure carbon dioxide system is specifically engineered to
accommodate the individual demands of the areas to be protected. The wide range and design of
available components provides the flexibility necessary for this custom design. The use of multiple
storage cylinders and selector valves enables a single group of cylinders to serve more than one
protected area on an individual basis.

2 System Description

Figures illustrating typical system arrangements and a companion list of equipment are provided at
the end of this section. Figure 2A illustrates a typical Series 70 system arrangement for a single
protected area without a connected reserve cylinder bank. These basic schemes can be readily
modified to serve more than one area by the addition of selector valves and the necessary related
control devices as illustrated in Figure 2B. They can further be modified by the proper treatment of
cylinder piloting and manifolding to actuate only the required number of cylinders (partial discharge)
of a bank to satisfy the varying requirements for each of the protected areas.

The cylinders are secured in a rack or racks and the discharge outlets are manifolded together in groups
of up to twelve cylinders. Each system must include at least one pilot cylinder since the pilot cylinder
serves to initiate the discharge of all other cylinders (slave cylinders) in the system. Two pilot cylinders
are required for systems involving three or more cylinders. It is important to note that the pilot cylinders
are normally located in the No. 1 and No. 2 positions in the rack, starting at the end of the manifold
farthest from the manifold discharge outlet.

NOTE
THE “AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION” MAY REQUIRE THE PILOT CYLINDERS TO BE LOCATED IN SOME OTHER
POSITION THAN AS STATED ABOVE.

A description of the various components is covered in the following paragraphs.

2.1 Cylinder Assembly (Plate H-26A)

Carbon dioxide is stored in specially designed cylinder assemblies. These are available in a number
of capacities and are charged with carbon dioxide to a fill density up to 68%. Fill density is simply the
ratio of the weight of carbon dioxide that is to be put into a cylinder to the weight of water that can be
put into that cylinder. (Department of Transportation regulations uses as their reference condition water
at 60°F or 62.29995 lb/cu. ft.)

Standard cylinder sizes are 50, 75 and 100 pound carbon dioxide capacity. Each cylinder is equipped
with a cylinder record card showing cylinder serial number and weights. Additionally, the serial number
is also stamped on the shoulder of the cylinder along with the hydrostatic test date. Each cylinder
assembly is equipped with a threaded steel cap for physical protection of the cylinder valve during
shipment and handling.

The cylinder assembly is composed of a cylinder, a dip tube and a cylinder valve.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 1

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

2.1.1 Cylinder
The steel cylinders are manufactured to the requirements of D.O.T. for compressed gas and have
internal neck threads (1" NPT) for cylinder valve connection.

2.1.2 Dip Tube

A threaded dip tube extends from the cylinder valve down to the bottom of the cylinder. The steel tube
has a 3/4” O.D. and .035" wall thickness. The threads are 1/2” NPT.

2.1.3 Cylinder Valve (Plate H-27A)

The cylinder valve has a forged brass body with an internal disc carrier and seat disc held in the normally
closed position by a spring and cylinder pressure. The body has external threads for connection of
a discharge head and for connection to a cylinder (1" NPT). The cylinder valve has two other
connections as follows:

2.1.3.1 Safety Disc Connection

A frangible disc is connected to the valve body and serves as a pressure relief device to protect the
cylinder against excessive internal pressure. Its disc rupture point is in the range of 2650 to 3000 psi.
The safety disc nut is of a type that will relieve pressure without cylinder recoil.

2.1.3.2 Fill Check Connection

A fill check connection housing a fill check valve serves for cylinder filling operations and also for
attachment of a Solenoid Pilot Valve Assembly on those cylinders used for piloting other cylinders.
The threads are .825-14NGO-RH-EXT (CGA No. 320).

2.2 Discharge Heads

Each cylinder is equipped with a discharge head that attaches to the cylinder by means of a swivel
nut that engages the threads of the cylinder valve. Two types of discharge heads are used, namely
pilot operated and pressure operated. Both types include an internal operating piston connected to
a hollow stem that serves to upset the cylinder valve on actuation and also serves as an outlet for the
cylinder discharge. A ball check at the top of the stem provides a safety feature to prevent excessive
loss of carbon dioxide should the system be actuated while a cylinder assembly is removed for weighing
or servicing. Both heads have a 1/2” NPT female discharge connection.

2.2.1 Pilot Operated Discharge Head (Plate H-30A)

A pilot operated discharge head has a 1/4” NPT connection for pilot pressure inlet directly to the top
of the piston and is used only on pilot cylinders, since these are the ones that are actuated by pilot
pressure and are discharged first. This discharge head will also operate from manifold pressure which
is applied against the piston. An internal vent serves to prevent accumulation of pressure on the piston
in case of leakage through the solenoid actuator valve and thus prevents accidental discharge.

A handwheel arrangement on the pilot operated discharge head permits actuation on a manual basis,
thereby overriding and independent of electric power for pilot pressure. It is used to activate the system
in cases where a fire is detected visually before the fire detecting devices operate or if a power failure
occurs.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 2

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

To operate the pilot operated discharge head manually, turn the handwheel counterclockwise. The
handwheel needs to be turned only far enough for the piston to upset the cylinder valve. The cylinder
valve will be fully opened by the carbon dioxide pressure and will close when the cylinder is empty.
A pull-pin and seal locates the handwheel in its normal position. It must be manually reset.

Normally the pilot operated head on pilot cylinders for an extended discharge does not have a
handwheel since actuation is from the initial discharge cylinders, which have the handwheel for manual
actuation.

Each system must include at least one pilot operated discharge head since the pilot cylinder serves
to initiate the discharge of all other cylinders (slave cylinders) in the system. Two pilot operated
discharge heads are required for systems involving three or more cylinders.

2.2.2 Pressure Operated Discharge Head (Plate H-29A)

A pressure operated discharge head is used on all but the pilot cylinders. It has the same construction
as a pilot operated discharge head except that it lacks the pilot connection and the handwheel. It is
operated by manifold pressure from the pilot cylinder discharge, which is applied through the discharge
connection to the piston.

2.3 Flexible Discharge Connector (Plate H-31A)

A 1/2” flexible connector is used to connect each discharge head to the cylinder manifold. They have
a Teflon liner and a stainless steel wire braid cover. There are 1/2” male pipe thread connections on
each end and one end also has a union joint for easy make-up without twist.

2.4 Solenoid Pilot Valve Assembly (Plate H-47A)

The system utilizes a solenoid pilot assembly to provide pilot pressure for actuation whether system
actuation is automatic by fire detection device or by manual-electric release station. The assembly
comes in various voltages.

The solenoid pilot valve assembly, including a pressure gauge and adapter with swivel nut, is attached
to the fill check connection of the cylinder valve. A pin in the adapter upsets the fill check valve when
the swivel nut is almost tight, at which time the O-ring seal prevents agent loss. With the check valve
open, pilot cylinder pressure is applied to the normally closed solenoid valve and the pressure gauge.
The pressure gauge provides a means of visual surveillance of the pressure condition within the cylinder
and also of the fact that the solenoid valve is under continuous pressure. The pressure gauge will
show the vapor pressure of the liquid carbon dioxide at ambient storage temperatures. Loss of pressure
will take place only when all the liquid carbon dioxide in the cylinder has been removed, assuming
the ambient temperature remains constant. Thus loss of pressure indicates the cylinder is virtually
empty. Actuation of the solenoid pilot valve assembly permits pressure to be applied through a pilot
hose connector to the pilot connection on the discharge head, which in turn opens the cylinder valve
resulting in discharging the cylinder.

The solenoid pilot valve assembly can be removed for servicing or testing without loss of agent since
the fill check valve will close as the assembly is removed.

A flexible electrical conduit is required for connection to the solenoid pilot valve assembly to the system
conduit. The flexibility facilitates removal of the assembly as well as cylinder weighing and servicing.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 3

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

2.5 Flexible Connectors - Piloting (Plate H-31)

Lengths of 3/16" flexible connectors are used to interconnect the cylinder valve devices and for
connections to the pilot manifolds. These connectors have a stainless steel wire braid cover and a
Teflon liner and are fitted at each end with 1/4” swivel flare nut.

2.6 Discharge Manifolds (Plates H-36B-1 thru B-4 and H-36C-1 thru C-4)
When manifolds are supplied by Chemetron, they are manufactured with steel pipe, standard weight
(schedule 40) for 3/4” and extra heavy (schedule 80) for 1-1/4”. The fittings are galvanized 300 pound
malleable iron for 3/4” manifolds and galvanized 300 pound malleable iron or 1000 pound ductile iron
for 1-1/4” manifolds.

The manifolds for systems that have a main and reserve bank also incorporate check valves and bleeder
valves. For small systems with a maximum of six main and six reserve cylinders, the check valves
are part of the manifolds. For larger systems, these valves are incorporated into the piping system.

2.7 Check Valve (Plates H-55, H-55A and H-55B)

Check valves in sizes 1/2” to 3" are used to isolate the main cylinder manifold from the connected
reserve cylinder manifold so that a discharge from one will not enter the other and cause actuation
of that bank of cylinders.

2.8 Bleeder Valve (Plate H-56)

Bleeder valves are used in the main and reserve bank discharge manifolds when a connected reserve
bank of cylinders is included. The bleeder valve vents accidental check valve leakage during discharge
of one of the cylinder banks. The valve closes when manifold pressure reaches approximately 20
psig to prevent loss of agent under normal discharge conditions.

2.9 Cylinder Rack (Plates H-9A through H-24E)

A cylinder rack of black enameled steel framing is furnished to support the cylinders and manifolds.
Formed saddles, brackets and clamps, along with cadmium plated hardware, is provided to secure
the cylinders and manifolds to the racks. The storage rack is designed to be either wall mounted or
free standing. When specified, a weigh track can be provided for the rack for the purpose of attaching
a scale (Plate H-25) when weighing cylinders.

2.10 Selector Valves (Plates H-54, H-54A, and H-54E)

Systems protecting more than one area on an individual basis require selector valves to direct the
discharged carbon dioxide into the desired area. The selector valves are available in various sizes
from 1/2” through 6". The sizes up through 2" have bronze bodies and caps. The larger sizes are
cast steel. All are pressure operated, having a seat disc and disc carrier connected by a stem to a
piston. Application of pilot pressure from an associated pilot control valve to the selector valve piston
causes the selector valve to open and remain open until pilot pressure above the piston is exhausted.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 4

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

2.11 Pilot Control Valve (Plate H-53B)

A pilot control valve is used to provide the pilot pressure for each selector valve. The valve has a forged
brass body with brass and stainless trim parts. The valve is pressure operated having a two part piston
connected by a stem to a disc carrier and seat disc. The two part piston serves to lock the valve in
the open position until pressure within the valve is depleted when the cylinders have emptied. Pressure
for piloting the pilot control valve is supplied from the discharge manifold. It is applied to the chamber
above the pilot control valve piston by means of a two-way solenoid valve and filter. Pilot pressure
for actuating the selector valve is supplied from the discharge manifold trough the pilot control valve.
A handwheel is provided on the valve for manual operation in case of a power failure.

2.12 Hex Nipple - Vented (Plate H-56A)

A vented hex nipple is used to connect a solenoid valve to port A of a pilot control valve. The small
vent hole is used to bleed off any pressure that could otherwise accumulate and result in a false valve
operation.

2.13 Shuttle Valve (Plate H-38)

Shuttle valves (double check valves) are used in some pilot line arrangements to isolate sections of
the pilot lines when certain sections are common to several areas. The shuttle valve is in effect a tee
that permits two inlet lines to converge into a common side outlet. Pressure at one inlet moves an
internal shuttle to seal off the other inlet.

2.14 Pressure Switch (Plates H-59, H-59A, and H-59F)

Pressure switches are used in the system to implement the shutdown of various items of equipment
such as fans, power supplies, and for annunciation and alarm purposes. These switches require manual
reset.

2.15 Pressure Release (Plate H-58)

Pressure releases are used for closing doors, dampers, etc., on actuation of the system. They have
an internal piston and an external spring clip to which is attached a cable or chain to hold the released
device in the open position. The pressure releases are generally connected by piping to the discharge
piping. Pressure from the discharge forces the piston forward in the release thereby releasing the
spring clip and permitting the door (self-closing type), damper, etc., to close.

2.16 Discharge Delay Devices

In most instances the discharge is delayed for a predischarge warning period. This is normally ac-
complished either electrically or pneumatically.

2.16.1 Electrical Discharge Delay Devices

The discharge from automatic means (detection devices) or electric remote manual release is normally
accomplished by including a time delay relay or a timer in the automatic actuation circuit. The electrical
impulse from a detection device is delayed from reaching the solenoid pilot valve for a pre-determined
period, during which an alarm is sounded to alert personnel.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 5

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

2.16.2 Pneumatic Discharge Delay Device (Plates H-60A and H-61)

This device can be used in connection with a manifold blocking valve to delay a discharge. In such
cases a pressure operated valve is inserted in the discharge manifold between the pilot cylinders and
the balance of the cylinders. System actuation results in actuation of the pilot cylinders immediately,
but no discharge can occur until the blocking valve receives pilot pressure. Pressure from the pilot
cylinder portion of the manifold is routed through the discharge delay device on a delayed basis to
the blocking valve, causing it to open. With the blocking valve open, the pilot cylinder discharge will
enter the balance of the cylinder manifold and cause all other cylinders to be discharged through the
system piping along with the pilot cylinder discharge.

2.17 Electrical Remote Manual Release (Various)

These devices (located at one or more doors to the protected area) provide a manual means of actuating
the system in the event a fire is observed by personnel prior to detection device response. Several
types are available, although the most common is a pushbutton station with a breakglass device to
preclude accidental operation, or a toggle switch station with a pull pin and seal to preclude accidental
operation.

Operation of a release energizes the solenoid valve on the pilot cylinder valve either directly, or indirectly
through a relay, and causes system actuation.

2.18 Relief Device (Plate H-57A)

A frangible disc assembly in the discharge line ruptures if the line pressure exceeds 2650 to 3000 psi
due to expansion of carbon dioxide trapped between selector valves and manifold.

2.19 Electric Transfer Switch

A toggle switch station, with a pull pin and seal to preclude accidental operation, is used to direct
automatic actuation to the Main or Reserve bank.

2.20 Nozzles (Plates H-50 & 50A, H-51, 51B & 51C H-52 & 52A, H-52L-1 through L-8)
Total flooding nozzles are available in several configurations with drilled orifice or orifices. The
equivalent orifice code is stamped on the body. Some nozzles have a red enameled spun steel shell
attached with lock nut. This shell is flanged for additional strength and for easy attachment of frangible
covers. A flange kit, when specified, permits mounting nozzle on tank or duct.

2.21 Alarms
Alarms may be electric or gas-operated to suit installation. Various types are used for hazard or
discharge warning, depending on noise level and environment. 110V AC or 24V DC is standard. Other
voltages and explosionproof alarms are supplied when specified.

2.22 Fire Detection Devices

Automatic actuation of a system can be provided by using any one of a number of Underwriters
Laboratories Listed or Factory Mutual Approved detection devices such as ionization products of
combustion devices, smoke detection devices, thermal switches, etc., depending on the nature of fire
that can be predicted for an area. Sometimes more than one type is used to provide the most positive
response. All involve the transmission of an electrical impulse that energizes the solenoid pilot valve,
either directly or through a relay, and causes system actuation.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 6

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

2.23 Fire Control Panel

The Chemetron fire control panels are designed to simplify both the specification and installation of
control panels for high pressure carbon dioxide fire suppression systems. Each panel is a single
compact unit with all solid state internal circuitry for maximum reliability. The units are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and/or approved by FM for releasing device service and are engineered
to perform all of the functions required by NFPA 72A and 72D for local non-coded automatic alarm
and fire control service if external alarms are not required.

The Chemetron fire control panels can be furnished as conventional or multi-hazard addressable type
control panels.

The panels are designed to operate with a primary power source of 115/230V AC, 50-60 HZ, single
phase power that is stepped down to 24VDC for internal circuitry.

The fire control panels retain their UL listing and/or FM approval requirements if they are used to power
and control 24VDC 2-wire smoke detectors, heat detectors and solenoid-type release devices, provided
they are approved in conjunction with the panel by UL and/or FM. For further information, contact
Chemetron.

2.24 Description of Automatic System Operation (Figure 2.24)

Automatic actuation is powered by vapor pressure from the one or more pilot storage cylinders. The
Series 70 cylinder valve is designed to maintain cylinder pressure below the seat assembly (C). The
pressure exerted by the spring (D) and the internal pressure forces a seal between the elastomer in
the seat assembly (C) and the machined seat ring in the cylinder valve (A). Pilot pressure is applied
continuously to a normally closed solenoid pilot valve assembly (F), which is connected to the valve
port through a specially machined adapter fitting. A pressure gauge is part of the assembly to provide
visual indication of the pressure in the container. The solenoid actuator is connected by a wiring circuit
to detection devices in the protected area. A signal from a detection device causes the solenoid actuator
valve to open and apply pilot cylinder vapor pressure to the discharge head. Pressure above the
discharge head piston (B) causes the piston to move down to unseat the cylinder valve (A), permitting
a discharge from the cylinder to the cylinder manifold. Manifold pressure acting on the pistons of the
discharge heads of the remaining connected cylinders causes them to discharge. The discharge heads
are self-energizing and hold the cylinder valve open while the cylinder discharges completely. A vent
in the discharge head prevents accidental operation of a discharge head in case of leakage through
the solenoid actuator valve.

The piston of all cylinder heads has a ratio of 9 to 1 to insure proper function under all pressure
conditions.

2.24.1 Selector Valves

When selector valves are used to permit a single cylinder bank to serve more than one protected area,
a pressure operated 3-way pilot valve is provided for each selector valve. Pilot pressure for operation
of the selector valve is normally taken from the discharge manifold. The pilot valve is usually actuated
by a solenoid valve utilizing either discharge manifold pressure or control cylinder pressure.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 7

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

HANDWHEEL

DISCHARGE
(G) INLET
CONNECTION
(B) PISTON
DISCHARGE HEAD
ASSEMBLY

(C) SEAT
(D) SPRING (A) VALVE ASSEMBLY
SAFETY DISC
(E) PRESSURE GAUGE/
ASSEMBLY
SOLENOID CONNECTION

CYLINDER

STANDBY
HANDWHEEL

DISCHARGE
(G) INLET CONNECTION
(B) PISTON
DISCHARGE HEAD
(D) SPRING ASSEMBLY
(C) SEAT
(A) VALVE
ASSEMBLY
(F) SOLENOID
PILOT VALVE SAFETY DISC
ACTUATED ASSEMBLY

CYLINDER

ACTUATED

Figure 2-24

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 8

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

Legend
Series 70 High Pressure Carbon Dioxide System (Figures 2A & 2B)
Item Description Stock Plate
Number Number
H-36B-1 to B-4
1 Discharge Manifold Various
H-36C-1 to C-4
2 Cylinder Assembly (includes cylinder, dip tube, and Various H-26A
cylinder valve)
3 Discharge Head - Pilot Operated 306101437 H-30A
4 Discharge Head - Pressure Operated 106107154 H-29A
5 Flexible Connector - 1/2” x 14-1/2” long 50260263 H-31A
6 Solenoid Pilot Valve Assembly Various H-47A
7 Elbow - 1/4” MPT x 1/4” Flare 50440063 N/A
8 Flexible Connector - 3/16" x 16" long 102602604 H-31
H-59
9 Pressure Switch Various H-59A
H-59F
H-54
10 Selector Valve Various H-54A
H-54E
11 Pilot Control Valve 106106404 H-53B
12 Solenoid Valve Various H-47
13 1/4” Filter 708600044 H-57
14 Relay Cabinet Various
H-55
15 Check Valve H-55A
H-55B
16 Transfer Switch (Main-Reserve) 101700789
17 Bleeder Valve - 1/4” 106107311 H-56
18 Hex Nipple - Vented 304400328 H-56A
19 Relief Valve - Rupture Disc 307100065 H-57A

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 9

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 2A

Figure 2B

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 10

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

3 Equipment Assembly Instructions

3.1 General
The equipment supplied for Chemetron Fire Systems high pressure carbon dioxide systems is designed
to perform the desired function. The ultimate success, however, is dependent on the care with which
the system is installed, tested, and maintained. These instructions are intended to assist the installer
in properly assembling the equipment into a workable system in a minimum of time.

CAUTION
THE CYLINDERS ARE DESIGNED TO HOLD PRESSURIZED CO2 IN LIQUID FORM AT ATMOSPHERIC TEMPERATURES,
CORRESPONDING TO A NOMINAL PRESSURE OF 850 PSI (AT 70°F TEMPERATURE), AND ACCORDINGLY MUST
BE HANDLED CAREFULLY. ALTHOUGH THE CYLINDER VALVE IS OF HEAVY FORGED BRASS CONSTRUCTION, IT
COULD BE DAMAGED IF THE CYLINDER IS DROPPED. THE CYLINDERS AS DELIVERED CANNOT BE DISCHARGED
ACCIDENTALLY. DISCHARGE OF AN UNSECURED AND DISCONNECTED CYLINDER COULD BE EXTREMELY
HAZARDOUS.

The only way a cylinder can be discharged is by actuation of the manual handwheel on the pilot cylinders
or by pilot pressure from the control cylinder or from a companion cylinder through the manifold.

CAUTION
ACCORDING, NEVER CONNECT THE SOLENOID PILOT VALVE OR FLEXIBLE PILOT CONNECTORS TO THE CYLINDERS
UNTIL THE CYLINDERS HAVE BEEN PROPERLY SECURED IN THE RACK AND THE FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE CONNECTORS
SECURED TO THE CYLINDER AND THE DISCHARGE MANIFOLD.

3.2 Tools
No special tools are required to assemble the equipment. Socket wrenches are required for the smaller
bolts and nuts. The check valves, male connector, male connector nut, and discharge tube flare nut
have hex wrenching surfaces. In order to avoid mutilating these hex surfaces, pipe wrenches should
not be used. Instead, use an adjustable hex wrench or crescent wrench to tighten these items. As
a minimum, an 18" wrench should be used in order to obtain sufficient torque.

3.3 Cylinder Rack

Cylinder Cylinder Length of
The cylinder rack is shipped knocked-down and must
Assembly Diameter Stud Exposed
be assembled in the field. Refer to Plates H-9A through
H-24E for rack details and cylinder clamping arrange- 50 lb.
8-5/8" 7-1/2”
ment. When the rack is assembled, it should be (2350 cu.in.)
aligned so that uprights are parallel. It is desirable to 75 lb.
9-5/16" 8-1/2”
have the rack bolted to the floor and a wall or other (3094 cu.in.)
vertical surface. 100 lb.
10-5/8” 8"
(4125 cu.in.)
Apply studs to holes in the rack rail. Use one nut and
lock washer behind rail and one nut in front of rail. The
exposed portion of studs behind front of rail for various cylinder diameters is shown in the table.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 11

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

3.4 Pilot Manifold

At this point it is desirable to install a pilot manifold in the rack before cylinders and connectors interfere
with work space.

Install 1/4” schedule 40 pilot piping between the rack uprights as shown on the job drawings. Some
holes for supporting the pilot manifold are provided in the uprights; however, it may be necessary to
drill additional holes to suit job conditions. Pilot manifold height should be such that flexible pilot hose
connections from the manifold to the pilot port of the pilot cylinder discharge heads will take a normal
drape without severe bending. (Refer to Plates H-37.) The pilot manifold must include a tee for
subsequent pilot hose connection. A cap is connected to the end of the manifold opposite from control
cylinder location. Connect the other end of the pilot manifold to the solenoid pilot valve piping as shown
on system drawings.

3.5 Discharge Manifold Manifold Height

Cylinder Floor to Centerline
Mount the discharge manifold to the rack Assembly
uprights or brackets by means of U bolts. 3/4” Manifold 1-1/4” Manifold
Manifold must be level and cylinder connections 50 lb.
vertical. Do not tighten U bolts at this stage of 66" 66-1/4”
(2350 cu.in.)
installation since some minor adjustments may
75 lb.
be required when connecting to the cylinders. 71" 71-1/4”
(3094 cu.in.)
Manifold heights for various cylinder and mani-
fold sizes are shown in the table. 100 lb.
71" 71-1/4”
(4125 cu.in.)

3.6 Cylinder Installation

When it has been determined that the weight is within acceptable limits, install the cylinders in their
rack position between the studs and apply straps to the stud ends. Position cylinders so that lettering
on the cylinder is in front. Secure straps with the hex nuts and flat washers provided.

3.7 Flexible Discharge Connector Installation

Connect a 1/2” flexible discharge connector (male coupling end) to each discharge manifold cylinder
connection. Then connect a discharge head to the union coupling end of each flexible connector.
Use a small amount of a good grade of pipe thread dope or Teflon tape on the threads when making
these connections. A pilot operated discharge head with handwheel (Plate H-31A) is used for pilot
cylinders and a pressure operated discharge head (Plate H-29A) for all other cylinders.

CAUTION
DO NOT YET ATTACH DISCHARGE HEADS TO CYLINDER VALVES!

3.8 Solenoid Pilot Valve and Pilot Connector Installation

Remove protective cap from cylinder valve fill-check connection and attach the solenoid pilot valve
assembly (Plate H-47A) to this port using the swivel nut, making certain that the nut is tightly secured.
The solenoid valve connector has an internal probe that upsets the cylinder fill-check valve when the
swivel nut is almost secured. An internal O-ring is designed to designed to seal the connection before
the swivel nut is secured, thereby eliminating any appreciable leakage when connection is being made.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 12

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

If the cylinder pressure gauge check valve has been properly upset by attachment of the solenoid
pilot valve, the pressure gauge should indicate a pressure of 850 psi at 70°F temperature of cylinder
contents. Refer to NFPA 12, Figure A-1-5.2 for pressures at other temperatures.

NOTE
ALTHOUGH THE SOLENOID PILOT VALVES ARE THOROUGHLY TESTED FOR LEAKS, THERE IS THE POSSIBILITY
THAT A PARTICLE OF FOREIGN MATERIAL MAY ENTER THE ASSEMBLY DURING HANDLING OR ATTACHING TO THE
CYLINDER VALVE. THE SOLENOID VALVE CAN BE TESTED FOR LEAKS WHILE UNDER PRESSURE BY ATTACHING
A FLARE CAP TO THE ELBOW OUTLET AND APPLYING LEAK DETECTOR SOLUTION TO THE SMALL VENT HOLE AT
THE BOTTOM OF THE ELBOW. LEAK TEC, FORMULA 372 HAS BEEN FOUND TO BE AN EXCELLENT SOLUTION
FOR THIS PURPOSE. THE APPEARANCE OF BUBBLES AT THE VENT HOLE INDICATES LEAKAGE THROUGH THE
SOLENOID VALVE. IF A LEAK IS FOUND, THE PILOT VALVE ASSEMBLY SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM THE CYLINDER
VALVE TO AVOID LOSS OF CYLINDER CONTENTS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION TAKEN TO ELIMINATE LEAK SOURCE,
OR REPLACE SOLENOID PILOT VALVE ASSEMBLY. OTHER POTENTIAL SOURCES OF LEAKAGE CAN ALSO BE
CHECKED BY APPLICATION OF LEAK DETECTOR TO OTHER THREADED CONNECTIONS OF THE ASSEMBLY.

Refer to Plates H-37 for pilot kit connection details. Apply small amounts of good grade pipe thread
dope or Teflon tape to all NPT fittings.

CAUTION
DO NOT YET ATTACH DISCHARGE HEADS TO CYLINDER VALVES!

Attach a flexible electrical connector to the solenoid pilot valve 1/2” NPT conduit connection by drawing
the 24" long wire leads through the connector. The flexible connector length will be determined by
the relative positions of the junction box and the solenoid pilot valve.

CAUTION
DO NOT YET CONNECT THE SOLENOID VALVE LEADS TO THE ACTUATION WIRING!

At this point (provided discharge head has not been connected to the cylinder valve), the system
cannot be actuated.

Finally, connect the solenoid pilot valve wire leads to the actuation circuit.

At this point if the actuation circuit is energized for any reason, the solenoid valves will be actuated,
the pilot discharge head will be operated and vapor will be lost through a bleed port in the discharge
head. If this occurs, immediately de-energize the actuation circuit in order to avoid loss of vapor
pressure from the cylinder. Check circuit to determine cause of actuation.

3.9 Discharge Head Installation

Before connecting discharge heads to cylinders, make certain that the plungers of ALL discharge heads
are in the non-actuated position (i.e., check the plunger to see that it is retracted, refer to Figure 3.9).
When the piston is in the non-actuated (retracted) position, the end of the plunger should be
approximately 3/4” inside the bottom of the union nut.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 13

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

The discharge nut may now be connected to the cylinder valve and secured by fully turning the union
nut down hand-tight to cover all exposed threads on the valve body. The system is now armed and
ready for actuation if called upon.

NONACTUATED POSITION ACTUATED POSITION

NONACTUATED POSITION ACTUATED POSITION

Figure 3.9 - Pilot and Pressure Operated Discharge Heads

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 14

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

4 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

4.1 General
A. These specifications contain minimum requirements for installing Chemetron systems and shall
govern except where the requirements of a specific job specification are more rigid and take
precedence. Substandard material and workmanship shall be cause for rejection of the installation
and the Installation Contractor, hereinafter called contractor, shall replace and/or reinstall as required
to meet Chemetron standards at his own expense and without delay.

B. Materials shall be new and of the highest grade, free from defects and imperfections. They shall
be products of recognized reputable manufacturers.

C. Workmanship shall be in accordance with the best modern standard practice.

D. Drawings and specifications generally identify work to be done, but it is the responsibility of the
contractor to visit the project site and acquaint himself with both the job and working conditions.
Job drawings show distribution piping in schematic and, therefore, are not necessarily exact.
Length and routing may have to be varied somewhat to suit job conditions. Major deviations,
however, shall be reported to Chemetron, Matteson, Illinois before installation. Branch piping and
nozzle location, in particular, are critical. Particular emphasis is placed on the need for firm
anchoring of pipe and proper cleaning of pipe and fittings.

4.2 Mechanical Installation

4.2.1 Storage Rack, Manifold and Cylinders
Storage rack parts are furnished for assembly on the job. Install on a level hard surface in a dry location
where the surrounding air temperature remains within the range of 32°F to 120°F when local application
of the CO2 is used, and within the range of 0°F to 130°F when total flooding application of CO2 is used.

4.2.2 Discharge Piping

A. It is recommended that all piping be galvanized, however, black pipe may be used on piping systems
where nozzles are located indoors and where moisture or corrosive atmosphere is not normally
present. Where any portion of the piping system to a protected area is outdoors or in an unheated
area, that portion shall be galvanized.

B. All piping shall be either ASTM A-53, seamless or resistance welded, or ASTM A-106, various types,
unless drawings specify other material. ASTM A-120 must not be used.

C. Pipe 3/4” and smaller may be schedule 40. Pipe 1" and larger shall be schedule 80.

4.2.3 Pipe Joints

A. Where galvanized pipe is specified, pipe fittings shall be galvanized.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 15

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

B. Class 150 and cast-iron fittings shall not be used.

EXCEPTION: Systems installed before 1977. NFPA Pamphlet 12, Appendix A-1-10.1.4 (1977)
permitted the use of standard (150 lb) malleable iron threaded fittings in sizes 3/4" and smaller.
It is Chemetron’s recommendation that these 150 lb fittings be replaced with 300 lb malleable iron
fittings. Since the 150 lb fittings are not normally subject to a rigid quality assurance program, they
may have a greater potential for failure and may present a hazardous work environment.

C. All fittings in sizes 2" and smaller shall be 300 pound malleable iron, ASTM A-197, 1000 pound
ductile iron, ASTM A-394, or 3000 pound forged steel, threaded or socket weld. Street elbows
shall not be used.

D. Fittings in sizes 2-1/2” and larger shall be forged steel.

E. Stainless steel fittings shall be type 304 or 316, wrought/forged ASTM A-182 Class 3000, threaded
or socket weld, for sizes 1/8" through 4".

F. Flanged joints upstream of any stop valves shall be Class 600. Flanged joints downstream of stop
valves or in systems with no stop valves shall be Class 300.

G. Flush bushings shall not be used. Chemetron discourages the use of any bushings, but if used
they shall be used for one pipe size reduction only, be hex style and 3000 pound forged steel.

4.2.4 Underground Piping

A. Underground piping shall be galvanized and shall be treated with a suitable waterproof coating
to protect the pipe against moisture and corrosive soil conditions.

B. Pipe joints shall be pressure recession tested with nitrogen or air (water shall not be used) for leaks
at 850 psi for 24 hours before the corrosion preventive coating is applied.

C. Trench depth shall be a minimum of three feet or a depth six inches below the record frost line,
whichever is deeper.

4.2.5 Pipe Reductions

Reduction shall be made with reducing fittings of the same rating specified in 4.2.3.C above or with
swaged nipples of suitable schedule and material. Reducing bushings shall not be used.

4.2.6 Pipe Sleeves

A. Piping through building walls, partitions, floor slabs, roof slabs, etc. shall be run through sleeves
of schedule 40 pipe at least two sizes larger than pipe being run and not smaller than one inch.

B. Sleeves shall be suitably packed so as to be air tight.

C. Sleeves through floor slabs shall extend at least two inches above floor.

D. Sleeves through roof slabs shall extend above roof 6 to 10 inches and shall be flashed in
accordance with local building regulations.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 16

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

4.2.7 Pipe Hangers and Supports

A. Pipe supports and parts shall be of steel and of rigid construction. Conduit, beam and C-clamps
shall not be used. Rod hangers are not acceptable except for intermediate support between rigid
hangers. Where a rod hanger is used between two rigid supports, the allowable distance between
the two adjacent rigid supports may be 50% greater than the spacing called for in paragraph F.

B. Piping shall be anchored to rigid members such as walls, ceilings, and columns, and braced to
prevent longitudinal or lateral sway. Nozzle piping shall be well braced against nozzle back-thrust.

C. Hangers and supports shall be of rugged design and shall be installed so that they will not be
loosened by movement of the supported pipe. U bolts with double nuts shall be used to secure
pipe to the hangers.

D. Pipe lines shall not be suspended from other pipe lines.

E. Pipe supports shall be installed to avoid interference with other piping, conduit, structures, and
equipment.

F. Maximum spacing of supports is shown in the following table.

Maximum Support Spacing

Nominal Pipe Size, in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
Maximum Span, ft. 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 16 17

4.2.8 Valve and Equipment Connections

Threaded valves such as selector valves, check valves, and solenoid valves shall be installed with
a union immediately downstream. Valves having more than two connection points, such as shuttle
valves and pilot valves, shall be installed with a union adjacent to the valve in each connecting pipe
line. Pipe connections to equipment items such as discharge delay devices, pressure switches, etc.
shall have a union adjacent to the equipment.

4.2.9 Nozzles
A. Nozzle size, location, and position shall be as shown on job drawing. Where nozzles are used
to direct the discharge to particular areas (local application), special care should be given to nozzle
aim as directed by the drawings.

B. Where nozzles are installed to discharge through tank, booth or duct walls, the contractor shall
cut openings to fit Chemetron mounting flanges.

C. Radial nozzles shall be arranged with orifices directed as indicated by arrows on the drawings.

4.2.10 Pressure Releases

Pressure releases and brackets are supplied by Chemetron. All hardware and other equipment involved
in the release function shall be provided by others unless specifically listed on the job drawing. It is
desirable to have pressure release piping taken off the top of supply or nozzle piping.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 17

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

4.2.11 Protective Guards

Chemetron system components normally require no protective guards, there being no moving parts,
drop weights, etc. Such enclosures, when required, shall be provided by others, unless specifically
listed on the job drawing equipment list as Chemetron supplied.

4.2.12 Workmanship and Fabrication by Installing Contractor

A. The contractor shall provide the necessary tools, equipment, and materials that will allow him to
start work promptly and to complete the installation without delay in conformance with these
specifications.

B. All discharge piping branches shall be taken from the bottom or side of header piping for better
liquid CO2 flow. Do not connect branch lines to the top of a header unless specified. Exception:
Pressure release and pressure switch take-offs shall be from the top of the headers.

C. Screwed piping and fittings shall have clean cut and full length threads.

D. Piping and tubing shall be reamed free of burrs and ridges.

E. Pipe and tubing shall be cleaned thoroughly as assembled. Pull wire flue brush through pipe length
several times. Pull clean cloth rags (not burlap or similar), treated with 1,1,1-Trichloroethane (one
brand name is Chlorothene cleaner manufactured by Dow Chemical). Do not use in closed spaces
without adequate ventilation.

F. Screwed pipe joints shall be treated with Teflon tape, Teflon pipe dope or equal. When applying
tape or pipe dope, do not apply to first two threads from end.

4.2.13 Expansion Joints

Contraction caused by a maximum temperature change is approximately 5/8" per 100 feet of steel
pipe. Accommodation of this contraction requires a facility that permits pipe movement. Often, as
part of the natural layout of system, a swing joint can serve to give the desired flexibility. In straight
pipe runs, a suitable joint shall be installed after approximately 100 feet of continuous run.

4.2.14 Testing
It is mandatory that all systems be tested, preferably by Chemetron Fire Systems field service personnel.
Since systems can vary considerably, only general instructions are given. These must be adapted
to the specific system being tested.

IMPORTANT
THE TESTING OF THE PIPING WITH WATER IS PROHIBITED AND SHALL NOT BE DONE.

Field installed piping and tubing should be tested as follows:

A. Before doing any testing, remove all discharge heads from cylinders. This will prevent an
accidental discharge.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 18

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

B. Pilot control lines should be blown out using CO2, nitrogen or dry air to remove all dust, metal chips,
dirt, etc. This should be done with equipment components such as discharge heads and valves
disconnected. Otherwise, they can become contaminated with dirt particles resulting in system
malfunction.

C. Pilot control lines should be tested for bubble tightness using 850 psi CO2, nitrogen or dry air to
pressurize these lines, and using Leaktec, soapsuds, or equal to check for bubbles at all joints
and points of potential leakage. This phase should be done with equipment components connected
but with all discharge heads disconnected from the cylinders.

NOTE
ANY PILOT LINES THAT WILL BE NORMALLY UNDER PRESSURE MUST BE GIVEN A PRESSURE RECESSION TEST.

D. With nozzles removed, blow out discharge lines with CO2, nitrogen or air - then replace nozzles.

E. If a final discharge test is omitted, the discharge piping should be pressure tested as follows:

With all outlets plugged or capped, apply 850 psi CO2, nitrogen or dry air pressure to the piping
system to check for serious leaks at threaded joints using Leaktec, soapsuds, or equal. Correct
all connections where leakage indicates improper installation. The discharge line connections
normally do not have to be absolutely bubble tight.

4.2.15 Painting
Painting of mechanical components, when required, shall be in accordance with job specifications.

4.3 Electrical Installation

4.3.1 Codes
Wiring and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and Local
Code requirements. Any conflicts between codes shall be referred to the Chemetron Fire Systems
Matteson office for interpretation.

4.3.2 Conduit
A. All wiring shall be run in conduit.

B. Normally, conduit may be used in occupancies such as office, commercial or light manufacturing
where there is minimum chance of physical damage or corrosion. Rigid conduit shall be used
wherever moisture, corrosive atmosphere or exposure to damage exist.

C. Local regulations, owner’s specifications, or specific requirements shall be followed.

4.3.3 Wiring
Wire size shall be no smaller than 14 AWG. Insulation shall be suitable for 600 volts and shall be in
accordance with Article 310 of the National Electrical Code. Connections shall be twisted, soldered
and insulated with plastic electrical tape; or listed wire connectors may be used if also taped.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 19

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

4.3.4 Power Supply

A. The power supply for the Chemetron system electrical controls shall be from a reliable source not
subject to interruption.

B. The power supply shall be protected either by fusible safety switch or circuit breaker supplied by
contractor.

4.3.5 Thermostats
A. Detect-A-Fire type (with 1/2“ male pie thread) will be supplied unless otherwise specified.

B. Standard Installation - Covers and boxes shall be 4" and shall be furnished by contractor. Mount
on flat covers with 1/2” knockouts using 1/2” conduit lock nuts.

C. Explosionproof Installation - Mount on Crouse-Hines CPS 021 covers for Form 20 Condulets or
Appleton Electric BFGS Hub Covers for BFGS Form 20 Unilets.

D. Outdoor or Damp Indoor Installation - Weatherproof fittings shall be used, such as Crouse-Hines
G.S. Series - Form 20 Hub Covers.

4.3.6 Tests of Electrical Work

The wiring for each hazard of the Chemetron system shall have a minimum resistance to ground of
seven (7) megohms and the entire system shall have not less than one (1) megohm resistance to
ground.

4.3.7 Painting
Conduit, boxes, or other electrical appurtenances or straps, hangers or supports thereof, shall not be
painted unless specifically stated otherwise.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 20

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

5 Testing, Inspection, and Maintenance Instructions

5.1 General
Chemetron Fire Systems high pressure fire extinguishing systems are designed to high standards.
It is essential that the installation be inspected to assure compliance with job drawings and installation
specifications. A copy of job drawings must be marked after the system is accepted to indicate
compliance or deviation, and forwarded promptly to Chemetron Fire Systems in Matteson with a field
test report to establish the guarantee of the system.

A. Obtain owner’s approval before starting final acceptance test, and set time so that observers will
have adequate notice.

B. Adhere to local labor, safety and security restrictions.

C. Arrange for cylinder recharges to be readily available after test. Have cylinders refilled by an
approved recharge and service company.

D. Check weight of all cylinders to ensure that they are fully charged prior to testing.

E. Always disconnect all pilot cylinder discharge heads before tests to prevent discharge.

5.2 Functional Test Instructions

The following procedure is recommended to test the solenoid pilot valve and pilot-operated discharge
head performance without discharging the cylinders. Before proceeding, make sure that discharge
heads are not connected to the cylinder valves!

A. Check plunger of discharge head to be certain that it is retracted. When piston is in the non-actuated
(retracted) position, the end of the plunger should be approximately 3/4” inside of the bottom of
the union nut of the discharge head.

B. Energize actuation circuit momentarily.

CAUTION
DO NOT ENERGIZE FOR MORE THAN ONE SECOND; OTHERWISE EXCESSIVE VAPOR CAN BE LOST.

This should energize the solenoid pilot valve causing operation of the discharge head. This can
be checked by observing that the plunger has been moved to the actuated position (plunger
approximately 1/8” inside end of union nut of the discharge head). This assures that if the discharge
head had been connected to the cylinder valve, the cylinder would have discharged.

C. After proving proper operation of the pilot cylinder discharge head, push plunger back to non-
actuated (retracted) position. Because of the possibility of excessive loss of agent if the above
test is done repeatedly, it is recommended that if excessive testing is to be done, the following
procedure be used for additional testing.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 21

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

D. Remove solenoid pilot valve assembly from cylinder. Actuation of the solenoid now will not result
in any loss of agent. Actuation of the solenoid can be verified by noting reactive force (magnetic
effect) in a small steel screw driver held to the solenoid nameplate when the actuation circuit is
energized. Reinstall the solenoid pilot valve assembly when testing is finished and verify no leakage.
Verify that the piston in the discharge head is in the non-actuated position and reinstall the
discharge head.

The system is now armed and ready for actuation.

5.3 Electric Thermostats (Plate H-43)

Test apparatus consists of a heat lamp, iron, heat blower, or pan of water or high flash point liquid
heated to at least 20°F above the temperature rating of the thermostat. The normally-open thermostat
switch, closing when heated to a set temperature, will open a solenoid valve and actuate the system
by causing depression of the piston in the pilot discharge head. If there is a discharge delay, continue
heat application for at least 15 seconds, or the system may reset automatically before the end of the
timing cycle. Do not use open flames or hot irons and coils in explosive atmospheres. Test each
thermostat in each hazard for operation. Raise pilot discharge head pistons by thumb pressure after
each release.

5.4 Discharge Delay Timer (Plates H-60A and H-61)

The discharge delay timer consists of a normally closed pilot valve, a needle valve and a pressure
accumulator cylinder. Pilot pressure entering port K (bottom ) of the timer valve is held back by the
normally closed valve while pressure is applied slowly through the needle valve to the accumulator.
Ultimately the accumulated pressure causes the timer valve to open, thereby releasing pilot pressure
through port H (side) to the pilot cylinders or blocking valves to cause a discharge of CO2.

Discharge delay timers are normally set at the factory for 22 seconds. A different discharge delay time
interval can be obtained by adjusting the needle valve as follows:

• Loosen locknut.
• Turn screw clockwise to increase delay, counterclockwise to decrease.
• Starting with needle closed, open 11/2 turns for about 15 seconds and one turn for about 30 seconds.
tighten locknut after each setting.

Accumulator must be emptied before repeating a test. Tag timer with final setting and replace cover.

NOTE
IT IS IMPORTANT THAT PRESSURE BE APPLIED TO PORT K OF THE TIMER VALVE ALL DURING THE DISCHARGE
DELAY PERIOD. IF PRESSURE IS REMOVED, THE TIMER VALVE WILL RESET ITSELF - HENCE NO DISCHARGE WILL
OCCUR.

5.5 Selector Valves (Plates H-54, H-54A and H-54E)

These valves are pressure operated through a pilot control valve. They open when the pilot control
valve admits line pressure to the piston chamber and close when cylinders are empty.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 22

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

The pilot control valve is actuated by control pressure from automatic and remote manual releases.
It is locked open pneumatically by line pressure, even if control pressure is interrupted, until the storage
cylinders are essentially empty. Accordingly, the automatic release must be energized long enough
to cause discharge. Obviously, only one selector valve should open at any one time; otherwise, there
is a fault in the control system.

5.6 Shuttle Valves (Plate H-38)

This device is essentially two check valves with a common outlet that is used to separate pneumatic
circuits. The only moving part is a stainless steel poppet that seals against O-rings at each end of
the tee run. Since the O-rings also seal the end plugs, plugs loosened during makeup of piping could
cause leaks. Dirt on rings and poppet can also cause leaks, as in any valve. Remove from line and
inspect if faulty operation is indicated. Clean or replace O-rings as necessary.

5.7 Pressure Release (Plate H-58)

The spring clip on the release is pushed free when the piston is pressurized, providing the direction
of pull is within the five degree limit and the load does not exceed the rating of the release. A slight
discharge of carbon dioxide around the piston is normal.

Other devices ordinarily do not require special attention other than checking against job specifications
and standards of good workmanship.

5.8 Electric Transfer Switch

This is a single pole, double throw switch that is used to transfer electrical detection actuation from
the main bank pilot valves to the reserve bank. Test in both positions when checking automatic
releases. Only one set of pilot pistons will be depressed if electrical connections are made.

5.9 Bleeder Valve (Plate H-56)

Exhaust from a bleeder valve when the other side of the cylinder manifold is pressurized indicates
that foreign material is preventing tight closing of the check valve. Remove and clean check. A slight
discharge through a bleeder valve under pressure is normal. Excessive discharge may be caused
by dirt in the ball seat. Remove and clean.

5.10 Nozzles (Plates H-50 & 50A, H-51, 51B & 51C H-52 & 52A, H-52L-1 through L-8)
Every nozzle is stamped with an identifying Code Number. In addition, the horn size of spot nozzles
is stamped into the shell. Check identification and position against job drawings. There shall be no
deviations! Spot nozzles have cross-drilled jets that must be unobstructed. Code No. 6 and smaller
have inlet strainers. Remove nozzles from pipe to inspect and clean strainer.

5.11 Discharge Test

Even though extreme care may have been taken in the design and installation of a CO2 system, a full
scale discharge test is always recommended, preferably under the supervision of a Chemetron Fire
Systems field service representative.

NFPA Standard No. 12 (1977) in Paragraph 1-7.3, Approval of Installation says: “The completed system
shall be tested by qualified personnel to meet the approval of the authority having jurisdiction.”

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 23

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

A full discharge test is particularly important when conditions prevail that make it difficult to determine
if the system will perform as designed. It will verify that all factors that might affect system performance
have been adequately taken into account. Before the actual discharge test, the system, as installed,
must be checked against the design drawings and flow calculations to be certain that the installation
is per design. Only after it has been determined that the installation adheres strictly to the design shall
a discharge test be conducted.

IMPORTANT
BEFORE ANY DISCHARGE TESTS, IT IS MANDATORY THAT THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS BE OBSERVED.

A. Become thoroughly familiar with the Chemetron system.

B. Clear with the personnel in charge before the test discharge.

C. Discuss possible shutdown of equipment with personnel responsible for operations.

D. Testing of equipment in hazardous areas (containing explosive mixtures) should be cleared with
the proper personnel as to the method to be used.

E. Arrange for evacuation of personnel in or around test discharge area.

WARNING
THE DISCHARGE OF CARBON DIOXIDE CAN CREATE HAZARDS TO PERSONNEL SUCH AS OXYGEN DEFICIENCY
AND REDUCED VISIBILITY.

A system should have all other functional tests performed prior to arming the system or making a
discharge test to assure that a discharge test will not require repeating.

Test and retest all electrical control equipment until they successfully perform in all modes. Check
and match electric solenoid and current draw with power supply.

NOTE
IN SOME CASES A DUMMY SOLENOID VALVE CAN BE USED FOR TESTING.

It is recommended that for a discharge test the system be actuated by the automatic fire detection
system. All phases of the total system operation should work in sequence, such as pre-alarm,
shutdowns and actuation.

NOTE
IT SHOULD BE EMPHASIZED THAT ALL SHUTDOWNS OR CLOSINGS MUST OCCUR WHETHER THE SYSTEM IS
ACTUATED BY AUTOMATIC DETECTION, BY ELECTRIC REMOTE MANUAL, OR BY DIRECT MANUAL MEANS, AND THIS
FEATURE SHOULD BE PRETESTED TO AVOID TEST FAILURE.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 24

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

Two types of discharge tests can be conducted:

1. A Puff Test uses only a partial quantity of the required number of cylinders. The result of such
a test would show the detection system operated, alarms sounded, shutdowns operated and
the system operated in the correct sequence.

2. A Full Discharge Test will provide the best proof of system performance. In this test all of the
required number of cylinders are discharged. Similar results as that of the Puff Test are
obtained, but now discharge and holding times can be observed as well as agent distribution
and concentration readings.

Before the time scheduled for the full discharge test, it should be arranged that all sensitive equipment
or facilities are protected from anything that might be blown out of the piping during the discharge.

IMPORTANT
PROVISION MUST BE MADE TO EXHAUST THE CO2 TO ATMOSPHERE AFTER ANY DISCHARGE TO AVOID ITS BEING
EXHAUSTED OR LEAKED TO OTHER OCCUPIED AREAS.

It is recommended that concentration readings be taken at one or more points and levels in the protected
space to determine that the design requirements have been fully met especially in regard to discharge
time, concentration achieved, holding time and distribution throughout the hazard area. Most important
for average hazards is that the readings at various levels are more important than readings at various
points since a comparison of concentration and elapsed time for various levels can provide valuable
information regarding leakage rate.

There may be occasions where it is desirable to sample at more points than the sampling device can
accommodate at one time. This can be accomplished by having the extra sampling point hoses in
place with the connection end properly identified and unconnected at the start of test. Periodically
these can be exchanged with the connected hose for short intervals (approximately one minute) during
the post-discharge sampling period. The tapes should be marked to identify the sample points during
those intervals.

5.12 Acceptance
Upon successful completion of the test, do the following:

1. Have the cylinders refilled by an approved refill and service company.

2. Replace all locking pins and seals.
3. Reset pressure switches and releases.
4. Energize electrical circuits.
5. Forward a field test report, including marked job drawings, to Chemetron Fire Systems, 4801
Southwick Drive, 3rd Floor, Matteson, Illinois 60443. If any unsatisfactory results are indicated from
the test, they should be corrected at this time.

The system should be left in operation at this time.

If a discharge test is not required, the entire system shall be thoroughly inspected to make sure that
it is complete and that all tests required during installation have been properly carried out. In addition,
make sure the system is ready to operate and the electrical actuating system in energized for automatic
operation.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 25

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

5.13 Periodic Inspection

The entire fire extinguishing system should be completely inspected and tested periodically (preferably
every six months) by competent personnel using an approved schedule and procedure. Visual
inspection of all system components should occur monthly. Semi-annual inspection of cylinder weight
and pressure must occur per NFPA No. 12. The system should be tested particularly when inspection
indicates the advisability to make sure that it is in proper operating condition. Any problems should
be corrected at once by competent personnel.

The purpose of periodic inspection is to assure that the system is in full operating condition at all times.
Also, to identify problems due to wear and tear, accidental and environmental damage, tampering,
changes to room contents, changes in room use, changes in air handling equipment, changes in
openings into the room, or other related changes that would adversely affect the proper performance
of the fire protection system.

During an inspection, the hazard should be checked against the original layout to make sure that there
have not been additions or alterations that might require system alteration or additional coverage.

The extinguishing system hardware that needs particular attention during the inspection period is further
discussed in the following paragraphs.

5.14 Detection and Actuation System

The detectors should be checked (and cleaned if necessary) to assure that they are free of foreign
substances.

If the detection system is supervised, the supervisory features should be checked to determine that
the detection system is in satisfactory condition.

All manual operating devices should be operated with the actuating control removed from the pilot
cylinders. After testing, controls should be reset and reinstalled. Pull pins are to be properly installed.

5.15 Piping and Nozzles

Connections should be examined to see that they are secure to the manifold.

Piping should be examined for any evidence of corrosion.

Selector valves should be examined to see that they are in a closed position.

Piping hangers should be examined to see that the piping is securely supported.

Nozzles should be checked to determine that the orifices are clear and unobstructed. They should
be checked for proper position and orientation.

5.16 Auxiliary Equipment

All auxiliary components such as pressure switches, pressure releases, discharge valves, alarms,
etc., should be inspected (where possible) to ensure that they are in proper operating condition. Check
that provisions have been made for prompt ventilation of a hazard following a discharge. Make certain
warning signs are located properly and that their instructions are correct and understood.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 26

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

5.17 Storage Rack and Cylinder Assemblies

Inspect the storage rack for tightness, including floor mounting bolts and wall mounting hardware, if
included. Also, inspect the weigh track if installed.

The cylinders should be examined for evidence of corrosion and the cylinder valves for mechanical
damage.

The cylinder straps and the outlet fittings connected to the discharge manifold should be checked for
tightness.

5.18 Electrical System

The electrical system must be inspected carefully and tested at least semiannually. The electrical
system may be tested for voltage, continuity and possible grounds without discharging the system.
Any defect or malfunction noted must be repaired immediately to keep the system on an operational
basis.

5.19 Cylinder Content (Weight) Check

At least semi-annually, all cylinders (remote manual release cylinder included) shall be weighed and
the date of the last hydrostatic test noted.

CAUTION
AFTER RESPONSIBLE PARTIES HAVE GIVEN PERMISSION FOR SYSTEM SHUTDOWN, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:

Remove the discharge heads from all cylinders and disconnect the solenoid pilot valve assemblies
from the pilot cylinders. If there is a reserve bank of cylinders, it is advisable to only disconnect either
the main or the reserve discharge heads at any given time, making sure that the main-reserve switching
device is in the appropriate position. Weigh each cylinder. If, at any time, a cylinder shows a loss
in net content of more than 10 percent, it shall be refilled or replaced.

The empty and full weights of all cylinders are permanently stamped on the cylinder valve bodies.
Each time the cylinders are weighed, record the date and the net weight on the tag attached to the
cylinder.

The weight can be checked by use of a standard platform scale having suitable capacity or by a portable
beam scale (Plate H-25) as manufactured by Chemetron. It will not be necessary to completely remove
the cylinder from the system for weighing if a weigh track has been installed as part of the rack and
a beam scale has been purchased. If a standard platform scale is used for weighing the cylinder, it
must be completely removed from the system. In either weighing procedure it will be necessary to
remove the cylinder restraining straps from the rack assembly.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 27

Homepage Previous Document

 SERIES 70 HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

WARNING
ANY CO2 CYLINDER THAT MAY HAVE BEEN SUBJECTED TO ANY EXTREME HEAT CONDITION, SUCH AS THAT OF
A FIRE, SHOULD NOT BE REFILLED WITHOUT BEING HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED.

IMPORTANT
CYLINDERS SHOULD NOT BE REFILLED WITHOUT HYDROSTATIC TESTING (AND REMARKING) IF MORE THAN FIVE
YEARS HAVE ELAPSED FROM THE DATE OF THE LAST TEST. CYLINDERS CONTINUOUSLY IN SERVICE WITHOUT
DISCHARGING MAY BE KEPT IN SERVICE FOR A MAXIMUM OF TWELVE YEARS FROM DATE OF LAST HYDROSTATIC
TEST. AT THE END OF TWELVE YEARS, THE CYLINDERS SHALL BE DISCHARGED AND RETESTED BEFORE BEING
RETURNED TO SERVICE.

5.20 Solenoid Pilot Valve

At least annually, test the solenoid pilot valves to ensure that the piloting system is in proper working
order. Refer to paragraph 5.2, Functional Test Instructions, in this section.

S/N 70000178
ISSUED: 10/1/81 REVISED: 01/28/04 Page 28

Homepage Previous Document

 High Pressure Carbon Dioxide

GENERAL INFORMATION HIGH PRESSURE CO2 EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION
Chemetron High Pressure Carbon Dioxide fire extinguish-
ing systems provide protection for a variety of industrial
CYLINDER AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
applications. High Pressure CO2 systems consist of four
basic components and their associated accessories. The cylinders that are used to store CO2 are
spun steel containers manufactured to DOT
Storage / Distribution Components Specification 3AA-1800 or 3AAA-1800 or high-
Completer Kits er. They are available in five different capacities
Control Panels - 25 lb. (12 kg), 35 lb. (16 kg), 50 lb. (23 kg), 75
Detection and Alarm Devices lb. (34 kg) and 100 lb. (45 kg) sizes. Each cy-
linder is stamped with a serial number and
FEATURES hydrostatic test date. They also come equipped
The storage/distribution components consist of the with a steel cap for the physical protection of
1
cylinders and valves, support and racking compo- the cylinder valve during shipment and han-
nents, and discharge nozzles. dling.
The standard cylinder assembly is composed of
2 The Primary Completer Kit includes a pilot discharge
a cylinder, rigid siphon tube, and valve. It is de-
head, pilot solenoid, pilot connection kit, discharge
signed for vertical mounting only.
hose, warning sign, and manual operating instruc- Pilot
tion plate. The Slave Completer Kit includes a slave
discharge head and discharge hose.

3 The control panel monitors the detection and actua-

tion devices and includes timers to delay the dis-
charge, allowing for safe departure from the pro-
tected space.

4 The detection and alarm devices are the external

components that provide audible or visual signals to
alert occupants of pending problems or the possible
need to evacuate the protected space prior to
discharge.

Carbon dioxide systems can be designed for total flooding

and local application protection. The guidelines contained Cylinder Valve & Discharge Head (Pilot)
in the National Fire Protection Association Standard on Slave
Carbon Dioxide (NFPA 12) and OSHA standards, as well as
state and local requirements should be followed for either
design. A total flooding system can be defined as injecting Stock Filled Cylinder Assy Dimensions
Cyl Number Cylinder
CO2 into a room, area or compartment that has the struc- Weight (1)
Height (2) Diameter
Size (Standard
tural integrity to retain the agent once it has been dis- Assemblies) Lb (Kg) in cm in cm
charged. The minimum concentration requirement for
25# 10481493 87 (39) 29-5/8 75.25 8-1/2 21.59
total flooding systems is 34% by volume. This minimum
35# 10481494 121 (55) 39-1/2 100.33 8-1/2 21.59
concentration is suitable for a wide range of ordinary
combustibles and flammable liquids. Higher concentra- 50# 10480202 154 (70) 55-1/4 140.34 8-5/8 21.91
tions may be required for specific flammable liquids and/or 75# 10480203 216 (98) 60-1/4 153.04 9-5/16 23.65
hazards that may become deep seated. The local applica- 100# 10480204 291 (132) 62-1/4 158.12 10-5/8 26.99
tion method requires that CO2 be applied to the surface of
(1) Cylinder weights are approximate.
the protected hazard for a specified time period that (2) Height is top of cylinder valve to bottom of cylinder, ± 1/2".
insures the fire condition has been controlled.
OPTION: Winterized cylinder assemblies (90% CO2 fill pressurized
with Nitrogen to 1050 PSI at 70EF) are available in all
cylinder sizes.

© 2006 Chemetron Fire Systems. All rights reserved (8/06). Chemetron Fire Systems and Cardox are registered trademarks.

Homepage Previous Document

 High Pressure Carbon Dioxide

A Cylinder: The steel cylinders are manufactured to the

1/2" x 14-1/2" LG
DISCHARGE OUTLET requirements of the U.S. Department of Transpor-
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR
S/N 50260263
tation (DOT) for compressed gas storage, specifica-
tion 3AA-1800 or 3AAA-1800 or higher.

B Siphon Tube: A 3/4" (19 mm) threaded stainless steel

PILOT OPERATED
DISCHARGE HEAD
tube with a wall thickness of .035" (.89 mm) extends
PILOT
DISCHARGE ASSEMBLY from the cylinder valve down to the bottom of the
HEAD S/N 30610143
cylinder.

C Cylinder Valve: A pressure operated cylinder valve

consisting of a forged brass body with an external
*CYLINDER VALVE
S/N 10610730 disc carrier and seat disc held in the normally closed
position by a spring and cylinder pressure. The valve
has been designed to take advantage of a 7 to 1 seat
to piston ratio, which assures consistent operation.
*SIPHON TUBE The body is designed with multiple threaded connec-
tions which accommodate the discharge head and
cylinder. In addition, the following connections are
provided:

Pilot Discharge 1 Safety Disc (S/N 50610624): A frangible safety

Head & Valve
*CYLINDER disc is required for connection to the valve body
and serves as a pressure relief device to protect
the cylinder and personnel in case of excessive
Exploded View of a internal pressure. The disc is designed to rupture
Pilot Cylinder Assembly when it is exposed to pressures between 2850
and 3000 psi (16,203 to 20,685 kPa) created by
high temperatures.
1/2" X 14-1/2" LG
DISCHARGE OUTLET
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR
2 Fill Check (S/N 30610033): The filling port con-
S/N 50260263
tains a check valve type device that also serves
SLAVE
DISCHARGE
as a connection for the attachment of a solenoid
HEAD pilot valve, as well as a port to fill the cylinders.
The threads for attachments are .825-14NGO-RH-
SLAVE OPERATED EXT (CGA No. 320).
DISCHARGE HEAD
ASSEMBLY
S/N 10610715 D Discharge Head: Each cylinder requires the addition
of a discharge head to open its valve. The discharge
head is attached to the cylinder by means of a swivel
*CYLINDER VALVE
S/N 10610730
nut that engages the threads of the valve. Three
different types of discharge heads can be used:
a) pilot operated type with handwheel for manual
*SIPHON TUBE operation
b) pilot operated type without handwheel
c) pressure operated type
Each of the three types includes an internal oper-
ating piston connected to a hollow stem that is used
*CYLINDER
Slave Discharge to upset the cylinder seat disc when operated, which
Head & Valve allows the agent to exit. A stainless steel ball check
at the top of the stem provides a safety feature to
Exploded View of a prevent excessive loss of carbon dioxide from the
Slave Cylinder Assembly
manifold if the system is discharged during servic-
* Part of Cylinder Assembly ing.

© 2006 Chemetron Fire Systems. All rights reserved (8/06). Chemetron Fire Systems and Cardox are registered trademarks.

Homepage Previous Document

 High Pressure Carbon Dioxide

COMPLETER KIT - PRIMARY The discharge head is also provided with a handwheel for
manual operation, which is independent of a need for
electric power. The handwheel is turned counterclockwise
Two types of completer kits that contain the necessary
for operation. The NFPA 12 Standard on Carbon Dioxide
components required to make the cylinder functional are
requires that when three or more cylinders are used, two
available.
pilot discharge heads are needed to open the remaining
Completer Kits cylinders.
Primary Slave
20480483 20480484 PRESSURE OPERATED DISCHARGE HEAD
Description Quantity Quantity
Stock Number 10610715
Pilot cylinder hose kit 1 0
This head contains the same features as the pilot head;
Solenoid valve 1 0
however, it does not have a handwheel and lacks the pilot
Warning sign 1 0 connection port. It is operated by manifold pressure that
1/2" Discharge hose 1 1 accumulates in the discharge outlet during pilot cylinder
Instruction sign 1 0 operation.
Pilot discharge head 1 0
Slave discharge head 0 1
If cylinders are used in a Main/Reserve system, order decals:
Main Decal - S/N 50360753 Reserve Decal - S/N 50360752

PILOT OPERATED HEAD WITH HANDWHEEL

Stock Number 30610143

FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR - DISCHARGE

Stock Number 50260263
A 1/2" (13 mm) braided hose (14½" long) is used to
connect each discharge head to a cylinder mani-
fold or outlet pipe. The hose is Teflon lined with
an outer stainless steel wire braid cover.
There are 1/2" (13 mm) male pipe
thread connections on one end.
One end also contains a union
joint for easy make-up without
twisting, while the other has a
This discharge head is designed with a 1/4” (6 mm) NPT coupling with male adapter for easy installation.
connection for pilot pressure entry to the top of an internal
piston for valve operation. It is used on the actuation FLEXIBLE PILOT HOSES
cylinders. This head also operates when pressure from the Lengths of 3/16" (5 mm) braided hose are used to inter-
manifold is applied to the piston. It contains an internal connect the solenoid valves to the pilot port on each
vent opening to prevent the accumulation of pressure on discharge head. They are Teflon lined with an outer
the piston when leakage occurs through the solenoid valve stainless steel braided cover. There is a 1/4” (6 mm) swivel
to prevent accidental discharge. flare connection at each end.

© 2006 Chemetron Fire Systems. All rights reserved (8/06). Chemetron Fire Systems and Cardox are registered trademarks.

Homepage Previous Document

 High Pressure Carbon Dioxide

Flexible Pilot Hose

Stock
Description
Number
10260260 3/16 in. (5 mm) Connector 16 in. (40.6 cm) long
10260267 3/16 in. (5 mm) Connector 20 in. (50.8 cm) long
10260303 3/16 in. (5 mm) Connector 28 in. (71.1 cm) long

SOLENOID PILOT VALVE

A solenoid pilot valve assembly includes a pressure gauge Stock
Description
Number
and adapter with swivel nut. The adapter has an O-ring
sealed connection for attachment to the cylinder valve. 10170089 2 Pole Pressure Switch indoor use only
70170229 Explosionproof 3 Pole Pressure Switch
10170065 4 Pole Pressure Switch weatherproof

SELECTOR VALVES (DIRECTIONAL)

Selector or directional valves can be provided to use a
single group of cylinders to protect multiple areas or
hazards. When used, the valves act as blocking devices
directing the flow of CO2 to the protected space requiring
CO2. The valve sizes available range from 1/2” (13 mm) to
4" (102 mm) outlet sizes.

All valves are provided with a screwed inlet and outlet

connection with the exception of the 3" and 4" valves,
which have a flanged connection on both.

Stock
Description Stock
Number Description
Number
20610015 Solenoid pilot valve assembly
30610047 .5 in. (13 mm) Selector valve
120V-60Hz/24 VDC
30610048 .75 in. (19 mm) Selector valve
20610168 Explosionproof Solenoid pilot valve
assembly 24 VDC 10610371 1 in. (25 mm) Selector valve
10610369 1.5 in. (38 mm) Selector valve
PRESSURE SWITCH 10610370 2 in. (51 mm) Selector valve
10610733 3 in. (76 mm) Selector valve
An optional pressure switch is used in the system to
implement the shut down of power to various items of 10610734 4 in. (102 mm) Selector valve
equipment, such as fans, and for annunciation and alarm
purposes. Pressure switches are available in both weath-
erproof and explosionproof models.

© 2006 Chemetron Fire Systems. All rights reserved (8/06). Chemetron Fire Systems and Cardox are registered trademarks.

Homepage Previous Document

 High Pressure Carbon Dioxide

CYLINDER RACK
The cylinder rack consists of various lengths of channel,
straps and miscellaneous bolts. The number of straps and
channel pieces vary with the quantity of cylinders required.
It is shipped unassembled.

NOZZLES
Several types of nozzles are used in the design of carbon
dioxide systems. Each nozzle is designed for a specified
purpose.
Selector Valve
A Spot type nozzle is available in both a 4"
ACTUATION KIT (10 cm) and 5½" (14 cm) diameter shell. This
nozzle design can be used for both total
flooding and local application systems.
Stock Number 20480482
The selector valves require the addition of an actuation kit
and solenoid valve for use in connection to the releasing A Wide Angle type nozzle is available
system. with a 6 in. (15 cm) or 10 in. (25 cm)
diameter shell. This nozzle design
is only used for total flooding sys-
tems; typically high ceiling applications.

A Radial type nozzle is available from 1/4” to

2" sizes. This nozzle design is only used for
total flooding application systems.

Orifice type nozzles are available for ducts

and small enclosures. This nozzle design is
only used for total flooding application
systems. Orifice nozzles can be supplied
with spring cap covers to prevent dirt and
debris from clogging the nozzle.

PNEUMATIC DISCHARGE DELAY TIMER

STOCK NUMBER - 10100947
A pressure operated mechanical timer is available to delay
the discharge of carbon dioxide into an area until evacua-
tion has been accomplished. The delay has a minimum
Solenoid Pilot Valves
setting of 5 seconds and a maximum setting of 90 seconds.
S/N Description
During the discharge delay period, pressure operated
70610432 12 Volt DC
sirens are used to provide audible warning of an impend-
70610028 120 Volt DC
ing carbon dioxide discharge in the area, allowing for safe
70610006 120 Volt 60 Hz/24 VDC
departure from the protected space.
70610343 24 VDC explosionproof

© 2006 Chemetron Fire Systems. All rights reserved (8/06). Chemetron Fire Systems and Cardox are registered trademarks.

Homepage Previous Document

 High Pressure Carbon Dioxide

PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Carbon dioxide (CO2) is a colorless, tasteless, odorless gas
that is found naturally in our atmosphere in relatively small
quantities of about 0.03% by volume. It is an important gas
because it is part of the basic life cycle in nature.

CO2 is 1.5 times heavier than air and extinguishes fire by

reducing the concentration of oxygen in the air to the
point where combustion can no longer take place.

Chemical Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO2

Molecular Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.01
Specific Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.53
Specific Volume CO2
Gas 60EF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56 cu.ft./lb.
Gas 70EF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.73 cu.ft./lb.
Density Formula CO2
Liquid: +1.7EF 300 psi gauge 63.36 lb./cu.ft.
Liquid: +70.0EF 839 psi gauge 47.35 lb./cu.ft.
Critical temperature (highest temperature at which CO2
Pneumatic Discharge Delay Timer can exist as a liquid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +87.8EF
Discharge Delay Timer Notes:
1. Stock units are factory set for 22 seconds delay. To increase time
delay, turn needle clockwise.
2. Limit of adjustment: 5 seconds minimum to 90 seconds maximum. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
3. Enclosure material: 16 ga. Carbon steel, painted with red epoxy
enamel.
When discharged in the required fire extinguishing con-
centrations, carbon dioxide can create risks or hazards to
personnel, such as suffocation and reduced visibility.
Safeguards, such as both audible and visual alarms, shall
be provided for areas protected by carbon dioxide extin-
guishing systems. It is also recommended that personnel
training and self-contained breathing apparatus be pro-
vided for rescue purposes.

The Chemetron Carbon Dioxide Safety Manual and the

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) covering carbon dioxide
provide additional information. Both should be read and
understood prior to working with CO2.

CO2 Siren - S/N 70030380

The seller makes no warranties, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose,
except as expressly stated in seller's sales contract or sales acknowledgment form. Every attempt is made to keep our product information up-to-date and
accurate. All specific applications cannot be covered, nor can all requirements be anticipated. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

4801 Southwick Drive

Third Floor
Matteson, IL 60443
708/748-1503 • FAX 708/748-2847
A World of Protection email: info@chemetron.com

© 2006 Chemetron Fire Systems. All rights reserved (8/06). Chemetron Fire Systems and Cardox are registered trademarks.

Homepage Previous Document

 $- 13 NUT A LOCKWASHER LOCKWASHER

RAIL - 571258
RAIL - 571257 $WASHER -
I REQ~D.
(THIS END ONLY)
STUD - 571202
f BFOR
O L T S OR L AG SCREWS
MOUNTING TO WALL
FURNISHED BY CUSTOMER.

LJ~BOLTS OR LAG
FOR MOUNTING TO WALL.
(FURNISHED €31
STUD- 571202 LLcLAMp-g- 13 NUT
571207 (C
SHORTER ORNER INDICATES
UT OFF CLEG)

TOP VIEW TOP VlFW

ONF C YLINDER RACK ASSEMBLY TWO CYLINDER RACK ASSEMBLY

P .. *:z.
,...A
. :,...a
-
,-. 3
..
*:-..;,
4m k
, ,-.-a, P

z i I
0
I
?
Q
9

36"

..CARDOX.... - ...
..'." .........,..... ,.
....1
." *-.- .......e

"*.".-
I
u n r.
.
u I.
.-
...I

,."...."
x...
. "."

-
'.-'<

RACK AS5EMRLY TYPICAL INSTALLATION

' "-
.
"
-
n
.
.
,l. (V.
t-

O F ONE A N D T W O CVLINOCRS WALL -

FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW MOUNTED - S O L 4 6 75LD.CAP.
.."
VIIS .rmr

U
.. Un

Homepage Previous Document

 1 I
ISSUED 12-63 PLATE NO. H-9B
Homepage Previous Document
I 1
REVISED 3-61 PLATE NO. H- 11
C-480-CPC-500-
Homepage Previous Document
 WEIGHING T R A C K -
- SEE TABLE FASTEN WITH 3/8-x I'LG.
BOLT5,NUTS AND LCCKWASHERS(W#IOM T R A C K &&A 4blb1)
NOTE:
THIS RACK ASSEMBLY IS A FREE STANDING A R R A N W WEIGHING TRACK B R A C K E T ( O ~ ~ ~ ~ * ~ ~ ~ )
5 7 1 3 3 2 - 2 REO'D.
N U T S AND LOCKWASHERS
-
F A S T E N WITH 3 / 8 ' ~I'LG.BOLTS,

RECOMMENDED.
SLOT d HOLE. FOR 'u'- BOLT 1 0 0 L & CAP. CYLINOER MANIFOLD
-
V,
cn
C
m
0
-
ru
I
cJ,
CJ

-
RAIL SUPPORT 5 7 1 2 0 8 (FASTEN WlTH I / ~ ' xI'LG B LTS, N U T 3 AND
LOCKWASHERS) - 2 REQ,D.(RAIL surrOn7 D*rb.A . t a u ?

HOLES FOR MOUNTING CYLINDER SADDLES AND STUDS

SEE P L A T E t i - 2 3 A

P*
4
m
x
-N
I
-
571201 2 R E Q ' D ~ O W ~41&0*)
A
W l T H 1 / 2 ' ~l LG
N U T S AND LOCK

.. ..... .-.-..... -.
CAnoar
- :3z+iy2;+
a..... .I

qZ'pqrpz%J
RACH ASSEMBLY -TYPICAL INSTNUTO4
OF 3 TO 6 CYLINOERS- I 0 0 L8.CAP.
-
SINGLE ROW WEIGHING
3-CYLS. 4 -CYLS. 5-CYLS. 6 - CYLS.
I
=x;A
..r.,
'"W
Urn ...
';z4LTz
I N C L U D E D O N L Y W H E N S C A L E K I T IS SPECIFIED IN C O N T R A C T
C.L.
C46158

-
Homepage Previous Document
 - - • I
r W E l W l N G TRACK SEE TABLE F A S T E N
W I T H W 8 . x I'LC. BOLTS, NUTS 8 LOCKWASHERS

Homepage Previous Document

Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
 - SEE TABLEd- LOCKWASHERS
WEIGHING TRACK FASTEN
W I T H 3 / 8 ' ~1'I.G. BOLTS, NUTS
1

Homepage Previous Document

Homepage Previous Document
 -
WEIGHING TRACK SEE T A B L E F A S T E N
WlTH W8.x I'LG. BOCTS,NUrS A LOCKWASHERS
- 0
NOTE:
THIS RACK ASSEMBLY IS A FREE STANDING ARRANGE. WEIGHING TRACK BRACUE1 -571243- 2 REQ'D.
M N T FASTENED TO FLOOR WITH BRACES, BUT CAN SUPPORT - 571244- 2 - REQ'D.
ALSO BE MOUNTED TO THE WALL. ALLOWANCE OF (SHOWN IN POSITION FOR 75 LB. CAP. CYLINDERS1
AISLE M FRONT OF CYLINDERS FOR SERVICING 1s FASTEN WITH W 8 . X I'LG BOLTS,NUTS
FKCOMMENMD. AND LOCKWASHERS
SCOT AND HOLE FOR 'u*- B O L T
CYLINDER MANIFOLD
- 75 LB. CAP.

SLOT 6 HOLE FOR .u9BOLT

CYLINDER MANIFOLD
- 50 LO. CAP.

HOLES FOR WEIGHING TRACR BRACKET AND

-
SUPPORT 5 0 LB.CAP. CYLINDERS

I-- UPRIGHT - 571233 - 2 REO'D.

RAIL SUPPORT - 571208 (FASTEN W T H l/Zg X

I' LG BOLTS,NUTS A LOCKWASHERS1 - 2 REQ'D.

RAIL - SEE T A B L E

HOLES FOR MOUNT lNG CYLINDER SADDLES AND STUDS

SEE PLATE H- 24

4-

II
5 0 LB.CAF! CYL, 75 LRCAF?C Y L
.........................
CAQMlx
.......................
-.-................
..........
" ... -.-
......-...........
.-a...-."..

=m =m
'.-..,.C
n...,..

Rs' R I C H ASSEMBLY -TYPICAL INSTALLATION

-
T W O ROWS ONE :ID€ -WEICHMC TRACK
-
OF 6 TO 12 C V L I N ~ E R S 50 d 75 LB.CAP.

...........
..
6 CYLS. 8 CYLS.

INCLUDED OSLY i;llL::

IOCYLS.

;r,\L? M:T
12 CYLS.

SPJCITIKD IK CO\!TR,?CT.
o..r-
nJsY
. O I W
*--%A

Y.. ... C 41561

O..(...ll

Homepage Previous Document

 [-WT
IH
- -
WEIGHING TRACK SEE TABLE F A S T E N
TJ/B*X I-LG. BOLTS,NUTS 4 LOCKWASHERS

Homepage Previous Document

I U-65 PLATE NO H-22 M CPC
Homepage Previous Document
 6CYLS. 8CvlS. IOCYLS. I2 CYLS.
INCLUDED O N L Y W H E N SCALE HIT IS SPECIICIED IN CONTRACT

Homepage Previous Document

Homepage Previous Document
 WASHER - 2 REQ'D.

WEN AN WMNw w ~ OFC~MKRS 9

IS UKO.START WTH TWO STWS THEN
ALTERNATE WIT c( A STUD BETWEEN EVERY
OTMR CYLINDER ( K C RACK ASSEMBLY)

Homepage Previous Document

Homepage Previous Document
 r2
f-
13NUT & LOCKWASHER

SADDLE 5-071-028

STUD 5-071-0232

TOP VlEW
=AI ARRGT FOR M V E N NO. OF CYLINDERS

FRONT VlEW
.., ....CAQDOX
-.-. ..-
-,. -
g:,*."~r=.,,=r,z:.:-: ..... ===.:'s
.
..

y;t'..:
.
I.. . --
u "l."
C .I"C..

CVLINMq CLAL4Pw AffffASEMNT

-
?
' TWO ROWS ON SIDE -
FOR 50 A 75 LB. CAP. C V L l N W S

t .L...
"I-
CJNMI
.CI

CU1 *-..
C
.m .nnr
a-lres.(l
41565-1

Homepage Previous Document

 f - 1 3 ~ ~A 1LOCHMSHER
/-
RAIL - SEE RACK ASSEM6W

SADDLE 5-071-0218

w
r
D
-4
m STUD 5-071-0232
6
T
cu
4
ar
STUD CONNECTOR WITH HEX NUT

--
CPANT VIEW

S
w

Homepage Previous Document

 r 112"-13 NUT & LOCKWASHER

RAIL - SEE RACK ASSEMBLY

/-
- UPRIGHT -571233

112" WASHER
2 REQUIRED
(THIS END ONLY)

SADDLE -571325
(CUTOFF CORNER
INDICATES

STUD - 571324

112"-13 NUT

CYLINDER STRAP
571322
TOP VIEW RAIL SUPPORT = 571208
TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT FOR EVEN NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
112"-13 X 1" LONG
BOLT, NUT &
LOCKWASHER

FRONT VIEW ..... ..c11u)ox

.-.-.... ...w
...

CVLlHKR CLAM- *WI-M

-
TWU ROWS W 8 #

C 4816s

Homepage Previous Document

 CvLlNOCR CLAM-
con

.".
&#rWw
-
*RRANCCMNf
100 LB.CAP. CYLINOCRS
1WO ROWS ON SIC€ I
I
I...,. R-
L......

... .
.I-
.e.
....-.em

C46166

Homepage Previous Document

I I
ISSUED 12-63 PLATE NQ W24f
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

WEIGH TRACK
C.."

To weigh, loosen cylinder clamps or straps, position

hangar on cylinder valve, pull down on handle until
beam is horizontal and cylinder is just off the floor.
Scale Range: 50 to 550 pounds
Adjust hangar arm if necessary. Read weight.
Dial reading in 2 pound increments

Beam Scale Portable Weighing Device

Stock Number 10720003
Plate H-25

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

High Pressure CO, Cylinder Details

Carbon Dioxide Cylinder Assembly

Plate H-26A

Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire system: Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

i
I
I & 1-1,2* 1- !I
DISCHARGE HEAD

SEAT 3-061-0136

' O D RING SEAL

5-023-0570

6-047-0101
GASKET -
5- 023- 0486
DISCHARGE SEAT ASS'Y
5 - 0 61 - 0 6 2 3- 061- 0139 BRASS
ASTM 6 1 6 , ALLOY 3 6 0
,825'-14 NGO
WASHER - 6- 061- 0623

NUT - 6- 06 1-0625
LABEL ( 3 0 0 0 p s i g )
7- 036- 0396

FILL CHECK ASSEMBLY VALVE BODY

3- 061- 0033
ING BRASS, FED. SPEC.
QQ-9-626b.COMP. 2 1

f
-
Cylinder Valve Series 70 Carbon Dioxide
Type 1M , Class C M
Stock Number 1 0 6 1 0730
Plate H-27A

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

A-
- BRASS ASTM B16
ALLOY 360 COMP. 21

3 6

Series 7 0 Carbon Dioxide

Stock Number 10610 7 1 5

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

HANDWHEEL - 5 0 6 1 0 7 7 7
BRASS, ASTM I362
FED. SPEC. QQ- C- 390

LEAD WIRE SEAL 507101 99

PULLPIN 5061 0 6 4 7

O-RING SEAL 5 0 2 3 0 4 5 9
BODY - BRASS, ASTM B16
ALLOY 3 6 0 COMP. 21

PILOT FLEXIBLE 1/2" NPT FOR

CONNECTOR
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR
O-RING SEAL 50310571
BALL CHECK 5 0 6 1 0 4 8 9
O-RING SEAL 5 0 2 3 0 4 5 8
PISTON 3 0 6 1 0 1 41

ASTM B 1 6 ALLOY 3 6 0

SET SCREW 6 0 0 5 1 0 7 4

B A L L 5 0 6 1 0 6 10

STEM 3 0 6 1 0 1 4 2

UNION NUT 5 0 6 1 0 6 0 5

3/1 688 4 - BRASS ASTM 6 1 6

ALLOY 360 C O M P 21

Series 7 0 Carbon Dioxide

Stock Number 30610143
Plate H-30A

Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

1/4" - 45' Flare Swivel Nut - Brass

Wire Braid Cover -

Type 304 Stainless Steel

Extruded Teflon Inner-core

-
A ~ ~ r oLength
xm
Stock No.
Dimension A
16 inches 10260260

20 inches 10260267

28 inches 10260303

Working Pressure - 1,000 psi

Minimum Burst Pressure - 6,000 psi

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire system< Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

A
1/2" NPT

Union Coupling 37" JIC - Brass

Wire Braid Cover - Type 304 SST

Teflon Core - U" I.D.

14%" (Approx.)
End to End

Minimum Burst Pressure - 6,000 psi

%" NPT Male Coupling - Brass

Stock Number 5 0 2 6 0 2 6 3
Plate H-31 A

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROn
Fire ~ y s t e m i Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

1/4" DIA MTG HOLES. WHITE ENAMEL CHARACTERS AND BORDER

ON RED ENAMEL BACKGROUND.
MATL: 22GA.(.03OV) SST SHEET TYPE 3 0 4
,
/
/

\+
WARNING
L E A V E A R E A IMMEDIATELY
WHEN A L A R M S O U N D S
E X P O S U R E TO C A R B O N
DIOXIDE GAS MAY BE FATAL
S H U T OFF
SYSTEM WHEN SERVICING.
THIS AREA PROTECTED B Y A
C A R B O N DIOXIDE
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
CHEmETROn
Fire Systems
Matteson, Illinois

+9 +'
50360641

Alarm Warning Sign for CO, Fire Extinguishing Systems

Stock Number 5 0 3 6 0 6 4 1
Plate H-33A

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

1/4" DIA MTG HOLES. WHITE ENAMEL CHARACTERS AND BORDER

/- ON RED ENAMEL BACKGROUND.

MATL: 22GA.(.03OS) SST SHEET TYPE 3 0 4 .

1 D O N O T ENTER A R E A

WHEN A L A R M IS SOUNDING
EXPOSURE TO CARBON DIOXIDE
G A S M A Y BE F A T A L
THIS AREA PROTECTED B Y
A C A R B O N DIOXIDE
FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
AREA MUST B E VENTILATED PRIOR TO RE- ENTRY
CHEmETROn
Fire Systems
Matteson, Illinois
70360486 fl@

Entrance Warning Sign for CO, Fire Extinguishing Systems

Stock Number 7 0 3 6 0 4 8 6
Plate H-336

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

+25-112' TYP:-1 /-
RACK UPRIGHT, TYP.
6 MAlN & 6 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0339

5 MAlN 8 5 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0338

4 MAlN 8 4 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0337

RACK UPRIGHT
--t---7
DISCHARGE OUTLET

3 MAlN 8. 3 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0336

112.. FLEXIBLE
CONNECTOR

2 MAlN 8 2 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0335

CYLINDER

1 MAlN 8 1 RESERVE CYLINDER 2-037-0334

CYLINDER CONNECTION DETAIL
ITEM DESCRlPTlONS
SIDE VIEW SHOWING CYLINDER CONNECTION
1. 314' MANIFOLD SECTION, SCH. 40, ASTM A 106 TO MANIFOLD AT AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
2. 3/4" CAP. 300 LB. M.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TWIST.
3. 314' TEE. 300 LB. M.I.
4. 314' NIPPLE, SCH. 40, ASTM A S 3
ASSEMBLY NOTE:
5. 314' CHECK VALVE -PLATE H-55A MANIFOLD PARTS ARE SHIPPED AS A KIT TO BE
8. 314' U-BOLT ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD AS SHOWN.
7. 314'x314'x112' REDUCING TEE, 300 LB. M.I.
8. 314' COUPLING. 300 LB. M.1
9. 314" PLUG

Main and Reserve -with Check Valves

Cylinder Connections on 10" Centers

Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

b-.2@- 1/2' TY ~4 RACK UPRIGHT, TYP.

6 MAlN 8 6 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0345

w t9

5 MAlN 8 5 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0344

4 MAlN 8 4 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0343

I 1 j f RACK UPRIGHT
1- -
DISCHARGE OUTLET

3 MAlN 8. 3 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0342

I I
I
I I
I I CONNECTOR

2 MAlN 8 2 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0341

CYLINDER
DISCHARGE

1 MAIN 8 1 RESERVE CYLINDER 2-037-0340 I

CYLINDER CONNECTION DETAIL
ITEM DESCRIPTIONS
SIDE VIEW SHOWING CYLINDER CONNECTION
1. 314" MANIFOLD SECTION. SCH. 40. ASTM A108 TO MANIFOLD AT AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
2. 314" CAP. 300 LB. M.L FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TWIST.
3 314' TEE, 300 LB. M.1.
4. 314' NIPPLE, SCH. 40, ASTM A 6 3
ASSEMBLY NOTE:
5. 3/4' CHECK VALVE- PLATE H-55A MANIFOLD PARTS ARE SHIPPED AS A KIT TO BE
6. 3/4' U-BOLT ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD AS SHOWN.
7. 3/4'x314'~112' REDUCING TEE. 300 16.M.L
8. 3/4' COUPLING. 300 LB. M.I.
9. 314' PLUG

3/4"Cylinder Manifold Kit \

Main and Reserve -with Check Valves
Cylinder Connections on 11-1/2" Centers
Plate H-366-2 1
Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

-
ii
I I
T
'
iI
2 5 - 1 1 8 ~ ~ ~ .

6 MAlN 8. 6 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2- 037- 0349

RACK UPRIGHT, -TYP. 2'- I

II I1 I I
I I I I II
II'
t3 'd 01
II
II
iI
I I
I I
II
5 MAlN & 5 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2- 037- 0348

4 MAlN & 4 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2- 037- 0347

RACK UPRIGHT

DISCHARGE OUTLET

112' FLEXIBLE
ITEM DESCRIPTIONS CONNECTOR
1. 1-114' MANIFOLD SECTION, SCH. 80. A106
2. 1-114- CAP, 300 LB. M.1 CYLINDER
3. 1-114' TEE, 3 0 0 LB. M.1 DISCHARGE
HEAD
4 1-114' NIPPLE, SCH. 80, ASTM A53
5. 1-112" CHECK VALVE PLATE H- 55
6. 1-112' U-BOLT
7. 1-112'xI-114' HEX BUSHING. CAD. PL.

CYLINDER CONNECTION DETAIL

SIDE VIEW SHOWING CYLINDER CONNECTION
ASSEMBLY NOTE: TO MANIFOLD AT AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
MANIFOLD PARTS ARE SHIPPED AS A KIT TO BE FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TWIST.
ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD AS SHOWN.

Main and Reserve - w i t h Check Valves

Cylinder Connections on 10" Centers
Plate H-36B-3

Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

RACK UPRIGHT, TYP.

6 MAlN d 6 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0353
It
w
-
Id
-
bl 01 Id
II
I I

5 MAlN (1 5 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0352

4 MAlN d 4 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0351

3 MAlN d 3 RESERVE CYLINDERS 2-037-0350 RACK UPRIGHT

DISCHARGE OUTLET

712' FLEXIBLE
ITEM DESCRIPTIONS CONNECTOR
1. 1-114' MANIFOLD SECTION, SCH. 80. ASTM A108
2. 1-114' CAP, 300 LB. M.1
3. 1-114' TEE, 300 LB. M.1 DISCHARGE
4 1-114' NIPPLE, SCH. 80, ASTM A53
5. 1-112' CHECK VALVE -PLATE H-55
6. 1-112' U-BOLT
7. 1-112'xl-114' HEX BUSHING, CAD. PL.

CYLINDER CONNECTION DETAIL

SIDE VIEW SHOWING CYLINDER CONNECTION
ASSEMBLY NOTE: TO MANIFOLD AT AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
MANIFOLD PARTS ARE SHIPPED AS A KIT TO BE FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TWIST.
ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD AS SHOWN.

Main and Reserve -w i t h Check Valves

Cylinder Connections on 11-1/2" Centers
Plate H-36B-4

Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

12 CYLINDER
6.25-11'2", T Y P ~
- 2-037- 0 167 ' \ RACK UPRIGHT. TYP.

1 1 CYLINDER - 2-037-0166

V
10 CYLINDER - 2-037-0165
RACK UPRIGHT

DISCHARGE OUTLET

9 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0164

1/2' FLEXIBLE
8 CYLINDER - 2-037-0163 CONNECTOR

CYLINDER
DISCHARGE

7 CYLINDER - 2-037-0162 ,

CY LlNDER CONNECTION DETAIL

SIDE VIEW SHOWING CYLINDER CONNECTION
TO MANIFOLD AT AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TWIST.

5 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0160

I!
ITEM DESCRIPTIONS
1. 314" MANIFOLD SECTION. SCH. 40. ASTM A106
I
2. 3/4' CAP, 300 LB. M.I., GALV.
I 3. STRAIGHT TEE, 3/4'. 300 LB. M.I.. GALV.
4. 314' COUPLING, 300 LB. M.I., GALV.
5. 314' NIPPLE, SCH. 40, ASTM A53

3 CYLINDER - 2-037-0158 6. 314' U-BOLT

7. 314' 90 ELBOW, 300 LB. M.I.. GALV.

ASSEMBLY NOTE:
2 CYLINDER - 2-037-0157 MANIFOLD PARTS ARE SHIPPED AS A KIT T O BE
ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD AS SHOWN.

3/4"Cylinder Manifold Kit

Without Check Valves
Cylinder Connections on 10" Centers
\ Plate H-36G1

Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROn
Fire system< Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

RACK UPRIGHT, TYP.

12 CYLINDER - 2-037-0107
I I I1

11 CYLINDER - 2-037-0106

10 CYLINDER - 2-037-0105

9 CYLINDER - 2-037-0104

112' FLEXIBLE
8 CYLINDER - 2-037-0193
I I
8 I 1

7 CYLINDER - 2-037-0192 ,

6 CYLINDER - 2-037-0101 CYLINDER CONNECT ION DETAIL

SIDE VIEW SHOWING CYLINDER CONNECTION
TO MANIFOLD AT AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TWIST.

5 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0190

ITEM DESCRIPTIONS
1. 314' MANIFOLD SECTION, SCH. 40, ASTM A106
2. 314' CAP. 300 LB. M.L. GALV.
- 2-037;0189

_.p
4 CYLINDER 7
3. STRAIGHT TEE, 314'. 300 LB. M.L, GALV.
4. 314' COUPLING, 300 LB. M.L, GALV.
5. 314' NIPPLE, SCH. 40, ASTM A53
17-1/16"
3 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0188 6. 314' U-BOLT
7. 314' 90 ELBOW, 300 LB. M.I.. GALV.

2 CYLINDER
1 r
417-1/16'
-
"L6io
2-037-0187
7 ASSEMBLY NOTE:
MANIFOLD PARTS ARE SHIPPED AS A KIT TO BE
ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD AS SHOWN.

/ 3/4" Cylinder Manifold K i t

Without Check Valves
-7
Cylinder Connections on 11-1/2" Centers
\ Plate H-36G2 1
Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

12 CYLINDER - 2-037-0182 RACK UPRIGHT, TYP.

11 CYLINDER - 2-037-0181

10 CYLINDER - 2-037-0180
DISCHARGE OUTLET

9 CYLINDER - 2-037-0179

DISCHARGE

7 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0177

8 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0 178 CYLINDER CONNECTION DETAIL

SIDE VIEW SHOWING CYLINDER CONNECTION
TO MANIFOLD AT AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TWIST.

5 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0 175 ITEM DESCRIPTIONS

1. 1-114' MANIFOLD SECTION, SCH. 80, A106
2. 1-114' CAP. 300 LB. M.1, GALV.
4 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0 174 3.
4.
STRAGHTTEE. 1-114'. 300 LB. M.1, GALV.
1-114' COUPLING, 300 LB. M.1, GALV.
6. 1-114' NPPLE, SCH. 80. ASTM A53
6. 1-lNm W O L T

ASSEMBLY NOTE:
MANIFOLD PARTS ARE SHIPPED AS A KIT 1'0 BE
ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD AS SHOWN.

f 1-1/4" Cylinder Manifold K i t >

I Without Check Valves
Cylinder Connections on 10" Centers
Plate H-36C-3
I
Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

12 CY LlNDER - 2-037-0212 RACK UPRIGHT, TYP.

1 1 CYLINDER - 2-037- 02 1 1

10 CYLINDER - 2-037-0210

B CYLINDER - 2-037- 0209

112' FLEXIBLE

7 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0207

6 ,CYLINDER - 2-037- 0206 CYLINDER CONNECTION DETAIL

SIDE VIEW SHOWING CYLINDER CONNECTION
TO MANIFOLD AT AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TWIST.

ITEM DESCRIPTIONS
1. 1-114' MANIFOLD SECTION. SCH. 80. A106
2. 1-114' CAP, 300 LB. M.L. GALV.
4 CYLINDER - 2-037- 0204 3. STRAIQKT TEE, 1-114'. 300 LB. M.L, GALV.
4. 1-114' COUPLING, 300 LB. ML, GALV.
5. 1-114' NIPPLE, SCH. 80, ASTM A53
8. 1-114' U-BOLT

ASSEMBLY NOTE:
MANIFOLD PARTS ARE SHIPPED AS A KIT TO BE
ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD AS SHOWN.

/ 1-1/4" Cylinder Manifold K i t \

Without Check Valves
Cylinder Connections on 11-1/2" Centers
Plate H-36C-4

Revised 10198
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

F Pilot Connection Kit \

Series 70 High Pressure System
Stock Number 10260261 - Single Pilot Cylinder
Stock Number 10260262 -Two Pilot Cylinders
\ Plate H-37

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

1 1 / 4 " NPT 1 /4" NPT

INLET OUTLET (7/8"HEX)

Stock Number 1 0 6 1 0 2 5 6
Plate H-38

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

TECHNICAL DATA NOTES

APPUCATION: . . 1. TEMPUiATURE SETTINGS (SUGGESTED SETTING A MINIMUM OF
100 ABOVE AMBIENT)
USED FOR RRE DETECllON IN FlRE
SUPPRESSION AND EXllNGUlSHlNC SYSTEMS 2. M E OUTER SHELL IS MADE OF A RAPIDLY EXPANDING
ALLOY WHICH CLOSELY FOLLOWS CHANGES I N M E
FITTING: . . . . . MALE 1/2" NPT SURRONDING AIR TEMPERATURE. M E INNER STRUTS ARE
MATERIAL (CONTACTS); . .
. . . SILVER MADE OF A LOWER EXPANDING ALLOY. DESIGNED TO RESIST
THERMAL ENERGY ABSORPNON AND SEALED INSIDE THE
MATERIAL (sHUL):. . . . . . . . STAINLESS STEEL SHELL, M E STRUTS FOLLOW TEMPERATURE CHANGES MORE
CURRENT RATING: 5.OA 0 125VAC SLOWLY.
(MAX. RESISTANCE) 0 . 5 ~o i 2 5 M C 3. A SLOW RATE FlRE WILL HEAT M E SHELL AND STRUTS
2.OA 0 24VDC TOGETHER. A T THE "SET POINT" ME UNIT WILL TRIGGER,
ACTUATING THE ALARM OR RELEASING THE EXTINGUISHANT.
4. WHEN A FAST RATE FlRE STARTS. THE SHELL WILL EXPAND
RAPIDLY. THE STRUTS WILL CLOSE, ACTUATlNG THE ALARM
OR RELEASE THE AGENT. M E FASTER M E FIRES RATE OF
GROWTH, M E SOONER M E ALARM.

'=GS STOCK No.

3BLACK
TEMP TOL ('F) COLOR CODE UL
9357775 140'F +7* / -8' YELLOW 50 25
9357776 16Or +7' / -8' YELLOW 25 25
1406045 1907 +7' / -8' WHITE 50 25
1406046 225r +7' / -8' WHITE 25 25

-
9357778 325r +10'/-10' RED 50 25
9357779 450r +15'/-15' GREEN 25 25
1-050-01 22 600'F +20*/-20' ORANGE 25
1-050-0123 725T +25'/-2~ ORANGE 25

1/2" NPT (BRASS HEAD)

4 3/16"

E l e c t r i c Thermostat
P l a t e H-43

R e v i s e d 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

AC7AjrJON
oL/-LF7PO.
'' ~ N F TA"
POR7
,,

TAPPED

TM/O-WAY NURMALLY CLOSED S O L ENO/D VALVE

OR/F/CS 5 / Z E : 3 / 6 4 " ~ / ~ -
OPERA7/NG PRESSURE: 850 PS/
OPERA7/MG VOLTAG'.' (SSE TASL~C) ----

VAL VE CAN BE WUNirKD /N ANY PG"/7/UN.

U//7# ELECTN/C .dS7EClt7RSPA49 HC7UA7Zc?!.FtrR
RELEAS/NO PRESS L/RE /N CU/V7ROL SYS7E/M,

120 VDC

Solenoid Valve
Plate H-47

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

-#I 8 STRANDED
WIRE LEADS

ING
L

X' 1 /4" NPT

I
l(o)ll
90" ELBOW.

PRESSURE
GAUGE
PIN UPSETS CYLINDER VALVE FILL
CHECK WHEN NUT IS SECURED.

120 V-60H~124VDC 20610015

120 VDC 20610039

Solenoid Pilot Valve Assembly

Plate H-47A

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

JET TIP ORIFICE CODE NO.

STAMPED HERE
112' OR 314' N . P . T . 7

f "A"

STRAINER (CODES 1 THROUGH 6 ONLY)---/

-
PALNUT CAD. PLATE -
I
DIMENSIONS
Description Shell Material
A B
4" Spot nozzle 4-518" 7-114" Carbon Steel with
5-112" Spot nozzle 6-118" 9-112" red enamel finish

* Denotes those Jet Tips provided with a strainer

Local Application With CO,

Plate H-50

Revised 2/06/2001

Homepage Previous Document

 CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

a30 (.128)
4 HOLES

LARGE NOZZLE

1. When the nozzle is located at the end of a given pipe run, a union and short
nipple are to be replaced by a capped 6" nipple, thereby providing a dirt or
blowout pocket at the end of the pipe run.

2. When the nozzle is not located on a duct or housing, one gasket and the sheet
metal screws shall be discarded.

3. When the nozzle is mounted on a duct or housing but is not to be covered, the
diaphragm shall be discarded.

4. The gaskets, front ring, diaphragm, back ring, sheet metal screws and bolts and
washers are supplied as a kit:

For 4" spot nozzle, order Stock Number 10370393

For 5%" spot nozzle, order Stock Number 10370392

5. All pipe and fittings to be supplied by installer.

Installation Notes
Plate H-50A

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire ~ y s t e m i Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

,113" D I A . - 4 HOLES

DUCT OR HOUSING

S E E NOTE 1
MOUNTING CUTOUT

CARDOX O R I F I C E
NOZZLE W I T H
S P R I N G COVER

MOUNTING FLANGE
S E E NOTE 1

S H E E T METAL SCREW
S E E NOTE 1

1. Flange, gasket and sheet metal screws are shipped as a kit. Chemetron Stock
Number 20370012.

2. When the nozzle is located at the end of a given pipe run, a union and short
nipple are to be replaced by a capped 6" nipple, thereby providing a dirt or
blowout pocket at the end of the pipe run.

3. When a larger than %" supply pipe is called for on the specific job drawings, the
1/2" coupling is to be replaced by a concentric reducer of the size specified.
(Coupling or reducer to be made up tight against the mounting flange.)

4. All pipe and fittings to be supplied by installer

Installation Notes
Plate H-51

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...
TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for Total Flooding
Carbon Dioxide Systems
Fitting Male NPT
112" . . . . . . . . . . . . 10371309
Material Stainless Steel
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved

NOTES:
1. The orifice code numbers are to be used to identify nozzles by size, in terms of an
equivalent single port diameter. Each number represents a single port diameter in
number of 32nd's inches diameter.
Example: Code 8.0 indicates this tip has an equivalent single port diameter of
8132's.
2. Each orifice nozzle is drilled with one orifice. See table for specific drill diameter.
3. Field identification would be as per the following example:
Code 8.0 - 112" orifice nozzle, 112" MNPT connection, would show stock number
10371309 stamped on the outside of the nozzle rim and code number 8.0 would be
stamped on the hex of the orifice nozzle.

1 DRILL DIA. (SEE TABLE)

1/2" - I4NPT (REF)

(AFTER DRILLINC) WlTH

STAMP CODE No. XX.XX ON HEX

1/2" Orifice Nozzle

Plate H-51 B 1
Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...
TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for Total Flooding
Carbon Dioxide Systems
Fitting Male NPT
112" . . . . . . . . . . . . 10371308
Material Stainless Steel
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved

1. The orifice code numbers are to be used to identify nozzles by size, in terms of an
equivalent single port diameter. Each number represents a single port diameter in
number of 32nd's inches diameter.
Example: Code 8.0 indicates this tip has an equivalent single port diameter of
8132's.
2. Each orifice nozzle is drilled with one orifice. See table for specific drill diameter.
3. Field identification would be as per the following example:
Code 8.0 - 112" orifice nozzle, 112" MNPT connection, would show stock number
10371308 stamped on the outside of the nozzle cover and code number 8.0 would be
stamped on the hex of the orifice nozzle.

1r DRILL D l A (SEE TABLE)

LSTAMP CODE No. XX.XX ON HEX

WITH 1 /aw HIGH LETTERS

1/2" Orifice Nozzle with Cover

Plate H-51C

Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

/ \ (See table)

LJet Tip

V-
\- S t a r n ~Code No. XX.XX
(after'dri~lin~)with
118" high letters

6" Wide Anale Nozzle

Drill Drill Jet Tip TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for Total Flooding
Carbon Dioxide Systems
Fitting Female NPT
112" . . . . . . . . . . . I0371327
314" . . . . . . . . . . . 10371328
Material - Jet Tip Brass
Material - Shell Steel
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved

1. The jet tip code numbers are to be used to identify nozzles by size, in terms of
an equivalent single port diameter. Each number represents a single port
diameter in number of 32nd's inches diameter.
Example: Code 8.0 indicates this tip has an equivalent single port diameter of
8132's.
19 1 0.1660( 8.0
-
314" NPT SIN 10371328
2. Each jet tip is drilled to provide 4 individual orifices. Each orifice is per diameter
given in the table.
3. Field identification would be as per the following example:
Code 8.0 jet tip - 6" wide angle nozzle, 112" NPT connection would show stock
number 10371327 stamped on the outside of the jet tip nozzle and jet tip code
number 8.0 would be stamped on the hex of the jet tip.

* Denotes those jet tips that are

provided with a strainer.

6" Wide Angle Nozzle

Plate H-52

Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

 CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

Drill Dia. - per order

6 holes equally spaced

-1 10" Dia.

Retaining ring

I
/ L ~ t a m p Code No. XX.XX
(after drilling) with
\j-
118" high letters

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for Total Flooding
Carbon Dioxide Systems
Fitting Female NPT
1" . . . . . . . . . . . . 10371319
1-114" . . . . . . . . . 10371320
Material - Jet Tip Brass
Material - Shell Steel
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved

1. The jet tip code numbers are to be used to identify nozzles by size, in terms of
an equivalent single port diameter. Each number represents a single port
diameter in number of 32nd's inches diameter.
Example: Code 22.0 indicates this tip has an equivalent single port diameter of
22132's.
2. Each jet tip is drilled to provide 6 individual orifices. Each orifice is per diameter
given in the table.
3. Field identification would be as per the following example:
Code 22.0 jet tip - 10" wide angle nozzle, 1-114" NPT connection would show
stock number 10371320 stamped on the outside of the jet tip nozzle and jet tip
code number 22.0 would be stamped on the hex of the jet tip.

10" Wide Angle Nozzle

Plate H-52A

Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code

Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port
* 60 0.0400 2.03 1.46 1.04 * 33 0.1130 5.51 3.92 2.82 6 0.2040 10.91 7.15 4.97
* 59 0.0410 2.08 1.49 1.07 * 32 0.1160 5.66 4.02 2.89 5 0.2055 11.02 7.21 5.01
* 58 0.0420 2.12 1.53 1.09 * 31 0.1200 5.86 4.15 2.98 4 0.2090 0.00 7.34 5.09
* 57 0.0430 2.17 1.56 1.12 30 0.1285 6.30 4.44 3.18 3 0.2130 0.00 7.50 5.19
* 56 0.0465 2.34 1.68 1.21 29 0.1360 6.70 4.69 3.36 2 0.2210 0.00 7.83 5.39
* 55 0.0520 2.60 1.87 1.34 28 0.1405 6.94 4.84 3.46 1 0.2280 0.00 8.12 5.56
* 54 0.0550 2.74 1.97 1.42 27 0.1440 7.13 4.96 3.55 A 0.2340 0.00 8.37 5.71
* 53 0.0595 2.96 2.13 1.53 26 0.1470 7.30 5.07 3.62 B 0.2380 0.00 8.54 5.81
* 52 0.0635 3.15 2.26 1.63 25 0.1495 7.44 5.15 3.67 C 0.2420 0.00 8.72 5.92
* 51 0.0670 3.31 2.38 1.71 24 0.1520 7.58 5.24 3.73 D 0.2460 0.00 8.89 6.02
* 50 0.0700 3.45 2.48 1.79 23 0.1540 7.70 5.31 3.78 E 0.2500 0.00 9.07 6.12
* 49 0.0730 3.59 2.58 1.86 22 0.1570 7.87 5.41 3.85 F 0.2570 0.00 9.39 6.30
* 48 0.0760 3.73 2.68 1.93 21 0.1590 7.99 5.48 3.90 G 0.2610 0.00 9.57 6.41
* 47 0.0785 3.85 2.77 1.99 20 0.1610 8.10 5.56 3.94 H 0.2660 0.00 9.81 6.54
* 46 0.0810 3.97 2.85 2.05 19 0.1660 8.40 5.73 4.06 I 0.2720 0.00 10.09 6.70
* 45 0.0820 4.02 2.89 2.08 18 0.1695 8.62 5.86 4.15 J 0.2770 0.00 10.34 6.83
* 44 0.0860 4.20 3.02 2.17 17 0.1730 8.83 5.98 4.23 K 0.2810 0.00 10.53 6.94
* 43 0.0890 4.35 3.12 2.24 16 0.1770 9.09 6.13 4.32 L 0.2900 0.00 10.99 7.19
* 42 0.0935 4.56 3.27 2.35 15 0.1800 9.28 6.24 4.40 M 0.2950 0.00 0.00 7.33
* 41 0.0960 4.68 3.35 2.41 14 0.1820 9.41 6.31 4.44 N 0.3020 0.00 0.00 7.52
* 40 0.0980 4.78 3.42 2.46 13 0.1850 9.60 6.42 4.51 O 0.3160 0.00 0.00 7.93
* 39 0.0995 4.85 3.47 2.50 12 0.1890 9.87 6.57 4.61 P 0.3230 0.00 0.00 8.13
* 38 0.1015 4.95 3.53 2.54 11 0.1910 10.00 6.65 4.66 Q 0.3320 0.00 0.00 8.40
* 37 0.1040 5.07 3.62 2.60 10 0.1935 10.17 6.74 4.72 R 0.3390 0.00 0.00 8.62
* 36 0.1065 5.19 3.70 2.66 9 0.1960 10.35 6.84 4.78 S 0.3480 0.00 0.00 8.90
* 35 0.1100 5.36 3.82 2.74 8 0.1990 10.55 6.95 4.85 T 0.3580 0.00 0.00 9.21
* 34 0.1110 5.41 3.85 2.77 7 0.2010 10.70 7.03 4.90 U 0.3680 0.00 0.00 9.54

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for total flood
on carbon dioxide systems
Fitting Female NPT
Material UNS S30300 ASTM-582
Stainless Steel S/N
10371300
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved
NOTES:
1. Code number (XX.XX) and style type
letter (X) on flat with c" letters.
Example: 6.74B is a code 6.74 (drill
diamater 0.1935), Style B (2-port 90E).

2. * Denotes radial nozzles with strainer.

¼" Radial Nozzle (Carbon Dioxide)

Stock Number 10371300
Plate H-52L-1

Revised 10/98
Homepage Previous Document
 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code

Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port
* 50 0.0700 3.50 0.00 0.00 22 0.1570 7.66 5.44 3.91 G 0.2610 0.00 9.09 6.36
* 49 0.0730 3.65 0.00 0.00 21 0.1590 7.76 5.50 3.95 H 0.2660 0.00 9.28 6.49
* 48 0.0760 3.79 0.00 0.00 20 0.1610 7.87 5.57 4.00 I 0.2720 0.00 9.51 6.63
* 47 0.0785 3.91 0.00 0.00 19 0.1660 8.12 5.74 4.12 J 0.2770 0.00 9.71 6.75
* 46 0.0810 4.02 0.00 0.00 18 0.1695 8.30 5.86 4.20 K 0.2810 0.00 9.86 6.85
* 45 0.0820 4.07 0.00 0.00 17 0.1730 8.48 5.97 4.28 L 0.2900 0.00 10.22 7.07
* 44 0.0860 4.26 0.00 0.00 16 0.1770 8.69 6.11 4.38 M 0.2950 0.00 10.42 7.19
* 43 0.0890 4.40 0.00 0.00 15 0.1800 8.85 6.21 4.45 N 0.3020 0.00 10.71 7.36
* 42 0.0935 4.61 0.00 0.00 14 0.1820 8.95 6.28 4.50 O 0.3160 0.00 11.30 7.71
* 41 0.0960 4.73 0.00 0.00 13 0.1850 9.11 6.38 4.57 P 0.3230 0.00 11.60 7.89
* 40 0.0980 4.82 0.00 0.00 12 0.1890 9.33 6.52 4.66 Q 0.3320 0.00 11.99 8.12
* 39 0.0995 4.89 3.52 0.00 11 0.1910 9.44 6.58 4.71 R 0.3390 0.00 0.00 8.30
* 38 0.1015 4.99 3.59 0.00 10 0.1935 9.58 6.67 4.77 S 0.3480 0.00 0.00 8.53
* 37 0.1040 5.11 3.67 0.00 9 0.1960 9.71 6.76 4.82 T 0.3580 0.00 0.00 8.80
* 36 0.1065 5.22 3.76 0.00 8 0.1990 9.88 6.86 4.89 U 0.3680 0.00 0.00 9.06
* 35 0.1100 5.39 3.87 0.00 7 0.2010 9.99 6.93 4.94 V 0.3770 0.00 0.00 9.30
* 34 0.1110 5.44 3.91 0.00 6 0.2040 10.16 7.03 5.01 W 0.3860 0.00 0.00 9.55
* 33 0.1130 5.53 3.97 0.00 5 0.2055 10.25 7.08 5.05 X 0.3970 0.00 0.00 9.85
* 32 0.1160 5.67 4.07 0.00 4 0.2090 10.45 7.21 5.13 Y 0.4040 0.00 0.00 10.05
* 31 0.1200 5.86 4.21 0.00 3 0.2130 10.68 7.35 5.22 Z 0.4130 0.00 0.00 10.30
30 0.1285 6.27 4.49 0.00 2 0.2210 11.15 7.63 5.41 27/64 0.4219 0.00 0.00 10.56
29 0.1360 6.63 4.74 0.00 1 0.2280 11.57 7.88 5.58 7/16 0.4375 0.00 0.00 11.02
28 0.1405 6.85 4.89 3.52 A 0.2340 11.94 8.09 5.72 29/64 0.4531 0.00 0.00 11.49
27 0.1440 7.02 5.00 3.60 B 0.2380 12.20 8.24 5.81 15/32 0.4687 0.00 0.00 11.97
26 0.1470 7.17 5.10 3.67 C 0.2420 0.00 8.38 5.91 31/64 0.4844 0.00 0.00 12.46
25 0.1495 7.29 5.19 3.73 D 0.2460 0.00 8.53 6.01 1/2 0.5000 0.00 0.00 12.97
24 0.1520 7.41 5.27 3.79 E 0.2500 0.00 8.68 6.10
23 0.1540 7.51 5.34 3.84 F 0.2570 0.00 8.94 6.27

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for total flood
on carbon dioxide systems
Fitting Female NPT
Material UNS S30300 ASTM-582
Stainless Steel S/N
10371301
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved
NOTES:
1. Code number (XX.XX) and style type
letter (X) on flat with c" letters.
Example: 8.09B is a code 8.09 (drill
diamater 0.2340), Style B (2-port 90E).

2. * Denotes radial nozzles with strainer.

d" Radial Nozzle (Carbon Dioxide)

Stock Number 10371301
Plate H-52L-2

Revised 10/98
Homepage Previous Document
 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code

Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port
* 43 0.0890 4.45 0.00 0.00 15 0.1800 8.77 6.26 0.00 N 0.3020 15.50 10.46 7.38
* 42 0.0935 4.67 0.00 0.00 14 0.1820 8.87 6.32 0.00 O 0.3160 16.40 10.97 7.71
* 41 0.0960 4.78 0.00 0.00 13 0.1850 9.02 6.42 4.62 P 0.3230 16.87 11.23 7.88
* 40 0.0980 4.88 0.00 0.00 12 0.1890 9.22 6.56 4.71 Q 0.3320 0.00 11.57 8.10
* 39 0.0995 4.95 0.00 0.00 11 0.1910 9.32 6.62 4.76 R 0.3390 0.00 11.84 8.26
* 38 0.1015 5.04 0.00 0.00 10 0.1935 9.44 6.71 4.82 S 0.3480 0.00 12.19 8.48
* 37 0.1040 5.16 0.00 0.00 9 0.1960 9.57 6.79 4.88 T 0.3580 0.00 12.58 8.73
* 36 0.1065 5.28 0.00 0.00 8 0.1990 9.72 6.89 4.95 U 0.3680 0.00 12.98 8.97
* 35 0.1100 5.45 0.00 0.00 7 0.2010 9.82 6.96 5.00 V 0.3770 0.00 13.35 9.19
* 34 0.1110 5.49 0.00 0.00 6 0.2040 9.97 7.06 5.07 W 0.3860 0.00 13.72 9.42
* 33 0.1130 5.59 0.00 0.00 5 0.2055 10.04 7.11 5.10 X 0.3970 0.00 14.18 9.69
* 32 0.1160 5.73 0.00 0.00 4 0.2090 10.22 7.22 5.19 Y 0.4040 0.00 14.48 9.87
* 31 0.1200 5.92 0.00 0.00 3 0.2130 10.43 7.36 5.28 Z 0.4130 0.00 14.87 10.10
30 0.1285 6.31 0.00 0.00 2 0.2210 10.84 7.63 5.47 27/64 0.4219 0.00 15.26 10.32
29 0.1360 6.67 4.79 0.00 1 0.2280 11.21 7.87 5.63 7/16 0.4375 0.00 15.97 10.73
28 0.1405 6.88 4.94 0.00 A 0.2340 11.53 8.07 5.77 29/64 0.4531 0.00 16.69 11.13
27 0.1440 7.05 5.06 0.00 B 0.2380 11.75 8.21 5.87 15/32 0.4687 0.00 0.00 11.55
26 0.1470 7.19 5.16 0.00 C 0.2420 11.96 8.34 5.96 31/64 0.4844 0.00 0.00 11.98
25 0.1495 7.31 5.24 0.00 D 0.2460 12.18 8.48 6.06 1/2 0.5000 0.00 0.00 12.41
24 0.1520 7.42 5.33 0.00 E 0.2500 12.41 8.62 6.15 33/64 0.5156 0.00 0.00 12.84
23 0.1540 7.52 5.39 0.00 F 0.2570 12.80 8.86 6.31 17/32 0.5312 0.00 0.00 13.29
22 0.1570 7.66 5.49 0.00 G 0.2610 13.03 9.00 6.41 35/64 0.5469 0.00 0.00 13.75
21 0.1590 7.76 5.56 0.00 H 0.2660 13.31 9.17 6.53 9/16 0.5625 0.00 0.00 14.21
20 0.1610 7.85 5.63 0.00 I 0.2720 13.66 9.38 6.67 37/64 0.5781 0.00 0.00 14.69
19 0.1660 8.10 5.79 0.00 J 0.2770 13.96 9.56 6.79 19/32 0.5937 0.00 0.00 15.17
18 0.1695 8.26 5.91 0.00 K 0.2810 14.20 9.70 6.88 39/64 0.6094 0.00 0.00 15.67
17 0.1730 8.43 6.03 0.00 L 0.2900 14.75 10.02 7.09 5/8 0.6250 0.00 0.00 16.17
16 0.1770 8.63 6.16 0.00 M 0.2950 15.06 10.20 7.21 41/64 0.6406 0.00 0.00 16.69

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for total flood
on carbon dioxide systems
Fitting Female NPT
Material UNS S30300 ASTM-582
Stainless Steel S/N
10371302
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved
NOTES:
1. Code number (XX.XX) and style type
letter (X) on flat with c" letters.
Example: 9.17B is a code 9.17 (drill
diamater 0.2660), Style B (2-port 90E).

2. * Denotes radial nozzles with strainer.

½" Radial Nozzle (Carbon Dioxide)

Stock Number 10371302
Plate H-52L-3

Revised 10/98
Homepage Previous Document
 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code

Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port
30 0.1285 6.40 0.00 0.00 2 0.2210 10.78 7.71 0.00 27/64 0.4219 21.94 14.66 10.29
29 0.1360 6.76 0.00 0.00 1 0.2280 11.11 7.94 0.00 7/16 0.4375 0.00 15.24 10.67
28 0.1405 6.97 0.00 0.00 A 0.2340 11.41 8.14 0.00 29/64 0.4531 0.00 15.84 11.04
27 0.1440 7.13 0.00 0.00 B 0.2380 11.60 8.27 0.00 15/32 0.4687 0.00 16.45 11.42
26 0.1470 7.27 0.00 0.00 C 0.2420 11.80 8.41 0.00 31/64 0.4844 0.00 17.07 11.81
25 0.1495 7.39 0.00 0.00 D 0.2460 11.99 8.54 0.00 1/2 0.5000 0.00 17.71 12.19
24 0.1520 7.51 0.00 0.00 E 0.2500 12.19 8.67 0.00 33/64 0.5156 0.00 18.35 12.58
23 0.1540 7.60 0.00 0.00 F 0.2570 12.54 8.91 6.40 17/32 0.5312 0.00 19.01 12.97
22 0.1570 7.74 0.00 0.00 G 0.2610 12.74 9.04 6.50 35/64 0.5469 0.00 19.69 13.37
21 0.1590 7.84 0.00 0.00 H 0.2660 12.99 9.21 6.61 9/16 0.5625 0.00 20.38 13.77
20 0.1610 7.93 0.00 0.00 I 0.2720 13.29 9.41 6.76 37/64 0.5781 0.00 21.09 14.17
19 0.1660 8.17 0.00 0.00 J 0.2770 13.55 9.58 6.87 19/32 0.5937 0.00 21.81 14.58
18 0.1695 8.33 0.00 0.00 K 0.2810 13.75 9.71 6.97 39/64 0.6094 0.00 0.00 14.99
17 0.1730 8.49 0.00 0.00 L 0.2900 14.22 10.01 7.18 5/8 0.6250 0.00 0.00 15.41
16 0.1770 8.68 0.00 0.00 M 0.2950 14.48 10.18 7.30 41/64 0.6406 0.00 0.00 15.83
15 0.1800 8.82 0.00 0.00 N 0.3020 14.85 10.42 7.46 21/32 0.6562 0.00 0.00 16.26
14 0.1820 8.92 6.41 0.00 O 0.3160 15.60 10.89 7.79 43/64 0.6719 0.00 0.00 16.70
13 0.1850 9.06 6.51 0.00 P 0.3230 15.98 11.13 7.96 11/16 0.6875 0.00 0.00 17.14
12 0.1890 9.25 6.64 0.00 Q 0.3320 16.48 11.44 8.17 45/64 0.7031 0.00 0.00 17.59
11 0.1910 9.34 6.71 0.00 R 0.3390 16.87 11.69 8.33 23/32 0.7187 0.00 0.00 18.04
10 0.1935 9.46 6.79 0.00 S 0.3480 17.39 12.00 8.54 47/64 0.7344 0.00 0.00 18.51
9 0.1960 9.58 6.88 0.00 T 0.3580 17.97 12.35 8.78 3/4 0.7500 0.00 0.00 18.98
8 0.1990 9.72 6.98 0.00 U 0.3680 18.56 12.70 9.01 49/64 0.7656 0.00 0.00 19.45
7 0.2010 9.82 7.04 0.00 V 0.3770 19.10 13.02 9.23 25/32 0.7812 0.00 0.00 19.93
6 0.2040 9.96 7.14 0.00 W 0.3860 19.65 13.34 9.44 51/64 0.7969 0.00 0.00 20.43
5 0.2055 10.03 7.19 0.00 X 0.3970 20.33 13.74 9.70 13/16 0.8125 0.00 0.00 20.92
4 0.2090 10.20 7.31 0.00 Y 0.4040 20.78 13.99 9.87 53/64 0.8281 0.00 0.00 21.43
3 0.2130 10.39 7.44 0.00 Z 0.4130 21.36 14.33 10.08 27/32 0.8437 0.00 0.00 21.94

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for total flood
on carbon dioxide systems
Fitting Female NPT
Material UNS S30300 ASTM-582
Stainless Steel S/N
10371303
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved
NOTES:
1. Code number (XX.XX) and style type
letter (X) on flat with c" letters.
Example: 12.70B is a code 12.70 (drill
diamater 0.3680), Style B (2-port 90E).

2. * Denotes radial nozzles with strainer.

¾" Radial Nozzle (Carbon Dioxide)

Stock Number 10371303
Plate H-52L-4
Revised 10/98
Homepage Previous Document
 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code

Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port
20 0.1610 8.03 0.00 0.00 J 0.2770 13.51 9.67 0.00 39/64 0.6094 0.00 21.44 14.85
19 0.1660 8.26 0.00 0.00 K 0.2810 13.70 9.80 0.00 5/8 0.6250 0.00 22.07 15.24
18 0.1695 8.43 0.00 0.00 L 0.2900 14.14 10.10 0.00 41/64 0.6406 0.00 22.71 15.62
17 0.1730 8.59 0.00 0.00 M 0.2950 14.38 10.27 0.00 21/32 0.6562 0.00 23.36 16.01
16 0.1770 8.78 0.00 0.00 N 0.3020 14.72 10.50 0.00 43/64 0.6719 0.00 24.02 16.40
15 0.1800 8.92 0.00 0.00 O 0.3160 15.41 10.97 7.88 11/16 0.6875 0.00 24.69 16.80
14 0.1820 9.02 0.00 0.00 P 0.3230 15.76 11.20 8.05 45/64 0.7031 0.00 25.37 17.19
13 0.1850 9.16 0.00 0.00 Q 0.3320 16.20 11.50 8.26 23/32 0.7187 0.00 26.06 17.59
12 0.1890 9.35 0.00 0.00 R 0.3390 16.56 11.73 8.43 47/64 0.7344 0.00 26.77 18.00
11 0.1910 9.44 0.00 0.00 S 0.3480 17.01 12.03 8.64 3/4 0.7500 0.00 27.49 18.41
10 0.1935 9.56 0.00 0.00 T 0.3580 17.52 12.37 8.88 49/64 0.7656 0.00 28.22 18.82
9 0.1960 9.68 0.00 0.00 U 0.3680 18.04 12.71 9.11 25/32 0.7812 0.00 28.96 19.23
8 0.1990 9.82 0.00 0.00 V 0.3770 18.51 13.01 9.32 51/64 0.7969 0.00 0.00 19.65
7 0.2010 9.91 0.00 0.00 W 0.3860 18.99 13.32 9.54 13/16 0.8125 0.00 0.00 20.08
6 0.2040 10.05 0.00 0.00 X 0.3970 19.57 13.69 9.79 53/64 0.8281 0.00 0.00 20.50
5 0.2055 10.12 0.00 0.00 Y 0.4040 19.95 13.93 9.96 27/32 0.8437 0.00 0.00 20.94
4 0.2090 10.29 0.00 0.00 Z 0.4130 20.45 14.24 10.17 55/64 0.8594 0.00 0.00 21.38
3 0.2130 10.47 0.00 0.00 27/64 0.4219 20.94 14.54 10.38 7/8 0.8750 0.00 0.00 21.82
2 0.2210 10.85 7.80 0.00 7/16 0.4375 21.82 15.08 10.74 57/64 0.8906 0.00 0.00 22.26
1 0.2280 11.18 8.04 0.00 29/64 0.4531 22.72 15.63 11.11 29/32 0.9062 0.00 0.00 22.72
A 0.2340 11.46 8.24 0.00 15/32 0.4687 23.64 16.18 11.48 59/64 0.9219 0.00 0.00 23.18
B 0.2380 11.65 8.37 0.00 31/64 0.4844 24.58 16.73 11.85 15/16 0.9375 0.00 0.00 23.64
C 0.2420 11.84 8.50 0.00 1/2 0.5000 25.55 17.30 12.22 61/64 0.9531 0.00 0.00 24.11
D 0.2460 12.03 8.64 0.00 33/64 0.5156 26.53 17.86 12.59 31/32 0.9687 0.00 0.00 24.58
E 0.2500 12.22 8.77 0.00 17/32 0.5312 27.55 18.44 12.96 63/64 0.9844 0.00 0.00 25.06
F 0.2570 12.55 9.00 0.00 35/64 0.5469 28.59 19.02 13.34 1 1.0000 0.00 0.00 25.55
G 0.2610 12.74 9.14 0.00 9/16 0.5625 0.00 19.61 13.71 1-3/64 1.0469 0.00 0.00 27.04
H 0.2660 12.98 9.30 0.00 37/64 0.5781 0.00 20.21 14.09
I 0.2720 13.27 9.50 0.00 19/32 0.5937 0.00 20.82 14.47

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for total flood
on carbon dioxide systems
Fitting Female NPT
Material UNS S30300 ASTM-582
Stainless Steel S/N
10371304
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved
NOTE:

1. Code number (XX.XX) and style type

letter (X) on flat with c" letters.
Example: 16.73B is a code 16.73 (drill
diamater 0.4844), Style B (2-port 90E).

1" Radial Nozzle (Carbon Dioxide)

Stock Number 10371304
Plate H-52L-5
Revised 10/98
Homepage Previous Document
 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code

Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port
3 0.2130 10.62 0.00 0.00 X 0.3970 19.35 13.80 0.00 25/32 0.7812 0.00 27.40 19.04
2 0.2210 10.99 0.00 0.00 Y 0.4040 19.69 14.04 0.00 51/64 0.7969 0.00 28.02 19.42
1 0.2280 11.32 0.00 0.00 Z 0.4130 20.14 14.34 0.00 13/16 0.8125 0.00 28.64 19.81
A 0.2340 11.61 0.00 0.00 27/64 0.4219 20.58 14.63 0.00 53/64 0.8281 0.00 29.27 20.19
B 0.2380 11.80 0.00 0.00 7/16 0.4375 21.35 15.15 0.00 27/32 0.8437 0.00 29.91 20.57
C 0.2420 11.98 0.00 0.00 29/64 0.4531 22.14 15.67 11.26 55/64 0.8594 0.00 30.56 20.97
D 0.2460 12.17 0.00 0.00 15/32 0.4687 22.94 16.20 11.62 7/8 0.8750 0.00 31.22 21.35
E 0.2500 12.36 0.00 0.00 31/64 0.4844 23.75 16.73 11.99 57/64 0.8906 0.00 31.88 21.75
F 0.2570 12.69 0.00 0.00 1/2 0.5000 24.56 17.25 12.36 29/32 0.9062 0.00 32.56 22.14
G 0.2610 12.88 0.00 0.00 33/64 0.5156 25.39 17.78 12.73 59/64 0.9219 0.00 33.24 22.54
H 0.2660 13.11 0.00 0.00 17/32 0.5312 26.23 18.31 13.10 15/16 0.9375 0.00 33.93 22.94
I 0.2720 13.40 0.00 0.00 35/64 0.5469 27.09 18.85 13.46 61/64 0.9531 0.00 34.63 23.34
J 0.2770 13.63 0.00 0.00 9/16 0.5625 27.96 19.39 13.83 31/32 0.9687 0.00 35.34 23.74
K 0.2810 13.82 0.00 0.00 37/64 0.5781 28.85 19.93 14.19 63/64 0.9844 0.00 36.06 24.15
L 0.2900 14.24 0.00 0.00 19/32 0.5937 29.75 20.47 14.56 1 1.0000 0.00 36.79 24.56
M 0.2950 14.47 0.00 0.00 39/64 0.6094 30.67 21.03 14.93 1-3/64 1.0469 0.00 39.03 25.81
N 0.3020 14.80 0.00 0.00 5/8 0.6250 31.60 21.58 15.30 1-7/64 1.1094 0.00 0.00 27.53
O 0.3160 15.47 0.00 0.00 41/64 0.6406 32.54 22.13 15.67 1-1/8 1.1250 0.00 0.00 27.96
P 0.3230 15.80 11.34 0.00 21/32 0.6562 33.51 22.70 16.04 1-11/64 1.1719 0.00 0.00 29.30
Q 0.3320 16.22 11.64 0.00 43/64 0.6719 34.50 23.27 16.41 1-7/32 1.2188 0.00 0.00 30.67
R 0.3390 16.56 11.88 0.00 11/16 0.6875 35.50 23.84 16.78 1-1/4 1.2500 0.00 0.00 31.60
S 0.3480 16.99 12.18 0.00 45/64 0.7031 36.52 24.41 17.16 1-19/64 1.2969 0.00 0.00 33.03
T 0.3580 17.47 12.51 0.00 23/32 0.7187 37.56 25.00 17.53 1-11/32 1.3438 0.00 0.00 34.50
U 0.3680 17.95 12.84 0.00 47/64 0.7344 38.63 25.59 17.91 1-3/8 1.3750 0.00 0.00 35.50
V 0.3770 18.38 13.14 0.00 3/4 0.7500 39.70 26.19 18.28 1-27/64 1.4219 0.00 0.00 37.04
W 0.3860 18.82 13.44 0.00 49/64 0.7656 0.00 26.79 18.66

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for total flood
on carbon dioxide systems
Fitting Female NPT
Material UNS S30300 ASTM-582
Stainless Steel S/N
10371305
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved
NOTE:

1. Code number (XX.XX) and style type

letter (X) on flat with c" letters.
Example: 26.19B is a code 26.19 (drill
diamater 0.7500), Style B (2-port 90E).

1¼" Radial Nozzle (Carbon Dioxide)

Stock Number 10371305
Plate H-52L-6

Revised 10/98
Homepage Previous Document
 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code

Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port
E 0.2500 12.46 0.00 0.00 29/64 0.4531 22.09 15.77 0.00 53/64 0.8281 43.13 28.78 20.20
F 0.2570 12.79 0.00 0.00 15/32 0.4687 22.85 16.29 0.00 27/32 0.8437 44.17 29.36 20.58
G 0.2610 12.98 0.00 0.00 31/64 0.4844 23.62 16.81 0.00 55/64 0.8594 45.24 29.96 20.95
H 0.2660 13.21 0.00 0.00 1/2 0.5000 24.39 17.33 0.00 7/8 0.8750 0.00 30.55 21.33
I 0.2720 13.49 0.00 0.00 33/64 0.5156 25.17 17.85 0.00 57/64 0.8906 0.00 31.15 21.71
J 0.2770 13.73 0.00 0.00 17/32 0.5312 25.96 18.37 0.00 29/32 0.9062 0.00 31.76 22.09
K 0.2810 13.92 0.00 0.00 35/64 0.5469 26.76 18.90 0.00 59/64 0.9219 0.00 32.38 22.47
L 0.2900 14.34 0.00 0.00 9/16 0.5625 27.57 19.42 13.93 15/16 0.9375 0.00 33.00 22.85
M 0.2950 14.58 0.00 0.00 37/64 0.5781 28.38 19.95 14.30 61/64 0.9531 0.00 33.63 23.23
N 0.3020 14.91 0.00 0.00 19/32 0.5937 29.21 20.48 14.67 31/32 0.9687 0.00 34.26 23.62
O 0.3160 15.57 0.00 0.00 39/64 0.6094 30.05 21.01 15.03 63/64 0.9844 0.00 34.90 24.01
P 0.3230 15.89 0.00 0.00 5/8 0.6250 30.89 21.55 15.40 1 1.0000 0.00 35.55 24.39
Q 0.3320 16.32 0.00 0.00 41/64 0.6406 31.75 22.08 15.77 1-3/64 1.0469 0.00 37.54 25.57
R 0.3390 16.64 0.00 0.00 21/32 0.6562 32.62 22.62 16.13 1-7/64 1.1094 0.00 40.29 27.16
S 0.3480 17.07 0.00 0.00 43/64 0.6719 33.51 23.16 16.50 1-1/8 1.1250 0.00 40.99 27.57
T 0.3580 17.54 0.00 0.00 11/16 0.6875 34.40 23.71 16.87 1-11/64 1.1719 0.00 43.16 28.80
U 0.3680 18.01 0.00 0.00 45/64 0.7031 35.31 24.25 17.24 1-7/32 1.2188 0.00 45.41 30.05
V 0.3770 18.44 0.00 0.00 23/32 0.7187 36.24 24.80 17.60 1-1/4 1.2500 0.00 0.00 30.89
W 0.3860 18.86 0.00 0.00 47/64 0.7344 37.18 25.36 17.97 1-19/64 1.2969 0.00 0.00 32.19
X 0.3970 19.39 13.91 0.00 3/4 0.7500 38.13 25.92 18.34 1-11/32 1.3438 0.00 0.00 33.51
Y 0.4040 19.72 14.14 0.00 49/64 0.7656 39.10 26.48 18.71 1-3/8 1.3750 0.00 0.00 34.40
Z 0.4130 20.15 14.44 0.00 25/32 0.7812 40.08 27.05 19.08 1-27/64 1.4219 0.00 0.00 35.78
27/64 0.4219 20.58 14.73 0.00 51/64 0.7969 41.08 27.62 19.46 1-1/2 1.5000 0.00 0.00 38.13
7/16 0.4375 21.33 15.25 0.00 13/16 0.8125 42.10 28.20 19.83

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for total flood
on carbon dioxide systems
Fitting Female NPT
Material UNS S30300 ASTM-582
Stainless Steel S/N
10371306
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved
NOTE:

1. Code number (XX.XX) and style type

letter (X) on flat with c" letters.
Example: 29.96B is a code 29.96 (drill
diamater 0.8594), Style B (2-port 90E).

1½" Radial Nozzle (Carbon Dioxide)

Stock Number 10371306
Plate H-52L-7

Revised 10/98
Homepage Previous Document
 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code Drill Drill Code

Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port Size Dia. 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port
P 0.3230 16.09 0.00 0.00 9/16 0.5625 27.43 19.61 0.00 7/8 0.8750 43.73 30.17 21.48
Q 0.3320 16.51 0.00 0.00 37/64 0.5781 28.18 20.13 0.00 57/64 0.8906 44.63 30.71 21.84
R 0.3390 16.84 0.00 0.00 19/32 0.5937 28.94 20.64 0.00 29/32 0.9062 45.54 31.26 22.21
S 0.3480 17.27 0.00 0.00 39/64 0.6094 29.71 21.17 0.00 59/64 0.9219 46.47 31.81 22.58
T 0.3580 17.74 0.00 0.00 5/8 0.6250 30.48 21.68 0.00 15/16 0.9375 47.41 32.37 22.95
U 0.3680 18.21 0.00 0.00 41/64 0.6406 31.25 22.20 0.00 61/64 0.9531 48.35 32.92 23.32
V 0.3770 18.63 0.00 0.00 21/32 0.6562 32.03 22.72 0.00 31/32 0.9687 49.31 33.48 23.69
W 0.3860 19.06 0.00 0.00 43/64 0.6719 32.82 23.25 0.00 63/64 0.9844 50.29 34.05 24.06
X 0.3970 19.58 0.00 0.00 11/16 0.6875 33.61 23.77 0.00 1 1.0000 51.27 34.62 24.43
Y 0.4040 19.90 0.00 0.00 45/64 0.7031 34.41 24.30 0.00 1-3/64 1.0469 54.29 36.34 25.55
Z 0.4130 20.33 0.00 0.00 23/32 0.7187 35.21 24.82 17.80 1-7/64 1.1094 0.00 38.69 27.05
27/64 0.4219 20.74 0.00 0.00 47/64 0.7344 36.03 25.35 18.17 1-1/8 1.1250 0.00 39.29 27.43
7/16 0.4375 21.48 0.00 0.00 3/4 0.7500 36.85 25.88 18.54 1-11/64 1.1719 0.00 41.11 28.56
29/64 0.4531 22.21 0.00 0.00 49/64 0.7656 37.68 26.41 18.91 1-7/32 1.2188 0.00 42.98 29.71
15/32 0.4687 22.95 0.00 0.00 25/32 0.7812 38.51 26.94 19.27 1-1/4 1.2500 0.00 44.24 30.48
31/64 0.4844 23.69 0.00 0.00 51/64 0.7969 39.36 27.47 19.64 1-19/64 1.2969 0.00 46.19 31.64
1/2 0.5000 24.43 17.53 0.00 13/16 0.8125 40.22 28.01 20.01 1-11/32 1.3438 0.00 48.18 32.82
33/64 0.5156 25.17 18.05 0.00 53/64 0.8281 41.08 28.54 20.37 1-3/8 1.3750 0.00 49.53 33.61
17/32 0.5312 25.92 18.57 0.00 27/32 0.8437 41.95 29.08 20.74 1-27/64 1.4219 0.00 51.61 34.81
35/64 0.5469 26.67 19.09 0.00 55/64 0.8594 42.84 29.63 21.11 1-1/2 1.5000 0.00 0.00 36.85

TECHNICAL DATA
Application Approved for total flood
on carbon dioxide systems
Fitting Female NPT
Material UNS S30300 ASTM-582
Stainless Steel S/N
10371307
UL Listing Listed
FM Approval Approved
NOTE:

1. Code number (XX.XX) and style type

letter (X) on flat with c" letters.
Example: 38.69B is a code 38.69 (drill
diamater 1.1094), Style B (2-port 90E).

2" Radial Nozzle (Carbon Dioxide)

Stock Number 10371307
Plate H-52L-8

Revised 10/98
Homepage Previous Document
 END CAP 5-061-0764,

I
;
/
J
BRASS, UNS C36000 H02

O-RING 7-023-0042

PILOT (PORT A)

EXHAUST (PORT B)

I Ic I INLET (PORT Cl

1 WlI /8'-27E:JEz
1 PLUG

A u N c i E R CAP W 6 i - O a m .
BRASS, UNS C36000H02

SECTION *A-A"

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire system: Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

EAD b WIRE SEAL 5-071-0199

PULLPIN 5- 06 1-0647

HANDWHEEL 5061 0648

O-RING 5-023-0459
BODY, MANUAL OPERATOR
5-061-0686, BRASS ASTM 6 1 6
ALLOY 3 6 0
O-RING 7-023-0042 .STEM 5-061-0646, TYPE 303 SST

114' NPT (PORT 'A')

PILOT PRESSURE INLET
i- 19/32'
PILOT PISTON 5-06 1-0 142
BRASS ASTM 816, ALLOY 3 6 0
HOLDING PISTON 5-061-0745.
BRASS ASTM 616, ALLOY 360
O-RING 5-023-0538

O-RING 5-023-0508
D
EXHAUST (PORT 'B
.
1/4' NPT (PORT 'ED]
OUTLET
114' NPT (PORT 'C') INLET

STEM 5-061-0744. 303 S S T

BODY 5-061-0753, BRASS

2 MOUNTING HOLES - 9/32' DIA.

PLUNGER ASSEMBLY 3-061-041.

ASTM 816, ALLOY 3 6 0

0-RINQ 7-023-0041

4 \-- CAP 6-061-0746.

BRASS C-36000H02

/ Pilot Control Valve - Pilot Stop Valve \

W i t h Pressure Lock Open Feature
Stock Number 1 0 6 11014
Plate H-53B /'
Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

 CHEmETROn
Fire systerng Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

'c1-1/2"-

r'
1 m 318"
I --
i t
I
I i "

Two 9/32" Dia. Holes

114"
for Attaching Bracket
Two 9/32" Dia. Holes
for Attaching Valve
TOP VIEW REAR VIEW

lockwashers and nuts for attaching valve

Horizontally as Shown

Port C

Two 5/32" Dia. Holes

for Attaching Nameplate

Bracket Material: 12 Gauge Type 304 SST

-
Pilot Control Valve Pilot Stop Valve
Stock Number 3 0 0 9 0 2 2 7
Plate H-53C

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROn
Fire system: Fire Extinguishing Equipment...
TOP CLEARANCE LINE#

B ..-.-.-.....A.........------.--......---...-.-----
+I
FORGED BRASS, I
i

SIZE

#CLEARANCE LINE INDICATES MINIMUM

CLEAR SPACE REQUIRED FOR VALVE
SERVICING. SPACE ALLOWS SOME MOVEMENT
-- - ---- - -, OF DISC HOLDER WITHOUT PISTON
BOTTOM CLEARANCE LINE# MOVEMENT. THtS FEATURE ALLOWS
BACKFLOW TO RELIEVE HtGHER
DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE.

-
Table of Dimensions Inches

Stock Max.
Model No.
Number
A B C D
Width
FD-34039 10610371 1 8%" 3'h" 12 6 4

FD-23907 10610369 1%'' 9%'' 4 13 8 5

/ Pressure Operated Discharge Valve - Cardox Valve \

1' and 1 l/2" - Threaded
Plate H-54

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Cardox Selector Valve

Plate H-54A

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire ~ y s t e m i Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

2" NPT 10610712 5" 1 2-19/32" 1 3-118" 1 1-112" 1 8-3/16 1 4-3/16"

Description: Double seal ball valve

Rating: 2000 PSI wog
Material: Carbon steel body
Carbon steel ball and stem, hard chrome plated
Special nylon seats, teflon seals
Flow: Either direction
Handle: Quarter turn operation
Alternate position of handle 180" opposite

Plate H-54C

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

 CHEmETROn
Fire ~ y s t e m i Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Locking Device
Padlock furnished
by others

Locking device shown in Locked Closed Position.

Locking device can be assembled to lock valve in either open or closed position.

Materials
Body Carbon steel
Ball Valve Size Ball & Stem Carbon steel, hard chrome
plated
Seats Teflon and special nylon

Plate H-54D

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...
112"-13 TAP FOR MOUNTING

bZ?T~~
\ ~ C L EARAN C E LINE LSPACEALL O W S SO ME M O VEMENT OF DI H O LD E R
SC
WITHOUT PISTON MOVEMENT. THIS FEATURE ALLOWS
BODY: BACKFLOW TO RELIEVE HIGHER DOWSTREAM
2" BRASS, ASTM 4A (85-5-5-5) PRESSURE.
3", 4" & 6" CAST STEEL.
ASTM 216 CAD. PL.

BOTTOM CAP: .J NOTE: CLEARANCE LINE # INDICATES MINIMUM

CLEAR SPACE REQUIRED FOR VALVE
SAME MATERIAL AS BODY
SERVICING.

Pressure Operated Discharge Valve [Cardox Valve]

2" Threaded and 3",4", & 6" Flanged Valves
Plate H-54E

Revised 212001

Homepage Previous Document

NEW
#70985020

NEW
#70985021

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

1-1/2" NPT
BOTH ENDS

-
F< -

CHECK DISC - SPRING GUIDE - I

BRASS, UNS C36000 TYPE 17-4PH SST

3-061-0067 3-061-0170

\BODY - HEXSPRING - 7-047-0012

C.D. STEEL

Note: This unit replaces previous and is used in I", 1-114, and 1-112" piping.
Use forged steel hex bushings or 300 Ib. Malleable iron reducers for
reduction to 1" and 1-114" pipe.

Materials
Body Finish Ultratech 500 phosphate coating per
MIL-P-16232, Type 2, .0002-.0004 thick.
Alternate Body Finish Electrolytic nickel plated per MIL-C-260743,
class 1, Grade B (.0005 thick).

-
1-1/2" Check Valve 1000 psi Working Pressure
Stock Number 10610739
Plate H-55 1
Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

I Pipe Size I Model Number I Stock Number I

1 314" NPT ( 847778-2 1 10610330 1

Cardox Check Valve

Plate H-55A

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

Pipe Size Stock Number Materials

Body Cast carbon steel
4.09" 10610700
Male End Hot forged steel
3" 7.25" 5.75" 10610702 Union Nut Hot forged steel
Poppet Brass

Cardox Check Valve

300 to 1000 PSI Service
Plate H-556

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

THE DIFFERENTIAL CHECK VALVE. LOCATED IN A CROSSOVER BETWEEN THE NITIAL AND EXTENDED
DISCHARGE MANIFOLDS, ALLOWS INITIAL DISCHARGE PRESSURE TO OPEN THE EXTENDED DIS-
CHARGECYLlNDERVALVESBUTPREVENTSTHEHlGHERPRESSUREEXTENDEDDlSCHARGEFROM
ENTERING THE INITIAL DISCHARGE MANIFOLD.

Stock Number 1 0 6 1 0728

Plate H-55D

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

I Materials I

3000 PSI Service

Stock Number 70610009
Plate H-55F

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

 CHEmETROn
Fire ~ y s t e m i Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

5-023-deb3

I/2"BLEEDER VALVE I / ~ " B L E E D E RVALVE

NO. 1-061-0573 NO. 1-061-0731

This bleeder valve is installed in main and reserve This bleeder valve is installed in a system actuation
cylinder manifolds to vent accidental check valve pilot line to prevent accumulation of accidental leak-
leakage during discharge of one cylinder bank. If age through a device that if unvented, could cause
unvented, accumulated leakage pressure could a false discharge of the system. Valve closes at ap-
cause actuation of the other cylinder bank. Valve proximately50 psi when full pilot pressure is applied
closes when manifold pressure reaches approxi- on normal system operation.
mately 20 psi to prevent agent loss under normal
discharge conditions.

Cardox Bleeder Valves

Plate H-56

Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire ~ y s t e m i Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

Stock Number 3 0 4 4 0 0 3 2
Plate H-56A

Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

1000 PSI Working Pressure

Stock Number 70860004
Plate H-57

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
 CHEmETROIl
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

NUT ( 5- 061-0625)
/- BRASS, QO-B-637 .
, 2 4 8 2 COMP. 1

SAFETY DISC ( 5-061 -

WASHER (5-061 0623) -

BODY (5-071 - 0 2 7 9 )
BRASS, ASTWB16 - ALLOY 3 6 0

REF. BURSTING PRESSURE 2650 TO 3000 P.S. I.

Frangible Disc Relief Valve Assembly

Stock Number 30710006
Plate H-57A

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

114" Outlet Inlet

C------- -

Brass Body --/ \-- Filter Element, 40-55 Micron

316 Stainless Steel

3000 PSI Maximum Operating Pressure

Stock Number 70860020

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

 CHENlETROn
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...
LOAD F' MAX-----.

Materials
Body Type 303 Stainless steel SUPPORT
Spring Catch Type 302 Stainless steel
spring quality
L"I
Piston Type 303 Stainless steel

CATCH RELEASED BY
DISCHARGE PRESSURE

I Size I Model
I
I S ~ O C ~ N O .A I I IB C D I E
I Max.
Load I Support
No. I I
1-718 1 100 lbs 1 A45631 1 50390750 1

Cardox Pressure Release

Plate H-58

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...
PROVIDE UNION FOR SWITCH 1/4" NPT PRESSURE
MAINTENANCE CONNECTION

NORMAL
POSITION
JIT
OPERATED POSITION 1 CONNECTION,
TYP 2 PLACES

Materials Switch Arrangements

Cover Cast red bronze 85-5-5-5 Normal Position 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. contacts
Piston Type 303 SST Alternate Arrange- 4 N.O. contacts (field adjusted)
Plunger Type 303 SST ments 4 N.C. contacts (field adjusted)
Switches Toggle, GE Catalog No. TC-
2228s

[Two 2-Pole Single Throw Switches]

Stock Number 1017 0 0 6 5
Plate H-59

Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...

NOTES:
1. THE JOINT BETWEEN THE BASE AND THE
OPERATING HEAD MUST BE SUCH THAT A
.0015 FEELER GAUGE WILL NOT ENTER
MORE THAN . I 2 5 AT ANY POINT.
2. APPROXIMATE NET WEIGHT = 10 LBS.
3. TEST TO OPERATE BELOW 30 LBS. AIR
PRESSURE AND BE TIGHT UNDER
C 0 2 PRESSURE WITH NO NOTICEABLE LEAK.

NUMBER "3" TO BE STAMPED

AT ASSEMBLY DESIGNATING
3 POLE EXPLOSIONPROOF

/ 3 Pole Explosionproof Pressure Switch

\
Stock Number 70170229
Plate H-59A

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire ~ y s t e m i Fire Extinguishing Equipment ...
9/32" Dia. Holes for 114" Mounting Bolts -
Torque to 9 - 11 Ft. Lb.

I I
I
I Pressure Switch
Stock No.10170065
Refer to Diagram H-59
i1 I 5-114"

16 Ga. Type 304 SST

Stainless Steel Straps
SIN 50100271 (2 Required) j Ia II
I
Mounted Over Conduit I

Connection Hubs

Mounting Straps for

Pressure Switch [Plate H-59)
Plate H-59F

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systerni Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

1/2" DIA MOUNTING

HOLES, QTY- 4 ACCUMULATOR - 113 CU. IN.
D.O.T. SPECIFICATION 3 A A 1 8 0 0

NOTES:

1. STOCK UNITS ARE FACTORY SET FOR 2 2 SECONDS DELAY. TO INCREASE TIME DELAY,
TURN NEEDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE.

2. LIMIT OF ADJUSTMENT: 5 SECONDS MINIMUM TO 9 0 SECONDS MAXIMUM.

3. ENCLOSURE MATERIAL: 16GA. CARBON STEEL, PAINTED WITH RED EPOXY ENAMEL.

/ Automatic Mechanical Timer \

Stock Number 1010 0 9 4 7
Plate H-60A

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
CHEmETROn
Fire system6 Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

-
114' NPT PORT 'G*
(TO ACCUMULATOR)
NEEDLE 5-0 10-0203,
CYLINDER PLUG 5-010-0201,
BRASS, C36000H02
JAMB NUT 5-023-0526
METERING VALVE BODY
5- 010- 0202
TYPE 3 0 3 SST

GASKET 5-010-0 132,

O-RING 5-023-0512

O-RING 7-023-0513
. O-RING 5-023-0463

PISTON 5-0 10-02 16,

ASTM B16, ALLOY 3 6 O-RING 5-023-0526
114" NPT OUTLET
.SPOOL 5-0 10-0 198.
TYPE 303 SST
-ASTM
BODY 5-0 10- 0250 , BRASS,
B16, ALLOY 3 6 0

2 MOUNTING HOLES - 9/32' DIA.

DISC RETAINER 5-0 10-0 196,

BRASS, ASTM B16, ALLOY 3 6 0
SPRING 5-047-0108,

O-RING 7- 023- 0041

CYLINDER PLUG 5-010-0215,

BRASS, C36000H02

f Discharge Delay Timer Valve

Stock Number 30100097
Plate H-61

Revised 10198

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETROn
Fire systems Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

DIRT TRAP
DECIBLE RATING
9 0 D B + AT 10FT.

Materials Decibel Rating

Body Bronze
In excess of 90 db at 10 ft.
Rotor Brass
distance, with CO, vapor
Nozzle & Filter Monel discharges approximately 3
Hood Steel pounds of CO, vapor per
minute at 280 psig.
Finish Red Paint

Stock Number 70030380

Plate H-62B

Revised 6115/98

Homepage Previous Document

CHEmETRORl
Fire system; Fire Extinguishing Equipment...

CONDUIT TO HOSEREEL
ACTUATOR CONTROLS

"L FLOOR
* RECOMMENDED MINIMUM

SIDE VlEW FRONT VlEW

Typical Hosereel Mounting Detail

Plate H-64

Revised 6115/98
Homepage Previous Document
 GEMCOM INC.
ANSI CO2 WARNING SIGNS
Cindy McSweeney
800-871-6840 • 800-476-8618 Fax
cmcsweeney@gemcom.com

Price
Size Material Qty Each Total
Gem This sign shall be used at every
entrance to protected space.
01
AFP Part No. - AFP-AL2
Price
Size Material Qty Each Total
Gem This sign shall be used outside
each entrance to carbon dioxide
02 storage rooms.

Price
Size Material Qty Each Total
This sign shall be used at every
Gem entrance to protected space for
03 systems provided with a
wintergreen odorizer.

Price
Size Material Qty Each Total
Gem This sign shall be used at each
manual actuation station.
04

Price
Size Material Qty Each Total
This sign shall be used in every
Gem nearby space where carbon
05 dioxide could accumulate to
hazardous levels.

Price
Size Material Qty Each Total
Gem This sign shall be used in every
protected space.
06
AFP Part No. - AFP-AL1

Contact:

Company: Total Order:

Address: PO#:

City: State: Zip:

Phone: Fax:

Email: Date:

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

Praxair Material Safety Data Sheet

1. Chemical Product and Company Identification

Product Name: Carbon dioxide (MSDS No. P-4574-H) Trade Name: Carbon Dioxide
Chemical Name: Carbon dioxide Synonyms: Carbonic anhydride, carbonic
acid gas
Formula: CO2 Chemical Family: Acid anhydrides
Telephone: Emergencies: 1-800-645-4633* Company Name: Praxair, Inc.
CHEMTREC: 1-800-424-9300* 39 Old Ridgebury Road
Routine: 1-800-PRAXAIR Danbury, CT 06810-5113
* Call emergency numbers 24 hours a day only for spills, leaks, fire, exposure, or accidents involving this
product. For routine information, contact your supplier, Praxair sales representative, or call
1-800-PRAXAIR (1-800-772-9247).

2. Composition/Information on Ingredients
This section covers materials of manufacture only. See sections 3, 8, 10, 11, 15, and 16 for
information on by-products generated during use, especially use in welding and cutting.
For custom mixtures of this product, request an MSDS for each component. See section 16 for
important information about mixtures.
INGREDIENT CAS NUMBER CONCENTRATION OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV-TWA
Carbon Dioxide 124-38-9 >99% 5,000 ppm* 5,000 ppm**
* The symbol > means “greater than”; the symbol <, “less than.”
** See section 3.

3. Hazards Identification

EMERGENCY OVERVIEW
CAUTION! High-pressure liquid and gas.
Can cause rapid suffocation.
Can increase respiration and heart rate.
May cause nervous system damage.
May cause frostbite.
May cause dizziness and drowsiness.
Self-contained breathing apparatus may be required by rescue workers.
Odor: None to slightly pungent
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUE: TLV-TWA, 5,000 ppm (ACGIH, 1998). TLV-TWA, 15 min STEL,
30,000 ppm. ACGIH recommends a TLV-TWA of 5 mg/m3 for welding fumes not otherwise classified
(NOC) that may be generated during welding with this product. TLV-TWAs should be used as a guide in
the control of health hazards and not as fine lines between safe and dangerous concentrations.

Copyright © 1980, 1985,1986, 1989, 1991-1993, 1997, 1999, Praxair Technology, Inc. Page 1 of 10
All rights reserved.
Revised

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

EFFECTS OF A SINGLE (ACUTE) OVEREXPOSURE:

INHALATION–Carbon dioxide gas is an asphyxiant with effects due to lack of oxygen. It is also
physiologically active, affecting circulation and breathing. Moderate concentrations may cause
headache, drowsiness, dizziness, stinging of the nose and throat, excitation, rapid breathing and heart
rate, excess salivation, vomiting, and unconsciousness. Lack of oxygen can kill.
SKIN CONTACT–No harm expected from vapor. Cold gas, or liquid or solid carbon dioxide may
cause severe frostbite.
SWALLOWING–An unlikely route of exposure. This product is a gas at normal temperature and
pressure.
EYE CONTACT–No harm expected from vapor. Cold gas, or liquid or solid carbon dioxide may
cause severe frostbite.
EFFECTS OF REPEATED (CHRONIC) OVEREXPOSURE: No harm expected.
OTHER EFFECTS OF OVEREXPOSURE: Damage to retinal or ganglion cells and central nervous
system may occur.
MEDICAL CONDITIONS AGGRAVATED BY OVEREXPOSURE: The toxicology and the
physical and chemical properties of carbon dioxide suggest that overexposure is unlikely to aggravate
existing medical conditions.
SIGNIFICANT LABORATORY DATA WITH POSSIBLE RELEVANCE TO HUMAN HEALTH
HAZARD EVALUATION: A single study has shown an increase in heart defects in rats exposed to 6%
carbon dioxide in air for 24 hours at different times during gestation. There is no evidence that carbon
dioxide is teratogenic in humans.
CARCINOGENICITY: Carbon dioxide is not listed by NTP, OSHA, or IARC.

4. First Aid Measures

INHALATION: Immediately remove to fresh air. If not breathing, give artificial respiration. If
breathing is difficult, qualified personnel may give oxygen. Call a physician.
SKIN CONTACT: For exposure to cold vapor or solid, immediately warm frostbite area with warm
water not to exceed 105°F (41°C). In case of massive exposure, remove contaminated clothing while
showering with warm water. Call a physician.
SWALLOWING: An unlikely route of exposure. This product is a gas at normal temperature and
pressure.
EYE CONTACT: For exposure to cold vapor or solid, immediately flush eyes thoroughly with warm
water for at least 15 minutes. Hold the eyelids open and away from the eyeballs to ensure that all surfaces
are flushed thoroughly. See a physician, preferably an ophthalmologist, immediately.
NOTES TO PHYSICIAN: There is no specific antidote. Treatment of overexposure should be directed
at the control of symptoms and the clinical condition of the patient.

5. Fire Fighting Measures

FLASH POINT Not applicable AUTOIGNITION Not applicable
(test method) TEMPERATURE
FLAMMABLE LIMITS LOWER Not applicable UPPER Not applicable
IN AIR, % by volume

Page 2 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

EXTINGUISHING MEDIA: Carbon dioxide cannot catch fire. Use media appropriate for surrounding
fire.
SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES: CAUTION! High-pressure gas liquid and gas.
Evacuate all personnel from danger area. Immediately deluge cylinders with water from maximum
distance until cool, then move them away from fire area if without risk. Self-contained breathing
apparatus may be required by rescue workers. On-site fire brigades must comply with OSHA 29 CFR
1910.156.
UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS: Heat of fire can build pressure in cylinder and
cause it to rupture. No part of cylinder should be subjected to a temperature higher than 125°F (52°C).
Carbon dioxide cylinders are equipped with a pressure relief device. (Exceptions may exist where
authorized by DOT.)
HAZARDOUS COMBUSTION PRODUCTS: None known.

6. Accidental Release Measures

STEPS TO BE TAKEN IF MATERIAL IS RELEASED OR SPILLED: CAUTION! High-
pressure liquid and gas. Carbon dioxide is an asphyxiant. Lack of oxygen can kill. Evacuate all
personnel from danger area. Use self-contained breathing apparatus where needed. Shut off leak if you
can do so without risk. Ventilate area or move cylinder to a well-ventilated area. Test for sufficient
oxygen, especially in confined spaces, before allowing reentry.
WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD: Prevent waste from contaminating the surrounding environment.
Keep personnel away. Discard any product, residue, disposable container, or liner in an environmentally
acceptable manner, in full compliance with federal, state, and local regulations. If necessary, call your
local supplier for assistance.

7. Handling and Storage

PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN IN STORAGE: Store and use with adequate ventilation. Firmly
secure cylinders upright to keep them from falling or being knocked over. Screw valve protection cap
firmly in place by hand. Store only where temperature will not exceed 125°F (52°C). Store full and empty
cylinders separately. Use a first-in, first-out inventory system to prevent storing full cylinders for long
periods.
PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN IN HANDLING: Protect cylinders from damage. Use a suitable
hand truck to move cylinders; do not drag, roll, slide, or drop. Never attempt to lift a cylinder by its cap;
the cap is intended solely to protect the valve. Never insert an object (e.g., wrench, screwdriver, pry bar)
into cap openings; doing so may damage the valve and cause a leak. Use an adjustable strap wrench to
remove over-tight or rusted caps. Open valve slowly. If valve is hard to open, discontinue use and contact
your supplier. Never apply flame or localized heat directly to any part of the cylinder. High temperatures
may damage the cylinder and could cause the pressure relief device to fail prematurely, venting the
cylinder contents. For other precautions in using carbon dioxide, see section 16.
For additional information on storage and handling, refer to Compressed Gas Association (CGA)
pamphlet P-1, Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in Containers, available from the CGA. Refer to
section 16 for the address and phone number along with a list of other available publications.

Page 3 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

8. Exposure Controls/Personal Protection

VENTILATION/ENGINEERING CONTROLS:
LOCAL EXHAUST–Use a local exhaust system, if necessary, to control the concentration of carbon
dioxide in the worker's breathing zone.
MECHANICAL (general)–Under certain conditions, general exhaust ventilation may be acceptable
to keep carbon dioxide below the exposure limit.
SPECIAL–None
OTHER–None
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: None required under normal use. An air-supplied respirator must be
used in confined spaces. Respiratory protection must conform to OSHA rules as specified in 29 CFR
1910.134.
SKIN PROTECTION: Wear insulated neoprene gloves for cylinder handling; welding gloves for
welding.
EYE PROTECTION: Select in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.133. See section 16 for
requirements when using carbon dioxide or carbon dioxide mixtures in welding and cutting.
OTHER PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Metatarsal shoes for cylinder handling. Select in accordance
with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.132 and 1910.133. See section 16 for requirements when using carbon dioxide
or carbon dioxide mixtures in welding and cutting. Regardless of protective equipment, never touch live
electrical parts.

9. Physical and Chemical Properties

MOLECULAR WEIGHT: 44.01

SPECIFIC GRAVITY (Air = 1) at 70°F (21.1°C) and 1 atm: 1.522
GAS DENSITY at 70°F (21.1°C) and 1 atm: 0.1444 lb/ft3 (1.833 kg/m3)
LIQUID DENSITY (saturated) at 70°F (21.1°C) and 1 atm: 47.6 lb/ft3 (762 kg/m3)
VAPOR PRESSURE at 70°F (21.1°C): 838 psig (5778 kPa)
SOLUBILITY IN WATER, vol/vol at 68°F (20°C) and 1 atm: 0.90
PERCENT VOLATILES BY VOLUME: 100
EVAPORATION RATE (Butyl Acetate = 1): High
pH: 3.7 (for carbonic acid)
SUBLIMATION POINT at 1 atm: -109.3°F (-78.5°C)
APPEARANCE, ODOR, AND STATE: Colorless, odorless, slightly acid gas. It is felt by some to
have a slight, pungent odor and biting taste.

Page 4 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

10. Stability and Reactivity

STABILITY: Unstable Stable
INCOMPATIBILITY (materials to avoid): Alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, metal acetylides,
chromium, titanium above 1022°F (550°C), uranium above 1382°F (750°C), magnesium above 1427°F
(775°C)
HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION PRODUCTS: Electrical discharges and high temperatures
decompose carbon dioxide into carbon monoxide and oxygen.
HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION: May Occur Will Not Occur
CONDITIONS TO AVOID: None known.

11. Toxicological Information

The welding process may generate hazardous fumes and gases. (See sections 10 and 16.)
Carbon dioxide is an asphyxiant. It initially stimulates respiration and then causes respiratory depression.
High concentrations result in narcosis. Symptoms in humans are as follows:

EFFECT: CONCENTRATION:

Breathing rate increases slightly. 1%

Breathing rate increases to 50% above normal level. Prolonged 2%

exposure can cause headache, tiredness.

Breathing increases to twice normal rate and becomes labored. Weak 3%

narcotic effect. Impaired hearing, headache, increased blood pressure
and pulse rate.

Breathing increases to approximately four times normal rate, symptoms 4 - 5%

of intoxication become evident, and slight choking may be felt.

Characteristic sharp odor noticeable. Very labored breathing, 5 - 10%

headache, visual impairment, and ringing in the ears. Judgment may be
impaired, followed within minutes by loss of consciousness.

Unconsciousness occurs more rapidly above 10% level. Prolonged 50 - 100%

exposure to high concentrations may eventually result in death from
asphyxiation.

12. Ecological Information

No adverse ecological effects expected. Carbon dioxide does not contain any Class I or Class II ozone-
depleting chemicals. Carbon dioxide is not listed as a marine pollutant by DOT.

13. Disposal Considerations

WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD: Do not attempt to dispose of residual or unused quantities. Return
cylinder to supplier.

Page 5 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

14. Transport Information

DOT/IMO SHIPPING NAME: Carbon dioxide

HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PRODUCT
CLASS: 2.2 NUMBER: UN 1013 RQ: Not applicable
SHIPPING LABEL(s): NONFLAMMABLE GAS
PLACARD (when required): NONFLAMMABLE GAS
SPECIAL SHIPPING INFORMATION: Cylinders should be transported in a secure position, in a
well-ventilated vehicle. Cylinders transported in an enclosed, nonventilated compartment of a vehicle can
present serious safety hazards.
Shipment of compressed gas cylinders that have been filled without the owner's consent is a violation of
federal law [49 CFR 173.301(b)].

15. Regulatory Information

The following selected regulatory requirements may apply to this product. Not all such requirements are
identified. Users of this product are solely responsible for compliance with all applicable federal, state,
and local regulations.
U.S. FEDERAL REGULATIONS:
EPA (ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY)
CERCLA: COMPREHENSIVE ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSE, COMPENSATION, AND
LIABILITY ACT OF 1980 (40 CFR Parts 117 and 302):
Reportable Quantity (RQ): None
SARA: SUPERFUND AMENDMENT AND REAUTHORIZATION ACT:
SECTIONS 302/304: Require emergency planning based on Threshold Planning Quantity
(TPQ) and release reporting based on Reportable Quantities (RQ) of extremely hazardous
substances (40 CFR Part 355):
Threshold Planning Quantity (TPQ): None
Extremely Hazardous Substances (40 CFR 355): None
SECTIONS 311/312: Require submission of MSDSs and reporting of chemical inventories
with identification of EPA hazard categories. The hazard categories for this product are as
follows:
IMMEDIATE: Yes PRESSURE: Yes
DELAYED: No REACTIVITY: No
FIRE: No
SECTION 313: Requires submission of annual reports of release of toxic chemicals that
appear in 40 CFR Part 372.
Carbon dioxide does not require reporting under Section 313.
40 CFR 68: RISK MANAGEMENT PROGRAM FOR CHEMICAL ACCIDENTAL
RELEASE PREVENTION: Requires development and implementation of risk management
programs at facilities that manufacture, use, store, or otherwise handle regulated substances in
quantities that exceed specified thresholds.
Carbon dioxide is not listed as a regulated substance.

Page 6 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

TSCA: TOXIC SUBSTANCES CONTROL ACT: Carbon dioxide is listed on the TSCA
inventory.
OSHA: OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION:
29 CFR 1910.119: PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT OF HIGHLY HAZARDOUS
CHEMICALS: Requires facilities to develop a process safety management program based on
Threshold Quantities (TQ) of highly hazardous chemicals.
Carbon dioxide is not listed in Appendix A as a highly hazardous chemical.
STATE REGULATIONS:
CALIFORNIA: Carbon dioxide is not listed by California under the SAFE DRINKING WATER
AND TOXIC ENFORCEMENT ACT OF 1986 (Proposition 65). ).
WARNING: The combustion of this gas produces carbon monoxide— a chemical known to the
State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.
(California Health and Safety Code §25249.5 et seq.)
PENNSYLVANIA: Carbon dioxide is subject to the PENNSYLVANIA WORKER AND
COMMUNITY RIGHT-TO-KNOW ACT (35 P.S. Sections 7301-7320).

16. Other Information

Be sure to read and understand all labels and instructions supplied with all containers of this product.
ADDITIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH HAZARDS: Using carbon dioxide or mixtures containing
carbon dioxide in welding and cutting may create additional hazards:
FUMES AND GASES can be dangerous to your health and may cause serious lung disease.
• Keep your head out of fumes. Do not breathe fumes and gases. Use enough ventilation, local
exhaust, or both to keep fumes and gases from your breathing zone and the general area.
Short-term overexposure to fumes may cause dizziness, nausea, and dryness or irritation of
the nose, throat, and eyes or may cause other similar discomfort.
Fumes and gases cannot be classified simply. The amount and type depend on the metal being worked
and the process, procedure, equipment, and supplies used. Possible dangerous materials may be found
in fluxes, electrodes, and other materials. Get an MSDS for every material you use.
Contaminants in the air may add to the hazard of fumes and gases. One such contaminant, chlorinated
hydrocarbon vapors from cleaning and degreasing activities, poses a special risk.
• Do not use electric arcs in the presence of chlorinated hydrocarbon vapors— highly toxic
phosgene may be produced.
Metal coatings such as paint, plating, or galvanizing may generate harmful fumes when heated.
Residues from cleaning materials may also be harmful.
• Avoid arc operations on parts with phosphate residues (anti-rust, cleaning preparations)—
highly toxic phosphine may be produced.
To find the quantity and content of fumes and gases, you can take air samples. By analyzing these
samples, you can find out what respiratory protection you need. One recommended sampling method
is to take air from inside the worker’s helmet or from the worker’s breathing zone. See AWS F1.1,
Methods for Sampling and Analyzing Gases for Welding and Allied Processes, available from the
American Welding Society, 550 N.W. Le Jeune Rd., Miami, FL 33126.
Read and understand the manufacturer's instructions and the precautionary labels on the products
used in welding and cutting. Ask your welding products supplier for a copy of Praxair’s free safety
booklet, P-2035, Precautions and Safe Practices for Gas Welding, Cutting, and Heating, and for

Page 7 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

other manufacturers' safety publications. For a detailed treatment, get ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding,
Cutting, and Allied Processes, published by the American Welding Society, or see OSHA’s Web site
at http://www.osha-slc.gov/SLTC/weldingcuttingbrazing/.

NOTES TO PHYSICIAN:
Acute: Gases, fumes, and dusts may cause irritation to the eyes, lungs, nose, and throat. Some
toxic gases associated with welding and related processes may cause pulmonary edema,
asphyxiation, and death. Acute overexposure may include signs and symptoms such as watery
eyes, nose and throat irritation, headache, dizziness, difficulty breathing, frequent coughing, or
chest pains.
Chronic: Protracted inhalation of air contaminants may lead to their accumulation in the lungs,
a condition that may be seen as dense areas on chest x-rays. The severity of change is
proportional to the length of exposure. The changes seen are not necessarily associated with
symptoms or signs of reduced lung function or disease. In addition, the changes on x-rays may be
caused by non-work-related factors such as smoking, etc.
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT FOR WELDING OPERATIONS:
PROTECTIVE GLOVES: Wear welding gloves.
EYE PROTECTION: Wear a helmet or use a face shield with a filter lens. Select lens per
ANSI Z49.1. Provide protective screens and flash goggles if needed to protect others; select per
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.133.
OTHER PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Wear hand, head, and body protection. (See ANSI Z49.1.)
Worn as needed, these help prevent injury from radiation, sparks, and electrical shock. Minimum
protection includes welder’s gloves and a face shield. For added protection consider arm protectors,
aprons, hats, shoulder protection, and dark, substantial clothing.
OTHER HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS OF HANDLING, STORAGE, AND USE: High-pressure
liquid and gas. Use piping and equipment adequately designed to withstand pressures to be encountered.
Gas can cause rapid suffocation due to oxygen deficiency. Store and use with adequate ventilation.
Carbon dioxide is heavier than air. It tends to accumulate near the floor of an enclosed space, displacing
air and pushing it upward. This creates an oxygen-deficient atmosphere near the floor. Ventilate space
before entry. Verify sufficient oxygen concentration. Close cylinder valve after each use; keep closed
even when empty. Prevent reverse flow. Reverse flow into cylinder may cause rupture. Use a check valve
or other protective device in any line or piping from the cylinder. Do not strike an arc on the cylinder.
The defect produced by an arc burn could lead to cylinder rupture. Do not ground the cylinder or allow it
to become part of an electrical circuit. Never work on a pressurized system. If there is a leak, close the
cylinder valve. Blow the system down in a safe and environmentally sound manner in compliance with all
federal, state and local laws; then repair the leak. Never place a compressed gas cylinder where it may
become part of an electrical circuit. When using compressed gases in and around electric welding
applications, never ground the cylinders. Grounding exposes the cylinders to damage by the electric
welding arc.
MIXTURES: When you mix two or more gases or liquefied gases, you can create additional,
unexpected hazards. Obtain and evaluate the safety information for each component before you produce
the mixture. Consult an industrial hygienist or other trained person when you evaluate the end product.
Remember, gases and liquids have properties that can cause serious injury or death.

Page 8 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

HAZARD RATING SYSTEMS:

NFPA RATINGS: HMIS RATINGS:

HEALTH =1 HEALTH =0
FLAMMABILITY =0 FLAMMABILITY = 0
REACTIVITY =0 REACTIVITY =0
SPECIAL = SA (CGA recommends this to designate Simple Asphyxiant.)

STANDARD VALVE CONNECTIONS FOR U.S. AND CANADA:

THREADED: CGA-320
PIN-INDEXED YOKE: CGA-940 (medical use)
ULTRA-HIGH-INTEGRITY CONNECTION: CGA-716
Use the proper CGA connections. DO NOT USE ADAPTERS. Additional limited-standard
connections may apply. See CGA pamphlet V-1 listed below.
Ask your supplier about free Praxair safety literature as referred to in this MSDS and on the label for this
product. Further information about this product can be found in the following pamphlets published by the
Compressed Gas Association, Inc. (CGA), 1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202-4102,
Telephone (703) 412-0900.
AV-1 Safe Handling and Storage of Compressed Gases
G-6 Carbon Dioxide
G-6.1 Standard for Low Pressure Carbon Dioxide Systems at Customer Sites
G-6.2 Commodity Specification for Carbon Dioxide
P-1 Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in Containers
P-14 Accident Prevention in Oxygen-Rich, Oxygen-Deficient Atmospheres
SB-2 Oxygen-Deficient Atmospheres
V-1 Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Inlet and Outlet Connections
— Handbook of Compressed Gases, Third Edition
Praxair asks users of this product to study this MSDS and become aware of product hazards and safety
information. To promote safe use of this product, a user should (1) notify employees, agents, and
contractors of the information in this MSDS and of any other known product hazards and safety
information, (2) furnish this information to each purchaser of the product, and (3) ask each purchaser to
notify its employees and customers of the product hazards and safety information.

Page 9 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

 Product: Carbon Dioxide P-4574-H Date: May 1999

The opinions expressed herein are those of qualified experts within Praxair, Inc. We
believe that the information contained herein is current as of the date of this Material
Safety Data Sheet. Since the use of this information and the conditions of use of the
product are not within the control of Praxair, Inc., it is the user’s obligation to
determine the conditions of safe use of the product.

Praxair MSDSs are furnished on sale or delivery by Praxair or the independent distributors and suppliers
who package and sell our products. To obtain current Praxair MSDSs for these products, contact your
Praxair sales representative or local distributor or supplier. If you have questions regarding Praxair
MSDSs, would like the form number and date of the latest MSDS, or would like the names of the Praxair
suppliers in your area, phone or write the Praxair Call Center (Phone: 1-800-PRAXAIR; Address:
Praxair Call Center, Praxair, Inc., PO Box 44, Tonawanda, NY 14150-7891).
PRAXAIR and the FLOWING AIRSTREAM design are trademarks or registered trademarks of Praxair
Technology, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

Praxair, Inc.
39 Old Ridgebury Road
Danbury, CT 06810-5113

Printed in USA Page 10 of 10

Homepage Previous Document

 Associated Fire Protection
Chemetron Fire Systems(tm)

High Pressure CO2 Hydraulic Flow Calculation Program

Results
Chemetron HPCO2 Flow Calculation Software10.1.0.0

Project Name: MobilePac (Standard) Date: 11/10/2009 11:46:14 AM

Location: Various Project Number: XXXX-132-M000J
Hazard Name: Generator - Initial Revision:

System Information
Amount of CO2 per Cylinder (lbs): 100.0 Storage Pressure (PSIG): 750.
Quantity of Cylinders: 3 Initial Pipe Temperature(F): 70.
Total lbs of CO2: 300.0
Excluded Pipe Size 1: 1/4 Excluded Pipe Size 2: 3/8

Hazard Information
Hazard: Generator - Initial Hazard Type: TF Surface
Concentration Required: 34 Temperature (F): 70.
Nozzle(s): 301 6 Wide Angle
302 6 Wide Angle
Dimensions (ft): 20.0 X 11.5 X 10.0

Hazard: Generator – Extended Hazard Type: TF Surface

Concentration Required: 34 Temperature (F): 70.
Nozzle(s): 303 Radial 2-Port 90
Dimensions (ft): 1.0 X 1.0 X 1.0

Piping Model Results

Section Pipe Size Length Elev EQL Section Nozzle Orifice
Start End (in) sch (ft) (ft) (ft) Flow PSIG Flow Code
1 2 * 1/2 T40 0.0 6.0 30.0 133.9 709 0.0 0.00
2 3 * 3/4 T40 5.0 0.0 5.0 401.6 696 0.0 0.00
3 4 * 3/4 T40 1.0 1.0 1.0 401.6 693 0.0 0.00
4 5 * 3/4 T40 16.0 5.0 31.5 379.1 580 0.0 0.00
5 6 * 3/4 T40 6.0 -2.0 8.2 379.1 544 0.0 0.00
6 301 * 3/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 5.5 191.2 538 191.2 11.00
6 7 * 3/4 T40 9.0 0.0 10.4 188.0 533 0.0 0.00
7 302 * 3/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 1.0 188.0 532 188.0 11.00
4 8 * 1/2 T40 1.0 0.0 2.0 22.5 692 0.0 0.00
8 9 * 1/2 T40 1.0 1.0 6.0 22.5 692 0.0 0.00
9 10 * 1/2 T40 15.0 11.0 20.0 22.5 688 0.0 0.00
10 303 * 1/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 1.0 22.5 688 22.5 3.02

Average Discharge Times and Weight

Discharged 300 lbs including 60 lbs of residual vapor.
Maximum Vapor Time is 9.0 seconds at Nozzle 303.
CO2 Weight (lbs) Time (sec)
Vapor 6.0 2.0
Liquid 234.0 35.0
Total 240 37

Hazard and Nozzle Rate Information

Vapor Vapor Flow Rate Liquid Liquid Residual
Nozzle Hazard Name Time(sec) Pounds lbs/min Time(sec) Pounds Pounds
301 Generator Enclosure 1.2 1.7 191.2 35.8 113.9 28.6
302 Generator Enclosure 1.9 2.7 188.0 35.1 109.7 28.1
Totals Generator Enclosure 4.4 379.1 223.6 56.6

Required: 34% in 1 Min: 132.2 lbs.

Actual: 1 Minute: 284.6 lbs.
303 Gen Extended Discharge 9.0 1.5 22.5 28.0 10.5 3.4
Totals Gen Extended Discharge 1.5 22.5 10.5 3.4

Required: 34% in 1 Min: 0.1 lbs.

Actual: 1 Minute: 15.4 lbs.

Nozzle Information
Nozzle Calc Nozzle Actual Orifice Area Stock
ID Code Description Code (sq.in.) Number
301 11.0 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 11.0 0.0928 1-037-1328
302 11.0 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 11.0 0.0928 1-037-1328
303 3.02 RADIAL(2-PORT 90)(1/4 NPT) 3.02 0.007 1-037-1300

Nozzle Summary
Item Nozzle Stock
No. Qty Description Code Number
1 1 RADIAL(2-PORT 90)(1/4 NPT) 3.02 1-037-1300
2 2 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 11.0 1-037-1328

Error Messages
Fixed Pipe and Nozzle Result.
High Pressure CO2 Calculation Complete - Time : 11/10/2009 11:45:52 AM
Calculation Performed with Version 10.1.0.0 Dated January 1, 2009
CO2 requirements conform to NFPA-12 Requirements.
Calculation is based on the use of A106/A53 piping.
Calculation by Associated Fire Protection
JAMES BLASZAK
2316 South 24th Street
Omaha Nebraska 68108 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Telephone: 402-733-2800 Fax: 402-344-7469

OUTPUT PRINTED TO FILE AT 11:46:14 AM ON 11/10/2009 END OF DATA OUTPUT

Homepage Previous Document

 Associated Fire Protection
Chemetron Fire Systems(tm)

High Pressure CO2 Hydraulic Flow Calculation Program

Results
Chemetron HPCO2 Flow Calculation Software10.1.0.0

Project Name: MobilePac (Standard) Date: 11/10/2009 2:03:02 PM

Location: Various Project Number: XXXX-132-M000J
Hazard Name: Generator - Extended Revision:

System Information
Amount of CO2 per Cylinder (lbs): 100.0 Storage Pressure (PSIG): 750.
Quantity of Cylinders: 5 Initial Pipe Temperature(F): 70.
Total lbs of CO2: 500.0
Excluded Pipe Size 1: 1/4 Excluded Pipe Size 2: 3/8

Hazard Information
Hazard: Generator - Extended Hazard Type: TF Surface
Concentration Required: 34 Temperature (F): 70.
Nozzle(s): 303 Radial 2-Port 90
Dimensions (ft): 1.0 X 1.0 X 1.0

Piping Model Results

Section Pipe Size Length Elev EQL Section Nozzle Orifice
Start End (in) sch (ft) (ft) (ft) Flow PSIG Flow Code
1 2 * 1/2 T40 0.0 6.0 30.0 6.0 747 0.0 0.00
2 8 * 1/2 T40 8.0 0.0 11.3 30.1 746 0.0 0.00
8 9 * 1/2 T40 1.0 1.0 1.0 30.1 746 0.0 0.00
9 10 * 1/2 T40 15.0 11.0 20.0 30.1 739 0.0 0.00
10 303 * 1/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 1.0 30.1 739 30.1 3.02

Average Discharge Times and Weight

Discharged 500 lbs including 100 lbs of residual vapor.
Maximum Vapor Time is 9.2 seconds at Nozzle 303.
CO2 Weight(lbs) Time(sec)
Vapor 2.1 7.7
Liquid 397.9 793.8
Total 400 801

Hazard and Nozzle Rate Information

Vapor Vapor Flow Rate Liquid Liquid Residual
Nozzle Hazard Name Time(sec) Pounds lbs/min Time(sec) Pounds Pounds
303 Gen Extended Discharge 9.2 2.1 30.1 793.8 397.9 100.0
Totals Gen Extended Discharge 2.1 30.1 397.9 100.0

Required: 34% in 1 Min: 0.1 lbs.

Actual: 1 Minute: 27.6 lbs.

Nozzle Information
Nozzle Calc Nozzle Actual Orifice Area Stock
ID Code Description Code (sq.in.) Number
303 3.02 RADIAL (2-PORT 90)(1/4 NPT) 3.02 0.007 1-037-1300

Nozzle Summary
Item Nozzle Stock
No. Qty Description Code Number
1 1 RADIAL (2-PORT 90)(1/4 NPT) 3.02 1-037-1300

Error Messages
Fixed Pipe and Nozzle Result.
High Pressure CO2 Calculation Complete - Time : 11/10/2009 2:02:41 PM
Calculation Performed with Version 10.1.0.0 Dated January 1, 2009
CO2 requirements conform to NFPA-12 Requirements.
Calculation is based on the use of A106/A53 piping.
File Saved Successfully
Calculation by Associated Fire Protection
JAMES BLASZAK
2316 South 24th Street
Omaha Nebraska 68108 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Telephone: 402-733-2800 Fax: 402-344-7469

OUTPUT PRINTED TO FILE AT 2:03:02 PM ON 11/10/2009 END OF DATA OUTPUT

Homepage Previous Document

 Associated Fire Protection
Chemetron Fire Systems(tm)

High Pressure CO2 Hydraulic Flow Calculation Program

Results
Chemetron HPCO2 Flow Calculation Software10.1.0.0

Project Name: MobilePac (Standard) Date: 11/10/2009 12:55:43 PM

Location: Various Project Number: XXXX-132-M000J
Hazard Name: Gas Turbine - Initial Revision:

System Information
Amount of CO2 per Cylinder (lbs): 100.0 Storage Pressure (PSIG): 750.
Quantity of Cylinders: 3 Initial Pipe Temperature(F): 70.
Total lbs of CO2: 300.0
Excluded Pipe Size 1: 1/4 Excluded Pipe Size 2: 3/8

Hazard Information
Hazard: Gas Turbine - Initial Hazard Type: TF Surface
Concentration Required: 34 Temperature (F): 70.
Nozzle(s): 301 6 Wide Angle
302 6 Wide Angle
303 6 Wide Angle
304 6 Wide Angle
Dimensions (ft): 42.42 X 11.5 X 10.0

Hazard: Gas Turbine – Extended Hazard Type: TF Surface

Concentration Required: 34 Temperature (F): 70.
Nozzle(s): 305 Radial 2-Port 90
Dimensions (ft): 1.0 X 1.0 X 1.0

Piping Model Results

Section Pipe Size Length Elev EQL Section Nozzle Orifice
Start End (in) sch (ft) (ft) (ft) Flow PSIG Flow Code
1 2 * 1/2 T40 0.0 6.0 30.0 160.3 692 0.0 0.00
2 3 * 3/4 T40 5.0 0.0 5.0 481.0 669 0.0 0.00
3 4 * 3/4 T40 1.0 1.0 1.0 481.0 663 0.0 0.00
4 5 * 3/4 T40 5.0 5.0 20.5 460.7 532 0.0 0.00
5 6 * 3/4 T40 5.0 0.0 5.0 460.7 493 0.0 0.00
6 304 * 3/4 T40 15.0 0.0 26.1 98.3 485 98.3 8.50
6 7 * 3/4 T40 6.0 -2.0 14.0 362.4 409 0.0 0.00
7 301 * 3/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 5.5 130.9 404 130.9 11.00
7 8 * 3/4 T40 9.0 0.0 10.4 231.5 376 0.0 0.00
8 302 * 3/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 5.5 118.2 371 118.2 11.00
8 9 * 3/4 T40 15.0 -1.0 20.8 113.3 359 0.0 0.00
9 303 * 3/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 1.0 113.3 358 113.3 11.00
4 10 * 1/2 T40 1.0 0.0 2.0 20.3 663 0.0 0.00
10 11 * 1/2 T40 8.0 0.0 13.0 20.3 662 0.0 0.00
11 12 * 1/2 T40 1.0 1.0 1.0 20.3 662 0.0 0.00
12 13 * 1/2 T40 4.0 4.0 9.0 20.3 661 0.0 0.00
13 14 * 1/2 T40 9.0 0.0 9.0 20.3 660 0.0 0.00
14 15 * 1/2 T40 15.0 -2.0 20.0 20.3 660 0.0 0.00
15 305 * 1/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 1.0 20.3 660 20.3 3.02

Average Discharge Times and Weight

Discharged 300 lbs including 60 lbs of residual vapor.
Maximum Vapor Time is 21.5 seconds at Nozzle 305.
CO2 Weight (lbs) Time (sec)
Vapor 10.6 2.9
Liquid 229.4 28.7
Total 240 32

Hazard and Nozzle Rate Information

Vapor Vapor Flow Rate Liquid Liquid Residual
Nozzle Hazard Name Time(sec) Pounds lbs/min Time(sec) Pounds Pounds
301 Gas Turbine Enclosure 0.9 0.9 130.9 30.7 66.8 16.3
302 Gas Turbine Enclosure 1.5 1.3 118.2 30.1 59.2 14.7
303 Gas Turbine Enclosure 3.5 3.0 113.3 28.1 53.0 14.1
304 Gas Turbine Enclosure 2.8 2.1 98.3 28.8 47.1 12.3
________________________________________________________________________________
Totals Gas Turbine Enclosure 7.3 460.7 226.0 57.5

Required: 34% in 1 Min: 244.0 lbs.

Actual: 1 Minute: 290.7 lbs.
305 Gas Extended Discharge 21.5 3.3 20.3 10.1 3.4 2.5
Totals Gas Extended Discharge 3.3 20.3 3.4 2.5

Required: 34% in 1 Min: 0.1 lbs.

Actual: 1 Minute: 9.3 lbs.

Nozzle Information
Nozzle Calc Nozzle Actual Orifice Area Stock
ID Code Description Code (sq.in.) Number
304 8.5 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 8.5 0.0554 1-037-1328
301 11.0 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 11.0 0.0928 1-037-1328
302 11.0 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 11.0 0.0928 1-037-1328
303 11.0 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 11.0 0.0928 1-037-1328
305 3.02 RADIAL (2-PORT 90)(1/4 NPT) 3.02 0.007 1-037-1300

Nozzle Summary
Item Nozzle Stock
No. Qty Description Code Number
1 1 RADIAL (2-PORT 90)(1/4 NPT) 3.02 1-037-1300
2 1 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 8.5 1-037-1328
3 3 6 WIDE ANGLE(3/4 NPT) 11.0 1-037-1328
Error Messages
Fixed Pipe and Nozzle Result.
High Pressure CO2 Calculation Complete - Time : 11/10/2009 12:54:55 PM
Calculation Performed with Version 10.1.0.0 Dated January 1, 2009
CO2 requirements conform to NFPA-12 Requirements.
Calculation is based on the use of A106/A53 piping.
File Saved Successfully
Calculation by Associated Fire Protection
JAMES BLASZAK
2316 South 24th Street
Omaha Nebraska 68108 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Telephone: 402-733-2800 Fax: 402-344-7469
OUTPUT PRINTED TO FILE AT 12:55:43 PM ON 11/10/2009 END OF DATA OUTPUT

Homepage Previous Document

 Associated Fire Protection
Chemetron Fire Systems(tm)

High Pressure CO2 Hydraulic Flow Calculation Program

Results
Chemetron HPCO2 Flow Calculation Software10.1.0.0

Project Name: MobilePac (Standard) Date: 11/10/2009 1:09:42 PM

Location: Various Project Number: XXXX-132-M000J
Hazard Name: Gas Turbine - Extended Revision:

System Information
Amount of CO2 per Cylinder (lbs): 100.0 Storage Pressure (PSIG): 750.
Quantity of Cylinders: 5 Initial Pipe Temperature(F): 90.
Total lbs of CO2: 500.0
Excluded Pipe Size 1: 1/4 Excluded Pipe Size 2: 3/8

Hazard Information
Hazard: Gas Turbine - Extended Hazard Type: TF Surface
Concentration Required: 37 Temperature (F): 90.
Nozzle(s): 304 Radial 1-Port
Dimensions (ft): 1.0 X 1.0 X 1.0

Piping Model Results

Section Pipe Size Length Elev EQL Section Nozzle Orifice
Start End (in) sch (ft) (ft) (ft) Flow PSIG Flow Code
1 2 * 1/2 T40 0.0 6.0 30.0 6.1 747 0.0 0.00
2 11 * 3/4 T40 8.0 0.0 8.0 30.5 747 0.0 0.00
11 12 * 3/4 T40 1.0 1.0 1.0 30.5 747 0.0 0.00
12 13 * 1/2 T40 5.0 5.0 10.0 30.5 743 0.0 0.00
13 14 * 1/2 T40 10.3 0.0 11.9 30.5 743 0.0 0.00
14 15 * 1/2 T40 21.3 -2.0 26.2 30.5 741 0.0 0.00
15 304 * 1/4 T40 1.0 -1.0 1.0 30.5 741 30.5 3.02

Average Discharge Times and Weight

Discharged 500 lbs including 100 lbs of residual vapor.
Maximum Vapor Time is 23.2 seconds at Nozzle 304.
CO2 Weight (lbs) Time (sec)
Vapor 5.4 19.4
Liquid 394.6 777.6
Total 400 797

Hazard and Nozzle Rate Information

Vapor Vapor Flow Rate Liquid Liquid Residual
Nozzle Hazard Name Time(sec) Pounds lbs/min Time(sec) Pounds Pounds
304 GT Extended Discharge 23.2 5.4 30.5 777.6 394.6 100.0
Totals GT Extended Discharge 5.4 30.5 394.6 100.0

Required: 37% in 1 Min: 0.1 lbs.

Actual: 1 Minute: 24.1 lbs.

Nozzle Information
Nozzle Calc Nozzle Actual Orifice Area Stock
ID Code Description Code (sq.in.) Number
304 3.02 RADIAL(1-PORT)(1/4 NPT) 2.98 0.0068 1-037-1300

Nozzle Summary
Item Nozzle Stock
No. Qty Description Code Number
1 1 RADIAL(1-PORT)(1/4 NPT) 2.98 1-037-1300

Error Messages
Fixed Pipe and Nozzle Result.
High Pressure CO2 Calculation Complete - Time : 11/10/2009 1:09:31 PM
Calculation Performed with Version 10.1.0.0 Dated January 1, 2009
CO2 requirements conform to NFPA-12 Requirements.
Calculation is based on the use of A106/A53 piping.
Calculation by Associated Fire Protection
JAMES BLASZAK
2316 South 24th Street
Omaha Nebraska 68108 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Telephone: 402-733-2800 Fax: 402-344-7469

OUTPUT PRINTED TO FILE AT 1:09:42 PM ON 11/10/2009 END OF DATA OUTPUT

Homepage Previous Document

Homepage Previous Document
 PROLINE-SY Modular Enclosure

PROLINE-SY Modular Enclosure

This enclosure is designed to protect many
industrial operator interface systems, including
panel- or rack-mounted control systems,
operator interface packages, and a variety of
other electronic control components.
• The top compartment is open and can
accommodate a variety of front cover and
door options
• Internal grid straps are factory installed in
top compartment to provide support for
operator interfaces
• Two doors, one on the lower front and one
on the back of the enclosure, provide
convenient access and additional protection
• The bottom door is hinged on the left
and has an attractive keylocking flush
swing handle
• The solid rear door permits rear access to
equipment and wiring and includes a
keylocking pushbutton handle
• Standard external components include solid
sides, solid top, and a 100mm solid base Front View Side View
Order cover, door, or window door for
top front to complete the enclosure. Solid
covers with prefabricated operator interface
cutouts are available. Consult Hoffman for
ordering information.
Standard Sizes PROLINE-SY Modular Enclosures
Catalog Number
Steel Stainless B
PSY1666 PSY1666SS 608 (23.94)
PSY1686 808 (31.81)
Inch dimensions in ( ).

NOTE:: Top and bottom door opening size:

29.09 x 21.11 (738.9 x 536.1) on 600mm wide
29.09 x 28.98 (738.9 x 736.1) on 800mm wide

1.114 Data subject to change without notice ☎ 763 422 2211 FAX 763 422 2600 ©2003 Hoffman Enclosures Inc.

Homepage Previous Document

 Bulletin

P20

■ Standard Configuration
■
▲ Optional Components
NOTE:
PFSY ____ frames have two front openings
1

Modular Enclosure Systems

Frame All optional components may be ordered for top and bottom modular components.
■ Grid Straps (top compartment) separately. Components labeled
■ Solid Top may be included in an
■ Solid Base, 100mm configuration.
■ Solid Door, rear
■ Solid Sides
■ Solid Door, bottom front

■ Solid Top

Solid Side ■
■ Frame

PROLINE® Assembled Enclosures

■ Grid
Straps

■
Solid Door

▲ Solid Cover
page 1.24

■ Solid Side

Window Door ▲
▲ Solid Base, 0mm, page 1.48

Solid Cover ▲

Solid Door ■ ■ Solid Base, 100mm, page 1.48

Data subject to change without notice ☎ 763 422 2211 FAX 763 422 2600 ©2003 Hoffman Enclosures Inc. 1.115
Homepage Previous Document
 PROLINE-SY Modular Enclosure

Covers for Upper and Lower Front

Catalog Number Fits SY
Solid 14 gauge steel construction. Steel cover is Steel Stainless Gauge W Frame
finished in RAL 7035 textured gray polyester PCS86 PCS86SS 16 591.8 600 wide
powder paint.. Seamless foam-in-place gasket (23.30)
assures watertight and dust-tight seal. Semi- PCS88 14 791.7 800 wide
flush cover screws attach cover to frame. A (31.17)
ground stud is provided.Tamper-resistant † PCSK__ 14 591.8 600 wide
screws are available. (23.30)
Inch dimensions in ( ).
† See table below.

Covers with OI Cutouts

Catalog a Approx. Weight (lb)
Covers are 600mm wide and are 14 gauge Number Manufacturer Pre-Cut for Manufacturer’s Model of OI Device
steel finished in RAL 7035 textured gray PCSK19 Allen-Bradley T60 71
polyester powder paint.. Prepunched cutout for PCSK4 Allen-Bradley T70 (1784-T35; 1784-T30A, C) 27
specific OI devices. Seamless foam-in-place PCSK5 Allen-Bradley PanelView 1200e / 1200 TouchScreen 33
gasket. Semi-flush cover screws. A ground stud
PCSK6 Allen-Bradley PanelView 1200e / 1200 / 1400e Keypad 46
is provided. Optional tamper-resistant screws
are available. PCSK26 Allen-Bradley PanelView 1400e TouchScreen 45
PCSK30 Cutler-Hammer IDT PanelMate 4200 (monitor & keyboard) 55
Note: Hoffman can provide pre-configured
PCSK25 Cutler-Hammer IDT PanelMate 4000 TouchScreen 52
covers with cutouts to meet your specific
requirements. Contact your local Hoffman PCSK27 Cutler-Hammer IDT PanelMate 4000 TouchPanel 55
Sales Representative for more information. PCSK22 Cutler-Hammer IDT PanelMate Compact
PCSK30 Modicon PanelMate Plus 4200 (monitor & keyboard) 55
PCSK27 Modicon PanelMate Plus 4000 55
PCSK25 Modicon PanelMate Plus 4000 TouchScreen 52
PCSK22 Modicon PanelMate Compact 22
PCSK11 Nematron IWS-10x3, -15x3, 20x3, 25x3 22
PCSK12 Nematron IWS-1634, -2634, 45x4, -6515; Toolbox; MON4504 22
PCSK13 TCP SmartScreen (color) 22
PCSK16 Xycom 2000 22
PCSK4 Xycom 2050/60; 9450; 9475; 9485; 9486; 9403 22
a See PCSK__ (Covers for Upper and Lower Front) for dimensions.

Doors for Upper and Lower Front

Catalog Number Fits SY
Doors are constructed of 16 or 14 gauge steel Steel Stainless Gauge W Frame
with foam-in-place gasket. Solid steel doors are
PDS86 PDS86SS 16 591 600 wide
finished in RAL 7035 textured gray polyester (23.27)
powder paint. Hidden hinges provide 140-
PDS88 14 790.9 800 wide
degree swing from either left or right side (31.14)
(180-degree hinge is available). Doors have a
small flush bezel with slotted insert. Other Inch dimensions in ( ).
inserts and a flush swing handle also are
available.These doors accommodate the same
accessories listed for PDS76R on page 1.23.

Doors with Windows for Upper and

Lower Front Catalog Number Window Size Fits SY
Steel Stainless Ga. W MxN Frame
Window doors are aluminum finished with RAL Glass Window
7035 textured gray polyester powder paint. PDWG86 PDWG86SS 16 592.9 645.2 x 445.7 600 wide
Foam-in-place gaskets are provided for door (23.34) (25.40 x 17.55)
and window seals.Window is .25-inch thick and PDWG88 14 792.9 645.2 x 645.7 800 wide
is available in clear safety glass or gray-tint (31.22) (25.40 x 25.42)
polycarbonate. Doors are hinged on the left. Polycarbonate Window
Hidden hinges have retained hinge pins.
Window door has a 2-point latch system and a PDW86 16 592.9 645.2 x 445.7 600 wide
(23.34) (25.40 x 17.55)
small flush bezel with slotted insert. Other
inserts and a flush swing handle also are PDW88 14 792.9 645.2 x 645.7 800 wide
(31.22) (25.40 x 25.42)
available.
Inch dimensions in ( ).

1.116 Data subject to change without notice ☎ 763 422 2211 FAX 763 422 2600 ©2003 Hoffman Enclosures Inc.

Homepage Previous Document

 Bulletin

P20

Component Summary Standard Assembled PROLINE-SY Modular Enclosures (Steel and Stainless Steel)
1

Modular Enclosure Systems

Catalog Number Frames Solid Top Solid Door (Rear) Solid Door (Bottom)
Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless
PSY1666 PSY1666SS PFSY1666 PT66 PT66SS PDS166 PDS166SS PDS86 PDS86SS
PSY1686 PFSY1686 PT86 PDS168 PDS88

Catalog Number Solid Sides a Solid Base (100mm) Flush Pushbutton Small Flush
Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Handle (keylock) Swing Handle
PSY1666 PSY1666SS PSS166 PSS166SS PB166 PB166SS PFHKBL PSHKBL
PSY1686 PSS166 PB186 PFHKBL PSHKBL

PROLINE® Assembled Enclosures

Catalog Number Grid Straps a
PSY1666 PGH3S7 & PGH3S6
PSY1686 PGH3S9 & PGH3S6
a Quantity two.

Door and Cover Front Options PROLINE-SY(Steel and Stainless Steel)

Frame Catalog Number Window Doors Solid Doors Covers Solid Covers with
Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless OI Cutouts b
Top Front PFSY1666 PSY1666SS PDWG86 PDWG86SS PDS86 PDS86SS PCS86 PCS86SS PCSK4
PCSK5
PCSK6
PCSK11
PCSK12
PCSK13
PCSK16
PCSK19
PCSK22
PCSK25
PCSK26
PCSK27
PCSK30
PFSY1686 PDWG88 PDS88 PSC88
Bottom Front PFSY1666 PFSY166SS PDWG86 PDWG86SS PDS86 PDS86SS PCS86 PCS86SS
PFSY1686 PDWG88 PDS88 PCS88
b Fits 600mm wide frames only.

Data subject to change without notice ☎ 763 422 2211 FAX 763 422 2600 ©2003 Hoffman Enclosures Inc. 1.117
Homepage Previous Document
 Catalog 4400 US Hydraulic Hose
301LT, 451TC, 451ST, 451TC

Hydraulic – Low Temperature

Hydraulic

SAE 100R2 TYPE AT

Application: Petroleum base
Hose

hydraulic fluids and lubricating

Part Working Minimum oil.
A Number Hose I.D.
inch mm
Hose O.D.
inch mm
Pressure
psi MPa
Bend Radius
inch mm
Weight
lbs/ft kg/m
Parkrimp
43 Series
Inner Tube: Synthetic Rubber.
Reinforcement: Two braids
301LT-4 1/4 6,3 0.59 15 5000 35,0 4 100 0.26 0,39 • steel wire.
301LT-6 3/8 10 0.75 19 4000 28,0 5 130 0.37 0,55 • Cover: PKR Rubber.
301LT-8 1/2 12,5 0.88 22 3500 24,5 7 180 0.45 0,67 • Temperature Range: -67°F to
301LT-10 5/8 16 1.00 25 2750 19,2 8 200 0.52 0,77 • +212°F (-55°C to +100°C).
301LT-12 3/4 19 1.16 29 2250 15,7 9-1/2 240 0.67 1,00 • Fittings: 43 Series - pg. B-27.
301LT-16 1 25 1.50 38 2000 14,0 12 300 1.00 1,49 •
Fittings

451TC
B Hydraulic –
SAE 100R17 / ISO 11237 - 1 TYPE R17 - Constant Working Pressure

451ST
Hydraulic –
SAE 100R17 / ISO 11237 - 1 TYPE R17 - Constant Working Pressure
Equipment

Application: Petroleum base

hydraulic fluids and lubricating
oils.
Part Working Minimum
Number Hose I.D. Hose O.D. Pressure Bend Radius Weight Parkrimp Inner Tube: Synthetic rubber.
inch mm inch mm psi MPa inch mm lbs/ft kg/m 43 Series Reinforcement: One or two
C 451TC/ST-4 1/4 6,3 0.52 13 3000 21,0 2 50 0.16 0,24 • braid steel wire (4-spiral for
size -20).
451TC/ST-6 3/8 10 0.68 17 3000 21,0 2-1/2 65 0.23 0,34 • Cover: Synthetic rubber
451TC/ST-8 1/2 12,5 0.80 20 3000 21,0 3-1/2 90 0.35 0,52 • abrasion resistant, MSHA
451TC/ST-10 5/8 16 0.94 24 3000 21,0 4 100 0.44 0,66 • accepted.
451TC/ST-12 3/4 19 1.10 28 3000 21,0 4-3/4 120 0.58 0,86 • Temperature Range: -40°F to
+212°F (-40°C to +100°C).
451TC/ST-16 1 25 1.40 35 3000 21,0 6 150 0.79 1,17 •
Fittings: 43 Series - pg. B-27.
•
Accessories

451TC/ST-20 1-1/4 31,5 1.85 47 3000 21,0 8-1/4 210 1.50 2,23

D
451TC
Hydraulic –
SAE 100R17 / ISO 11237 - 1 TYPE R17 - Constant Working Pressure

Application: Petroleum base

hydraulic fluids and lubricating
oils.
Technical

Part Working Minimum

Number Hose I.D. Hose O.D. Pressure Bend Radius Weight Parkrimp Inner Tube: Synthetic rubber.
inch mm inch mm psi MPa inch mm lbs/ftt kg/m 43 Series Reinforcement: One braid steel
451TC-6-6 3/8 10 0.68 17 3000 21,0 2-1/2 65 0.46 0,68 • wire

E 451TC-8-8 1-2 12,5 0.80 20 3000 21,0 3-1/2 90 0.70 1,04 • Cover: Synthetic rubber abra-
For assembly instructions see page C-18. sion resistant, MSHA accepted.
Temperature Range: -40°F to
• See Section C for Parkrimp Assembly Instructions. +212°F (-40°C to +100°C).
• Temperature Range of other media listed in Section E.
Fittings: 43 Series - pg. B-27.

A-12 Hose Products Division

3DUNHU+DQQL¿Q&RUSRUDWLRQ
:LFNOLIIH2KLR
ZZZSDUNHUKRVHFRP
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document
Homepage Previous Document